N:N Network

Parallel Link
Computer Link
Inverter Communication
Non-Protocol Communication
Programming Communication
Remote Maintenance

FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

USER'S MANUAL
Data Communication Edition
RS-232C Interface
FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3G-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP

FX1N-232-BD
FX0N-232ADP
FX-232ADP
FX2N-232IF

RS-485 Interface
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX2N-485-BD

FX2NC-485ADP
FX1N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP
FX-485ADP

RS-485/232C Converter
FX-485PC-IF
RS-422 Interface
FX3U-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
USB Interface
FX3U-USB-BD
Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX2N-422-BD
FX1N-422-BD

Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and understand
this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and safely.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories:

and

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by

may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it
to the end user.

1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
3) Note that the output current of the service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model and the
absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the
PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to
ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.

Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the
control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
Noise may cause malfunctions.
Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the built-in programming port, power connectors, I/O
connectors, communication connectors, or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.

(1)

Safety Precautions
(Read these precautions before use.)

2. WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation
after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due
to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure that
the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.

Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual
and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time.
(i.e. from a programming tool and a GOT)
Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program.

Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.

Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices, expansion boards, special
adapters, and expansion memory cassette.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

(2)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

FX Series Programmable Controllers

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

Manual number

JY997D16901

Manual revision

Date

9/2013

Foreword
This manual explains the "serial communication" provided for MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Outline Precautions
This manual provides information for the use of the FX Series Programmable Controllers. The manual has
been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or persons is
as follows:
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety aspects regarding to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or maintenance engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to
the local and national standards required to fulfill the job. These engineers should also be trained in
the use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being familiar with all associated
manuals and documentation for the product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with
established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance with established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation that is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note:

The term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device that contains or uses the
product associated with this manual

This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions into the system.
When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standards and codes of regulation to
which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product with the system,
machines, and apparatuses to be used.
If there is doubt at any stage during installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained in the local and national standards. If there is doubt about the
operation or use, please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Since the examples within this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as reference; please use it
after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will not accept
responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
The content, specification etc. of this manual may be changed for improvement without notice.
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
notice any doubtful point, error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative.

Registration
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
MODBUS is the registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PC-9800 is the registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
LONWORKS is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.).
Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company.
Short Mail are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, INC.
The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)

A.Common Items
1. Introduction

A-1

1.1 Communication Types .................................................................................................................A-1

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types...........................................................................A-3
1.2.1 CC-Link Network ..........................................................................................................................A-3
1.2.2 Ethernet communication...............................................................................................................A-6
1.2.3 N:N Network .................................................................................................................................A-7
1.2.4 Parallel Link ..................................................................................................................................A-8
1.2.5 Computer Link ..............................................................................................................................A-9
1.2.6 Inverter Communication .............................................................................................................A-10
1.2.7 Non-protocol Communication .....................................................................................................A-11
1.2.8 MODBUS Communication..........................................................................................................A-12
1.2.9 Programming Communication ....................................................................................................A-13
1.2.10 Remote Maintenance ...............................................................................................................A-16
1.2.11 CC-Link/LT Network .................................................................................................................A-17
1.2.12 AS-i system ..............................................................................................................................A-18
1.2.13 Internet Mail Sending................................................................................................................A-19
1.2.14 Short Mail Sending ...................................................................................................................A-20

2. Communication Types and Communication Equipment

A-21

2.1 Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types...................................................A-21

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map ............................................................................A-22
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8

FX3U and FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs........................................................................................A-22

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs .........................................................................................................A-24
FX3G and FX3GC PLCs..............................................................................................................A-26
FX3S PLC ...................................................................................................................................A-28
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs ..............................................................................................................A-30
FX1S, FX1N, and FX1NC PLCs...................................................................................................A-32
FX0N PLCs .................................................................................................................................A-34
FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs (reference)..............................................................A-34

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram) ....................................................A-36

2.3.1 How to look at combination pages..............................................................................................A-36
2.3.2 For FX3U Series .........................................................................................................................A-37
2.3.3 For FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series..................................................................................................A-39
2.3.4 For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) ............................................................................................................A-41
2.3.5 For FX3G Series .........................................................................................................................A-43
2.3.6 For FX3GC Series.......................................................................................................................A-46
2.3.7 For FX3S Series .........................................................................................................................A-48
2.3.8 For FX2N Series .........................................................................................................................A-49
2.3.9 For FX2NC Series .......................................................................................................................A-51
2.3.10 For FX1N Series .......................................................................................................................A-53
2.3.11 For FX1NC Series .....................................................................................................................A-55
2.3.12 For FX1S Series .......................................................................................................................A-57
2.3.13 For FX0N Series .......................................................................................................................A-58
2.3.14 For FX2(FX) and FX2C Series (reference) ...............................................................................A-60

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

3. Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

A-61

3.1 Setting Method ...........................................................................................................................A-61

3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................A-63
3.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................A-63
3.2.2 Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type.............................A-64

3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ......................................................A-65

3.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................A-65
3.3.2 Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type.............................A-67

3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ..............................................................A-68

3.4.1 Extension of Port (For FX3G, FX3GC PLC) ................................................................................A-68
3.4.2 Extension of Port (For FX3U, FX3UC PLC).................................................................................A-70
3.4.3 Limitation when ch1 and ch2 are used at the same time ...........................................................A-71

4. Version Number

A-72

4.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method .............................................................................A-72

4.1.1 Checking the nameplate.............................................................................................................A-72
4.1.2 Checking the front of the product ...............................................................................................A-73

4.2 Version check.............................................................................................................................A-73

5. Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

A-74

5.1 Rank and Use Method of This Manual.......................................................................................A-74

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals ................................................................................................A-75
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4

Manual for communication types in FX PLCs.............................................................................A-75

Manuals related to FX PLCs.......................................................................................................A-75
Communication equipment (option)............................................................................................A-78
Related options for communication ............................................................................................A-80

6. Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

A-81

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

B. N:N Network
1. Outline

B-3

1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................B-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................B-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................B-5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4

Applicable versions.......................................................................................................................B-5
Version check ...............................................................................................................................B-5
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................B-5
Products whose production was stopped .....................................................................................B-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................B-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................B-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ..........................................................B-8

2. Specifications

B-9

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) .................................................................................B-9

2.2 Link Specifications .....................................................................................................................B-10
2.2.1 Link patterns and number of link points in each FX Series ........................................................B-10
2.2.2 Link time .....................................................................................................................................B-11

3. System Configuration and Equipment Selection

B-12

3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................B-12

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................B-13

4. Wiring

B-18

4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................B-18

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................B-19
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

Twisted pair cable.......................................................................................................................B-19

10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................B-19
Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................B-20
Connecting terminal resistors .....................................................................................................B-22

4.3 Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................B-23

4.4 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................B-25

5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

B-26

5.1 Check Procedure .......................................................................................................................B-26

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................B-27
5.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................B-27

5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ..............................................B-28

5.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................B-28

6. Test Run (Communication Test)

B-29

6.1 Test Procedure...........................................................................................................................B-29

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing ...................................................................B-31
6.2.1 Creating a program for the master station..................................................................................B-31
6.2.2 Creating a program for each slave station..................................................................................B-32

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

7. Creating Programs
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

B-33

Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................B-33

Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0) ...............................................................B-35
Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")...............................................................B-38
Cautions on Program Creation...................................................................................................B-40

8. Practical Program Examples

B-41

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2) .................................................................................................B-41

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6

System configuration example ...................................................................................................B-41

Contents of operations and corresponding program numbers ...................................................B-41
Setting contents..........................................................................................................................B-42
Setting program for master station .............................................................................................B-42
Setting program for slave station (No. 1)....................................................................................B-44
Setting program for slave station (No. 2)....................................................................................B-46

9. Troubleshooting
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

B-48

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .....................................................................................B-48

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ......................................................B-48
Checking Installation and Wiring................................................................................................B-48
Checking Sequence Program ....................................................................................................B-48
Checking Setting Contents and Errors.......................................................................................B-50
Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors ...............................................................B-50
9.6.1 Check while data transfer sequence is being executed .............................................................B-50
9.6.2 Checking data transfer sequence errors ....................................................................................B-51
9.6.3 Checking error codes .................................................................................................................B-51

10. Related Data

B-54

10.1 Related Device List ..................................................................................................................B-54

10.1.1 For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs....................B-54
10.1.2 For FX0N and FX1S PLCs ........................................................................................................B-58

10.2 Details of Related Devices .......................................................................................................B-60

10.2.1 Parameter setting [M8038] .......................................................................................................B-60
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8179]...........................................................................................................B-60
10.2.3 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]......................................................................B-60
10.2.4 Data transfer sequence error [M8138 to M8190] [M504 to M511]............................................B-61
10.2.5 Data transfer sequence ON [M8191] [M503]............................................................................B-61
10.2.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]..............................................................B-61
10.2.7 Corresponding station number settings status [D8173]............................................................B-62
10.2.8 Slave station quantity setting status [D8174]............................................................................B-62
10.2.9 Refresh range setting status [D8175] .......................................................................................B-62
10.2.10 Station number settings [D8176] ............................................................................................B-62
10.2.11 Slave station quantity setting [D8177] ....................................................................................B-63
10.2.12 Refresh range setting [D8178]................................................................................................B-63
10.2.13 Number of retries [D8179] ......................................................................................................B-64
10.2.14 Monitoring time setting [D8180]..............................................................................................B-64
10.2.15 Present link scan time [D8201] [D201] ...................................................................................B-64
10.2.16 Maximum link scan time [D8202] [D202] ................................................................................B-65
10.2.17 Data transfer sequence error count [D8203 to D8210] [D203 to D210] .................................B-65
10.2.18 Data transfer error code [D8211 to D8218] [D211 to D218] ...................................................B-66
10.2.19 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .........................................................................B-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

C. Parallel Link
1. Outline

C-3

1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ C-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... C-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. C-5
1.3.1 Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... C-5
1.3.2 Version check .............................................................................................................................. C-5
1.3.3 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... C-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... C-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ C-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... C-8

2. Specifications

C-9

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ C-9

2.2 Link Specifications .................................................................................................................... C-10
2.2.1 PLC communication type applicability status ............................................................................ C-10
2.2.2 Link time .................................................................................................................................... C-10

2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points ............................................................................ C-11

2.3.1 For FX0N, FX1S and FX3S Series ............................................................................................. C-11
2.3.2 For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series.... C-12

3. System Configuration and Selection

C-13

3.1 System Configuration................................................................................................................ C-13

3.1.1 Rule for connection.................................................................................................................... C-13

3.2 Configuration of Each Group..................................................................................................... C-14

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. C-18

4. Wiring

C-24

4.1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... C-24

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ................................................................................. C-25
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5

Twisted pair cable...................................................................................................................... C-25

10BASE-T cable ........................................................................................................................ C-25
Connecting cables ..................................................................................................................... C-26
Optical fiber cable...................................................................................................................... C-27
Connecting terminal resistors .................................................................................................... C-28

4.3 Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................. C-29

4.3.1 For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs .................................................................... C-29
4.3.2 For FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC PLCs .................................................................... C-30
4.3.3 For FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs .................................................................................................... C-31

4.4 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. C-31

5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

C-32

5.1 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................................... C-32

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. C-33
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. C-33

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)............................................... C-34

5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. C-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

6. Test Run (Communication Test)

C-35

6.1 Test Procedure.......................................................................................................................... C-35

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test....................................................................... C-36
6.2.1 For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series....... C-36
6.2.2 For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series ................................................................................................ C-37

7. Creating Programs

C-38

7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode ....................................................................................................... C-38

7.1.1 Checking contents of related devices........................................................................................ C-38
7.1.2 Creating programs for master station ........................................................................................ C-40
7.1.3 Creating programs for slave station........................................................................................... C-41

7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode................................................................................................. C-42

7.2.1 Checking contents of related devices........................................................................................ C-42
7.2.2 Creating programs for master station ........................................................................................ C-44
7.2.3 Creating programs for slave station........................................................................................... C-45

7.3 Cautions on Program Creation.................................................................................................. C-46

8. Practical Program Examples

C-47

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode).................................................................... C-47

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4

System configuration example .................................................................................................. C-47

Setting contents......................................................................................................................... C-47
Program for master station ........................................................................................................ C-48
Program for slave station........................................................................................................... C-48

9. Troubleshooting
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

C-49

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .................................................................................... C-49

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... C-49
Checking Installation and Wiring............................................................................................... C-49
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... C-49
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................... C-51

10. Related Data

C-52

10.1 Related Device List ................................................................................................................. C-52

10.2 Details of Related Devices ...................................................................................................... C-53
10.2.1 Parallel link master station declare [M8070]............................................................................ C-53
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8178].......................................................................................................... C-53
10.2.3 Parallel link slave station declare [M8071] .............................................................................. C-53
10.2.4 High-speed parallel link mode [M8162] ................................................................................... C-53
10.2.5 Parallel link ON [M8072].......................................................................................................... C-54
10.2.6 Parallel link setting error [M8073] ............................................................................................ C-54
10.2.7 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]..................................................................... C-54
10.2.8 Error judgement time setting [D8070]...................................................................................... C-54
10.2.9 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................. C-55
10.2.10 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] ........................................................................ C-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

D. Computer Link
1. Outline

D-3

1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ D-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... D-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. D-5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4

Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... D-5

Version check .............................................................................................................................. D-5
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number ........................................................................ D-5
Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... D-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... D-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ D-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... D-8

2. Specifications

D-9

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ D-9

2.2 Link Specifications .................................................................................................................... D-10
2.2.1 Applicable commands and number of device points ................................................................. D-10
2.2.2 Applicable device ranges........................................................................................................... D-11
2.2.3 Link time .................................................................................................................................... D-13

3. System Configuration and Equipment Selection

D-14

3.1 System Configuration................................................................................................................ D-14

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. D-15
3.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C ..................................................................... D-15
3.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485. ....................................................................... D-21

4. Wiring

D-27

4.1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... D-28

4.2 Selecting Connection Method ................................................................................................... D-29
4.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C (1-to-1 connection) ...................................... D-29
4.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422) (1-to-N connection)......................... D-29

4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485).................................................................. D-30

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4

Twisted pair cable...................................................................................................................... D-30

10BASE-T cable ........................................................................................................................ D-30
Connecting cables ..................................................................................................................... D-31
Connecting terminal resistors .................................................................................................... D-33

4.4 Connection Diagram for RS-232C ............................................................................................ D-34

4.4.1 Connection diagram between FX PLC and personal computer ................................................ D-34
4.4.2 Connection diagram between FX-485PC-IF and personal computer........................................ D-34

4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422........................................................................... D-35

4.5.1 One-pair wiring .......................................................................................................................... D-35
4.5.2 Two-pair wiring .......................................................................................................................... D-37
4.5.3 Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ) ........................................................... D-39

4.6 Grounding ................................................................................................................................ D-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

5. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

D-40

5.1 Communication Setting Methods .............................................................................................. D-40

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. D-41
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. D-41

5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ............................................. D-43

5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. D-43

6. Control Procedures and Setting Methods

D-45

6.1 Data Flow by Link...................................................................................................................... D-45

6.2 Important Points in Computer Link............................................................................................ D-46
6.2.1 Operations of PLC caused by data transfer .............................................................................. D-46

6.3 How to Understand Control Procedure ..................................................................................... D-47

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol........................................................................................ D-47
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4

Control procedure format 1........................................................................................................ D-48

Control procedure format 4........................................................................................................ D-49
Contents of set items in each control procedure (protocol) ....................................................... D-50
Time-out time setting ................................................................................................................. D-53

6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time....................................................... D-54

6.5.1 When computer reads data from PLC ....................................................................................... D-54
6.5.2 When computer writes data to PLC........................................................................................... D-54
6.5.3 Transfer time in transfer sequence............................................................................................ D-55

6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area ............................................................................................... D-56

6.6.1 When bit device memory is read or written ............................................................................... D-56
6.6.2 When word device memory is read or written ........................................................................... D-57

7. Commands

D-58

7.1 BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]............................................................... D-59

7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units] ......................................................... D-60
7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units] .......................................................... D-62
7.4 BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units] .............................................................. D-64
7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]......................................................... D-65
7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units] ......................................................... D-67
7.7 BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)] ............................. D-69
7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]........................ D-70
7.9 QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)] ........................ D-72
7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode] ............................................... D-73
7.10.1 Contents of remote control to set RUN or STOP mode........................................................... D-73
7.10.2 Condition validating remote control to set RUN or STOP mode.............................................. D-73
7.10.3 Remote control specification method and specification examples .......................................... D-74

7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]............................................................................... D-75

7.11.1 PLC model name (CPU) and read contents ............................................................................ D-75
7.11.2 Control procedure specification method and specification example........................................ D-75

7.12 GW Command [Offers Global Function] ................................................................................. D-77

7.12.1 Contents of control .................................................................................................................. D-77
7.12.2 Global function control procedure specification method and specification example ............... D-77

7.13 On-demand Function .............................................................................................................. D-78

7.13.1 Special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in on-demand function..................... D-78
7.13.2 Control procedures in on-demand function ............................................................................. D-80
7.13.3 On-demand function specification method and specification examples .................................. D-82

7.14 TT Command [Loop-back Test] .............................................................................................. D-85

10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

8. Troubleshooting
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

D-86

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .................................................................................... D-86

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... D-86
Checking Installation and Wiring............................................................................................... D-86
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... D-86
Checking Error Codes............................................................................................................... D-88
8.5.1 Error codes when NAK is sent................................................................................................... D-88
8.5.2 Error codes in PLC .................................................................................................................... D-89

9. Related Data

D-90

9.1 Related Device List ................................................................................................................... D-90

9.2 Details of Related Devices ........................................................................................................ D-92
9.2.1 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]....................................................................... D-92
9.2.2 Communication setting keep [M8120] ....................................................................................... D-92
9.2.3 Global function ON [M8126 and M8426] ................................................................................... D-92
9.2.4 On-demand send processing [M8127 and M8427] ................................................................... D-92
9.2.5 On-demand error flag [M8128 and M8428] ............................................................................... D-93
9.2.6 On-demand data word/byte changeover [M8129 and M8429] .................................................. D-93
9.2.7 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................... D-93
9.2.8 Communication format setting [D8120 and D8420]................................................................... D-94
9.2.9 Station number settings [D8121 and D8421]............................................................................. D-95
9.2.10 On-demand data head device number specification [D8127 and D8427] ............................... D-96
9.2.11 On-demand data quantity specification [D8128 and D8428] ................................................... D-96
9.2.12 Time-out time setting [D8129 and D8429]............................................................................... D-97
9.2.13 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .......................................................................... D-97

9.3 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program...................................................... D-98

9.3.1 Setting procedure ...................................................................................................................... D-98
9.3.2 Caution on communication setting using sequence program.................................................... D-98

9.4 ASCII Code Table ..................................................................................................................... D-99

11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

E. Inverter Communication
1. Outline

E-3

1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................E-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................E-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................E-5
1.3.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................E-5
1.3.2 Version check ...............................................................................................................................E-5
1.3.3 How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................E-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................E-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................E-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ..........................................................E-7

2. Specifications

E-8

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) .................................................................................E-8

2.2 Connectable Mitsubishi General-purpose Inverters .....................................................................E-8
2.3 Link Specifications .......................................................................................................................E-9
2.3.1 When monitoring inverter operations (PLC inverter)................................................................E-9
2.3.2 When controlling inverter operations (PLC inverter) ................................................................E-9
2.3.3 Parameters (PLC inverter).......................................................................................................E-9

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions ..........................................................E-10

2.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................E-10
2.4.2 Calculation method.....................................................................................................................E-12
2.4.3 Calculation example ...................................................................................................................E-14

3. System Configuration and Selection

E-16

3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................E-16

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................E-18

4. Wiring

E-23

4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................E-24

4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices ................................................................................E-25
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700 and E700 Series (PU connector) ..................................E-25
A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR) ..................................................................................E-26
F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal).......................................................................E-27
E700 Series (FR-E7TR) .............................................................................................................E-28

4.3 Connection Cables.....................................................................................................................E-29

4.3.1 10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................E-29
4.3.2 Twisted pair cable (recommended) ............................................................................................E-29
4.3.3 Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................E-30

4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8

Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor) .............................................................E-31

Connecting Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................................E-32
Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding).............................................................................E-33
Connector in Inverter..................................................................................................................E-34
Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................E-36
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6

For S500, E500, A500, F500 , V500 and D700 Series (PU connector) .....................................E-36
For A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR) ...........................................................................E-38
For E700 Series (PU connector) ................................................................................................E-39
For E700 Series (FR-E7TR) .......................................................................................................E-43
For F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal) ................................................................E-46
Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ) ............................................................E-47

4.9 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................E-47

12

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

5. Communication Setting in Inverter

E-48

5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters ......................................................................E-48

5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)........................................................................E-50
5.2.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-50
5.2.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-51

5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)...............................................................................E-53

5.3.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-53
5.3.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-54

5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)..............................................................E-56

5.4.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-56
5.4.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-57

5.5 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)...........................................................E-59

5.5.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-59
5.5.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-59

5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected) .....................................................E-60

5.6.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-60
5.6.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-62

5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)........................................E-64
5.7.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-64
5.7.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-65

5.8 Cautions on Setting....................................................................................................................E-66

6. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

E-67

6.1 Parameter Assigning Method.....................................................................................................E-67

6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................E-68
6.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................E-68

6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)................................................E-70

6.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................E-70

7. Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

E-72

7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................E-72

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions ............................................................E-73
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4

Inverter communication types (EXTR K10 to K13).....................................................................E-73

Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-73
Instruction completion and error flag operation ..........................................................................E-75
Cautions on programming ..........................................................................................................E-77

7.3 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10].....................................E-78

7.3.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-78
7.3.2 Inverter instruction codes ...........................................................................................................E-78

7.4 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]..........................................E-79

7.4.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-79
7.4.2 Inverter instruction codes ...........................................................................................................E-79

7.5 Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12] .......................................E-80

7.5.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-80
7.5.2 Inverter parameter number.........................................................................................................E-80
7.5.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" .....................................................E-80

7.6 Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13] .........................................E-81

7.6.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-81
7.6.2 Inverter parameter number.........................................................................................................E-81
7.6.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" .....................................................E-81

7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes ....................................................................................E-82

7.7.1 S500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-82
7.7.2 E500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-82
7.7.3 A500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-83

13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

8. Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

E-84

8.1 Practical Example 1 ...................................................................................................................E-84

8.1.1 System configuration example ...................................................................................................E-84
8.1.2 Contents of operation .................................................................................................................E-84
8.1.3 Program example .......................................................................................................................E-85

8.2 Practical Example 2 ...................................................................................................................E-88

8.2.1 System configuration example ...................................................................................................E-88
8.2.2 Contents of operation .................................................................................................................E-88
8.2.3 Program example .......................................................................................................................E-89

9. Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

E-93

9.1 Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC .............................. E-93
9.2 Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................................E-94
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions ............................................................E-95
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4

Inverter communication types (IVCK to IVMC)...........................................................................E-95

Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-95
Instruction completion and error flag operation ..........................................................................E-97
Cautions on programming ..........................................................................................................E-99

9.4 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]...........................E-101

9.4.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-101
9.4.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-101

9.5 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]................................E-102

9.5.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-102
9.5.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-102

9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]...............................................E-103

9.6.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-103
9.6.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-103
9.6.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" ...................................................E-103

9.7 Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR] ................................................E-105

9.7.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-105
9.7.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-105
9.7.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" ...................................................E-105

9.8 Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR] ...................................E-106

9.8.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-106

9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single

Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC] ............................................................................E-107
9.9.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-107
9.9.2 Applicable inverters ..................................................................................................................E-108
9.9.3 Applicable programming tool ....................................................................................................E-108

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes ................................................................................E-109

9.10.1
9.10.2
9.10.3
9.10.4
9.10.5
9.10.6
9.10.7
9.10.8

14

S500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-109

E500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-109
A500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-110
F500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-111
V500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-111
F700 Series ............................................................................................................................E-111
A700 Series ............................................................................................................................E-112
E700 and D700 Series ...........................................................................................................E-113

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

10. Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

E-114

10.1 Practical Example 1 ...............................................................................................................E-114

10.1.1 System configuration example ...............................................................................................E-114
10.1.2 Contents of operation .............................................................................................................E-114
10.1.3 Program example ...................................................................................................................E-115

10.2 Practical Example 2 ...............................................................................................................E-120

10.2.1 System configuration example ...............................................................................................E-120
10.2.2 Contents of operation .............................................................................................................E-120
10.2.3 Program example ...................................................................................................................E-121

11. Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4

E-129

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series) .......................................E-129

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................E-129
Checking Installation ..............................................................................................................E-129
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................E-129

11.4.1 Checking inverter operation status .........................................................................................E-130

11.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................E-131

11.6 Error Codes............................................................................................................................E-131

12. Related Data

E-134

12.1 Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC) .......................................................................................E-134

12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)............................................................................E-135
12.2.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029] .................................................................................E-135
12.2.2 Extension ROM cassette check [M8104]................................................................................E-135
12.2.3 Communication port busy [M8155].........................................................................................E-135
12.2.4 Communication error or parameter error [M8156]..................................................................E-135
12.2.5 Communication error latch [M8157] .......................................................................................E-136
12.2.6 Extension ROM cassette type code [D8104]..........................................................................E-136
12.2.7 Extension ROM cassette version [D8105]..............................................................................E-136
12.2.8 Inverter response waiting time [D8154] ..................................................................................E-136
12.2.9 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8155] ..............................................E-136
12.2.10 Error code [D8156] ...............................................................................................................E-137
12.2.11 Error occurrence step number latch [D8157]........................................................................E-138

12.3 Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ....................................................E-139
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) .........................................E-140
12.4.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029] .................................................................................E-140
12.4.2 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]....................................................................E-140
12.4.3 Inverter communication ON [M8151 and M8156]...................................................................E-140
12.4.4 Inverter communication error [M8152, M8153, M8157 and M8158].......................................E-141
12.4.5 IVBWR instruction error [M8154 and M8159] (only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs) ....................E-141
12.4.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................E-141
12.4.7 Inverter response waiting time [D8150 and D8155] ...............................................................E-141
12.4.8 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8151 and D8156] ...........................E-142
12.4.9 Inverter communication error code [D8152 and D8157].........................................................E-142
12.4.10 Inverter communication error occurrence step [D8153 and D8158].....................................E-145
12.4.11 IVBWR instruction error parameter number [D8154 and D8159]
(only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs) .............................................................................................E-145
12.4.12 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .......................................................................E-145

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List ........................................................................................E-146

12.5.1 Parameters in V500, F500, A500, E500, and S500 Series ....................................................E-146
12.5.2 Parameters in F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series ...............................................................E-168
12.5.3 Communication parameters ...................................................................................................E-185

15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

F.Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Outline

F-3

1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................F-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................F-7
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................F-8
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4

Applicable versions.......................................................................................................................F-8
Version check ...............................................................................................................................F-8
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................F-8
Products whose production was stopped .....................................................................................F-8

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................F-9

1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................F-9
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ........................................................F-11

2. Specifications

F-12

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ...............................................................................F-12

2.2 Data Communication Specifications ..........................................................................................F-13
2.2.1 Communication type applicability in PLC ...................................................................................F-13

2.3 Number of Transfer Data ...........................................................................................................F-14

3. System Configuration and Selection

F-15

3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................F-15

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................F-16
3.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C ......................................................................F-16
3.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485. ........................................................................F-22

4. Wiring

F-27

4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................F-27

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................F-28
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5

When using ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLC .......................................................................................F-28

Twisted pair cable.......................................................................................................................F-28
10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................F-29
Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................F-30
Connecting terminal resistors .....................................................................................................F-32

4.3 Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................F-33

4.3.1 Connector pin arrangement in communication equipment operating in accordance
with RS-232C .............................................................................................................................F-33
4.3.2 Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-232C ............................................................F-33
4.3.3 Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-485 ...............................................................F-35

4.4 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................F-39

5. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

F-40

5.1 Communication Setting Method Mechanism..............................................................................F-40

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................F-41
5.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................F-41

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)................................................F-43

5.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................F-43

16

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

6. Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

F-45

6.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................F-45

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction .........................................................................................................F-46
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5

Applicable frames .......................................................................................................................F-46

Function and operation...............................................................................................................F-47
Send/receive data and amount of data.......................................................................................F-48
Operation when data is sent.......................................................................................................F-50
Operation when data is received ................................................................................................F-50

6.3 Operation of Control Line ...........................................................................................................F-52

6.3.1 FX2N (before Ver. 2.00), FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs .......................F-52
6.3.2 FX2N (Ver. 2.00 or later), FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs......................F-54

6.4 Important Points in Creating Programs ......................................................................................F-56

6.5 Communication Error .................................................................................................................F-56

7. Practical Program Example (RS Instruction)

F-57

7.1 Example of Printing Using RS Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)...................................F-57

8. Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

F-59

8.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................F-59

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction .......................................................................................................F-62
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6

Applicable frames .......................................................................................................................F-63

Function and operation...............................................................................................................F-65
Send/receive data and amount of data.......................................................................................F-66
Operation when data is sent.......................................................................................................F-68
Operation when data is received ................................................................................................F-68
Sum check code .........................................................................................................................F-71

8.3 Operation of Control Line ...........................................................................................................F-72

8.4 Important Points in Creating Programs ......................................................................................F-75
8.5 Communication Error .................................................................................................................F-75

9. Practical Program Example (RS2 Instruction)

F-76

9.1 Example of Printing Using RS2 Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection).................................F-76

10. When Combined with Another Communication

F-78

10.1 Other Communication Type Used Together ............................................................................F-78

10.2 When Combined with Programming Communication ..............................................................F-79
10.2.1 For FX2N and FX2NC PLCs......................................................................................................F-79
10.2.2 For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs ...................................................................F-80

10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6

When Combined with Computer Link Communication.............................................................F-81

When Combined with Programming Communication ..............................................................F-82
Using RS2 Instruction and Computer Link Communication Together......................................F-83
Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program.....................................................F-84

10.6.1 Communication setting for RS instruction ................................................................................F-84

10.6.2 Communication setting for RS2 instruction ..............................................................................F-86

17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

11. Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4

F-87

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability ...................................................................................F-87

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ....................................................F-87
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................F-87
Checking Sequence Program ..................................................................................................F-88

11.4.1 Checking communication port settings (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)......F-89

11.5 Checking the Absence/Presence of Errors ..............................................................................F-89

12. Related Data

F-90

12.1 Related Device List (RS Instruction) ........................................................................................F-90

12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction) ...............................................................................F-91
12.2.1 Serial communication error [M8063].........................................................................................F-91
12.2.2 Communication setting keep [M8120] ......................................................................................F-91
12.2.3 Sending wait flag [M8121] ........................................................................................................F-91
12.2.4 Sending request [M8122] .........................................................................................................F-91
12.2.5 Receiving complete flag [M8123] .............................................................................................F-92
12.2.6 Carrier detection flag [M8124] ..................................................................................................F-92
12.2.7 Time-out check flag [M8129] ....................................................................................................F-92
12.2.8 Serial communication error code [D8063] ................................................................................F-93
12.2.9 Communication format setting [D8120] ....................................................................................F-94
12.2.10 Remaining amount of data to be sent [D8122] .......................................................................F-94
12.2.11 Amount of data already received [D8123] ..............................................................................F-95
12.2.12 Header [D8124] ......................................................................................................................F-95
12.2.13 Terminator [D8125].................................................................................................................F-95
12.2.14 Time-out time setting time [D8129].........................................................................................F-95
12.2.15 Communication parameter display [D8405] ...........................................................................F-95
12.2.16 Operation mode display [D8419] ............................................................................................F-96

12.3 Related Devices (RS2 Instruction) ...........................................................................................F-96

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction) ...........................................................................F-97
12.4.1 Serial communication error [M8062, M8063 and M8438].........................................................F-97
12.4.2 Sending wait flag [M8371, M8401 and M8421] ........................................................................F-98
12.4.3 Sending request [M8372, M8402 and M8422] .........................................................................F-98
12.4.4 Receiving complete flag [M8373, M8403 and M8423] .............................................................F-98
12.4.5 Carrier detection flag [M8404 and M8424] ...............................................................................F-99
12.4.6 Data set ready (DSR) flag [M8405 and M8425] .......................................................................F-99
12.4.7 Time-out check flag [M8379, M8409 and M8429] ....................................................................F-99
12.4.8 Serial communication error code [D8062, D8063 and D8438] ...............................................F-100
12.4.9 Communication format setting [D8370, D8400 and D8420] ...................................................F-101
12.4.10 Amount of remaining send data [D8372, D8402 and D8422]...............................................F-102
12.4.11 Amount of data already received [D8373, D8403 and D8423] .............................................F-102
12.4.12 Communication parameter display [D8405 and D8425].......................................................F-102
12.4.13 Time-out time setting [D8379, D8409 and D8429] ...............................................................F-102
12.4.14 Header [D8380, D8381, D8410, D8411, D8430 and D8431] ...............................................F-103
12.4.15 Terminator [D8382, D8383, D8412, D8413, D8432 and D8433]..........................................F-103
12.4.16 Receiving sum (receive data) [D8384, D8414 and D8434] ..................................................F-104
12.4.17 Receiving sum (calculation result) [D8385, D8415 and D8435] ...........................................F-104
12.4.18 Sending sum [D8386, D8416 and D8436]............................................................................F-104
12.4.19 Operation mode display [D8389, D8419 and D8439]...........................................................F-105

12.5 ASCII Code Table ..................................................................................................................F-106

18

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

G.Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1. Outline

G-3

1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................................... G-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... G-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. G-5
1.3.1 Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... G-5
1.3.2 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... G-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... G-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ G-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... G-7

2. Specification

G-8

2.1 Communication Specifications .................................................................................................... G-8

3. System Configuration and Selection

G-9

3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. G-9

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................... G-9
3.3 Connection to PLC .................................................................................................................... G-10

4. Wiring

G-12

4.1 Pin Arrangement ....................................................................................................................... G-12

4.2 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications (without Control Line)........... G-12
4.3 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications
(with Control Line) ..................................................................................................................... G-13
4.3.1 Standard RS-232C mode .......................................................................................................... G-13
4.3.2 Interlink connection mode.......................................................................................................... G-13

4.4 Connection to External Equipment with Modem Specifications ................................................ G-13

19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

5. Creating Programs

G-14

5.1 Outline of Communication between FX PLC and 232IF ........................................................... G-14

5.1.1 For FROM and TO instructions ................................................................................................. G-14
5.1.2 For direct specification of buffer memory (U \G ) .................................................................. G-14

5.2 FROM and TO Instructions ....................................................................................................... G-15

5.2.1 FROM instruction....................................................................................................................... G-15
5.2.2 TO instruction ............................................................................................................................ G-16

5.3 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U \G )....................................................................... G-17

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)................................................................................................................ G-18
5.4.1 Buffer memory list...................................................................................................................... G-18
5.4.2 Communication format <BFM #0>............................................................................................. G-20
5.4.3 Command <BFM #1> ................................................................................................................ G-24
5.4.4 Maximum number of receivable bytes <BFM #2> ..................................................................... G-25
5.4.5 Receiving timeout time <BFM #3> ............................................................................................ G-25
5.4.6 Sending header <BFM #5 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #4 (lowest-order 2 bytes)>.......... G-25
5.4.7 Sending terminator <BFM #7 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #6 (lowest-order 2 bytes) ....... G-25
5.4.8 Receiving header <BFM #9 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #8 (lowest-order 2 bytes)> ....... G-25
5.4.9 Receiving terminator <BFM #11 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #10 (lowest-order 2 bytes)>... G-26
5.4.10 Receiving suspension waiting time <BFM #12>...................................................................... G-26
5.4.11 Amount of remaining send data <BFM #13>........................................................................... G-26
5.4.12 Amount of received data buffers <BFM #14>.......................................................................... G-26
5.4.13 Sending sum result <BFM #15> .............................................................................................. G-27
5.4.14 Receiving sum result <BFM #16> ........................................................................................... G-27
5.4.15 Time from CS ON to sending start <BFM #20>....................................................................... G-27
5.4.16 Time from actual sending completion to RS OFF <BFM #21>................................................ G-27
5.4.17 Status <BFM #28>................................................................................................................... G-28
5.4.18 Error code <BFM #29> ............................................................................................................ G-29
5.4.19 Model code <BFM #30> .......................................................................................................... G-29
5.4.20 Number of bytes to be sent <BFM #1000>.............................................................................. G-29
5.4.21 Send data buffer <BFM #1001 to 1256> ................................................................................. G-29
5.4.22 Number of received bytes <BFM #2000>................................................................................ G-29
5.4.23 Receive data buffer <BFM #2001 to 2256>............................................................................. G-29
5.4.24 Preliminary receive data buffer for interlink connection mode <BFM #2257 to 2271> ............ G-29

5.5 Operation of Control Line .......................................................................................................... G-30

5.5.1 When control line is not provided [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 0)].................................................... G-30
5.5.2 When control line is in standard RS-232C mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 1)] ............................ G-31
5.5.3 When control line is in RS-232C interlink mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (1, 1)].............................. G-32

6. Practical Program Examples

G-33

6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data........................................................ G-33

6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data............................................................................. G-37

7. Troubleshooting

G-41

7.1 Check Items .............................................................................................................................. G-41

7.2 Error Codes............................................................................................................................... G-41

20

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

H.Programming Communication
1. Outline

H-3

1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ H-3

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... H-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. H-5
1.3.1 Applicable PLC ............................................................................................................................ H-5
1.3.2 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... H-5

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... H-6

1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ H-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... H-8

2. System Configuration and Selection

H-9

2.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. H-9

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4

For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422 ........................................ H-9

For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C.................................... H-10
For communication equipment operating in accordance with USB ........................................... H-10
For Ethernet adapter ................................................................................................................. H-11

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. H-12

2.3 Caution on Selection ................................................................................................................. H-23
2.3.1 When using 422BD.................................................................................................................... H-23
2.3.2 When using 232BD or 232ADP ................................................................................................. H-24
2.3.3 Other cautions ........................................................................................................................... H-24

3. Selecting Connection Cables

H-25

3.1 Connection Procedure .............................................................................................................. H-25

3.2 Connector Shape in Each Product............................................................................................ H-26
3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables......................................................................................... H-27
3.3.1 Handy programming panel ........................................................................................................ H-27
3.3.2 Personal computer .................................................................................................................... H-28

4. Connection Cables and Interfaces

H-32

4.1 Simplified Tables....................................................................................................................... H-32

4.1.1 Cable connector shape correspondence table .......................................................................... H-32
4.1.2 Cable combination simplified table ............................................................................................ H-33

4.2 Cable Connection Diagrams ..................................................................................................... H-35

4.2.1 Personal computer connection cable - No. A ............................................................................ H-35
4.2.2 Connector conversion cable (commercial product) - No. B ....................................................... H-37
4.2.3 FX-10P/FX-20P/FX-30P connection cable - No. C.................................................................... H-37

5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

H-38

5.1 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................................... H-38

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. H-39
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. H-39

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)............................................... H-40

5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. H-40

21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

6. Connection Setting for Personal Computer

H-41

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2) .............................................................................................. H-41

6.1.1 Setting RS-232C or USB, communication port, and transmission speed.................................. H-42
6.1.2 Setting for using GOT transparent function ............................................................................... H-44
6.1.3 Setting communication time check and number of retries......................................................... H-45

6.2 Connection Setting (FXGP/WIN)............................................................................................... H-46

6.2.1 Setting communication port and transmission speed ................................................................ H-46

6.3 Communication Test (GX Works2) ........................................................................................... H-47

7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9

22

H-48

Checking PLC Version Applicability .......................................................................................... H-48

Checking Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................. H-48
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... H-48
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................. H-48
Checking Parameters in PLC.................................................................................................... H-48
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... H-48
Checking Programming Tool Setting ........................................................................................ H-50
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................... H-50
Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ................ H-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

I.Remote Maintenance
1. Outline

I-3

1.1 Outline of System.......................................................................................................................... I-3

1.1.1 Maintenance for programs in PLC................................................................................................. I-3
1.1.2 File transfer between personal computers (supported only by FXGP/WIN).................................. I-4

1.2 Procedures Before Operation ....................................................................................................... I-5

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................... I-6
1.3.1 Applicable versions........................................................................................................................ I-6
1.3.2 Version check ................................................................................................................................ I-6
1.3.3 Products whose production was stopped ...................................................................................... I-6

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability..................................................................................................... I-7

1.4.1 Programming tool for setting modem connected to PLC............................................................... I-7
1.4.2 Programming software for remote maintenance ......................................................................... I-11
1.4.3 Cautions on using FXGP/WIN ..................................................................................................... I-12

2. Specifications

I-13

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ I-13

3. System Configuration and Selection

I-14

3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. I-14

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment....................................................... I-15
3.3 Selecting Modem ........................................................................................................................ I-20
3.3.1 List of modems whose operations are confirmed ........................................................................ I-21

4. Wiring

I-23

4.1 Wiring Procedure ........................................................................................................................ I-23

4.2 Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................... I-24

5. How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

I-25

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2 ........................................................................................................... I-25

5.1.1 Setting communication by way of RS-232C port ......................................................................... I-25
5.1.2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method ................................................................. I-27
5.1.3 Setting AT command for unregistered modem............................................................................ I-29

5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................ I-33

5.2.1 Setting communication by way of RS-232C port ......................................................................... I-33
5.2.2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method ................................................................. I-34
5.2.3 Setting AT command for unregistered modem............................................................................ I-35

5.3 Cautions on Use.......................................................................................................................... I-37

6. How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

I-38

6.1 Setting Using GX Works2 ........................................................................................................... I-38

6.1.1 Registering AT command for connected modem ........................................................................ I-38
6.1.2 Creating telephone directory (if necessary)................................................................................. I-40

6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................ I-42

6.2.1 Registering AT command for connected modem ........................................................................ I-42
6.2.2 Registering line connection destination ....................................................................................... I-45

23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Table of Contents

7. Connecting Line

I-46

7.1 Preparing for Connection of PLC ................................................................................................ I-46

7.2 Line Connection Procedure......................................................................................................... I-47
7.2.1 For GX Works2............................................................................................................................ I-47
7.2.2 For FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................................ I-51

8. Troubleshooting
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6

I-54

Checking FX PLC Applicability.................................................................................................... I-54

Checking Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................... I-54
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ....................................................... I-54
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................... I-54
Checking Modem Specifications ................................................................................................. I-55
Checking Setting in PLC ............................................................................................................. I-55
8.6.1 Checking parameters in PLC....................................................................................................... I-55
8.6.2 Checking AT command setting.................................................................................................... I-56
8.6.3 Checking sequence program....................................................................................................... I-57

8.7 Checking Programming Tool Setting .......................................................................................... I-58

8.8 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ....................................................................................... I-58
8.9 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) .................. I-59

9. Related Information

I-60

9.1 ASCII Code Table ....................................................................................................................... I-60

Appendix A: Discontinued models

24

Apx.-1

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

1 Introduction
1.1 Communication Types

A
Common Items

1.

Introduction

1.1

Communication Types

C
Reference
subsection

Function

Application
N:N Network

Computer link

MODBUS
communication

Application
Function
Application
Function
Application

Data acquisition and centralized control.

Communicates with and controls Mitsubishi inverter FREQROL.
Operation monitoring, writing of control values, referencing and
changing parameters, etc.
Enables MODBUS communication with MODBUS-compatible
equipment in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.

Application

Function
Application

Receives and sends data from/to various pieces of equipment with an

RS-232C or RS-485 interface in non-protocol procedures.
Data reception and sending from/to a personal computer, bar code
reader, printer and other various measuring instruments.

Application

Application

1.2.7

Adds RS-232C, RS-422, USB and Ethernet ports in addition to the

provided RS-422 port in PLCs.
Simultaneously connection of two display units, programming tools, etc.

1.2.9

Connects with a PLC located in a remote location through a modem

and telephone line to enable program transfer and remote monitoring
access.
Maintenance of sequence programs in FX PLCs.

1.2.10

Apx.A

A-1

Discontinued
models

Function

Reference
subsection

Remote
Maintenance

Remote
maintenance

Function

1.2.2

Reference
subsection

Sequence program
Programming
communication

1.2.8

Programming
Communication

Connects the FX PLC to a high-order system such as personal

computer or workstation via Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
using TCP/IP or UDP/IP communication protocol.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method and information
transfer from/to the host network.

General-purpose serial communication

Non-protocol
communication

1.2.6

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Ethernet

1.2.5

Reference
subsection

Ethernet communication
Function

1.2.4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Inverter
communication

Function

1.2.3

Inverter
Communication

Parallel link

Function
Application
Function
Application

Line control in the decentralized or centralized method and information

transfer from/to the host network.
Easily enables data link between FX PLCs.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
Easily enables data link between FX PLCs.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
Connects a personal computer or another computer as the master
station, and connects FX PLCs as slave stations.
Protocols in a computer support computer link protocol formats 1 and 4.

1.2.1

Computer Link

CC-Link

Connects FX PLCs as remote device stations to the CC-Link system

whose master station is a MELSEC A/QnA PLC.
Connects FX PLCs as remote device stations and intelligent device
stations to the CC-Link system whose master station is a MELSEC
Q PLC.
Constructs a CC-Link system whose master station is an FX PLC.

Parallel Link

The table below shows the communication types supported by the FX Series.
Link

B
N:N Network

This manual explains the communication types supported by FX PLCs.

This chapter explains the serial communication (in accordance with RS-232C, RS-485/RS-422), various link
communication types, etc. and states the applicable FX PLCs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

1 Introduction
1.1 Communication Types

Reference
subsection

I/O link
CC-Link/LT
(built in
FX3UC-32MTLT(-2))
AS-i system

Function

Constructs a CC-Link/LT system whose master station is an FX PLC.

Application

Wire-conserving network inside control panel and unit.

Function
Application

MELSEC I/O link

Function
Application

Constructs an AS-i (Actuator Sensor Interface) system whose master

block is an FX PLC.
Wire-conserving network inside control panel and unit

1.2.12

Installs remote I/O units near I/O equipment in remote locations to

conserve wiring.
ON/OFF control of I/O equipment in a remote location.

Reference
subsection

Electronic mail sending

Function
Internet mail
Application
Short mail

A-2

Function
Application

1.2.11

Sends internet mail to personal computers and cellular phones using

the RS-232C communication in PLCs.
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, facilities located in remote locations
and facilities inside factories.
Sends short mails to cellular phones in the NTT DoCoMo network.
Notice of material shortage, error contents, operating time, etc.

1.2.13

1.2.14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

Outline and Features of Communication Types

Common Items

1.2

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

This section outlines the communication types supported by FX PLCs.

1.2.1

CC-Link Network

1. Outline

C
Parallel Link

1) When the master station is an A/QnA PLC

ACPU,
QnACPU

Master
station

Terminal resistor

Computer Link

Terminal resistor

FXCPU

Remote
device
station

Remote I/O
for CC-Link

Inverter,
AC servo, etc.

Sensor, solenoid valve,

etc.

E
Inverter
Communication

Number of connectable units : 64 maximum

Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937 0")

2) When the master station is a Q PLC

Master
station

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

QCPU

Terminal resistor

Terminal resistor
Intelligent
device
station

FXCPU

Remote
device
station

Remote I/O
for CC-Link

Inverter,
AC servo, etc.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FXCPU

N:N Network

For details, refer to the FX2N-16CCL-M USERS MANUAL.

For details, refer to the FX3U-16CCL-M USERS MANUAL.
For details, refer to the FX2N-32CCL USERS MANUAL.
For details, refer to the FX3U-64CCL USERS MANUAL.

Sensor, solenoid valve,

etc.

H
Programming
Communication

Number of connectable units : 64 maximum

Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

3) When the master station is an FX2N-16CCL-M

Master station
FX2N-16CCL-M

FXCPU

Terminal resistor

Remote
device
station

FXCPU

Terminal resistor
Sensor, solenoid valve,
etc.

Inverter,
AC servo, etc.

Remote I/O
for CC-Link

Number of connectable units : Remote I/O station

: Remote device station
Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")

7 maximum
8 maximum

4) When the master station is an FX3U-16CCL-M

Master station
FX3U-16CCL-M

FXCPU

Terminal resistor
Terminal resistor
Intelligent
device
station

FXCPU

FXCPU

Remote
device
station

Remote I/O
for CC-Link

Inverter,
AC servo, etc.

Sensor, solenoid valve,

etc.

Number of connectable units : Remote I/O station

: Remote device station + Intelligent device station* 1
Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")

*1.

8 maximum
8 maximum

Local stations can not be connected.

2. Applicable PLCs

:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
FX2(FX),
FX0N FX1S
FX2C

PLC

FX Series
master station
connectivity

FX2N16CCL-M

(Ver. 1.10
or later)

FX3U16CCL-M

FX Series
intelligent device
station connectivity

*3.

FX3U64CCL

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S

(Ver. 2.20
or later)

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

*2

(Ver. 2.20
or later)

*3

*3

(Ver. 2.20
or later)

FX3G and FX3GC PLCs Ver. 2.00 or later, or FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Ver. 3.10 or later support the
access function to other FX Series PLC main units connected to FX3U-64CCL.
The table below shows versions of GX Works2 and GX Developer that support the access function to
other FX Series PLC main units via CC-Link.
PLC connected
through

A-4

FX1NC

*2

FX Series
FX2Nremote device station
32CCL
connectivity

*2.

FX1N

GX Developer

QCPU(Q mode)
QCPU(Q mode)

GX Works2

FXCPU*2 +
FX3U-16CCL-M

PLC main unit accessed

FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
Ver. 8.78G or later

Ver. 8.72A or later

Ver. 1.08J or later Ver. 1.77F or later Ver. 1.08J or later

FX3UC
Ver. 8.72A or later
Ver. 1.08J or later

Ver. 1.87R or later Ver. 1.87R or later Ver. 1.73B or later

Ver. 1.73B or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

1 Introduction
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Equipment operating in accordance with the CC-Link standard

4. Function

5. Applications
Decentralized or centralized control of the line, reception and sending of information from/to the host network,
etc.

6. Detailed information on CC-Link

C
Parallel Link

For details on CC-Link and connectable equipment, refer to the CC-Link Partner Association's homepage or
catalogues (issued by the CC-Link Partner Association).
CC-Link Partner Association's homepage: http://www.cc-link.org/

B
N:N Network

Master station allows connection of remote device station, remote I/O station (inverters, AC servos, sensors,
solenoid valves, etc.) supporting the CC-Link network to achieve data link.
FX PLCs are classified as master stations, remote device stations or intelligent device stations.

Common Items

3. Communication targets

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2.2

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Ethernet communication
For details, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP Users Manual.

1. Outline
Network Range (Only within LAN)

Router

Hub

SNTP server

FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Local
station

External
device

External device

GX Works2

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,FX2NC

Communication
applicability

*1.

FX3S
*1

FX3G, FX3GC FX3U, FX3UC

(Ver. 2.00 or
later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)

The FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 1.20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC.

3. Applicable software
Use the following version when setting the FX3U-ENET-ADP or connecting using MELSOFT:
Product name
GX Works2

*2.

Model name
SW DNC-GXW2-E

Applicability
Ver. 1.73B or later*2

Ver. 1.492N or later supports the FX3S PLC.

Ver. 1.87R or later supports the FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.

Caution
Setting and others are disabled when using nonapplicable versions.

4. Communication targets
Ethernet-compatible equipment

5. Function
The FX3U-ENET-ADP can connect FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs to a high-order system
such as personal computer via Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) using TCP/IP or UDP communication
protocol.

6. Applications
1) Collects and changes the PLC data.
(Communication using the MELSEC communication protocol)
2) Reads, writes and verifies programs, and monitors and tests device values in the main unit remotely.
(Communicates with GX Works2 via Ethernet through MELSOFT connection.)
3) Executes monitoring remotely using a web browser.
(The data monitoring function enables monitoring the information and device values in the main unit and
FX3U-ENET-ADP using a web browser.)

A-6

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

N:N Network
Refer to the "N:N Network" section.

1. Outline

...........

FX CPU
Station
No. 7
Terminal
resistor

N:N Network

FX CPU
Station
No. 1

RS-485

RS-485

RS-485

Terminal
resistor

FX CPU
Station
No. 0

Number of connectable FX PLCs : 8 maximum (station Nos. 0 to 7)

Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]

...

...

Station No. 7
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17

M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77

M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77

M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77

D
Computer Link

...

Station No. 1
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17

C
Parallel Link

For FX3U PLC (pattern 2)

Station No. 0
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17

Common Items

1.2.3

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

Communication
applicability

(Ver. 2.00 or
later)

FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

(Ver. 2.00 or
later)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

PLC

Inverter
Communication

2. Applicable PLCs

3. Communication targets
Between FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series PLCs

4. Function

5. Applications

H
Programming
Communication

By this network, data link can be achieved in a small-scale system, and the machine information can be
transferred between machines.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

This network allows up to eight connected FX PLCs to automatically transfer data among the connected
PLCs.
In the network, data can be transferred among PLCs for devices determined in the refresh range, and those
devices can be monitored by every PLC.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-7

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2.4

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Parallel Link
Refer to the "Parallel Link" section.

1. Outline
RS-485

RS-485

Terminal
resistor

FX CPU
Master
station

FX CPU
Slave
station

Terminal
resistor
Slave station
M800 to M899
D490 to D499
M900 to M999
D500 to D509

Master station
M800 to M899
D490 to D499
M900 to M999
D500 to D509

100 bit devices (M) and 10 word devices (D)

Number of connectable FX PLCs: 2
Total extension distance: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]*1

*1.

The distance is different for the FX2-40AW/AP.

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

Communication
applicability

FX0N
(Ver. 1.20 or
later)

FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

(Ver. 1.04 or
later)

3. Communication targets
Between FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
Series PLCs

4. Function
This network automatically transfers data for 100 bit devices (M) and 10 data registers (D) between two PLCs
of the same series.
Between PLCs in the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series, data can be transferred for 50 bit devices (M) and 10 data
registers (D).

5. Applications
Information can be transferred between two FX PLCs.
(It is recommended to use the N:N Network when connecting two PLCs of the same series among the FX1S,
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series. N:N Network functionality supports
linking of up to eight FX PLC units, therefore it offers excellent future expandability options.)

A-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

Computer Link
Refer to the "Computer Link" section.

1. Outline

1) 1-to-N connection (RS-485)

FXCPU

ACPU

RS-485

FXCPU

RS-485

RS-485

Terminal

RS-232C resistor

Terminal
resistor

RS-485

FX-485PC-IF

2) 1-to-1 connection (RS-232C)

D
Computer Link

RS-232C

FXCPU

Personal computer

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
FX0N

(Ver. 3.30 or
later)

(Ver. 1.20 or
later)

FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

(Ver. 1.06 or
later)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2(FX),FX2C

Inverter
Communication

Number of connectable FX PLCs : 1

Total extension distance
: 15 m (49' 2")

Communication
applicability

Parallel Link

Number of connectable FX/A PLCs : 16 maximum

Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]

PLC

N:N Network

A computer link

Personal computer

Common Items

1.2.5

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

3. Communication targets

4. Function
This link allows connection of up to sixteen FX or A (including A1FX CPU) PLCs to a personal computer for
data transfer when the personal computer directly specifies devices in the connected PLCs.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Between FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC Series
PLCs, A Series PLCs and personal computers

H
Programming
Communication

5. Applications
By this link, production, inventory, etc. can be controlled.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2.6

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Inverter Communication
Refer to the "Inverter Communication" section.

1. Outline

RS-485

FXCPU

Terminal
resistor

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

Terminal
resistor

Number of connectable inverters : 8 maximum

Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable
:Not applicable
PLC
Communication
applicability

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

3. Communication targets
1) For FX2N or FX2NC PLC
FREQROL Series (S500, E500 and A500) inverters
2) For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC
FREQROL Series (S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700, E700, F700 and A700) inverters
The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
PLC

FREQROL-S500/E500/A500 FREQROL-F500/V500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-D700/E700

FX2N, FX2NC

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX3S

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX3G

Ver. 1.10 or later

FX3GC

Ver. 1.40 or later

FX3U
FX3UC

Ver. 2.20 or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 2.32 or later

Ver. 2.20 or later

Ver. 2.32 or later

4. Function
This communication allows the connection of inverters (computer link) in accordance with RS-485 to control
operations and change parameters.

5. Applications
Operations with up to eight inverters can be controlled from a PLC.

A-10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

Non-protocol Communication
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (RS/RS2 instruction)" section.
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)" section.

1. Outline

15 m (49' 2")
maximum

Printer

FXCPU

Parallel Link

Bar code
reader

Printer

N:N Network

Bar code
reader

500 m (1640' 5")

maximum
[50 m (164' 0") when
485BD is connected]

RS-232C

Personal computer

B
RS-485

Personal computer

FXCPU

D
Computer Link

RS-232C RS-422
Converter

Personal computer

Bar code
reader

15m (49' 2")

maximum

Printer

FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW

*1

FXCPU
FX-422CAB0

Standard built-in port

(RS-422)

Available only in FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable

PLC
Communication
applicability

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

(Ver. 3.00
or later)

(Ver. 1.20
or later)

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

(Ver. 1.06
or later)

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

Communication
applicability

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

Communication
applicability

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

Programming
Communication

3) Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)

PLC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2) Non-protocol communication (RS2 instruction)

PLC

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1) Non-protocol communication (RS instruction)

E
Inverter
Communication

*1.

Common Items

1.2.7

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Bar code readers, printers, personal computers (micro computer boards), measuring instruments, etc.

4. Function
This communication allows non-protocol serial communication between equipment with an RS-232C or RS422/RS-485 interface.
Communication with a bar code reader, printer, personal computer (micro computer board), measuring
instrument, etc.

A-11

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

5. Applications

Remote
Maintenance

3. Communication targets

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2.8

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

MODBUS Communication
For details, refer to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC User's Manual
- MODBUS Serial Communication Edition.

1. Outline
1) In the case of the RS-485
FXCPU
slave
No.1

RS-485

RS-485

RS-485

Terminal
resistor

FXCPU
master

FXCPU
slave
No.32

Terminal resistor
Number of connectable units: Master 1
: Slave 32 maximum
Total extension distance
: 500 m (16405) maximum

2) In the case of the RS-232C

RS-232C

RS-232C

FXCPU
master

FXCPU
slave

Number of connectable units: Master 1

: Slave 1
Total extension distance
: 15 m (492) maximum

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,FX2NC

Communication
applicability

FX3S

FX3G
(Ver. 1.30
or later)

FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC
(Ver. 2.40
or later)

3. Communication targets
MODBUS-compatible equipment

4. Function
This function enables MODBUS communication with MODBUS-compatible equipment in accordance with
RS-232C or RS-485.

5. Applications
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.

A-12

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

Programming Communication
Refer to the "Programming Communication" section.

1. Outline

1) Standard built-in port in accordance with RS422 (programming tool or personal computer)

N:N Network

Programming tool

Cable

RS-422

FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)/FX-30P, etc.

Cable
RS-232C

FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW

RS-232CRS-422
converter

FXCPU
Cable

Standard built-in port

(RS-422)

Computer Link

Personal
computer

Parallel Link

Programming
tool

FX-USB-AW
USB

Cable
USBRS-422
converter

Programming tool

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Cable

RS-422

FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)/FX-30P, etc.

Cable

RS-232CRS-422
converter

Personal
computer

Cable

FXCPU

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RS-232C

FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW

RS-422

Programming
tool

FX-USB-AW
USB

Cable

H
Programming
Communication

USBRS-422
converter

3) Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C (personal computer)

Programming tool

FXCPU

Remote
Maintenance

RS-232C

RS-232C

Cable

Personal computer

4) Standard built-in port in accordance with USB (personal computer)

Programming tool

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FXCPU
USB

E
Inverter
Communication

2) Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422 (programming tool or personal

computer)

Personal
computer

Common Items

1.2.9

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

Cable
USB Standard built-in port

A-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

5) Communication equipment operating in accordance with USB (personal computer)

Programming tool
USB

FXCPU

Cable

USB

Personal computer

6) Ethernet adapter (personal computer)

Cable

Cable

FXCPU

FXCPU

Cable

Ethernet
adapter

Ethernet

Ethernet
adapter

Programming tool

Hub
Personal computer

A-14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX), FX2C

FX0N

FX1S, FX1N

FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

(-BD)

(ADP)

Standard built-in port in

accordance with USB

Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
USB(-BD)*1

Ethernet adapter

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3U

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

FX3UC
(LT, LT-2)

Standard built-in port in

accordance with RS-422

(-BD)

Inverter
Communication

Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
RS-422(-BD)
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C

(ADP)

USB(-BD)*1

*1.

(Ver. 2.00
or later)

(Ver. 2.00 or (Ver. 3.10

later)
or later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)

When using USB communication with a model that does not support USB communication equipment
(-BD), use the FX-USB-AW.
However, FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs do not support the FX-USB-AW. Use the standard built-in port in
accordance with USB in the FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLCs.

H
Programming
Communication

*2.

G
*2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Ethernet adapter

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Standard built-in port in

accordance with USB
Communication equipment
operating in accordance with

D
Computer Link

PLC

C
Parallel Link

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C

N:N Network

Standard built-in port in

accordance with RS-422
Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
RS-422(-BD)

Common Items

2. Applicable PLCs

The FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 1.20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC.

3. Communication targets
Personal computer and programming tool

4. Function

5. Applications
1) Programs can be changed and monitored using a personal computer or programming tool.
2) A personal computer (for changing programs) can be directly connected in accordance with RS-232C.

A-15

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

3) While the standard programming connector built in an FX PLC is used for connecting a display unit, a
personal computer or programming tool can be connected at the same time for monitoring and
transferring data.

I
Remote
Maintenance

This communication allows connection of a personal computer or programming tool to a standard port built in
a PLC or optional connector to execute sequence programs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

1.2.10 Remote Maintenance

Refer to the "Remote Maintenance" section.

1. Outline
1) Remote access (GX Works2, GX Developer or FXGP/WIN)
Programming tool

RS-232C

Line
(such as general subscriber's
telephone line)

..........

Modem

Personal computer

FXCPU

Modem

2) File transfer (FXGP/WIN)

Programming tool

Programming
tool

Line
(such as general subscriber's
telephone line)

..........

Modem

Personal computer

Modem

Personal computer

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

Communication applicability

FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

3. Communication target
Personal computer (GX Works2, GX Developer or FXGP/WIN)

4. Function
This communication allows connection between a modem on the PLC side and a modem on the personal
computer side through a line (cellular phone or general subscribers telephone line) for PLC monitoring or
transferring from the personal computer.
The FXGP/WIN allows transfer of file data between personal computers.

5. Applications
By this communication, programs in a PLC located in a remote location can be changed and maintained.

A-16

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) built-in CC-Link/LT master, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition.

For the FX2N-64CL-M, refer to FX2N-64CL-M USERS MANUAL (Detailed Volume).

1. Outline

Master

N:N Network

Main line length

FXCPU

Terminal resistor

Terminal
resistor
Remote
I/O

Remote
I/O

Remote
I/O

Remote
I/O

C
Parallel Link

Remote
I/O

Branch line
length

Remote
I/O

D
Computer Link

Number of connectable units : 64 (stations)

Total extension length
: 500 m (1640' 5") (main line length)

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

FX1S

Communication applicability

FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,
FX3S
FX2NC

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

3. Communication target

E
Inverter
Communication

PLC

Common Items

1.2.11 CC-Link/LT Network

Equipment operating in accordance with the CC-Link/LT network standard

This network allows remote control of I/O information for sensors, lamps, etc.
Input (X) numbers and output (Y) numbers can be handled, and I/O points can be assigned continuously even
if 2-point or 4-point type remote I/O units are being used.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

4. Function

5. Applications
6. Detailed information on CC-Link/LT
For product information on CC-Link, refer to the CC-Link Partner Association's homepage or catalogues
(issued by the CC-Link Partner Association).
CC-Link Partner Association's homepage: http://www.cc-link.org/

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Wire conservation for inputs and outputs.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

1.2.12 AS-i system

For details, refer to the FX2N-32ASI-M User's Manual.

1. Outline
AS-i flat cable
FXCPU

AS-i
master
Slave
Repeater

AS-i power
supply

Slave

AS-i power
supply

Slave

Slave

Number of connectable units : 31 slave units

Total extension distance
: 100 m (328' 1")
[300 m (984' 3") maximum when two repeaters are connected]
Terminal resistors are not required.

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

Communication applicability

*1.

FX0N

FX1S

FX1N,FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S

*1

FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC FX3UC

FX2NC- MT-D/UL and FX2NC- M -DSS(-T-DS) PLCs are not applicable.

3. Communication targets
Slave units (sensors and actuators) for AS-i

4. Function
This network allows remote control of I/O information for sensors and actuators (slave units). The automatic
address assignment function enables easy replacement of a slave unit when it has failed.

5. Applications
Wire conservation for inputs and outputs.

A-18

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

A
For the detains, refer to the FX-232DOPA USERS MANUAL.
(Only Japanese manual is available for this product.)

1. Outline

Common Items

1.2.13 Internet Mail Sending

B
RS-232C

N:N Network

FX-232DOPA
FXCPU

C
Parallel Link

DoPa Mobile Ark

9601D

Antenna
Provider

In accordance with DoPa

Computer Link

Internet

Cellular phone

Inverter
Communication

Personal computer

2. Applicable PLCs

PLC

FX2(FX),FX2C

FX0N

Communication applicability

FX1S

FX1N,FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable

3. Communication targets
4. Function

5. Applications
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, monitoring of facilities located in distant places, monitoring of facilities
inside factories and distribution of logging data

H
Programming
Communication

This setting sends an electronic mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status, etc. to a personal
computer or cellular phone which can receive electronic mails.
This function is applicable through dial-up connection to a mail server using a combination of FX-232DOPA
and DoPa Mobile Ark9601D by NTT DoCoMo.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Personal computer and cellular phone which can receive internet mails

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Introduction

Common Items

1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types

1.2.14 Short Mail Sending

For details, refer to the FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC PLC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(Only the Japanese Manual is available.)

1. Outline
RS-232C

Line
(such as general subscriber's NTT DoCoMo
telephone line)
Short Mail Center

FXCPU
Modem

Cellular phone

2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable
PLC
Communication
applicability

FX2(FX),
FX1N,
FX0N FX1S
FX2C
FX1NC

FX2N

FX2NC

(Ver. 3.00 or later)

(Ver. 3.00 or later)

FX3S

FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC FX3UC

3. Communication targets
Cellular phones by NTT DoCoMo with a contract for i-mode or short mail

4. Function
This function sends a short mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status, etc. to a cellular phone by
NTT DoCoMo which can receive short mails.
This function is applicable through connection in a line to a Short Mail Center of NTT DoCoMo.

5. Applications
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, monitoring of facilities located in distant places and monitoring of facilities
in factories

A-20

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.1 Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types

Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.1

Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types

Built-in port

Parallel Link

The figure below shows the relationship between communication equipment and communication types:
Communication adapter

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains which communication types are supported by serial ports of communication equipment
and connectors of networks.
For the communication equipment required in the system configuration, refer to a description later.
Refer to "2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)".

Common Items

2.

I/O link

Link
z N:N Network
z Parallel link
z Computer link
z Inverter communication
z MODBUS communication
Ethernet communication
z Ethernet
General-purpose serial communication
z Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)
Sequence program
z Programming communication

D
Computer Link

z CC-Link/LT
(built in for FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2))
General-purpose serial communication
z Non-protocol communication
(RS2 instruction)

Sequence program

Inverter
Communication

z Programming communication

z Remote maintenance
Electronic mail sending

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

z Internet mail
z Short mail

Communication types

Expansion board
Link

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX PLC main unit

Special function equipment

z
z
z
z

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Inverter communication

General-purpose serial communication

Sequence program
z Programming communication
z Remote maintenance
Electronic mail sending

z CC-Link
General-purpose serial communication
z Non-protocol communication
(FX2N-232IF)

I/O link
z CC-Link/LT
z AS-i system

z MELSEC I/O LINK

Remote
Maintenance

z Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)

Programming
Communication

Link

Electronic mail sending

z Internet mail

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

z Internet mail
z Short mail

A-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

Communication Equipment Applicability Map

The table below shows the communication types applicable in each FX Series and includes the supporting
communication equipment. The communication types can be used when a built-in port or piece of
communication equipment is connected, but some of them may not be applicable at the same time.

2.2.1

PLC

FX3U and FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

FX3U-USB-BD

Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

RS-232C

FX2N-232IF
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3U-422-BD
FX3U
PLC

Standard built-in port

RS-485
RS-422

FX2N-16CCL-M

*2

FX3U-16CCL-M

*3

MODBUS
Communication
Edition

This manual

USB

FX3U-232-BD
*1

N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication

*4

*4

*4

*4

*5

*5

FX2N-32CCL
FX3U-64CCL

FX2N-64CL-M
FX2N-32ASI-M

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1

FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX2N-232IF*8

RS-232C

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-485

Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX2N-16CCL-M*8

FX3UC
*8
(D,DS, FX3U-16CCL-M
DSS) FX2N-32CCL*8
PLC
FX3U-64CCL*8
FX2N-64CL-M*8
FX2N-32ASI-M

*8

*4

*4

*5

*5

*3

FX3U-ENET-ADP

*5.
*6.
*7.
*8.

*2

FX2N-16LNK-M*8

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

A-22

The expansion board is required to connect the FX3U PLC.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-16CCL-M.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.
The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required to connect to the FX3UC PLC.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

A
Common Items

B
Non-protocol
communication

Product manual

This manual

CC-Link/LT AS-i system

Sequence program

Mail sending

MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending

Product manual

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

*7
*7

*6

*7

Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

Ethernet

Wire-reducing network

N:N Network

Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication

*6

Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.2

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs
Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

FX3U-USB-BD

Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual

USB

FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1

RS-232C

FX2N-232IF*2
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3U-422-BD
FX3UC- Standard built-in port
32MT*2
LT(-2) FX2N-16CCL-M
PLC
FX3U-16CCL-M*2

N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication

RS-485
RS-422

MODBUS
Communication
Edition

This manual

*5

*5

*5

*5

*6

*6

*3
*4

FX2N-32CCL*2
FX3U-64CCL*2
FX2N-64CL-M*2

A-24

Built-in type CC-Link/

LT master

FX2N-32ASI-M*2

FX3U-ENET-ADP*1

*1.

The expansion board is required to connect the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

*2.

The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-IPS-5V is required to connect the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

*3.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.

*4.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.

*5.

Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.

*6.

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

*7.

For the FX2N-64CL-M, refer to FX2N-64CL-M User's Manual.

For FX3UC built-in CC-Link/LT master, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition.

*8.

The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-16CCL-M.

*9.

Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

Non-protocol
communication

Product manual

This manual

CC-Link/LT AS-i system

Sequence program

Mail sending

MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending

Product manual

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

*9

*9

*7

*8

E
Inverter
Communication

*7

D
Computer Link

Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

Ethernet

Wire-reducing network

Common Items

Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.3

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX3G and FX3GC PLCs

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

Standard built-in port
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1

Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual

USB
RS-232C

FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ

RS-485

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3G
PLC

FX3G-422-BD
Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX2N-16CCL-M

*2

FX3U-16CCL-M

*3

FX2N-32CCL
FX3U-64CCL

*5

*4

*4

*4

*4

*4

*4

*5

Standard built-in port

USB

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

RS-232C

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-485

Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX3GC FX2N-16CCL-M*8
PLC
FX3U-16CCL-M*8
FX3U-64CCL*8

FX3U-ENET-ADP*1

FX2N-32CCL*8

MODBUS
Communication
Edition

This manual

FX2N-64CL-M

A-26

N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication

*4

*5

*4

*2
*3

FX2N-64CL-M*8

FX3U-ENET-ADP

*5

*1.

The FX3G-CNV-ADP is required to connect the FX3G PLC.

*2.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M.

*3.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.

*4.

Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.

*5.

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

*6.

Only the RS2 instruction is supported.

*7.

Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.

*8.

The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required to connect the FX3GC PLC.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

Non-protocol
communication

Product manual

This manual

CC-Link/LT AS-i system

Sequence program

MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending

Product manual

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

*7

*6

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

Inverter
Communication

*6

*7

*7

Mail sending

N:N Network

Ethernet

Wire-reducing network

Common Items

Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.4

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX3S PLC
Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

Standard built-in port
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1
FX3S
PLC

CC-Link

N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication

Product
manual

USB
RS-232C

MODBUS
Communication
Edition

This manual

FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-ENET-ADP*1

*2

RS-485

*2

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
Standard built-in port

A-28

Data Link

RS-422

*1.

The FX3S-CNV-ADP is required to connect the FX3S PLC.

*2.

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

Non-protocol
communication

Product manual

This manual

CC-Link/LT AS-i system

Sequence program

Mail sending

MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending

Product manual

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

Ethernet

Wire-reducing network

Common Items

Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.5

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

Link
CC-Link

N:N
Network

Parallel
link

Product
manual

Computer
link

Inverter
communication

This manual

FX2N-232-BD

FX2NC-232ADP*1

FX0N-232ADP*1

RS-232C

FX2N-232IF

*3

FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP*1
FX2N
PLC

RS-485

FX0N-485ADP*1
FX2N-422-BD
Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX2N-16CCL-M

*2

FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M

FX2N-32ASI-M

FX2N-16LNK-M

FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP

RS-232C

FX2N-232IF*4
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
FX2NC Standard built-in port
PLC
FX2N-16CCL-M*4

*3

RS-485
RS-422
*2

FX2N-32CCL*4
FX2N-64CL-M*4

A-30

FX2N-32ASI-M*4

FX2N-16LNK-M*4

*1.

The FX2N-CNV-BD is required to connect the FX2N PLC.

*2.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*3.

It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).

*4.

The FX2NC-CNV-IF is required to connect the FX2NC PLC.

*5.

The FX2NC- MT-D/UL and FX2NC- M -DSS(-T-DS) does not support this connection.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

Non-protocol
communication

I/O link
CC-Link/
LT

Mail sending

MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending

Product manual

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

Short mail
sending
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX1NC, FX2NC
Programming
Manual

B
N:N Network

This manual

AS-i
system

Sequence program

Common Items

General-purpose
communication

C
*3

*2

E
Inverter
Communication

Computer Link

*3

*3

*3

Parallel Link

*3

*3

*3

*2*5

*3

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*3

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*3

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.6

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX1S, FX1N, and FX1NC PLCs

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

Link
CC-Link

Parallel
link

Product
manual

Computer
link
This manual

FX2NC-232ADP*1

RS-232C

*2

FX1N-485-BD

FX2NC-485ADP*1

RS-485

FX0N-485ADP*1
FX1N-422-BD

FX1N-232-BD

FX2NC-232ADP*1

Standard built-in port

RS-422

RS-232C

FX0N-232ADP*1

*2

FX1N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP*1
FX1N
PLC

Inverter
communication

FX1N-232-BD

FX0N-232ADP*1
FX1S
PLC

N:N
Network

RS-485

FX0N-485ADP*1
FX1N-422-BD
Standard built-in port

RS-422

*3

FX2N-16CCL-M
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M

FX2N-32ASI-M

FX2N-16LNK-M

FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
Standard built-in port

FX1NC
PLC
FX2N-16CCL-M*4

RS-232C

*2

RS-485

RS-422

*3

FX2N-32CCL*4
FX2N-64CL-M*4

A-32

FX2N-32ASI-M*4

FX2N-16LNK-M*4

*1.

The FX1N-CNV-BD is required to connect the FX1S or FX1N PLC.

*2.

It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).

*3.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*4.

The FX2NC-CNV-IF is required to connect the FX1NC PLC.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

CC-Link/LT

This manual

AS-i system

Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK

Programming

Product manual

Remote
maintenance

*2

Internet mail
sending

FX-232DOPA
User's Manual

This manual

*2

Mail sending

*2

*2

*2

*3

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*2

*2

*3

*2

H
Programming
Communication

*2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

E
Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link

*2

Parallel Link

*2

*2

N:N Network

Non-protocol
communication

I/O link

Common Items

General-purpose
communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2.7

PLC

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

FX0N PLCs

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
FX0N
PLC

Standard built-in port

Link
CC-Link

N:N
Network

Parallel
link

Product
manual

Inverter
communication

This manual

RS-232C

Computer
link

*1

RS-485

RS-422

FX2N-16CCL-M
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M

2.2.8

PLC

FX2N-32ASI-M

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.

It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).

*2.

Only Japanese manual is available for this product.

FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs (reference)

Communication
equipment

Communication
specifications

Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.)

FX1
PLC

Standard built-in port

FX-232ADP

FX2(FX) FX-485ADP
PLC
FX-40AW
FX2C
FX-40AP
PLC

Link
CC-Link

N:N
Network

Parallel
link

Product
manual

Computer
link

Inverter
communication

This manual

RS-422

RS-232C

RS-485

Optical
communication

Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX0
PLC

Standard built-in port

RS-422

FX0S
PLC

Standard built-in port

RS-422

*1.

A-34

Only Japanese manual is available for this product.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map

CC-Link/LT

This manual

AS-i system

Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK

Programming

Product manual

Remote
maintenance

D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

Internet mail
sending
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual*2

This manual

*1

Mail sending

N:N Network

Non-protocol
communication

I/O link

Common Items

General-purpose
communication

E
Inverter
Communication

Non-protocol
communication
This manual

I/O link
CC-Link/LT

AS-i system

Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK

Programming

Product manual

Remote
maintenance

Internet mail
sending
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual*1

This manual

Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Mail sending

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

General-purpose
communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2.3

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

The block diagram below shows combinations of optional communication equipment applicable in each FX Series.

2.3.1

How to look at combination pages

FX Series name

Communication equipment connection type

Applicable communication type

FX1N Series
A

FX PLC main
unit mounting
position

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

B

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the

respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

European
terminal block
FX1N-485-BD

N:N Network

Parallel link

Selection
example

European
terminal block
FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal
block
FX0N-485ADP

RS-422

One line can be selected.

Connection
condition

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

Programming
communication

FX1N-422-BD

A
European
terminal block

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal
block
FX0N-485ADP

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX1N-232-BD

Computer link

Non-protocol
communication

9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-232ADP

Remote
maintenance

A
25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP

A-36

Programming
communication

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

For FX3U Series

Common Items

2.3.2

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX3U Series
A

For special function units/blocks C refer to the next page.

B
N:N Network

A , B , and C indicate the mounting position. (For the mounting procedure, refer to the
respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3UB
ch1
232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
can be selected.
European terminal
z N:N Network
block
z Parallel link
A
ch2
z Computer link
FX3U-485-BD
European terminal
z Non-protocol
block
communication
B
A
ch1
z Inverter
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
European terminal
z MODBUS *1
block
communication
RDA

RS-485

RD

RDB

SDA

SD

SDB
SG

Parallel Link

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-422

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

Computer Link

ch1

z Programming

communication

FX3U-422-BD

ch1

Inverter
Communication

RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD

SDB
SG

ch2

FX3U-485-BD
B

European terminal
block

ch1

RS-232C

communication

European terminal
block

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

RD

ch2

FX3U-232-BD
B

communication

9-pin D-Sub, male

A

ch1
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

FX3U-232-BD

USB

z MODBUS

communication*1
z Programming
communication
z Remote
maintenance

H
Programming
Communication

9-pin D-Sub, male

z Computer link
z Non-protocol

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

9-pin D-Sub, male

SD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

ch1
USB Mini-B connector

z Programming

Modular jack

z Ethernet
z Programming

Apx.A

RD

SD

A
A

ch2

ch1

Ethernet

FX3U-ENET-ADP

communication

Discontinued
models

FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-CNV-BD

communication

Remote
Maintenance

FX3U-USB-BD

*1.

z Non-protocol

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3U-CNV-BD

European terminal
block

Modular jack

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

A-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX3U Series
A

A , B , and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.
For master station
FX 2N-16CCL-M

CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R

M3/M3.5
terminal block*4

FX 3U -16CCL-M*1*2 FX 2N -16CCL-M *3

For remote device station

M3 terminal block

z CC-Link

FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent device station

Up to 8 units can be selected.

M3 terminal block

FX3U-64CCL*2
POW
ER
SD
RD

9-pin D-Sub, male

z Non-protocol

communication

FX2N-232IF

Dedicated connector

z CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

z AS-i system

M3 terminal block

FX2N-64CL-M
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*5

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5. The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-38

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

For FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series

Common Items

2.3.3

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series

A

For special function units/blocks B , refer to the next page.

ch2
European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

ch1

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
z Inverter
communication

z MODBUS

communication*1

Inverter
Communication

ch2
European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

European
terminal block
A

Computer Link

RS-422

z
z
z
z

Parallel Link

N:N Network

RS-485

A and B indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or
FX3U-ENET-ADP
A
ch1
can be selected.
European
terminal block

z Non-protocol

communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

G
A

ch1

9-pin D-Sub,
male

ch2
9-pin D-Sub,
male

FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)

communication
z MODBUS *1
communication

z Programming

communication

z Remote

maintenance

FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)

I
Remote
Maintenance

ch2

ch1

Modular jack

z Ethernet
z Programming

Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP

communication

FX3U-ENET-ADP

*1.

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

A-39

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Modular jack

H
Programming
Communication

z Computer link
z Non-protocol

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RS-232C

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series

A

A and B indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the previous
page.

For master
station
FX 2N -16CCL-M

M3/M3.5
terminal
block*4

CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R

FX2NC-CNV-IF

FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2 FX 2N -16CCL-M*3
For remote
device
station

FX3UC-1PS-5V

z CC-Link

FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent
device
station

Up to 8 units can be selected.

M3 terminal block

M3 terminal block

FX3U-64CCL*2

POWER
SD

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RD

z Non-protocol

communication

FX2N-232IF

Dedicated
connector

z CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

z AS-i system

M3 terminal block

FX2N-64CL-M
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*5

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

Common Items

2.3.4

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RDA

RS-485

RD
RDB
SDA
SD

SDB
SG

FX3U-485-BD
A

European
terminal block

ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3U-CNV-BD

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link

Non-protocol
communication
z Inverter
communication
z MODBUS *1
communication

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

RS-422

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

z Programming

communication

FX3U-422-BD
B

ch1
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

ch2

FX3U-485-BD
B

European
terminal block
A

European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1
RD

SD

USB

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z MODBUS

communication

z Programming

communication

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z Remote

maintenance

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

ch1

z Programming

Modular jack

z Ethernet
z Programming

Apx.A

ch2

ch1

Ethernet

FX3U-ENET-ADP

communication

Modular jack

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

A-41

Discontinued
models

FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-CNV-BD

communication

Remote
Maintenance

FX3U-USB-BD

USB Mini-B connector

RD

SD

*1.

communication*1

Programming
Communication

z Computer link
z Non-protocol

ch1
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

FX3U-CNV-BD

9-pin D-Sub,
male

ch2

FX3U-232-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RS-232C

communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

z Non-protocol

ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3U-CNV-BD

European
terminal block

Inverter
Communication

RDA
RD

SD

Computer Link

European
terminal block

z
z
z
z

Parallel Link

ch2

European
terminal block

N:N Network

Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
can be selected.

ch1

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
A

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.

FX 2N -16CCL-M

For master
station
M3/M3.5
terminal
block* 4

CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R

FX2NC-CNV-IF

3
1 2
FX3U -16CCL-M* * FX 2N-16CCL-M*

For remote
device
station

Up to 7 units can be selected.

FX3UC-1PS-5V

M3 terminal block

z CC-Link

FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent
device
station
M3 terminal block

*2

FX3U-64CCL

POWER
SD

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RD

For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
built-in.

z Non-protocol

communication

FX2N-232IF
Dedicated
connector

Dedicated
connector

z CC-Link/LT

FX2N-64CL-M
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

M3 terminal block

z AS-i system

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*5

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5. The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-42

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

For FX3G Series

Common Items

2.3.5

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

1. FX3G Series (14-point, 24-point type)

A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the this section 3.

N:N Network

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B

ch1

RS-485

European
terminal block

Parallel link
Computer link

ch1

RJ45 connector

ch1

European
terminal block

MODBUS
communication*1

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

RS-422

Programming
communication

FX3G-422-BD
B

ch1

European
terminal block

Non-protocol
communication

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B

ch1

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Computer link

ch1

RS-232C
FX3G-232-BD
B

MODBUS
communication*1
A

ch1

9-pin D-sub,
male
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

ch1

Ethernet

*1.

Remote
maintenance
Ethernet

Modular jack
FX3U-ENET-ADP

Programming
communication

Programming
communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3G-CNV-ADP

Non-protocol
communication

Programming
Communication

9-pin D-sub,
male

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

European
terminal block
FX3G-CNV-ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

RJ45 connector

FX3G-485-BD
B

Inverter
Communication

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

Computer Link

FX3G-CNV-ADP

Non-protocol
communication
Inverter
communication

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B

N:N Network

Parallel Link

FX3G-485-BD

Apx.A

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

Discontinued
models

A-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

2. FX3G Series (40-point, 60-point type)

B

For special function units/blocks

D,

refer to the this section 3.

A , B , C and indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

Only either A or
C can be used
as ch2.

ch1

RS-485

European
terminal block

FX3G-485-BD
B

ch1

ch2

European
terminal block

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

ch2

ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

FX3G-422-BD
B

Either FX3U232ADP(-MB) or
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB) can be
selected.

ch1

FX3G-485-BD
B

ch2

FX3G-422-BD

ch1

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

A-44

z Non-protocol

communication

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A

ch1

ch2
*1

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A

ch2
*1

Ethernet
FX3G-CNV-ADP

communication

European
terminal block

ch2

FX3G-232-BD

z Programming

European
terminal block

European
terminal block

FX3G-CNV-ADP

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

ch2

ch1

communication*2

European
terminal block

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

FX3G-CNV-ADP

z MODBUS

RJ45
connector
A

RS-232C

ch1

z Non-protocol

European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-422

z Computer link

communication

RJ45
connector
FX3G-485-BD-RJ

z Parallel link

z Inverter

ch2

*1

z N:N Network

communication

FX3G-485-BD

FX3G-CNV-ADP

RJ45
connector

FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3U-ENET-ADP

FX3G-232-BD

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z Computer link
z MODBUS

communication*2

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z Non-protocol

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z Programming

9-pin D-Sub,
male

z Remote

Modular
jack
Modular
jack

communication
communication
maintenance

z Ethernet
z Programming

communication

*1.

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is used.

*2.

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

, , and indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
For special adapters with communication type
and
communication expansion board , , refer to this section 1,2.

CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R

B
N:N Network

FX2N-16CCL-M

For master station

M3/M3.5
terminal block*4

C
Parallel Link

FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2 FX2N-16CCL-M *3

Up to 8 units can be selected

For remote device station

M3 terminal block

CC-Link

D
Computer Link

FX2N-32CCL

For intelligent device station

M3 terminal block

*2

Dedicated connector

Inverter
Communication

FX3U-64CCL

CC-Link/LT

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2N-64CL-M

*1.

Common Items

3. FX3G Series (Special unit/special block diagram)

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.

*3.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M.

*4.

The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.

The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.

H
Programming
Communication

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*2.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3.6

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

For FX3GC Series

FX3GC Series

For special function units/blocks B , refer to the next page.

A and B indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
ch1
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
z N:N Network
RS-485
European
can be selected.
z Parallel link
terminal block
z Computer link
A
z Non-protocol
ch2
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
European
z Inverter
terminal block
communication
z MODBUS *1
communication

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch1

RS-422

European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

ch2

z Non-protocol

communication

European
terminal block

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

z Computer link
z Non-protocol

ch1

communication

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub,
male

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

ch2
9-pin D-Sub,
male

z MODBUS

communication*1
z Programming
communication

z Remote

maintenance

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A

ch2
Modular jack

ch1
FX3U-ENET-ADP

Ethernet

Modular jack

Ethernet
Programming
communication

FX3U-ENET-ADP

*1.

A-46

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

A
Common Items

FX3GC Series
A

A and B indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

FX2N-16CCL-M

CC-Link

FX2NC-CNV-IF

FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2 FX2N-16CCL-M *3

For remote
device
station

For master station

M3/M3.5
terminal block*4

C
Parallel Link

M3 terminal block

z CC-Link

D
Computer Link

Up to 8 units can be selected.

E
R
R
O
R

FX3UC-1PS-5V

N:N Network

For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the previous

page.

FX2N-32CCL
B

For intelligent
device
station

M3 terminal block

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3U-64CCL*2
B
Dedicated
connector

z CC-Link/LT

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2N-64CL-M

*1.

The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.

*3.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M.

*4.

The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.

The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*2.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2.3.7

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

For FX3S Series

FX3S Series
A

For special function units/blocks C are not connectable.

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD
B

RJ45 connector
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B

z
z
z
z

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
z Inverter
communication
z MODBUS *1
communication

European
terminal block
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-422

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

Programming
communication

FX3G-422-BD
B

European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD
B

RJ45 connector

z Non-protocol

communication

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B

European
terminal block
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub,male

communication*1

z Programming
9-pin D-Sub,male

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

Ethernet

*1.

A-48

communication

z Remote

maintenance

Ethernet

Modular jack
FX3S-CNV-ADP

communication

z MODBUS

FX3G-232-BD
B

z Computer link
z Non-protocol

Programming
communication

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

For FX2N Series

Common Items

FX2N Series
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

RS-485

European
terminal block

A
European
terminal block

FX2N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Inverter
communication

FX0N-485ADP

Essential when inverter

communication is used.

FX2N-ROM-E1

RS-422

Programming

communication

FX2N-422-BD
B

European
terminal block

Non-protocol

communication

European
terminal block

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP
M3 terminal
block

FX0N-485ADP

RS-232C

FX2N-232-BD
Computer link
Non-protocol

communication

FX2N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-232ADP

communication

Programming
Remote

25-pin
D-Sub,
female

maintenance
Short mail
sending

FX2N-ROM-E1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX0N-232ADP

I
Remote
Maintenance

9-pin D-Sub, male

Programming
Communication

9-pin D-Sub, male

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2N-485-BD
B

E
Inverter
Communication

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

D
Computer Link

M3 terminal
block

C
Parallel Link

FX2N-485-BD

N:N Network

A , B , C and D indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

One line can be selected.

2.3.8

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

Essential when the short mail

sending is used

A-49

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX2N Series
A

A , B , C and D indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

For special adapters with communication type A , communication

expansion board B and function extension memory
cassettes D , refer to the previous page.
C
For master station
FX2N-16CCL-M

M3.5 terminal block

CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R

FX2N-16CCL-M*1

CC-Link

C
For remote device station
M3 terminal block

FX2N-32CCL

Up to 8 units can be selected.

C
POWER
SD
RD

9-pin D-Sub, male

Non-protocol
communication

FX2N-232IF
C
Dedicated connector

CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

AS-i system

M3 terminal block

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-64CL-M
C

U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N -32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*2.

The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the PLC current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

For FX2NC Series

Common Items

FX2NC Series
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

RS-485

European terminal block

M3 terminal block

Essential when inverter communication is used

D
Computer Link

FX0N-485ADP

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Inverter
communication

Parallel Link

FX2NC-485ADP
A

N:N Network

A , C and D indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2NC-ROM-CE1
A

RS-422

European terminal block

FX2NC-485ADP

F
Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal block

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX0N-485ADP
A

RS-232C

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

One line can be selected.

2.3.9

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

9-pin D-Sub, male

H
A
25-pin D-Sub, male

Essential when the short mail sending is used

I
Remote
Maintenance

FX0N-232ADP

Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Programming
communication
Short mail
sending

Programming
Communication

FX2NC-232ADP

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX2NC-ROM-CE1

A-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX2NC Series
A

A , C and D indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

For special adapters with communication type A and function

extension memory boards D , refer to the previous page.
C

C
For master
station
FX2N-16CCL-M

CC-Link

M3.5 terminal block

E
R
R
O
R

FX2NC-CNV-IF

FX2N-16CCL-M*1
C

CC-Link
For remote
device
station

M3 terminal block

FX2N-32CCL

Up to 4 units can be selected.

C
POWER
SD
RD

9-pin D-Sub, male

Non-protocol
communication

FX2N-232IF
C
Dedicated connector

CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

AS-i system

M3 terminal block

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX 2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*2*3
C

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*2.

The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.

*3.

The FX2NC- MT-D/UL and FX2NC- M -DSS(-T-DS) are not supported.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-52

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

A
Common Items

2.3.10 For FX1N Series

FX1N Series
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

B
N:N Network

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

European
terminal block

A
European
terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP

A
M3 terminal
block

B
Programming

communication

FX1N-422-BD

European
terminal block
FX1N-485-BD
B

Non-protocol

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

communication

A
M3 terminal
block

H
Programming
Communication

FX0N-485ADP

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub, male

FX1N-232-BD
Computer link
Non-protocol

communication

9-pin D-Sub, male

Programming

communication

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-232ADP

I
Remote
Maintenance

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

European
terminal block

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

One line can be selected.

E
Inverter
Communication

FX0N-485ADP
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

RS-422

Computer Link

FX1N-CNV-BD

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

Parallel Link

FX1N-485-BD
B

Remote

maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP

A-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX1N Series
A

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.

C
For master station
FX2N-16CCL-M

CC-Link

M3.5 terminal block

E
R
R
O
R

FX2N-16CCL-M*1

CC-Link

Up to 8 units can be selected.

For remote device station

M3 terminal block

FX2N-32CCL
C
Dedicated connector

CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

AS-i system

M3 terminal block

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N -32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*2.

The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-54

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

A
Common Items

2.3.11 For FX1NC Series

FX1NC Series
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

RS-485

European terminal block

FX2NC-485ADP
A
M3 terminal block

D
Computer Link

FX0N-485ADP

European terminal block

FX2NC-485ADP

E
Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal block

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX0N-485ADP
A

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub, male

A
25-pin D-Sub, female

Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Programming
communication
Remote
maintenance

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2NC-232ADP

Inverter
Communication

One line can be selected.

RS-422

C
Parallel Link

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

N:N Network

A and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

H
Programming
Communication

FX0N-232ADP

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

FX1NC Series
A

A and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the

previous page.

C
For master
station
FX2N-16CCL-M

CC-Link

M3.5 terminal block

E
R
R
O
R

FX2NC-CNV-IF

FX2N-16CCL-M*1

CC-Link

Up to 2 units can be selected.

For remote
device station

M3 terminal block

FX2N-32CCL
C
Dedicated connector

CC-Link/LT

M3 terminal block

AS-i system

M3 terminal block

MELSEC-I/O LINK

FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C

FX2N-16LNK-M

*1.

The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.

*2.

The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

A-56

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

Common Items

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

A
Common Items

2.3.12 For FX1S Series

FX1S Series
A

C special units/blocks are not connectable.

B
N:N Network

A , B and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

European
terminal block

A
European
terminal block

FX2NC-485ADP

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal
block

B
Programming

communication

FX1N-422-BD

European
terminal block

FX1N-485-BD
B

A
Non-protocol

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

communication

A
M3 terminal
block

H
Programming
Communication

FX0N-485ADP

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub, male

FX1N-232-BD

Computer link
Non-protocol

communication

9-pin D-Sub, male

communication

Remote

A
FX1N-CNV-BD

Programming

I
Remote
Maintenance

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

European
terminal block

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

One line can be selected.

E
Inverter
Communication

FX0N-485ADP
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

RS-422

Computer Link

FX1N-CNV-BD

Parallel Link

FX1N-485-BD

maintenance

FX2NC-232ADP

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP

A-57

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

2.3.13 For FX0N Series

FX0N Series
A

For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.

A and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

European terminal block

N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

FX2NC-485ADP
A
M3 terminal block

FX0N-485ADP

One line can be selected.

RS-422

European terminal block

FX2NC-485ADP

Non-protocol
communication

A
M3 terminal block

FX0N-485ADP
A

RS-232C

9-pin D-Sub, male

Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

FX2NC-232ADP
A
25-pin D-Sub, female
FX0N-232ADP

A-58

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

A and C indicate the mounting position.

(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

C
M3 terminal block

CC-Link

AS-i system

MELSEC-I/O LINK

Parallel Link

FX2N-32CCL
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R

ADDRESS/
ERROR

M3 terminal block
FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E

SE
T

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR

FX2N-32ASI-M
C
M3 terminal block

Computer Link

Up to 4 units can be selected.

For remote device station

B
N:N Network

For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the

previous page.

Common Items

FX0N Series

Inverter
Communication

FX2N-16LNK-M

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Limitation in the number of connectable units

Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment

2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)

2.3.14 For FX2(FX) and FX2C Series (reference)

FX2(FX),FX2C Series
A indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)

RS-485

M3.5 terminal block

Computer link

25-pin D-Sub, female

Computer link
Non-protocol
communication

FX-485ADP

One line can be selected.

RS-232C

FX-232ADP
A

Dedicated

M3.5 terminal block

Parallel link

Connector for
optical fiber

Parallel link

FX2-40AW
A

Dedicated

FX2-40AP

A-60

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Common Items

3.1 Setting Method

A
Common Items

3.

Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Computer link
Inverter communication

B
N:N Network

This chapter describes which communication parameters can be changed for the following communication
types, and provides methods on how to change them.

Non-protocol communication (RS/RS2 instruction)

Internet mail sending

Setting Method
The following two communication setting methods are available for FX PLCs. Either method can be used, but
the method using parameters is recommended.

1) Specify the settings using parameters in the programming tool

Register the settings in parameters, transfer it to the PLC and turn the PLC's power OFF and then ON.
(This method is not available in FX2(FX), FX2C, and FX0N PLCs.)
(This method is not available for ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.)

Caution
Regardless of the method chosen above, a PLC operates the same way. If both methods are selected,
priority is given to the method using parameters.

FX Series
Parameter method

FX2(FX),FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G,FX3GC

FX3U,FX3UC

*1

Program method

*1.

Only ch1 and ch2 are available.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3. Setting flow
PLC memory
Setting window
Parameter area
Program area
[MOV H
[MOV K
[MOV K

D8120] Written by
program
D8121]
D8129]

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,

FX3U and FX3UC

Program
method

D8370]
D8379]

[MOV H
[MOV K

D8400]
D8409]

[MOV H
[MOV K
[MOV K

D8420]
D8421]
D8429]

Written by
program
Written by
program
Written by
program

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,

FX3U and FX3UC

ch0 RS2 instruction

D8370 Communication format
D8379 Time-out time setting
ch1 RS2 instruction
D8400 Communication format
D8409 Time-out time setting

Ch0 is available only

in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
The setting method
using parameter cannot
be used for ch0.
Only ch1 is available
in the FX3S PLC.

ch2 Computer link

RS instruction
Inverter communication
Programming communication
D8420 Communication format
D8421 Station number settings
D8429 Time-out time setting

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

[MOV H
[MOV K

ch1 Computer link

RS instruction
Inverter communication
Programming communication
D8120 Communication format
D8121 Station number settings
D8129 Time-out time setting

Remote
Maintenance

Sequence
program for
set values

Transferred
when power
is turned ON

Programming
Communication

Parameter
method

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Communication setting method availability in each FX PLC

E
Inverter
Communication

2) Directly specify the settings in a sequence program

Prepare a sequence program which sets the communication format, station number and time-out time
setting, and then transfer the program to the PLC.

D
Computer Link

1. Setting methods

Parallel Link

3.1

When both methods are selected at the same time, priority is given to
the contents set using the parameter method.

A-61

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

3.1 Setting Method

4. Time at which the settings become valid

1) Specifying the settings using parameters in the programming tool:
When the PLC power is turned ON, the contents of the parameters are automatically transferred to the
PLC.
As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC, the settings become valid.
2) Directly specifying the settings in a sequence program:
To enable the settings, write data after turning the PLC mode to RUN from STOP, and then reboot the
PLC's power.

A-62

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

3.2.1

Operating procedure
With GX Works2 open, follow the steps in this section for activating the serial communication setting method.

Opening the parameter setting window

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

C
Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 3.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

3.2

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.

When using programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, do
not check the "Operate Communication Setting" box.
When using computer link, inverter communication or non-protocol communication (RS/RS2
instruction) function, check the "Operate Communication Setting" box, and then set each item.
Click [End].

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Writing parameters to the PLC

A-63

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Common Items

3.2.2

3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type

AS-i system

Programming communication

Remote maintenance

This communication is not executed in this setting.

This communication is not executed in this setting.

This communication is not executed in this setting.

Internet mail sending

Short mail sending

Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)

Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)
RS2

RS

Inverter communication

Remarks

Dedicated protocol

7-bit

Data length

CC-Link/LT network

Protocol

This communication is not executed in this setting.

Non-protocol
communication

Computer link

Parallel link

N:N Network

Ethernet communication

Contents
CC-Link network

Set item

MODBUS communication

The table below shows the communication types and set items which can be set using parameters:

8-bit
None

19200
9600
Transmission speed
(bps)

4800
2400
1200
600
300

Header

Invalid/valid

Terminator

Invalid/valid

Control cable

Invalid/valid

Hardware type

Regular/RS-232C

RS-485

Control mode

Invalid

Sum check

Invalid/valid

Transmission control
procedure

Format 1

Format 4

Station number settings

00 to 0F

Time-out time setting

1 to 255

Reference page

*1.

A-64

This communication is not executed in this setting.

38400

*1

This communication is not executed in this setting.

2-bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.

1-bit

Stop bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.

This communication is not executed in this setting.

Even
This communication is not executed in this setting.

Odd
This communication is not executed in this setting.

Parity

B C D E

Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Not
selectable

G H

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

3.3.1

Operating procedure

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.

C
Parallel Link

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch0 and Ch 2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 3.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

3.3

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

E
Inverter
Communication

There is no communication setting.

When using the programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, click the
[No] button.
When using computer link, inverter communication, or non-protocol communication (RS instruction) function,
click the [Yes] button.

Computer Link

1. When there are no parameter settings

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-65

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

2. When there are already parameter settings

There is communication setting. Confirm the setting contents.
When using programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, click the [Clear]
button.

A-66

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Common Items

Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type

Common Items

Remote maintenance

Programming communication

AS-i system

CC-Link/LT network

Internet mail sending

Short mail sending

Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)

Non-protocol communication (RS instruction)

Inverter communication

Computer link

Parallel link

N:N Network

Ethernet communication

Odd

Even

Inverter
Communication

7-bit

Data length

Dedicated protocol
8-bit

Header

Invalid/valid

Terminator

Invalid/valid

Control cable

Invalid/valid

Hardware type

RS-485

Control mode

Invalid

Transmission control
procedure

Format 4

Station number settings

00 to 0F

Time-out time setting

1 to 255

Reference page

B C D E F G H

I
Remote
Maintenance

Invalid/valid
Format 1

H
Not
selectable

Sum check

Programming
Communication

Regular/RS-232C

This communication is not executed in this setting.

300

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

600

This communication is not executed in this setting.

1200

This communication is not executed in this setting.

2400

This communication is not executed in this setting.

Baud rate (bps)

This communication is not executed in this setting.

4800

This communication is not executed in this setting.

9600

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

19200

This communication is not executed in this setting.

2-bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.

Stop bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.

1-bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.

None
Parity

Computer Link

Non-protocol
communication

Protocol

Remarks

Parallel Link

CC-Link network

Contents

B
N:N Network

Set item

MODBUS communication

The table below shows the communication types and items which can be set using parameters:

This communication is not executed in this setting.

3.3.2

3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3.4

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, up to two communication port channels can be connected using a
communication expansion board and communication special adapter.
Point
Only one channel can be connected to the FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
The standard built-in port (RS-422) can be used as ch0 when the non-protocol communication function
(RS2 instruction) is used in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (RS/RS2 instruction)" section.
When a CF card special adapter is connected to the PLC, it is handled in the same way as a
communication special adapter, and occupies one communication port channel.
For details, refer to FX3U-CF-ADP Users Manual.
When a FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the PLC, it is
handled in the same way as a communication expansion board, and occupies one communication port
channel.
When the FX3U-ENET-ADP is used, one communication port is occupied. Only one FX3U-ENET-ADP unit
can be connected at the last stage (left end) of the main unit and special adapters.
For details, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP Users Manual.

3.4.1

Extension of Port (For FX3G, FX3GC PLC)

1. For FX3G PLC (40-point, 60-point type)
The communication expansion board connected to the option connector 1 or the first communication special
adapter works as ch1, and the communication expansion board connected to the option connector 2 or the
second communication special adapter works as ch2.
When using two communication special
adapters

When using a communication expansion board

and a communication special adapter together

Communication Communication
special adapter special adapter
(ch2) *1
(ch1)

Communication
Communication
special adapter
expansion board
(ch1)
FX3G-CNV-ADP
(ch2)

Analog special Standard built-in port (RS-422)

adapter
(ch0)

*1.

FX3G-CNV-ADP

Analog special Standard built-in port (RS-422)

(ch0)
adapter

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is used.

When using one communication expansion board

Communication
expansion board
(ch2)

Communication
expansion board
(ch1)

Standard built-in port (RS-422)

(ch0)

A-68

Standard built-in port (RS-422)

(ch0)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

A
Common Items

When using two communication expansion board

Communication Communication
expansion board expansion board
(ch2)
(ch1)

B
N:N Network

Standard built-in port (RS-422)

(ch0)

2. For FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type)

Communication
special adapter
FX3G-CNV-ADP
(ch1)

Communication
expansion board
(ch1)

C
Parallel Link

One communication port channel can be connected to the FX3G PLC main unit (14-point and 24-point type).
It is not allowed to connect two communication special adapters.

D
Computer Link

E
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)

Inverter
Communication

Analog special
adapter

Standard built-in port (RS-422)

(ch0)

3. For FX3GC PLC

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication Communication
special adapter special adapter
(ch1)
(ch2)
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Analog special
adapter

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-69

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Common Items

3.4.2

3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Extension of Port (For FX3U, FX3UC PLC)

When a communication expansion board and communication special adapter are used, the board is handled
as ch 1 and the adapter is handled as ch 2.
When connecting two communication special adapters using the FX3U-CNV-BD*1, the one closer to the main
unit is handled as ch 1 and the farther one is handled as ch 2.
When a FX3U-8AV-BD or CF card special adapter is used, however, it occupies one communication port
channel.
*1. When using the FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) PLC, the FX3U-CNV-BD is not required.

1. For FX3U PLC

When using a communication expansion board
and a communication special adapter together
Communication
Communication
expansion board
special adapter
(ch1)
(ch2)

FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R

FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP

P O WE R

P O WE R

When using two communication special

adapters

FX 3U -4AD-ADP

P O WER

Communication
special adapter
(ch1)

Communication
special adapter
(ch2)

FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP

PO WE R

P O WE R

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX 3U -4AD-ADP

P O WE R

P O WE R

RDA
R
D
RDB
SDA
S
D

SDB
SG

Analog special
adapter

*2.

High speed input/output

special adapter*2

Analog special
adapter

High speed input/output

special adapter*2

When using high speed special input/output adapters, make sure to connect them to the PLC main
unit first before connecting communication special adapters, CF card special adapter and analog
special adapters.

2. For FX3UC(D,DS,DSS) PLC

Communication
special adapter
(ch2)

FX3U-4AD-ADP

Analog
special
adapter

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP

POWER

POWER

POWER

Communication
special adapter
(ch1)

FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER

3. For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC

When using a communication expansion board
and a communication special adapter together
Communication
special adapter
Analog
(ch2)
special
adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP

POWER

POWER

Communication
special adapter
(ch2)

FX3U-4AD-ADP

POWER

POWER

RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD

SDB
SG

A-70

Communication
expansion board
(ch1)

When using two communication special

adapters
Analog
special
adapter

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER

POWER

Communication
special adapter
(ch1)
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series

Common Items

Limitation when ch1 and ch2 are used at the same time

Communication
channel: ch2

Communication channel: ch1

Parallel Link

RD A
RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

Communication
special adapter

Expansion
board

Expansion
board

FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC

: Applicable, : Not applicable

Communication setting for ch1
Non-protocol
Non-protocol
Inverter
Programming
Remote
communication communication communication communication maintenance
(RS instruction) (RS2 instruction)

N:N Network

Parallel link

(Example 1) (Example 2)

Computer link
Inverter
communication
Non-protocol
communication *1
(RS instruction)
Non-protocol
communication
(RS2 instruction)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Programming
communication
Remote
*2
maintenance

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication setting for ch2

MODBUS
communication

Computer
link

Inverter
Communication

MODBUS
communication N:N Network Parallel link

D
Computer Link

Communication
special adapter

B
N:N Network

When using ch1 and ch2 at the same time, available communication type combinations are limited. For
details, refer to the table below.
When a CF card special adapter, FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD, FX3G-2EYT-BD or the FX3UENET-ADP is used, one communication port (1ch) is occupied. However, the occupied communication port
does not apply any restrictions to the combination of communication functions when ch1 and ch2 are used at
the same time.

Common Items

3.4.3

3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Ch2 cannot be set for non-protocol communication (RS instruction).

*2.

When using remote maintenance on ch2, use GX Works2 or GX Developer.

For applicable versions of GX Works2 and GX Developer,
refer to I. Remote Maintenance Subsection 1.4.1 or 1.4.2.

Example 1:
When "parallel link" is set for ch1, the "N:N Network" cannot be set for ch2.
Example 2:
When "computer link" is set for ch1, the "N:N Network" can be set for ch2.

Programming
Communication

*1.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-71

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Version Number

Common Items

4.
4.1

4.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method

Version Number
Manufacturer's serial number check method
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.

4.1.1

Checking the nameplate

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product.
Example nameplate (manufacture's serial number : 1010001)

Right side

* Actual product nameplate differs

from the example shown above.

<Product during December, 2009 or earlier>

<Product from January, 2010>

Control number
Month (Example: Dec.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year

A-72

Control number
Month (Example: Jan.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Version Number

Common Items

Checking the front of the product

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product.
The "LOT" indication is provided only with the following PLC main units.
Main unit

"LOT" indication adoption time

March 2013 and later (From first product)

FX3G Series PLC

October 2008 and later

FX3GC Series PLC

January 2012 and later (From first product)

FX3U Series PLC

January 2009 and later

FX3UC Series PLC

January 2009 and later

B
N:N Network

FX3S Series PLC

Common Items

4.1.2

4.2 Version check

C
Parallel Link

Example: FX3U-48MR/ES

D
Computer Link

<Product during December, 2009 or earlier>

Month (Example: Dec.):

1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year

Month (Example: Jan.):

1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year

Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.

D8001

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC type and

version

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.2

Inverter
Communication

<Product from January, 2010>

Version information (Example: Ver. 2.51)

PLC type (Example: 24 = FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U or FX3UC Series)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-73

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

5.

5.1 Rank and Use Method of This Manual

Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and

Acquisition Method)
This chapter specifies the manuals related to PLC main units for each communication type.

5.1

Rank and Use Method of This Manual

When communication equipment is connected, an FX PLC can offer various communication options.
PLC
Wiring and installation of PLC
HARDWARE MANUAL, HANDY MANUAL
(which is supplied with each product)

Supplied with

User's Manual
Separate manual
(for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
Sequence program
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Separate manual

Communication equipment
Installation and name of each part
INSTALLATION MANUAL
(which is supplied with each product)

Supplied with

Manuals supplied with each communication equipment are shown at the section 5.2.
This information is provided for convenience to offer the terminal layout, external
dimensions, etc., and may not be up-to-date.

Communication types
N:N Network

Parallel link

Computer link

Non-protocol
Inverter
Other
communication communication communication

How to use each communication type

This
User's Manual manual
Communication Control Edition

Separate manual

This manual specifies the setting method, cable connection, program examples and
troubleshooting for each communication type.

A-74

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

Introduction of Related Manuals

This section shows major manuals required to use the communication types in this manual.
Manuals for PLC main units and manuals for communication equipment are classified separately.
"Separate manual" shown in the "Included/separate manual" column indicates that the manual is supplied
separately. "Included" indicates that the manual is included with each product.

Manual for communication types in FX PLCs

Included/separate
document

Contents

JY997D16901

Separate manual
(this manual)

Describes the contents of communication types

supported by FX Series PLCs.

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series User's Manual
JY997D26201
- MODBUS Serial
Communication Edition

Separate manual

Explains the MODBUS serial communication

network in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Manual name

Manual number

Manuals for data communication

Manuals related to FX PLCs

For instructions used in sequence programs, refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
For hardware specifications and wiring of the PLC, refer to the HANDY MANUAL or USERS MANUAL.
Manual number

Included/separate
document

Contents

Manuals for PLC main unit

FX3U Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D50301

Included

FX3U Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition

JY997D16501

Separate manual

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3U PLC main unit.

FX3UC Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D50501

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 extracted from
the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware
Edition.

FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 Series
Hardware Manual

JY997D31601

Included

FX3UC Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition

JY997D28701

Separate manual

Details about the hardware including I/O

specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3UC PLC main unit.

FX3G Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3G Series Users Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D46001

Included

FX3G Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition

JY997D31301

Separate manual

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3G PLC main unit.

Remote
Maintenance

FX3G Series
Hardware Manual

H
Programming
Communication

Included

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series

Hardware Manual

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) extracted
from the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware
Edition.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U Series
Hardware Manual

E
Inverter
Communication

Manual name

D
Computer Link

5.2.2

Parallel Link

FX Series Users Manual Data Communication Edition

B
N:N Network

5.2.1

Common Items

5.2

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-75

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

Manual name

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Manual number

Included/separate
document

Contents

FX3GC Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3GC Series
Hardware Manual

JY997D45201

Included

FX3GC Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition

JY997D45401

Separate manual

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3GC extracted from the FX3GC
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3GC PLC main unit.

FX3S Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3S Series Users Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3S Series
Hardware Manual

JY997D48301

Included

I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the

PLC main unit FX3S extracted from the FX3S
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
I/O specifications, built-in analog specifications,
wiring and installation of the PLC main unit
FX3S-30M /E -2AD extracted from the FX3S
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

FX3S-30M /E -2AD
Hardware Manual

JY997D51701

Included

FX3S Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition

JY997D48601

Separate manual

JY992D66301

Included

Describes the contents of the FX2N PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

FX2NC (DSS, DS) Series

HARDWARE MANUAL

JY992D76401

Included

Describes the contents of the FX2NC(DSS, DS)

PLC hardware including the specifications, wiring
and installation procedure.

FX2NC (D/UL) Series

HARDWARE MANUAL

JY992D87201

Included

Describes the contents of the FX2NC(D/UL) PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

JY992D89301

Included

Describes the contents of the FX1N PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

JY992D92101

Included

Describes the contents of the FX1NC PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

JY992D83901

Included

Describes the contents of the FX1S PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

JY992D47501

Included

Describes the contents of the FX0N PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

JY992D47401

Included

Describes the contents of the FX PLC hardware

including the specifications, wiring and installation
procedure.

JY992D59001

Included

Describes the contents of the FX2C PLC

hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.

Details about the hardware including I/O

specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3S PLC main unit.

FX2N Series
FX2N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FX2NC Series

FX1N Series
FX1N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FX1NC Series*1
FX1NC Series
HANDY MANUAL
FX1S Series
FX1S Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FX0N Series
FX0N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FX2(FX) Series
FX Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FX2C Series*2
FX2C Series
HANDY MANUAL

*1. FX1NC Series PLC Manual is available only in Japanese.

*2. FX2C Series PLC Manual is available only in Japanese.

A-76

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

A
Manual number

Included/separate
document

Contents

Manuals for programming

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC,

FX2NC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

JY992D88101

Separate manual

Explains instructions applicable in the FX1S,

FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC and FX2NC PLCs.

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C

JY992D48301
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Separate manual

Explains instructions available in the FX0, FX0S,

FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C PLCs.

MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured
Programming Manual
(Fundamentals)

SH080782

Separate manual

Programming methods, specifications, functions,

etc. required to create structured programs

FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Device & Common]

JY997D26001

Separate manual

Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured

projects of GX Works2

FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Basic & Applied Instruction]

JY997D34701

Separate manual

Sequence instructions provided in structured

projects of GX Works2

FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Application Functions]

JY997D34801

Separate manual

Application functions provided in structured

projects of GX Works2

D
Computer Link

Explains basic instructions and applied

instructions available in the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

Parallel Link

Separate manual

N:N Network

FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Programming Manual - Basic & JY997D16601
Applied Instruction Edition

Common Items

Manual name

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-77

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

5.2.3

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Communication equipment (option)

The table below specifies the manuals for communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C,
RS-422, RS-485 or USB and for the Ethernet adapter.
Manual name

Manual number

Included/separate
document

Contents

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication expansion board, FX3U-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication expansion board, FX3G-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication expansion board, FX2N-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and installation
procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication expansion board, FX1N-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special adapter, FX3U-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special adapter, FX3U-232ADP-MB
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special adapter, FX2NC-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special adapter, FX0N-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special adapter, FX-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-232C

communication special extension block, FX2N232IF hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

For communication in accordance with RS-232C

FX3U-232-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX3G-232-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX2N-232-BD
USER'S GUIDE

FX1N-232-BD
USER'S GUIDE

FX3U-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX3U-232ADP-MB
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX2NC-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX0N-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

FX-232ADP
USER'S GUIDE

FX2N-232IF
HARDWARE MANUAL

JY997D12901

JY997D32001

JY992D63201

JY992D84401

JY997D13701

JY997D26401

JY997D01101

JY992D51201

JY992D48801

JY992D73501

For communication in accordance with RS-422

FX3U-422-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D13101

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication

expansion board, FX3U-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

FX3G-422-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D32101

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication

expansion board, FX3G-422-BD hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.

FX2N-422-BD
USER'S GUIDE

JY992D66101

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication

expansion board, FX2N-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

A-78

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

A
FX1N-422-BD
USER'S MANUAL

Manual number
JY992D84101

Included/separate
document

Contents

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication

expansion board, FX1N-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

For communication in accordance with RS-485(422)

JY997D13001

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special expansion board, FX3U-485-BD hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.

FX3G-485-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D32201

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special expansion board, FX3G-485-BD hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.

JY997D51501

Included

FX2N-485-BD
HARDWARE MANUAL

JY992D73401

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

expansion board, FX2N-485-BD including the
specifications and installation procedure.

JY992D84201

Included

FX3U-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D13801

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special adapter, FX3U-485ADP hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

FX2NC-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D01201

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special adapter, FX2NC-485ADP hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special adapter, FX0N-485ADP hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

Included

Describes the contents of the USB

communication expansion board, FX3U-USB-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Describes the contents of the Ethernet
communication special adapter, FX3U-ENET-ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.

FX0N-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY992D53101

For communication in accordance with USB

FX3U-USB-BD
USER'S MANUAL

JY997D13501

For communication in accordance with Ethernet

JY997D47401

Included

FX3U-ENET-ADP
USER'S MANUAL

JY997D45801

Separate manual

H
Programming
Communication

FX3U-ENET-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Included

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

JY997D26301

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3U-485ADP-MB
INSTALLATION MANUAL

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special adapter, FX3U-485ADP-MB hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.

D
Computer Link

FX1N-485-BD
USER'S GUIDE

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

expansion board, FX1N-485-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

C
Parallel Link

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
INSTALLATION MANUAL

Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication

special expansion board, FX3G-485-BD-RJ hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.

B
N:N Network

FX3U-485-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

Common Items

Manual name

Describes FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet

communication special adapter details.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-79

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)

Common Items

5.2.4

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Related options for communication

The table below specifies the manuals for products required to use communication equipment (options)
above in the system configuration.
Manual name

Manual number

Included/separate
document

Contents

Connector conversion board

FX3U-CNV-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D13601

Included

Describes the contents of the FX3U-CNV-BD

special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.

FX2N-CNV-BD

JY992D63601

Included

Describes the contents of the FX2N-CNV-BD

special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.

FX1N-CNV-BD

JY992D84701

Included

Describes the contents of the FX1N-CNV-BD

special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.

FX3G-CNV-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D32301

Included

Describes the contents of the FX3G-CNV-ADP

special adapter connection conversion adapter
hardware including the installation procedure

FX3S-CNV-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL

JY997D48801

Included

Describes the contents of the FX3S-CNV-ADP

special adapter connection conversion adapter
hardware including the installation procedure

Connector conversion adapter

RS-485/RS-232C converter for computer link communication

FX-485-PC-IF-SET
HARDWARE MANUAL

JY992D81801

Included

Describes the contents of the FX-485-PC-IF-SET

interface
unit
hardware
including
the
specifications and installation procedure.

JY997D34201

Included

Describes the contents of the FX-30P Handy

Programming Panel hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.

Separate manual

Describes the contents of the FX-30P Handy

Programming Panel hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure as well
as programming operations.

FX-30P
FX-30P
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX-30P
OPERATION MANUAL

A-80

JY997D34401

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This

Manual
1. Programmable controllers
Name

FX PLC or FX CPU

Generic name of FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series PLCs

FX3U Series

Generic name of FX3U Series PLCs

FX3UC Series

Generic name of FX3U Series PLC main units

Generic name of FX3UC Series PLCs

Computer Link

FX3UC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3UC Series PLC main units
FX3G Series
FX3G PLC or main unit
FX3GC Series

Generic name of FX3G Series PLCs

Generic name of FX3G Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX3GC Series PLCs

FX3GC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3GC Series PLC main units
FX3S PLC or main unit
FX2N Series
FX2N PLC or main unit
FX2NC Series

Generic name of FX3S Series PLCs

Inverter
Communication

FX3S Series

Generic name of FX3S Series PLC main units

Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs
Generic name of FX2N Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX2NC Series PLCs

FX2NC- M (-T)
PLC

FX2NC-16MR-T, FX2NC-16MT, FX2NC-32MT, FX2NC-64MT, and FX2NC-96MT

FX2NC- MT-D/UL
PLC

FX2NC-16MT-D/UL, FX2NC-32MT-D/UL, FX2NC-64MT-D/UL, and FX2NC-96MT-D/UL

FX2NC- M -DSS
(-T-DS) PLC

FX2NC-16MR-T-DS, FX2NC-16MT-DSS, FX2NC-32MT-DSS, FX2NC-64MT-DSS, and

FX2NC-96MT-DSS

FX1N PLC or main unit

FX1NC Series
FX1NC PLC or main unit

FX1S PLC or main unit

FX0N Series
FX0N PLC or main unit
FX0 Series

FX0S PLC or main unit

FX2(FX) Series

FX2C Series
FX2C PLC or main unit

Generic name of FX1S Series PLCs

Generic name of FX1S Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX0N Series PLCs
Generic name of FX0N Series PLC main units

Generic name of FX0 Series PLCs

Generic name of FX0 Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX0S Series PLCs
Generic name of FX0S Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX2(FX) Series PLCs

Apx.A

Generic name of FX2(FX) Series PLC main units

Discontinued
models

FX2(FX) PLC or main

unit

Generic name of FX1NC Series PLC main units

Only Japanese manual is available for this product.

Remote
Maintenance

FX0 PLC or main unit

FX0S Series

Generic name of FX1N Series PLC main units

Generic name of FX1NC Series PLCs

Programming
Communication

FX1S Series

Generic name of FX1N Series PLCs

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Generic name of FX2NC- M (-T), FX2NC- MT-D/UL, and FX2NC- M -DSS(-T-DS)

Series PLC main units

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2NC PLC or main unit

FX1N Series

Parallel Link

Programmable controllers

FX3U PLC or main unit

B
N:N Network

The table below shows abbreviations, generic names and terms used in this manual.

Abbreviation/
generic name

Common Items

6.

Generic name of FX2C Series PLCs

Generic name of FX2C Series PLC main units

A-81

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

Abbreviation/
generic name
FX1 Series
FX1 PLC or main unit
Q PLC

Name
Generic name of FX1 Series PLCs
Generic name of FX1 Series PLC main units
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
Generic name of CPU units QCPU (Q mode) and QCPU (A mode)

QCPU (Q mode)

Generic name of CPU units Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,

Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU

QCPU (A mode)

Generic name of CPU units Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A

QnA PLC

Generic name of CPU units QnACPU (large type) and QnACPU (small type)

QnACPU (large type)

Generic name of CPU units Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, and

Q4ARCPU

QnACPU (small type)

Generic name of CPU units Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, and Q2ASHCPU-S1

A PLC

Generic name of CPU units ACPU (large type), ACPU (small type), and A1FXCPU

ACPU (large type)

Generic name of CPU units AnUCPU, AnACPU, AnNCPU, and A0J2(H)CPU

ACPU (small type)

Generic name of CPU units A2US(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU, and A1SJ(H)CPU

A1FXCPU

Generic name of CPU unit A1FXCPU

2. Expansion boards and special adapters

Abbreviation/
generic name

Name

Expansion board
Expansion board

Generic name of input/output expansion board, communication expansion boards,

special adapter connection boards, analog expansion boards and analog potentiometer
expansion boards

Input/output expansion
board

Generic name of input/output expansion board

4EX-BD

FX3G-4EX-BD

2EYT-BD

FX3G-2EYT-BD

Communication expansion
board or communication
board

Generic name of communication expansion boards

232BD

FX3U-232-BD, FX3G-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD, and FX1N-232-BD

422BD

FX3U-422-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX2N-422-BD, and FX1N-422-BD

485BD

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, and FX1N-485-BD

USBBD

FX3U-USB-BD

Analog expansion board

Generic name of analog expansion board

2AD-BD

FX3G-2AD-BD

1DA-BD

FX3G-1DA-BD

Analog potentiometer
expansion board
8AV-BD

Generic name of analog potentiometer expansion board

FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD

Special adapter connection

board or connector
Generic name of CNVBD
conversion board
CNVBD

FX3U-CNV-BD, FX2N-CNV-BD, and FX1N-CNV-BD

Special adapters

A-82

Special adapter

Generic name of high speed input/output special adapters, CF card special adapter,
communication special adapters and analog special adapters

High speed input/output

special adapter

Generic name of high speed input special adapters and high speed output special
adapters

2HSY-ADP

FX3U-2HSY-ADP

4HSX-ADP

FX3U-4HSX-ADP

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

A
CF card special adapter
CF-ADP

Name
Generic name of CF card special adapter
FX3U-CF-ADP

Generic name of communication special adapters

232ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX2NC-232ADP, FX0N-232ADP, and FX-232ADP

485ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB), FX2NC-485ADP, FX0N-485ADP, and FX-485ADP

ENET-ADP

FX3U-ENET-ADP

N:N Network

Communication special
adapter or communication
adapter

Common Items

Abbreviation/
generic name

Special adapters

CNVADP

Parallel Link

Special adapter connection

conversion adapter or
Generic name of CNVADP
connection conversion
adapter
FX3G-CNV-ADP, FX3S-CNV-ADP

3. Extension equipment
Name

Extension equipment
Extension equipment
Special function unit
232IF

Generic name of special function units

Generic name of special function block
Generic name of FX2N-232IF

4. Networks
Abbreviation/
generic name

Name

Generic name of CC-Link master station and CC-Link remote device stations and
CC-Link intelligent device stations

CC-Link master (station)

Generic name of CC-Link master station with model name FX2N-16CCL-M or

FX3U-16CCL-M

CC-Link remote station

Generic name of remote I/O stations and remote device stations

Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station, CC-Link/LT remote I/O stations, power
supply adapters, and dedicated power supplies
Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master and (additional) CC-Link/LT master

Built-in type CC-Link/LT

master

Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master built in to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

(Additional) CC-Link/LT
master

Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station with model name FX2N-64CL-M

Power supply adapter

Generic name of units connecting the power supply to the CC-Link/LT system

Dedicated power supply

Generic name of power supplies connected to the CC-Link/LT system

Generic name of AS-i system master station with model name FX2N-32ASI-M

MESEC I/O LINK

MELSEC I/O LINK master

Generic name of MELSEC I/O LINK master station with model name FX2N-16LNK-M

Ethernet

Apx.A

Generic name of Ethernet communication special adapter with model name

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Discontinued
models

Ethernet adapter

Remote
Maintenance

AS-i system
AS-i master

H
Programming
Communication

CC-Link/LT master

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

CC-Link intelligent device

Generic name of CC-Link intelligent device station with model name FX3U-64CCL
station
CC-Link/LT equipment

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Open field networks CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

CC-Link equipment

E
Inverter
Communication

Special function block

Generic name of extension blocks, powered extension units, special function blocks
and special function units

Computer Link

Abbreviation/
generic name

A-83

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

5. Peripheral equipment
Abbreviation/
generic name

Name

Peripheral equipment
Peripheral equipment

Generic name of programming software, handy programming panels, and display

units

Programming tools
Programming tool

Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels

Programming software

Generic name of programming software

GX Works2

Generic name of programming software packages SW DNC-GXW2-J and

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

Generic name of programming software packages SW D5C-GPPW-J and

SW D5C-GPPW-E

FXGP/WIN

Generic name of programming software packages FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E

Handy programming panel

(HPP)

Generic name of FX-30P, FX-20P(-E)-SET0, FX-20P(-E), FX-10P-SET0 and

FX-10P(-E)

Display units
GOT1000 Series

Generic name of GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11 and GT10

GOT-900 Series

Generic name of GOT-A900 and GOT-F900 Series

GOT-A900 Series

Generic name of GOT-A900 Series

GOT-F900 Series

Generic name of GOT-F900 Series

Internet mail sending tools

Mail sending units
FX-232DOPA

Generic name of FX-232DOPA mail sending units

FX-232DOPA mail sending main units
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
These products can only be used in Japan.

6. Others
Abbreviation/
generic name

Name

Inverters
FREQROL inverter

Generic name of Mitsubishi F700, A700, E700, D700, V500, F500, A500, E500, and
S500 Series inverters

Communication

Communication equipment

Generic name of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C,

communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422, communication
equipment operating in accordance with RS-485, communication equipment operating
in accordance with USB, and communication equipment operating in accordance with
Ethernet

Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS232C

Generic name of 232BD, 232ADP, and 232IF

Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS-422

Generic name of 422BD

Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485

Generic name of 485BD and 485ADP

Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with USB

Generic name of USB BD

Communication
equipment operating in
Generic name of special adapter connectable to the Ethernet
accordance with Ethernet

A-84

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

A
Name

Personal computers
Personal computer

Personal computers supporting Windows in which GX Works2, GX Developer or

FXGP/WIN is installed
Refer to the manual for each software product for supported Windows versions.

Windows 95

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 95

Windows 98

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 98

Windows Me

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

Windows NT4.0

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows NT4.0 Workstation

Windows 2000

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Microsoft Windows

XP Home Edition

Windows Vista

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System

Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System

Windows 7

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System

Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System

Windows 8

Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System

Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System

B
N:N Network

Windows

Generic name of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8

Common Items

Abbreviation/
generic name

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

A-85

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals

MEMO

A-86

6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

B. N:N Network

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

B-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains the "N:N Network" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers
and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

B-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

N:N Network

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains the N:N Network.

N:N Network

Outline of System
The N:N Network allows connection of up to eight FX PLCs via mutually linked devices through
communication in accordance with RS-485.

2) Data link is automatically updated among a maximum of eight FX PLCs.

3) The available total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") maximum (when only the 485ADP is used in
the configuration).

8 units
500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is included]
FX PLC
Slave station No. 1

For the specifications,

refer to Chapter 2.

FX PLC
Slave station No. 2
.......

To check applicable PLC

models, refer to Section 1.3.

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with .......
RS-485

For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.
For wiring,

....... refer to Chapter 4.

D70 to D77

....... The number of linked devices

can be selected among three

patterns.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

...

Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191
M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27

The link information can be

monitored in the master
station and all slave stations.

...

...

M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27

Transfer
direction

H
Programming
Communication

D70 to D77

Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191

...

...

M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27

Transfer
direction

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

E
Inverter
Communication

FX PLC
Master station

....... Number of linked units

....... Total extension distance

D
Computer Link

Important points and reference

chapter/section

System

C
Parallel Link

1) One of three patterns can be selected according to the number of devices to be linked (except FX0N and
FX1S PLCs).

...

1.1

D70 to D77

The figure above shows the maximum number of linked devices. There are differences in the specifications and
limitations depending on the selected link pattern and FX Series.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

1.2

1 Outline
1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the N:N Network setting procedures up until data link:

N:N Network
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.

Outline of system
Applicable PLC versions
Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
Number of link points and time
Number of system devices
System configuration
Select communication equipment.

Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.

Wiring procedure
One-pair wiring using twisted cables
Wiring example

Programming tool
Connect PLC.*1

Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting
(initialization).
Turn ON power.

Refer to Chapter 6.

Perform test run (communication test and

judgement method).

Serial communication setting in PLC

Communication setting is not required.
(Check only unset items.)
Communication test
Create test programs.

Refer to Chapter 7.
Create programs.

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is normally executed.

Communication parameter setting

programs
Basic program
Error indication program example
Detailed explanation of setting devices

If there is abnormality, refer to the troubleshooting

(Chapter 9).
Refer to Chapter 8.
Practical program examples

Program examples of pattern 2 are shown.

*1 For the method to connect a programming tool to a PLC, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

B-4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

N:N Network

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions

Common Items

1.3

PLC

Applicability (applicable version)

Remarks

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series

FX3GC Series

Parallel Link

FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

(Ver. 2.00 or later)*1

FX1NC Series

Computer Link

FX1N Series
FX1S Series
(Ver. 2.00 or later)

The link device range is limited.

FX0S Series

N:N Network option is not provided.

FX0 Series

N:N Network option is not provided.

FX2C Series

N:N Network option is not provided.

FX2(FX) Series

N:N Network option is not provided.

FX1 Series

N:N Network option is not provided.

Applicable in products manufactured in October, 1997 and later (manufacturers serial No.: 7X**** and
later).

The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

How to look at the manufacturer's serial number

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.

Products whose production was stopped

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

H
Programming
Communication

1.3.4

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1.3.3

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Version check

Inverter
Communication

1.3.2

The link device range is limited.

*1

FX0N Series

*1.

B
N:N Network

The communication type is applicable in the following versions.

:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

N:N Network

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the following version:

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

B-6

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

N:N Network

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

A
Model name

Remarks

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

FX-30P

Parallel Link

GX Works2

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/98

SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/V-3

SW1PC-FXGP/V3

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-A7PHP-KIT

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW1RX-GPPFX

Ver. 3.00 or later

SW2 A or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)

Apx.A

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

B-7

Discontinued
models

GOT1000 Series display units

Remote
Maintenance

Ver. 1.00 or later

H
Programming
Communication

FX-30P

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

D
Computer Link

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

B
N:N Network

GOT1000 Series display units

Applicable version

Common Items

Product name

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

N:N Network

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 5.00 or later

SW5 A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD

Ver. 5.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 4.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GOT1000 Series display units

1.4.2

Ver. 1.07H or later

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be
programmed

Priority: High Low

Model to be set

FX3UC Series

FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U Series

FX3UC, FX3U

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3GC Series

FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N

*1

FX2N*1

FX3G Series

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3S Series

FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1NC Series

FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1N Series

FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1S Series

FX1S

FX2(FX)

FX0N Series

FX0N

FX2(FX)

FX0S Series

FX0S

FX2(FX)

FX2NC Series
FX2N

Series

FX0 Series

FX0

FX2(FX)

FX2C Series

FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

*1.

FX2(FX)
FX1

"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

B-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

N:N Network

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

A
Common Items

2.

Specifications

This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.

N:N Network

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

Communication is executed according to the (fixed) specifications shown in the table below. Specification
items such as baud rate cannot be changed.

Number of connectable units

Transmission standard
Maximum total extension
distance

Control procedure
Communication method
Baud rate

Remarks

8 maximum
RS-485 standard
500 m (1640' 5") or less
[50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD
is included in system]

Distance varies depending on

communication equipment type.

N:N Network

Half-duplex,
bidirectional communication

38400 bps

Inverter
Communication

Start bit
Character Data bit
format
Parity bit

Fixed

Stop bit
Header

Fixed

Control line

Sum check

Fixed

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Terminator

D
Computer Link

Protocol type

Specifications

Parallel Link

Item

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

N:N Network

2.2 Link Specifications

2.2

Link Specifications

2.2.1

Link patterns and number of link points in each FX Series

The number of occupied link points varies depending on the number of slave stations used.
For example, when three slave stations are connected in "Pattern 1", M1000 to M1223 and D0 to D33 are
occupied, and unoccupied devices can be used as general devices for control.
(Link devices for unconnected slave stations can be used as general devices for control, but it is
recommended to leave them in the unoccupied status if slave stations may be added in the future.)
: Applicable
: Not applicable
PLC Series

Pattern 0

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

FX1S Series

FX0N Series

FX3U, FX3UC Series

FX3G, FX3GC Series
FX3S Series
FX2N, FX2NC Series
FX1N, FX1NC Series

Pattern 0

Slave
stations

B-10

Pattern 2

Word
device (D)

Bit
device (M)

Word
device (D)

Bit
device (M)

Word
device (D)

4 in each
station

32 in each
station

4 in each
station

64 in each
station

8 in each
station

Station
No. 0

D 0 to D 3

M1000 to M1031

D 0 to D 3

M1000 to M1063

D 0 to D 7

Station
No. 1

D10 to D13 M1064 to M1095 D10 to D13 M1064 to M1127 D10 to D17

Station
No. 2

D20 to D23 M1128 to M1159 D20 to D23 M1128 to M1191 D20 to D27

Station
No. 3

D30 to D33 M1192 to M1223 D30 to D33 M1192 to M1255 D30 to D37

Station
No. 4

D40 to D43 M1256 to M1287 D40 to D43 M1256 to M1319 D40 to D47

Station
No. 5

D50 to D53 M1320 to M1351 D50 to D53 M1320 to M1383 D50 to D57

Station
No. 6

D60 to D63 M1384 to M1415 D60 to D63 M1384 to M1447 D60 to D67

Station
No. 7

D70 to D73 M1448 to M1479 D70 to D73 M1448 to M1511 D70 to D77

Station No.

Master
station

Pattern 1

Bit
device (M)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

N:N Network

Link time
The link time indicates the cycle time in which link devices are updated.
The link time varies depending on the number of linked units (master station and slave stations) and the
number of linked devices as shown in the table below.
Unit: ms
Pattern 1

Pattern 2

32 bit-devices
4 word-devices

64 bit-devices
8 word-devices

18

22

34

26

32

50

33

42

66

41

52

83

49

62

99

57

72

115

65

82

131

C
Parallel Link

Pattern 0
0 bit-devices
4 word-devices

B
N:N Network

Number of
linked
stations

Common Items

2.2.2

2.2 Link Specifications

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

3.

3.1 System Configuration

System Configuration and Equipment Selection

This chapter explains the configuration of the communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485 and the system selection required by FX PLCs.

3.1

System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use the N:N Network.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

This is the communication board built

into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.

50 m
(164' 0")

Attach the special adapter connection

board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Communication
board

Communication Special adapter

connection
adapter
board

Communication
adapter

Connector
conversion
adapter

Communication
adapter

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.

B-12

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

C
Parallel Link

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N

FX2NC-485ADP

FX0N-485ADP

(European terminal block)

(Terminal block)

Computer Link

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX1N-CNV-BD

Inverter
Communication

FX1S

(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")

FX1N-485-BD

+
FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

H
Programming
Communication

FX1N-CNV-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

(European terminal block)

FX1N

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Apx.A

Remote
Maintenance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD

FX2N

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

Discontinued
models

FX2N-CNV-BD

B
N:N Network

Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- N:N Network is not provided for the FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs.

Common Items

3.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

B-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3S

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

ch1

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(European terminal block) (RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

B-14

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

ch2

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.

Parallel Link

ch1

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

ch2

D
Computer Link

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-
ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents (European terminal block)
232 and 485).

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

E
Inverter
Communication

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

FX3U

500 m
(1640' 5")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

Common Items

FX Series

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

(European terminal block)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

port channel.
ch1

ch2

FX3U

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

FX3GC

+
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

B-16

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

N:N Network

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

Parallel Link

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

D
Computer Link

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Inverter
Communication

RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
a FX3U-8AV-BD is used,

When
port channel.

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

it occupies one communication

ch2

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")

Programming
Communication

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX3U-CNV-BD FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

B-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

4.

4.1 Wiring Procedure

Wiring
This chapter explains the wiring.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

4.1

Wiring Procedure
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.

2
3
4

For details, refer to Section 4.2.

Turning OFF the power to the PLC

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.

Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)

Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.

Wiring communication equipment

Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.

B-18

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Common Items

4.2

4 Wiring

Select cables using the procedure described below.

4.2.1

Twisted pair cable

1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer

Model name

Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.

The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

DPEV SB 0.3 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

E
Inverter
Communication

Fujikura Ltd.

SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P

Computer Link

Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

Parallel Link

Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Remarks

SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P

N:N Network

Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used for wiring.

2. Cable structural drawing (reference)

Pair

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Shield

4.2.2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Two-pair cable structural

drawing example

Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

10BASE-T cable

1. Selection procedure when purchasing

1) Cable type

: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)

2) Connection specifications : Straight type

3) Connector

H
Programming
Communication

10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.

: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)

Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.

Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.

Remote
Maintenance

2. Cautions on using commercial cables

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

4.2.3

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

AWG22 to
AWG20

AWG22

Bar terminal with

Insulating sleeve
(cable size)

Tightening
torque

Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
Nm

Tool size
A

0.4 (0.01")

2.5 (0.09")

FX3G-485-BDRJ

AWG20 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD

AWG26 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

Not applicable

0.4 to 0.5
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2NC-485ADP

AWG26 to
AWG16

AWG26 to
AWG20

Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD

Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")

Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")

FX2NC-485ADP

When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve

Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name

Caulking tool

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)

*1.
*2.

B-20

Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6

Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")

Insulating sleeve

Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")

2.6 mm
(0.1")

14 mm
(0.55")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Note

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).

For size A and size B,

refer to the table above.

N:N Network

<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name

Parallel Link

Manufacturer

SZS 0.4 2.5

FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP

Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name

SZF 1-0.6 3.5

Computer Link

2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

E
Inverter
Communication

When wiring one cable to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When wiring two cables to one terminal

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

H
Programming
Communication

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Common Items

Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.

Terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

4.2.4

4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting terminal resistors

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.

1. Terminal resistor type

Use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.

Brown

Precision

1 1 1
=110
(101)

2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
FX3U-485-BD

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Terminal
resistor
selector
switch

330
OPEN
110

Terminal
resistor selector
switch

FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name
SZS 0.4 2.5

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Terminal block mounting screws

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Terminal resistor
selector switch

B-22

Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

0.4mm
(0.01")

2.5mm
(0.09")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

Connection Diagram

Common Items

4.3

4.3 Connection Diagram

Use one-pair wiring for an N:N Network.

Terminal
resistor:
110

B
FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

SG

LINK
SG

SG

Terminal
resistor:
110
*3

C
Parallel Link

*3

FX0N-485ADP

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

N:N Network

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

D
SG

Computer Link

*1 Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD,
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

FG*2
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

Inverter
Communication

*2 Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
*3 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor. Set the terminal resistor selector
switch accordingly.
The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with terminal resistors.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

4.3 Connection Diagram

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame

Distributor (BMJ-8)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
*1

Connector metal frame

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

*1

5
RDA
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame

Class-D
grounding

*1

*1

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

(Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110)*2

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding

Class-D
grounding

*1.

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Distributor (BMJ-8)

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110)*2

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground, wire the ground wire only to either one of two
poles of the terminal block.

*2.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the terminal resistor selector
switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name

Model name
TM11AP-88P

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.

Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair.

Wiring circuit
switch

B-24

Manufacturer

RJ45 connector

HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

N:N Network

Grounding

Common Items

4.4

4.4 Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below.

The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.

PLC

Other
equipment

Other
equipment

Shared grounding
Good condition

PLC

Other
equipment

Common grounding
Not allowed

Parallel Link

Independent grounding
Best condition

PLC

B
N:N Network

Independent grounding should be performed for best results.

When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.

The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

N:N Network

5.

5.1 Check Procedure

Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX

Programmable Controller
The communication setting is not required in FX PLCs for the N:N network.
Using the following procedure, verify that the communication setting is not specified for another
communication type and verify that the setting is correct.
When using this communication function in ch1 in an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8120
and D8400 using the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8420 using
the following procedure.
In other PLCs, use D8120 for verification.

5.1

Check Procedure
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420)
Turn ON the power to the PLC while it is in STOP mode, and monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is "0"
The communication setting is not provided.

2. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is any value other than "0"
The communication setting is provided.

Checking absence/presence of parameter setting

Check for the absence/presence using the GX Works2, GX Developer, FXGP/WIN or FX-30P.
1) GX Works2 operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.2.)
2) FXGP/WIN operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.3.)
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Checking absence/presence of sequence program setting

Check whether or not a write instruction is programmed for D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When such an instruction is programmed
Program example: (for D8120)
Change the program as shown below, and then change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H23F6

D8120

Program example

The value varies depending on

the communication setting.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H0000

D8120

Changed program

2. When such an instruction is not programmed

Proceed to the next step.

4
B-26

Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420) again, and confirming that its value is "0"

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

5.2.1

Operating procedure

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.

Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.

Opening the parameter setting window

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

Communication setting may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

5.2

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Select a channel to be used, and click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
Make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" check box is clear.
If a check mark is there, clear it.
Click [End].

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Writing parameters and program to the PLC

Apx.A

B-27

Discontinued
models

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

5.3

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication setting may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

5.3.1

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Double-click [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
1. When there are no parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are no communication settings.
Click the [No] button.
In this case, the next step is not required.

2. When there are already parameter settings

The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are communication settings.
Click the [Clear] button to delete the communication settings from parameters.
Transfer parameters to the PLC using the following step.

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

B-28

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

N:N Network

6.1 Test Procedure

A
Common Items

6.

Test Run (Communication Test)

6.1

C
Parallel Link

Test Procedure

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the communication test procedures for the N:N Network.
It is recommended to first wire the master station and slave stations, initialize communication settings in the
FX PLCs, and then execute the communication test using the following procedure to confirm proper
operation.

Creating programs for the communication test

Create new programs for the communication test for the master station and slave stations.
For program examples, refer to Section 6.2.

Computer Link

Transferring the program to each PLC

Turn ON the power to each PLC, and transfer the program.

Validating the communication setting

When the PLC is in RUN mode, set it to STOP mode once, and then set it to RUN mode again.
Or turn OFF the power of the master station and all slave stations in communication, and then turn
ON the power of these stations at the same time.

Inverter
Communication

Confirming flashing of the communication status indicator lamps (SD and RD)

Confirming the link of the master station

Set the inputs X000 to

X003 to ON or OFF.
Slave station No. 1

Slave station No. 2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the master station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in each slave station.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Confirm that the built-in SD and RD lamps of the communication equipment are flashing.
If they are off, take proper action while referring to the troubleshooting procedures described later.

Confirm that the inputs in the

master station turn ON or OFF
according to the outputs Y000
to Y003.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Confirm that the inputs in the

master station turn ON or OFF
according to the outputs Y000
to Y003.

Programming
Communication

Master station

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

N:N Network

6.1 Test Procedure

Confirming the link of slave stations

Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in each slave station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y004 to Y007, Y010 to Y013, Y014 to Y017... Y030 to Y033) turn ON or OFF in each slave station.
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Master station

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to

X003) in the slave station No. 1
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y004 to Y007)
respectively.
Confirm that the inputs (X000 to
X003) in the slave station No. 2
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y010 to Y013)
respectively.

Set the inputs X000 to

X003 to ON or OFF.

Slave station No. 1

Slave station No. 2

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to

X003) in the slave station No. 2
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y010 to Y013)
respectively.

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to

X003) in the slave station No. 1
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y004 to Y007)
respectively.

If unable to establish link, refer to "Chapter 9. Troubleshooting".

Assignment of inputs and outputs (link devices)
The table below shows devices used in the test programs shown later:
Station No.

B-30

Input (X)

Link device

Output (Y)

Master station

X000 to X003

D0

Y000 to Y003

Slave station No. 1

X000 to X003

D10

Y004 to Y007

Slave station No. 2

X000 to X003

D20

Y010 to Y013

Slave station No. 3

X000 to X003

D30

Y014 to Y017

Slave station No. 4

X000 to X003

D40

Y020 to Y023

Slave station No. 5

X000 to X003

D50

Y024 to Y027

Slave station No. 6

X000 to X003

D60

Y030 to Y033

Slave station No. 7

X000 to X003

D70

Y034 to Y037

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing

Creating Programs for the Communication Testing

Common Items

6.2

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

Create the programs shown below for the master station and each slave station.
(In the communication test, set the refresh range to pattern 0.)

6.2.1

Creating a program for the master station

M8038
0

FNC 12
MOV

K0

D8176

FNC 12
MOV

K0

D8178

FNC 12
MOV

K3

D8179

FNC 12
MOV

K5

D8180

M8000
34

K1X000

D0

FNC 12
MOV

D10

K1Y004

FNC 12
MOV

D20

K1Y010

D70

K1Y034

Step for writing information from the master station (master

station slave station)
The contents of X000 to X003 in the master station are
transferred to outputs (Y) in this slave station.

Steps for reading information from a slave station (slave

station master station)
By using link devices, read information from all slave
stations.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Link device
D10
D20
D30
D40
D50
D60
D70

Output (Y)
Y004 to Y007
Y010 to Y013
Y014 to Y017
Y020 to Y023
Y024 to Y027
Y030 to Y033
Y034 to Y037

Specify device numbers for the

connected slave stations.

H
Programming
Communication

FNC 12
MOV

When using ch1, this step is not required.

When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(Only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FNC 12
MOV

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

28

D
Computer Link

D8177

Parallel Link

K2

Set the number of slave stations to D8177.

The setting range is from K1 to K7.

Inverter
Communication

FNC 12
MOV

M8179

M8000

N:N Network

Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)

I
Remote
Maintenance

END

Caution

2) In the circuit from step 34, create a program for link devices (MOV instruction) for all connected slave
stations.

B-31

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

1) When using a PLC (such as an FX1S and FX3S Series PLC) with a small number of outputs, transfer
information from slave stations to auxiliary relays (M), etc., and then monitor the auxiliary relays using a
programming tool. (Example: Change "K1Y004" to "K1M4".)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

N:N Network

6.2.2

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing

Creating a program for each slave station.

Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
Determine the station number of each slave station, and then transfer a program corresponding to the station
number to each slave station.
Assign station numbers from "1" in the ascending order. (Use one station number only once. Do not skip
station numbers.)
M8038
0

M8000
8

FNC 12
MOV

FNC 12
MOV

K1

D8176

Set the slave station number to D8176.

The setting range is from K1 to K7.

M8179

When using ch1, this step is not required.

When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(Only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

K1X000

D10

Specify the link device

number for this slave
station.

M8000
14

FNC 12
MOV

D0

K1Y000

FNC 12
MOV

D20

K1Y010

FNC 12
MOV

D30

K1Y014

FNC 12
MOV

D70

K1Y034

Step for writing information from a slave station (slave

station master station)
Transfer the contents of X000 to X003 in this slave station
to a link device. The link device varies depending on the
station number.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
Link device
Output (Y)
1
D10
Y004 to Y007
2
D20
Y010 to Y013
3
D30
Y014 to Y017
4
D40
Y020 to Y023
5
D50
Y024 to Y027
6
D60
Y030 to Y033
7
D70
Y034 to Y037
Step for reading information from the master station (master
station slave station)
The contents of X000 to X003 in the master station are
transferred to outputs (Y) in this slave station.
Steps for reading information from another slave station
(another slave stations this slave station)
By using link devices, read information from all other slave
stations.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Link device
D10
D20
D30
D40
D50
D60
D70

Output (Y)
Y004 to Y007
Y010 to Y013
Y014 to Y017
Y020 to Y023
Y024 to Y027
Y030 to Y033
Y034 to Y037

Specify link device numbers for

other slave stations. (Do not specify
the device number (D10) for this
slave station.)

END

Caution
1) When using a PLC (such as an FX1S and FX3S Series PLC) with a small number of outputs, transfer
information from slave stations to auxiliary relays (M), etc., and then monitor the auxiliary relays using a
programming tool. (Example: Change "K1Y004" to "K1M4".)
2) In the circuit from step 14, specify link devices for other slave stations.

B-32

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs

N:N Network

7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

A
Common Items

7.

Creating Programs

7.1

Checking Contents of Related Devices

1. Devices for setting the N:N Network

These devices are used for setting the N:N Network. Setting these devices is essential for using N:N Network.
Name

Description

Set value

Parallel Link

The tables below show the devices used by the N:N Network.

Device

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains how to set the N:N Network and how to create programs.
In N:N Network, pattern 0, 1 or 2 can be set according to the refresh range value. The number of used
devices varies depending on the pattern.
In N:N Network using (including) the FX0N or FX1S Series, only pattern 0 is applicable.

This device is a flag for setting communication parameters, and is used to

check for absence/presence of N:N Network program also.
Do not set this device to ON in the sequence program.

M8179

Channel setting

Set the channel of the communication port to be used (in the FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC).
When "OUT M8179" program does not exist: ch 1
When "OUT M8179" program exists: ch 2

D8176

Station number
settings

Set the station number used in the N:N Network.

Master station: 0, slave station: 1 to 7
[Initial value: 0]

0 to 7

Slave station
quantity setting

Set the total number of slave stations.

This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 7]

Inverter
Communication

D8177

1 to 7

D8178

Refresh range
setting

Select the desired pattern of device points used for communication.

This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 0]
Only pattern 0 is applicable when a FX0N or FX1S Series is included.

0 to 2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D8179

Number of
retries

When a response is not given even after communication is repeated the

specified number of times, it is regarded as an error.
Errors in other stations can be checked.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 3]

0 to 10

D8180

Monitoring time

Set the time (50 to 2550 ms) for communication error in 10 ms units.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 5]

5 to 255

Computer Link

Parameter
setting

M8038

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs

N:N Network

7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

2. Devices for determining errors in the N:N Network

These devices are used for determining errors in the N:N Network. Use them to output link errors to the
outside and interlock sequence programs.
Different devices are used between the FX0N/FX1S Series and the FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series. Use devices according to the PLCs used.
Device
FX0N,
FX1S

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC,

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC

M504

M8183

M505 to M511*1

M8184 to M8190*2

M503

M8191

Name

Description

Master station data

This device turns ON when a data transfer
transfer sequence
sequence error occurs in the master station.
error
Slave station data
transfer sequence
error

This device turns ON when a data transfer

sequence error occurs in a slave station.

Data transfer
sequence ON

This device remains ON while the N:N

Network is operating.

*1.

Station No. 1: M505, Station No. 2: M506, Station No. 3: M507... Station No. 7: M511

*2.

Station No. 1: M8184, Station No. 2: M8185, Station No. 3: M8186... Station No. 7: M8190

3. Link devices
These devices are used for sending and receiving information among the PLCs. The device numbers used
and number of devices vary depending on the station number set in D8176 (station number settings) and the
pattern set in D8178 (refresh range setting).
1) In the case of pattern 0
0 (master
station)

D0 to D3

D10 to
D13

D20 to
D23

D30 to
D33

D40 to
D43

D50 to
D53

D60 to
D63

D70 to
D73

0 (master
station)

Bit devices
(32 points for
each station)

M1000 to
M1031

M1064 to
M1095

M1128 to
M1159

M1192 to
M1223

M1256 to
M1287

M1320 to
M1351

M1384 to
M1415

M1448 to
M1479

Word device
(4 points for
each station)

D0 to D3

D10 to
D13

D20 to
D23

D30 to
D33

D40 to
D43

D50 to
D53

D60 to
D63

D70 to
D73

0 (master
station)

Bit devices
(64 points for
each station)

M1000 to
M1063

M1064 to
M1127

M1128 to
M1191

M1192 to
M1255

M1256 to
M1319

M1320 to
M1383

M1384 to
M1447

M1448 to
M1511

Word device
(8 points for
each station)

D0 to D7

D10 to
D17

D20 to
D27

D30 to
D37

D40 to
D47

D50 to
D57

D60 to
D67

D70 to
D77

Station No.
Word device
(4 points for
each station)

2) In the case of pattern 1

Station No.

3) In the case of pattern 2

Station No.

Caution
When creating a program, do not change the information in devices used by other stations. If such
information is changed, other stations will not operate normally.

B-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs

N:N Network

Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)

Common Items

7.2

7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)

Create programs for the master station.

Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices.
Program for setting the N:N Network

FNC 12
MOV

K2

D8177

FNC 12
MOV

K1

D8178

FNC 12
MOV

K3

D8179

K5

D8180
Channel
setting

Number of retries: 3 (3 times)

Set the number of retrying communication after a link
error is detected.
[Setting range: 0 to 10]

Monitoring time: 5 (50 ms)

Set the time by which communication error is determined.
[Setting range: 5 to 255]
Set the communication port to be used.
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8179

Refresh range setting: 1 (pattern 1)

Set the pattern of devices used in communication.
[Setting range: 0 to 2]
(Only pattern 0 is applicable in the FX0N or FX1S
Series.)

Cautions on setting up the N:N Network

When setting up the N:N Network in a program using Structured Ladder or FBD programming, connect the
ENO output to the EN input for the MOV instruction.
<Program example>

Parameter setting

D8176

K5

EN
s

MOV
ENO
d

D8180

K2

MOV
EN
ENO
s
d

D8177

K1

MOV
EN
ENO
s
d

D8178

K3

MOV
EN
ENO
s
d

D8179

Programming
Communication

K0

MOV
EN
ENO
s
d

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Note the following cautions when creating a program using Structured Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.

M8038

Inverter
Communication

FNC 12
MOV

Slave station quantity setting: 2 (2 slave stations)

Set the number of connected slave stations.
[Setting range: 1 to 7]

Computer Link

D8176

Parallel Link

K0

Make sure to start the program for setting the N:N Network
from step 0.
Station number setting: 0 (master station)
Station number "0" indicates the master station.

N:N Network

Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV

<Program example>
MOV(MOV(MOV(MOV(MOV(M8038, K0, D8176), K2, D8177), K1, D8178), K3, D8179), K5, D8180);

Remote
Maintenance

When setting up the N:N Network in a program using ST programming, use the MOV instruction as shown
in the following program example.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

7 Creating Programs
7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)

Program for indicating link errors

Station No. 1
Data transfer sequence error
M8184

This program is required to indicate the N:N Network status.

Y000

When a link error occurs in the station No. 1, Y000 is

set to ON.

Y001

When a link error occurs in the station No. 2, Y001 is set

to ON.
Create this step for each connected slave station.
Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series:
M505 to M511 (station No. 1 to station No. 7)
For any series other than FX0N and FX1S Series:
M8184 to M8190 (station No. 1 to station No. 7)

Y010

While the N:N Network is executed, Y010 remains ON.

Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series: M503
For any series other than FX0N and FX1S Series: M8191

Station No. 2
Data transfer sequence error
M8185

Data transfer sequence ON

M8191

Program for writing link devices

(master station slave station)

M1000

This program is required to write information from the

master station to each slave station.
The information from X000 is written to M1000 (link device).

M1001

The information from X002 is written to M1001 (link device).

M1002

The information from M10 is written to M1002 (link device).

X000

X002

M10

M8000

Station No. 1
Data transfer
sequence error
M8184

FNC 12
MOV

K4M100

K4M1010

FNC 12
MOV

D100

D0

The information from M100 to M115 is written to M1010 to

M1025 (link devices).
The information from D100 is written to D0 (link device).
* In pattern 0, bit devices are not applicable.
Use word devices only.
Program for reading link devices
(master station slave station)

M1064
M0

This program is required to read information from each

slave station to the master station.
Monitor link errors in each slave station, and read them.
The information from M1064 (link device) is read to M0.

M1065
Y011

The information from M1065 (link device) is read to Y011.

M15

The information from M1066 (link device) is read to M15.

M1066

B-36

FNC 12
MOV

K4M1070

K4Y020

The information from M1070 to M1085 (link devices) is

read to Y020 to Y037.

FNC 12
MOV

D10

D110

The information from D10 (link device) is read to D110.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

7 Creating Programs
7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)

A
Common Items

Station No. 2
Data transfer
sequence error
M8185

M1128
M1

The information from M1128 (link device) is read to M1.

Y012

The information from M1129 (link device) is read to Y012.

M18

The information from M1130 (link device) is read to M18.

M1130

K4M1140

K4M20

The information from M1140 to M1155 (link devices) is

read to M20 to M35.

FNC 12
MOV

D20

D200

The information from D20 (link device) is read to D200.

C
Parallel Link

FNC 12
MOV

N:N Network

M1129

D
Computer Link

For details on link devices, refer to Section 7.1.

For cautions on program creation, refer to Section 7.4.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

7.3

7 Creating Programs
7.3 Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")

Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")

Create programs for the slave stations.
Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices.
Program for setting the N:N Network

Make sure to start the program for setting the N:N Network
from step 0.

Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV

K1

D8176

Station number setting: 1 (slave station)

Set the station number of each slave station.
Only set the station number for the slave station;
Other settings are not required.

Channel
setting
M8179

Set the communication port to be used (in the FX3G, FX3GC,

FX3U and FX3UC).
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".

Program for indicating link errors

Station No. 0
Data transfer sequence error
M8183

This program is required to indicate the N:N Network status.

Y000

When a link error occurs in station No. 0, Y000 is set to ON.

Y001

When a link error occurs in station No. 2, Y001 is set to ON.

Create this step for each connected slave station.
Note that the devices to be used are different depending
on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series:
M504 to M511 (station No. 0 to station No. 7)
For any series other than FX 0N and FX1S Series:
M8183 to M8190 (station No. 0 to station No. 7)

Station No. 2
Data transfer sequence error
M8185

Data transfer sequence ON

M8191
Y010

While the N:N Network is executed, Y010 remains ON.

Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series: M503
For any series other than FX 0N and FX1S Series: M8191
Program for writing link devices
(slave station master or slave station)
This program is required to write information from a slave
station to the master station or another slave station.

X000
M1064

The information from X000 is written to M1064 (link device).

M1065

The information from X002 is written to M1065 (link device).

M1066

The information from M10 is written to M1066 (link device).

X002

M10

M8000

FNC 12
MOV

K4M100

K4M1070

The information from M100 to M115 is written to M1070 to

M1085 (link devices).

FNC 12
MOV

D100

D10

The information from D100 is written to D10 (link device).

* In pattern 0, bit devices are not available.
Use word devices only.

B-38

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

7 Creating Programs
7.3 Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")

M1000
M0

The information from M1000 (link device) is read to M0.

M1001
The information from M1001 (link device) is read to Y011.

M15

The information from M1002 (link device) is read to M15.

M1002

K4Y020

The information from M1010 to M1025 (link devices) is

read to Y020 to Y037.

FNC 12
MOV

D0

D110

The information from D0 (link device) is read to D110.

D
Computer Link

K4M1010

E
M1128
M1
M1129

The information from D1128 (link device) is read to M1.

The information from D1129 (link device) is read to Y012.

M18

The information from D1130 (link device) is read to M18.

M1130

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Y012

Inverter
Communication

Station No. 2
Data transfer
sequence error
M8185

FNC 12
MOV

C
Parallel Link

Y011

B
N:N Network

Station No. 0
Data transfer
sequence error
M8183

This program is required to read information from the

master station or another slave station to a slave station.
Monitor link errors in each slave station, and read them.

Common Items

Program for reading link devices

(slave station master or slave station)

FNC 12
MOV

K4M1140

K4M20

The information from M1140 to M1155 (link devices) is

read to M20 to M35.

FNC 12
MOV

D20

D200

The information from D20 (link device) is read to D200.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

For details on link devices, refer to Section 7.1.

For cautions on program creation, refer to Section 7.4.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

7.4

7 Creating Programs
7.4 Cautions on Program Creation

Cautions on Program Creation

1. Effect on the operation cycle
When the N:N Network is used, the operation cycle in each PLC becomes longer by about 10% regardless of
the number of linked stations and adopted communication patterns.

2. Program for setting the N:N Network

1) Make sure to create a program for setting the N:N Network from step 0 using M8038 (drive contact).
Otherwise, the N:N Network is disabled.
2) Do not set M8038 to ON using a program or programming tool.
3) Set station numbers consecutively. If a station number that is used twice or more is skipped, link will not
be achieved normally.
4) Pay close attention when setting up the N:N Network for the master station in a program using Structured
Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.
For details, refer to Section 7.2.

3. Program for reading link devices

Do not change the contents of link devices at other stations.
1) When a link error (data transfer sequence error) occurs, the link device information is held in the status
just before occurrence of the link error.
Create a fail-safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs.

4. Cautions on using FX0N/FX1S PLCs

1) Link pattern when FX0N/FX1S PLCs are used or included
When FX0N/FX1S PLCs are included in the system, make sure to set pattern 0 in D8178 (refresh range
setting).
If any other pattern is set, data transfer error occurs in all FX0N/FX1S PLCs included in the system, and
the link time becomes longer.
2) When user devices are occupied as system devices
In FX0N/FX1S PLCs, M503 to M511 and D201 to D255 are handled as devices dedicated to the N:N
Network, and cannot be handled as general devices any more. Do not set these devices to ON or OFF
using a user program, display unit or programming tool.
If these devices are set to ON or OFF, the N:N Network may malfunction.

5. Cautions on using FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs

1) Only ch 1 or ch 2 can be set in the N:N Network.
2) Do not use the N:N Network and parallel link at the same time.
(For example, it is not allowed to use ch1 for the N:N Network and use ch2 for parallel link.)

6. Link device update timing

Link device update in N:N network is executed in the interrupt processing.
Because the interrupt processing is generated asynchronously from operations of the sequence program, it
may be performed during ladder operation.

B-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

N:N Network

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

A
Common Items

8.

Practical Program Examples

This chapter shows practical programs.

N:N Network

8.1

Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

This program example adopts pattern 2 which uses the maximum number of link devices.
When an FX0N or FX1S PLC is included, however, only pattern 0 is applicable.

Parallel Link

8.1.1

System configuration example

The example below shows a system configuration in which three FX PLCs are linked.
FX2N PLC

FX2N PLC

FX2N-485-BD

D
Computer Link

FX2N-485-BD

FX2N PLC

FX2N-485-BD

E
Station No. 1 (slave station)

Inverter
Communication

Station No. 0 (master station)

Station No. 2 (slave station)

- Refresh range: 64-bit devices and 8 word devices (pattern 2)

- Number of retries: 5
- Monitoring time: 70 ms

Contents of operations and corresponding program numbers

The program examples shown later execute the data processing shown in the table below.
The operation No. corresponds to the operation [1] (for example) indicated in the programs shown later.
Operation
No.

Data source

Data change destination and contents

Master station

Inputs X000 to X003

(M1000 to M1003)

Slave station No. 1 Outputs Y010 to Y013

[2]

Slave station No. 1

Inputs X000 to X003

(M1064 to M1067)

Master station

[3]

Slave station No. 2

Inputs X000 to X003

(M1128 to M1131)

Master station

Data register D1

Slave station No. 1 Set value of counter C1

Slave station No. 2 Outputs Y010 to Y013

Outputs Y014 to Y017

Slave station No. 2 Outputs Y014 to Y017

Programming
Communication

Outputs Y020 to Y023

Slave station No. 1 Outputs Y020 to Y023

Word device link

[4]

[6]
[7]

Master station

Data register D2

Output Y005

Slave station No. 2 Set value of counter C2

Slave station No. 2 Contact of counter C2 (M1140) Master station

Output Y006

Slave station No. 1 Data register D10

Master station

Slave station No. 1 (D10) + Slave

station No. 2 (D20) is stored to D3.

Slave station No. 1

Master station (D0) + Slave station

No. 2 (D20) is stored to D11.

Slave station No. 2

Master station (D0) + Slave station

No. 1 (D10) is stored to D21.

Slave station No. 2 Data register D20

Master station

Data register D0

Slave station No. 2 Data register D20

Master station

Data register D0

Slave station No. 1 Data register D10

B-41

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

[8]

Slave station No. 1 Contact of counter C1 (M1070) Master station

Remote
Maintenance

[5]

Master station

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Bit device link

[1]

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.1.2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

N:N Network

8.1.3

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

Setting contents
The program examples shown later adopt the following communication parameters:

8.1.4

System device

Master station

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

D8176

K0

K1

K2

Station number settings

Contents

D8177

K2

Total number of slave stations: 2

D8178

K2

Refresh range: Pattern 2

D8179

K5

Number of retries: 5

D8180

K7

Monitoring time: 70 ms

Setting program for master station

For the master station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".

1. Parameter setting program

Make sure to start from step 0.

Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV

K 0

D8176

Station number settings: 0 (master station)

FNC 12
MOV

K 2

D8177

Slave station quantity setting: 2 (2 slave stations)

FNC 12
MOV

K 2

D8178

Refresh range setting: 2 (pattern 2)

FNC 12
MOV

K 5

D8179

Number of retries setting: 5 (5 times)

FNC 12
MOV

K 7

D8180

Monitoring time setting: 7 (70 ms)

Caution
Pay close attention when setting up the N:N Network for the master station in a program using Structured
Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.
For details, refer to Section 7.2.

2. Error indication program

Because the master station does not recognize errors within itself (the master station), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 1
M8184
Y001
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 2
M8185
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003

B-42

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

N:N Network

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

RUN monitor
M8000

MOV

K1X000 K1M1000

Operation [1]

MOV

K1M1064 K1Y014

Operation [2]

MOV

K1M1128 K1Y020

Operation [3]

Common Items

3. Operation program

Data transfer sequence error

in slave station No. 1

N:N Network

M8184

Data transfer sequence error

in slave station No. 2

M8185

C
Parallel Link

Data transfer sequence error

in slave station No. 1

M8184

MOV

K 10

D 1

Operation [4]
M1070

Computer Link

C1 contact of slave station No. 1

Y005

Data transfer sequence error

in slave station No. 2

M8185

K 10

Operation [5]

C2 contact of slave station No. 2

M1140

Data transfer
sequence error
in slave station
No. 2

M8184

M8185

Y006

F
ADD

D 20

D 3

Operation [6]

MOV

K 10

D 0

Operation [7]
Operation [8]

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

D 10

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1

D 2

Inverter
Communication

MOV

END

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

8.1.5

8 Practical Program Examples

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

Setting program for slave station (No. 1)

For the slave station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".

1. Parameter setting program

Make sure to start from step 0.

Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV

K 1

D8176

Station number settings: 1 (slave station No. 1)

2. Error indication program

Because slave station No. 1 does not recognize errors within itself (slave station No. 1), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in master station
M8183
Y000
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 2
M8185
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003

B-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

N:N Network

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

A
Common Items

3. Operation program
Counter reset
X001
RST

C 1

K1M1000 K1Y010

Operation [1]

MOV

K1X000 K1M1064

Operation [2]

MOV

K1M1128 K1Y020

Operation [3]

C
Parallel Link

MOV

N:N Network

Master station
Data transfer sequence error
M8183

Data transfer
sequence error in
slave station No. 2
M8185

D
Computer Link

Counter input
X000
C1
D1
C1
Y005

Inverter
Communication

Y006

Operation [5]

K 10

D 10

Operation [6]
Operation [8]

D 0

D 20

D 11

Operation [7]

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

MOV

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ADD

M1070

Data transfer
sequence
error in slave Slave station No. 2
station No. 2 C2 contact
M8185
M1140

Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 2
M8185

Operation [4]

END

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

8.1.6

8 Practical Program Examples

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

Setting program for slave station (No. 2)

For the slave station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".

1. Parameter setting program

Make sure to start from step 0.

Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV

K 2

D8176

Station number settings: 2 (slave station No. 2)

2. Error indication program

Because slave station No. 2 does not recognize errors within itself (slave station No. 2), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in master station
M8183
Y000
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 1
M8184
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003

B-46

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

N:N Network

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)

A
Common Items

3. Operation program
Counter reset
X001
RST

C 2

MOV

K1M1000 K1Y010

Data transfer
sequence error in
slave station No. 1
M8184

Operation [1]

C
MOV

K1M1064 K1Y014

Operation [2]

MOV

K1X000 K1M1128

Operation [3]

Parallel Link

Slave Station No. 1

C1 contact
M1070
Y005

Computer Link

Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1
M8184

N:N Network

Master station
Data transfer sequence error
M8183

Operation [4]

Counter input
X000

E
Inverter
Communication

C2
D2
C2
Y006

Operation [5]

F
MOV

K 10

D 20

Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1
M8184

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M1140

Operation [6]
Operation [7]

G
D 0

D 10

D 21

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

ADD

Operation [8]

H
Programming
Communication

END

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Troubleshooting

N:N Network

9.

9.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.

9.1

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Verify that the FX Series PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.

9.2

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RD" and "SD" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status

Operation status

RD

SD

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received.

Off

Off

Data is being sent or received.

Data is not sent nor received.

While the N:N Network is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.
If they do not flash, check the wiring and the communication setting in the master and slave stations.

9.3

Checking Installation and Wiring

1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

2. Power supply (For FX0N-485ADP)

The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is correctly provided.

3. Wiring
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.

9.4

Checking Sequence Program

1. Communication setting in the sequence program
Verify that the parallel link is not set. Using both the parallel link and the N:N Network at the same time is not
allowed.
Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not
possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.

2. Communication setting using parameters

Verify that the communication settings using parameters are suitable for use. Do not set parameters for the
N:N Network. If the communication settings are not suitable for use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLCs power.
For the communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.

B-48

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

9 Troubleshooting
9.4 Checking Sequence Program

Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in N:N network.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

4. N:N network and MODBUS communication (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

5. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

Parallel Link

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

6. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLC's power.

7. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

8. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLCs power.

9. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Programming
Communication

Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
*1.

B
N:N Network

If N:N network and MODBUS communication are set in a same channel, N:N network is executed, but
MODBUS communication is ignored.
In this case, the error "Communication port is occupied in another communication, (Error code 203)" is stored
in D8402/D8422 for the corresponding channel in the PLC.
For details of MODBUS communication errors and error devices, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication Edition.

Common Items

3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

10.Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

11.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)

B-49

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

Remote
Maintenance

Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Troubleshooting

N:N Network

9.5

9.5 Checking Setting Contents and Errors

Checking Setting Contents and Errors

1. Checking the setting contents
Verify that the N:N Network is set correctly.
Each FX PLC has devices for checking the setting. Verify that the correct contents are stored in the devices
shown in the table below.
Device

Name

Description

D8173

Station number settings status

Provided to check the station number.

D8174

Slave station quantity setting status

Provided to check the number of slave stations.

D8175

Refresh range setting status

Provided to check the refresh range.

If the correct contents are not stored in the devices above, check the sequence program.

2. Checking setting errors

1) Error flags
If the parameter setting includes an error, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
Verify that the devices shown in the table below are ON.
Device

Name

Description

M8063

Turns ON when abnormality occurs during serial communication

Serial communication error 1 (ch 1)
using ch 1.

M8438

Serial communication error 2 (ch 2)

Turns ON when abnormality occurs during serial communication

using ch 2.

When using the N:N Network on ch 1, check M8063.

When using the N:N Network on ch 2, check M8438.
2) Error codes
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, the error code is stored in the device specified in the
table below.
Device
D8063
D8438

Name

Error code

Serial communication error code 1 (ch 1)

Serial communication error code 2 (ch 2)

Description

6308

N:N Network parameter setting error

6309

N:N Network setting error

3808

N:N Network parameter setting error

3809

N:N Network setting error

Caution
The serial communication error flags and serial communication error codes are not cleared even when
communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

9.6

Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors

Verify that link errors have not occurred in the master station and slave stations. Link errors can be checked
using the flags specified below.

9.6.1

Check while data transfer sequence is being executed

While the N:N Network is being executed, the data transfer sequence ON flag remains ON.
Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON.
FX Series

B-50

Device

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

M8191

FX0N, FX1S

M503

Name

Data transfer sequence ON flag

Description
Remains ON while data transfer is being
executed.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors

Checking data transfer sequence errors

When a link error occurs in the master station or slave station, the data transfer sequence error flag turns ON.
The data transfer sequence error flag varies depending on the FX Series and station number. Refer to the
table below.
Slave
station
No. 1

Slave
station
No. 2

Slave
station
No. 3

Slave
station
No. 4

Slave
station
No. 5

Slave
station
No. 6

Slave
station
No. 7

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

M8183

M8184

M8185

M8186

M8187

M8188

M8189

M8190

FX0N, FX1S

M504

M505

M506

M507

M508

M509

M510

M511

Checking error codes

When a data transfer sequence error occurs, the corresponding data transfer sequence error flag turns ON,
and the error code is stored in the corresponding data register.
For error codes, refer to the next page.
The data register used to store the data transfer error code varies depending on the FX Series and station
number. Refer to the table below.
Slave
station
No. 1

Slave
station
No. 2

Slave
station
No. 3

Slave
station
No. 4

Slave
station
No. 5

Slave
station
No. 6

Slave
station
No. 7

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

D8211

D8212

D8213

D8214

D8215

D8216

D8217

D8218

FX0N, FX1S

D211

D212

D213

D214

D215

D216

D217

D218

The data register for storing the data transfer error code stores the corresponding error code. When a data
transfer sequence error occurs, refer to the error code list shown below, and confirm the check points.
Error
code

Error name

Contents of error

Check point

01H

Monitoring timeout

Slave station did not respond to the

Wiring and power
sending request from the master station
supply
within the monitoring time.

02H

Station number
error

An unexpected slave station responded

Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.

03H

Counter error

The counter value included in the

parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.

04H

Message format
error

M, L

Wiring, power
The message given by the slave station
supply and station
is incorrect.
number settings

11H

Monitoring timeout

The master station did not give a sending

Wiring and power
request to the next slave station within
supply
the monitoring timer.

Remote
Maintenance

14H

Message format
error

Wiring, power
The message from the master station is
supply and station
incorrect.
number settings

Apx.A

21H

Slave station no
response error

L*1

Wiring, power
The specified slave station does not exist. supply and station
number settings

Discontinued
models

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Error code list

E
Inverter
Communication

Master
station

FX Series

D
Computer Link

1. Error storing device

C
Parallel Link

9.6.3

B
N:N Network

Master
station

FX Series

Common Items

9.6.2

9 Troubleshooting

Programming
Communication

B-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

9 Troubleshooting
9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors

Error
code

Error name

Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error

Contents of error

22H

Station number
error

L*1

An unexpected slave station responded

Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.

23H

Counter error

L*1

The counter value included in the

parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.

31H

Parameter not
received

L*2

Before parameters had been received,

Wiring and power
sending request was received from the
supply
master station.

M: Master station, L: Slave station

B-52

Check point

*1.

Any slave station other than the slave station in which error occurred

*2.

Station in which error occurred

9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors

N:N Network

9 Troubleshooting

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Common Items

MEMO

N:N Network

Parallel Link

Computer Link

Inverter
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Programming
Communication

Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A

Discontinued
models

B-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

10. Related Data

10.1

Related Device List

10.1.1 For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
1. Bit devices
Device
number

Name

Description

Initial
value

Detection

R/W

Devices for communication setting

M8038

Parameter setting

Communication parameter setting flag

M, L

M8179

Channel setting

Sets the communication port channel to be used

(in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).

M, L

R/W

Devices for checking communication status

M8063

Serial communication Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial

error 1 (ch 1)
communication using ch 1.

M, L

M8438

Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial

Serial communication
communication using ch 2 (in the FX3G, FX3GC,
error 2 (ch 2)
FX3U and FX3UC).

M, L

M8183

Data transfer
sequence error

Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error

occurs in the master station.

M8184
to M8190

Data transfer
sequence error

Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error

occurs in a slave station.
However, data transfer sequence errors within
the slave station itself cannot be detected.

M, L

Data transfer
sequence ON

Remains ON while data transfer is being

executed.

M, L

M8191

R
R/W
M
L

B-54

: Read only (used as a contact in program)

: Read or Write
: Master station (station No. 0)
: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

C
Slave station
No. 1

Slave station
No. 2

Slave station
No. 3

Slave station
No. 4

Slave station
No. 5

Slave station
No. 6

Slave station
No. 7

Parallel Link

Master
station

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
M8185

M8186

M8187

M8188

M8189

M8190

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8184

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

2. Word devices (data registers)

Device
number

Name

Description

Initial
value

Detection

R/W

Devices for checking

D8173

Corresponding station
number settings status

Provided to check the station number.

M, L

D8174

Slave station quantity

setting status

Provided to check the number of slave stations.

M, L

D8175

Refresh range setting

status

Provided to check the refresh range.

M, L

D8063

Serial communication
error code 1 (ch 1)

Stores the serial communication error code for

ch 1.

M, L

D8419

Operation mode display

(ch 1)

Stores the communication type being used by

ch 1. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

M, L

D8438

Serial communication
error code 2 (ch 2)

Stores the serial communication error code for

ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

M, L

D8439

Operation mode display

(ch 2)

Stores the communication type being used by

ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

M, L

Devices for communication setting

D8176

Corresponding station
number settings

Provided to set the station number.

M, L

R/W

D8177

Slave station quantity

setting

Provided to set the number of slave stations used

in communication.

R/W

D8178

Refresh range setting

Provided to set the refresh range.

R/W

D8179

Number of retries

Provided to set the number of retry times.

R/W

D8180

Monitoring time

Provided to set the no-response monitoring time.

R/W

Devices for checking communication status

D8201

Present link scan time

D8202

Maximum link scan time Maximum value of the network cycle time

D8203

Data transfer sequence

error count

Amount of data sequence errors that occurred in

the master station

D8204
to D8210

Data transfer sequence

error count

Amount of data sequence errors that occurred in

a slave station.
However, data sequence errors occurring within
the slave station itself cannot be counted.

M, L

D8211

Data transmission error

code

Stores the error code for the master station.

D8212
to D8218

Data transmission error

code

Stores the error code for a slave station.

However, data sequence errors occurring within
the slave station itself cannot be counted.

M, L

R
R/W
M
L

B-56

Current value of the network cycle time

: Read only
: Read or Write
: Master station (station No. 0)
: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

A
Slave station
No. 1

Slave station
No. 2

Slave station
No. 3

Slave station
No. 4

Slave station
No. 5

Slave station
No. 6

Slave station
No. 7

Common Items

Master
station

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

D8204

D8205

D8206

D8207

D8208

D8209

D8210

D8212

D8213

D8214

D8215

D8216

D8217

D8218

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Inverter
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-57

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

10.1.2 For FX0N and FX1S PLCs

1. Bit devices
Device
number

Initial
value

Detection

R/W

M, L

Turns ON when a data transfer sequence

error occurs in the master station.

Turns ON when a data transfer sequence

error occurs in a slave station.
M505 to M511 Data transfer sequence error
However, data transfer sequence errors within
the slave station itself cannot be detected.

M, L

Remains ON while data transfer is being

executed.

M, L

Initial
value

Detection

R/W

M, L

Name

Description

Devices for communication setting

M8038

Parameter setting

Communication parameter setting flag

Devices for checking communication status

M504

M503

Data transfer sequence error

Data transfer sequence ON

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

M: Master station (station No. 0) L: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)

2. Word devices (data registers)

Device
number

Name

Description

Devices for checking

D8173

Corresponding station
number settings status

D8174

Slave station quantity setting Provided to check the number of slave

status
stations.

M, L

D8175

Refresh range setting status

Provided to check the refresh range.

M, L

Provided to check the station number.

Devices for communication setting

D8176

Corresponding station
number settings

Provided to set the station number.

M, L

R/W

D8177

Slave station quantity setting

Provided to set the number of slave stations

used in communication.

R/W

D8178

Refresh range setting

Provided to set the refresh range.

R/W

D8179

Number of retries

Provided to set the number of retries.

R/W

D8180

Monitoring time

Provided to set the no-response monitoring

time.

R/W

Devices for checking communication status

D201

Present link scan time

Stores the current value of the network cycle

time.

D202

Maximum link scan time

Stores the maximum value of the network

cycle time.

D203

Data transfer sequence error Stores the amount of data sequence errors
count
that occurred in the master station.

Amount of data sequence errors that

Data transfer sequence error occurred in a slave station.
D204 to D210
However, data sequence errors that occurred
count
within the slave station itself cannot be counted.

M, L

D211

Data transmission error code Stores the error code for the master station.

Stores the error code for a slave station.

D212 to D218 Data transmission error code However, data sequence errors that occurred
within the slave station itself cannot be counted.

M, L

D219 to D255 Not applicable

Provided for the internal processing.

R: Read only R/W: Read or Write

M: Master station (station No. 0) L: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)

B-58

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.1 Related Device List

Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7

Common Items

Master
station

B
N:N Network

C
M506

M507

M508

M509

M510

M511

Parallel Link

M505

D
Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7

Computer Link

Master
station

E
Inverter
Communication

D204

D205

D206

D207

D208

D209

D210

D212

D213

D214

D215

D216

D217

D218

I
Remote
Maintenance

Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

10.2

10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices

Details of Related Devices

The devices described below are used in the N:N Network.

10.2.1 Parameter setting [M8038]

This device works as the communication parameter setting flag.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.

2. Detailed contents
"LD M8038" provided in step 0 starts the parameter setting, and the last instruction in this circuit block finishes
the setting.
(This sequence program is not executed in every scan cycle.)

3. Cautions on use
Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.

10.2.2 Channel setting [M8179]

This device works as the channel setting flag (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.

2. Detailed contents
When using ch 2 as the communication port, set this device to ON in the sequence program.
When using ch 1, the sequence program is not required.

10.2.3 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]

These devices turn ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set the N:N Network. (M8438 is
available in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC.)

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the communication status.

2. Detailed contents
M8063 turns ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set N:N Network using ch 1.
M8438 turns ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set N:N Network using ch 2.

3. Cautions on use
Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

B-60

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

These devices turn ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in the master station or a slave station.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.
However, setting for the station itself is not required.

A used device varies depending on the FX Series.

Slave
station
No. 1

Slave
station
No. 2

Slave
station
No. 3

Slave
station
No. 4

Slave
station
No. 5

Slave
station
No. 6

Slave
station
No. 7

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

M8183

M8184

M8185

M8186

M8187

M8188

M8189

M8190

FX0N, FX1S

M504

M505

M506

M507

M508

M509

M510

M511

3. Cautions on use

D
Computer Link

Data transfer sequence errors in a station itself cannot be detected.

Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.

10.2.5 Data transfer sequence ON [M8191] [M503]

This device remains ON while data transfer is being from or to in the master station or slave station.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Inverter
Communication

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.

2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series

Data transfer sequence ON

M8191

FX0N, FX1S

M503

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

C
Parallel Link

Master
station

N:N Network

2. Detailed contents

FX Series

Common Items

10.2.4 Data transfer sequence error [M8138 to M8190] [M504 to M511]

3. Cautions on use

Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.

These devices store the serial communication error code (D8438 is available in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC).

1. Stations requiring program setting

Programming
Communication

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the error code.

2. Detailed contents
The following error code is stored when a serial communication error occurs.
Error code
ch2

D8063

D8438

6308

3808

N:N Network parameter setting error

6309

3809

N:N Network setting error

Description

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

10.2.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]

3. Cautions on use

B-61

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Serial communication errors are not cleared even after communication has recovered its normal status.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

10.2.7 Corresponding station number settings status [D8173]

This device is used to check the stations own station number settings status.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.

2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the corresponding station number settings device D8176 are stored in D8173.

3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

10.2.8 Slave station quantity setting status [D8174]

Use this device to check the number of slave stations set in the master station.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.

2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the slave station quantity setting device D8177 in the master station are stored in
D8174.

3. Cautions on use
Do not change a preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

10.2.9 Refresh range setting status [D8175]

Use this device to check the refresh range set in the master station.

1. Stations requiring program setting

Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.

2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the refresh range setting device D8178 in the master station are stored in D8175.

3. Cautions on use
Do not change a preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

10.2.10 Station number settings [D8176]

Set a value ranging from 0 to 7 to the special data register D8176 (initial value: 0).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master and slave stations require program setting.

2. Detailed contents
Set value
0
1 to 7

B-62

Description
Master station
Slave station number
Examples: "1" Station No. 1, "5" Station No. 5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

A
Common Items

10.2.11 Slave station quantity setting [D8177]

Set a value ranging from 1 to 7 to the special data register D8177 (initial value: 7).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.

Set value

Description
Not applicable

1
2
3

Description

Four slave stations are connected.

One slave station is connected.

Five slave stations are connected.

Two slave stations are connected.

Six slave stations are connected.

Three slave stations are connected.

Seven slave stations are connected.

10.2.12 Refresh range setting [D8178]

Set a value ranging from 0 to 2 to the special data register D8178 (initial value: 0).

Computer Link

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.

2. Pattern applicability in FX PLC

Pattern (set value)

Pattern 0 (0)

Pattern 1 (1)

Pattern 2 (2)

FX0N PLC

Not applicable

Not applicable

FX1S PLC

Not applicable

Not applicable

Inverter
Communication

FX Series

FX1N, FX1NC PLC

FX2N, FX2NC PLC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3S PLC
FX3G, FX3GC PLC
FX3U, FX3UC PLC

3. Number and assignment of link devices

Pattern 0

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The number of link devices varies depending on the selected pattern, but the head device number remains
the same.
It is recommended to leave unused numbers in the unused status to enable pattern change in the future.

Bit device
(M)

Word device
(D)

Bit device
(M)

Word device
(D)

Bit device
(M)

Word device
(D)

4 in each
station

32 in each
station

4 in each
station

64 in each
station

8 in each
station

Programming
Communication

Station
No.

C
Parallel Link

Set value

N:N Network

2. Detailed contents

D 0 to D 3

M1000 to M1031

D 0 to D 3

M1000 to M1063

D 0 to D 7

D10 to D13

M1064 to M1095

D10 to D13

M1064 to M1127

D10 to D17

D20 to D23

M1128 to M1159

D20 to D23

M1128 to M1191

D20 to D27

D30 to D33

M1192 to M1223

D30 to D33

M1192 to M1255

D30 to D37

D40 to D43

M1256 to M1287

D40 to D43

M1256 to M1319

D40 to D47

D50 to D53

M1320 to M1351

D50 to D53

M1320 to M1383

D50 to D57

D60 to D63

M1384 to M1415

D60 to D63

M1384 to M1447

D60 to D67

D70 to D73

M1448 to M1479

D70 to D73

M1448 to M1511

D70 to D77

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-63

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices

4. Cautions on use
1) Cautions on using FX0N and FX1S PLCs
When FX0N and/or FX1S PLCs are included in the system, make sure to set the refresh range to pattern
0.
If any other pattern is selected, data transfer error will occur in all FX0N and FX1S PLCs included in the
system, and the link time will become longer.
2) Occupied devices
The devices used in each pattern are occupied for the N:N Network in all stations.
Make sure that such devices are not used in general programs.

10.2.13 Number of retries [D8179]

Set a value ranging from 0 to 10 to the special data register D8179 (initial value: 3).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.

2. Detailed contents
When any response is not given after the specified number of retries, the irresponsive station is regarded as
having a data transfer sequence error by other stations.

10.2.14 Monitoring time setting [D8180]

Set a vale ranging from 5 to 255 to the special data register D8180 in "10 ms" units (initial value: 5 [50 ms]).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.

2. Detailed contents
If data transfer between the master station and a slave station requires time longer than the monitoring time
set here, the master station or slave station is regarded as abnormal.

10.2.15 Present link scan time [D8201] [D201]

This device stores the current value of the network cycle in the N:N Network (unit: 10 ms).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting.

2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series

Data transfer sequence ON

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

D8201

FX0N, FX1S

D201

3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

B-64

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

A
Common Items

10.2.16 Maximum link scan time [D8202] [D202]

This device stores the maximum value of the network cycle in the N:N Network (unit: 10 ms).

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting.

N:N Network

2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series

Data transfer sequence ON

D8202

FX0N, FX1S

D202

C
Parallel Link

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

These devices store the amount of data transfer sequence errors that occurred in the master station and
slave stations.

1. Stations requiring program setting

E
Inverter
Communication

The master and slave stations require program setting.

However, setting for the station itself is not required.

2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
Slave
station
No. 1

Slave
station
No. 2

Slave
station
No. 3

Slave
station
No. 4

Slave
station
No. 5

Slave
station
No. 6

Slave
station
No. 7

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,

FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

D8203

D8204

D8205

D8206

D8207

D8208

D8209

D8210

FX0N, FX1S

D203

D204

D205

D206

D207

D208

D209

D210

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3. Cautions on use

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Master
station

FX Series

Computer Link

10.2.17 Data transfer sequence error count [D8203 to D8210] [D203 to D210]

Data transfer sequence errors that occurred within the station itself cannot be detected.
Do not change a preset numeric value using the program or programming tool.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-65

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

10.2.18 Data transfer error code [D8211 to D8218] [D211 to D218]

These devices store the error code in the master station and slave stations.

1. Stations requiring program setting

The master station requires program setting.
However, this setting for the station itself is not required.

2. Detailed contents
1) The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series

Master
station

Slave
station
No. 1

Slave
station
No. 2

Slave
station
No. 3

Slave
station
No. 4

Slave
station
No. 5

Slave
station
No. 6

Slave
station
No. 7

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC,

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

D8211

D8212

D8213

D8214

D8215

D8216

D8217

D8218

FX0N, FX1S

D211

D212

D213

D214

D215

D216

D217

D218

2) Error code list

Error
code

Error name

Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error

Contents of error

01H

Monitoring timeout

Slave station did not respond to the

Wiring and power
sending request from the master station
supply
within the monitoring time.

02H

Station number
error

An unexpected slave station responded

Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.

03H

Counter error

The counter value included in the

parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.

04H

Message format
error

M, L

Wiring, power
The message given by the slave station
supply and station
is incorrect.
number settings

11H

Monitoring timeout

The master station did not give a sending

Wiring and power
request to the next slave station within
supply
the monitoring timer.

14H

Message format
error

Wiring, power
The message from the master station is
supply and station
incorrect.
number settings

21H

Slave station no
response error

L*1

Wiring, power
The specified slave station does not exist. supply and station
number settings

22H

Station number
error

L*1

An unexpected slave station responded

Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.

23H

Counter error

L*1

The counter value included in the

parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.

31H

Parameter not
received

L*2

Before parameters had been received,

Wiring and power
sending request was received from the
supply
master station.

M: Master station, L: Slave station

*1.

Any slave station other than the slave station in which error occurred

*2.

Station in which error occurred

3. Cautions on use
Data transfer sequence errors that occurred within the station itself cannot be detected.
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.

B-66

Check point

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

1. Detailed contents

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Code

B
N:N Network

These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

Common Items

10.2.19 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]

Description
Programming communication

PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network
RS instruction

RS2 instruction

Parallel link

Inverter instruction
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication

10

CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

E
Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

B-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

N:N Network

10.2 Details of Related Devices

MEMO

B-68

10 Related Data

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

C. Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

C-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "parallel link" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

C-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Parallel Link

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains the parallel link.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System
The parallel link allows connection between two FX PLCs of the same series to mutually link devices.

2) Data link is automatically updated between up to two FX PLCs.

3) The total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") maximum (when only the 485ADPs are used except,
when the 485BDs are used with FX2(FX)/FX2C PLCs).

2 units
500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
FX PLC

....... Number of linked units

....... Total extension distance

For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.

FX PLC

Inverter
Communication

To check applicable

....... PLC models,

refer to Section 1.3.

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

Master station
Bit devices

.......

For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.

.......

For wiring,
refer to Chapter 4.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

Slave station
Transfer direction

Bit devices

M900 to M999

M900 to M999

Word devices

Word devices

D490 to D499

D490 to D499

D500 to D509

D500 to D509

devices can be selected

among two patterns.
For details,
refer to Chapter 2.

The figure above shows the maximum number of linked devices. There are differences in the specifications and
limitation depending on the selected link pattern and FX Series.

Programming
Communication

M800 to M899

....... The number of linked

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

M800 to M899

D
Computer Link

Important points and reference

chapter/section

System

C
Parallel Link

1) According to the number of devices to be linked, either pattern can be selected between the regular mode
and the high speed mode.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

1.2

1 Outline
1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the Parallel Link setting procedures up until data link:

Parallel link
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.

Outline of system
Applicable PLC versions
Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
Number of link points and link time
Number of system devices
System configuration
Select communication equipment.

Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.

Wiring procedure
Wiring using twisted cables
Wiring example

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting
(initialization).
Turn ON power.

Refer to Chapter 6.

Perform test run (communication test).

PLC serial communication setting

Communication setting is not required.
(Check only unset items.)
Communication test
Create test programs.

Refer to Chapter 7.
Create programs.

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.

Communication parameter setting

programs
Basic program
Error indication program example
Detailed explanation of setting devices

If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting

(Chapter 9).
Refer to Chapter 8.
Practical program examples

Program examples in the regular parallel link mode

are shown.

*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

C-4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Parallel Link

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions

Common Items

1.3

PLC

Applicability (applicable version)

Remarks

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series

FX3GC Series

Parallel Link

FX3G Series
FX3S Series

The link device range is limited.

FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

(Ver. 1.04 or later)

FX1NC Series
FX1S Series

The link device range is limited.

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

The link device range is limited.

FX0S Series

Parallel link is not provided.

FX0 Series

Parallel link is not provided.

FX2(FX) Series

The high-speed link mode is supported in Ver. 3.07 and

later.

Parallel link is not provided.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

1.3.3

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2C Series

The high-speed link mode is supported in Ver. 3.07 and

later.

FX1 Series

1.3.2

Computer Link

FX1N Series
FX0N Series

B
N:N Network

The communication types are applicable in the following versions.

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable

Products whose production was stopped

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Parallel Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable of main units for each FX Series from the following version:

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

C-6

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW5 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Parallel Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

A
Model name

Remarks

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

FX-30P

Parallel Link

GX Works2

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/98

SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/V-3

SW1PC-FXGP/V3

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-A7PHP-KIT

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW1RX-GPPFX

Ver. 3.00 or later

SW2 A or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)

Apx.A

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

C-7

Discontinued
models

GOT1000 Series display units

Remote
Maintenance

Ver. 1.00 or later

H
Programming
Communication

FX-30P

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

D
Computer Link

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

B
N:N Network

GOT1000 Series display units

Applicable version

Common Items

Product name

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Parallel Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 5.00 or later

SW5 A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD

Ver. 5.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 4.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GOT1000 Series display units

1.4.2

Ver. 1.07H or later

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be
programmed

Priority: High Low

Model to be set

FX3UC Series

FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U Series

FX3UC, FX3U

FX2N

FX3GC Series

FX3G, FX3GC

FX3G Series
FX3S Series

FX2(FX)

FX1N

*1

FX2N*1

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2NC Series

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N Series

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1NC Series

FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1N Series

FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1S Series

FX1S

FX2(FX)

FX0N Series

FX0N

FX2(FX)

FX0S Series

FX0S

FX2(FX)

FX0 Series

FX0

FX2(FX)

FX2C Series

FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

*1.

FX2(FX)
FX1

"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

C-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Parallel Link

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

A
Common Items

2.

Specifications

This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance of the parallel link.

N:N Network

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

The parallel link is executed using the (fixed) communication specifications shown in the table below.
Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed.
Number of connectable units
Transmission standard

Protocol type
Control procedure

FX3UC, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3G, FX3S PLCs

Baud rate FX2NC, FX2N, FX1NC, FX1N, FX1S, FX0N,
FX2C, FX2(FX) PLCs

2 maximum (1:1)
RS-485 or RS-422 standard
500 m (1640' 5") or less

[50 m (164' 0")or less when

485BD is included in system]
Wire link: 10 m (32' 9") or less
Optical fiber: 50 m (164' 0") or less

Wire link: FX2-40AW

Optical fiber: FX2-40AP

Parallel link

Half-duplex,
bidirectional communication

Inverter
Communication

Communication method

Remarks

115200bps
19200bps

Start bit

F
Fixed

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Character Data bit

format
Parity bit
Stop bit
Header
Terminator

Computer Link

FX3UC, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3G, FX3S,

Maximum FX2NC, FX2N, FX1NC, FX1N, FX1S, FX0N
total
PLCs
extension
distance
FX2(FX), FX2C PLCs

Specifications

Parallel Link

Item

Fixed

Sum check

Fixed

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Control line

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Parallel Link

2.2 Link Specifications

2.2

Link Specifications

2.2.1

PLC communication type applicability status

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable
PLC

Regular parallel link mode applicability

(applicable version)

High speed parallel link mode applicability

(applicable version)

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series
FX3GC Series
FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

(Ver. 1.04 or later)

(Ver. 1.04 or later)

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

FX1NC Series
FX1N Series
FX1S Series
FX0N Series

2.2.2

FX0S Series

FX0 Series

FX2C Series

(Ver. 3.07 or later)

FX2(FX) Series

(Ver. 3.07 or later)

Link time
The link time indicates the cycle time in which link devices are updated.
The link time varies depending on the link mode as shown in the tables below.

1. For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series

Link mode

Time

Regular parallel link mode

15 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)

High speed parallel link mode

5 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)

2. For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC Series
Link mode

C-10

Time

Regular parallel link mode

70 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)

High speed parallel link mode

20 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Parallel Link

2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points

Link Device Numbers and Number of Points

2.3.1

For FX0N, FX1S and FX3S Series

Mode

High speed parallel link mode

Bit device (M)

Word device (D)

Bit device (M)

Word device (D)

Type

50 in each station

10 in each station

2 in each station

Master station

M400 to M449

D230 to D239

D230, D231

Slave station

M450 to M499

D240 to D249

D240, D241

FX0N, FX1S, FX3S

FX0N, FX1S, FX3S

M400 to M449
M450 to M499

RUN
monitor

M8070

D240 to D249

Automatic update

M400 to M449

M450 to M499
D230 to D239
D240 to D249

M8000
RUN
monitor

Master station

Slave station

For the slave station, set M8071 to ON.

2. High speed parallel link mode

FX0N, FX1S, FX3S

M8000

D230, D231

RUN
monitor

M8070
RUN
monitor

Master station
M8162

M8071
D230, D231
D240, D241

Automatic update

For the master station, set M8070 and M8162 to ON.

Slave station
M8162

High speed parallel link

mode
For the slave station, set M8071 and M8162 to ON.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

High speed parallel link

mode

D240, D241

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8000

FX0N, FX1S, FX3S

E
Inverter
Communication

For the master station, set M8070 to ON.

M8071

Computer Link

D230 to D239

M8000

Automatic update

C
Parallel Link

1. Regular parallel link mode

N:N Network

Regular parallel link mode

Common Items

2.3

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Parallel Link

2.3.2

2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points

For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series
Regular parallel link mode

Mode

Bit device (M)

Word device (D)

High speed parallel link mode

Bit device (M)

Word device (D)

Type

100 in each station

10 in each station

2 in each station

Master station

M800 to M899

D490 to D499

D490, D491

Slave station

M900 to M999

D500 to D509

D500, D501

1. Regular parallel link mode

FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC

M900 to M999
D490 to D499

M8000
RUN
monitor

M800 to M899

M8070

D500 to D509

Automatic update

Automatic update

FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC

M800 to M899
M900 to M999
D490 to D499
D500 to D509

M8000
RUN
monitor

Master station

For the master station, set M8070 to ON.

M8071
Slave station

For the slave station, set M8071 to ON.

2. High speed parallel link mode

FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
M8000
M8070
RUN
Master station
monitor
M8162

M8000

D490, D491

RUN
monitor

M8071
D490, D491
D500, D501

Automatic update

High speed parallel link

mode
For the master station, set M8070 and M8162 to ON.

C-12

FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC

D500, D501

Slave station
M8162

High speed parallel link

mode
For the slave station, set M8071 and M8162 to ON.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.1 System Configuration

A
Common Items

3.

System Configuration and Selection

3.1

System Configuration

3.1.1

Rule for connection

C
Parallel Link

This section outlines the system configuration required to use the parallel link.
Add (optional) communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to an FX PLC main unit.

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the configuration of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485
and the system selection required by FX PLCs.

When using the parallel link, PLCs in the same group can be connected as shown in the table below.
Group

PLC Series
FX3U and FX3UC Series
FX3G and FX3GC Series

FX3S Series
FX2N and FX2NC Series
FX1N and FX1NC Series

FX1S Series

FX0N Series

FX2(FX) and FX2C Series

E
Inverter
Communication

4
5

Computer Link

1
2

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.2 Configuration of Each Group

3.2

Configuration of Each Group

1 , 2 and 3 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.

1. Group 1 (FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

1
RDA
RD

RDB

SDA

SD

SDB

SG

Communication
board

FX3U Series

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

50 m
(164' 0")

Attach the expansion board to the

main unit, and then attach the
communication adapter to the left
side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

RDA
RD

RDB

SDA

SD

SDB

SG

Communication
board

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

+
Communication
adapter

+
Expansion
board

+
Communication
adapter

FX3U Series

+
Expansion
board

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

+
Communication
adapter

FX3UC Series
(D, DS, DSS)

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

C-14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.2 Configuration of Each Group

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

Communication
board

50 m
(164' 0")

FX3G Series

B
N:N Network

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

Common Items

2. Group 2 (FX3G and FX3GC PLCs)

C
+

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.

Communication
Connector
adapter
conversion adapter

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3G Series

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

Communication
board

50 m
(164' 0")

FX3S Series

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.

Communication
Connector
adapter
conversion adapter

H
500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3S Series

Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

3. Group 3 (FX3S PLC)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3GC Series

Communication
adapter

Computer Link

Parallel Link

I
Remote
Maintenance

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.2 Configuration of Each Group

4. Group 4 (FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

1
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

+
Communication
board

FX2N Series

+
Communication
adapter

50 m
(164' 0")

+
Special adapter
connection board

Attach the special adapter

connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX2N Series

+
Communication
adapter

FX2NC Series

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

5. Group 5 (FX1N and FX1NC PLCs)

Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

+
Communication
board

Total extension
distance

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

50 m
(164' 0")

Attach the special adapter

connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX1N Series

Important point in selection

Communication Special adapter

adapter
connection board

FX1N Series

+
Communication
adapter

FX1NC Series

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

C-16

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.2 Configuration of Each Group

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

50 m
(164' 0")

Attach the special adapter

connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX1S Series

Total extension
distance

C
Parallel Link

Communication Special adapter

adapter
connection board

B
N:N Network

Communication
board

Important point in selection

Common Items

6. Group 6 (FX1S PLC)

FX1S Series

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

D
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Total extension
distance

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

+
FX0N Series

Communication
adapter

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

Communication equipment using

optical fiber or in accordance
with RS-485

FX PLC

Communication
adapter

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.
Perform wiring using optical fiber
cables.

50 m
(164' 0")

FX2(FX)/FX2C Series

10 m
(32' 9")

FX2(FX)/FX2C Series

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

H
Programming
Communication

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.
Perform wiring using twisted pair
cables.

+
Communication
adapter

Total extension
distance

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Important point in selection

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

8. Group 8 (FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs)

E
Inverter
Communication

Important point in selection

Computer Link

7. Group 7 (FX0N PLC)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.3

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- The parallel link is not provided for the FX1, FX0 and FX0S PLCs.
FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N

FX2NC-485ADP

FX0N-485ADP

(European terminal block)

(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX1S

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX1N

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD

FX2N

FX2N-CNV-BD

C-18

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3S

N:N Network

FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

Common Items

FX Series

C
Parallel Link

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

D
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

Computer Link

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

ch1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.

ch1

Programming
Communication

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

ch2

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.
ch1

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

FX3G-CNV-ADP

ch2

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

FX3U

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

C-20

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

N:N Network

RD

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

ch1

Parallel Link

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

port channel.
ch2

FX3U

D
Computer Link

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

E
Inverter
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC

FX2NC-485ADP

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")
(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(Terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

H
Programming
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

FX3GC

500 m
(1640' 5")

Apx.A

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

Discontinued
models

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

Common Items

FX Series

C-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Parallel Link

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1
RD A

50 m
(164' 0")

RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
a FX3U-8AV-BD is used,

When
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

it occupies one communication

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

ch2

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

C-22

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

3 System Configuration and Selection

3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2-40AP
(for optical fiber)

C
Parallel Link

FX2(FX)

10 m
(32' 9")
FX2-40AW
(for wire link)

D
Computer Link

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2-40AP
(for optical fiber)

Inverter
Communication

FX2C

E
10 m
(32' 9")

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2-40AW
(for wire link)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.

4.1 Wiring Procedure

Wiring
This chapter explains the wiring.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

4.1

Wiring Procedure
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.

2
3
4

For details, refer to Section 4.2.

Turning OFF the power to the PLC

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the power to the PLC is OFF.

Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)

Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.

Wiring communication equipment

Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485.

For details, refer to Section 4.3.

C-24

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Common Items

4.2

4 Wiring

Select cables using the procedure described below.

4.2.1

Twisted pair cable

1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer

Model name

Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.

The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

DPEV SB 0.3 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

E
Inverter
Communication

Fujikura Ltd.

SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P

Computer Link

Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

Parallel Link

Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Remarks

SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P

2. Cable structural drawing (reference)

Pair

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

4.2.2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Shield

Two-pair cable structural

drawing example

Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.
1) Cable type
: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)
2) Connection specifications : One-pair wiring: Straight type
Two-pair wiring: Cross type (Use a cross cable with the following connection)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

I
Remote
Maintenance

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

H
Programming
Communication

1. Selection procedure when purchasing

3) Connector

N:N Network

Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used for wiring.

: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)

Apx.A

Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.

Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.

C-25

Discontinued
models

2. Cautions on using commercial cables

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.2.3

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

AWG22 to
AWG20

AWG22

Bar terminal with

Insulating sleeve
(cable size)

Tightening
torque

Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
Nm

Tool size
A

0.4 (0.01")

2.5 (0.09")

FX3G-485-BDRJ

AWG20 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD

AWG26 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

Not applicable

0.4 to 0.5
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2NC-485ADP

AWG26 to
AWG16

AWG26 to
AWG20

Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD

Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")

Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")

FX2NC-485ADP

When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve

Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name

Caulking tool

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)

*1.
*2.

C-26

Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6

Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")

Insulating sleeve

Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")

2.6 mm
(0.1")

14 mm
(0.55")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Note

Manufacturer

For size A and size B,

refer to the table above.

N:N Network

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Model name

Parallel Link

SZS 0.4 2.5

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP

Manufacturer

Model name
SZF 1-0.6 3.5

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

D
Computer Link

2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

3.2(0.13")

Inverter
Communication

When wiring one cable to one terminal

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

6.3mm(0.25")
or more
3.2(0.13")

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

Programming
Communication

4.2.4

Optical fiber cable

Two optical fiber cables are required.

1. Cable types
Length

Remarks

F-OFC-M10

10 m (32' 9")

Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.

F-OFC-M30

30 m (98' 5")

Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.

F-OFC-M50

50 m (164' 0")

Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.

Remote
Maintenance

Cable

Common Items

Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.

Apx.A

Separate the optical connector from strong electric cables as much as possible.
Connect devices with the smallest load to the output terminals Y000 to Y003 which are located near the
optical connector.

C-27

Discontinued
models

2. Cautions on wiring

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

4.2.5

4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting terminal resistors

In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.
In the case of two-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal and SDA-SDB terminal of the communication equipment.

Brown

1. Terminal resistor type

In the case of one-pair wiring, use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
In the case of two-pair wiring, use four terminal resistors of 330 , 1/4 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.

1 1 1
=110
(101)
Orange Brown Precision

2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Terminal
resistor
selector
switch

Precision

3 3 1
=330
(101)

330
OPEN
110

Terminal
resistor selector
switch

FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

SZS 0.4 2.5

Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

0.4mm
(0.01")

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Terminal block mounting screws

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Terminal resistor
selector switch

C-28

2.5mm
(0.09")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.3 Connection Diagram

Connection Diagram

4.3.1

For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Common Items

4.3

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ*1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)

110

*2

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ*1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)

SDB Terminal
(TXD-) resistor
RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

SG

SG

110

*2

D
Computer Link

RDA
(RXD+)

Parallel Link

Terminal SDB
resistor (TXD-)

N:N Network

1. In the case of one-pair wiring

Class-D grounding (resistance: 100 or less)*3

*2.

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch to 110 .

*3.

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

2. In the case of two-pair wiring

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ *4
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

*5

RDB
Terminal (RXD-)
resistor
330
2

SG

*5

H
Programming
Communication

SDA
(TXD+)

*5

RDB
(RXD-) Terminal
SG

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*5

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ *4
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

SDA
(TXD+)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Inside FX3G-485-BD-RJ, SDA and RDA are connected and SDB and RDB are connected respectively
when 1-pair wiring is adopted. Signals are not connected to pins Nos. 4 and 5 of the RJ45 connector. For
cables of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, refer to Subsection 4.2.2.
Make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield of connected cables.

Inverter
Communication

*1.

resistor
330
2

I
Remote
Maintenance

Class-D grounding (resistance: 100 or less)*6

For cables of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, refer to Subsection 4.2.2.

Make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield of connected cables.

*5.

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch to 330 .

*6.

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*4.

C-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.3 Connection Diagram

3. Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.

Wiring circuit
switch

4.3.2

For FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

1. In the case of one-pair wiring
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX0N-485ADP

Terminal
resistor
110

FX2N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

SG

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG

FG*2

SG

SG

Class-D grounding (resistance: 100 or less)*1

C-30

*1.

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD or FX2NC-485ADP.

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

Terminal
resistor
110

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Parallel Link

4.4 Grounding

FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX0N-485ADP

FX2N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

SG

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG

FG*2

Terminal
resistor
330
2

SG

Terminal
resistor
330
2

C
Parallel Link

SDA
(TXD+)

N:N Network

SDA
(TXD+)

Common Items

2. In the case of two-pair wiring

SG

D
Computer Link

Class-D grounding (resistance: 100 or less)*1

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD or FX2NC-485ADP.

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

For FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs

FX2-40AW

FX2-40AP

FX2-40AP

SA

SA

SB

SB

SG*1

SG*1

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX2-40AW

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*1.

4.4

E
Inverter
Communication

4.3.3

*1.

Connect the SG terminal to the SG terminal in each PLC (main unit).

Grounding

The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.

Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment

Independent grounding
Best condition

PLC

Other
equipment

Shared grounding
Good condition

PLC

Other
equipment

I
Remote
Maintenance

PLC

Programming
Communication

Grounding should be performed as stated below.

Common grounding
Not allowed

Apx.A

The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.

C-31

Discontinued
models

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

Parallel Link

5.

5.1 Check Procedure

Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX

Programmable Controller
The communication setting is not required in FX PLCs for parallel link.
If the communication setting is already provided for another communication type or for checking the existing
communication setting, perform the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch1 in an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8120
and D8400 using the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8420 using
the following procedure.
In other PLCs, use D8120 for verification.

5.1

Check Procedure
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420)
Turn ON the power to the PLC while it is in STOP mode, and monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is "0"
The communication setting is not provided.

2. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is any value other than "0"
The communication setting is provided.

Checking absence/presence of parameter setting

Check absence/presence using the GX Works2, GX Developer, FXGP/WIN or FX-30P.
1) GX Works2 operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.2.)
2) FXGP/WIN operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.3.)
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Checking absence/presence of sequence program setting

Check whether or not a write instruction is programmed for D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When such an instruction is programmed
Program example: (for D8120)
Change the program as shown below, and then change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H23F6

D8120

Program example

The value varies depending on

the communication setting.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H0000

D8120

Changed program

2. When such an instruction is not programmed

Proceed to the next step.

4
C-32

Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420) again, and confirming that its value is "0"

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

5.2.1

Operating procedure

Opening the parameter setting window

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

Parallel Link

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.

Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

5.2

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab in the dialog box.
Select a channel to be used, and make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" box is
cleared.
If a check mark is there, clear it.
Click [End].

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Writing parameters and program to the PLC

Apx.A

C-33

Discontinued
models

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

5.3

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication settings may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

5.3.1

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Double-click [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
1. When there are no parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are no communication settings.
Click the [No] button.
In this case, the next step is not required.

2. When there are already parameter settings

The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are communication settings.
Click the [Clear] button to delete the communication settings from parameters.
Transfer parameters to the PLC using the following step.

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

C-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

Parallel Link

6.1 Test Procedure

A
Common Items

6.

Test Run (Communication Test)

6.1

C
Parallel Link

Test Procedure

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the communication test procedures for the parallel link.
It is recommended to wire the master station and slave station, initialize communication settings in the FX
PLCs, and then execute the communication test using the following procedure to confirm the proper
operation.

Creating programs for the communication test

Create new programs for the communication test for the master station and slave station.
For program examples, refer to Section 6.2.

Computer Link

Transferring the program to each PLC

Turn ON the power to each PLC, and transfer the program.

Validating the communication setting

When the PLC is in RUN mode, set it to STOP mode once, and then set it to RUN mode again.
Or turn OFF the power of the master station and slave station, and then turn ON the power to both
stations at the same time.

Inverter
Communication

Confirming flashing of the communication status indicator lamps (SD and RD)

Confirming the link of the master station

Set the inputs X000 to

X003 to ON or OFF.
Slave station

H
Programming
Communication

Master station

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the master station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in the slave station.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Confirm that the built-in SD and RD lamps of the communication equipment are flashing.
If they are off, take proper action while referring to the troubleshooting procedures described later.

Confirm that the outputs Y000 to Y003

of the slave station turn ON or OFF
according to the inputs of the master
station.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test

Confirming the link of the slave station

Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the slave station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in the master station.
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Master station

Confirm that the outputs Y000 to Y003

of the slave station turn ON or OFF
according to the inputs of the master
station.

Slave station

If unable to establish link, refer to "9. Troubleshooting".

6.2

Creating Programs for the Communication Test

Create the programs shown below for the master station and slave station.

6.2.1

For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
1. Program for communication test (for the master station)
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000
M8070

0
MOV

K500

D8070

M8000
M8178

8
M8000
11

22

C-36

MOV

K1X000

K1M800

MOV

K1M900

K1Y000
END

(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

This step is not required when using ch 1.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

6 Test Run (Communication Test)

6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test

Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000
M8071

0
K500

D8070

M8000
M8178

B
N:N Network

MOV

(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

This step is not required when using ch 1.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON.

M8000
MOV

K1X000

K1M900

MOV

K1M800

K1Y000
END

22

D
Computer Link

6.2.2

Parallel Link

11

For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series

1. Master station communication test program

M8000
M8070
MOV

K500

D8070

MOV

K1X000

K1M400

MOV

K1M450

K1Y000

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8000
8

END

19

Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000

MOV

K500

D8070

MOV

K1X000

K1M450

MOV

K1M400

K1Y000

M8000
8

I
Remote
Maintenance

19

H
Programming
Communication

M8071

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Slave station communication test program

E
Inverter
Communication

Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
0

Common Items

2. Program for communication test (for the slave station)

END

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.

7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode

Creating Programs
The parallel link has two modes, regular parallel link mode and high speed parallel link mode.
Program settings and the number of device to be used are different in each mode.
When connecting FX PLCs in the parallel link, use the same mode in both PLCs.

7.1

Regular Parallel Link Mode

This section explains the program setting method in the regular parallel link mode.

7.1.1

Checking contents of related devices

The tables below show devices used in the parallel link.

1. Devices for setting the parallel link

These devices are used for setting the parallel link. The setting of these devices is essential to use the
parallel link.
Device

Name

Description

M8070

Parallel link master station

declare

Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station.

M8071

Parallel link slave station

setting

Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station.

M8178

Channel setting

Set the channel of communication port to be used (in the FX3G,

FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
When this device is OFF: ch1
When this device is ON: ch2

D8070

Error judgement time (ms)

Set the time for judging error in the parallel link data communication.
[Initial value: 500]

2. Devices for judging errors in the parallel link

These devices are used for judging errors in the parallel link. Use them to output link errors to the outside and
interlock sequence programs.
Device

C-38

Name

Description

M8072

Parallel link ON

This device remains ON while the parallel link is executed.

M8073

Master/slave station setting

error

This device turns ON when there is an error in the setting of the

master station or slave station.

M8063

Link error

This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode

Device

Number of
devices

Bit device

M800 to M899

100

Word device

D490 to D499

10

Description
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.

Device

Number of
devices

Bit device

M400 to M449

50

Word device

D230 to D239

10

Description
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.

Bit device

M900 to M999

100

Word device

D500 to D509

10

Description
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.

b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series

Number of
devices

Bit device

M450 to M499

50

Word device

D240 to D249

10

Description
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Device

E
Inverter
Communication

Number of
devices

D
Computer Link

2) Sending devices for the slave station

These devices are used for sending the information from the slave station to the master station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the master station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
Device

C
Parallel Link

b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series

B
N:N Network

1) Sending devices for the master station

These devices are used for sending the information from the master station to the slave station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the slave station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series

Common Items

3. Link devices

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.1.2

7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode

Creating programs for master station

Create programs for the master station.
RUN monitor
M8000

Master station setting

M8070
Channel setting
M8178

Parallel link ON
M8072

Program for setting the master station

M8070 is set to ON to set a PLC as the master station.
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".

Program for indicating link errors

Y010

Master/
slave station
setting error

When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is

defective, Y10 is set to ON.

M8073

RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 12
MOV

Program for writing link devices (master station slave

station)

K1X000

Link device

X010
C0

The information on X000 to X003 is written to link

devices.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M800 to M899
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M400 to M449

K100

FNC 12
MOV

C0

Link device

The current value of C0 is written to link devices.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 to D499
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 to D239

RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 12
MOV

FNC 12
MOV

Program for reading link devices (slave station

master station)

Link device

Link device

K1Y000

D10

X010
C1
D10

C-40

The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M900 to M999
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M450 to M499
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 to D509
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 to D249

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode

Creating programs for slave station

Common Items

7.1.3

7 Creating Programs

Create programs for the slave station.

RUN monitor
M8000

Slave station setting

M8071

M8178

(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".

Program for indicating link errors

Y010

Master/
slave station
setting error

When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is

defective, Y10 is set to ON.

M8073

D
FNC 12
MOV

Program for writing link devices (slave station master

station)

K1X000

Link device

X010
K100

FNC 12
MOV

C0

Link device

The current value of C0 is written to link devices.

FNC 12
MOV

Link device

Link device

K1Y000

D10

X010
C1

The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M800 to M899
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M400 to M449
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 to D499
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 to D239

H
Programming
Communication

D10

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FNC 12
MOV

Program for reading link devices (master station

slave station)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S :

D500 to D509
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 to D249

RUN monitor
M8000

E
Inverter
Communication

C0

The information on X000 to X003 is written to link

devices.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M900 to M999
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M450 to M499

Computer Link

RUN monitor
M8000

Parallel Link

Parallel link ON
M8072

B
N:N Network

Channel setting

Program for setting the slave station

M8071 is set to ON to set a PLC as the slave station.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs

Parallel Link

7.2

7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode

High Speed Parallel Link Mode

This section explains the program setting method in the high speed parallel link mode.

7.2.1

Checking contents of related devices

The tables below show devices used in the parallel link.

1. Devices for setting the parallel link

These devices are used for setting the parallel link. Setting of these devices is essential in using the parallel
link.
Device

Name

Description

M8070

Parallel link master station

declare

Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station.

M8071

Parallel link slave station

declare

Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station.

M8162

High speed parallel link

mode

Set this device to ON when using the high speed parallel link mode.

M8178

Channel setting

Set the channel of communication port to be used (in the FX3G,

FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
When this device is OFF: ch1
When this device is ON: ch2

D8070

Error judgement time (ms)

Set the time for judging error in the parallel link data communication.
[Initial value: 500]

2. Devices for judging errors in the parallel link

These devices are used for judging errors in the parallel link. Use them to output link errors to the outside and
interlock sequence programs.
Device

Name

Description

M8072

Parallel link ON

This device remains ON while the parallel link is executed.

M8073

Master/slave station setting

error

This device turns ON when there is an error in the setting of the

master station or slave station.

M8063

Link error

This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

3. Link devices
1) Sending devices for the master station
These devices are used for sending the information from the master station to the slave station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the slave station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
Device
Word device

D490, D491

Number of
devices

Description

The devices in the slave station are automatically updated

to the status of devices in the master station.

Number of
devices

Description

The devices in the slave station are automatically updated

to the status of devices in the master station.

b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series

Device
Word device

C-42

D230, D231

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7 Creating Programs
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode

Word device

D500, D501

Number of
devices

Description

The devices in the master station are automatically updated

to the status of devices in the slave station.

b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series

Word device

D240, D241

Number of
devices

Description

The devices in the master station are automatically updated

to the status of devices in the slave station.

Parallel Link

Device

B
N:N Network

Device

A
Common Items

2) Sending devices for the slave station

These devices are used for sending the information from the slave station to the master station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the master station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.2.2

7 Creating Programs
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode

Creating programs for master station

Create programs for the master station.
RUN monitor
M8000

Master station setting

M8070

Program for setting the master station

M8070 is set to ON to set a PLC as the master station.

High speed parallel

link mode
M8162
Channel setting
M8178

Parallel link ON
M8072

M8162 is set to ON to set the high speed parallel link

mode.
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".

Program for indicating link errors

Y010

Master/
slave station
setting error

When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is

defective, Y10 is set to ON.

M8073

RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 12
MOV

Program for writing link devices (master station slave

station)

K1X000

Link device

X010
C0

The information on X000 to X003 is written to link

devices.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231

K100

FNC 12
MOV

C0

Link device

The current value of C0 is written to link devices.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S :
D490 and D491
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231

RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 12
MOV

FNC 12
MOV

Program for reading link devices (slave station

master station)

Link device

Link device

K1Y000

D10

X010
C1
D10

C-44

The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode

Creating programs for slave station

Common Items

7.2.3

7 Creating Programs

Create programs for the slave station.

RUN monitor
M8000

Slave station setting

M8071

Program for setting the slave station

M8071 is set to ON to set a PLC as the slave station.

M8162
Channel setting

Parallel link ON
M8072

(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".

Parallel Link

M8178

M8162 is set to ON to set the high speed parallel link

mode.

Program for indicating link errors

Y010

When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is

defective, Y10 is set to ON.

M8073

RUN monitor
M8000

K1X000

Link device

C0

The information on X000 to X003 is written to link

devices.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241

K100

C0

Link device

The current value of C0 is written to link devices.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241

Link device

K1Y000

D10

X010
C1

The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.

For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231

D10

H
Programming
Communication

FNC 12
MOV

Link device

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FNC 12
MOV

Program for reading link devices (master station

slave station)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FNC 12
MOV

E
Inverter
Communication

FNC 12
MOV

Program for writing link devices (slave station master

station)

X010

RUN monitor
M8000

D
Computer Link

Master/
slave station
setting error

N:N Network

High speed parallel

link mode

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

7.3

7 Creating Programs
7.3 Cautions on Program Creation

Cautions on Program Creation

1. Program for reading link devices
1) Do not change the contents of link devices for the other station.
2) When a link error occurs, the link device information remains the same as the status just before the error.
Create a fail-safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs.

2. Cautions on using FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs

1) Only ch1 or ch2 can be set in the parallel link.
2) Do not use the N:N Network and the parallel link at the same time.
(For example, it is not allowed to use ch1 for the N:N Network and simultaneously use ch2 for the parallel
link.)

C-46

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

8 Practical Program Examples

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)

A
Common Items

8.

Practical Program Examples

This chapter shows practical programs examples.

N:N Network

8.1

Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)

When many link devices are required, use the regular parallel link mode.

System configuration example

Parallel Link

8.1.1

The example below shows a system configuration in which two FX2N PLCs are linked.
FX2N PLC

FX2N PLC

Master station

Slave station

Computer Link

FX2N-485-BD

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2N-485-BD

- Link range: 100-bit devices and 10-word devices (regular parallel link mode)
- Error judgement time: 500 ms

8.1.2

Setting contents

Device

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The program examples shown later adopt the following communication parameters:
Description
Parallel link master station setting

M8071

Parallel link slave station setting

D8070

Communication error judgement time

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

M8070

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples

Parallel Link

8.1.3

8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)

Program for master station

For the master station, refer to the program shown below.
RUN monitor
M8000
RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 20
ADD

M8070

FNC 12
MOV

K2X000 K2M800

D0

FNC 12
MOV

D2

D490

K2M900 K2Y000

X010
T0

The ON/OFF status of inputs X000 to X007 in the master

station is output to Y000 to Y007 in the slave station.
When the calculation result (D0 + D2) in the master
station is moved to D490 of the slave station.
The ON/OFF status of M0 to M7 in the slave station is
output to Y000 to Y007 in the master station.
The value of D10 in the slave station is stored to the timer
setting (T0) in the master station.

D500

8.1.4

Program for slave station

For the slave station, refer to the program shown below.
RUN monitor
M8000
RUN monitor
M8000

FNC 10
CMP

M8071

FNC 12
MOV
D490

K2M800 K2Y000

K100

M10

X010

C-48

M10

The ON/OFF status of inputs X000 to X007 in the master

station is output to Y000 to Y007 in the slave station.
When the calculation result (D0 + D2) in the master
station is 100 or less, Y010 is set to ON in the slave
station.

Y010

FNC 12
MOV

K2M0

K2M900

FNC 12
MOV

D10

D500

The ON/OFF status of M0 to M7 in the slave station is

output to Y000 to Y007 in the master station.

The value of D10 in the slave station stored to the timer

setting (T0) in the master station.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Troubleshooting

Parallel Link

9.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

A
Common Items

9.

Troubleshooting

This chapter explains troubleshooting.

N:N Network

9.1

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.

Parallel Link

9.2

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RD" and "SD" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status

RD

SD
Flashing

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received.

Off

Off

Computer Link

Operation status

Flashing

Data is being sent or received.

Data is not sent or received.

Inverter
Communication

While the parallel link is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.
If they do not flash, check the wiring and the communication setting in the master and slave stations.

9.3

Checking Installation and Wiring

If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For the mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)

The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is correctly provided.
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3. Wiring

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Mounting status

Checking Sequence Program

1. Communication setting in the sequence program

2. Communication setting using parameters

C-49

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Verify that the communication settings using parameters are suitable for use. If the communication settings
are not suitable for the purpose of use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLCs power.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Verify that N:N Network (D8173 to D8180) is not set. Using both the parallel link and N:N Network at the same
time is not allowed.
Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not
possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to cycle power to the PLC.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.

Programming
Communication

9.4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

9 Troubleshooting
9.4 Checking Sequence Program

3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in parallel link.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

5. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLCs power.

6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

7. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLCs power.

8. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
*1.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

9. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

10.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

C-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Troubleshooting

Parallel Link

Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

Verify that errors have not occurred in the master station and slave station. Errors can be checked using the
flags shown below.

1. Checking the device M8072

2. Checking the device M8073

If the parallel link is not set correctly, M8073 turns ON.
If M8073 is ON, verify that the master station and slave station are set correctly in sequence programs.

3. Devices for checking link errors

No error

6312

Character error in parallel link

6313

Sum check error in parallel link

6314

Format error in parallel link

0000

No error

3812

Character error in parallel link

3813

Sum check error in parallel link

3814

Format error in parallel link

Action

E
Verify that the parallel link
setting programs are set
correctly. Check the wiring
also.

Caution

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The devices for checking link errors are not cleared even after communication errors are reset.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D8438
(in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC)

Description

0000

Inverter
Communication

D8063

Error code

D
Computer Link

2) Checking the error code

When a communication error occurs in parallel link using ch 1, the error code is stored in D8063.
When a communication error occurs in parallel link using ch 2, the error code is stored in D8438.
The table below shows the details of error codes.

C
Parallel Link

1) Checking the error flags M8063 and M8438 (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
If a communication error occurs in the parallel link, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
When ch1 is used, M8063 turns ON. When ch2 is used in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC, M8438
turns ON.
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, the error code is stored in D8063 or D8438.

N:N Network

While the parallel link is established, M8072 remains ON.

If M8072 is OFF, an error has occurred in the parallel link setting or communication.

Device

Common Items

9.5

9.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

Parallel Link

10.1 Related Device List

10. Related Data

10.1

Related Device List

1. Bit devices
Device
number

Name

Initial DetecR/W
value
tion

Description

Devices for communication setting

M8070

Parallel link master

station setting

M8071

Parallel link slave

station setting

M8162
M8178

Links a PLC as the master station when it turns ON.

Links a PLC as the slave station when it turns ON.

High speed parallel

link mode

Turns ON when two-word device communication

mode is selected.

M, L

Channel setting

Sets the communication port to be used. (in the FX3G,

FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
OFF: ch1, ON: ch2

M, L

Devices for checking communication status

M8072

Parallel link ON

Remains ON while the parallel link is being executed.

M, L

M8073

Parallel link setting

error

Turns ON when an error is included in the setting

contents of the master station or slave station.

M, L

M, L

M, L

M8063

Serial communication Turns ON when an error

error 1 (ch 1)
communication using ch 1.

occurs

in

serial

M8438

Turns ON when an error occurs in serial

Serial communication
communication using ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
error 2 (ch 2)
and FX3UC)

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

W: Write only
M: Master station
L: Slave station

2. Word devices (data registers)

Device
number

Name

Initial DetecR/W
value
tion

Description

Devices for communication setting

D8070

Error judgement time

Sets the error judgement time

communication in the parallel link.

for

data

500

M, L

Devices for checking communication status

D8063

Serial communication Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
communication using ch 1.
error code 1 (ch 1)

0000

M, L

D8438

Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial

Serial communication
communication using ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
error code 2 (ch 2)
and FX3UC)

0000

M, L

Devices for checking

D8419

Operation mode
display (ch 1)

Stores the communication type being used by

ch 1. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

M, L

D8439

Operation mode
display (ch 2)

Stores the communication type being used by

ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

M, L

R: Read only
W: Write only
M: Master station
L: Slave station

C-52

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

Parallel Link

Details of Related Devices

Common Items

10.2

10.2 Details of Related Devices

The devices described below are used in parallel link.

10.2.1 Parallel link master station declare [M8070]

B
N:N Network

When this device is set to ON, the PLC is handled as the master station in the parallel link.

1. Applicable stations
The master station requires program setting.

2. Detailed contents

C
Parallel Link

In the FX PLC to be handled as the master station, set M8070 to "normally ON" using M8000.

3. Cautions on use
Set this device to ON in a sequence program.

10.2.2 Channel setting [M8178]

D
Computer Link

This device works as the channel setting flag (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station require program setting.

2. Detailed contents

E
Inverter
Communication

When using ch 2 as the communication port, set this device to ON in the sequence program.
When using ch 1, the sequence program is not required.

10.2.3 Parallel link slave station declare [M8071]

When this device is set to ON, the PLC is handled as the slave station in the started communication.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Applicable stations
The slave station requires program setting.

2. Detailed contents
In the FX PLC to be handled as a slave station, set M8071 to "normally ON" using M8000.

3. Cautions on use

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Set this device to ON using a sequence program.

10.2.4 High-speed parallel link mode [M8162]

When M8162 turns OFF, the regular parallel link mode is selected. When M8162 turns ON, the high-speed
parallel link mode is selected.

Programming
Communication

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station require program setting.

2. Detailed contents

The table below shows the number of link devices.

Regular parallel link mode

High-speed parallel link mode

Word device (D)

Bit device (M)

Word device (D)

100 in each station

10 in each station

2 in each station

FX0N, FX1S, FX3S

50 in each station

10 in each station

2 in each station

3. Cautions on use
Set this device to ON using a sequence program.

C-53

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Bit device (M)

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC,

FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC

Remote
Maintenance

PLC

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices

10.2.5 Parallel link ON [M8072]

This device is provided to verify that the parallel link is being executed.

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.

2. Detailed contents
M8072 remains ON while the parallel link is being executed normally, and remains OFF while the parallel link
is not being executed normally.

10.2.6 Parallel link setting error [M8073]

This device is provided to verify that the setting is correct in the master station and slave station in the parallel
link.

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.

2. Detailed contents
M8073 remains OFF when the setting is correct in the master station or slave station, and turns ON when the
setting is incorrect.

10.2.7 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]

These devices are provided to check communication errors. (M8438 is available only in the FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC.)

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.

2. Detailed contents
M8063 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 1. When M8063 turns ON, the error code is
stored in D8063.
M8438 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 2. When M8438 turns ON, the error code is
stored in D8438.

3. Cautions on use
Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

10.2.8 Error judgement time setting [D8070]

This device is provided to set the error judgment time (initial value: 500 ms).

1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.

2. Detailed contents
When data transmission requires more time than the time set here, it is regarded as error.

3. Cautions on use
Set the error judgment time for the master station to a value twice or more the scan time in the slave station.
If the error judgment time is less than twice the scan time, a serial communication error may occur.

C-54

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 Related Data

Parallel Link

10.2 Details of Related Devices

These devices store the serial communication error code. (D8438 is available only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC.)

1. Applicable stations

B
N:N Network

The master and slave station may check the serial communication error code.

2. Detailed contents
The table below shows the details of error codes.
Device

Error code

D8438
(ch 2)

No error

6312

Character error in parallel link

6313

Sum check error in parallel link

6314

Format error in parallel link

0000

No error
Character error in parallel link

3813

Sum check error in parallel link

3814

Format error in parallel link

C
Verify that the parallel link
setting programs are
correct, and check the wiring
also.

3. Cautions on use

10.2.10 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]

1. Detailed contents
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

Code

Description

Programming communication

PP modem mode
Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network

RS instruction

RS2 instruction
Parallel link

Inverter instruction

Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication

10

CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

H
Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

E
Inverter
Communication

Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.

Serial communication errors code are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

D
Computer Link

3812

Action

Parallel Link

D8063
(ch 1)

Description

0000

Common Items

10.2.9 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

C-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Parallel Link

10.2 Details of Related Devices

MEMO

C-56

10 Related Data

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

D. Computer Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

D-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "computer link" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

D-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains computer link.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System
Computer link allows connection of up to sixteen FX PLCs and A PLCs to a personal computer working as the
master station to link data.
2) Applicable computer link protocols are the same as dedicated supported computer link protocols units in
the A Series PLC. (But the supported formats and commands are limited.)
Important points and reference
chapter/section

System

....... Number of linked units

....... Total extension distance

500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]

Personal computer

FX PLC
Station No. 0 (00H)

FX PLC
Station No. 15 (0FH)

FX-485PC-IF

.......

To check applicable PLC

models, refer to Section 1.3.

.......

For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.

.......

For wiring,
refer to Chapter 4.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

For the specifications,

refer to Chapter 2.

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

In the case of RS-232C

15 m (49' 2")

FX PLC
Station No. 0 (00H)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Personal computer

Inverter
Communication

...

D
Computer Link

16 units

In the case of RS-485

C
Parallel Link

1) Up to sixteen PLCs can be connected in computer link.

Programming
Communication

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C

The number of devices handled all at once varies depending on the command and the types of devices.

Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.2

1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the Computer Link setting procedures up until data link.

Computer link
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.

Outline of system
Applicable PLC versions
Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
Link time
Number of devices
System configuration
Select communication equipment.

Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.

Wiring procedure
Wiring example

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting.

PLC serial communication setting

Communication setting

Refer to Chapter 6.
Computer link
Refer to Chapter 7.
Commands

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.

Computer link
Dedicated protocol format
Transfer sequence time chart and
communication time
Commands
Applicable command list
Specification method
On-demand function

If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting

(Chapter 8).
*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

D-4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions

Common Items

1.3

PLC

Applicability (applicable version)

Remarks

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series

FX3GC Series

Parallel Link

FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

(Ver. 1.06 or later)

The version can be checked by monitoring D8001.

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

The version can be checked by monitoring D8001.

FX1NC Series

Computer Link

FX1N Series
FX1S Series
FX0N Series
FX0S Series

Computer link is not provided.

FX0 Series

Computer link is not provided.

(Ver. 3.30 or later)*1

FX2(FX) Series

(Ver. 3.30 or later)*1

*1.

Computer link is not provided.

Applicable in products manufactured in June, 1996 and later (manufacturers serial No.: 66**** and
later).

Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

How to look at the manufacturer's serial number

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.

Products whose production was stopped

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

H
Programming
Communication

1.3.4

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1.3.3

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.3.2

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2C Series
FX1 Series

B
N:N Network

The communication type is applicable in the following versions.

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the following version shown:

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30PSW DNC-GXW2-E
GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

D-6

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW5 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

A
Model name

Remarks

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

FX-30P

Parallel Link

GX Works2

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 2.00 or later

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS-KIT/98

SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/V-3

SW1PC-FXGP/V3

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-A7PHP-KIT

SW1RX-GPPFX

Ver. 3.00 or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)

Apx.A

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

D-7

Discontinued
models

GOT1000 Series display units

Remote
Maintenance

FX-30P

H
Programming
Communication

GX Developer

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3S PLC

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

D
Computer Link

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

B
N:N Network

GOT1000 Series display units

Applicable version

Common Items

Product name

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Computer Link

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 5.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD

Ver. 5.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 4.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GOT1000 Series display units

1.4.2

SW5 A or later

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be programmed

Priority: High Low

Model to be set

FX3UC Series

FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U Series

FX3U, FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3GC Series

FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3G Series

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3S Series

FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2NC Series

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N Series

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1NC Series

FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1N Series

FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1S Series

FX1S

FX2(FX)

FX0N Series

FX0N

FX2(FX)

FX0S Series

FX0S

FX2(FX)

FX0 Series

FX0

FX2(FX)

FX2C Series

FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

*1.

FX2(FX)
FX1

"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

D-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Computer Link

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

A
Common Items

2.

Specifications

This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.

N:N Network

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

Communication is executed within the specifications shown in the table below. The baud rate, etc. can be
changed in the parameter settings of a programming tool or in a sequence program.

Number of connectable units

Transmission standard

Protocol type
Control procedure
Communication method

16 maximum
RS-485 or RS-232C standard
RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5") or less
[50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is
included in system]
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2") or less
Computer link (dedicated protocol)

Distance varies depending

on communication equipment type.
Formats 1 and 4 are applicable.

Half-duplex, bidirectional communication

Start bit
Character Data bit
format
Parity bit
Stop bit

Inverter
Communication

38400

*1

bps

Fixed
7 or 8-bit
None, odd or even

1 or 2-bit
Fixed

Terminator

Fixed

Control line

Fixed

Sum check

Provided or not provided

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Header

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or

Baud rate

*1.

Remarks

Computer Link

Maximum total extension

distance

Specifications

Parallel Link

Item

FX3U and FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.41 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC is applicable.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Computer Link

2.2 Link Specifications

2.2

Link Specifications

2.2.1

Applicable commands and number of device points

Number of points processed in
one-time update

Command
Name

Symbol
Unit:
Bit

Batch
reading

WR

57H, 52H

Device memory

BW

*1

BT

WT

51H, 57H

42H, 54H

57H, 54H

Unit:
Word

PLC

QT*1 51H, 54H

54

FX2(FX),
FX3S,
FX2C,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX3U, FX3UC
FX2N, FX2NC
256

256

13 words
32 words
32 words
208 points 512 points 512 points

Read word devices in 1 point units.

13*4

64*2

64*2

Reads bit devices in 16 point units.

32 words
512 points

Read word devices in 1 point units.

64*2

46

160

160

Writes bit devices in 16 point units.

10 words
10 words
10 words
160 points 160 points 160 points

Writes word devices in 1 point units.

11*5

64*2

64*2

Writes bit devices in 16 point units.

10 words
160 points

Writes word devices in 1 point units.

64*2

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1

point units, and sets or resets them.

10

20

20

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16

point units, and sets or resets them.

6 words
96 points

Specifies word devices arbitrarily in 1

point units, and writes them.

6*3

10*3

10*3

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16

point units, and sets or resets them.

10 words
160 points

Specifies word devices arbitrarily in 1

point units, and writes them.

10*3

Remote RUN

RR

Remote STOP

RS

52H, 52H Requests remote RUN or remote

52H, 53H STOP to PLC.

PLC model
name reading

PC

50H, 43H Reads PLC model name.

GW

Turns global signal ON or OFF

47H, 57H (M8126 in FX Series) in all PLCs
connected in computer link.

Global

10 words
10 words
160 points 160 points

On-demand

Maximum Maximum Maximum

quantity
quantity
quantity
Set the sending request flag to ON in
specified in specified in specified in
PLC (only when 1-to-1 connection is
sequence sequence sequence
adopted in system configuration).
program:
program:
program:
64 words
64 words
13 words

Loop-back test

TT

54H, 54H

Returns received characters back to

25
254
254
the computer as they are.
characters characters characters

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.

D-10

Reads bit devices in 16 point units.

42H, 57H Writes bit devices in 1 point units.

WW 57H, 57H

QW

Test
(random
writing)

51H, 52H

Unit:
Word

Unit:
Bit

FX0N, FX1S

42H, 52H Reads bit devices in 1 point units.

Unit:
Word

Unit:
Bit

Contents of processing

BR

QR*1

Batch
writing

ASCII
code

Available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

32 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.
32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are not applicable.
6 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.
5 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Computer Link

Applicable device ranges

Common Items

2.2.2

2.2 Link Specifications

The tables below show devices and device number ranges applicable for the device memory access.
Construct each of the BR, BW, BT, WR, WW, and WT commands in five characters.
Device
+
Device number
4 characters
3 characters for timer or counter

Construct each of the QR, QW, and QT commands in seven characters.

Device
+
Device number

= 7 characters

6 characters
5 characters for timer or counter

Parallel Link

1 character
2 characters for timer or counter

1. Bit devices
FX PLCs do not support timer coils (TC) and counter coils (CC).
Device number range (character)
FX1S

Input
relay
(X)

X0000
to
X0337

Y0000
to
Y0015

Y0000
Y0000
Y0000 to
to
to
Y0267
Y0177
Y0177

M0000
M0000 to M0511 M0000 to M1535
to
M3071

S0000 to S0127

S0000 to S0999

TS000 to TS063

TS000 to TS255

CS000
to
CS031
CS235
to
CS254

CS000 to CS255

Octal

M008000 to M008511
TS000 to TS000 to TS000 to Decimal
TS137
TS319
TS511
TS00000 TS00000 TS00000
to
to
to
TS00137 TS00319 TS00511
CS000
to
CS031
CS000 to CS255
CS200
to
CS255
CS00000
to
CS00031
CS00000 to
CS00255
CS00200
to
CS00255

D-11

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Remote
Maintenance

CS000
to
CS031
CS235
to
Counter CS255
contact
(C)

M8000 to M8255

X0000
X0000
X0000
to
to
to
X0017
X0177
X0377
X000000 X000000 X000000
to
to
to
X000017 X000177 X000377
Y0000
Y0000
Y0000
to
to
to
Y0015
Y0177
Y0377
Y000000 Y000000 Y000000
to
to
to
Y000015 Y000177 Y000377
M0000
to
M0000 to M7679
M1535
M000000
M000000 to
to
M007679
M001535
S0000
to
S0000 to S4095
S0255
S000000
S000000 to
to
S004095
S000255
M8000 to M8511

Programming
Communication

Special M8000 to M8254

auxiliary
relay
(M)
Timer
contact
(T)

Y0000
to
Y0337

FX3S

FX3U,
FX3UC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

State
relay
(S)

X0000
X0000
X0000 to
to
to
X0267
X0177
X0177

FX0N

FX3G,
FX3GC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Auxiliary
relay
(M)

FX2N,
FX2NC

Inverter
Communication

Output
relay
(Y)

X0000
to
X0017

FX2(FX), FX1N,
FX2C
FX1NC

Available
Device
commands
number
expression BR, WR, QR,
Decimal/ BW, WW, QW,
Octal
BT WT QT

Computer Link

Device

B
N:N Network

1 character
2 characters for timer or counter

= 5 characters

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Computer Link

2.2 Link Specifications

2. Word devices
Device number range (character)
Device
FX1S
Timer
current
value
(T)

FX0N

TN000 to
TN063

FX2(FX), FX1N,
FX2C
FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

TN000 to TN255

CN000
to
CN031
CN235
Counter
to
current CN255
value
(C)

CN000
to
CN031
CN235
to
CN254

CN000 to CN255

Data
register
(D)
File
register
(D)
RAM
file
register
(D)
Extension
register
(R)
Special
data
register
(D)

*1.

D0000 to
D0255

D0000
to
D0999

D0000 to
D7999

D1000
to
D2499

D1000
to
D2999

FX3S

FX3G,
FX3GC

FX3U,
FX3UC

TN000
TN000
TN000
to
to
to
TN137
TN319
TN511
TN00000 TN00000 TN00000
to
to
to
TN00137 TN00319 TN00511
CN000
to
CN031
CN000 to CN255
CN200
to
CN255
CN00000
to
CN00031
CN00000 to
CN00200
CN00255
to
CN00255
D0000
to
D0000 to D7999
D2999
Decimal
D000000
D000000 to
to
D007999
D002999

D6000
to
D7999

*1

D8000 to D8255

*1

D8000 to
D8255

Available
Device
commands
number
expression BR, WR, QR,
Decimal/ BW, WW, QW,
Octal
BT WT QT

R0000 to R9999
R000000 R000000
to
to
R023999 R032767

D8000 to D8511
D008000 to D008511

The WT and QT commands do not support 32-bit counters (C200 to C255).

Caution
1) When using bit devices in a command requiring specification in 1-word units, make sure that the head
device number is a multiple of "8".
2) Special auxiliary relays and special data registers are classified into ones for read only, write only and
ones for system only.
If data is written to any range in which writing is not allowed, an error may occur in the PLC.
For details on special auxiliary relays and special data registers, refer to the manual of the PLC.
3) In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the PLCs cannot
access the program area (in the built-in RAM, memory cassette and built-in EEPROM) when users set file
registers (D).
In FX 3U and FX3UC PLCs, extension registers (R) cannot access extension file registers (ER) in a
mounted memory cassette.
In FX3G, FX3GC PLCs, extension registers (R) cannot access extension file registers (ER).

D-12

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Computer Link

Link time

Common Items

2.2.3

2.2 Link Specifications

1. Data transfer
Data transfer

Data transfer

Interval time

Time to read continuous word devices (timers, counters or data registers) in one station = (21*1 + 4 Number
of read points*2) Time to send or receive 1 character (ms) + Interval time + Maximum scan time (special
data register D8012) in PLC 3 + Message waiting time

*1.

The number of points is counted in 1-word units.

3. Time to send or receive one character

The table below shows the time required to send or receive one character when the start bit is 1-bit, the data
length is 7-bit, the parity is 1-bit, and the stop bit is 1-bit.

38400*3

0.26

Number of stations

<When the transmission speed is 19200 bps> Unit : sec

Number of stations

16

Number of
data points

16

10

0.3

1.9

3.7

10

0.2

1.6

3.2

32

0.4

2.6

5.2

32

0.3

2.0

3.9

64

0.5

3.7

7.3

64

0.4

2.5

5.0

*3.

Available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*4.

The message waiting time is "0" when the RS-485 interface and two-pair wiring are used.
The message waiting time is "0" also when the RS-232C interface is used.
When one-pair wiring is adopted, a message waiting time of 70 to 150 ms is required for each transfer.
Add this message waiting time.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*5.

I
Remote
Maintenance

When the types of read or written devices increase, "Data transfer time shown in above table Number of
device types" is required.
When the number of read or written points exceeds "64"*5, the transfer time increase.
Accordingly, for achieving efficient data transfer, it is recommended to decrease the number of types of
transferred devices and use as many continuous device numbers as possible.

H
Programming
Communication

Number of
data points

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The tables below show the data transfer times depending on the number of continuously read or written word
devices at the transmission speeds of 9600 bps and 19200 bps when the message waiting time is 0 ms*4, the
maximum scan time is 20 ms, and the interval time is 100 ms.
<When the transmission speed is 9600 bps> Unit : sec

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Time to send or receive 1 character (ms)

33.34
16.67
8.34
4.17
2.08
1.04
0.52

Inverter
Communication

Transmission speed (baud rate) (bps)

300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

D
Computer Link

*2.

This is the number of characters when the protocol format 1 is used and the sum check is not
provided.
When the protocol format 4 is used, add "4" to this value.
When the sum check is provided, add "4" to this value also.

C
Parallel Link

Time to write continuous word devices (timers, counters or data registers) in one station = (20*1 + 4 Number
of written points*2) Time to send or receive 1 character (ms) + Interval time + Maximum scan time (special
data register D8012) in PLC + Message waiting time

N:N Network

2. Data transfer time

The maximum number of points is as follows for the FX0N and FX1S PLCs:
Maximum number of read points : 13
Maximum number of written points: 11

D-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.

3.1 System Configuration

System Configuration and Equipment Selection

This chapter explains the system configuration and communication equipment selection operating in
accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C required by FX PLCs.

3.1

System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use computer link.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485 or
RS-232C

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

This is the communication board built

into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.

RS-485: 50 m
(164' 0")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the special adapter connection

board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and
then attach the communication
adapter to the left of the main unit.

RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

FX PLC

Communication
board

Communication
adapter

Special adapter
connection
board

Communication
adapter

Connector
conversion
adapter

Communication
adapter

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.

D-14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

For communication in accordance with RS-232C

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

C
Parallel Link

3.2.1

B
N:N Network

Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the outside dimensions and D-SUB connector shape are different between units
shown in "FX2NC-232ADP/FX0N-232ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- Computer link is not provided for the FX1, FX0 or FX0S PLCs.

Common Items

3.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

D
Computer Link

15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N

FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Inverter
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

+
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX1S

F
15 m
(49' 2")

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

+
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX0N-232ADP

Remote
Maintenance

FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD

Programming
Communication

FX1N

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX2N

+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX2N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX3S

FX3S-CNV-ADP

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

D-16

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.

Parallel Link

15 m
(49' 2")

Computer Link

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3U

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1NC

FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2NC

D-18

FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

Parallel Link

ch1

FX3GC

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Computer Link

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

E
Inverter
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

ch2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)
FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

When a
channel.

ch1

port

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

15 m
(49' 2")

FX2(FX)

FX-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX2C

D-20

FX-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

For communication in accordance with RS-485.

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

Common Items

3.2.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

B
N:N Network

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N

FX2NC-485ADP

FX0N-485ADP

(European terminal block)

(Terminal block)

C
Parallel Link

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

Computer Link

FX1S

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

Inverter
Communication

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX1N-CNV-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX1N

(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")

FX2N

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP

Remote
Maintenance

FX2N-CNV-BD

Programming
Communication

FX2N-485-BD

(Terminal block)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3S

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

D-22

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.

Parallel Link

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

FX3G-CNV-ADP

Computer Link

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents (European terminal block)
232 and 485).

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

E
Inverter
Communication

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

FX3U

FX3U-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

+
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

port channel.
ch1

FX3U

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3GC

+
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).

D-24

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

Parallel Link

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")

D
Computer Link

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Inverter
Communication

RD A

50 m
(164' 0")

RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
a FX3U-8AV-BD is used,

When
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

it occupies one communication

ch2

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

Programming
Communication

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

Apx.A

FX3U-CNV-BD

Discontinued
models

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

D-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection

Computer Link

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX2

FX-485ADP

(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX2C

D-26

FX-485ADP

(Terminal block)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

4 Wiring
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Common Items

4.

Wiring

This chapter explains the wiring.

N:N Network

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

C
Parallel Link

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.1

4.1 Wiring Procedure

Wiring Procedure
Selecting the connection method
Select the wiring method suitable to the application.
For details, refer to Section 4.2.

Preparing for wiring

Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.

Turning OFF the PLC power

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.

Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)

Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.

Wiring communication equipment

Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C.
For communication in accordance with RS-232C, refer to Section 4.4.
For communication in accordance with RS-485, refer to Section 4.5.

D-28

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

Selecting Connection Method

4.2.1

For communication in accordance with RS-232C (1-to-1 connection)

With communication in accordance with RS-232C, 1-to-1 connection is applicable. Make sure that the total
extension distance is 15 m (49' 2") or less.
FX PLC

C
Parallel Link

Personal computer

B
N:N Network

When using computer link, communication can be achieved in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 (422).
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, computer link is applicable in up to two channels at the same time. In
such a case, communication can be achieved in accordance with RS-232C on both channels, in accordance
with RS-485 on both channels, or in accordance with RS-232C on one channel and RS-485 on the other
channel.

Common Items

4.2

4.2 Selecting Connection Method

Computer Link

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-232C

15 m (49' 2") or less

E
For communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422) (1-to-N connection)
With communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422), up to 16 PLCs can be connected. Make sure that
the total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") or less [50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is included].
Personal computer

FX PLC
Station No. 0

...
+

Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485

Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485

One-pair wiring and two-pair wiring are applicable for communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422).
The wiring method is determined for each application. Refer to the table below, and perform suitable wiring.

When the message waiting time*2 should be 70 ms or less

Computer link

*1

When the message waiting time*2 may be more than 70 ms

When the on-demand function is used

*3

: Applicable wiring method, : Non-applicable wiring method

*1.

When computer link is added to an existing system, adopt the wiring method used in the existing
system.

*2.

For the message waiting time, refer to Subsection 6.4.3.

*3.

"Echo transfer" is generated when the FX-485PC-IF is used in the one-pair wiring.
Take proper countermeasures in the computer so that the echo transfer can be ignored.

Remote
Maintenance

: Recommended wiring method,

Two-pair
wiring

H
Programming
Communication

One-pair
wiring

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX-485PC-IF

FX PLC
Station No. 15

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

RS-232C/RS-485
communication
converter

Inverter
Communication

4.2.2

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

4.3

4 Wiring
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)

Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)

Select cables using the procedure described below.

4.3.1

Twisted pair cable

Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used in wiring.

1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer

Model name

Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.

Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.

The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.

Fujikura Ltd.

Remarks

SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

DPEV SB 0.3 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

2. Cable structural drawing (reference)

Pair
Shield

Two-pair cable structural

drawing example

4.3.2

Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.

1. Selection procedure when purchasing

1) Cable type

: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)

2) Connection specifications : Straight type

3) Connector

: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)

2. Cautions on using commercial cables

Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.

D-30

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block

Cable size when Cable size when

one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
AWG22 to
AWG20

AWG22

Tightening
torque

Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
Nm

Tool size
A

0.4 (0.01")

2.5 (0.09")

AWG20 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD

AWG26 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

Not applicable

0.4 to 0.5
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2NC-485ADP

AWG26 to
AWG16

AWG26 to
AWG20

When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is

- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD

Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")

Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")

Model name

Caulking tool

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)

Insulating sleeve

Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")

2.6 mm
(0.1")

14 mm
(0.55")

Programming
Communication

Manufacturer

Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve

Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>

*1.
*2.

FX2NC-485ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

E
Inverter
Communication

Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.

D
Computer Link

FX3G-485-BDRJ

C
Parallel Link

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

Bar terminal with

Insulating sleeve
(cable size)

B
N:N Network

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.

The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.

Common Items

4.3.3

4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)

Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)

Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.

Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Note

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).

For size A and size B,

refer to the table above.

<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name
SZS 0.4 2.5

FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP

Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name
SZF 1-0.6 3.5

2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
When wiring one cable to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more
3.2(0.13")

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

D-32

Terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

Connecting terminal resistors

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.
In the case of two-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal and SDA-SDB terminal of the communication equipment.

Brown

Orange Brown Precision

3 3 1
=330
(101)

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485-BD

330
OPEN
110

D
Terminal
resistor selector
switch

Manufacturer

Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Model name
0.4mm
(0.01")

2.5mm
(0.09")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

SZS 0.4 2.5

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

Inverter
Communication

FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.

For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the recommended
tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as screwdriver) as
shown in the right figure.
<Reference>

Computer Link

Terminal
resistor
selector
switch

C
Parallel Link

2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

B
N:N Network

1 1 1
=110
(101)

1. Terminal resistor type

In the case of one-pair wiring, use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
In the case of two-pair wiring, use four terminal resistors of 330 , 1/4 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.

Precision

Common Items

4.3.4

4 Wiring
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Programming
Communication

Terminal block mounting screws

Remote
Maintenance

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.4

4.4 Connection Diagram for RS-232C

Connection Diagram for RS-232C

Representative wiring examples are shown in this section. When pin numbers in the external equipment are
different, wire the pins as shown below.

4.4.1

Connection diagram between FX PLC and personal computer

External equipment operating in accordance
with RS-232C

PLC side

Name

FX3U-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX1N-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

Name

FG

When CS and
RS are used

Name

9-pin 25-pin
D-Sub D-Sub

1
FG

When DR and
ER are used
9-pin 25-pin
D-Sub D-Sub

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

SD(TXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

20

RS(RTS)

ER(DTR)

20

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

DR(DSR)

CS(CTS)

DR(DSR)

Connection diagram between FX-485PC-IF and personal computer

485PC-IF

D-34

FX0N232ADP FX-232ADP

FG

4.4.2

FX2NC232ADP

Personal computer

Signal name

Pin No.

Signal name

SD (TXD)

SD (TXD)

RD (RXD)

RD (RXD)

RS (RTS)

RS (RTS)

CS (CTS)

CS (CTS)

DR (DSR)

DR (DSR)

SG (GND)

SG (GND)

ER (DTR)

20

ER (DTR)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422

Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422

4.5.1

One-pair wiring

*3

B
FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG*2

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

Terminal
resistor:
110
*3

D
Computer Link

SDA
(TXD+)

Parallel Link

Terminal
resistor:
110

FX0N-485ADP

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

N:N Network

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485

Common Items

4.5

SG

*1.

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

*3.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly
The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with
terminal resistors.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance
with RS-485
SDA
(TXD+)
Terminal SDB
resistor (TXD-)
110 RDA
*2
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
LINK
SG

Distributor (BMJ-8)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding

Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

*1.

*1

*1

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

*1

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Distributor (BMJ-8)

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Class-D
grounding

*1

5
RDA
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame

Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110)*2

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.

*2.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name

D-36

Model name

Manufacturer

RJ45 connector

TM11AP-88P

HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

Two-pair wiring

*3

Terminal
resistor:
330
2

FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG*2

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less)*1

*3

C
*3
Terminal
resistor:
330
2

Parallel Link

*3

FX0N-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)

N:N Network

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485/RS-422
SDA
(TXD+)

Common Items

4.5.2

4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422

SG

Computer Link

*1.

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

*3.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.

The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with
terminal resistors.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485/RS-422
Distributor (BMJ-8)
SDA
5
(TXD+)
4
SDB
*2
3
(TXD-)
6
RDA
(RXD+)
1
RDB
*2
2
Terminal (RXD-)
7
resistor LINK
8
330 SG
2
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding

*1

*1

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

*1.

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

*1

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Distributor (BMJ-8)

Class-D
grounding

*1

RDA
5
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
Terminal
2
resistor
7 *2
Terminal
8
resistor
Connector metal frame

Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
330)*2

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.

*2.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name

D-38

Model name

Manufacturer

RJ45 connector

TM11AP-88P

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Computer Link

Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)

Common Items

4.5.3

4.6 Grounding

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.

Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.

B
N:N Network

Wiring circuit
switch

C
Parallel Link

4.6

Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below.

Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment

Independent grounding
Best condition

PLC

Other
equipment

Shared grounding
Good condition

PLC

Other
equipment

E
Inverter
Communication

PLC

Computer Link

The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.

Common grounding
Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Computer Link

5.

5.1 Communication Setting Methods

Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

This chapter explains the communication setting method types and setting methods for computer link.

5.1

Communication Setting Methods

This section explains the communication setting methods and setting procedures in FX PLCs.

1. Setting method types

1) Specifying the setting using parameters in the sequence programming software:
Register the setting as parameters by executing communication setting on the personal computer screen
using the sequence programming software, and transfer them to a PLC.
(This method using parameters is not available for FX2(FX), FX2C, or FX0N PLCs.)
2) Specifying the setting by writing data to special data registers:
Create a sequence program specifying the communication format, station number settings and time-out
time setting, and then transfer the sequence program to a PLC.
Caution
A PLC operates in the same way regardless of the selected method shown above. If both methods are
selected, priority is given to the method using parameters.

2. Communication setting method applicability for each FX Series

FX Series

Specification using parameters

FX1S, FX1N, FX1N, FX2N, FX2NC,

FX3S, FX3G(ch1), FX3GC(ch1),
FX3U(ch1), FX3UC(ch1)

Specification using special data registers

(Recommended)

FX3G(ch2), FX3GC(ch2),
FX3U(ch2), FX3UC(ch2)

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N

For the detailed contents of special data registers, refer to Section 9.2.
Setting data write method to special data registers, refer to Section 9.3.

3. Setting data flow

PLC memory

Setting window

Parameter area
Parameter
method

Transferred
when power
is turned ON

Program area
[MOV H
[MOV H
[MOV K

D8120]
D8121]
D8129]

Written by
program

ch1: Computer link

D8120 Communication format
D8121 Station number settings
D8129 Time-out time setting

In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC

ch2: Computer link

Sequence
program for
set values

Program
method

D8420 Communication format

D8421 Station number settings
D8429 Time-out time setting
When both methods are used at the same time,
priority is given to the contents set in the parameter
method.

D-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Caution

5.2

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Operating procedure

E
Inverter
Communication

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.

Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.

Computer Link

5.2.1

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

C
Parallel Link

Since the special data registers (D8120, D8121, D8129) is a battery backed area in the case of the FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3U and FX3UC series, a value cannot be normally saved when the battery is discharge (or after a
battery error occurs).
Therefore, keep in mind that a computer link setting may not be possible in this case.

B
N:N Network

1) When specifying the setting using parameters:

When the PLC power is turned ON, the parameters set using the parameter setting window in the
sequence programming software are automatically transferred to the PLC.
As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC, the setting becomes valid.
After the program (parameters) are transferred to the PLC, it is necessary to reboot the PLCs power.
2) When specifying the setting by writing data to special data registers:
Set the PLC mode from STOP to RUN, write the required data, reboot the PLCs power.
As soon as the PLC power is turned ON, the setting becomes valid.

Common Items

4. Time at which the settings become valid

Opening the parameter setting window

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Select a channel and check the box labeled "Operate Communication Setting" box, then adjust the
parameters for that channel.
Click [End].

Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here.

Writing parameters to the PLC

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

D-42

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

5.3.1

Operating procedure

Displaying the serial setting (parameter)

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter setting.

C
Parallel Link

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

5.3

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

D
Computer Link

1. When there are no parameter settings

There are no communication settings. Click the [Yes] button.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

2. When there are already parameter settings

The existing communication setting contents are displayed.

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Execute the communication setting as shown below.

Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here.

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

D-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.1 Data Flow by Link

Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Data Flow by Link

The figures below show images of data flow achieved when data is read from or written to a PLC CPU and
the status is controlled.
In the case of communication in accordance with RS-232C, ignore "485PC-IF" and regard "485ADP" as
"232ADP".

[10] [11]

485PC-IF

RS-485
[3]

485ADP

PLC CPU
[4]

[9] Various data

[8]

[7]

[12] Response

[13]

[14]

Device
memory
information
(read)
PLC CPU
information
(read)

[5] Read

[6] Data

Interface for
signal
conversion

Sequence
program

OS*1

Device
memory, etc.

E
Inverter
Communication

2. When the computer writes data to the PLC

Computer
OS*1

RS-232C
[2] Command,
data, etc.

485PC-IF

485ADP

PLC CPU
[4]
Sequence
program

OS*1

[6]

Device
memory
information
(written)
PLC CPU
information
(written)

[5] Write
Device
memory, etc.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3. When the PLC sends data to the computer (on-demand function)

485PC-IF
RS-232C
[6] Data

[7]
Write

RS-485
[5]

PLC CPU
[4] Data
OS*1

Sequence
program

[2]
[3] Data
Read [1] Sending
request
Device
+
memory, etc. Data writing

The OS (standing for "Operating System") indicates the software used to efficiently operate the
resources including the CPUs, memories, terminals, files, and networks using user programs, etc.

I
Remote
Maintenance

*1.

On-demand
data

485ADP

Programming
Communication

OS*1

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

[1] Request

RS-485
[3]
[7]

[8] Response

Computer

D
Computer Link

[1] Request

OS*1

RS-232C
[2] Command

C
Parallel Link

1. When the computer reads data from the PLC

Computer

N:N Network

6.1

Common Items

6.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.2

6.2 Important Points in Computer Link

Important Points in Computer Link

This section explains important points to be understood before creating programs for computer link.

6.2.1

Operations of PLC caused by data transfer

The PLC operations and scan time using computer link are as described below.

1. While the PLC is in RUN mode

For requests from the computer, the PLC executes access for one request during each END processing.
Sending and receiving are executed as interrupts.
Accordingly, when sending and receiving are executed, the scan time is longer by about 10%. The scan time
can be checked in D8010 to D8012 in the PLC.

2. Condition in which the transfer sequence in the PLC is initialized

The transfer sequence in the PLC is initialized in the following cases:
- When the power is turned ON
- When regular sending/receiving is completed
- When the control code "EOT" or "CL" is received in each format
- When the control code "NAK" is sent
- When the time-out time setting is detected
For details on the time-out time setting, refer to Subsection 6.4.4.

3. Occurrence of framing error in the computer

When a commercial interface in accordance with RS-485 is used in the computer, a framing error may occur
while nothing is sent from the PLC to the computer depending on the interface in the computer.
To cope with this nonconformity, let the computer ignore any data until the PLC sends STX, ACK or NAK.

4. Response of "NAK" from the PLC

When an error is detected, the PLC sends NAK to the computer.

5. Command sending from the computer

When sending commands from the computer to the PLC, wait for the interval times in the following table or
more after the PLC finishes receiving data in response to the previous command, and then send the next
command.
PLC

Interval times

FX3U, FX3UC

300 s

FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC

100 s

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times

D-46

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

How to Understand Control Procedure

This section explains how to understand the transfer data shown in the later description of each function.

1. When the computer reads data from the PLC (computer PLC)

E
N
Q

A
C
K

Data
S
T
X

PLC side

N:N Network

Computer side

Data

Data

A
E
N
Q

Data
A
C
K

PLC side

Data

Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

Control code CR LF

Sum check code

Character

Message waiting time

Command

PLC number

*1.

Whether or not the sum check code is added can be specified using a parameter.

*2.

Whether or not the control code is added can be specified by selecting the protocol type.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Station number

*2

Programming
Communication

Control code

*1

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

There are two types of control procedures in dedicated protocols.

CR and LF are not added to each block in format 1. CR and LF are added to each block in format 4.
(The format names are the same as those used in the computer link units for A Series PLCs.)
This section explains the contents of control procedures and the contents of each item specified in the control
procedures in each format.
The basic format of control procedures (protocols) is as shown below:
For details, refer to Subsections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

[1] Part A indicates transfer from the computer to the PLC.

[2] Part B indicates transfer from the PLC to the computer.
[3] Create a program in the computer so that each data is transferred in turn from the left to the right, and
that the data is transferred in the order "A B" as a whole.
(Example: In the part A, data is transferred in turn from the right starting from "ENQ".)

Inverter
Communication

6.4

D
Computer Link

2. When the computer writes data to the PLC (computer PLC)

Parallel Link

[1] Parts A and C indicate transfer from the computer to the PLC.
[2] Part B indicates transfer from the PLC to the computer.
[3] Create a program in the computer so that each data is transferred in turn from the left to the right, and
that the data is transferred in the order "A B C" as a whole.
(Example: In the part A, data is transferred in turn from the right starting from "ENQ".)

Computer side

Common Items

6.3

6.3 How to Understand Control Procedure

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.4.1

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

Control procedure format 1

The table below shows the control procedure for format 1.

PLC No.

A
C
K

or

or

PLC No.

*
Station
No.

N
A
K

Character
area B T

Sum check
code

PLC No.

S
T
X

Error
code

PLC side

Station
No.

Character
area A

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

Command

E
N
Computer side Q

PLC No.

When
computer
reads data
from PLC

Station
No.

PLC No.

Transfer order

N
A
K

Station
No.

Control procedure (protocol)

Station
No.

Description

PLC No.

A
C
K

PLC No.

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

Command

Transfer order

Station
No.

PLC side

Character
area C

Station
No.

When
computer
writes data to
PLC

PLC No.

E
N
Computer side Q

Station
No.

N
A
K

Remarks

Error
code

or

1) The sum check code is added only when "sum check code provided" is selected.
The sum check code is not added when "sum check code not provided" is selected.
2) When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check is executed only to the character
areas marked with "*" in the figure above.
3) The contents of "Character area A", "Character area B" and "Character area C" vary depending
on the contents of transfer, but do not vary depending on the control procedure format.

For details on character contents, refer to "7. Commands".

D-48

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

Control procedure format 4

Common Items

The table below shows the control procedure for format 4.

PLC No.

C L

or
A
C
K

C L

or

RF

C L
RF

PLC No.

Station
No.

*
C L
RF

CL
RF
A
C
K

PLC No.

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

Command

Transfer order

Character
area C

Station
No.

PLC side

E
Inverter
Communication

C L

RF

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When
computer
writes data to
PLC

PLC No.

*
E
N
Computer side Q

Error
code

PLC No.

N
A
K

Station
No.

or
CL
RF

1) The sum check code is added only when "sum check code provided" is selected.
The sum check code is not added when "sum check code not provided" is selected.
2) When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check is executed only to the character
areas marked with "*" in the figure above.
3) The contents of "Character area A", "Character area B" and "Character area C" vary depending
on the contents of transfer, but do not vary depending on the control procedure format.

For details on character contents, refer to "7. Commands".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Remarks

Computer Link

N
A
K

Character
area B T

Sum check
code

S
T
X

Error
code

PLC side

PLC No.

RF
Station
No.

Character
area A

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

Command

PLC No.

E
N
Computer side Q

RF

Parallel Link

When
computer
reads data
from PLC

Station
No.

PLC No.

Transfer order

C L

N:N Network

N
A
K

Station
No.

Control procedure (protocol)

Station
No.

Description

Station
No.

6.4.2

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-49

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.4.3

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

Contents of set items in each control procedure (protocol)

This subsection explains the contents of the data used in each control procedure.

1. Control codes
The table below shows control codes.
Signal name

Code

STX

02H

Start of Text

Description

Signal name

Code

LF

0AH

Description
Line Feed

ETX

03H

End of Text

CL

0CH

Clear

EOT

04H

End of Transmission

CR

0DH

Carriage Return

ENQ

05H

Enquiry

NAK

15H

Negative Acknowledge

ACK

06H

Acknowledge

1) When the PLC receives ENQ or ACK, it initializes the transfer sequence and begins receiving.
2) When the PLC receives EOT or CL as shown below, it initializes the transfer sequence.
At this time, the PLC gives no response.
For format 1

For format 4

E
O
T

ECL
O
TRF

or

or
C

CCL

Computer side L

Computer side L R F

PLC side

PLC side

3) In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, a waiting time of 2 scan times or more is required from
sending of the EOT/CL code from the computer to sending of the next message.

2. Station number
The station number indicates a number provided in each PLC to determine to which PLC the computer
accesses.
The station number is specified in hexadecimal.
In FX Series PLCs, set the station number using parameters. The setting range is from 00H to 0FH.
For the station number setting method in A Series PLCs, refer to the respective A Series PLC manual.
Computer
FX
Series

485PC-IF

FX
Series

485 ADP
Station No. 0
(00H)

485 ADP
Station No. 1
(01H)

FX
Series
485 ADP
Station No. 2
(02H)

FX
Series
485 ADP
Station No. 15
(0FH)

In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set a value to D8121.

M8002
Initial pulse

MOV

H0

D8121

For details on the program, refer to Section 9.3.

Cautions on setting station numbers
1) Do not overlap station numbers. If the same number is set for two or more stations, the transfer data is
destroyed and normal communication is not possible.
2) It is not necessary to set consecutive station numbers as shown in the setting example above. Any station
numbers in the setting range (00H to 0FH) are applicable.
(Examples: Station numbers may be set arbitrarily. Some station numbers may be skipped.)

D-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

4. Command
A command specifies the contents of access executed by the computer to a PLC.
A command is converted into a two-digit ASCII code.
For an explanation of commands, refer to Chapter 7.

Example: When the message waiting time is set to 100 ms

Message waiting time (100 ms)

Inverter
Communication

"A"
Computer side
PLC side

The waiting time should be the interval

times in the following table or more.

Interval times

FX3U, FX3UC

300 s

FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC

100 s

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Sending is started 100 ms or later.

PLC

D
Computer Link

The message waiting time should be specified because some computers require more time before receiving
additional data. Set the waiting time according to the specifications of each computer.
Set the waiting time within the range from 0 to 150 ms in 10-ms units. 10 ms is handled as "1H", and a value
ranging from "0H (0)" to "FH (15)" is converted into a one-digit ASCII code.
When executing communication using the 485PC-IF in a 1-to-N system adopting the one-pair wiring, make
sure to set the message waiting time to 70 ms (7) or more. When the scan time of a PLC in the system
exceeds 70 ms, set the message waiting time to the maximum scan time or higher.

C
Parallel Link

5. Message waiting time

B
N:N Network

The PLC number is used to identify a PLC to be accessed when computer link is combined with the
MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B in A Series PLCs. The PLC number of each FX Series PLC is fixed to
"FFH", and converted into two-digit ASCII code.
When the on-demand function is used, however, the PLC number is automatically changed to "FEH" by the
PLC.
For the PLC number of an A Series PLC used together with the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B, refer to
the respective A Series PLC manual.

Common Items

3. PLC number

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

6. Sum check code

The sum check code indicates a two-digit ASCII code converted from the least significant byte (8-bit) of the
sum check target data added as hexadecimal data.
Using the FX PLC parameters, set whether or not the sum check code is added in the message.
- When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check code is added in the message during
sending. During receiving, the sum check code is compared with the value calculated from the received
data to check the received data.
- When "sum check code not provided" is selected, the sum check code is not added, so the received
data is not checked either. A calculation example of the sum check code is shown below.
Example: When the station number "0", PLC number "FF", command "BR (device memory batch read)",
message waiting time "30 ms" and data "ABCD" are transferred in format 1, the sum check code
value is as shown below:

Computer side

E Station
No.
N
Q
00

PLC
No.
FF

Com- Mes- Character area Sum

mand sage
check
wait
code
time
A
B
C
D
BR
BD
3

05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 42H 52H 33H 41H 42H 43H 44H 42H 44H

PLC side
30H+30H+46H+46H+42H+52H+33H+41H+42H+43H+44H=2BDH
Total from "station number" to "character area"

D-52

Last two
digits

S
T
X

00

FF

02H 30H 30H 46H 46H

30 ms
(Message waiting time)

...

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

Time-out time setting

When the receiving of data from the computer is interrupted and is not restarted within the preset time (timeout time setting), the PLC regards the situation as a timeout error and initializes the transfer sequence.

1. Time-out time setting range

1) Details of setting range

Setting range in parameter

Setting range in sequence program

(D8129 (ch1) and D8429 (ch2))

Not applicable

1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)

Not applicable

1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)

FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC

1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)

1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)

FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S

1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)

1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)

FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

ch1

1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)

1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)

ch2

1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)

Not applicable

D
Computer Link

FX2(FX), FX2C
FX0N

When the set value is "0", it is handled as "100 ms".

E
Inverter
Communication

2) Example of setting program

When setting the time-out time setting to 60 ms
M8002
MOV

K6

C
Parallel Link

FX Series

B
N:N Network

The time-out time setting can be set using parameters or sequence program.
In the FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N Series, however, the parameter setting method is not applicable.
When setting the time-out time setting in a sequence program, write a value for ch1 to D8129, and a value for
ch2 (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series) to D8429 (unit: 10 ms).
However, D8429 (ch2) cannot be set in sequence programs.
The setting range is different between the parameter method and the sequence program method.

Common Items

6.4.4

6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol

D8129

For details on the program, refer to Section 9.3.

The time-out time setting is not updated until the next character data is received. Set a time to receive a
character according to the transmission speed (baud rate).
For one character (12-bit), the minimum set value of the time-out time setting is as shown below:

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Initial pulse

2. Caution on programming

Baud rate (bps)

Time-out time setting (minimum set value)

40

50 ms (5)

600

20

30 ms (3)

1200

10

20 ms (2)

2400

10 ms (1)

4800

2.5

10 ms (1)

9600

1.25

10 ms (1)

19200

0.625

10 ms (1)

38400

0.312

10 ms (1)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Time to receive one character (ms)

300

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.5

6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time

Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time

This section explains the communication time chart between the computer and the PLC.
As shown in the figures below, communication between the computer and the PLC is always executed after
"END". The scan time is extended by the communication time.

6.5.1

When computer reads data from PLC

E
N
Q

Computer

A
C
K
Waiting time
(TW)

Interface

T3

T4

Reading
processing

S
T
X

PLC

T0

T1

T5

It should be the interval times in the following

table or more.

This time is "0" when the message waiting time is

not set or when the waiting time is shorter than the
communication time with the CPU.

T2

Sequence
program
Step 0
END

Step 0
Step 0
END
END
END
The PLC watches the time elapse. When it reaches the
transmission time, the PLC starts the transmission. If not,
the PLC evaluate the time elapse in the END process of
the next step.

PLC

Interval times

FX3U, FX3UC

300 s

FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC

100 s

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times

6.5.2

When computer writes data to PLC

Computer

E
N
Q
Waiting time
(TW)

T3

Interface

Writing
processing

Data is
written.

PLC

T0

This time is "0" when the message waiting time is

not set or when the waiting time is shorter than the
communication time with the CPU.

T1 T2

Sequence
program
END

D-54

Step 0

END

Step 0

END

Step 0

END

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

Transfer time in transfer sequence

This subsection explains how to calculate the approximate time after the computer starts data transfer and
the PLC gives a response until all communication is completed.
For the contents of T0 to T5, refer to the previous page.

1. When the computer reads data from the PLC

1
Number of bits in one character (1 + 7 (8) + 0 (1) + 1 (2))
Baud rate
Number of characters

Data length
(7 or 8)

Parity bit
(0 or 1)

Stop bit
(1 or 2)

2. When the computer writes data to the PLC

Communication time = T0 + (T1 + Longer time between T2 and TW) + T3
T0, T3 =

Start
bit

Data length
(7 or 8)

Parity bit
(0 or 1)

Stop bit
(1 or 2)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

T1: Maximum one scan time (Because data is written to the PLC during the END processing while the
PLC is in RUN mode, writing requires up to one scan time depending on the sending timing. Writing
requires about 1 ms while the PLC is in STOP mode.)
T2: END processing time in the PLC executing data transfer
TW: Message waiting time

Inverter
Communication

1
Number of bits in one character (1 + 7 (8) + 0 (1) + 1 (2))
Baud rate
Number of characters

D
Computer Link

T1: Maximum one scan time (Because data is read from the PLC during the END processing while the
PLC is in RUN mode, reading requires up to one scan time depending on the sending timing.
Reading requires about 1 ms while the PLC is in STOP mode.)
T2: END processing time in the PLC executing data transfer
T4: Scan time or longer (In the case of wiring in the 1-to-N configuration, T4 should be longer than the
time-out time setting (D8129) extended by one scan time.)
TW: Message waiting time

C
Parallel Link

Start
bit

B
N:N Network

Communication time = T0 + (T1 + Longer time between T2 and TW) + T3 + T4 + T5

T0, T3, T5 =

Common Items

6.5.3

6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

6.6

6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area

Transfer Data in Character Area

This section explains the transfer data in the character area sent and received between the computer and a
PLC using each command.
The transfer data explained below is handled as the character area B in reading and the character area C in
writing.
For character areas, refer to Subsections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2.

6.6.1

When bit device memory is read or written

The bit device memory is handled in 1-bit (1-point) units or in 1-word (16-point) units.
The transfer data in each case is explained below.
1) In 1-bit (1-point) units
When the bit device memory is handled in 1-bit (1-point) units, a specified number of devices starting
from the specified head device are expressed in turn from the left end in "1 (31H)" for the ON status or "0
(30H)" for the OFF status.
Example: When indicating the ON/OFF status of five devices starting from M10
Number
of
devices

Head device
M

4DH 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 35H 31H 30H 31H 30H 31H

Indicates that M14 is ON.

Indicates that M13 is OFF.
Indicates that M12 is ON.
Indicates that M11 is OFF.
Indicates that M10 is ON.

2) In 1-word (16-point)" units

When the bit device memory is handled in 1-word (16-point) units, one word is expressed in 4-bit units in
turn from the most significant bit in hexadecimal.
Example: When indicating the ON/OFF status of 32 devices starting from M16
Because devices are handled in 16 point units,
the number of device is "02".
Number
of
devices

Head device
M

Data
A

Data
2

4DH 30H 30H 31H 36H 30H 32H 41H 42H 31H 32H 33H 34H 43H 44H

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

D-56

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods

Computer Link

When word device memory is read or written

In the case of word device memory, one word is expressed in 4-bit units in turn from the most significant bit in
hexadecimal.

Example 1: When indicating the contents stored in the data registers D350 and D351

0 2

Data
5

N:N Network

Number
of
devices

Head device

Data
B

44H 30H 33H 35H 30H 30H 32H 35H 36H 41H 42H 31H 37H 30H 46H

Parallel Link

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Indicates that D350 stores "56ABH ("22187"
in decimal)".

Indicates that D351 stores "170FH ("5903"

in decimal)".

Number
of
devices

Head device

C N

Data

*1

Computer Link

Example 2: When indicating the contents stored in the 32-bit counter C200
Data

44H 4EH 32H 30H 30H 30H 31H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H

Inverter
Communication

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

Indicates that C200 stores "12345678H ("305,419,896" in decimal)".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*1.

Common Items

6.6.2

6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area

For indicating the current value of C200, use "CN200".

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-57

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.

6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area

Commands
This chapter explains specification methods and specification examples of commands in dedicated protocols
used in computer link communication type.
For control procedures in dedicated protocols, refer to "6. Control Procedures and Setting Methods".
The table below shows a reference section for each command.
Applicable PLC
Command

D-58

Contents of processing

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,

FX3U, FX3UC

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N,

FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC

Reference
section

BR

Reads bit devices in 1-point units.

7.1

WR

Reads bit devices in 16-point units, or

word devices in 1-point units.

7.2

QR

Reads bit devices in 16-point units, or

word devices in 1-point units.

BW

Writes bit devices in 1-point units.

7.4

WW

Writes bit devices in 16-point units, or

word devices in 1-point units.

7.5

QW

Writes bit devices in 16-point units, or

word devices in 1-point units.

BT

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1-point

units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF).

7.7

WT

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16-point

units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF). Or specifies
word devices arbitrarily in 1-point units,
and writes data to them.

7.8

QT

Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16-point

units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF). Or specifies
word devices arbitrarily in 1-point units,
and writes data to them.

RR

Sets a PLC to RUN mode in remote

control.

RS

Sets a PLC to STOP mode in remote

control.

PC

Reads the PLC model name code.

7.11

GW

Turns the global function ON or OFF in all

linked PLCs.

7.12

Offers the on-demand function (by which

a PLC gives a sending request), and does
not offer any command.

7.13

TT

Returns received characters back to the

computer as they are.

7.14

7.3

7.6

7.9

7.10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the bit
device memory is read all at once.

1. Specification method

S
T
X

E
T
X

PLC No.

A
C
K

Sum check
code

Read device range

specification

PLC No.

PLC side

Station
No.

Head device
(5 characters)

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

PLC No.

Station
No.

BR

"0 (30H)" indicates the OFF

status.
"1 (31H)" indicates the ON
status.

Station
No.

Number of device points

(2 characters (hexadecimal)

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 256*1 (Use "00H" to specify 256 points.)
- Head device number + Number of device points -1 Maximum device number
*1.

54 in the FX0N and FX1S Series

2. Specification example

Computer side
PLC side

E
N 0 5 F F B R A X 0 0 4 0 0 5 4 7
Q

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 42H 52H 41H 58H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 35H 34H 37H

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

S
E
T 0 5 F F 0 1 1 0 1 T 0 5
X
X
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 30H 31H 31H 30H 31H 03H 30H 35H

The message wait time is specified in 10-ms units within the range from 0 to 150 ms, and expressed in
hexadecimal within the range from 0 to FH. For example, "100 ms" is expressed as "A".

I
Remote
Maintenance

Point

H
Programming
Communication

Indicates that X044 is

ON.
Indicates that X043 is
OFF.
Indicates that X042 is
ON.
Indicates that X041 is
ON.
Indicates that X040 is
OFF.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

A
C 0 5 F F
K

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When reading the contents of five devices X040 to X044 in the PLC whose station number is 5 (while the
message waiting time is set to 100 ms)
(When X040 and X043 are OFF and X041, X042 and X044 are ON)

E
Inverter
Communication

2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.

D
Computer Link

Character area B
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)

C
Parallel Link

E
N
Computer side Q

N:N Network

The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

Batch read command (unit: bit) Character area A

Common Items

7.1

7.1 BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.2

7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when the word
device memory is read all at once or when the bit device memory is read (in 16-point units) all at once.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

S
T
X

Read device range

specification

E
T
X

A
C
K

Sum check
code

PLC side

PLC No.

One device uses 4 characters.

Four digits (hexadecimal)
express one word data.
Station
No.

Head device
(5 characters)

Station
No.

Sum check
code

WR

Message
wait time

PLC No.

Station
No.

E
N
Q
Computer side

PLC No.

Number of device points

(2 characters (hexadecimal)

Batch read command (unit: word) Character area A

Character area B
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 64*1 (32*1 in case of bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices 16" in case of bit devices) -1
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN200 to CN255) are read, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points*2 can be specified.
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
*1.

Up to 13 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series

*2.

Up to 6 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series

2. Specification examples
Example 1: When reading the contents of thirty-two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F W R 0 X 0 0 4 0 0 2 4 8
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 52H 30H 58H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 32H 34H 38H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

S
T 0 5 F F
X

E
A B C D T 0 8
X

1 2 3 4

02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 42H 43H 44H 03H 30H 38H

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
X
0
5
7

D-60

X
0
5
2

X
0
5
1

X
0
5
0

X
0
4
7

X
0
4
3

X
0
4
2

X
0
4
1

X
0
4
0

X
0
7
7

X
0
7
2

X
0
7
1

X
0
7
0

X
0
6
7

X
0
6
3

X
0
6
2

X
0
6
1

X
0
6
0

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

The WR command handles data in 1-word units. When reading thirty-two devices from X040 to X077, specify
the number of device points as "02" (One point specifies 16 devices.)
Example 2: When reading the present value of two devices from T123 and T124 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

PLC side

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 52H 30H 54H 4EH 31H 32H 33H 30H 32H 36H 34H

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

S
T 0 5 F F
X

7 B C 9

1 2 3 4

E
T B 3
X

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

Indicates that the current value of T123 is "7BC9H

(hexadecimal) (which is "31689" in decimal).
Indicates that the current value of T124 is "1234H
(hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal).

C
Parallel Link

02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 03H 42H 33H

A
C 0 5 F F
K

B
N:N Network

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F W R 0 T N 1 2 3 0 2 6 4
Q

Common Items

Point

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-61

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.3

7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when the word
device memory is read all at once or when the bit device memory is read (in 16-point units) all at once.
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Batch read command
(unit: word)

Number of device points

(2 characters (hexadecimal)

Data on
E
specified
number of T
device points X

PLC No.

Station
No.

Sum check
code

S
T
X

Read device range

specification

PLC No.

PLC side

K
Station
No.

Head device
(7 characters)

One device uses 4 characters.

Four digits (hexadecimal)
A
express one data word .
C

Sum check
code

QR

Message
wait time

PLC No.

E
N
Computer side Q

Station
No.

Character area A

Character area B

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 64 (32 for bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices 16" for bit devices) -1
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN00200 to CN00255) are read, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points can be specified.
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.

2. Specification examples (For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

Example 1: When reading the contents of thirty-two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F Q R 0 X 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 2 A 2
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 52H 30H 58H 30H 30H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 32H 41H 32H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the sum

check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

S
T 0 5 F F
X

1 2 3 4

E
A B C D T C 8
X

02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 42H 43H 44H 03H 43H 38H

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
X
0
5
7

D-62

X
0
5
0

X
0
4
7

X
0
4
1

X
0
4
0

X
0
7
7

X
0
7
0

X
0
6
7

X
0
6
1

X
0
6
0

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

Computer side

05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 52H 30H 52H 30H 33H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 39H 42H

N:N Network

PLC side

E
N 0 5 F F Q R 0 R 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 9 B
Q
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

7 B C 9

1 2 3 4

E
T B 3
X

Parallel Link

S
T 0 5 F F
X

A
Common Items

Example 2: When reading the contents of two devices from R30000 to R30001 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 03H 42H 33H

Indicates that the value of R30000 is "7BC9H" (hexadecimal)

(which is "31689" in decimal).
Indicates that the value of R30001 is "1234H" (hexadecimal)
(which is "4660" in decimal).

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-63

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.4

7.4 BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]

BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
bit device memory is written all at once.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Number of device points
Character area A (2 characters (hexadecimal)

PLC side

Written device range

specification
"0 (30H)" indicates the OFF status.
"1 (31H)" indicates the ON status.

A
C
K

PLC No.

Station
No.

Head device
(5 characters)

Sum check
code

BW

Message
wait time

PLC No.

E
N
Q
Computer side

Station
No.

Batch write command (unit: bit)

* Data on specified number of device points

(Characters of specified number of device points)

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 160*1
- Head device number + Number of device points -1 Maximum device number
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
*1.

46 in the FX0N and FX1S Series

2. Specification example
When writing data to five devices from M903 to M907 in the PLC whose station number is 0 (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.

Computer side
PLC side

D-64

E
N 0 0 F F B W 0 M 0 9 0 3 0 5 0 1 1 0 1 2 6
Q
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 42H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 39H 30H 33H 30H 35H 30H 31H 31H 30H 31H 32H 36H

Specifies to turn M903 OFF.

Specifies to turn M904 ON.
Specifies to turn M905 ON.
Specifies to turn M906 OFF.
Specifies to turn M907 ON.

A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification examples when
the word device memory is written all at once or when the bit device memory is written (in 16-point units) all at
once.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

PLC side

A
C
K

Written device
range specification

PLC No.

Station
No.

Head device
(5 characters)

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

Station
No.

W W

Number of device points

(2 characters (hexadecimal)

Character area C

Parallel Link

E
N
Q
Computer side

PLC No.

Batch write command (unit: word)

D
Computer Link

One device uses 4 characters.

Four digits (hexadecimal) express
one data word.
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:

2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
*2.

Up to 5 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series

2. Specification examples
Example 1: When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station number is
0 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

Computer side

2 3 4 7

A B 9 6

0 5

05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 57H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 32H 32H 33H 34H 37H 41H 42H 39H 36H 30H 35H

PLC side

A
C 0 0 F F
K

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

H
Programming
Communication

06H 30H 30H 46H 46H

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
M
6
5
4

M
6
5
3

M
6
4
3

M
6
4
2

M
6
4
1

M
6
4
0

M
6
7
1

M
6
7
0

M
6
6
9

M
6
5
9

M
6
5
8

M
6
5
7

M
6
5
6

Remote
Maintenance

M
6
5
5

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

E
N 0 0 F F W W 0 M 0 6 4 0 0 2
Q

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Up to 11 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series

E
Inverter
Communication

- 1 Number of device points 64*1 (10 in case of bit devices)

- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices x 16" in case of bit devices) -1
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN200 to CN255) are written, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points*2 can be specified.
*1.

B
N:N Network

1. Specification method

Common Items

7.5

7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

Point
The WW command handles data in 1-word units. When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671,
specify the number of device points as "02" (One point specifies 16 devices.)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-65

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

Example 2: When writing data to two devices D0 and D1 in the PLC whose station number is 0 (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

Computer side

E
N 0 0 F F W W 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 2
Q

1 2 3 4

A C D 7 F 9

05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 57H 57H 30H 44H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 43H 44H 37H 46H 39H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the sum check target.

A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H

Indicates that "1234H (hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal) is written to D0.

Indicates that "ACD7H (hexadecimal) (which is "-21289" in decimal) is written to D1.

D-66

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification examples when
the word device memory is written all at once or when the bit device memory is written (in 16-point units) all at
once.
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)

A
C
K

Written device range

specification

PLC No.

PLC side

Station
No.

Data on
specified
number of
device points

Head device
(7 characters)

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

PLC No.

QW

Parallel Link

Station
No.

Character area C
E
N
Computer side Q

2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.

2. Specification examples (For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

E
N 0 5 F F Q W 0 M 0 0 0 6 4 0 0 2 2 3 4 7 A B 9 6 6 4
Q

05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 32H 32H 33H 34H 37H 41H 42H 39H 36H 36H 34H

A
C 0 5 F F
K

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC side

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

M
6
4
8

M
6
4
7

M
6
4
1

M
6
4
0

M
6
7
1

M
6
6
4

M
6
6
3

M
6
5
7

Programming
Communication

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
M
6
5
6

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Example 1: When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station number is
5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

E
Inverter
Communication

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 64 (10 in case of bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices 16" in case of bit devices) -1
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN00200 to CN00255) are written, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points can be specified.

Computer Link

One device uses 4 characters. Four digits

(hexadecimal) express one data word.

Computer side

B
N:N Network

1. Specification method
Batch write command
(unit: word)

Common Items

7.6

7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

M
6
5
6

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

7 Commands
7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]

Example 2: When writing data to two devices from R30000 to R30001 in the PLC whose station number is 5
(while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F Q W 0 R 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 7 B C 9 1 2 3 4 5 F
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 52H 30H 33H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 46H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

A
C 0 5 F F
K
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

Indicates that "7BC9H (hexadecimal) (which is "31689" in decimal) is written to R30000.

Indicates that "1234H (hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal) is written to R30001.

D-68

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
bit device memory is specified arbitrarily and written all at once.

1. Specification method

PLC No.

A
C
K

1 character
"0 (30H)" indicates reset (setting to OFF).
"1 (31H)" indicates set (setting to ON).

* Number of device points

(2 characters (hexadecimal))

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 20*1
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.

2. Specification example
When writing data for setting M50 to ON, S100 to OFF and Y001 to ON in the PLC whose station number is 5
(while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)

This range is regarded as the sum check target.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

E
N 0 5 F F B T 0 0 3 M 0 0 5 0 1 S 0 1 0 0 0 Y 0 0 0 1 1 E C
Q

Computer side 05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 42H 54H 30H 30H 33H 4DH 30H 30H 35H 30H 31H 53H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 59H 30H 30H 30H 31H 31H 45H 43H
PLC side

Reset (OFF)

E
Inverter
Communication

10 in the FX0N and FX1S Series

Set (ON)

D
Computer Link

Point

*1.

Parallel Link

PLC side

C
Station
No.

Device
(5 characters)

Sum check
code

Device
(5 characters)

Set or reset

Character area A
Set or reset

BT

Message
wait time

PLC No.

Station
No.

Computer side

E
N
Q

N:N Network

The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

Test (write arbitrarily) command (unit: bit)

A
Common Items

7.7

7 Commands
7.7 BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

Set (ON)

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

A
C 0 5 F F
K

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-69

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

7.8

7 Commands

7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
word device memory and bit device memory (in 16-point units) are specified arbitrarily and written all at once.
Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together. However, the WT command
cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN200 to CN255).

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

WT

Message
wait time

PLC No.

Computer side

E
N
Q

Station
No.

Test (write arbitrarily) command (unit: word)

Number of
device points
(2 characters
(hexadecimal))

Character area A
Device
Data
(5 characters) (4 characters)

Device
Data
(5 characters) (4 characters)

PLC side

One device uses 4 characters. Four digits

(hexadecimal) express one data word.

PLC No.

A
C
K

Station
No.

Sum check
code

When specifying bit devices,

specify the head device.

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 10*1 (in unit of 10*1 in case of bit devices (One unit indicates 16 points.))
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
3) The WT command cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN200 to CN255).
*1.

D-70

6 in the FX0N and FX1S Series

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

7 Commands

7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

When writing data for setting the current value of D500 to "1234H", Y100 to Y117 to "BCA9H" and the current
value of C100 to "64H" in the PLC whose station number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.

E
N 0 5 F F W T 0 0 3 D 0 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 Y 0 1 0 0 B C A 9
Q

N:N Network

Computer side

05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 54H 30H 30H 33H 44H 30H 35H 30H 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 59H 30H 31H 30H 30H 42H 43H 41H 39H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

C
Parallel Link

Indicates that "1234H (which is "4660"

in decimal)" is written to D500.

1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Y
1
1
7

Y
1
1
6

Y
1
1
5

Y
1
1
4

Y
1
1
3

Y
1
1
2

Y
1
1
1

Y
1
1
0

Y
1
0
7

Y
1
0
6

Y
1
0
5

Y
1
0
4

Y
1
0
3

Y
1
0
2

Y
1
0
1

Y
1
0
0

D
Computer Link

Each bit is reset (OFF) in the case of "0", and

set (ON) in the case of "0".
C N 1 0 0 0 0 6 4 0 7
43H 4EH 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 37H

A
C 0 5 F F
K

06H 30H 30H 46H 46H

Inverter
Communication

Indicates that "64H (which is "100" in decimal)"

is written to the current value of C100.

Common Items

2. Specification example

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-71

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

7.9

7 Commands

7.9 QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
word device memory and bit device memory (in 16-point units) are specified arbitrarily and written all at once.
Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together. However, the QT command cannot
handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN00200 to CN00255).
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

Message
wait time

Number of
device points
(2 characters)

PLC No.

QT

Station
No.

PLC No.

Computer side

E
N
Q

Station
No.

Command for test (by writing arbitrarily in 1-word units)

Character area A
Data on
devices
(4 characters)

Device
(7 characters)

Device
(7 characters)

Data on
devices
(4 characters)

Sum check
code

PLC side

A
C
K

1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1 Number of device points 10 (in unit of 10 in case of bit devices (One unit indicates 16 points.))
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
3) Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together.
4) The QT command cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN00200 to CN00255).

2. Specification example
When writing data for setting the current value of R12000 to "1234H" and Y100 to Y117 to "BCA9H" in the
PLC whose station number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F Q T 0 0 2 R 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 2 3 4
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 30H 32H 52H 30H 31H 32H 30H 30H 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H

PLC side

This range is regarded as the

sum check target.

Y 0 0 0 1 0 0 B C A 9 E 3
59H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 42H 43H 41H 39H 45H 33H

A
C 0 5 F F
K
B

06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Y
1
1
7

D-72

Y
1
1
0

Y
1
0
7

Y
1
0
1

Y
1
0
0

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
computer remotely sets the PLC mode to RUN or STOP.

7.10.1 Contents of remote control to set RUN or STOP mode

Remote control to set to

STOP mode

NO

Inverter
Communication

YES
Special auxiliary relay
M8037 is set to ON.

D
Computer Link

Remote STOP mode control

When the RS command (which sets remote STOP mode in control) is executed in the computer, the PLC
executes the following processing.
If the RS command is executed while the PLC is in STOP mode, the PLC status does not change, and the
PLC returns the remote error code (18H) to the computer.

C
Parallel Link

Remote RUN mode control

When the RR command (which sets remote RUN mode in control) is executed in the computer, the PLC
sets M8035 and M8036 to activate the forced RUN mode.
If the RR command is executed while the PLC is in RUN mode, however, the PLC status does not change,
and the PLC returns the remote error code (18H) to the computer.

N:N Network

When the computer executes remote control of the PLC mode to RUN or STOP, the forced RUN mode is
activated in the PLC, and the special auxiliary relays M8035, M8036 and M8037 are controlled as follows:

Forced RUN mode

Common Items

7.10

7 Commands
7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]

PLC returns remote error code (18H) to

computer, and PLC status does not change.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Special auxiliary relays

M8035, M8036 and
M8037 are set to OFF.
PLC switches to
STOP mode.

Remote STOP mode control

The PLC is in RUN mode (forced RUN mode) without using the RUN terminal or built-in RUN/STOP
selector switch.

When the PLC power is turned OFF and then ON after the RR command is executed by the computer, all of
the special auxiliary relays M8035, M8036 and M8037 are set to OFF. As a result, the PLC switches to STOP
mode.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Point

H
Programming
Communication

Remote RUN mode control

The PLC is in STOP mode.
(The built-in RUN/STOP selector switch is set to STOP.)
(In an FX2(FX) or FX2C PLC, the RUN terminal in the PLC is OFF, and the built-in RUN/STOP selector
switch is set to STOP.)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

7.10.2 Condition validating remote control to set RUN or STOP mode

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-73

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]

7.10.3 Remote control specification method and specification examples

This subsection explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when remote
RUN or STOP mode control is executed.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

A
C
K

PLC No.

PLC side

Station
No.

Sum check
code

RR
or
RS

Message
wait time

Station
No.

Computer side

E
N
Q

PLC No.

RR command to remotely set the PLC to the RUN mode

RS command to remotely set the PLC to the STOP mode

Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.

2. Specification examples
Example 1: When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 5 to RUN mode (while the message
waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.

Computer side

E
N 0 5 F F R R 0 C 5
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 52H 52H 30H 43H 35H

PLC side

A
C 0 5 F F
K
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H

Example 2: When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 0 to STOP mode (while the message
waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.

Computer side
PLC side

E
N 0 0 F F R S 0 C 1
Q
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 52H 53H 30H 43H 31H

A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H

D-74

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]

This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the model
name of a PLC linked to the computer is read.

7.11.1 PLC model name (CPU) and read contents

Model name code
(hexadecimal)

PLC model name (CPU)

8DH

A2CCPU

9AH

FX0N

8EH

A2USCPU

82H

FX1S

F2H

A2CPU-S1, A2USCPU-S1

83H

FX1N, FX1NC

9EH

A3CPU, A3NCPU

A3H

FX2N, FX2NC

9DH

A3ACPU

94H

FX3S

F5H

A3HCPU, A3MCPU

A4H

FX3G, FX3GC

F4H

A3UCPU

84H

FX3U, FX3UC

F3H

A4UCPU

85H

A0J2HCPU

98H

A52GCPU

9AH

A1CPU, A1NCPU

A1H

A73CPU

A3H

A1SCPU, A1SJCPU

98H

A7LMS-F

A3H

AJ72P25/R25

ABH

92H

AJ72LP25/BR15

8BH

A2ACPU-S1

93H

7.11.2 Control procedure specification method and specification example

1. Specification method

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

PLC model
name
(2 characters)

E
T
X

PLC No.

Sum check
code

PLC No.

S
T
X

Station
No.

Character area B

Station
No.

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

PLC No.

A
C
K

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC side

Station
No.

PC command to read the PLC model name

Computer side

The specification method for control procedure format 1 is shown below:

PC

Computer Link

A2H

Inverter
Communication

A2CPU(-S1), A2NCPU(-S1), A2SCPU

A2ACPU

E
N
Q

Parallel Link

FX2(FX), FX2C

N:N Network

Model name code

(hexadecimal)

PLC model name (CPU)

Common Items

7.11

7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]

Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-75

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

7 Commands
7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]

2. Specification example
When reading the model name of the PLC whose station number is 15 (while the message waiting time is set
to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.

Computer side
PLC side

E
N 0 F F F P C 0 C 5
Q

This range is regarded as

the sum check target.

05H 30H 46H 46H 46H 50H 43H 30H 43H 35H

A
C 0 F F F
K
06H 30H 46H 46H 46H

S
E
T 0 F F F 8 D T 8 1
X
X
02H 30H 46H 46H 46H 38H 44H 03H 38H 31H

The example above indicates that the model name of the target PLC is the FX2(FX) or FX2C Series.

D-76

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

GW Command [Offers Global Function]

7.12.1 Contents of control

In the control procedure, specify the station number "FFH" so that all stations are handled as targets.
If any value other than "FFH" is specified, a special auxiliary relay is set to ON or OFF only in a station with
the specified station number.
When the PLC power is turned OFF or when the PLC is set to STOP mode, the special auxiliary relay
M8126 or M8426 is set to OFF and the processing request in the global function is cleared.

7.12.2 Global function control procedure specification method and specification example

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

Factor
number
(1 character)

PLC side

Sum check
code

Message
wait time

PLC No.

GW

Character area A

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

E
N
Q
Computer side

Station
No.

GW command to execute
the global command

When the data value is "1 (31H)", M8126 or M8426 is set to ON.
When the data value is "0 (30H)", M8126 or M8426 is set to OFF.

2. Specification example
When setting to ON the special auxiliary relay M8126 of M8426 in all FX PLCs (In all of A Series PLCs in
computer link, however, Xn2 is set to ON.)

H
Programming
Communication

This range is regarded as the sum

check target.
E
N F F F F G W 0 1 1 7
Q

05H 46H 46H 46H 46H 47H 57H 30H 31H 31H 37H

Indicates that the special auxiliary relay M8126 or

M8426 is set to ON in target stations.

Remote
Maintenance

PLC side

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.

Computer side

E
Inverter
Communication

This subsection explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the
global function is executed from the computer.

D
Computer Link

In this function, PLCs do not give any response to the GW command from the computer.

C
Parallel Link

The global function sets a special auxiliary relay to ON or OFF in all FX Series PLCs linked to the computer.
M8126 is set to ON or OFF in PLCs except the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, M8126 is set to ON or OFF in computer link using ch1, and M8426 is
set to ON or OFF in computer link using ch2.
In A Series PLCs, Xn2 is set to ON or OFF for all PLCs linked to the computer.

B
N:N Network

The global function executed in the computer sets a special auxiliary relay to ON or OFF in all PLCs linked to
the computer in the multi-drop link method. For A Series PLCs, however, refer to the respective A Series PLC
manual.
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the global
function is used.

Common Items

7.12

7 Commands
7.12 GW Command [Offers Global Function]

Specify "FFH" for handling all stations as targets.

When handling only one station as a target, specify the station
number (ranging from 00 to 0F) of the target station.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-77

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13

7.13 On-demand Function

On-demand Function
When there is data to be sent from a PLC to the computer, the on-demand function can specify the data
register area storing the data to be sent, and let the PLC start sending.
When data is sent between the computer and a PLC, only the computer can start data transmission.
When there is emergency data to be sent from a PLC to the computer, the on-demand function is applicable
to let the PLC begin sending data to the computer.
PLC
Sequence
program

D8127
D8128

Head device number (n)

Data length (m)

Computer

D(n)
D(n+m-1)

Point
This function is applicable when the computer and the PLC CPU have the 1-to-1 configuration.

7.13.1 Special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in on-demand function
The tables below show the special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in the on-demand function.

1. In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and when ch1 is used in FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Device

Name

On-demand send
M8127*1 processing

Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed.

ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.

M8128

On-demand error flag

Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value to be sent in the ondemand function.
ON: Error is included.
OFF: Error is not included.

M8129

On-demand byte/word
changeover

Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the on-demand function.
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)

D8127

On-demand head device

number specification

Sets the head data register device number containing the data to be sent
using the on-demand function in a sequence program.

D8128

On-demand data quantity

specification

Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function in a

sequence program.

*1.

D-78

Description

FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

A
Common Items

2. When ch2 is used in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Description

M8427

On-demand send
processing

Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed.

ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.

M8428

On-demand error flag

Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value to be sent in the ondemand function.
ON: Error is included.
OFF: Error is not included.

M8429

On-demand byte/word
changeover

Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the on-demand function.
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)

D8427

On-demand head device

number specification

Sets the head data register device number containing the data to be sent
using the on-demand function in a sequence program.

D8428

On-demand data quantity

specification

Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function in a

sequence program.

C
Parallel Link

Name

N:N Network

Device

The on-demand send processing signal (M8127 or M8427) turns ON when the PLC gives a request to
send data to the computer, and turns OFF when sending of the specified data is completed. Use this signal
for interlock to prevent giving two or more on-demand requests at the same time.
While the on-demand send processing signal is ON, the PLC cannot receive commands sent from the
computer.

Computer Link

Point

E
Inverter
Communication

Amount of on-demand data and number of data registers used for sending according to the unit
specification (word or byte)
When the specified unit is a word:
The amount of on-demand data is equivalent to the number of data registers to be sent.

Example: When the amount of on-demand data is "5", the number of data registers for sending is "3".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When the specified unit is a byte:

Two on-demand data units use one data register for sending.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-79

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

7.13.2 Control procedures in on-demand function

This subsection explains the control procedures for the on-demand function.
When using ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series PLC, exchange special auxiliary relays (M) and
special data registers (D) according to the table below.
All PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch1)

FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch2)

M8127*1

M8427

M8128

M8428

M8129

*1.

M8429

D8127

D8427

D8128

D8428

FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.

1) Control procedure in the PLC

Sending of on-demand data

Checks unit (word or byte) of

data to be sent

........ It is checked whether M8129 is ON or OFF.

ON: Unit = byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = word (16-bit)

Writes data to be sent to data

registers

........ Data to be sent is written to data registers.

Resets on-demand error

........ The on-demand error flag M8128 turns OFF.

(While M8128 is ON, the on-demand function is disabled.)

Starts on-demand function

........ The head device (data register) number storing the ondemand data is written to D8127, and the amount of data is
written to D8128.
When a request is accepted, M8127 is set to ON.
When sending is complete, M8127 turns OFF.

Checks for sending error

When there
is error

When there is
no error

Sending is completed

D-80

........ If the on-demand error flag M8128 is ON, it means that data
was not sent due to an error in the specified value to be sent.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

A
Common Items

2) Control procedure in the computer

Receiving of on-demand data

"FE", the received data should be processed as on-demand

data.

Data processing

C
Parallel Link

Completion of receiving

3) Time chart when the on-demand function is requested

While the computer is sending data
E
N
Q

D
A
C
K

[2] On-demand data

[3]

PLC side

Computer Link

Computer side

E
Inverter
Communication

S
T
X

On-demand send processing

M8127

[1]

[1] As soon as an on-demand request is given, the on-demand send processing signal M8127 turns ON.
[2] After receiving of command data (ENQ ~) from the computer is completed, the PLC sends on-demand
data.
[3] After the sending of on-demand data is complete, the PLC sends response data (STX ~) to the
command data (ENQ ~).

[3]

PLC side

S
T
X

I
[1]

[2]

Remote
Maintenance

On-demand send processing

M8127
PLC

A
C
K

Programming
Communication

Computer side

On-demand data

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

While the computer is receiving data

E
N
Q

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Writes data to be sent and

amount of data to be sent.

PLC

B
N:N Network

Judges whether receive data is ........ To the on-demand data, the PLC adds "FE" as the PLC
on-demand data or data given
number. Only when the PLC number of the received data is
by command execution.

Writes data to be sent and

amount of data to be sent.

D-81

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

[1] As soon as an on-demand request is given, the on-demand send processing signal M8127 turns ON.
[2] After the sending of response data (STX ~) to the command data (ENQ ~) from the computer is
completed, the PLC sends on-demand data.
[3] After the receiving of on-demand data is complete, the computer sends response data (ACK ~) to the
sending of the response data (STX ~) from the PLC.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

7.13.3 On-demand function specification method and specification examples

This subsection explains the on-demand function specification method and specification examples.
When using ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series PLC, exchange special auxiliary relays (M) and
special data registers (D) according to the table below.
All PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch1)

FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch2)

M8127*1

M8427

M8128

M8428

M8129

*1.

M8429

D8127

D8427

D8128

D8428

FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.

1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Added by PLC

On-demand send processing

M8127
PLC

Writes data to be sent and

amount of data to be sent.

ON

Data to be
sent

E
T
X

Sum check
code

S
T
X

PLC No.

PLC side

Station
No.

Computer side

OFF
Write the head device number (data register)
storing the data to be sent to the special data
register D8127.
Write the amount of data to the special data
register D8218.

1) Specify the data quantity specification range while satisfying the following condition:
- Amount of data 40H (= 64 in decimal)
2) The PLC adds "FE" as the PLC number.
3) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the on-demand function when the system configuration is not 1-to-1 type.
If the on-demand function is used in the multi-drop link system in which the computer and PLC CPUs have
the 1-to-N configuration, the transfer data and on-demand send data in the control procedure format 1 or 4
are destroyed, and normal data sending is not possible.

D-82

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

When sending the data stored in the data registers D100 and D101 by a trigger from a sequence program
(when the station number is 0 and the data unit to be sent is set to "word")
The PLC number "FE" is automatically added by the PLC.

Computer side
PLC side

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

E
T 9 2
X

N:N Network

S
T 0 0 F E
X

02H 30H 30H 46H 45H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 03H 39H 32H

M8127

On-demand
command [1]

D8127
D8128

100
2

C
M8128 ON/OFF
M8129
OFF

[2]

D100
D101

1234H
5678H

It turns ON when an error is

included in the specified
value for sending.

Data is sent in 4-bit units

starting from highest-order bits.

Computer Link

Sequence program example

0
3

40

M0

M8127

M8127 M8128
M8127 M8128

PLS

M0

MOV

H1234

D100

MOV

H5678

D101

RST

M8128

RST

Y000

RST

Y001

MOV

K100

D8127

MOV

K2

D8128

SET

Y000

SET

Y001

........ The data unit is set to "word" value.

The startup command is the pulse operation
........
type.

........ Data to be sent is set.

The on-demand error flag is reset.
........ (The on-demand function is disabled while
M8128 is ON.)

The head device number storing the data to be

........ sent and the amount of data are specified, and
the on-demand function is started up.
........ On-demand error is checked for, and the check
result is output.

END

M8128

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

37

M8002

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

33

M8129

Inverter
Communication

M8000
X000

Parallel Link

PLC

Writes data to be
sent and amount of
data to be sent.

Common Items

2. Specification example 1

OFF: Data is sent normally.

Programming
Communication

ON: Data is not sent because an

error occurred.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-83

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

7.13 On-demand Function

3. Specification example 2
When sending the data stored in the data registers D100 and D101 by a trigger from a sequence program
(when the station number is 0 and the data unit to be sent is set to "byte")
The PLC number "FE" is automatically added by the PLC.

Computer side
PLC side

S
T 0 0 F E
X

3 4 1 2

7 8 5 6

E
T 9 2
X

02H 30H 30H 46H 45H 31H 32H 33H 34H 37H 38H 35H 36H 03H 39H 32H

M8127
PLC

Writes data to be
sent and amount of
data to be sent.

On-demand
command [1]

D8127
D8128

100
4

M8128 ON/OFF
M8129
ON
[2]

D100
D101

1234H
5678H

It turns ON when an error is

included in the specified
value for sending.
Data is sent in 4-bit units, in
the order "lowest-order 8-bit
highest-order 8-bit".

Sequence program example

0
3
7

33
37
40

M8000

M8129

X000

M8002

M0

M8127

M8127 M8128
M8127 M8128

PLS

M0

MOV

H1234

D100

MOV

H5678

D101

RST

M8128

RST

Y000

RST

Y001

MOV

K100

D8127

MOV

K4

D8128

SET

Y000

SET

Y001

........ The data unit is set to "byte" value.

........ The startup command is the pulse operation type.
........ Data to be sent is set.
The on-demand error flag is reset.

........ (The on-demand function is disabled while M8128 is

ON.)

The head device number storing the data to be sent

........ and the amount of data are specified, and the ondemand function is started up.

........ On-demand error is checked for, and the check result

is output.

END
M8128

OFF: Data is sent normally.

ON: Data is not sent because an
error occurred.

D-84

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Commands

Computer Link

TT Command [Loop-back Test]

The loop-back test function checks whether or not communication between the computer and a PLC is normal.
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the loopback test function is used.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:

Data
(Data for
character
length)

E
T
X

Sum check
code

Character
length

S
T
X

2 characters (hexadecimal)

PLC No.

PLC side

C
2 characters (hexadecimal)
Station
No.

Data
(Data for
character
length)

Sum check
code

Character
length

Message
wait time

PLC No.

TT

Character area A

Parallel Link

E
N
Q
Computer side

Station
No.

Loop-back test command

Character area B

2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
When executing the loop-back test to the PLC whose station number is 0 using the data "ABCDE" (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.

E
N 0 0 F F T T 0 0 5 A B C D E 7 8
Q

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

PLC side

E
Inverter
Communication

2. Specification example

Computer Link

1) Specify the character length specification range while satisfying the following condition:
- 1 Character length 254

Computer side

B
N:N Network

1. Specification method

Common Items

7.14

7.14 TT Command [Loop-back Test]

This range is regarded as

the sum check target.

05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 54H 54H 30H 30H 35H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 37H 38H

S
E
T 0 0 F F 0 5 A B C D E T A 3
X
X

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

02H 30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 35H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 03H 41H 33H

Both data should be equivalent.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-85

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Troubleshooting

Computer Link

8.

8.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.

8.1

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.

8.2

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RD(RXD)" and "SD(TXD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status

Operation status

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received.

Off

Off

Data is being sent or received.

Data is not sent or received.

While computer link is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.

If they do not flash, check the wiring, station number settings and communication setting.

8.3

Checking Installation and Wiring

1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)

The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is provided correctly.

3. Wiring
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.

8.4

Checking Sequence Program

1. Communication setting in the sequence program
Verify that the parallel link and N:N Network are not set. Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400
and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLCs power.

2. Communication setting using parameters

Verify that the communication settings using parameters is suitable to the purpose of use.
If the communication settings are not suitable to the purpose of use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLCs power.

3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in computer link.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

D-86

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

8 Troubleshooting
8.4 Checking Sequence Program

A
Common Items

4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

D
Computer Link

5. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLCs power.

6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

E
Inverter
Communication

Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

7. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLCs power.

Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.
*1.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

8. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

10.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)

H
Programming
Communication

Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

9. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-87

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

8 Troubleshooting
8.5 Checking Error Codes

8.5

Checking Error Codes

8.5.1

Error codes when NAK is sent

The table below shows error codes and contents of errors when NAK is sent in communication between the
computer and a PLC.
As an error code, a two-digit ASCII code (hexadecimal) within the range from 00H to FFH is sent.
When two or more errors occur at the same time, priority is given to the error code with the smallest number,
and the error code with the smallest number is sent.
When any error shown below occurs, the entire transfer sequence is initialized.
Error code list
Error code
(hexadecimal)

Contents of error
Sum check error has occurred.
The sum check code included in the
received data is different from the sum
value calculated from the received data.

Action
Check the data sent from the computer
and the contents of the sum check.
Modify either one, and then execute
communication again.

02H

Sum check
error

03H

The communication protocol is

1) Check the contents of parameters
abnormal.
and the contents of control
A control procedure set using
procedure. Modify either contents,
parameters was ignored, and a different
and then execute communication
control procedure was adopted in
again.
Protocol error
communication. Or the adopted control
2) Refer to the command list shown in
procedure was partially different from the
Chapter 7, modify the specified
preset control procedure. Or a command
command etc., and then execute
specified in the preset control procedure
communication again.
does not exist.

06H

Character
area error

An error occurred in the character area

A, B or C. Or a specified command does 1) Check the contents of the character
areas A, B and C, modify the
not exist.
contents if necessary, and then
1) The control procedure set using
execute communication again.
parameters is different.
2) Refer to "2.2.2 Applicable device
2) A specified device number does not
ranges", modify the number of
exist in the target PLC.
characters used to specify the device
3) A device number is not set with the
number, and then execute
specified number of characters (5 or
communication again.
7 characters).

07H

Character
error

Check the data to be written to the

ASCII code data to be written to a device
device, modify it if necessary, and then
is not hexadecimal.
execute communication again.

0AH

10H

18H

D-88

Error item

A station with the corresponding PLC

number does not exist.

Check the PLC number included in the

message, modify it if necessary, and
then execute communication again.
The PLC number should be "FFH" in all
FX Series PLCs.

PLC number
error

A station with the corresponding PLC

number does not exist.

Check the PLC number included in the

message, modify it if necessary, and
then execute communication again.
The PLC number should be "FFH" in all
FX Series PLCs.

Remote
control error

Remote control to set the RUN or STOP

mode is disabled.
Set the PLC mode to RUN or STOP
The RUN or STOP mode is determined
using the forced RUN mode.
in the PLC hardware (by using the RUN/
STOP selector switch, etc.).

PLC number
error

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

Error codes in PLC

Device

The transfer data is abnormal.

Check the transfer specifications

set using parameters, and
execute communication again.

6305

Command error

When the station number was FF,

any command other than "GW"
was received.

Check the specified command,

modify it if necessary, and then
execute communication again.

6306

Monitoring timeout

The received message was

insufficient. Because normal
message was not received within
the time-out time setting, the
transfer sequence was initialized.

The message is insufficient.

Check the transfer program in the
computer, modify it if necessary,
and then execute communication
again.

3801

Parity, overrun or
framing error

The transfer data is abnormal.

Check the transfer specifications

set using parameters, and
execute communication again.

3805

Command error

When the station number was FF,

any command other than "GW"
was received.

Check the specified command,

modify it if necessary, and then
execute communication again.

Monitoring timeout

The received message was

insufficient. Because normal
message was not received within
the time-out time setting the
transfer sequence was initialized.

The message is insufficient.

Check the transfer program in the
computer, modify it if necessary,
and then execute communication
again.

3806

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Serial communication errors and serial communication error code are not cleared even when communication
is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

D
Computer Link

Parity, overrun or
framing error

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

6301

Action

Inverter
Communication

D8438
(ch2)

Error item

Parallel Link

D8063
(ch1)

Error
code

Contents of error

B
N:N Network

When an error is included in a message sent from the computer to a PLC, an error occurs in the PLC.
When such an error occurs, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
When PLCs other then FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs are used or when ch1 is used in an FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, the special auxiliary relay M8063 turns ON as an error flag. When ch2 is used in
an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, the special auxiliary relay M8438 turns ON as an error flag.
When a serial communication error occurs, the error code is stored in D8063 if M8063 turns ON, or stored in
D8438 if M8438 turns ON.
The error code list is shown below:

Common Items

8.5.2

8 Troubleshooting
8.5 Checking Error Codes

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-89

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.
9.1

9.1 Related Device List

Related Data
Related Device List
1. Bit devices
Device

Name

Description

R/W

M8063

Serial communication error 1

Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using

ch 1.

M8120

Communication setting keep

Keeps the communication setting status (for FX0N PLCs).

Global function ON

Turns ON or OFF when the global command (GW) is received

from the computer (for ch 1).

On-demand send processing

Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed

(for ch 1).
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.

M8128

On-demand error flag

Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value for

data sending used in the on-demand function (for ch 1).

M8129

On-demand data byte/word

switch

Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the ondemand function (for ch 1).
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)

R/W

M8426

Global function ON

Turns ON or OFF when the global command (GW) is received

from the computer (for ch 2).

M8427

On-demand send processing

Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed

(for ch 2).
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.

M8428

On-demand error flag

Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value for

data sending used in the on-demand function (for ch 2).

M8429

On-demand data byte/word

switch

Specifies the data unit (byte or word) handled in the ondemand function (for ch 2).
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)

M8438

Serial communication error 2

Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using

ch 2.

M8126

M8127

*1

R: Read only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

D-90

FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.

R/W

R/W

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.1 Related Device List

Device
D8063

Name
Serial communication error
code 1

Description
Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
communication (for ch 1).

R/W
R

Communication format setting

Sets the communication format (for ch 1).

R/W

D8121

Station number settings

Sets the station number in computer link (for ch 1).

R/W

D8127

On-demand data head device

number specification

Sets the head data register device number containing the data
to be sent using the on-demand function (for ch 1).

R/W

D8128

On-demand data quantity

specification

Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand

function (for ch 1).

R/W

D8129

Time-out time setting

Sets the evaluation time for error when the receiving of data
from the computer is interrupted (for ch 1).

R/W

Communication format setting

Sets the communication format (for ch 2).

R/W

D8421

Station number settings

Sets the station number in computer link (for ch 2).

R/W

D8427

On-demand data head device

number specification

Sets the head data register device number containing the data
to be sent using the on-demand function (for ch 2).

R/W

D8428

On-demand data quantity

specification

Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand

function (for ch 2).

R/W

D8429

Time-out time setting

Sets the evaluation time for error when the receiving of data
from the computer is interrupted (for ch 2).

R/W

D8438

Serial communication error

code 2

Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial

communication (for ch 2).

D8439

Operation mode display (ch 2) Stores the communication type being used (for ch 2).

R
R

D
Computer Link

Operation mode display (ch 1) Stores the communication type being used (for ch 1).

D8420

C
Parallel Link

D8419

B
N:N Network

D8120

Common Items

2. Word devices

E
Inverter
Communication

R: Read only
R/W: Read or Write

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-91

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

9.2

9 Related Data
9.2 Details of Related Devices

Details of Related Devices

The devices described below are used for computer link.

9.2.1

Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]

These devices turn ON when an error occurs during serial communication.

1. Detailed contents
These devices work as the serial communication error flags.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8063 turns ON.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8063 turns ON.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8438 turns ON.
When serial communication error flags turn ON, a corresponding error code is stored in D8063 and D8438.

2. Cautions on use
Serial communication errors code are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

9.2.2

Communication setting keep [M8120]

Set this device to ON in a sequence program so that the communication setting is kept (for FX0N PLCs).

1. Detailed contents
In an FX0N PLC, set M8120 to ON in a sequence program so that the communication format setting and
station number settings are kept.

2. Cautions on use
In an FX0N PLC, the communication setting status is kept only when M8120 is set to ON.
In any PLC other than FX0N PLCs, setting of M8120 is not required.

9.2.3

Global function ON [M8126 and M8426]

These devices turn ON/OFF when the PLC receives the global command (GW) from personal computers.

1. Detailed contents
When the computer sends the global command, the global ON flag turns ON or OFF in all connected stations.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8126 turns ON or
OFF.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8126 turns ON or OFF.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8426 turns ON or OFF.

2. Cautions on use
The global ON flag turns OFF from ON when the PLC power is turned OFF or when the PLC mode is
changed to STOP.

9.2.4

On-demand send processing [M8127 and M8427]

These devices remain ON while the on-demand function is being executed.

1. Detailed contents
When a PLC gives data sending request using the on-demand function, the on-demand send processing flag
turns ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the
communication port ch1, M8127 turns ON/OFF.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8427 turns ON/OFF.

2. Cautions on use
Use these devices for interlock to prevent generation of two or more on-demand requests at the same time.

D-92

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

On-demand error flag [M8128 and M8428]

These devices turn ON when an error is included in a specified value for data sending used with the ondemand function.

1. Detailed contents

2. Cautions on use

C
Parallel Link

While the on-demand error flag is ON, data sending is disabled for the on-demand function.
When sending data from a PLC using the on-demand function, set to OFF the on-demand error flag.

9.2.6

B
N:N Network

When the amount of on-demand data is incorrect, the on-demand error flag turns ON.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8128 turns ON.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8128 turns ON.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8428 turns ON.

Common Items

9.2.5

9.2 Details of Related Devices

On-demand data word/byte changeover [M8129 and M8429]

These devices specify the unit (word or byte) of on-demand data.

1. Detailed contents

Computer Link

Use this device to specify the data unit sent using the on-demand function.
Set these devices to ON to specify "byte" (8-bit). Set these devices to OFF to specify "word" (16-bit).
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use M8129.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use M8129.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use M8429.

2. Cautions on use

9.2.7

Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]

1. Detailed contents

Parity, overrun or
framing error

The transfer data is abnormal.

6305

Command error

When the station number was FF, any command other than "GW"
was received.

6306

Monitoring timeout

The received message was insufficient. Because normal message

was not received within the time-out time setting, the transfer
sequence was initialized.

3801

Parity, overrun or
framing error

The transfer data is abnormal.

3805

Command error

When the station number was FF, any command other than "GW"
was received.

Monitoring timeout

The received message was insufficient. Because normal message

was not received within the time-out time setting, the transfer
sequence was initialized.

3806

D-93

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

6301

Contents of error

Remote
Maintenance

D8438
(ch2)

Error item

Programming
Communication

D8063
(ch1)

Error
code

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When the serial communication error flag (M8063 or M8438) turns ON, a corresponding error code is stored
in these devices.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, an error code is
stored in D8063.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, an error code is stored in
D8063.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, an error code is stored in D8438.
The error code list is shown below:

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

These devices store the error codes during serial communication.

Device

Inverter
Communication

When the unit is set to "word", the amount of on-demand data units is equivalent to the number of data
registers for sending.
When the unit is set to "byte", two on-demand data units use one data register for sending.
Example: When the amount of on-demand data is "5", the amount of data registers for sending is "3".

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.2 Details of Related Devices

2. Cautions on use
Error codes are not cleared even after communication recovers its normal status.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

9.2.8

Communication format setting [D8120 and D8420]

These devices set the serial communication format.

1. Detailed contents
These devices set the serial communication format. In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the contents set in parameters are transferred to these devices when the power is
turned ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set the communication format using a sequence program, and then turn
ON the power.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using communication port ch1, use D8120.
Set the communication format using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8420 for confirmation.
The tables below show the setting details.
Contents of D8120
Bit No.

Name

b0

Data length

b1
b2

Parity

b3

Stop bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate
(bps)

Contents
0 (bit = OFF)

1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200

(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400*1

b8

Header

Not provided

Provided (D8124) Initial value: STX (02H)

b9

Terminator

Not provided

Provided (D8125) Initial value: ETX (03H)

b10
b11

Control line

Computer
link

b11, b10
(0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(1, 0): RS-232C interface

b12

*1.

D-94

2-bit

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200

Not applicable

b13

Sum check

Not added

Added

b14

Protocol

Not used

Used

b15

Control
procedure

Format 1

Format 4

This setting is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.2 Details of Related Devices

Bit No.

Name

b0

Data length
Parity

b3

Stop bit
Baud rate
(bps)

1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even

1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

2-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400

b8

Header

Not provided

Provided

b9

Terminator

Not provided

Provided

b10
b11
b12

Control line

b13

Sum check

Not added

Added

b14

Protocol

Not used

Used

b15

Control
procedure

Format 1

Format 4

b12, b11, b10

(0, 0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(0, 1, 0): RS-232C interface

D
Computer Link

Computer
link

Parallel Link

b4
b5
b6
b7

Contents
0 (bit = OFF)

N:N Network

b1
b2

Common Items

Contents of D8420

9.2.9

Station number settings [D8121 and D8421]

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Do not use both the parameters and communication format setting devices (D8120 or D8420) at the same
time. If the communication format is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting
using parameters.
When setting the communication format device (D8120) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting
latched (battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.
When using computer link, make sure to set the header (b8) and terminator (b9) to "not provided". And set the
protocol (b14) to "used".
If the communication format is set using the special data register, the setting becomes valid when the power
is turned ON after the setting is written to the special data register.

Inverter
Communication

2. Cautions on use

1. Detailed contents

Do not use both the parameters and station number settings device (D8121) at the same time. If the station
number is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting using a parameter.
When setting the station number settings device (D8121) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting
latched (battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.

I
Remote
Maintenance

2. Cautions on use

H
Programming
Communication

Set the station number of each PLC used in computer link. The applicable setting range is from 0 to 15 (from
H00 to H0F).
In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the contents set using
parameters are stored when the power is turned ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set the station number using a sequence program, and then turn ON the
power.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using
communication port ch1, use D8121.
Set the station number using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8421 for confirmation.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

These devices set the station number in computer link.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-95

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

9 Related Data
9.2 Details of Related Devices

9.2.10 On-demand data head device number specification [D8127 and D8427]
These devices set the head data register device number containing the data to be sent using the on-demand
function in a sequence program.

1. Detailed contents
These devices set the head data register device number containing the data to be sent using the on-demand
function.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using
the communication port, use D8127.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8127.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use D8427.
If there is an error in the set data, the on-demand error flag (M8128 or M8428) turns ON.

2. Cautions on use
When setting the on-demand data head device number specification device (D8127 or D8427), set the flag
using the pulse operation type.
While the on-demand send processing flag (M8127 or M8427) is ON, do not write data.

9.2.11 On-demand data quantity specification [D8128 and D8428]

These devices set the amount of data to be sent from a PLC using the on-demand function in a sequence
program.

1. Detailed contents
These devices set the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function. Set the amount of data 64 or
less.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use D8128.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8128.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use D8428.
If an error is included in the set data, the on-demand error flag (M8128 or M8428) turns ON.

2. Cautions on use
When setting the on-demand data quantity specification device (D8128 or D8428), set the flag using the pulse
operation type.
While the on-demand send processing flag (M8127 or M8427) is ON, do not write data.

D-96

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.2 Details of Related Devices

These devices set the evaluation time for error when receiving of data from the computer is interrupted.

1. Detailed contents

Setting range
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms) (When "0" is set, it is handled as "100 ms".)

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC,

1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms) (When "0" is set, it is handled as "100 ms".)
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

2. Cautions on use

These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

1. Detailed contents

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.

Description
Programming communication
PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network

RS instruction

RS2 instruction

Parallel link

Inverter instruction

Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication
CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

9
10

H
Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

E
Inverter
Communication

9.2.13 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]

Computer Link

Do not set the time-out time setting parameter and the time-out time (D8129) at the same time. The priority is
given to the parameter setting.
When setting the time-out time setting device (D8129) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting latched
(battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.
Make sure that the time-out time setting is not shorter than the time required to receive one character at the
set baud rate.

Code

C
Parallel Link

FX Series
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC

B
N:N Network

These devices set the error evaluation time in 10-ms units used when the receiving of data from the computer
is interrupted.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use D8129.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8129.
Set the time-out time setting using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8429 for confirmation.
The table below shows the setting range.

Common Items

9.2.12 Time-out time setting [D8129 and D8429]

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-97

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Data

Computer Link

9.3

9.3 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

When adjusting the communication setting using a sequence program, transfer values to D8120
(communication format), D8121 (station number settings) and D8129 (time-out time setting), and then turn
the power ON.
This section explains the communication setting method using a sequence program.

9.3.1

Setting procedure
Perform the following procedure to set the communication using a sequence program.

Creating a program using a programming tool

Create the program shown below using a programming tool.
M8000
M8002

Initial pulse

M8120

This step is required only in FX0N PLC.

FNC 12
MOV

H6082

D8120

The communication format is set.

FNC 12
MOV

H0

D8121

The station number is set.

FNC 12
MOV

K1

D8129

The time-out time setting is set.

For details on these devices, refer to Section 9.2.

Writing the sequence program to the PLC

Transfer the created program to the PLC.

Setting the PLC mode to RUN

Set the PLC to RUN mode, and execute the program.

Turning the PLC power OFF and then ON

Turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it to ON so that the communication setting becomes valid.

9.3.2

Caution on communication setting using sequence program

1) Do not set the communication using a sequence program and parameters at the same time.
If the communication is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting using
parameters.
2) Since the special data registers (D8120, D8121, D8129) is a battery backed area in the case of the FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3U and FX3UC series, a value cannot be normally saved when the battery is discharge (or after
a battery error occurs).
Therefore, keep in mind that a computer link setting may not be possible in this case.

D-98

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

ASCII Code Table

Common Items

9.4

9 Related Data
9.4 ASCII Code Table

<ASCII code table (8-bit code expressed in hexadecimal)>

The ASCII codes A1H to DFH indicate Japanese characters.

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

*1.

\ (ASCII CODE:5C) symbol is displayed as " " in Japanese.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

D-99

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Computer Link

MEMO

D-100

9 Related Data
9.4 ASCII Code Table

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

E. Inverter Communication

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

E-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "inverter communication" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

E-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Inverter Communication

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains inverter communication.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System

1) Mitsubishi general-purpose inverters FREQROL F700, A700, E700, D700, V500, F500, A500, E500 and
S500 (containing the communication type) Series can be linked.
(F700, A700, E700, D700, V500 and F500 Series inverters can be connected only to FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.)

3) The total extension distance is 500m (1640' 5") maximum (for the system configured with 485ADP only).
Important points and reference
chapter/paragraph

System

FX PLC

Inverter

Inverter

Built-in PU port
For selection,
in accordance ....... refer to Chapter 3.
with RS-485
wiring,
....... For
refer to Chapter 4.

Master station

Station No. 1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Built-in PU port
in accordance
with RS-485

For the communication

setting of inverters,
refer to Chapter 5.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

....... To check available PLC

models, refer to Section 1.3.

......

Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
RS-485

....... Number of linked units

....... Total extension distance
For the specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.

Inverter
Communication

Up to eight inverters
500m (1640' 5") [50m (164' 0") when 485BD is included]

D
Computer Link

2) Inverter operations can be monitored, various command can be given to inverters, and parameters can
be read or written in inverters.

C
Parallel Link

Inverter communication allows connection between an FX PLC and up to eight inverters to monitor operations
of inverters, give various commands to inverters and read and write inverter parameters through
communication via RS-485 .

Station No. n

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Inverter Communication

1.2

1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the Inverter Communication setting and sequence programs creation procedures
up until data link:

Inverter Communication
Refer to Chapter 1
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2
Check communication specifications
Refer to Chapter 3
Determine system configuration and selection

Outline of system
Available PLC versions
Available programming tools
Communication specifications
Applicable inverters
Operation commands and parameters
Execution time in inverter communication
System configuration
Select communication equipment

Refer to Chapter 4
Perform wiring
Refer to Chapter 5
Set inverter communication
Refer to Chapter 6
Perform PLC communication setting

Wiring procedure
Selection of cables and connection
equipment
Wiring example
Parameter communication

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

Refer to Chapter 7, 9
Create programs

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 11).

Programs for FX2N, FX2NC Series

(Chapter 7)
Common items
Basic programs
Programs for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U,
FX3UC Series (Chapter 9)
Common items
Basic programs

Refer to Chapter 8, 10
Practical program examples

*1.

E-4

Program examples for FX2N, FX2NC Series

(Chapter 8)
Basic programs
Program examples for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U,
FX3UC Series (Chapter 10)
Basic programs

For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication"
section in this manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operation method, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Inverter Communication

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

For applicable versions

Common Items

1.3

The communication types are applicable for the following versions.

PLC

Applicability
*1

FX3U Series

*1

FX3GC Series

*1

FX3G Series

*1

FX3S Series

*1

FX2NC Series

*1

FX2N Series

*1

F700, A700, E700, D700, V500, F500, A500, E500 and

S500 Series inverters can be connected.

A500, E500 and S500 Series inverters can be

connected.

Inverter communication is not provided.

Inverter communication is not provided.

FX1S Series

Inverter communication is not provided.

FX0N Series

Inverter communication is not provided.

Inverter communication is not provided.

Inverter communication is not provided.

FX2C Series

Inverter communication is not provided.

FX2(FX) Series

Inverter communication is not provided.

FX1 Series

Inverter communication is not provided.

The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.

FX3UC

FREQROLS500/E500/A500

FREQROL-F500/V500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-D700/E700

Ver.1.00 or later

Ver.2.20 or later

Ver.2.20 or later

FX3U

Ver.1.40 or later

FX3G

Ver.1.10 or later

FX3S

Ver.1.00 or later

FX2N, FX2NC

Ver.3.00 or later

Ver.2.32 or later

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3GC

Ver.2.32 or later

Version check

How to look at the manufacturer's serial number

I
Remote
Maintenance

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.

Programming
Communication

The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

1.3.3

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

PLC

Inverter
Communication

FX0S Series
FX0 Series

Computer Link

FX1NC Series
FX1N Series

*1.

1.3.2

Remarks

Parallel Link

FX3UC Series

B
N:N Network

: Applicable
: Not applicable

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Inverter Communication

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown:

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.48A or later.

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

The IVMC instruction is not supported.

Ver. 1.00 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.20 or later.

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.62Q or later.

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.72A or later

The IVMC instruction is not supported.

Ver. 1.00 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.50 or later.

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.50 or later.

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW7 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 3.10 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E

Ver. 4.10 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 4.10 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

E-6

Ver. 1.08J or later

The versions shown on
supporting EXTR instruction
are applicable.

the

left

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.30 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Inverter Communication

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.45X or later.

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

The IVMC instruction is not supported.

Ver. 1.00 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.20 or later.

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

The IVMC instruction is not supported.

Ver. 1.00 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.50 or later.

FX-30P

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.30 or later

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.50 or later.

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

SW7 A or later
Ver. 4.20 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD

Ver. 5.10 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 4.10 or later

the

left

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.30 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 6.30 or later)

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

Programming
Communication

GOT1000 Series display units

The versions shown on

supporting EXTR instruction
are applicable.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX-30P

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

1.4.2

Ver. 1.07H or later

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

E
Inverter
Communication

GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.77F or later

D
Computer Link

GOT1000 Series display units

C
Parallel Link

GX Works2

The IVMC instruction is supported in

Ver. 1.56J or later.

B
N:N Network

GX Works2

Common Items

2. Japanese versions

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Remote
Maintenance

In FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, it is not possible to create programs using programming tools
of inapplicable versions.
Select "FX3G" in model selection when creating programs using a programming tool whose version is not
applicable to the FX3S and FX3GC PLC.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

E-7

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

2.

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

Specifications
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

Item

Specifications

Number of connectable units

8 maximum

Transmission standard

Remarks

RS-485 standard

Maximum total extension

distance

500 m (1640' 5") or less when 485ADP is used

50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is used

Protocol type

Inverter computer link

Control procedure

Asynchronous system

Communication method

Distance varies depending

on communication
equipment type.
Link startup mode

Half-duplex, bidirectional communication

4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400*1 bps

Baud rate

Any one can be selected.

ASCII
Character
format

*1.

2.2

Start bit

Data bit

7-bit

Parity bit

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

FX3U and FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.41 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC is applicable.

Connectable Mitsubishi General-purpose Inverters

Series

Built-in PU connector

FR-A5NR (option)

FREQROL S500

FREQROL E500

Remarks
Only models containing the RS-485
communication type can be connected.

FREQROL A500
FREQROL F500

Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U

and FX3UC PLCs.

FREQROL V500
Series
FREQROL F700

FREQROL A700

Series

Built-in PU connector

FREQROL D700
FREQROL E700

E-8

Built-in PU connector

Built-in RS-485 terminal

Remarks
Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.

FR-E7TR (option)

Remarks

Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U

and FX3UC PLCs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

Link Specifications

Common Items

2.3

2.3 Link Specifications

The tables below show applicable parameters and operation commands.

2.3.1

When monitoring inverter operations (PLC inverter)

H7B

F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500

Operation mode
Output current

H71

Output voltage

H72

Special monitor

H73

Special monitor selection number

H74

Alarm definition

H75

Alarm definition

H76

Alarm definition

H77

Alarm definition

H79

Inverter status monitor (extended)

H7A

Inverter status monitor

H6E

Set frequency (EEPROM)

H6D

Set frequency (RAM)

Applicable inverter
F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500

Operation mode

HF3

Special monitor selection number

HF9

Run command (expansion)

Run command
Set frequency (EEPROM)

HED

Set frequency (RAM)

HFD

Inverter reset

HF4

Alarm definition all clear

HFC

All parameter all clear

HFC

User clear

HFF

Link parameter expansion setting

For inverter parameters which can be changed (read and written), refer to "12. Related Detailed Data" later.

H
Programming
Communication

Parameters (PLC inverter)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

HFA
HEE

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

HFB

When controlling inverter operations (PLC inverter)

Written contents

Computer Link

Output frequency [number of rotations]

H70

Parallel Link

H6F

Instruction code
(hexadecimal)

2.3.3

Applicable inverter

Inverter
Communication

2.3.2

Read contents

N:N Network

Instruction code
(hexadecimal)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

2.4

Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

2.4.1

Outline
The period of time after one inverter communication instruction is driven until communication with the inverter
is completed (M8029 turns ON) is regarded as the required time for the inverter communication instruction as
shown in the figure below.
X0

SET

M0

M0

Inverter communication instruction

M8029

RST

M0

M0
M8029

Tinv
T1

T2
First time sending/receiving
in a single instruction

T3

Second time sending/receiving

in a single instruction

"n"th time sending/receiving

in a single instruction

Communication
preparation
processing

Communication
termination
processing

T4
Inverter
waiting time

T6[n]*1

T5
T7[n]*1

T8[n]*1

T9[n]*1

The request message

is being sent
Inverter data
check time
The response message
is being received

*1.

E-10

The time required for the "n"th time sending/receiving in a single instruction.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

2 Specifications
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

Inverter communication instruction

Number of times of sending/receiving in per instruction

IVDR

IVCK

IVWR

Change of the 2nd parameter is

necessary*2

Change of the 2nd parameter is

unnecessary

Change of the 2nd parameter is

necessary*2

Number of times of
communication S2
IVMC

2 + Number of parameters *2 requiring change of the

2nd parameter
1

For parameters requiring change of the 2nd parameter, refer to section 9.10.

Computer Link

*2.

S2

Parallel Link

IVBWR

N:N Network

IVRD

Change of the 2nd parameter is

unnecessary

A
Common Items

Some inverter communication instructions execute several times of sending/receiving in a single instruction.
The following table shows the number of times of sending/receiving in each communication instruction.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

2.4.2

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

Calculation method
Calculate the required time "Tinv" for inverter communication instruction in units of "ms" as follows.
"INT(n)" in the calculation formula indicates an integer obtained by truncating decimal places of "n".

1. Length of 1 character
In inverter communication, the communication setting is as shown in following table.
The length of 1 character is as shown in the following calculation expression.
Length of 1 character = Start bit + Data length + Parity bit + Stop bit
= 10[bit]
Name

Set value

bit

Start bit

Data length

Parity bit

Even number

Stop bit

Total

10

2. Execution times in inverter communication instructions

Execution times in inverter communication instructions is as shown in the following calculation expression.

Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3
T1 = 1[ms]
T2 = {n(T4+T5)}+T6[n][ms]
Sending and
receiving
frequency

T6[1]+T6[2]+T6[3]+

T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T4", "T5" and "T6 [n]" as shown in the following table.
Communication
time
T4

= ( INT (

T5

= 1[ms]

T6[n]

T7[n]+T9[n]
T8[n]

E-12

Calculation method

15
) + 1) Scan time
Scan time

For Scan time < T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]

T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
= ( INT (
) + 1) Scan time
Scan time
For Scan time T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
= ( INT (
) + 2) Scan time
Scan time

={(

1
Number of sending and Length of
)(

) } 1000
receiving characters*1 1 character
Communication speed [bps]

= Data check time in inverters*4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

Inverter
communication
instruction

IVDR

IVMC

Third

Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
unnecessary.

11

15

11

20

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
necessary.

11

15

11

15

11

20

HF3, HFA, HFF

11

15

HFD

13

*3

13

Other than above

13

17

H73, H7A, H7F, H6C

18

Other than above

11

20

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
unnecessary.

11

15

13

17

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
necessary.

11

15

11

15

13

17

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
unnecessary.

11

15

13

17

Change of the 2nd

parameter is
necessary.

11

15

11

15

13

17

19

19

38

The inverter gives no response because the inverter is being reset.

The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is completed, and then completes execution of the
inverter communication instruction.

*4.

Refer to the following table for the data check time in inverters.
Make sure to refer to the manual of the inverter used, and confirm the data check time for the
communication command used.

Item

Data check time

Various monitors, operation command, set frequency

(RAM)

<12ms

Parameters read/write, set frequency (EEPROM)

<30ms

Parameter all clear/all clear

<5s

Reset instruction

No response
(The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is
completed, and then completes execution of the
inverter communication instruction.)

Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*3.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Indicates the number of sent/received characters required to write 1 parameter.

The IVBWR instruction executes parameter writing by the number of times of communication S2

Inverter
Communication

IVBWR*2

Second

Computer Link

IVWR

First

Parallel Link

IVCK

Parameter/
instruction code

N:N Network

IVRD

*2.

Refer to the following table for the number of sent/received characters.

Common Items

*1.

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

I
Remote
Maintenance

The IVWR, IVRD and IVBWR instructions automatically change expansion parameters and the 2nd
parameter.
The data check time for the last (2nd or 3rd) sending/receiving in the IVWR and IVRD instructions and
the data check time for the last sending/receiving of each parameter writing in the IVBWR instruction
correspond to parameter reading/writing (< 30 ms).
The data check time for sending and receiving (expansion parameter change and 2nd parameter
change) other than the above correspond to various monitors (< 12 ms).

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

2.4.3

2 Specifications
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

Calculation example
This is a calculation example for the following communication settings and scan time when communicating
with an inverter.
Communication speed = 19200[bps]
Length of 1 character = 10[bit]
Scan time = 10[ms]

1. Calculation example 1
Calculation of required time when Pr. 3 is read by the IVRD instruction
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 114[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.3 does not require change of the 2nd parameter.

T2 = 2(T4+T5) + T6[1] + T6[2] = 2(20+1) + 20 + 50 = 112[ms]

Sending and
receiving
frequency

The first
sending and
receiving

The second
sending and
receiving

) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (

1 ) (11+4) 10 ) 1000 = 7.8[ms]

19200

T8[1] = 12[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]

) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 40.4
) + 1 ) 10 = 50[ms]
10
10

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 10.4 + 30 = 40.4[ms]

T7[2] + T9[2] = ( ( 1 ) (9+11) 10 ) 1000 = 10.4[ms]
19200
T8[2] = 30[ms]
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+112+1 = 114[ms]

2. Calculation example 2
Calculation of required time when Pr.902 is read by the IVRD instruction
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 155[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.902 requires change of the 2nd parameter.

T2 = 3(T4+T5) + T6[1] + T6[2] + T6[3] = 3(20+1) + 20 + 20 + 50 = 153[ms]

Sending and
receiving
frequency

The first
sending and
receiving

The second
sending and
receiving

The third
sending and
receiving

) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (

1 ) (11+4) 10 ) 1000 = 7.8[ms]

19200

T8[1] = 12[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]

) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
10
10

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]

T7[2] + T9[2] = ( (

1 ) (11+4) 10 ) 1000 = 7.8[ms]

19200

T8[2] = 12[ms]
T6[3] = ( INT(

T7[3] + T8[3] + T9[3]

) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 40.4
) + 1 ) 10 = 50[ms]
10
10

T7[3] + T8[3] + T9[3] = 10.4 + 30 = 40.4[ms]

T7[3] + T9[3] = ( ( 1 ) (9+11) 10 ) 1000 = 10.4[ms]
19200
T8[3] = 30[ms]
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+153+1 = 155[ms]

E-14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Inverter Communication

2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions

Calculation of required time when Pr. 10 to Pr. 14 [ S2

= 5] are written by the IVBWR instruction

Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 512[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.10 to Pr. 14 do not require change of the 2nd parameter and the
time required for writing is same in each parameter.

S2

C
Parallel Link

) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 ) 10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
1 ) (11+4) 10 ) 1000 = 7.8[ms]
19200

T8[1] = 12[ms]

Computer Link

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]

) + 1 ) 10 = ( INT( 38.9
) + 1 ) 10 = 40[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(
10
10

T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 8.9 + 30 = 38.9[ms]

T7[2] + T9[2] = ( (

B
N:N Network

T2 = ( 2 (T4+T5) + T6[1]+T6[2] ) + ( 2 (T4+T5) + T6[3]+T6[4] ) +

Time required to write Pr. 10
Time required to write Pr. 11
= 5 ( 2 (T4+T5) + T6[1]+T6[2] ) = 5 ( 2 (20+1) + 20 + 40 ) = 510[ms]

T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (

Common Items

3. Calculation example 3

1 ) (13+4) 10 ) 1000 = 8.9[ms]

19200

T8[2] = 30[ms]

Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+510+1 = 512[ms]

Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.

3.1 System Configuration

System Configuration and Selection

This chapter explains the system configuration and communication equipment selection operating in
accordance with RS-485 required by FX PLCs.

3.1

System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use inverter communication.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 and 8 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

FX PLC

Important point in selection

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

Total extension
distance

50 m
(164' 0")

FX2N PLC

Communication board

Function extension memory cassette

(only for FX2N PLC)

Communication Special adapter

connection board
adapter

FX2N PLC

Attach the special adapter

connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Attach the communication adapter

to the left side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Because the communication board

can be built in to the PLC, the
installation area does not change

50 m
(164' 0")

Function extension memory cassette

(only for FX2N PLC)

+
FX2NC PLC

Communication adapter

Function extension memory board

(only for FX2NC PLC)

4
RD A
RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

Communication board

FX3U PLC

RD A
RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

Communication board

E-16

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.1 System Configuration

A
FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

FX3U PLC

Expansion
board

Attach the expansion board to the

main unit, and then attach the
communication adapter to the left
side of the main unit.

500 m
(1640' 5")

+
Expansion
board

C
Parallel Link

Communication
adapter

B
N:N Network

Communication
adapter

Common Items

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-485

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

FX3GC, FX3UC(D, DS, DSS)

Communication
adapter

E
Because the communication
board can be built in to the PLC,
the installation area does not
change.

FX3S, FX3G PLC

+
Connector
conversion
adapter

FX3S, FX3G PLC

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Attach the connector conversion adapter

500 m
to the main unit, and then attach the
(1640'
5")
communication adapter to the left side
of the main unit.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication
board

50 m
(164' 0")

Inverter
Communication

Communication
adapter

500 m
(1640' 5")

Computer Link

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

H
Programming
Communication

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- Inverter communication is not provided for the FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and
FX1NC PLCs.
FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total
extension Check
distance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD

FX2N

+
+
FX2N-ROM-E1
(Function extension
memory cassette)

FX2N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3S

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point type)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

E-18

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total
extension Check
distance

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

C
Parallel Link

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.

500 m
(1640' 5")

Computer Link

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point type)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

H
Programming
Communication

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Total
extension Check
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

RD

FX3U

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
a FX3U-8AV-BD is used,

When
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

it occupies one communication

ch1

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
1

FX2NC

500 m
(1640' 5")

+
FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX2NC-ROM-CE1
(Function extension
memory board)

E-20

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total
extension Check
distance

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

N:N Network

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

ch1

Parallel Link

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

FX3GC

ch2

500 m
(1640' 5")

D
Computer Link

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).
When using channel 1 (ch 1)

(European terminal block)

ch1

Inverter
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

ch1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

Common Items

FX Series

ch2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Inverter Communication

FX Series

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total
extension Check
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A

50 m
(164' 0")

RD
RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

RD

FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

port channel.
ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

ch2

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

E-22

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

4 Wiring
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Common Items

4.

Wiring

This chapter explains the wiring.

N:N Network

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

C
Parallel Link

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.1

4.1 Wiring Procedure

Wiring Procedure
Confirming the connection method
Confirm the inverter connection method.
For details, refer to Section 4.2.

Preparing for wiring

Prepare cables, distributors and terminal resistors required for wiring.
For connection cables, refer to Section 4.3.
For distributors, refer to Section 4.4.
For terminal resistors, refer to Section 4.5.

Turning OFF the PLC power

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.

Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)

Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.

Wiring communication equipment

Connect communication equipment with communication port of inverters (PU port, built-in terminal
for RS-485, FR-A5NR, FR-7TR).
For details, refer to Section 4.8.

Connecting terminal resistors

Connect terminal resistors to the communication equipment of the PLC and the RDA-RDB signal
terminal in the last inverter.
For details, refer to Section 4.5.

Wiring a shielding wire (Class-D grounding)

When using a twisted pair cable, wire a shielding wire.
For details, refer to Section 4.6.

E-24

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

Selecting Cables and Connection Devices

When connecting equipment operating in accordance with RS-485, use the following connection method with
10BASE-T or shielded twisted pair cables.

4.2.1

Non-stranded cable
(10BASE-T cable for LAN)

Terminal resistor
(Which is supplied with or built in the communication
equipment for the FX PLC side, and should be arranged
by the user for the inverter side)

S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700 and E700 Series (PU connector)

C
Parallel Link

1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection

When a distributor is not used

When a distributor is used

10BASE-T cable
Terminal resistor

RS-485 connector
(PU connector)

Terminal
resistor

10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cable

Terminal resistor

Inverter
Communication

Use a distributor because a terminal resistor cannot

be connected to the inverter.

RS-485 connector
(PU connector)

2. In the case of 1-to-N connection

When a distributor is used

10BASE-T
cable

10BASE-T cable

Distributor

10BASE-T
cable

10BASE-T cable

Distributor

Terminal
resistor

10BASE-T cable

RS-485 connector

PU
connector

H
Programming
Communication

*1.

PU
connector

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

10BASE-T cable
Terminal resistor

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Distributor
*1

D
Computer Link

Distributor
*1

B
N:N Network

PU connector
(RJ45 connector)

Common Items

4.2

4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices

When using FX3G-485-BD-RJ, use the PU connector (RJ45 connector) for connection.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

4.2.2

4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices

A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR)

1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
When a distributor is not used

FR-A5NR
Twisted pair cable

Terminal
resistor

Terminal resistor

2. In the case of 1-to-N connection

When a distributor is not used
Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

Terminal
resistor

Twisted pair cable

Terminal resistor

E-26

FR-A5NR

FR-A5NR

FR-A5NR

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal)

Common Items

4.2.3

4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices

1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection

Set the terminal resistor switch in the F700/A700 Series inverter to "100 ".

B
N:N Network

Built-in RS-485
terminal

C
Parallel Link

Twisted pair cable

2. In the case of 1-to-N connection

Set the terminal resistor switch in the last F700/A700 Series inverter to "100 ".

D
Twisted pair cable

Computer Link

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

Built-in
RS-485
terminal

Inverter
Communication

Built-in
RS-485
terminal

Built-in
RS-485
terminal

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.2.4

4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices

E700 Series (FR-E7TR)

1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
When a distributor is not used

FR-E7TR
Twisted pair cable

Terminal resistor

2. In the case of 1-to-N connection

When a distributor is not used

Twisted pair cable

Terminal resistor

E-28

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

FR-E7TR

FR-E7TR

FR-E7TR

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

Connection Cables

4.3.1

10BASE-T cable

A
Common Items

4.3

4.3 Connection Cables

10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected.

N:N Network

1. Selection procedure when purchasing

1) Cable type

: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or 5)

2) Connection specifications

: Straight type

3) Connector

: RJ45 connector

C
Parallel Link

2. Cautions on using commercial cables

Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
5V DC is output to the PU connector in the inverters for supplying power to the PU.
It is necessary to cut pins No. 2 and 8 of commercial cables to prevent wiring to pins No. 2 and 8.
(It is recommended to use the distributor BMJ-8-28N).

Twisted pair cable (recommended)

Computer Link

4.3.2

The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used in wiring.
Use commercial three-pair type twisted pair cables of 0.3 mm2 or more.

1. Recommended cable list

Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.

The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.

Model name

Inverter
Communication

Manufacturer

Remarks

DPEV SB 0.3 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Cable structural drawing (reference)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

H
Programming
Communication

3. Point of contact
For details on cables such as specifications and price, contact each cable manufacturer.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.3.3

4.3 Connection Cables

Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

AWG22 to
AWG20

Bar terminal with

Insulating sleeve
(cable size)

Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
Nm

AWG22

Tool size

Tightening
torque

0.4 (0.01")

2.5 (0.09")

FX3G-485-BDRJ

AWG20 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2N-485-BD

AWG26 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

Not applicable

0.4 to 0.5
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2NC-485ADP

AWG26 to
AWG16

AWG26 to
AWG20

Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating sleeve.
When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD

Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")

FX2NC-485ADP

Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")

When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve

Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name

Caulking tool

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)

*1.
*2.

E-30

Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6

Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")

Insulating sleeve

Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")

2.6 mm
(0.1")

14 mm
(0.55")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.4 Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor)

A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Note

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

For size A and size B,

refer to the table above.

Model name

Parallel Link

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

N:N Network

Manufacturer

SZS 0.4 2.5

FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP

Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name

SZF 1-0.6 3.5

Computer Link

2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

E
Inverter
Communication

When wiring one cable to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

6.3mm(0.25")
or more
3.2(0.13")

6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

Programming
Communication

4.4

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor)

Model name

Remote
Maintenance

Prepare the following devices if necessary.

Product name

Common Items

Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.

Manufacturer

5-554720-3

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2
HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
and 8 pin)
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

Tyco Electronics Japan G.K.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

RJ45 connector

E-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.5

4.5 Connecting Terminal Resistors

Connecting Terminal Resistors

Connect a terminal resistor to both the communication equipment of the FX PLC and the RDA-RDB signal
terminal in the last inverter.
For details on connection, refer to each wiring diagram.

1. Terminal resistor types

Brown

Prepare the following two types of terminal resistors.

Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment,
select ones with the color codes shown to the right.
1) On the FX PLC side, use a terminal resistor of 110 , 1/2 W supplied
together with the communication equipment operating in accordance with
RS-485.

Precision

1 1 1
=110
(101)
Brown Black Brown Precision

2) On the inverter side (PU connector except FR-A5NR, FR-E7TR), use a

terminal resistor of 100 , 1/2 W (not supplied).
3) On the inverter side (FR-A5NR), use a terminal resistor chip (supplied
together with the FR-A5NR).

1 0 1 =100
(101)

4) On the inverter side (FR-E7TR), use the terminal resistor switch.

2. Connecting a terminal resistor to the FX PLC

Connect a terminal resistor between the RDA and RDB terminals of the communication equipment.

3. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

The FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Terminal
resistor
selector
switch

330
OPEN
110

Terminal
resistor selector
switch

FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque : 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
Select a
screwdriver
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
with a
<Reference>
straight tip.
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name
SZS 0.4 2.5

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Terminal block mounting screws

E-32

0.4mm
(0.01")

2.5mm
(0.09")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

4 Wiring
4.6 Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding)

A
Common Items

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Terminal resistor
selector switch

B
N:N Network

4. Connecting a terminal resistor to the inverter

1) When the PU connector or RS-485 connector (S500 Series) is used

- Connect a terminal resistor between pin No. 3 (RDA) and pin No. 6 (RDB).
- Connect a distributor to the PU terminal because terminal resistors cannot be connected.
- Connect a terminal resistor only to the inverter located furthest away from the FX PLC.

C
Parallel Link

Communication may be affected by noise echo depending on the transmission speed and transmission
distance. When communication is hindered by noise echo, connect a terminal resistor to the inverter.

3) When the FR-E7TR is used in connection

A terminal resistor is built into the FR-E7TR. Set the terminal resistor switch in the E700 Series inverter
located at the end to "100".

Computer Link

2) When the FR-A5NR is used in connection

- Connect a terminal resistor chip (which is supplied together with the FR-A5NR) between the RDB and
RDR terminals in the most distant inverter.

E
Inverter
Communication

Terminal
resistor
switch

100

H
Programming
Communication

Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding)

Connect the

FG
FG

terminal is provided in the communication equipment

terminal to the

(grounding) terminal of the PLC requiring Class-D grounding.

Apx.A

terminal is not provided in the communication equipment

Discontinued
models

2. When the

FG

I
Remote
Maintenance

Perform Class-D grounding only to one side of a cable according to the absence/presence of the grounding
terminal.
For details on connection, refer to each wiring diagram.

1. When the

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

OPEN
Terminal
resistor
switch

4.6

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

4) When the F700 or A700 Series inverter built-in RS-485 terminal is used
A terminal resistor is built into the RS-485 terminal. Set the terminal resistor switch in the F700/A700
Series inverter located at the end to "100".

Perform Class-D grounding directly to the shielding wire of the cable.

E-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.7

4.7 Connector in Inverter

Connector in Inverter
1. In the case of PU port connector
Pin No.

Signal name

P5S

SG

RDB

SDA

SDB

RDA

P5S

SG

Remarks

When seen from inverter front

(receptacle side)

Not used

(8)

(1)

Modular jack
Not used

The pins Nos. 2 and 8 (P5S) are provided for the power supply of the operation panel or parameter unit.
Do not wire them into inverter communication.

2. In the case of computer link using the FR-A5NR

Attach the FR-5NR to an A500, F500 or V500 Series inverter.

Terminal
block
Screw size:
M3

SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG

Terminal
symbol
Connect them to PLC communication
equipment operating in accordance with
RS-485.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the FR-A5NR.

3. In the case of computer link using the FR-E7TR

Attach the FR-E7TR to an E700 Series inverter.

Terminal block
Connect them to PLC
communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the FR-E7TR.

E-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.7 Connector in Inverter

A
Common Items

4. In the case of built-in RS-485 terminal

F700 and A700 Series inverters are equipped with a built-in RS-485 terminal.

Terminal
symbol

B
N:N Network

Connect them to the communication equipment

operating in accordance with RS-485 of the PLC.
European
terminal block

C
Parallel Link

For details, refer to the instruction respective inverter manual.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

4.8

Connection Diagram

4.8.1

For S500, E500, A500, F500 , V500 and D700 Series (PU connector)
1. When one inverter is connected
Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG

Distributor

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Class-D grounding

10BASE-T
cable

PLC

5
4
3
6
1

Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 , 1/2 W
(not supplied).

5
4
3
6
1

When seen from inverter front

(receptacle side)

54361

PU (RS-485) S S R R
connector
DDDD S
A B A BG

Inverter

54361

Modular jack

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

PLC

E-36

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Inverter

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied).

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

Terminal resistor: 110

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Class-D grounding

10BASE-T
cable

PLC

5
4
3
6
1

Distributor

5
4
3
6
1

5
4
3
6
1

Distributor

5
4
3
6
1

5
4
3
6
1

5
4
3
6
1

54361

54361

54361

PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G

PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G

PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G

54361

54361

Inverter

ABAB

Inverter

ABAB

...

Inverter

C
Parallel Link

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG

Distributor

ABAB

54361

Computer Link

For the pin arrangement in the connector,

refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

H
Programming
Communication

Inverter

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PU(RJ45)
connector

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

PLC

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

B
N:N Network

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

Common Items

2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected

Inverter

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8.2

4.8 Connection Diagram

For A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR)

1. When one inverter is connected

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
DC
LINK
50mA
SG
24+
24G
FG
Class-D grounding

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Terminal resistor: 110

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2or more)
Connect the terminal resistor connection piece.
0.3mm2 or more

SS
S DD
G
AB

Terminal
arrangement

RRR
DDD
A BR

Terminal
block
Screw size:
M3

FR-A5NR
Inverter

PLC

SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR

Terminal
symbol

SG

Connect them to the

communication unit of the PLC.

2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG
Class-D grounding

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Terminal resistor: 110

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.

0.3mm2 or more
Class D
grounding
S SS
G DD
AB

PLC

Connect the terminal

resistor connection
piece to the inverter
located furthest
away from the PLC.

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)

RRR
DDD
A BR

FR-A5NR
Inverter

S SS
G DD
AB

Class D
grounding
RRR
DDD
ABR

FR-A5NR
Inverter

....

S SS
G DD
AB

RRR
DDD
ABR

FR-A5NR
Inverter

For the pin arrangement of the connector,

refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.

E-38

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

For E700 Series (PU connector)

Common Items

4.8.3

4.8 Connection Diagram

1. When one inverter is connected (4-wire type)

Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.

N:N Network

Distributor

Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 , 1/2 W
(not supplied).

C
Parallel Link

When seen from inverter front

(receptacle side)
10BASE-T
cable

PLC

PU (RS-485)
connector
Inverter

D
Computer Link

Modular jack

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied).

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Inverter
Communication

5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Inverter

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (4-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

Distributor

Distributor

10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector

PU (RS-485)
connector

PU (RS-485)
connector

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

PLC

For the pin arrangement in the connector,

refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

E-40

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

Inverter

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

PLC

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Inverter

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

A
Common Items

3. When one inverter is connected (2-wire type)

Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor

B
N:N Network

Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 , 1/2 W
(not supplied).
When seen from inverter front
(receptacle side)

C
Parallel Link

10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector

Inverter

PLC

Modular jack

D
FX3G-485-BD-RJ

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied).

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
1 pair)

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Inverter
Communication

5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Computer Link

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Inverter

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

4. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (2-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor

Connect a terminal resistor of

100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

Distributor

Distributor

10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector

PU (RS-485)
connector

PU (RS-485)
connector

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

PLC

For the pin arrangement in the connector,

refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

E-42

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

Inverter

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

PU(RJ45)
connector

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

PLC

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110)
(Wiring circuit switch:
1 pair)

Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)

Inverter

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

For E700 Series (FR-E7TR)

Common Items

4.8.4

4.8 Connection Diagram

1. When one inverter is connected (4-wire type)

B
N:N Network

Terminal resistor: 110

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)

Set the terminal resistor

switch to the "100 " side.

Parallel Link

0.3mm2 or more

Terminal
arrangement
Terminal
block

PLC

D
Computer Link

Connect them to PLC

communication unit.

Inverter

2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (4-wire type)

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)

Inverter
Communication

Terminal resistor: 110

FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Set the terminal resistor
switch to "100 " in the inverter
located furthest away from the PLC.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

0.3mm2 or more
Class D
grounding

Inverter

Inverter

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC

Class D
grounding

Inverter

For the pin arrangement of the connector,

refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

4 Wiring
4.8 Connection Diagram

When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below: (4-wire type)

When connecting a 100 terminal resistor, set the switch to the "100 " side.

For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the terminal SG, set the
terminal 2/SG selector switch to the right side (ON) to change over the
terminal 2 to the terminal SG.
(By this setting, analog inputs to the terminal 2 become invalid.)

To next station inverter

PLC

E-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8 Connection Diagram

A
Common Items

3. When one inverter is connected (2-wire type)

Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.

0.3mm2 or more

N:N Network

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)
Set the terminal resistor switch to the
"100 " side.

Crossover
wiring

Terminal
arrangement

PLC

Parallel Link

Terminal
block
Connect them to PLC
communication unit.

Inverter

D
Computer Link

4. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (2-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.

Crossover
wiring

Crossover
wiring

Crossover
wiring

0.3mm2 or more

PLC

Inverter

Class D
grounding

Inverter

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Class D
grounding

E
Inverter
Communication

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)

Set the terminal resistor switch

to "100 " in the inverter located
furthest away from the PLC.

Inverter

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

For the pin arrangement of the connector,

refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.

When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below: (2-wire type)

To next station inverter

I
Remote
Maintenance

For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the

terminal SG, set the terminal 2/SG selector switch
to the right side (ON) to change over the terminal
2 to the terminal SG.
(By this setting, analog inputs to the terminal 2
become invalid.)

Programming
Communication

When connecting a 100 terminal

resistor, set the switch to the "100 "
side.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

PLC
Perform crossover wiring.

E-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

4.8.5

4.8 Connection Diagram

For F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal)

1. When one inverter is connected
Terminal resistor: 110
- FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.

FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Set the terminal resistor switch to the

"100" side.

0.3mm2 or more

PLC

SS
S DD
G AB
11

Class-D
grounding

RR
DD
AB
11

Inverter

2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected

Terminal resistor: 110
- FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG

Set the terminal resistor switch

to "100" in the inverter located
furthest away from the PLC.

Twisted pair cable

(0.3mm2 or more)

0.3mm2 or more
Class-D
grounding

Class-D
grounding
Class-D
grounding
PLC

SS SS
S D D DD
G BA BA
1122

SS SS
S DD D D
G BA BA
1122

R R RR
D D DD S
B ABA G
1122

Inverter

R R RR
D D DD S
BA BA G
1122

....

Inverter

When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below:

+ - + -

Connect them
to SDA and
SDB in PLC.
Connect them
to RDA and
RDB in PLC.
Connect it to
SG in PLC.

E-46

RXD

+ - + - RXD

TXD + - + -

TXD + - + -

SG

SG

SG VCC

SG VCC

Connect them to
RDA1 and RDB1 in
next inverter.
Connect them to
SDA1 and SDB1 in
next inverter.
Connect it to SG in
next inverter.

SS
S DD
G BA
11

RR
DD
BA
11

Inverter

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Inverter Communication

Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)

Common Items

4.8.6

4.9 Grounding

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.

Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.

B
N:N Network

Wiring circuit
switch

C
Parallel Link

4.9

Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below.

Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment

Independent grounding
Best condition

PLC

Other
equipment

Shared grounding
Good condition

PLC

Other
equipment

E
Inverter
Communication

PLC

Computer Link

The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.

Common grounding
Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.

5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters

Communication Setting in Inverter

Before connecting an inverter to a PLC, set parameters related to communication in the inverter parameter
unit (PU) in advance using the procedure described in this chapter.
If these parameters are overwritten from the PLC after the inverter is connected, communication will be
disabled.
If these parameters are changed by mistake, they should be set again.

5.1

Communication Port and Applicable Parameters

When connecting an inverter to a PLC, it is necessary to set parameters corresponding to the communication
port in advance.
S500 Series
Remove the surface cover.

E500 Series
Remove the operation panel.

A500, F500 and V500 Series

Remove the operation panel.
PU
connector
FR-A5NR

PU
connector

Remove the
surface cover

RS-485 port
(PU connector)

F700 and A700 Series

Remove the surface cover.

E700 Series
Open the PU connector cover.

PU connector

RS-485 terminal

D700 Series
Remove the surface cover.

PU connector

E-48

Remove the surface cover.

FR-E7TR

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters

A
Model classification

Inverter connection
destination

S500 Series Only models with built-in RS-485 port RS-485 port

Parameters applicable in Reference

inverter
section
Pr79,n1 to n12

5.2

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124

5.3

PU port

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124

5.4

Option

FR-A5NR computer link

Pr79,Pr331 to Pr342

5.5

Models with built-in PU port

PU port

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124

5.4

Option

FR-A5NR computer link

Pr79,Pr331 to Pr342

5.5

Models with built-in PU port

PU port

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124

5.4

Option

FR-A5NR computer link

Pr79,Pr331 to Pr342

5.5

PU port

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124,
Pr340, Pr549

5.6

Pr79,Pr117 to Pr124,
Pr.340, Pr549

5.6

A700 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal

Pr79,Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549

5.7

F700 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal

Pr79,Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549

5.7

A500 Series
F500 Series
V500 Series

D700 Series Models having built-in PU port

E700 Series

Models having built-in PU port

PU port

Option

FR-E7TR
control terminal option

C
Parallel Link

PU port

Models with built-in PU port

N:N Network

E500 Series Models with built-in PU port

Common Items

Model

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-49

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)

5.2

S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)

5.2.1

Contents of parameter setting

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.

Parameter item

Set value

n1

Communication station number

n2

Communication speed

n3

Stop bit length

n4
n7

00 to 31

Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps

192

19200 bps (standard)

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

Parity check presence/absence

Even parity present

Wait time setting

---

Set with communication data

n11

CR/LF selection

With CR, without LF

Pr79

Operation mode selection

External operation mode is selected when

power is turned ON.

n10

Link start mode selection

Computer link operation

n6

Communication check time interval

---

Communication check suspension

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
n5

Parameter item
Number of
communication retries

Set value

Setting contents

---

Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and

set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.

E-50

Set value

Setting contents

n12

EEPROM write selection

0 or 1

0: Written to RAM and EEPROM

1: Written to RAM only. Not written to EEPROM

n8

Operation command
write

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: External

n9

Speed command write

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: External

Pr37

*1.

Parameter item

Speed display*1

0 or 0.1 to
999

0: Frequency display, setting

0.1 to 999: Machine speed at 60Hz.

This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.

Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may not be
set or monitored normally.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

Parameter setting method (reference)

Common Items

5.2.2

5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)

This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.

MODE key
Changes over the setting mode.

C
Parallel Link

Setting dial
Changes the set value of
the frequency and
parameters.

B
N:N Network

3-digit monitor LED

Shows the frequency,
parameter number, etc.

RUN indicator
Lights or flashes during
operation.

SET key
Sets each setting.

The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19,200 bps.

Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode

Computer Link

Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is OFF).

Selecting the parameter setting mode

Monitor/frequency setting mode

Inverter
Communication

Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Parameter setting mode
The last parameter read
is displayed.

Setting the set value of Pr. 30 to "1"

(This step is not necessary if Pr. 30 is already set to "1".)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Turn the setting dial to display "P30".

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Press the SET key to read the currently set value.

H
Programming
Communication

3. Turn the setting dial to change the set value to "1".

I
Remote
Maintenance

Press the SET key to set "1".

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

When the set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, the setting is completed.

E-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)

Setting the set value of "n2" to "192"

("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
Turn the setting dial to display "n2".

Press the SET key to read the currently set value.

Turn the setting dial to change the set value to "192".

Press the SET key to set "192".

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

When the set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, the setting is completed.

E-52

Changing other parameters in the same way as step 4

For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.2.1.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)

E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)

5.3.1

Contents of parameter setting

Common Items

5.3

B
N:N Network

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)

The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter item

Set value

Pr117

Communication station number

00 to 31

Pr118

Communication speed

Pr119

Stop bit / Data length

Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps

192

19200 bps (standard)

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

Even parity present

Parallel Link

Parameter No.

Pr120

Parity check presence/absence

Pr123

Waiting time setting

Pr124

CR LF presence/absence
selection

With CR, without LF

Pr79

Operation mode selection

External operation mode is selected when power

is turned ON.

Pr122

Communication check time

interval

9999

Communication check suspension

Pr121

Parameter item
Number of
communication retries

Set value

Setting contents

9999

Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and

set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

Parameter No.
Pr37

Pr342

Speed display*1
Frequency setting
command selection*2
EEPROM write selection
(only in 400 V class)

Set value
0 or 0.01 to
9998
0, 1, 9999

0 or 1

Setting contents
0: Frequency display, setting
0.01 to 9998: Machine speed at 60Hz.
0
: The built-in frequency setting knob is valid.
1
: The built-in frequency setting knob is invalid.
9999 : The built-in frequency setting knob is valid when
the frequency is set to "0 Hz" by the keys.
0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.

This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.

Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may
not be set or monitored normally (in the 400 V class).
(In the 200 V and 100 V classes, the frequency may not be set or monitored normally if any value
other than "0" is set to Pr37 without regard to the setting of the instruction code HFF.)

*2.

When changing the frequency from the PLC, set "1" or "9999".

H
Programming
Communication

*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Pr146

Parameter item

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.

Inverter
Communication

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.

Computer Link

9999

Set with communication data

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.3.2

5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)

Parameter setting method (reference)

This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
When the cover is closed

When the cover is open

Display LED 4 digits
Displays the frequency,
parameter number, etc.

Unit indicator
Operation status indication
The LEDs light and flash according
to the mode and operation status.

Setting key
Sets each setting.

UP/DOWN key
Change the set value of the
frequency and parameters.

MODE key
Changes over the mode.

The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.

Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator

Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is Off).

Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitoring mode

*1.

Frequency setting mode*1

Parameter setting mode

The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.

Reading the parameter (Pr. 118)

There are two methods to read the parameter number:
Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys
Press the UP and DOWN keys, and display the parameter number to be read.

E-54

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)

A
Common Items

Method to set each digit of the parameter number

a) Press the SET key to flash the most significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.

B
N:N Network

b) Press the SET key to flash the middle digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys.

C
Parallel Link

c) Press the SET key to flash the least significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.

D
Computer Link

Setting the set value of Pr. 118 to "192"

("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
1. Press the SET key to read the currently set value. Change the set value using the UP and
DOWN keys.

Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Press and hold the SET key for 1.5 seconds to set "192".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Press and hold it

for 1.5 sec.

The set value and parameter number are displayed

alternately.

H
Programming
Communication

3. Press the SET key to display the next parameter.

Remote
Maintenance

The parameter number and set value are displayed

alternately

Change other parameters in the same way as step 3.

For details on parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.3.1.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)

5.4

V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)

5.4.1

Contents of parameter setting

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in any case.
Parameter No.

Parameter item

Set value
00 to 31

Setting contents

Pr117

Communication station number

Up to eight inverters can be connected.

Pr118

Communication speed

Pr119

Stop bit length/data length

Pr120

Parity check presence/absence

Pr123

Waiting time setting

Pr124

CR LF presence/absence
selection

CR: Provided, LF: Not provided

Pr79

Operation mode selection

External operation mode is selected when

power is turned ON.

Pr122

Communication check time interval

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps

192

19200 bps (standard)

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

2: Even parity

9999

9999

Set in communication data

Communication check is stopped.

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Pr121

Parameter item
Number of
communication retries

Set value

Setting contents

9999

Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and

set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.

E-56

Parameter No.

Parameter item

Set value

Pr342

EEPROM write selection

0 or 1

Setting contents
0: EEPROM are written.
1: RAM is written.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)

Parameter setting method (reference)

Common Items

5.4.2

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.

B
N:N Network

Display LED4 digit

Displays the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
Operation status
indication
REV LED flashes during
reverse rotation.
FWD LED flashes during
forward rotation.

C
Parallel Link

Mode key
Changes over the mode.

UP.down key
Change the set value of
the frequency and
parameters.

Set key
Sets each setting.

Computer Link

The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.

Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator

Confirm that the operation is stopped (that both the REV and FWD indicators are Off).

Selecting the parameter setting mode

Inverter
Communication

Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor mode

Frequency setting mode*1

Parameter setting mode

F
The frequency setting mode is displayed only during the PU operation mode.

Reading the parameter (Pr. 118)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*1.

There are two methods to read the parameter number:

Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys
Press the UP and DOWN keys, and display the parameter number to be read.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Method to set each digit of the parameter number

a) Press the SET key to flash the most significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-57

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)

b) Press the SET key to flash the middle digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys.

c) Press the SET key to flash the least significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.

Setting the set value of Pr. 118 to "192"

("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
1. Press the SET key to read the currently set value. Change the set value using the UP and
DOWN keys.

2. Press and hold the SET key for 1.5 seconds to set "192".

Press and hold it

for 1.5 sec.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

3. Press the SET key to display the next parameter

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

E-58

Changing other parameters in the same way as step 3

For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.5 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)

V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)

5.5.1

Contents of parameter setting

Common Items

5.5

The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.

Parameter item

Set value

Communication station number

Pr332

Communication speed

Pr333

Stop bit / Data length

00 to 31

Pr334

Parity check presence/absence

Pr337

Waiting time setting

Pr341

CR, LF presence/absence selection

Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps (standard)

192

19200 bps

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

2
9999

C
Parallel Link

Pr331

2: Even parity
Set in communication data

CR: Provided, LF: Not provided

External operation mode is selected when

power is turned ON.

Computer link

Computer Link

Communication check is stopped.

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation

Pr79

Operation mode selection

Pr340

Link startup mode selection

Pr336

Communication check time interval

Pr335

Parameter item

9999

Set value

Setting contents

9999

Set the value shown on the left during adjustment,

and set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.

Number of communication
retries

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

Parameter No.

Parameter item

Set value

Setting contents

Pr342

EEPROM write selection

0 or 1

0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.

Pr338

Operation command right

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: Outside

Pr339

Speed command write

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: Outside

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.

Inverter
Communication

Parameter No.

5.5.2

N:N Network

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)

Parameter setting method (reference)

H
Programming
Communication

The parameter setting method is the same as that for the V500, F500 and A500 Series (connection to the PU port).
For the parameter setting method, refer to Subsection 5.4.2.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)

5.6

E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)

5.6.1

Contents of parameter setting

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Pr117

Pr118

Parameter item
PU communication station number

PU communication speed

Set value
00 to 31

Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps

192

19200 bps (standard)

384

38400 bps

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

2: Even parity

Pr119

PU communication stop bit length

Pr120

PU communication parity check

Pr123

PU communication waiting time setting

Pr124

PU communication CR/LF presence/

absence selection

CR: Provided, LF: Not provided

Pr79

Operation mode selection

External operation mode is selected when

power is turned ON.

Pr549

Protocol selection

Mitsubishi
inverter
operation) protocol

Pr340

Communication startup mode selection

9999

1 or 10

Set in communication data

(computer

link

1: Network operation mode

10: Network operation mode
Operation mode can be changed
between the PU operation mode and
network operation mode from the
operation panel.

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Pr121

Pr122

Parameter item
Number of PU communication retries

PU communication check time interval

Set value

Setting contents

9999

Set the value shown on the left during

adjustment, and set a value from 1 to 10
during operation.

9999

Set the value shown on the left during

adjustment, and set a proper value in
accordance with the system specification
during operation.

Caution on setting the PU communication check time interval (Pr122)

Description
During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed periodically

E-60

Set value
9999

When communication with the PLC is not executed

0 (Initial Value)

Set the communication time in the following cases

When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop
the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed
When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point which the PLC mode is changed
from RUN to STOP

0.1 to 999.8 sec

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.
Pr37

Parameter item
Speed display*1

Set value

Setting contents

0 or 0.01 0: Frequency display, setting

to 9998 0.01 to 9998: Machine speed at 60Hz.

Built-in potentiometer switching*2

0 or 1

Pr342

Communication EEPROM write selection

0 or 1

0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.

B
N:N Network

Pr146

0: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer

valid
1: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid

Common Items

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.

Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may
not be set or monitored normally.

*2.

Set Pr146 to "1" when changing the frequency from the PLC.

Parallel Link

*1.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-61

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.6.2

5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)

Parameter setting method (reference)

This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Operating status display
Lit or flicker during inverter operation

Monitor
(4-digit LED)
Show the frequency,
parameter number, etc.

Setting dial
Used to change
the frequency setting
and parameter values.

SET key
Determines each setting

MODE key
Used to change each setting mode

The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.

Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator

Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is off).

Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor/frequency
setting mode

Parameter setting mode

The previously read parameter
is displayed.

Setting the parameter Pr. 160 to "0"

(This step is not required if Pr. 160 is already set to "0".)
1. Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 160" is displayed.

2. Press the SET key to read the current set value.

3. Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "0".

E-62

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)

A
Common Items

Press the SET key to determine the set value.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

N:N Network

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.

Setting the parameter Pr. 118 to "192"

("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)

Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 118" is displayed.

Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Press the SET key to read the current set value.

E
Inverter
Communication

Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "192".

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Press the SET key to determine the set value.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.

Changing other parameters in the same way as step 4

For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.6.1.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-63

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)

5.7

F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)

5.7.1

Contents of parameter setting

1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Pr331

Pr332

Parameter item

Set value

RS-485 communication station

00 to 31

RS-485 communication speed

Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.

48

4800 bps

96

9600 bps (standard)

192

19200 bps

384

38400 bps

Pr333

RS-485 communication stop bit length

10

Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit

Pr334

RS-485 communication
selection

2: Even parity

parity

check

Pr337

RS-485 communication waiting time setting

Pr341

RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

CR: Provided, LF: Not provided

Pr79

Operation mode selection

External operation mode is selected when

power is turned ON.

Pr340

Communication startup mode selection

Computer link

Pr336

RS-485 communication check time interval

Pr549

Protocol selection

9999

9999
0

Set in communication data

Communication check is stopped.

Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol

2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.

Parameter item

Pr335

RS-485 communication number

of retries

Set value

Setting contents

9999

Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and

set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.

3. Others (which should be set if necessary)

The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.

E-64

Parameter item

Set value

Setting contents

Pr342

Communication EEPROM write selection

0 or 1

0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.

Pr338

Communication operation command source

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: Outside

Pr339

Communication operation command source

0 or 1

0: PLC
1: Outside

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)

Parameter setting method (reference)

Common Items

5.7.2

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.

Rotation direction indicator

FWD: Lit during forward rotation
REV: Lit during reverse rotation

Setting dial
Used to change the
frequency setting and
parameter values.

C
Parallel Link

MODE key
Changes over the mode.

SET key
Sets each setting.

The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.

Computer Link

Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator

Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is off).

Selecting the parameter setting mode

Inverter
Communication

Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor/frequency
setting mode

Parameter setting mode

The previously read parameter
is displayed.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

B
N:N Network

Operation mode indicator

NET: Lit to indicate network
operation mode

Monitor (4-digit LED)

shows the frequency,
parameter number, etc.

Setting the parameter Pr. 160 to "0"

(This step is not required if Pr. 160 is already set to "0".)

1. Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 160" is displayed.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Press the SET key to read the current set value.

Programming
Communication

3. Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "0".

Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-65

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in Inverter

Inverter Communication

5.8 Cautions on Setting

Press the SET key to determine the set value.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.

Setting the parameter Pr. 332 to "192"

("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 332" is displayed.

Press the SET key to read the current set value.

Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "192".

Press the SET key to determine the set value.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.

The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.

5
5.8

Change other parameters in the same way as step 4

For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.7.1.

Cautions on Setting
1. Setting of the "communication check time interval"
Description
During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed periodically
When communication with the PLC is not executed
Set the communication time in the following cases:
When it is necessary to monitor the absence of communication for a certain time and stop
the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed
When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point which the PLC mode is changed from
RUN to STOP

E-66

Set value
Value shown in table
0

0.1 to 999.8 sec

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Inverter Communication

6.1 Parameter Assigning Method

Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the communication setting method for inverter communication.
Set non-protocol communication for inverter communication.

6.1

Parameter Assigning Method

Use parameters for communication setting in the FX PLC.

Register the communication setting in the sequence programming software parameters, and transfer the
parameters to the PLC.

2. Setting flow

Setting window

Parameter area
Parameter
method

D
Computer Link

PLC memory

Parallel Link

1. Parameter assigning method

Transferred
when
power is
turned ON

Common Items

6.

Inverter communication using

ch1
D8120 Communication format

Program area

Inverter
Communication

In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC

Inverter communication using
ch2
D8420 Communication format

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Inverter Communication

6.2

6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 6.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

6.2.1

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that GX Works2 is already
started up.

Opening the parameter setting window

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab in the FX Parameter window.

E-68

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Inverter Communication

A
Common Items

6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Set the parameters as shown below:

B
N:N Network

[1]
[2]
[3]

[5]

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

[4]

[3] Set "Protocol" to "Non-procedural", "Data Length" to "7Bit", "Parity" to "Even", and "Stop Bit" to
"1Bit".
[4] Set "Transmission Speed" to either "4800", "9600", "19200" or "38400*1", and make sure that
the set value here is the same as the set value in the inverters.
This transmission speed is supported only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCS.

Click [End].

Writing parameters and program to the PLC

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

[5] Ignore these items.

*1.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

[2] Check the "Operate Communication Setting" box.

Inverter
Communication

[1] Set the channel to be used. (This parameter can be set only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs.)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-69

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

6.3

6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN. Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 6.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

6.3.1

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

Displaying serial setting (parameter)

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter setting.
1. When there are no parameter settings
There are no communication settings. Click the [Yes] button.

E-70

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Inverter Communication

6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

A
Common Items

2. When there are already parameter settings

The existing communication setting contents are displayed.

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Execute the communication setting as shown below.

E
Inverter
Communication

[1]

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

[2]
[3]

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

[3] Ignore these items.

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

I
Remote
Maintenance

[2] Set "Transfer speed [bps]" to either "4800", "9600" or "19200", and make sure that the set value
here is the same as the set value in the inverters.

Programming
Communication

[1] Set "Protocol" to "RS instruction", "Data bits" to "7", "Parity" to "Even", and "Stop bits" to "1".

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

E-71

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

7.

7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

This chapter explains how to create programs which change inverter parameters and give operation
commands to inverters.
As explanation, a program example is shown for each applied instruction.

7.1

Checking Contents of Related Devices

The tables below show the devices used in inverter communication in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs.

1. Bit devices
Device No.

Name

Description

R/W

M8029

Turns ON when execution of EXTR instruction is completed, and remains

Instruction execution ON for 1 scan.
complete
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if M8156
(communication error or parameter error) turns ON.

M8104

Extension ROM
cassette check

Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.

Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction.

M8154

Unused

M8155

Communication port
busy

M8156

Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
or parameter error

M8157

Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error occurs.
latch*1

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

*1.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

2. Word devices
Device No.

Name

Description

D8104

Extension ROM
cassette type code

Stores the extension ROM cassette type code (value: K1).

D8105

Extension ROM
cassette version

Stores the extension ROM cassette version.

(value: K100 = Ver. 1.00).

D8154

Inverter response
waiting time

Sets the inverter response waiting time.

D8155

Step number of
instruction using
communication port

Stores the step number of the EXTR instruction using the communication
port.

D8156

Error code*1

Stores an error code when a communication error is caused by an EXTR

instruction.

D8157

Error occurrence
step number latch*1

Stores the instruction step number in which a communication error has

occurred. (Stores K-1 when no error has occurred.)

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

E-72

R/W

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

R/W

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

7.2.1

Inverter communication types (EXTR K10 to K13)

Common Items

7.2

S1

S2

FNC180 Function Inverter station

number
EXTR
number

S3

Inverter
instruction code

Read/
Write

Instruction

7.2.2

Function

Control direction

Detailed
explanation

K10

Monitors inverter operations

PLC inverter

7.3

K11

Controls inverter operations

PLC inverter

7.4

K12

Reads inverter parameters

PLC inverter

7.5

K13

Writes inverter parameters

PLC inverter

7.6

Function and operation

2. Simultaneous driving of EXTR instructions and communication processing

RUN
monitor

FNC180
EXTR

M8155
ONOFF
M8155
ONOFF

(2)
M8155
ONOFF

FNC180
EXTR

(3)

H
Programming
Communication

FNC180
EXTR

(1)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1) Driving instructions at the same time

- Two or more EXTR functions (K10 to K13) can be programmed, and driven at the same time.
- When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next EXTR
instruction in the program is executed after the current communication with an inverter is finished.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

At the rising edge (OFFON) of the drive condition, the PLC starts communication with an inverter.
Even if the drive condition turns OFF during communication with an inverter, the PLC executes
communication until the end.
When the drive condition is always ON, the PLC executes communication repeatedly.

Inverter
Communication

1. Communication start timing

M8000

D
Computer Link

EXTR(FNC180)

Function
number (S)

Read value storage

destination or value written
to inverter

Parallel Link

Only EXTR (16-bit type) is applicable.

DEXTR (32-bit type), EXTRP (pulse type)
and DEXTRP (32-bit pulse type) are not
applicable.

B
N:N Network

An FX2N and FX2NC PLC and inverter execute communication using EXTR (FNC180) instruction.
EXTR instruction can be described in four types of methods, from "EXTR K10" to "EXTR K13", depending on
the data communication direction and parameter writing/reading direction.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-73

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

- The PLC waits for 15 ms after acquiring the communication port, and then starts communication using
EXTR instructions. Even if the drive condition turns ON, the PLC does not start execution of the EXTR
instruction until the communication port busy flag M8155 turns OFF from ON if M8155 was set to ON by
another EXTR instruction.
The PLC frees the communication port, and then executes EXTR instructions driven in the next step and
so on.
M0

M1

FNC180
EXTR

......[1]

FNC180
EXTR

......[2]

M0
*1

*2

EXTR
instruction [1]
(Communicating)

15ms

15ms

15ms

M1
*2
EXTR
instruction [2]
(Communicating)

15ms
M8155

EXTR
instruction [1]

15ms

EXTR
instruction [2]

EXTR
instruction [1]

EXTR
instruction [2]

*3

EXTR
instruction [1]

*3

*1.

The PLC does not execute the instruction even if M8155 is turned OFF because the drive contact is
OFF.

*2.

When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next EXTR
instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed.

*3.

M8155 remains OFF until the next EXTR instruction is driven after execution of the current EXTR
instruction is completed.

2) Cautions on programming
When the drive contact for another EXTR instruction is driven by a pulse signal during communication
with an inverter, the communication is not executed.
When communicating with inverters for two or more items, let the drive contact for the EXTR instruction
remain ON until sending is completed. After communication with all inverters is completed, set the drive
contact to OFF using the instruction execution complete flag M8029.
X001

SET

M0

M0

Communication is
executed

FNC180
EXTR
M8029

Command is latched

RST

M0

Command is reset

Instruction execution
complete

3. Communication complete flag (M8029)

When communication with an inverter is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON,
and remains ON for 1 scan.
For details on using M8029 method, refer to program examples shown below.

E-74

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

Instruction completion and error flag operation

When two or more EXTR instructions are programmed, the following flags turn ON or OFF according to the
execution result of each EXTR instruction.
For acquiring the result of each EXTR instruction, make sure to provide these flags just below each EXTR
instruction.
M8029

Description
Instruction execution complete

M8156

Communication error or parameter error

D8156

Error code

1. Operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag)

M0 (OFF)

M8029 : OFF

[2] EXTR instruction is driven.

FNC180
EXTR

M8029 : ON

[3] EXTR instruction is not driven.

FNC180
EXTR

Inverter
Communication

M2 (OFF)

Operation of
instruction execution
complete flag

Computer Link

M1 (ON)

FNC180
EXTR

Parallel Link

M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) operates as shown below.

In the program below, M0 and M2 turn OFF and M1 turn ON when communication is completed.
[1] EXTR instruction is not driven.

M8029 : OFF

M8156 (error flag) and D8156 (error code) operate as shown below.
In the program below, a communication error occurs in [1] and [3], and communication is completed normally
in [2].

M8000

Error code
status

D8156: K1
Error code is
stored

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RUN
monitor

FNC180
EXTR

Operation of
communication
error flag
M8156 : ON

[2] Normal communication

M8156 : OFF

D8156: K1
Error code is not
changed

M8156 : ON

D8156: K268
Error code is
stored

Programming
Communication

FNC180
EXTR
[3] Communication error (data range error)
FNC180
EXTR

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Operations of M8156 (error flag) and D8156 (error code)

[1] Communication error (no response from inverter)

B
N:N Network

Device number

Common Items

7.2.3

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-75

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

3. Program examples
X000

SET

M0

SET

M50

Start command
M0

FNC180
EXTR
M8156
Communication error
M8029
Instruction
execution
complete

FNC 12
MOV

X001

D8156

D50

RST

M0

SET

M1

SET

M51

M50
Error in the 1st
instruction
D50

Start command
M1

FNC180
EXTR
M8156
Communication error
M8029
Instruction
execution
complete

E-76

M51
Error in the 2nd
instruction

FNC 12
MOV

D8156

D51

RST

M1

D51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

Cautions on programming

Common Items

7.2.4

7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

1. Using the EXTR instruction together with another instruction

The EXTR instruction cannot be used together with the RS instruction.

The EXTR instruction cannot be used together with a EXTR K0 instruction.

Make sure to let the state relay remain ON until communication with an inverter is completed. If the state relay
is set to OFF during communication, the EXTR instruction is stopped in the middle of execution, and another
EXTR instruction cannot be started. Program a sequence while observing the following cautions

When resetting many state relays all at once using ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, etc., make sure that the
M8155 (communication port busy) OFF condition is established.
X000

M0

S0

S999

RST

M0

Reset input
M0

M8155
Communication
port busy

FNC 40
ZRST

State relays S0 to S999

are reset all at once.

E
Inverter
Communication

3. Using the EXTR instruction in a program flow

The EXTR instruction cannot be used in the following program flows
Program flow disabling the EXTR instruction
Between FOR and NEXT instructions
Between P and SRET instructions
Between I and IRET instructions

Remarks

Conditional jump

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Between CJ and P instructions

D
Computer Link

SET

C
Parallel Link

Add M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) ON condition to the state relay transfer condition, and
provide such an interlock that the state relay ON/OFF status does not change during communication with
an inverter.
If the state changes during communication, communication may not be performed normally.

N:N Network

2. When programming the EXTR instruction in a state of a STL instruction

Repeat
Subroutine
Interrupt routine

4. Caution on write during RUN

5. When using the E500 Series

Parameters Nos. 922 and 923 in the E500 Series cannot be used in inverter communication.

H
Programming
Communication

2) Condition in which the EXTR instruction cannot be written

The EXTR instruction cannot be written during RUN.
If the EXTR instruction is written during RUN while communication or if the EXTR instruction is deleted in
RUN mode, communication may be disabled after that. (In such a case, set the PLC to STOP, and then to
RUN mode again to initialize the status.)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1) Condition in which the EXTR instruction can be written

While the PLC is in the STOP status, the EXTR instruction can be written during RUN.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-77

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

7.3 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10]

Inverter Communication

7.3

Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10]

EXTR K10 instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to the PLC.

7.3.1

Function and operation

When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in inverters is specified in EXTR instruction,
a value in the inverter is read to D .

1. Applicable devices
Bit device
Operand
type

Word device

System/User
X

System/
User

Digit specification

Others

S KnX KnY KnM KnS

Index
V

Constant Pointer

Modification

S
S1
S2
D

2. Program example
S
M0

S1

FNC180
EXTR

K10
K6
Command
contact
Function number: K10
Inverter station number: 0 to 31

7.3.2

S2

H6F

D100
Read value storage destination
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)

Inverter instruction codes

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Applicable inverter

S2

Inverter instruction
code (hexadecimal)
H7B

E-78

Read contents

A500

E500

S500

Operation mode

H6F

Output frequency [speed]

H70

Output current

H71

Output voltage

H72

Special monitor

H73

Special monitor selection No.

H74

Alarm definition

H75

Alarm definition

H76

Alarm definition

H77

Alarm definition

H7A

Inverter status monitor

H6E

Set frequency read (EEPROM)

H6D

Set frequency read (RAM)

H7F

Link parameter expansion setting

H6C

Second parameter changing

These codes cannot be specified in S2 in

EXTR K10 instruction.
They are automatically processed when a
"second parameter specification code" is
specified in EXTR K12 instruction.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

7.4 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]

Inverter Communication

Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]

Common Items

7.4

This instruction writes a control value required to operate an inverter from the PLC to the inverter.

7.4.1

Function and operation

1. Applicable devices
Bit device
System/User
X

System/
User

Digit specification

Others

S KnX KnY KnM KnS

Index
V

Constant Pointer

Modification

S
S1

S2

Computer Link

S3

2. Program example
S
M0

K11

K6

S2

S3

HFA

K2M50

Inverter
Communication

FNC180
EXTR

S1

Command
contact
Function number: K11
Inverter station number: 0 to 31

7.4.2

Value written to inverter

Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)

Inverter instruction codes

Applicable inverter

S2

Read contents

Inverter instruction
code (hexadecimal)

Operation mode

HF3

Special monitor selection No.

HFA

Run command

HEE

Set frequency write (EEPROM)

HED

Set frequency write (RAM)

S500

Inverter reset

HF4

Alarm definition batch clear

HFC

Parameter all clear

HFC

User clear

I
Remote
Maintenance

The instruction code "HFD (inverter reset)" does not request response from the inverter. Accordingly,
even if inverter reset is executed to a station number in which an inverter is not connected, error does
not occur.
It takes about 2.2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset.

Programming
Communication

HFD

*1

E500

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

HFB

A500

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.

*1.

C
Parallel Link

Operand
type

Word device

N:N Network

When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in inverters is specified in EXTR instruction,
a value specified in S3 is written to the specified item in the inverter.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-79

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

7.5 Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12]

Inverter Communication

7.5

Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12]

This instruction reads a parameter of an inverter to the PLC.

7.5.1

Function and operation

When a parameter number of an inverter is specified in EXTR instruction, the value of the parameter in the
inverter is read to D .

1. Applicable devices
Bit device
Operand
type

Word device

System/User
X

System/
User

Digit specification

Others

S KnX KnY KnM KnS

Index
V

Constant Pointer

Modification

S
S1
S2
D

2. Program example
S
M0

S1

FNC180
EXTR

K12
K6
Command
contact
Function number: K12
Inverter station number: 0 to 31

7.5.2

S2
K7

D
D150
Read value storage destination
Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Inverter parameter number

Refer to related data shown later.

7.5.3

Program example of "second parameter specification code"

In the program example shown below, the parameter number 201 (frequency: 201, time: 1201, motor rotation
direction: 2201) is read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6.
Read devices: D100 = Motor rotation direction, D101 = Frequency, D102 = Time
X001
SET
Read
command
M0
Drive
contact

S
FNC180
EXTR

K12

S1
K6

S2
K2201

M0
S3
D100

Read value storage destination

Function number
Inverter station number:
0 to 31

Inverter parameter number (decimal)

FNC180
EXTR

K12

K6

K201

D101

FNC180
EXTR

K12

K6

K1201

D102

RST

E-80

FrequencyD101

TimeD102
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.

M8029
Execution complete flag

Motor rotation directionD100

M0

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

7.6 Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13]

Inverter Communication

Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13]

Common Items

7.6

This instruction writes a value from the PLC to a parameter in an inverter.

7.6.1

Function and operation

B
is written to the

1. Applicable devices
Bit device
System/User
X

System/
User

Digit specification

Others

S KnX KnY KnM KnS

Index
V

Constant Pointer

Modification

S
S1

S2

Computer Link

S3

2. Program example
S
M0

K13

K6

S2
K7

S3

D160

Inverter
Communication

FNC180
EXTR

S1

Command
contact
Function number: K13
Inverter station number: 0 to 31

7.6.2

Value written to inverter

Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Inverter parameter number

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Refer to related data shown later.

7.6.3

Program example of "second parameter specification code"

X001
SET
Write
command
FNC180
EXTR

K13

S1
K6

S2
K2201

Function
number: K13
Inverter station number:
0 to 31

S3

Motor rotation direction: Forward

H1

Programming
Communication

Drive
contact

M0

Value written to inverter

Inverter parameter number (decimal)

K13

K6

K201

H14

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K6

K1201

H100

Frequency: 20Hz

Remote
Maintenance

FNC180
EXTR

Time: 1:00
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.

M8029
RST

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

In the program example shown below, data is written from the PLC to parameter number 201 (frequency:
201, time: 1201, motor rotation direction: 2201) in the A500 inverter.

M0

C
Parallel Link

Operand
type

Word device

N:N Network

When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in EXTR instruction, the value of S3

specified item in the inverter.

Apx.A

M0

Discontinued
models

Execution complete flag

E-81

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

7.7

7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes

Second Parameter Specification Codes

When handling the following parameters in computer link operation, it is necessary to select second
parameters.
In EXTR K12 and EXTR K13 instructions, when a value shown in the tables below is set to S2 , the
extension parameter and second parameter are automatically overwritten, and the parameter values are then
read or written.

7.7.1

S500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers C2 to C7
Second parameter specification code

Parameter
No.

7.7.2

Name

[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for

parameter No. (decimal)]

C2

Frequency setting voltage bias frequency

902

C3

Frequency setting voltage bias

1902

C4

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

C5

Frequency setting current bias frequency

904

C6

Frequency setting current bias

1904

C7

Frequency setting current gain

905

E500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.

E-82

Name

[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for

parameter No. (decimal)]
Offset/Gain
(H00)

Analog
(H01)

Terminal analog
value (H02)

902

Frequency setting voltage bias

902

1902

2902

903

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

1903

2903

904

Frequency setting current bias

904

1904

2904

905

Frequency setting current gain

905

1905

2905

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

A500 Series

Common Items

7.7.3

7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 201 to 230

Second parameter specification code
Name

Operation frequency
read/write

Time read/write

Rotation direction
write/read

203

Program set 1

203

1203

2203

204

Program set 1

204

1204

2204

205

Program set 1

205

1205

2205

206

Program set 1

206

1206

2206

207

Program set 1

207

1207

2207

208

Program set 1

208

1208

2208

209

Program set 1

209

1209

2209

210

Program set 1

210

1210

2210

211

Program set 2

211

1211

2211

212

Program set 2

212

1212

2212

213

Program set 2

213

1213

2213

214

Program set 2

214

1214

2214

215

Program set 2

215

1215

2215

216

Program set 2

216

1216

2216

217

Program set 2

217

1217

2217

218

Program set 2

218

1218

2218

219

Program set 2

219

1219

2219

220

Program set 2

220

1220

2220

221

Program set 3

221

1221

2221

222

Program set 3

222

1222

2222

223

Program set 3

223

1223

2223

224

Program set 3

224

1224

2224

225

Program set 3

225

1225

2225

226

Program set 3

226

1226

2226

227

Program set 3

227

1227

2227

228

Program set 3

228

1228

2228

229

Program set 3

229

1229

2229

230

Program set 3

230

1230

2230

2. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905

Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.

Name

[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for

parameter No. (decimal)]
Analog
(H01)

Terminal analog
value (H02)

902

Frequency setting voltage bias

902

1902

2902

903

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

1903

2903

904

Frequency setting current bias

904

1904

2904

905

Frequency setting current gain

905

1905

2905

I
Remote
Maintenance

Offset/Gain
(H00)

Programming
Communication

2202

Computer Link

2201

1202

Parallel Link

1201

202

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

201

Program set 1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Program set 1

202

Inverter
Communication

201

N:N Network

Parameter
No.

[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for

parameter No. (decimal)]

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-83

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.

8.1 Practical Example 1

Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

This chapter explains practical programs for inverter communication.

8.1

Practical Example 1
This fundamental program example monitors operations of an inverter, controls operations of an inverter and
writes parameters to an inverter.

8.1.1

System configuration example

An FX PLC is connected to an inverter.
FX2N, FX2NC

Inverter

System memory
Terminal resistor
Distributor

8.1.2

Contents of operation
As an example of operation control, an inverter can be stopped (X000), rotated forward (X001) and rotated
reverse (X002).
By changing the contents of D10, the speed can be changed.
The contents of D10 can be changed from a sequence program or display unit.

E-84

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

Program example

Common Items

8.1.3

8.1 Practical Example 1

1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode

M8002

SET

M10

N:N Network

Initial pulse

The write
instruction
is driven

M10

FNC180
EXTR

Driving of
write
instruction

K11

K0

H0FD

H9696

The inverter is reset

C
K11

K0

H0FB

H0*1

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K1

K12000

The maximum frequency

is set to "120 Hz"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K2

K500

The minimum frequency

is set to "5 Hz"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K7

K10

The acceleration time

is set to "1 s"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K8

K10

The deceleration time

is set to "1 s"

Parallel Link

FNC180
EXTR

Computer link
operation is specified

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
RST

Instruction execute
complete

*1.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8029

M10
The write
instruction
is driven

When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Changing the speed using a sequence program

M8000

FNC 12 K6000
MOV P

RUN
monitor

D10

M17

FNC 12 K4000
MOV P

Command for
switching to speed 1

The operation speed is

written as "40 Hz"

Operation
speed

M18

FNC 12 K2000
MOV P

D10

The operation speed is

written as "20 Hz"

Remote
Maintenance

Command for
switching to speed 2
FNC180
EXTR

D10

H
Programming
Communication

Operation
speed

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup

Operation
speed
K11

K0

H0ED

D10
Operation
speed

The preset frequency

is written to the
inverter

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-85

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.1 Practical Example 1

3. Controlling operations of an inverter

X000

SET

Operation stop
command input
X001

M15

H0FA is set to "00H"

Operation
stop

X000

RST

Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command
input
X002

M15

Operation stop is reset

by input X001 or X002

Operation
stop

Reverse rotation
command input
M15
Operation
stop

X001

X002

M21

Forward
Reverse rotation
rotation
command input
command
input
X002
X001

Forward rotation
command
M22

Reverse
Forward rotation
rotation
command input
command
input
M8000
RUN monitor

E-86

FNC180
EXTR

b1 of H0FA is set to ON

b2 of H0FA is set to ON

Reverse rotation
command
K11

K0

H0FA

K2M20

Operation command is written

M27 to M20H0FA

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.1 Practical Example 1

M8000

FNC180
EXTR

RUN
monitor

K10

K0

H07A

K2M100

Common Items

4. Monitoring operations of an inverter

Inverter status is read

H7AM107 to M100

Inverter
running

N:N Network

M100

Y000

Inverter
running

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M101

Y001

Forward
rotation

M102

Parallel Link

Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y002

Reverse
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M103
Up to
frequency

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M104

Contents of status
(according to
necessity)

Computer Link

Y003

Y004

Overload
is applied

Indicator
lamp, etc.

Inverter
Communication

M106

Y006

Frequency
is detected

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M107

Y007

Alarm
occurrence
FNC180
EXTR

K10

K0

H06F

D50

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Indicator
lamp, etc.
Output frequency
monitor

Frequency
monitor
value

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

END

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-87

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.2

8.2 Practical Example 2

Practical Example 2
This program executes the same control as practical example 1 shown above.

8.2.1

System configuration example

An FX PLC is connected to an inverter.
FX2N, FX2NC

Inverter

System memory
Terminal resistor
Distributor

8.2.2

Contents of operation
The differences from practical example 1 are that the inverter status is not read while data is written to an
inverter, and that the contents to be written are detected and written to an inverter only when the contents to
be written are changed.
Because communication between the PLC and the inverter is minimum in this program, the communication
time is reduced and the response time is improved.

E-88

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

Program example

Common Items

8.2.3

8.2 Practical Example 2

1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode

M8002

SET

M10

N:N Network

Initial pulse

The write
instruction
is driven
M10

FNC180
EXTR

Driving of
write
instruction

K11

K0

H0FD

H9696

The inverter is reset

C
K11

K0

H0FB

H0*1

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K1

K12000

The maximum
frequency is set to
"120Hz"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K2

K500

The minimum
frequency is set to
"5Hz"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K7

K10

The acceleration time

is set to "1s"

FNC180
EXTR

K13

K0

K8

K10

The deceleration time

is set to "1s"

Parallel Link

FNC180
EXTR

Computer link
operation is specified

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Instruction execute
complete

*1.

RST

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8029

M10
The write
instruction
is driven

When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-89

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.2 Practical Example 2

2. Changing the speed using a sequence program

M8000

FNC 12 K6000
MOVP

RUN
monitor

Operation
speed
M17

FNC 12 K4000
MOVP

Command for
switching to speed 1

FNC 12 K2000
MOVP

Command for
switching to speed 2

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse

D10

D10

D80

SET

Operation Operation speed is

speed
withdrawn
M11

FNC180
EXTR

The write
instruction
is driven

The operation speed is

written as "20 Hz"

D80

Operation Operation
speed
speed is
withdrawn
D10

The operation speed is

written as "40 Hz"

Operation
speed

M8002

FNC228
LD<>

D10

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup

Operation
speed

M18

K11

M11

Instruction execute
complete

Change in the
operation speed
(D10) is
detected

The write
instruction
is driven
K0

H0ED

D10
Operation
speed

M8029

E-90

D10

RST

M11
The write
instruction
is driven

The preset frequency is

written to the inverter

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.2 Practical Example 2

X000

SET

M15

Operation stop
command input

H0FA is set to "00H"

Operation
stop

X000

RST

M15

Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command
input
X002

N:N Network

X001

Common Items

3. Controlling operations of an inverter

Operation stop is reset

by input X001 or X002

Operation
stop

X001

X002

Operation
stop

Forward
rotation
command
input
X002

Reverse
rotation
command
input
X001

Forward
rotation
command

Forward
rotation
command
input

Reverse
rotation
command

Reverse
rotation
command
input

M8002

M21

M22

FNC 12
K2M20
MOV

Initial pulse

SET

Operation
command is
withdrawn

M8029
Instruction execute
complete

M12
Driving of
write
instruction

FNC180
EXTR

Driving of
write
instruction

Changes in the
operation commands
(M28 to M20) are
detected

K11

K0

H0FA

K2M20

RST

M12

F
Operation commands
are written
M27 to M20H0FA

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M12

b2 of H0FA is set to ON

Inverter
Communication

D81

D81

Operation
command is
withdrawn

FNC228
LD<> K2M20

b1 of H0FA is set to ON

Computer Link

M15

Parallel Link

Reverse rotation
command input

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Driving of
write
instruction

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-91

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)

Inverter Communication

8.2 Practical Example 2

4. Monitoring operations of an inverter

M10

M11

M12

MC

N0

M70

While data is not

written to an inverter,
the status is read.

K0

H07A

K2M100

Inverter status is read.

H07AM107 to M100

Driving of Driving of Driving of

write
write
write
instruction instruction instruction
N0

M70

M8000

FNC180
EXTR

RUN
monitor

K10

Inverter
running
M100

Y000

Inverter
running

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M101

Y001

Forward
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M102

Y002

Reverse
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M103

Y003

Up to
frequency

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M104

Y004

Overload
is applied

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M106

Y006

Frequency
is detected

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M107

Y007

Alarm
occurrence

Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC180
EXTR

K10

K0

H06F

D50
Frequency
monitor
value

MCR

N0
END

E-92

Contents of status
(according to necessity)

Output frequency monitor

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.1 Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.1

Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

1. Inverter communication instructions

Function

FX2N,FX2NC

FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC

EXTR(K10)

IVCK

Controlling operation of an inverter

EXTR(K11)

IVDR

Reading parameters from an inverter

EXTR(K12)

IVRD

Writing parameters to an inverter

EXTR(K13)

IVWR

Writing parameters to an inverter all at once

IVBWR*1

Controls operations and monitors operations of an inverter

with a single command

IVMC

Computer Link

Monitoring operation of an inverter

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Inverter
Communication

*1.

2. Related devices
1) Bit devices
Function

FX2N,FX2NC

FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC
M8029

M8029

Communication error
(shared by all communication)

M8063*2

M8063*5

M8438*5

M8155

M8151

M8156

Inverter communication error

M8156

M8152*3

M8157*3

Inverter communication error latch*3

M8157

M8153

M8158

M8154*3

M8159*3

IVBWR instruction error*4

Function

FX2N,FX2NC

ch2

D8063

D8063*6

D8438*6

Response wait time of inverter communication

D8154

D8150*6

D8155*6

Step number of instruction during inverter communication

D8155

D8151

D8156

Inverter communication error code*7

D8156

D8152

D8157

D8157

D8153

D8158

IVBWR instruction error parameter

Operation mode display

step*7

number*7*8

D8154

D8159

D8419

D8439

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

Error code (shared by all communication)

Inverter communication error occurrence

*6.
*7.
*8.

FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC

Programming
Communication

*2. In the FX2N and FX2NC PLCs, M8063 does not turn ON when an inverter communication error occurs.
*3. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*4. The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*5. Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
2) Word devices

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

ch2

M8029

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

Instruction execution complete

Inverter communicating

C
Parallel Link

Instruction devices used in inverter communication are different between FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
PLCs and FX2N, FX2NC PLCs.
When using a program for FX2N, FX2NC PLCs in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs, change the devices
according to the tables below.

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains how to create programs which change parameters of inverters and give operation
commands to inverters.
As explanation, a program example is shown for each applied instruction.

Common Items

9.

E-93

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.2

9.2 Contents of Related Devices

Contents of Related Devices

The tables below show devices used for inverter communication in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
PLCs.

1. Bit devices
Device No.

Description

R/W

Turns ON when execution of inverter communication

instruction is completed, and remains ON for 1 scan.
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is
completed if inverter communication error flag
(M8152 or M8157) turns ON.

M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*1

Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of

communication.

M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating

Remains ON while inverter communication is being

executed.

M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*2

Turns ON when an error occurs during

communication with an inverter.

M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*2

Turns ON when an error occurs during

communication with an inverter.

M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*2, *3

Turns ON when an error is caused by IVBWR

instruction.

ch1

Name

ch2

M8029

Instruction execution complete

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

*1.

Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.

*2.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

*3.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2. Word devices
Device No.
ch1

Name

ch2

Description

D8063 D8438 Error code for serial communication*4 Stores a communication error code.

D8150 D8155

Inverter communication response

waiting time*4

D8151 D8156

Step number of instruction executing Stores the step number of an instruction during
inverter communication
inverter communication.

D8152 D8157

Error code for inverter

communication*5

Stores an inverter communication error code.

Step where inverter communication

Latches a step number in which inverter

error occurred*5

communication error has occurred.*7

Error parameter number of IVBWR

instruction*5*6

Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR

instruction error has occurred.

Stores the communication type being used.

D8153 D8158
D8154 D8159

D8419 D8439 Operation mode display

Sets the response wait time of inverter

communication.

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

E-94

R/W

*4.

Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.

*5.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

*6.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*7.

Updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second error occurrence or later.

R/W

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

9.3.1

Inverter communication types (IVCK to IVMC)

Common Items

9.3

S1
Inverter
communication
instruction

Inverter
station
number

S2
Inverter
instruction
code

S3

Read/
Write

Used
channel

Monitors operations of an inverter.

PLC inverter

9.4

IVDR(FNC271)

Controls operations of an inverter.

PLC inverter

9.5

IVRD(FNC272)

Reads a parameter from an inverter.

PLC inverter

9.6

Writes a parameter to an inverter.

PLC inverter

9.7

IVBWR(FNC274)

Writes parameters to an inverter all at once.

PLC inverter

9.8

IVMC(FNC275)

Controls operations and monitors operations of an

inverter with a single command

PLC inverter

9.9

IVCK(FNC270)

IVWR(FNC273)
*1

*1.

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

At the rising edge (OFFON) of the drive condition, the PLC starts communication with an inverter.
Even if the drive condition turns OFF during communication with an inverter, the PLC executes
communication until the last instruction.
When the drive condition is always ON, the PLC executes communication repeatedly.

FNC273
IVWR

(1)

FNC271
IVDR

(2)

I
Remote
Maintenance

M8151
ONOFF

M8151
ONOFF

Apx.A

(3)

Discontinued
models

FNC270
IVCK

H
Programming
Communication

1) Driving instructions at the same time

- Two or more IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275) instructions can be programmed, and driven at the
same time.
- When two or more instructions are driven at the same time in the channel used for communication, the
latter inverter communication instruction in the program is executed after the current communication
with the inverter has finished.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Simultaneous driving of instructions and communication processing

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Communication start timing

RUN
monitor

Function and operation

M8000

D
Computer Link

Detailed
explanation

Function

Inverter
Communication

Control direction

Instruction

9.3.2

K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Read value storage destination
or value written to inverter

Parallel Link

Only 16-bit type is applicable.

DIVCK (32-bit type), IVCKP
(pulse operation type) and
DIVCKP (32-bit pulse operation
type) are not applicable.

B
N:N Network

Execute inverter communication using the following applied instructions.

There are six types of applied instructions, "IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275)", depending on the data
communication direction and parameter reading/writing direction.

E-95

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

- The PLC waits for 15 ms after acquiring the communication port, and then starts communication using
inverter communication instructions. Even if the drive condition turns ON, the PLC does not start
execution of an inverter communication instruction until the communication port busy flag M8151 turns
OFF from ON, if M8151 is already set to ON by another inverter communication instruction.
The PLC frees the communication port, and then executes inverter communication instructions driven in
the next step and so on.
M0

FNC273
IVWR

M1

FNC270
IVCK

M0
*2

*1
IVWR
instruction
(Communicating)

15ms

15ms

15ms

M1
*2
IVCK
instruction
(Communicating)

15ms
M8151

IVWR

15ms
IVCK

IVWR

IVCK
*3

IVWR
*3

*1.

The PLC does not execute the instruction even if M8151 is turned OFF because the drive contact is
OFF.

*2.

When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next inverter
communication instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed.

*3.

M8151 remains OFF until the next inverter communication instruction is driven after execution of the
current inverter communication instruction is completed.

2) Cautions on programming
When communicating with inverters for two or more items, let the drive contact for inverter
communication instruction remain ON until sending is completed. After communication with all inverters is
completed, set the drive contact to OFF using the instruction execution complete flag M8029.
X001

SET

M0

M0

FNC274
IVCK
M8029
Instruction execution
complete

Command is
latched
Communication is
executed

RST

M0

Command is
reset

3. Communication complete flag (M8029)

When communication with an inverter is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON,
and remains ON for 1 scan.
For the M8029 use method, refer to program examples shown below.

E-96

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

Instruction completion and error flag operation

When two or more inverter communication instructions are programmed, the following flags turn ON or OFF
according to the execution result of each inverter communication instruction.
To acquire the result of each inverter communication instruction, make sure to provide these flags just below
each inverter communication instruction.

ch1

Device
number

Description

ch2

M8029

ch1
Instruction execution complete

Description

ch2

D8063 D8438 Serial communication error code

M8063 M8438 Serial communication error

D8152 D8157 Inverter communication error code

M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error

D8153 D8158 Step in which inverter communication error occurred

Inverter communication error

latch

D8154 D8159 IVBWR error parameter number*1

M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1

*1.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

The operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) represents the state in which the IVDR
instruction is completed while M0, M2 are off and M1 is ON.

M0 (OFF)

FNC273
IVWR

M8029 : OFF

M8029 : ON

Inverter
Communication

Operation of
instruction execution
complete flag

[2] IVDR instruction is driven

M1 (ON)

FNC271
IVDR

FNC270
IVCK

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

[3] IVCK instruction is not driven

M2 (OFF)

M8029 : OFF

2. Processing of communication errors

Bit device
ch1

ch2

Word device
ch1

ch2

M8063 M8438 M8152 M8157 M8153

M8159

ch1

ch2

Description

D8063 D8438

ON

OFF

OFF

6301

3801

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

ON

ON

ON
(only at first time)

6320

3820

Any inverter communication error other than

those above

I
Remote
Maintenance

When inverter communication error flag turns ON, the step number is stored in the inverter communication
error occurrence step device (D8153 or D8158).
Create the program shown below for each corresponding instruction to check the inverter communication
error code (stored in D8152 or D8157).

Programming
Communication

ch2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The following two types of processing are executed for communication errors.
The parity error/overrun error/framing error flags (shown in the upper column) turns ON when an error occurs
in any type of communication.
The error flag shown in the lower column turns ON when an error occurs during communication with an
inverter.
ch1

Computer Link

1. Operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag)

[1] IVWR instruction is not driven

C
Parallel Link

M8153 M8158

B
N:N Network

Device
number

Common Items

9.3.3

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-97

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

3. Program example
X000

SET

M0

Start command
M0

FNC277
IVWR

K1

M8152
Communication error
M8029
Instruction
execution
complete

E-98

SET
FNC 12
MOV

M50

M50
Instruction error is
checked

D8152

D50

RST

M0

D50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

Cautions on programming

Common Items

9.3.4

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

1. Using an inverter communication instruction together with another instruction

An inverter communication instruction using ch1 cannot be used together with a RS instruction.

2. When programming an inverter communication instruction in a state of a STL instruction

Make sure to let the state relay remain ON until communication with an inverter is completed. Program a
sequence while observing the following cautions

When resetting many state relays all at once using the ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, etc., make sure that the
M8151 or M8156 (communication port busy) condition is OFF.
X000

M0

S0

S999

RST

M0

Reset input
M0

M8151
Communication
port busy

FNC 40
ZRST

State relays S0 to S999

are reset all at once.

E
Inverter
Communication

3. Using an inverter communication instruction in a program flow

An inverter communication instruction cannot be used in the following program flows
Program flow disabling the inverter communication
instruction

Between P and SRET instructions

Between I and IRET instructions

Remarks
Conditional jump

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Between CJ and P instructions

Between FOR and NEXT instructions

D
Computer Link

SET

C
Parallel Link

Add M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) ON condition to the state relay transfer condition, and
provide such interlock that the state relay ON/OFF status does not change during communication with an
inverter.
If the state changes during communication, communication may not be performed normally.

B
N:N Network

An inverter communication instruction cannot be used together with a RS2 instruction if the RS2 instruction
uses the same channel.

Repeat
Subroutine
Interrupt routine

1) Condition in which inverter communication instruction can be written:

While the PLC is in the STOP status, inverter communication instruction can be written during RUN.

5. When using the E500 Series

Parameters Nos. 922 and 923 in the E500 Series cannot be used in inverter communication.

H
Programming
Communication

2) Condition in which inverter communication instruction cannot be written:

Inverter communication instruction cannot be written during RUN.
If an inverter communication instruction is written during RUN during communication or if an inverter
communication instruction is deleted while in RUN, communication may be disabled after that. (In such a
case, set the PLC to STOP, and then to RUN mode again to initialize the status.)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

4. Caution on writing during RUN

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-99

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions

6. Cautions on using the password function in the D700 Series

1) When a communication error occurs
When a communication error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, the FX PLC automatically
retries communication up to 3 times*1.
Accordingly, note that the number of times of password reset error displayed in accordance with the
setting of Pr297 may not agree with the actual number of times of password input error as described
below when a password reset error occurs in the D700 Series in which "display of the number of times of
password reset error"*2 is made valid using Pr297.
Do not execute automatic retry (re-driving of an inverter instruction) using a sequence program when
writing data to Pr297.
Cases in which a password reset error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, and the actual
number of times of reset error in such cases
- When a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error
When the writing instruction is executed once, a password reset error occurs 3 times.
- When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise, etc.
A password reset error occurs up to 3 times.
2) When registering the password
When registering the password in the D700 Series inverter using an inverter communication instruction,
write the password to Pr297, read Pr297, and then confirm that registration of the password is completed
normally*3.
If writing of the password to Pr297 is not completed normally due to noise, etc., the FX PLC automatically
retries writing, and the registered password may be reset by the retry.

E-100

*1.

The FX PLC executes the first communication, and then retries communication twice (3 time in total).

*2.

When "display of the number of times of password reset error" is made valid in the D700 Series using
Pr297 and when a password reset error occurs 5 times, the "reading/writing restriction" cannot be
reset even if the right password is input.
For recovery from this status, it is necessary to all-clear all parameters in the D700 Series.

*3.

When the value given as a result of reading Pr297 is "0" to "4", registration of the password is
completed normally.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.4 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]

Inverter Communication

Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction

(PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]

Common Items

9.4

The IVCK instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to the PLC.

9.4.1

Function and operation

1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices
System/User

Word Devices
Digit Specification

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

Others
Special
Unit
U \G

S1

S1

S2

S2

S1

S2

S1

S2

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

D
Computer Link

n
S1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2. Program example
S1
M0

K6

Inverter station number: 0 to 31

9.4.2

H6F

D100

K1

Inverter
Communication

Command
contact

FNC270
IVCK

S2

Communication channel K1:ch1

K2:ch2
Read value storage destination
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)

Inverter instruction codes

Applicable inverter

S2

H6E

Set frequency read (EEPROM)

*1

H6D

Set frequency read (RAM)

*1

H7F

Link parameter expansion setting These codes cannot be specified in S2 of the IVCK
instruction. They are automatically processed when a
"second parameter specification code" is specified the
Second parameter changing
IVRD instruction.

Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVCK
instruction when reading frequency.
When "0" is not written, reading of the frequency may not be executed normally.

E-101

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Output current
Output voltage
Special monitor
Special monitor selection No.
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Inverter status monitor (expansion)
Inverter status monitor

Remote
Maintenance

H70
H71
H72
H73
H74
H75
H76
H77
H79
H7A

Programming
Communication

Output frequency [speed]

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*1

H6F

H6C

*1.

F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 . Any instruction codes not
shown in the table below may cause communication errors. Use only instruction codes shown below.
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Read contents
Inverter Instruction
code (hexadecimal)
H7B
Operation mode

C
Parallel Link

Operand
Type

N:N Network

When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in the inverters is specified in the IVCK
(FNC270) instruction, a value in the inverter is read to D .

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.5 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]

9.5

Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]

This instruction writes a control value required to operate an inverter from the PLC to the inverter.

9.5.1

Function and operation

When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in the inverters is specified in the IVDR
(FNC271) instruction, the value specified in S3 is written to the specified item of the inverter.

1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type

Bit Devices
System/User

Word Devices
Digit Specification

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

Others
Special
Unit

U \G

S1

S1

S2

S2

S1

S2

S3

S1

S2

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Index
V

Z Modify K H

" "

n
S1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2. Program example
S1
M0

FNC271
IVDR

Command
contact

S2

K6

HFA

K2M50

K1

Communication channel K1:ch1

K2:ch2
Value written to inverter

Inverter station number: 0 to 31

9.5.2

S3

Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)

Inverter instruction codes

The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Applicable inverter

S2

Inverter Instruction
code (hexadecimal)
HFB

Operation mode

HF3

Special monitor selection No.

HF9

Run command (expansion)

Run command

HEE

Set frequency write (EEPROM)

*3

HED

Set frequency write (RAM)

*3

*1

HF4

*2.
*3.

E-102

F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500

HFA

HFD

*1.

Write contents

Inverter reset

*2

Alarm definition batch clear

HFC

Parameter all clear

HFC

User clear

HFF

Link parameter expansion setting

The instruction code "HFD (inverter reset)" does not request a response from the inverter.
Accordingly, even if inverter reset is executed to a station number at which an inverter is not
connected, error does not occur.
It takes about 2.2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset.
When resetting the inverter, please specify H9696 as the operand S3 of the IVDR instruction.
Do not use H9966.
Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVDR
instruction when writing frequency.
When "0" is not written, writing of the frequency may not be executed normally.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]

Inverter Communication

Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]

Common Items

9.6

This instruction reads a parameter of an inverter to the PLC.

9.6.1

Function and operation

1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices
System/User

Word Devices
Digit Specification

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

Others
Special
Unit
U \G

S1

S1

S2

S2

S1

S2

S1

S2

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

D
Computer Link

n
S1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2. Program example
S1

Command
contact

FNC272
IVRD

K6

Inverter station number: 0 to 31

D150

n
K1
Communication channel K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Read value storage destination

Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

9.6.2

K7

Inverter
Communication

M0

S2

Inverter instruction codes

Refer to related data shown later.

9.6.3

C
Parallel Link

Operand
Type

N:N Network

When a parameter number of an inverter is specified in IVRD (FNC272) instruction, the value of the
parameter is read to D .

Program example of "second parameter specification code"

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

For second parameter specification code, refer to Section 9.9.

In the program example shown below, the parameters (frequency: 201, time: 1201, motor rotation direction:
2201) are read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-103

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]

Inverter Communication

Read devices: D100 = Motor rotation direction, D101 = Frequency, D102 = Time
X001
Read
command
M0
Drive
contact

S1
FNC272
IVRD

K6

S2
K2201

SET

M0

D100

K1

Communication channel K1:ch1

Read value storage destination
Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Inverter station
number:
0 to 31
FNC272
IVRD

K6

K201

D101

K1

FNC272
IVRD

K6

K1201

D102

K1

RST

E-104

FrequencyD101

TimeD102
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.

M8029
Execution
complete flag

Motor rotation directionD100

M0

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.7 Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR]

Inverter Communication

Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR]

Common Items

9.7

This instruction writes a value from the PLC to a parameter in an inverter.

9.7.1

Function and operation

B
is

S3

1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices

Word Devices

System/User

Digit Specification

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

Others
Special
Unit
U \G

S1

S1

S2

S2

S1

S2

S3

S1

S2

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

D
Computer Link

n
S1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2. Program example
S1

Command
contact

FNC273
IVWR

K6

S2
K7

D160

K1

Communication channel K1:ch1

K2:ch2
Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Inverter station number: 0 to 31

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

9.7.2

S3

Inverter
Communication

M0

Inverter instruction codes

Refer to related data shown later.

9.7.3

Program example of "second parameter specification code"

X001

Drive
contact

S1
FNC273
IVWR

K6

S2
K2201

M0

S3

H1

K1

H
Programming
Communication

M0

SET

Motor rotation direction: Forward

Communication channel K1:ch1

Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)

Inverter station
number: 0 to 31
K6

K201

H14

K1

FNC273
IVWR

K6

K1201

H100

K1

I
Remote
Maintenance

FNC273
IVWR

Frequency: 20Hz

Time: 1:00

Apx.A

The unit is specified by Pr. 200.

Discontinued
models

M8029
RST

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

For second parameter specification code, refer to Section 9.9.

In the program example shown below, data is written from the PLC to the parameters (frequency: 201, time:
1201, motor rotation direction: 2201) in the A500 inverter.

Write
command

C
Parallel Link

Operand
Type

N:N Network

When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in IVWR (FNC273) instruction, the value of
written to the specified item in the inverter.

M0

Execution complete flag

E-105

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.8 Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR]

Inverter Communication

9.8

Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR]

This instruction writes values from the PLC to parameters in an inverter all at once.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

9.8.1

Function and operation

When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in the IVBWR (FNC274) instruction, the values of S3
and later are written to the specified items in the inverter all at once.

1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System/User

Digit Specification

System/User

Others
Special
Unit

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U \G

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

S1
S2

S3

2. Program example
S1
M0

FNC274
IVBWR

Command
contact

S2

K6

K8

Inverter station number: 0 to 31

Number of parameters to be written
(decimal)

S3

D200

K1

Communication channel K1: ch1

K2: ch2
Head device of parameter
table written to inverter

The following table shows values (two word devices/point) in a specified table which are written to a number
of consecutive parameters specified in S2 starting from a word device specified in S3 .
S3

Parameter No. 1

S3

+1

D201

Value 1 written to parameter

S3

+2

D202

Parameter No. 2

S3

+3

D203

Value 2 written to parameter

:
:

:
:

:
:

E-106

D200

S3

+14

D214

Parameter No. 8

S3

+15

D215

Value 8 written to parameter

S2

2 = Number of occupied word devices

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]

Inverter Communication

Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter

with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]
This instruction writes 2 types of settings (operation command and set frequency) to the inverter, and reads 2
types of data (inverter status monitor, output frequency, etc.) from the inverter at the same time.
The following PLC versions support the IVMC instruction.
Ver. 1.00 or later

FX3G, FX3GC

Ver. 1.40 or later

FX3U, FX3UC

Ver. 2.70 or later

C
Parallel Link

9.9.1

Applicable version

FX3S

Function and operation

1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices

Word Devices

System/User

Digit Specification

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

Others
Special
Unit

U \G

S1

S2

S2

S1

S2

S3

S1

S2

S1

S2

Z Modify K H

" "

n
S1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

S1

S2

S3

D10

D20

K1
Channel to be used
(K1: ch1, K2: ch2)

Head device which stores values to be read

from the inverter
Head device which stores data to be written to the inverter

3. Send/receive data type S2

S2

Send/receive
data type
(HEX)

Send data
(Write contents to Inverter)
Data 1 ( S3

H0000
H0010
H0011

Run command
(expansion)

+1)

Set frequency
(RAM)
Set frequency
(RAM, EEPROM)

Data 1 ( D

Data 2 ( D

+1)

Output frequency (speed)

Inverter status monitor
(expansion)

Special monitor
Output frequency (speed)
Special monitor

Caution

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Number of occupied devices

Two devices are occupied respectively by S3 and D
Make sure not to use those devices in another control.

I
Remote
Maintenance

H0001

Data 2 ( S3

Receive data
(Read contents from Inverter)

H
Programming
Communication

The table below shows valid send data 1 and 2 and receive data 1 and 2 specified by the send/receive data
type S2 .

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FNC275
K0
H0000
IVMC
Command
contact
Inverter station number
(K0 to K31)
Multiple instructions for inverter:
Send/receive data type specification

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Program example
M0

Inverter
Communication

S1

Index

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Computer Link

Operand
Type

B
N:N Network

PLC

Common Items

9.9

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

E-107

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]

Inverter Communication

If a device number outside the range due to indexing, etc. is specified in D , the receive data from the
inverter is not stored in D . However, values set in S3 and S3 +1 may be written to the inverter.
If any unspecified value is set in S2 , unexpected data may be written to and read from the inverter, and
values of D
and D +1 may be updated.
IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter, and stores the
read status to D . Accordingly, the status written by the IVMC instruction can be read by a next or later
read instruction (IVCK or IVMC).

9.9.2

Applicable inverters
This instruction is applicable to the following inverters:
FREQROL-E700 (February 2009 and later)
FREQROL-D700 (Applicable in all)

9.9.3

For details, refer to the respective inverter manual.

Applicable programming tool

The following programming tools support this instruction.

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.48A or later

Ver. 1.20 or later

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.62Q or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.45X or later

Ver. 1.20 or later

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.56J or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

FX3S PLC
GX Works2
FX-30P

E-108

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

Second Parameter Specification Codes

*1.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

9.10.1 S500 Series

Second parameter specification code

Name

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR

instruction for parameter number]
902

C3

Frequency setting voltage bias

1902

C4

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

C5

Frequency setting current bias

frequency

904

C6

Frequency setting current bias

1904

C7

Frequency setting current gain

905

D
Computer Link

Frequency setting voltage bias

frequency

E
Inverter
Communication

C2

9.10.2 E500 Series

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905

Name

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR

instruction for parameter number]
Offset/Gain
(H00)

Analog
(H01)

Analog value of
terminal (H02)

Frequency setting voltage bias

902

1902

2902

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

1903

2903

904

Frequency setting current bias

904

1904

2904

905

Frequency setting current gain

905

1905

2905

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

902
903

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Second parameter specification code

Parameter
No.

Parallel Link

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers C2 to C7

Parameter
No.

B
N:N Network

When handling the following parameters in computer link operation, it is necessary to select second
parameters.
In IVRD, IVWR, and IVBWR*1 instructions, when a value shown in the tables below is set in S2 ( S3 in
IVBWR*1 instruction), the extension parameter and second parameter are automatically overwritten, and
parameter values are either read or written.

Common Items

9.10

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-109

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes

9.10.3 A500 Series

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 201 to 230 and 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR

instruction for parameter number]

Name

Operation frequency
read/write

Time read/write

Rotation direction
write/read

201

Program set 1

201

1201

2201

202

Program set 1

202

1202

2202

203

Program set 1

203

1203

2203

204

Program set 1

204

1204

2204

205

Program set 1

205

1205

2205

206

Program set 1

206

1206

2206

207

Program set 1

207

1207

2207

208

Program set 1

208

1208

2208

209

Program set 1

209

1209

2209

210

Program set 1

210

1210

2210

211

Program set 2

211

1211

2211

212

Program set 2

212

1212

2212

213

Program set 2

213

1213

2213

214

Program set 2

214

1214

2214

215

Program set 2

215

1215

2215

216

Program set 2

216

1216

2216

217

Program set 2

217

1217

2217

218

Program set 2

218

1218

2218

219

Program set 2

219

1219

2219

220

Program set 2

220

1220

2220

221

Program set 3

221

1221

2221

222

Program set 3

222

1222

2222

223

Program set 3

223

1223

2223

224

Program set 3

224

1224

2224

225

Program set 3

225

1225

2225

226

Program set 3

226

1226

2226

227

Program set 3

227

1227

2227

228

Program set 3

228

1228

2228

229

Program set 3

229

1229

2229

230

Program set 3

230

1230

2230

2. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905

Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.

E-110

Name

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR

instruction for parameter number]
Offset/Gain
(H00)

Analog
(H01)

Analog value of
terminal (H02)

902

Frequency setting voltage bias

902

1902

2902

903

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

1903

2903

904

Frequency setting current bias

904

1904

2904

905

Frequency setting current gain

905

1905

2905

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Inverter Communication

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905

Second parameter specification code
Name

Offset/Gain
(H00)

Analog
(H01)

Analog value of
terminal (H02)

Frequency setting voltage bias

902

1902

2902

903

Frequency setting voltage gain

903

1903

2903

904

Frequency setting current bias

904

1904

2904

905

Frequency setting current gain

905

1905

2905

9.10.5 V500 Series

D
Second parameter specification code
Name

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/

IVWR instruction for parameter number]
Analog
(H01)

Analog value of
terminal (H02)

902

1902

2902

Speed setting No. 2 bias

903

Speed setting No. 2 gain

903

1903

2903

904

Torque command No. 3 bias

904

1904

2904

905

Torque command No. 3 gain

905

1905

2905

917

No.1 terminal bias (speed)

917

1917

2917

918

No.1 terminal gain (speed)

918

1918

2918

919

No.1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux)

919

1919

2919

920

No.1 terminal gain (torque/magnetic flux)

920

1920

2920

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

902

E
Inverter
Communication

Offset/Gain
(H00)

Computer Link

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905

Parameter
No.

C
Parallel Link

902

B
N:N Network

Parameter
No.

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/

IVWR instruction for parameter number]

Common Items

9.10.4 F500 Series

G
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, and C2 to C7
Parameter
No.

Second parameter specification code

Name

C2

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency

902

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

1902

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency

903

C4

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

1903

C5

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency

904

C6

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

1904

126

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

905

C7

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

1905

I
Remote
Maintenance

C3
125

H
Programming
Communication

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in

IVRD/IVWR instruction for parameter number]

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

9.10.6 F700 Series

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-111

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes

9.10.7 A700 Series

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, C2 to C7, C12 to
C19, and C38 to C41
Parameter
No.

E-112

Second parameter specification code

Name

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in

IVRD/IVWR instruction for parameter number]

C2

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency

902

C3

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

1902

125

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency

903

C4

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

1903

C5

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency

904

C6

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

1904

126

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

905

C7

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

1905

C12

Bias frequency (speed) for terminal No. 1

917

C13

Bias (speed) for terminal No. 1

1917

C14

Gain frequency (speed) for terminal No. 1

918

C15

Gain (speed) for terminal No. 1

1918

C16

Bias command (torque) for terminal No. 1

919

C17

Bias (torque) for terminal No. 1

1919

C18

Gain command (torque) for terminal No. 1

920

C19

Gain (torque) for terminal No. 1

1920

C38

Bias command (torque) for terminal No. 4

932

C39

Bias (torque) for terminal No. 4

1932

C40

Gain command (torque) for terminal No. 4

933

C41

Gain (torque) for terminal No. 4

1933

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes

1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, C2 to C7 and C22 to
C25
Second parameter specification code

C2
C3
125

C5
C6

C7

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency

902

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

1902

Terminal 2 analog value

2902 (Only the IVRD instruction)

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

903
1903

Terminal 2 analog value

2903 (Only the IVRD instruction)

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency

904

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

1904

Terminal 4 analog value

2904 (Only the IVRD instruction)

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

905
1905

Terminal 4 analog value

2905 (Only the IVRD instruction)

Frequency setting voltage bias frequency (built-in

potentiometer)

922

C23

Frequency setting voltage bias

(built-in potentiometer)

1922

C24

Frequency setting voltage gain frequency (built-in

potentiometer)

923

C25

Frequency
setting
potentiometer)

1923

voltage

gain

(built-in

E
Inverter
Communication

C22

Computer Link

126

[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/

IVWR instruction for parameter number]

Parallel Link

C4

Name

N:N Network

Parameter
No.

Common Items

9.10.8 E700 and D700 Series

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-113

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

10. Practical Program Examples

(FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
This chapter explains practical programs for inverter communication.

10.1

Practical Example 1
This fundamental program example monitors operations of an inverter, controls operations of the inverter and
writes parameters to the inverter.
Programs can be made simpler and the communication time can be reduced by using the IVMC instruction as
long as the PLC and inverter support the IVMC instruction.
For details on PLC versions support the IVMC instruction, refer to section 9.9.
Refer to "9.9.2 Applicable inverters" for supported inverters.

10.1.1 System configuration example

An FX PLC (ch 1) is connected to an inverter.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

Inverter

Terminal resistor
Distributor

10.1.2 Contents of operation

As an example of operation control, an inverter can be stopped (X000), rotated forward (X001) and rotated
reverse (X002).
By changing the contents of D10*1, the speed can be changed.
The contents of D10*1 can be changed from a sequence program or display unit.
*1.

E-114

D11 when the IVMC instruction is used

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

A
Common Items

10.1.3 Program example

1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002
SET

M10

N:N Network

Initial pulse
The write
instruction is
driven
M10

FNC271
IVDR

Driving of
write
instruction

K0

H0FD

H9696

K1

The inverter is reset

FNC 12
MOV P

K1

D200

The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified

FNC 12
MOV P

K12000

D201

The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"

D
Computer Link

K1

FNC 12
MOV P

K2

D202

The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified

FNC 12
MOV P

K500

D203

The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"

FNC 12
MOV P

K7

D204

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is specified

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D205

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"

FNC 12
MOV P

K8

D206

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is specified

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D207

D200

K1

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

K4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

K0

Computer link
operation is
specified

H0*1

H0FB

Inverter
Communication

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"

The parameters are written

all at once
D200 to D207
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)

Remote
Maintenance

FNC274
IVBWR*2

K0

Parallel Link

FNC271
IVDR

M8029
RST
Instruction execute
complete

Driving of
write
instruction

Apx.A

When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.
The FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLC does not support the IVBWR instruction. Use the IVWR instruction
instead.

E-115

Discontinued
models

*1.
*2.

M10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

2. Changing the speed using a sequence program

When the IVMC instruction is not used
M8000

FNC 12
MOV P

RUN
monitor

K6000

D10
Operation
speed

M17

FNC 12
MOV P

Command for
switching to
speed 1

D10

The operation speed

"40 Hz" is written

Operation
speed

M18

FNC 12
MOV P

Command for
switching to
speed 2
FNC271
IVDR

K4000

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup

K2000

D10

The operation speed

"20 Hz" is written

Operation
speed
K0

H0ED

D10

K1

The preset frequency*1 is

written to the inverter

Operation
speed

*1.

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.

When the IVMC instruction is used

M8000

FNC 12
MOV P

RUN
monitor

D11
Operation
speed

M17
Command for
switching to
speed 1
M18
Command for
switching to
speed 2

E-116

K6000

FNC 12
MOV P

K4000

D11

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup

The operation speed

"40 Hz" is written

Operation
speed
FNC 12
MOV P

K2000

D11
Operation
speed

The operation speed

"20 Hz" is written

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

A
Common Items

3. Controlling operations of an inverter

When the IVMC instruction is not used
X000
SET
Operation stop
command input

Forward
rotation
command
input

H0FA is set to "00H"

Operation
stop

X000
RST

Operation stop
command input

M15

N:N Network

X001

M15

Operation stop is reset

by input X001 or X002

Operation
stop

C
Parallel Link

X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input

M15

X001

command
input

X002

M8000

Forward rotation
command

X001
M22

Forward
rotation
command
input

FNC271
IVDR

RUN
monitor

b1 of H0FA is set to ON

b2 of H0FA is set to ON

Reverse rotation
command
K0

H0FA

K2M20

K1

Inverter
Communication

Reverse
rotation
command
input

M21
Reverse
rotation
command
input

Computer Link

Operation Forward
stop
rotation

X002

Operation command is
written
M27 to M20H0FA

When the IVMC instruction is used

SET
Operation stop
command input
X001

H0F9 is set to "0000H"

Operation
stop

X000
RST

Operation stop
command input

M15

Operation stop is reset

by input X001 or X002

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Forward
rotation
command
input

M15

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

X000

Operation
stop

X002

M15

X001

Operation Forward
stop
rotation
X002

Reverse
rotation
command
input

M8000

M21
Reverse
rotation
command
input

b1 of H0F9 is set to ON

Forward rotation
command

X001
M22

Forward
rotation
command
input

b2 of H0F9 is set to ON

Reverse rotation
command
FNC 12
MOV

K4M20

D10

Apx.A

The run command is set

to the device for writing.

Discontinued
models

RUN
monitor

X002

Remote
Maintenance

command
input

Programming
Communication

Reverse
rotation
command
input

Operation
command

E-117

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

4. Monitoring operations of an inverter

When the IVMC instruction is not used
M8000

FNC270
IVCK

RUN
monitor

K0

H079*1 K4M100

K1

Inverter status is read

H79M115 to M100

M100
Y000

Inverter is
operating

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M101
Y001

Forward
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M102
Y002

Reverse
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M103
Y003
Up to
frequency

Indicator
lamp, etc.

Contents of status
(according to necessity)

M104
Y004

Overload
is applied

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M106
Y006

Frequency
is detected

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M107
Y007

Alarm
occurrence
FNC270
IVCK

Indicator
lamp, etc.
K0

H06F

D50

K1

Output frequency
monitor*2

Frequency
monitor value
END

E-118

*1.

S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).

*2.

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.1 Practical Example 1

M8000

FNC275
IVMC

RUN
monitor

K0

H0000

D10

D20

K1

K4M100

The set frequency (RAM) and run command

(expansion) are written.
The inverter status monitor (expansion) and
output frequency (speed) are read.*1
The inverter status monitor (expansion) is
stored in bit devices.

M100
Y000

Inverter is
operating

Indicator
lamp, etc.

C
Parallel Link

M101
Y001

Forward
rotation

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M102

Y002

Reverse
rotation

Y003
Up to
frequency

Indicator
lamp, etc.

Computer Link

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M103

Contents of status
(according to necessity)

E
Inverter
Communication

M104
Y004

Overload
is applied

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M106

Y006

Frequency
is detected

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M107
Y007

Alarm
occurrence

Indicator
lamp, etc.
D21

D50

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FNC 12
MOV

B
N:N Network

FNC 12
MOV

D20

Common Items

When the IVMC instruction is used

Output frequency (speed)

monitor

END

H
The IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter, and
stores it in D .
Accordingly, the inverter status written by the IVMC instruction can be read when the next reading
instruction (IVCK, IVMC, etc.) is executed.

Programming
Communication

*1.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-119

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2

10.2 Practical Example 2

Practical Example 2
This program executes the same control as practical example 1 shown earlier from one communication port
(ch1) to two inverters (Station number: 0 and 1).

10.2.1 System configuration example

An FX PLC (ch1) is connected to two inverters (Station number: 0 and 1).
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC

Inverter A
(station number 0)

Inverter B
(station number 1)

Terminal resistor
Distributor

Distributor

10.2.2 Contents of operation

Differences from the practical example 1 are the following three points:
The PLC executes communication from one communication port to two inverters.
Status is not being read when a write to inverter command is given.
The PLC only writes when it detects that contents to be written have changed since last being written.

E-120

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

A
Common Items

10.2.3 Program example

1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002

FNC 40
ZRST

M510

M607

Clearing devices backed up

against power interruption

FNC 40
ZRST

D510

D707

Clearing devices backed up

against power interruption

SET

B
N:N Network

Initial pulse

M10

SET

K0

H0FD

H9696

K1

FNC271
IVDR

K0

H0FB

H0*1

K1

FNC 12
MOV P

K1

D200

FNC 12
MOV P

K12000

D201

FNC 12
MOV P

K2

D202

FNC 12
MOV P

K500

D203

FNC 12
MOV P

K7

D204

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is specified
(station number 0)

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D205

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 0)

FNC 12
MOV P

K8

D206

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is specified
(station number 0)

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D207

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 0)

K1

M8029
RST
Instruction execute
complete

The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"
(station number 0)

The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified
(station number 0)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"
(station number 0)

The parameters are written

all at once
D200 to D207
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)
(station number 0)

Remote
Maintenance

D200

The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified
(station number 0)

Programming
Communication

K4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

K0

The inverter is reset

(station number 0)
Computer link operation
is specified
(station number 0)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FNC274
IVBWR*2

Computer Link

FNC271
IVDR

Inverter
Communication

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)

M510

The write
instruction
is driven
(station number 1)

*Inverter A (station number 0)

M10

Parallel Link

The write
instruction
is driven
(station number 0)

M10

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Driving of write
instruction
(station number 0)

E-121

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

*Inverter B
(station number 1)
M510
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

FNC271
IVDR

K1

H0FD

H9696

K1

FNC271
IVDR

K1

H0FB

H0*1

K1

FNC 12
MOV P

K1

D700

FNC 12
MOV P

K12000

D701

FNC 12
MOV P

K2

D702

FNC 12
MOV P

K500

D703

FNC 12
MOV P

K7

D704

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is specified
(station number 1)

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D705

The acceleration time

(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 1)

FNC 12
MOV P

K8

D706

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is specified
(station number 1)

FNC 12
MOV P

K10

D707

The deceleration time

(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 1)

D700

K1

FNC274
IVBWR*2

K1

K4

M8029
RST
Instruction execute
complete

E-122

The inverter is reset

(station number 1)
Computer link operation
is specified
(station number 1)
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified
(station number 1)
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"
(station number 1)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified
(station number 1)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"
(station number 1)

The parameters are written

all at once
D700 to D707
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)
(station number 1)

M510
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

*1.

When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.

*2.

The FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLC does not support the IVBWR instruction. Use the IVWR instruction
instead.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

A
Common Items

2. Changing the speed using a sequence program

*Inverter A
(station number 0)
M8000

RUN
monitor

D10
Operation
speed

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup.

N:N Network

FNC 12 K6000
MOVP

(station
number 0)
M17

FNC 12 K4000
MOVP

D10

The operation speed is

written as "40 Hz"

Parallel Link

Command for
switching to speed 1

Operation
speed

(station number 0)

(station
number 0)

M18

FNC 12 K2000
MOVP

D10
Operation
speed

(station number 0)

The operation speed is

written as "20 Hz"

Computer Link

Command for
switching to speed 2

(station
number 0)

M8002

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse

D10

D80

number 0) (station
number 0)
FNC228
LD<>

D10

D80

SET

The write
instruction
is driven

K0

(station
number 0)
H0ED

D10

K1

Operation
speed

(station
number 0)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

(station
(station
number 0) number 0)
FNC271
IVDR

Change in the
operation speed
(D10) is
detected

The write
instruction
is driven

Operation Operation speed

speed
is withdrawn

M11

M11

Inverter
Communication

Operation Operation
speed
speed is
(station withdrawn

The preset frequency*1

is written to the
inverter

M8029
Instruction execute
complete

RST

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

(station
number 0)
M11
The write
instruction
is driven

*1.

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.

Programming
Communication

(station
number 0)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-123

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

*Inverter B
(station number 1)
M8000

FNC 12 K6000
MOVP

RUN
monitor

D510
Operation
speed

"60 Hz" is written as

the initial value at
startup.

(station
number 1)
M517

FNC 12 K4000
MOVP

Command for
switching to speed 1

D510

The operation speed is

written as "40 Hz"

Operation
speed

(station number 1)

(station
number 1)

M518

FNC 12 K2000
MOVP

Command for
switching to speed 2

D510
Operation
speed

(station number 1)

The operation speed is

written as "20 Hz"

(station
number 1)

M8002

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse

D510

D580

Operation Operation
speed
speed is
(station withdrawn

number 1) (station
number 1)
FNC228
LD<>

D510

D580

SET

The write
instruction
is driven

Operation Operation speed

speed
is withdrawn

(station
(station
number 1) number 1)
M11

FNC271
IVDR

The write
instruction
is driven

K1

M511

(station
number 1)
H0ED

D510

K1

Operation
speed

(station
number 1)

Change in the
operation speed
(D510) is
detected

The preset frequency*1

is written to the
inverter

(station
number 1)
M8029
Instruction execute
complete

RST

M511
The write
instruction
is driven

(station
number 1)

*1.

E-124

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

A
Common Items

3. Controlling operations of an inverter

* Inverter A
(station number 0)
X000

SET

M15

Operation stop
command input
(station number 0)
X000

RST

M15

Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command (station number 0)
input
(station
number 0)

N:N Network

X001

H0FA is set to "00H"

Operation
stop
(station
number 0)
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002

C
Parallel Link

Operation
stop
(station
number 0)

X002
Reverse rotation
command input
(station number 0)

Operation
stop

(station
number 0)

X001

X002

Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)
X002

M21

Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)

Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)

Reverse rotation
command
(station number 0)

D81

SET

Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 0)

Instruction execute
complete

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
K0

H0FA

K2M20

K1

RST

M12

Operation commands
are written.
M27 to M20H0FA

Programming
Communication

M8029

M12

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)

FNC271
IVDR

F
Changes in the
operation
commands
(M27 to M20) are
detected

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FNC 12
D81
MOV K2M20
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 0)

Initial pulse

M12

E
b2 of H0FA is set to ON

Inverter
Communication

M22

M8002

FNC228
LD<> K2M20

b1 of H0FA is set to ON

Forward rotation
command
(station number 0)

X001

Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)

Computer Link

M15

Driving of write
instruction
(station
number 0)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-125

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

* Inverter B
(station number 1)
X010

SET

M515

Operation stop
(command input
station number 1)
X011

H0FA is set to "00H"

Operation
stop
(station
number 1)

X010

RST

M515

Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command (station number 1)
input
(station
number 1)

Operation stop is reset

by input X011 or X012

Operation
stop
(station
number 1)

X012
Reverse rotation
command input
(station number 1)
M515
Operation
stop

(station
number 1)

X011

X012

Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)
X012

M521

Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)

Forward rotation
command
(station number 1)

X011

Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)

M522

Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)

FNC 12
MOV K2M520 D581
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 1)

Initial pulse

D581

SET

Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 1)
M512
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

FNC271
IVDR

M8029
Instruction execute
complete

E-126

b2 of H0FA is set to ON

Reverse rotation
command
(station number 1)

M8002

FNC228
LD<> K2M520

b1 of H0FA is set to ON

Changes in the
operation
commands
(M527 to M520) are
detected

M512
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

K1

H0FA

K2M520

K1

RST

M512

Driving of write
instruction
(station
number 1)

Operation commands
are written.
M527 to M520H0FA

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

A
Common Items

4. Monitoring operations of an inverter

* Inverter A
(station number 0)

M10

N0

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)

M12

MC

N0

M70

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)

While data is not

written to an inverter,
the status is read

N:N Network

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)

M11

M70

C
FNC270
IVCK

RUN
monitor

K0

H079

*1

K4M100

K1

Inverter is
operating
(station number 0)
M100

Parallel Link

M8000

Inverter status is read

(station number 0)
H79M115 to M100

Y000

Inverter
running
(station number 0)
M101

Computer Link

Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y001

Forward
rotation
(station number 0)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M102

Reverse
rotation
(station number 0)

Inverter
Communication

Y002
Indicator
lamp, etc.

M103

Y003

Up to
frequency
(station number 0)

Contents of status
(according to necessity)

M104

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y004

Overload
is applied
(station number 0)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M106

Y006

Frequency
is detected
(station number 0)
M107

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y007

Alarm
occurrence
(station number 0)

Indicator
lamp, etc.
K0

H06F

D50

K1

Frequency
monitor value
(station number 0)
MCR

H
monitor *2

Output frequency
(station number 0)

Programming
Communication

FNC270
IVCK

N0

S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).

*2.

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.

Remote
Maintenance

*1.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-127

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication

10.2 Practical Example 2

* Inverter B
(station number 1)

M510
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

N0

M511
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

M512

MC

N0

M570

While data is not

written to an inverter,
the status is read

K1

Inverter status is read

(station number 1)
H79M615 to M600

Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)

M570
M8000

FNC270
IVCK

RUN
monitor

K1

H079*1 K4M600

Inverter is
operating
(station number 1)
M600

Y010

Inverter
running
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M601

Y011

Forward
rotation
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M602

Y012

Reverse
rotation
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M603

Y013

Up to
frequency
(station number 1)

Contents of status
(according to necessity)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M604

Y014

Overload
is applied
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M606

Y016

Frequency
is detected
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.

M607

Y017

Alarm
occurrence
(station number 1)

Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC270
IVCK

K1

H06F

D550

K1

Frequency
monitor value
(station number 1)
MCR

Output frequency monitor *2

(station number 1)

N0
END

E-128

*1.

S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).

*2.

For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

11 Troubleshooting
11.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series)

A
Common Items

11. Troubleshooting

This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes.

N:N Network

11.1

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series)

Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version for inverter communication.
For version applicability, refer to Section 1.3.

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RD(RXD)" and "SD(TXD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
SD
Flashing

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received

Off

Off

Computer Link

RD

Data is being sent or received.

Data is not sent nor received.

Inverter
Communication

11.3

Operation status

Flashing

Checking Installation
1. Mounting status

2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)

The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is provided correctly.

3. Wiring

Checking Sequence Program

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

11.4

Parallel Link

11.2

Verify that N:N Network (D8173 to D8180) and parallel link (M8070 and M8071) are not set.
After changing any setting, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

2. Communication setting using parameters

3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in inverter
communication. After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Verify that the communication settings using parameters are correct. If the contents of the parameters do not
agree, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any parameters, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

Programming
Communication

1. Communication setting in the sequence program

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-129

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

11 Troubleshooting
11.4 Checking Sequence Program

4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

5. Presence of RS instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.

7. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

8. Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

11.4.1 Checking inverter operation status

1. When the operation mode of an inverter is not changed over to computer link mode
1) Verify that the inverter is set to the external operation mode.
2) Verify that no signal is being input to the external terminals STF and STR.
3) Verify that the correct operation mode changeover program is being executed.

2. When an inverter cannot be started even in computer link mode

1) Verify that the program for starting the inverter is executed correctly.
2) Verify that the operation command and speed command are set correctly.
3) Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly.

3. When an inverter is stopped by an alarm during operation due to defective communication

1) Verify that a communication cable is connected correctly between the PLC and the inverter.
(Check for poor contact or wire breakage.)
2) Verify that a sequence program is created so that communication is executed with each inverter within a
constant cycle. Set the communication check time interval to a large value, and check the communication
status.
3) Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly.
4) Verify that terminal resistors are wired correctly.

E-130

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

11 Troubleshooting

Inverter Communication

Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

Verify that the error flag is not ON.
If the error flag is ON, check the error code and take proper countermeasures.
For error codes, refer to the next page.

Error Codes
When a communication error occurs, the error flag turns ON, and the error code is stored in the data register.
For error codes, refer to the table below.

1. Error storing devices

Error flag

Data register for storing error code

FX2N,FX2NC

M8156

D8156

FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC

ch1

ch2

ch1

ch2

M8152

M8157

D8152

D8157

Error
code
(DEC)

Contents of error
Normal end

Timeout error

(No Errors)

Inverter did not give response.

Sending from inverter was aborted midway.

Station number error Unspecified station gave response.

Sum check error

The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.

Parameter number
specification error

In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number

was specified.
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
K6706: Out-of-range data value for operand in applied instruction.

Because the port is being used for another communication type, it

Communication port cannot be used for communication with the inverter.
occupied by another At this time, error code (K6762) is set to D8067.
communication type K6762: The port specified in inverter communication instruction is
being used by another communication type.

A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.

Station number
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
outside setting range
K6706: Out-of-range data value for operand in applied instruction.

Sending timeout
error*1

Received data error*1 Wrong data was received from the inverter.

256

Inverter sent the error code H0.

Computer NAK error The number of retries exceeded the allowable number because of an
error in the transfer request data.

257

Parity error

Programming
Communication

Inverter
Communication

Inverter
operation

D
Computer Link

2. Error code list

Parallel Link

FX Series

B
N:N Network

11.6

Common Items

11.5

11.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

258

Sum check error

259

Protocol error

260

Framing error

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Sending to the inverter was not completed within the specified time.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Inverter sent the error code H4.

The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.

I
Remote
Maintenance

When errors
have occurred
consecutively
Inverter sent the error code H2.
beyond the
The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value
allowable
calculated from the data received by the inverter.
number of
Inverter sent the error code H3.
retries, inverter
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter,
is brought to an
receiving of data was not completed within the specified time, or CR/ alarm stop.
LF does not agree with the parameters.
Inverter sent the error code H1.
The contents are different from the specified parity.

E-131

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

Error
code
(DEC)

11.6 Error Codes

Contents of error

Inverter
operation

261

Overrun error

When errors
have occurred
consecutively
Inverter sent the error code H5.
beyond the
Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer allowable
sent the next set of data.
number of
retries, inverter
is brought to an
alarm stop.

262

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code H6.

Not defined currently in inverter.

263

Character error

Inverter does
not accept
Inverter sent the error code H7.
received data,
An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes)
but is not
was received.
brought to an
alarm stop.

264

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code H8.

Not defined currently in inverter.

265

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code H9.

Not defined currently in inverter.

266
267
268

Inverter sent the error code HA.

A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode, Inverter does
or while the inverter was operating.
not accept
received data,
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
Instruction code error
but is not
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
brought to an
Inverter sent the error code HC.
Data range error
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the alarm stop.
allowable range was specified.
Mode error

269

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code HD.

Not defined currently in inverter.

270

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code HE.

Not defined currently in inverter.

271

Undefined

Inverter sent the error code HF.

Not defined currently in inverter.

*1.

E-132

11 Troubleshooting

This error code is supported only in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

11 Troubleshooting

Inverter Communication

11.6 Error Codes

A
Common Items

3. IVMC instruction error codes

When errors occur in the send data of the IVMC instruction, the following error codes are stored.
It is recommended to check error codes in hexadecimal.
Refer to the error code list earlier in this section for other errors.
Error code
(HEX)

b7 to b4

b3 to b0

H00

H0

H0

HA

HB

HC

HA

HB

The inverter sent error code HA to send data 1 of

the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while the inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 2, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
The inverter sent error code HA to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 1, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 2 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.

The inverter does not

The inverter sent error codes to both send data 1
accept data
and send data 2 of the IVMC instruction.
corresponding to send
Refer to the contents of the error of the
data 1 and 2, but is not
corresponding error codes of send data 1 and
brought to an alarm
send data 2 for details of error codes.
stop.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

HA to HC

The inverter sent error code HC to send data 2 of

the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.

HC

HA to HC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

H0

Inverter
Communication

H02

No error has occurred in both send data 1 and

send data 2.
Normal end

Computer Link

H0

Inverter operation

Parallel Link

b15 to b8

Contents of error

N:N Network

IVMC
Send
Send
instruction
data2
data1
error
error
error
information information information

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-133

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.1 Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC)

12. Related Data

This chapter shows various technical information.

12.1

Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC)

The tables below show special auxiliary relays and special data registers used in inverter communication
(EXTR K10 to EXTR K13).

1. Bit devices
Device No.

Name

Description

R/W

M8029

Turns ON when execution of EXTR instruction is completed, and remains

Instruction execution ON for 1 scan.
complete
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if M8156
(communication error or parameter error) turns ON.

M8104

Extension ROM
cassette check

Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.

Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction.

M8154

Unused

M8155

Communication port
busy

M8156

Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
or parameter error

M8157

Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
latch*1

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

*1.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

2. Word devices
Device No.

Name

Description

D8104

Extension ROM
cassette type code

Stores the type code of an extension ROM cassette (value: K1).

D8105

Extension ROM
cassette version

Stores the version of an extension ROM cassette

(value: K100 = Ver. 1.00).

D8154

Inverter response
waiting time

Sets the inverter response waiting time.

D8155

Step number of
instruction using the
communication port

Stores the step number of EXTR instruction using the communication port.

D8156

Error code*1

Stores an error code when a communication error is caused by an EXTR

instruction.

Stores the instruction step number in which a communication error has

occurred. (Stores K-1 when no error has occurred.)

D8157

Error occurrence
step number latch*1

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

E-134

R/W

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

R/W

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)

Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)

Common Items

12.2

12 Related Data

The following devices are special devices used in inverter communication.

12.2.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029]

1. Detailed contents
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for
1 scan.
When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, M8029 turns ON.
M8029 is used as the execution complete flag for other instructions (such as positioning instructions).
When using M8029, provide the contact just under the instruction whose execution completion is to be
checked.

C
Parallel Link

2. Cautions on use

N:N Network

When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, this device turns ON.

12.2.2 Extension ROM cassette check [M8104]

Computer Link

This device remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.

1. Detailed contents
M8104 remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.
- FX2N . . . . . . FX2N-ROM-E1
- FX2NC . . . . . FX2NC-ROM-CE1

E
Inverter
Communication

2. Cautions on use
While M8104 is OFF, EXTR instructions cannot be used.

12.2.3 Communication port busy [M8155]

1. Detailed contents
M8155 remains ON while communication with an inverter is executed by an EXTR instruction.
When M8155 turns ON, D8155 stores the step number of an instruction using the communication port.
While M8155 is ON, another EXTR instruction cannot be executed.

This device turns ON when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR instruction.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

12.2.4 Communication error or parameter error [M8156]

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

This device remains ON while the communication port is being used by an EXTR instruction.

1. Detailed contents

Programming
Communication

M8156 turns ON when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR instruction.
When M8156 turns ON, D8156 stores the error code.

2. Cautions on use
M8156 is set to OFF by an EXTR instruction located in the next step in the program.
When using M8156, provide it just under the EXTR instruction whose error is to be checked.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-135

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)

12.2.5 Communication error latch [M8157]

This device turns ON when the communication error flag M8156 turns ON.

1. Detailed contents
M8157 turns ON when a communication error occurs and M8156 turns ON.
When M8157 turns ON, D8157 stores the step number in which the error has occurred.

2. Cautions on use
M8157 remains ON until the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

12.2.6 Extension ROM cassette type code [D8104]

This device stores the type code of an extension ROM cassette.

1. Detailed contents
While the following ROM is attached to an FX PLC, D8104 stores its model code.
- FX2N . . . . . . FX2N-ROM-E1 (model code: K1)
- FX2NC . . . . . FX2NC-ROM-CE1 (model code: K1)

12.2.7 Extension ROM cassette version [D8105]

This device stores the version of an extension ROM cassette.

1. Detailed contents
While an extension ROM is attached, D8105 stores its version information (K100 = Ver. 1.00).

12.2.8 Inverter response waiting time [D8154]

This device sets the response waiting time of an inverter.

1. Detailed contents
D8154 sets the response waiting time of an inverter.
Set a value within the range from "1 to 32767" (unit: 100 ms) to D8154.
When "0" or a negative value is set, it is handled as "100 ms".

12.2.9 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8155]

This device stores the step number of an instruction occupying the communication port.

1. Detailed contents
D8155 stores the step number of EXTR instruction using the communication port.

E-136

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)

This device stores the error code when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR
instruction.

1. Detailed contents

Error
code
(DEC)

Contents of error

Inverter did not give response.

Timeout error. This code interlocks with M8156. Sending from inverter was aborted
midway through.

An unspecified station gave response.

The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.

In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number was specified. At

this time, the error code K6706 is set to D8067.

Because the port is being used for another communication, it cannot be used for
communication with the inverter. At this time, the error code K6762 is set to D8067.

A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.

At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
Inverter sent the error code H0. Computer NAK error.
An error was included in the transfer request data from the computer beyond the
allowable number of retries.

257

Inverter sent the error code H1. Parity error.

The contents are different from the specified parity.

258

Inverter sent the error code H2. Sum check error.

When errors have
The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value calculated from occurred
the data received by inverter.
consecutively beyond
the allowable number
Inverter sent the error code H3. Protocol error.
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter, and the receiving of of retries, inverter is
data has not been completed within the specified time, or CR/LF does not agree brought to an alarm
stop.
with the parameters.

261

Inverter sent the error code H5. Overrun error.

Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer sent the next set
of data.

262

Inverter sent the error code H6.

Not defined currently in inverter.

263

Inverter sent the error code H7. Character error.

An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes) was received.

264

Inverter sent the error code H8.

Not defined currently in inverter.

265

Inverter sent the error code H9.

Not defined currently in inverter.

Inverter does not

accept the received
data, but is not
brought to an alarm
stop.

H
Programming
Communication

Inverter sent the error code H4. Framing error.

The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

260

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

259

Inverter
Communication

256

Computer Link

Normal end (no error)

Parallel Link

Inverter operation

B
N:N Network

D8156 stores one of the following error codes when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by
the EXTR instruction.

Common Items

12.2.10 Error code [D8156]

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-137

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

Error
code
(DEC)
266

267
268

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)

Contents of error

Inverter operation

Inverter sent the error code HA. Mode error.

A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode, or while inverter
was operating. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by Inverter does not
alarm.
accept the received
data, but is not
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
brought to an alarm
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
stop.
Inverter sent the error code HC. Data range error.
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the allowable range was
specified. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by alarm.

269

Inverter sent the error code HD.

Not defined currently in inverter.

270

Inverter sent the error code HE.

Not defined currently in inverter.

271

Inverter sent the error code HF.

Not defined currently in inverter.

12.2.11 Error occurrence step number latch [D8157]

This device stores the step number in which the communication error has occurred.

1. Detailed contents
When M8157 turns ON, D8157 stores the step number in which communication error has occurred.
When errors have occurred in two or more instructions, D8157 holds the step number of the instruction in
which an error occurred first.
When no error has occurred, D8157 stores "-1".

E-138

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

The tables below show special auxiliary relays and special data registers used in inverter communication
(FNC270 (IVCK) to FNC275 (IVMC)).
The FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type) and FX3S PLC does not support ch2.

Description

R/W

Turns ON when the execution of inverter

communication instruction is completed, and remains
ON for 1 scan.
Turns ON also when the execution of instruction is
completed if inverter communication error flag
(M8152 or M8157) turns ON.

M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*1

Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of

communication.

M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating

Remains ON while inverter communication is being

executed.

M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*2

Turns ON when an error occurs during

communication with an inverter.

M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*2

Turns ON when an error occurs during

communication with an inverter.

Computer Link

Device No.

M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*2, *3

Turns ON when an error is caused by IVBWR

instruction.

ch1

Name

B
N:N Network

1. Bit devices

Common Items

12.3

12.3 Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

ch2

M8029

Instruction execution complete

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

*3.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Device No.

Name

ch2

Description

D8063 D8438 Error code for serial communication*4 Stores a communication error code.

R/W
R

D8151 D8156

Step number of instruction executing Stores the step number of an instruction executing
inverter communication
inverter communication.

D8152 D8157

Error code for inverter

communication*5

Stores an inverter communication error code.

Latches a step number in which an inverter

communication error has occurred.*7

Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR

instruction error has occurred.

Stores the communication type being used.

Inverter communication error

D8153 D8158
occurring step latch*5
D8154 D8159

Error parameter number of IVBWR

instruction*5*6

D8419 D8439 Operation mode display

Sets the response wait time of inverter

communication.

R/W

Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.

*5.

Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

*6.

The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*7.

Updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second error occurrence or later.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*4.

Remote
Maintenance

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

Programming
Communication

Inverter communication response

waiting time*4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

D8150 D8155

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Word devices
ch1

Parallel Link

Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.

*2.

Inverter
Communication

R: Read only (used as a contact in program)

*1.

E-139

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12.4

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

The following devices are special devices used in inverter communications.
The FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type) and FX3S PLC does not support ch2.

12.4.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029]

When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, this device turns ON.

1. Detailed contents
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for
1 scan.
When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for 1 scan
in the same way.

2. Cautions on use
M8029 is used as the execution complete flag for other instructions (such as positioning instructions).
When using M8029, provide the contact just under the instruction whose execution completion is to be
checked.

12.4.2 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]

These devices turn ON when an error occurs during communication with an inverter.

1. Detailed contents
M8063 or M8438 turns ON when a parity error, overrun error or framing error occurs during communication
with inverters or when on inverter communication error occurs.
M8063 turns ON when an error occurs during communication using ch1. When M8063 turns ON, D8063
stores the error code.
M8438 turns ON when an error occurs during communication using ch2. When M8438 turns ON, D8438
stores the error code.

2. Cautions on use
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by turning off and on the PLC.

12.4.3 Inverter communication ON [M8151 and M8156]

These devices remain ON while the communication port is used by an inverter communication instruction.

1. Detailed contents
M8151 or M8156 remains ON while communication with an inverter is executed by an inverter communication
instruction.
M8151 remains ON while communication port ch1 is used. While M8151 remains ON, D8151 stores the step
number of an instruction using the communication port.
M8156 remains ON while communication port ch2 is used. While M8156 remains ON, D8156 stores the step
number of an instruction using the communication port.

2. Cautions on use
While M8151 or M8156 remains ON, another inverter communication instruction cannot be executed.

E-140

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

A
Common Items

12.4.4 Inverter communication error [M8152, M8153, M8157 and M8158]

These devices turn ON when an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction.

1. Detailed contents

M8152 and M8157 do not turn OFF even if the communication recovers its normal status. Clear them by
switching the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.

12.4.5 IVBWR instruction error [M8154 and M8159] (only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

1. Detailed contents

2. Cautions on use
IVBWR instruction errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by turning off and on the PLC.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]

These devices store the error code when the serial communication error flag turns ON.

1. Detailed contents

Error code
Contents

D8438

6301

3801

Parity error, framing error or overrun error

6320

3820

Inverter communication error

H
Programming
Communication

D8063

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, D8063 or D8438 stores one of the following
error codes.
ch2

E
Inverter
Communication

M8154 or M8159 turns ON when a parameter number of set value specified in IVBWR instruction is outside
the allowable range.
M8154 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using communication port ch1. When M8154
turns ON, D8154 stores the rejected parameter number.
M8159 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using the communication port ch2. When M8159
turns ON, D8159 stores the rejected parameter number.

Computer Link

These devices turn ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction.

ch1

C
Parallel Link

2. Cautions on use

B
N:N Network

M8152 or M8157 turn ON when an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction.

M8152 turn ON when an error occurs during communication using communication port ch1. When M8152
turn ON, D8152 stores the error code and D8153 stores the error step number.
M8157 turn ON when an error occurs during communication using communication port ch2. When M8157
turn ON, D8157 stores the error code and D8158 stores the error step number.
To D8152, D8153, D8157 and D8158 are updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second
error occurrence or later.

2. Cautions on use
Serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by switching the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.

I
Remote
Maintenance

12.4.7 Inverter response waiting time [D8150 and D8155]

These devices set the response waiting time of the inverter.

1. Detailed contents
Set the response waiting time of an inverter.
When using communication port ch1, set a value to D8150.
When using communication port ch2, set a value to D8155.
Set a value within the range from "1 to 32767" (unit: 100 ms).
If "0" or negative value is set, it is handled as "100 ms".

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-141

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

12.4.8 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8151 and D8156]
These devices store the step number of the instruction occupying the communication port.

1. Detailed contents.
D8151 or D8156 stores the step number of the inverter communication instruction using the communication
port.
D8151 stores the step number using communication port ch1.
D8156 stores the step number using communication port ch2.

2. Cautions on use
A decimal value without sign is stored as the step number in D8151 and D8156.

12.4.9 Inverter communication error code [D8152 and D8157]

These devices store an error code when a communication error is caused by an inverter communication
instruction.

1. Detailed contents
Special data registers shown below respectively store inverter communication errors, depending on each
communication port.
D8152 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch1.
D8157 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch2.

2. Error codes
The following error codes are stored.
Error
code
(DEC)

E-142

Contents of error

Normal end (no error)

Inverter did not give response.

Timeout error. This code interlocks with M8156. Sending from inverter was
aborted midway through.

An unspecified station gave response.

The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.

In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number was specified.

At this time, the error code K6706 is set to D8067.

Because the port is being used for another communication type, it cannot be
used for communication with the inverter. At this time, the error code K6762 is
set to D8067.

A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.

At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.

Sending to the inverter was not completed within the specified time.

Wrong data was received from the inverter.

Inverter operation

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

256

Inverter sent the error code H0. Computer NAK error.

An error was included in the transfer request data from the computer beyond the
allowable number of retries.

257

Inverter sent the error code H1. Parity error.

The contents are different from the specified parity.

258

Inverter sent the error code H2. Sum check error.

The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value calculated When errors have
occurred consecutively
from the data received by the inverter.
beyond the allowable
Inverter sent the error code H3. Protocol error.
number of retries, inverter
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter, and the receiving of is brought to an alarm
data was not completed within the specified time, or CR/LF does not agree with stop.
the parameters.

261

Inverter sent the error code H5. Overrun error.

Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer sent the next
set of data.

262

Inverter sent the error code H6.

Not defined currently in inverter.

263

Inverter sent the error code H7. Character error.

An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes) is received.

264

Inverter sent the error code H8.

Not defined currently in inverter.

265

Inverter sent the error code H9.

Not defined currently in inverter.

Inverter does not accept

the received data, but is
not brought to an alarm
stop.

Inverter sent the error code HA. Mode error.

A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode or while
inverter was operating. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not
stopped by alarm.
Inverter does not accept
the received data, but is
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
not brought to an alarm
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
stop.
Inverter sent the error code HC. Data range error.
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the allowable range
was specified. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by
alarm.
Inverter sent the error code HD.
Not defined currently in inverter.

270

Inverter sent the error code HE.

Not defined currently in inverter.

271

Inverter sent the error code HF.

Not defined currently in inverter.

Programming
Communication

269

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

268

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

267

D
Computer Link

Inverter sent the error code H4. Framing error.

The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.

Inverter
Communication

260

266

Parallel Link

259

Inverter operation

N:N Network

Contents of error

Common Items

Error
code
(DEC)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-143

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

3. IVMC instruction error codes

When errors occur in the send data of the IVMC instruction, the following error codes are stored.
It is recommended to check error codes in hexadecimal.
Refer to the error code list earlier in this section for other errors.
Error code
(HEX)
IVMC
Send
Send
instruction
data2
data1
error
error
error
information information information
b15 to b8

b7 to b4

b3 to b0

H00

H0

H0

HA

H0
HB

HC

H02

HA

H0
HB

E-144

Contents of error

Inverter operation

No error has occurred in both send data 1 and

send data 2.
Normal end

The inverter sent error code HA to send data 1 of

the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while the inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 2, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
The inverter sent error code HA to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 1, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 2 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.

HC

The inverter sent error code HC to send data 2 of

the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.

HA to HC

The inverter sent error codes to both send data 1

and send data 2 of the IVMC instruction.
Refer to the contents of the error of the
corresponding error codes of send data 1 and
send data 2 for details of error codes.

HA to HC

The inverter does not

accept data
corresponding to send
data 1 and 2, but is not
brought to an alarm
stop.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

A
Common Items

12.4.10 Inverter communication error occurrence step [D8153 and D8158]

These devices store the step number in which an inverter communication error has occurred.

1. Detailed contents

A decimal value without the sign is stored as the step number in D8153 and D8158.

12.4.11 IVBWR instruction error parameter number [D8154 and D8159]

(only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

1. Detailed contents

12.4.12 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]

1. Detailed contents
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

Description
Programming communication
PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network

RS instruction

RS2 instruction

Parallel link

Inverter instruction

Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication
CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

9
10

H
Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

These devices store the communication type being used.

E
Inverter
Communication

D8154 or D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written by IVBWR instruction.
D8154 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch1.
D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch2.
When errors that occurred in two or more IVBWR instructions, D8154 or D8159 holds the parameter number
in which the error occurred first.

Computer Link

These devices store the parameter number in which an error has occurred when IVBWR instruction error flag
"M8154 or M8159" turns ON.

Code

C
Parallel Link

2. Cautions on use

B
N:N Network

D8153 or D8158 stores the step number of the instruction causing an inverter communication error.
D8153 stores the step number in which an error has occurred in communication using communication port
ch1.
D8158 stores the step number in which an error has occurred in communication using communication port
ch2.
When errors that occurred in two or more instructions, D8153 or D8158 holds the step number in which the
error occurred first.
When no error has occurred, D8153 or D8158 stores "-1".

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-145

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

This section shows the list of parameters provided in FREQROL F700, A700, E700, V500, F500, A500, E500
and S500 Series inverters.
For details on each function, refer to the respective inverter manual.

12.5.1 Parameters in V500, F500, A500, E500, and S500 Series

The following parameters are provided in FREQROL inverters. (For details, make sure to refer to the
respective inverter manual.)
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Basic
functions

Standard
operation
functions

Standard
operation
function
(V500
Series
operation
selection
functions)

E-146

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Torque boost
(manual)

Torque boost

Torque boost*3

Torque boost*3

Torque boost*3

Maximum speed
(simple mode)

Maximum
frequency

Maximum
frequency

Maximum
frequency

Maximum
frequency

Minimum speed
(simple mode)

Minimum
frequency

Minimum
frequency

Minimum
frequency

Minimum
frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency*3

Base frequency*3

Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
(simple mode)

Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
(simple mode)

Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
(simple mode)

Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)

Acceleration time
(simple mode)

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Deceleration time
(simple mode)

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

10

DC injection brake
operation speed

10

DC injection brake
operation
frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation
frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation
frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation
frequency

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

12

DC injection brake
voltage

12

DC injection brake
voltage

12

DC injection brake
voltage

12

DC injection brake
voltage

12

DC injection brake
voltage

13

Starting speed

13

Starting frequency

13

Starting frequency

13

Starting frequency

13

Starting frequency

Load pattern

Load pattern

Load pattern

14

Load pattern
selection

14

15

Jog speed setting

15

Jog frequency

15

Jog frequency

15

Jog frequency

15

Jog frequency

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

17

MRS input
selection

17

MRS input
selection

17

MRS input
selection

17

RUN key rotation

direction selection

18

High speed
maximum
frequency

18

19

Base frequency
voltage

19

Base frequency
voltage

19

selection*3

Base frequency
voltage*3

14

19

selection*3

High speed
maximum
frequency
Base frequency
voltage*3

14

19

selection*3

Base frequency
voltage*3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Pr
No.

Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment

21

Torque restriction
level

21
22

Name

20

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency

Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment

21

22

Stall prevention
operation level

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

20

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency

20

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency

Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment

21

Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment

21

Stall preventing
function selection

22

Stall prevention
operation level

22

Stall prevention
operation level

22

Stall prevention
operation level

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed

24

Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)

24

Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)

25

Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)

25

Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)

25

Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)

25

Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)

25

Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)

26

Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)

26

Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)

26

Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)

26

Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)

26

Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)

27

Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)

27

Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)

27

Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)

27

Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)

27

Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)

28

Multi-speed input
compensation

28

Multi-speed input
compensation

28

Multi-speed input
compensation

28

Stall preventing
operation
reduction starting
frequency

29

Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern

29

Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern

29

Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern

29

Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern

29

Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern

30

Regenerative
function selection

30

Regenerative
function selection

30

Regenerative
function selection

30

Regenerative
function selection

31

Speed jump 1A

31

Frequency jump
1A

31

Frequency jump
1A

31

Frequency jump
1A

31

Frequency jump
1A

32

Speed jump 1B

32

Frequency jump
1B

32

Frequency jump
1B

32

Frequency jump
1B

32

Frequency jump
1B

33

Speed jump 2A

33

Frequency jump
2A

33

Frequency jump
2A

33

Frequency jump
2A

33

Frequency jump
2A

34

Speed jump 2B

34

Frequency jump
2B

34

Frequency jump
2B

34

Frequency jump
2B

34

Frequency jump
2B

35

Speed jump 3A

35

Frequency jump
3A

35

Frequency jump
3A

35

Frequency jump
3A

35

Frequency jump
3A

36

Speed jump 3B

36

Frequency jump
3B

36

Frequency jump
3B

36

Frequency jump
3B

36

Frequency jump
3B

37

Speed display

37

Speed display

37

Speed display

37

Speed display*8

37

Speed display*8

38

Automatic torque
boost

38

Frequency at 5V
(10V) input

38

Frequency setting
voltage gain
frequency

39

Automatic torque
boost operation
starting current

39

Frequency at
20mA input

39

Frequency setting
current gain
frequency

40

Start-time ground
fault detection
selection

Up-to-speed
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

42

Speed detection

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

43

Speed detection
for reverse
rotation

43

Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation

43

Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation

43

Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation

43

Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation

E-147

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

41

Remote
Maintenance

Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)

Programming
Communication

24

Computer Link

Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

24

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)

Inverter
Communication

24

Parallel Link

Pr
No.

N:N Network

20

20

Output
terminal
functions

Name
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference speed

Standard
operation
function
(V500
Series
operation
selection
functions)

Name

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Second
functions

Display
functions

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

45

Second
deceleration time

45

Second
deceleration time

45

Second
deceleration time

45

Second
deceleration time

45

Second
deceleration time

46

Second torque
boost

46

47

Second V/F
(base frequency)

47

48

Second stall
prevention
operation current

48

Second stall
prevention
operation current

49

Second stall
prevention
operation
frequency

49

Second stall
prevention
operation
frequency

50

Second output
frequency
detection

Second V/F
(base frequency)*3

46
47

48

Second speed
detection

50

52

DU/PU main
display data
selection

52

DU/PU main
display data
selection

52

DU/PU main
display data
selection

52

53

PU level display
data selection

53

PU level display
data selection

53

PU level display
data selection

54

DA1 terminal
function selection

54

FM terminal
function selection

54

FM terminal
function selection

55

Speed monitoring
reference

55

Frequency
monitoring
reference

55

56

Current
monitoring
reference

56

Current
monitoring
reference

57

Restart coasting
time

57

58

Restart cushion
time

59

Remote setting
function selection

60

Intelligent mode
selection

Retry selection

Second V/F
(base frequency)*3

46
47

Second torque
boost*3
Second V/F
(base frequency)*3

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

Control panel
display data
selection

53

Frequency setting
operation
selection

54

FM terminal
function selection

54

FM (AM) terminal
function selection

Frequency
monitoring
reference

55

Frequency
monitoring
reference

55

Frequency
monitoring
reference

56

Current
monitoring
reference

56

Current
monitoring
reference

56

Current
monitoring
reference

Restart coasting
time

57

Restart coasting
time

57

Restart coasting
time

57

Restart coasting
time

58

Restart cushion
time

58

Restart cushion
time

58

Restart cushion
time

58

Restart cushion
time

59

Remote setting
function selection

59

Remote setting
function selection

59

Remote setting
function selection

59

Remote setting
function selection

60

Intelligent mode
selection

60

Intelligent mode
selection

60

Shortest
acceleration/
deceleration
mode

61

Reference I for
intelligent mode

61

Reference I for
intelligent mode

61

Reference current

62

Reference I for
intelligent mode
acceleration

62

Reference I for
intelligent mode
acceleration

62

Reference current
for acceleration

63

Reference I for
intelligent mode
deceleration

63

Reference I for
intelligent mode
deceleration

63

Reference current
for deceleration

64

Starting frequency
for elevator mode

65

boost*3

52

Operation
selecting
functions

Second torque

50

E-148

boost*3

Second output
frequency
detection

Restart

Additional
function

Second torque

Operation panel/
PU main display
data selection

65

Retry selection

65

Retry selection

65

Retry selection

66

66

Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency

66

Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency

67

Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

67

Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

67

Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

66

Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency

67

Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

67

Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

Retry selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

68

Retry waiting time

68

Retry waiting time

68

Retry waiting time

68

Retry waiting time

68

Retry waiting time

69

Retry count
display erasure

69

Retry count
display erasure

69

Retry count
display erase

69

Retry count
display erasure

69

Retry count
display erase

70

Special
regenerative
brake duty

70

Special
regenerative
brake duty

70

Special
regenerative
brake duty

71

Applied motor

71

Applied motor

71

Applied motor

71

Applied motor

71

Applied motor

72

PWM frequency
selection
(simple mode)

72

PWM frequency
selection

72

PWM frequency
selection

72

PWM frequency
selection

72

PWM frequency
selection

73

Speed setting
signal

73

0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection

73

0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection

73

0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection

73

0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection

74

Filter time
constant

74

Filter time
constant

74

Filter time
constant

74

Input filter time

constant

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

75

Reset selection/
PU stop selection

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

76

Alarm code output

selection

76

Alarm code output

selection

77

Parameter write
disable selection

77

Parameter write
disable selection

77

Parameter write
disable selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention
selection

79

Parameter write
disable selection
(simple mode)

78

Reverse rotation
prevention
selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention
selection

79

Operation mode
selection
(simple mode)

79

Operation mode
selection

80

Motor capacity

81

Number of motor
poles
Motor excitation
current
(no load current)

77

Parameter write
disable selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention
selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention
selection

Operation mode
selection

79

Operation mode
selection

79

Operation mode
selection

80

Motor capacity

80

Motor capacity

81

Number of motor
poles

82
*1

Motor excitation
current*5

Motor excitation
current

Rated motor
voltage

83

Rated motor
voltage

83

Rated motor
voltage

84

Rated motor
frequency

84

Rated motor
frequency

84

Rated motor
frequency

89

Speed control
gain

90

92
93

95
96

Motor constant

90

R1*1
Motor constant

91

R2*1
Motor constant

92

L1*1
Motor constant

93

L2*1
Motor constant

94

X*1
Online auto tuning
selection
(simple mode)
Auto tuning
setting/status

Motor constant
(R1)*5

Motor constant
(R1)

Motor constant
(R2)*5
Motor constant
(L1)*5
Motor constant

(L2)*5
Motor constant
(X)*5

95

Online auto tuning

selection

96

Auto tuning
setting/status

90

Remote
Maintenance

94

Programming
Communication

91

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

83

82

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

77

Inverter
Communication

82

Motor
constant

Computer Link

Pr
No.

Parallel Link

Name

N:N Network

Operation
selecting
functions

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

96

Auto tuning
setting/status

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-149

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.
100

Name
V/F 1
(first frequency)

V/F 1
101 (first frequency
voltage)
102

V/F 2 (second
frequency)

V/F 2 (second
103 frequency
voltage)
5-point
flexible
V/F
characteristics

104

V/F 3
(third frequency)

V/F 3
105 (third frequency
voltage)
106

V/F 4 (fourth
frequency)

V/F 4
107 (fourth frequency
voltage)
108

V/F 5 (fifth
frequency)

V/F 5
109 (fifth frequency
voltage)

Pr
No.
100

102

frequency)*3

V/F 2 (second
103 frequency
voltage)*3
104

V/F 3
(third frequency)*3

V/F 3
105 (third frequency
voltage)*3
106

V/F 4 (fourth
frequency)*3

V/F 4
107 (fourth frequency
voltage)*3
108

V/F 5 (fifth
frequency)*3

V/F 5
109 (fifth frequency
voltage)*3
Third acceleration
/deceleration time

111

Third deceleration
time

111

Third deceleration
time

113

Name

V/F 2 (second

110

Pr
No.

(first frequency)*3

Third acceleration
/deceleration time

Name

V/F 1

110

Pr
No.

V/F 1
101 (first frequency
voltage)*3

112

Third
functions

Name

Third torque
boost*3
Third V/F (base
frequency)*3

Third stall
114 prevention
operation current
Third stall
prevention
115
operation
frequency

Third speed
detection

117

Communication
station number

117

Communication
station number

117

Communication
station number

117

Communication
station number

118

Communication
speed

118

Communication
speed

118

Communication
speed

118

Communication
speed

119

Stop bit length/

data length

119

Stop bit length/

data length

119

Stop bit length/

data length

119 Stop bit length

CommuniParity check
cation
120 presence/
functions
absence

E-150

Third output
116 frequency
detection

116

Parity check
120 presence/
absence

Parity check
120 presence/
absence

Parity check
120 presence/
absence

Number of
121 communication
retries

Number of
121 communication
retries

Number of
121 communication
retries

Number of
121 communication
retries

Communication
122 check time
interval

Communication
122 check time
interval

Communication
122 check time
interval

Communication
122 check time
interval

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

128

PID action
selection

128

PID action
selection

128

PID action
selection

128

PID action
selection

88

PID action
selection

129

PID proportional
band

129

PID proportional
band

129

PID proportional
band

129

PID proportional
band

89

PID proportional
band

130 PID integral time

130 PID integral time

130 PID integral time

90

PID integral time

131 Maximum

131 Maximum

131 Maximum

131 Maximum

91

PID maximum

132 Minimum

132 Minimum

132 Minimum

132 Minimum

92

PID minimum

PID action set

133 point for PU
operation

PID action set

133 point for PU
operation

PID action set

133 point for PU
operation

PID action set

133 point for PU
operation

93

PID action set

point for PU
operation

94

PID differential
time

PID differential
time

134

PID differential
time

Commercial
power supplyinverter switch135
over sequence
output terminal
selection

MC switch-over
interlock time

PID differential
time

134

PID differential
time

Commercial
power supplyinverter switch135
over sequence
output terminal
selection
136

Commercial
power supply138 inverter switchover selection at
alarm occurrence

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

137 Start waiting time

Commercial
power supply138 inverter switchover selection at
alarm occurrence

Automatic
Automatic
inverterinverter139 commercial power 139 commercial power
supply switchsupply switchover frequency
over frequency

Backlash

Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time

Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time

Display
functions

Speed setting
switchover

PU display
145 language
selection

frequency*2

frequency*2

Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time*2

Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time*2

Backlash
deceleration
142 stopping

Backlash
deceleration
142 stopping

frequency*2

frequency*2

Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time*2
144

Speed setting
switchover

PU display
145 language
selection

Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time*2
144

Speed setting
switchover

PU display
145 language
selection

I
PU display
145 language
selection

n13 PU display
(145) language

Remote
Maintenance

144

Backlash
acceleration
140 stopping

Programming
Communication

Backlash
142 deceleration
stopping speed

Backlash
acceleration
140 stopping

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Backlash
140 acceleration
stopping speed

MC switch-over
interlock time

137 Start waiting time

Inverter
Communication

136

134

Computer Link

130 PID integral time

134

Commercial power
supplyinverter
switchover

Parallel Link

PID
control

Name

N:N Network

Waiting time
Waiting time
Waiting time
Waiting time
123
123
123
123
setting
setting
setting
setting
Communication
CR and LF
CR and LF
CR and LF
CR and LF
functions
124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence
selection
selection
selection
selection

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-151

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Additional
functions

Current
detection

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Stall prevention
148 operation level at
0 V input

Stall prevention
148 operation level at
0 V input

Stall prevention
149 operation level at
10 V input

Stall prevention
149 operation level at
10 V input

150

Output current
detection level

151

Output current
detection period

152

Zero current
detection level

152

153

Zero current
detection period

153

Sub
functions

Additional
function

Restart
after
instantaneous
power
failure

Initial
monitor
value

User
functions

E-152

Stall prevention
156 operation
selection

Output current
detection level

151

Output current
detection period

151

Output current
detection period

49

Output current
detection signal
delay time

Zero current
detection level

152

Zero current
detection level

152

Zero current
detection level

50

Zero current
detection level

Zero current
detection period

153

Zero current
detection period

153

Zero current
detection period

51

Zero current
detection time

RT activated
condition

Stall prevention
156 operation
selection

Voltage reduction
selection during
154
stall prevention
operation

RT signal
155 activated
condition
Stall prevention
156 operation
selection
157

OL signal waiting
time

158

DA2 terminal
function selection

158

AM terminal
function selection

158

AM terminal
function selection

Extended function
160 selection
(simple mode)

160

User group read

selection

160

User group read

selection

Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection

Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection

Stall prevention
156 operation
selection

160

First cushion time

for restart

163

First cushion time

for restart

163

First cushion time

for restart

164

First cushion
voltage for restart

164

First cushion
voltage for restart

164

First cushion
voltage for restart

165

Restart current
restriction level

Restart stall
165 prevention
operation level

User group read

selection

Restart stall
165 prevention
operation level

170

Watt-hour meter
clear

170

Watt-hour meter
clear

171

Actual operation
hour meter clear

171

Actual operation
hour meter clear

171

Actual operation
hour meter clear

173

User group 1
registration

173

User group 1
registration

173

User group 1
registration

174

User group 1
deletion

174

User group 1
deletion

174

User group 1
deletion

175

User group 2
registration

175

User group 2
registration

175

User group 2
registration

176

User group 2
deletion

176

User group 2
deletion

176

User group 2
deletion

Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection

163

48

OL signal output
waiting time

Actual operation
hour meter clear

Frequency setting
146 command
selection

Output current
detection level

157

171

Name

150

OL signal output
timer

Pr
No.

Output current
detection level

157

Name

150

Voltage reduction
selection during
154
stall prevention
operation
155

Pr
No.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

180

DI1 terminal
function selection

180

RL terminal
function selection

180

RL terminal
function selection

180

RL terminal
function selection

60

RL terminal
function selection

181

DI2 terminal
function selection

181

RM terminal
function selection

181

RM terminal
function selection

181

RM terminal
function selection

61

RM terminal
function selection

182

DI3 terminal
function selection

182

RH terminal
function selection

182

RH terminal
function selection

182

RH terminal
function selection

62

RH terminal
function selection

183

DI4 terminal
function selection

183

RT terminal
function selection

183

RT terminal
function selection

183

MRS terminal
function selection

184

AU terminal
function selection

184

AU terminal
function selection

Terminal
assignment
functions

JOG terminal
185
function selection

186

CS terminal
function selection

186

CS terminal
function selection

63

STR terminal
function selection

190

DO1 terminal
function selection

190

RUN terminal
function selection

190

RUN terminal
function selection

190

RUN terminal
function selection

64

RUN terminal
function selection

191

DO2 terminal
function selection

191

SU terminal
function selection

191

SU terminal
function selection

191

FU terminal
function selection

192

DO3 terminal
function selection

192

IPF terminal
function selection

192

IPF terminal
function selection

192

A/B/C terminal
function selection

65

A/B/C terminal
function selection

193

OL terminal
function selection

193

OL terminal
function selection

194

FU terminal
function selection

194

FU terminal
function selection

195

A/B/C terminal
function selection

195

A/B/C terminal
function selection

195

A/B/C terminal
function selection

199

User's initial value

setting

199

User's initial value

setting

201 Program set 1

202 Program set 1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

204 Program set 1

205 Program set 1
206 Program set 1
207 Program set 1
208 Program set 1

209 Program set 1

210 Program set 1

211 Program set 2

212 Program set 2

213 Program set 2
214 Program set 2

Programming
Communication

203 Program set 1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Programmed
200 operation minute/
second selection

Programmed
operation

D
Computer Link

STR terminal
function selection

Inverter
Communication

187

Additional
function

JOG terminal
185
function selection

Parallel Link

Name

N:N Network

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

215 Program set 2

Remote
Maintenance

216 Program set 2

217 Program set 2
218 Program set 2
219 Program set 2
220 Program set 2

Apx.A

221 Program set 3

Discontinued
models

222 Program set 3

223 Program set 3

E-153

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

224 Program set 3

225 Program set 3
226 Program set 3
Programmed
operation

227 Program set 3

228 Program set 3
229 Program set 3
230 Program set 3
231 Timer setting

Multispeed
operation

Multi-speed
232
setting (speed 8)

232

Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)

232

Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)

80

Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)

233

Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)

233

Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)

233

Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)

81

Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)

234

Multi-speed
setting (speed 10)

234

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
234
setting (speed 10)
setting (speed 10)

82

Multi-speed
setting (speed 10)

235

Multi-speed
setting (speed 11)

235

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
235
setting (speed 11)
setting (speed 11)

83

Multi-speed
setting (speed 11)

236

Multi-speed
setting (speed 12)

236

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
236
setting (speed 12)
setting (speed 12)

84

Multi-speed
setting (speed 12)

237

Multi-speed
setting (speed 13)

237

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
237
setting (speed 13)
setting (speed 13)

85

Multi-speed
setting (speed 13)

238

Multi-speed
setting (speed 14)

238

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
238
setting (speed 14)
setting (speed 14)

86

Multi-speed
setting (speed 14)

239

Multi-speed
setting (speed 15)

239

Multi-speed
Multi-speed
239
setting (speed 15)
setting (speed 15)

87

Multi-speed
setting (speed 15)

240 Soft-PWM setting

240 Soft-PWM setting

240 Soft-PWM setting

240 Soft-PWM setting

70

Soft-PWM setting

Cooling fan
244 operation
selection

Cooling fan
244 operation
selection

Cooling fan
244 operation
selection

Cooling fan
244 operation
selection

76

Cooling fan
operation
selection

245 Rated motor slip

95

Rated motor slip

Slip compensation
246
response time

96

Slip compensation
time constant

97

Constant-output
region slip
compensation
selection

98

Automatic torque
boost selection
(motor capacity)

Earth (ground)
249 fault detection at
start*6

99

Motor primary
resistance

250 Stop selection

250 Stop selection

Output phase
251 failure protection
selection

Sub
functions

247

Stop
selecting
function

Additional
functions

250 Stop selection

Output phase
251 failure protection
selection

Output phase
251 failure protection
selection

252 Override bias

252 Override bias

252 Override bias

253 Override gain

253 Override gain

253 Override gain

Power failure stop

selection

Subtraction speed
262 at deceleration
start
Subtraction
263
starting speed
264

E-154

Output phase
251 failure protection
selection

261
Power
failure
stop
functions

Power-failure
deceleration time 1

261

Power failure stop

selection

Subtraction
262 frequency at
deceleration start
Subtraction
263
starting frequency
264

Constant-output
region slip
compensation
selection

Power-failure
deceleration time 1

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Function
selection

Name

265

Power-failure
deceleration time 2

Power-failure
266 deceleration time
switchover speed

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

265

Power-failure
deceleration time 2

Power-failure
deceleration time
266
switchover
frequency
Stop-on-contact/
load torque high
270
speed frequency
control selection

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Current averaging
filter constant

Stop-on-contact
exciting current
275
low speed
multiplying factor

Brake opening
speed

278

279

Brake opening
current

279

current*4

281

282

Brake operation
time at start*4
Brake operation

*4

frequency

Brake operation

Brake operation
283
time at stop

283

Deceleration
284 detection function
selection

Deceleration
284 detection function
selection*4

time at stop*4

286 Droop gain

Droop filter
287
constant

287

Apx.A

Remote
Maintenance

Droop filter
constant

Programming
Communication

286 Droop gain

300

BCD code input

bias

300

BCD code input

bias

301 BCD input gain

301

BCD code input

gain

301

BCD code input

gain

302 Binary input bias

302 Binary input bias

302 Binary input bias

303 Binary input gain

303 Binary input gain

303 Binary input gain

Discontinued
models

300 BCD input bias

Overspeed
285 detection
frequency

Overspeed
detection speed

Droop function
288 activation
selection

Brake opening

Brake opening
280 current detection
time*4

Brake operation
time at start
Brake operation
speed

frequency*4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

282

Brake opening

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

281

E
Inverter
Communication

12-bit
digital
input

274

278

285

Droop
control
functions

Current averaging
range

Stop-on-contact
276 PWM carrier
frequency

Brake opening
280 current detection
time
Brake
sequence
function

273

Computer Link

Stop-oncontact

Middle speed
272 setting minimum
current

Parallel Link

High speed
271 setting maximum
current
High
speed
frequency
control

B
N:N Network

Power
failure
stop
functions

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

E-155

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

12-bit
digital
input

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Name

Digital input and

analog
304 compensation
input enable/
disable selection

Selection of
whether digital
input and analog
304
compensation
input are enabled
or disabled

Selection of
whether digital
input and analog
304
compensation
input are enabled
or disabled

Read timing
305 operation
selection

Data read timing

305 signal on/off
selection

Data read timing

305 signal on/off
selection

306

Analog output
signal selection

306

Analog output
signal selection

306

Analog output
signal selection

307

Setting for zero

analog output

307

Setting for zero

analog output

307

Setting for zero

analog output

Setting for
308 maximum analog
output

Setting for
308 maximum analog
output

Setting for
308 maximum analog
output

Analog output
Analog output
Analog output
309 signal voltage/
309 signal voltage/
309 signal voltage/
current switchover
current switchover
current switchover

Analog
output/
digital
output

Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection

Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection

Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection

Setting for zero

311 analog meter
voltage output

Setting for zero

311 analog meter
voltage output

Setting for zero

311 analog meter
voltage output

Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output

Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output

Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output

313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection

314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection
315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection
316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection
317 Y4 output selection 317 Y4 output selection 317 Y4 output selection
318 Y5 output selection 318 Y5 output selection 318 Y5 output selection
319 Y6 output selection 319 Y6 output selection 319 Y6 output selection
320

RA1 output
selection

320

RA1 output
selection

320

RA1 output
selection

321

RA2 output
selection

321

RA2 output
selection

321

RA2 output
selection

322

RA3 output
selection

322

RA3 output
selection

322

RA3 output
selection

Digital
input

329

Digital input unit

selection

Relay
output

330

RA output
selection

330

RA output
selection

330

RA output
selection

331

Communication
station number

331

Inverter station
number

331

Communication
station number

n1 Communication
(331) station number

332

Communication
speed

332

Communication
speed

n2 Communication
(332) speed

333

Stop bit length/

data length

333

Stop bit length/

data length

n3 Stop bit length/

(333) data length

Relay
output

Computer 332 Communication

speed
link
Stop bit length/
function
333
data length
(S500
Series
Parity check
communi- 334 presence/
cation
absence
parameter)
Number of
335 communication
retries

E-156

Parity check yes/

334
no
335

Communication
retry count

Parity check yes/

334
no
335

Communication
retry count

Parity check
n4
presence/
(334)
absence
Number of
n5
communication
(335)
retries

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Communication
336 check time
interval

Communication
336 check time
interval

Waiting time
337
setting

Waiting time
337
setting

Waiting time
337
setting

EEPROM write
selection

Operation
command write

338

Operation
command right

338

Operation
command source

n8 Operation
(338) command write

339

Speed command
write

339

Speed command
write

339

Speed command
source

n9 Speed command
(339) write

340

Link startup mode

selection

340

Link startup mode

selection

340

Link startup mode n10 Link start mode

(340) selection
selection

341

CR and LF yes/no
selection

341

CR and LF yes/no
selection

342

EEPROM write
selection

342

EEPROM write
selection

342

EEPROM write
selection

DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)

DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)

DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)

DeviceNet
347 address startup
data (higher byte)

DeviceNet
347 address startup
data (higher byte)

DeviceNet baud
348
rate (higher)

DeviceNet baud
348 rate startup data
(higher byte)

DeviceNet baud
348 rate startup data
(higher byte)

Stop position
350 command
selection

Stop position
350 command
selection

Orientation
switchover speed

351

n12 EEPROM write

(342) selection

Orientation
switchover speed

355

DC injection start
position

356

Internal stop
position command

359

Encoder rotation
direction

External position
360 command
selection

360

12-bit data
selection

361 Position shift

361 Position shift

Orientation
362
position loop gain

362 Position loop gain

363

I
Remote
Maintenance

Orientation
359 encoder rotation
direction

Programming
Communication

Servo torque
selection

357 In-position zone

358

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Orientation
control/
Internal stop
encoder
356
position command
feedback
control/
357 In-position zone
pulse train

input

Creep switch
position

Position loop
354 switchover
position

352 Creep speed

353

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

351

n11 CR and LF
(341) selection

Inverter
Communication

DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)

DeviceNet
347 address
(higher)

Communication
n6
check time
(336)
interval

338

DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)

DeviceNet baud
rate (lower)

Name

n7
Wait time setting
(337)

DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)

346

Pr
No.

Computer Link

DeviceNet
345 address
(lower)

Name

Parallel Link

342

Pr
No.

N:N Network

Communication
336 check time
interval
Computer
Operation
link
338
command source
function
Speed command
(S500
339
source
Series
communiLink startup mode
340
cation
selection
parameter)
CR and LF
341 presence/absence
selection

DeviceNet
communication

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Completion signal
output delay time

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-157

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

364

Encoder stop
check time

365

Orientation
censored limit

366

Reconfirmation
time

367

Speed feedback
range

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

368 Feedback gain

Number of
369 orientation
encoder pulse

Number of
369 orientation
encoder pulse
370

Torque
371 characteristic
selection

Orientation
control/
encoder
feedback
Over-speed
control/
374
detection level
pulse train
input

Control mode
selection

372

Speed control P
gain

373

Speed control I
gain

374

Over-speed
detection level

375 Servo lock gain

376

Disconnection
detection selection

380

Acceleration S
pattern 1

380

Acceleration S
pattern 1

381

Deceleration S
pattern 1

381

Deceleration S
pattern 1

382

Acceleration S
pattern 2

382

Acceleration S
pattern 2

383

Deceleration S
pattern 2

383

Deceleration S
pattern 2

Input pulse
384 division scaling
factor
385

Input pulse
384 division scaling
factor

Speed for zero

input pulse

385

Speed for
386 maximum input
pulse

Frequency for
zero input pulse

Frequency for
386 maximum input
pulse
Initial
387 communication
delay time

LONWORKS
communication

388

Send time interval

at hart beat

389

Minimum sending
time at hart beat

% setting
390 reference
frequency
Receive time
391 interval at heart
beat
392

E-158

Event-driven
detection width

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.
393

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Orientation
selection

Number of motor
side gear teeth

Orientation
Orientation speed
396
selection
gain (P term)

Orientation speed
gain (D term)

399

Orientation
deceleration ratio

400

DI11 terminal
function selection

401

DI12 terminal
function selection

402

DI13 terminal
function selection

403

DI14 terminal
function selection

DI15 terminal
404
function selection
405

D
Computer Link

398

Parallel Link

Orientation speed
integral time

DI16 terminal
function selection

High resolution
406 analog input
selection

411

DO12 terminal
function selection

412

DO13 terminal
function selection

Encoder pulse
413 output division
ratio

H
Programming
Communication

Position
419 command source
selection
Command pulse
420 scaling factor
numerator

423

Position feed
forward gain

Position
command
424 acceleration/
deceleration time
constant

I
Remote
Maintenance

Command pulse
421 scaling factor
Positioning
denominator
control
422 Position loop gain

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Extension
output

DO11 terminal
function selection

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Motor
407 temperature
detection filter
410

Inverter
Communication

Extension
input

397

N:N Network

Number of
394 machine side gear
teeth
395

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-159

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Position feed
425 forward command
filter
426 In-position width
Positioning
control

Torque
command

427

Excessive level
error

428

Command pulse
selection

429

Clear signal
selection

430

Pulse monitor
selection

432

Pulse train torque

command bias

433

Pulse train torque

command gain

434 IP address 1
435 IP address 2
436 IP address 3
437 IP address 4
438 Sub-net mask 1
Position
control

439 Sub-net mask 2

440 Sub-net mask 3
441 Sub-net mask 4
442 Gateway address 1
443 Gateway address 2
444 Gateway address 3
445 Gateway address 4
446 Password

Torque
command

Motor
constant

Position
control

447

Digital torque
command bias

448

Digital torque
command gain

450

Second applied
motor

Second motor
451 control method
selection
452

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

453

Second motor
capacity

454

Number of second
motor poles

464

Digital position
control sudden
stop deceleration
time

First position feed

465 amount lower 4
digits
First position feed
466 amount upper 4
digits
Second position
467 feed amount
lower 4 digits

E-160

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Second position
468 feed amount
upper 4 digits

B
N:N Network

Third position
469 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Third position
470 feed amount
upper 4 digits

C
Parallel Link

Fourth position
471 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Fourth position
472 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Fifth position feed
473 amount lower 4
digits

D
Computer Link

Fifth position feed

474 amount upper 4
digits
Sixth position feed
475 amount lower 4
digits

Position
control

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Seventh position
478 feed amount
upper 4 digits

Inverter
Communication

Sixth position feed

476 amount upper 4
digits
Seventh position
477 feed amount
lower 4 digits

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Eighth position
479 feed amount
lower 4 digits

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Eighth position
480 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Ninth position
481 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Ninth position
482 feed amount
upper 4 digits

H
Programming
Communication

Tenth position
483 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Tenth position
484 feed amount
upper 4 digits

I
Remote
Maintenance

Eleventh position
485 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Eleventh position
486 feed amount
upper 4 digits

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Twelfth position
487 feed amount
lower 4 digits

E-161

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Twelfth position
488 feed amount
upper 4 digits
489

Thirteenth
position feed
amount lower 4
digits

Thirteenth
position feed
490
amount upper 4
digits
Position
control

Fourteenth
position feed
491
amount lower 4
digits
492

Fourteenth
position feed
amount upper 4
digits

Fifteenth position
493 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Fifteenth position
494 feed amount
upper 4 digits

Remote
output

495

Remote output
selection

496

Remote output
data 1

497

Remote output
data 2

Action selection at
SSCNET
499
communication
interruption
CommuniCommunication
cation
500 error recognition
(F500
waiting time
Series
Communication
Advanced
PID control 501 error occurrence
count display
functions)
Stop mode
selection at
502
communication
error

Capacitor
life
(F500
Series
Advanced
PID control
functions)

Communication
500 error recognition
waiting time

Communication
500 error recognition
waiting time

Motor switch-over
501
selection

Communication
501 error occurrence
count display

Communication
501 error occurrence
count display

MC switching
502
interlock time

Communication
502 error-time stop
mode selection

Stop mode
selection at
502
communication
error

503 Start waiting time

503

Auxiliary motor
504 connection-time
deceleration time

Capacitor life
504 alarm output
setting time

500

Auxiliary motor
operation

Auxiliary motor
505 disconnection-time
acceleration time

506

Output stop
detection time

507

Output stop
detection level

Output stop
508 cancel process
value level
509

E-162

Capacitor life
timer

Auxiliary motor 1
starting frequency

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

510

Auxiliary motor 2
starting frequency

511

Auxiliary motor 3
starting frequency

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Auxiliary motor 1
512 stopping
frequency

Auxiliary motor 2
513 stopping
frequency

Auxiliary motor 3
514 stopping
frequency

803

Constant output
region torque
characteristic
selection

804

Torque command
source selection

805

Torque command
source (RAM)

Auxiliary motor
start delay time

D
611

Restart
acceleration time

Torque command
806 source (RAM,
EEPROM)
807

Speed restriction
selection

H
Programming
Communication

Forward rotation
808
speed restriction
809

Reverse rotation
speed restriction

Torque restriction
810 input method
selection
Torque restriction
812 level
(regeneration)
Torque restriction
813 level (3rd
quadrant)

Remote
Maintenance

Control
system
function
(A500
Series
vector
control)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Pre-excitation
selection

516

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

802

Auxiliary motor
start delay time

Inverter
Communication

Torque
801 characteristic
selection

515

Computer Link

Control system
800 selection
(simple mode)

Operation
selecting
function

Pr
No.

Parallel Link

Restart
after
instantaneous
power
failure

Name

N:N Network

Capacitor
life
(F500
Series
Advanced
PID control
functions)

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Torque restriction
814 level (4th
quadrant)

E-163

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Pr
No.

Name

815

Torque restriction
level 2

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Acceleration
816 torque restriction
level

Acceleration
816 torque restriction
level

Deceleration
817 torque restriction
level

Deceleration
817 torque restriction
level

818

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Easy gain tuning

response level
setting (simple
mode)

Easy gain tuning

819 selection (simple
mode)

Control
system
function
(A500
Series
vector
control)

820

Speed control P
gain 1

821

Speed control
integral time 1

822

Speed setting
filter 1

823

Speed detection
filter 1

824

Torque control P
gain 1

825

Torque control
integral time 1

826

Torque setting
filter 1

827

Torque detection
filter 1

828

Model speed
control gain

830

Speed control P
gain 2

831

Speed control
integral time 2

832

Speed setting
filter 2

833

Speed detection
filter 2

834

Torque control P
gain 2

835

Torque control
integral time 2

836

Torque setting
filter 2

837

Torque detection
filter 2

840

Torque bias
selection

841 Torque bias 1

Torque
biases

842 Torque bias 2

843 Torque bias 3
844 Torque bias filter
845

E-164

Torque bias
operation time

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Torque bias
846 balance
compensation
847

Fall-time torque
bias No. 3 bias

Fall-time torque
848
bias No. 3 gain
Analog input
offset adjustment

851

Number of
encoder pulses

852

Encoder rotation
direction

C
Parallel Link

849

854 Excitation ratio

Additional
functions

859 Torque current

862

863 Notch filter depth

864 Torque detection

Terminal
assignment
function

866

Torque monitoring
reference

867 DA1 output filter

No. 1 terminal
868 function
assignment
870

Speed deviation
level

871

Speed deviation
time

873 Speed restriction

874 OLT level setting
875 Fault definition
876

Thermal relay
protector input

Speed feed
forward/model
877
adaptive speed
control selection
878

Speed feed
forward filter

Speed feed
879 forward torque
restriction

880 Load inertia ratio

881

Speed feed
forward gain

891

Maintenance
output timer

892

Maintenance
output signal clear

Remote
Maintenance

Maintenance
890
output setting time
Maintenance
functions

Programming
Communication

Control
system
functions

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Operation
selecting
functions

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Protection
functions

Low speed
detection

Inverter
Communication

Display
functions

865

D
Computer Link

Notch filter
frequency

N:N Network

Torque
biases

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-165

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function

Calibration
functions

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name
FM terminal
calibration

900

DA1 terminal
calibration

900

FM terminal
calibration

900

FM terminal
calibration

900

901

DA2 terminal
calibration

901

AM terminal
calibration

901

AM terminal
calibration

Pr
No.

Name

C1
FM (AM) terminal
(900
calibration
(901))

902

Speed setting No.

2 bias

902

Frequency setting
voltage bias

902

Frequency setting
voltage bias

Frequency setting
C2
voltage bias
Frequency setting (902) frequency
902
voltage bias
C3 Frequency setting
(902) voltage bias

903

Speed setting No.

2 gain

903

Frequency setting
voltage gain

903

Frequency setting
voltage gain

903

Frequency setting C4 Frequency setting

voltage gain
(903) voltage gain

904

Torque command
No. 3 bias

904

Frequency setting
current bias

904

Frequency setting
current bias

Frequency setting
C5
current bias
Frequency setting (904) frequency
904
current bias
C6 Frequency setting
(904) current bias

905

Torque command
No. 3 gain

905

Frequency setting
current gain

905

Frequency setting
current gain

905

917

No. 1 terminal
bias (speed)

918

No. 1 terminal
gain (speed)

Frequency setting C7 Frequency setting

(905) current gain
current gain
Parameter set by
C8
manufacturer. Do
(269)
not set.

No. 1 terminal
919 bias (torque/
magnetic flux)
No. 1 terminal
920 gain (torque/
magnetic flux)
Built-in frequency
setting
922 potentiometer

bias*7

Built-in frequency
setting
923 potentiometer

gain*7
Motor
temperature
925
detection
calibration
926

No. 6 terminal
bias (speed)

927

No. 6 terminal
gain (speed)

928

No. 6 terminal
bias (torque)

929

No. 6 terminal
gain (torque)

990 PU buzzer control

Additional
functions

991

E-166

PU contrast
adjustment

990 PU buzzer control

991

PU contrast
adjustment

990 PU Buzzer control 990 PU buzzer control

991

PU contrast
adjustment

991

PU contrast
adjustment

n14 PU buzzer sound

(990) control
n15 PU contrast
(991) adjustment
PU main display
n16
screen data
(992)
selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Additional
functions

Pr
No.

Name

PU disconnection
n17
detection/PU
(993)
setting lock

*1.

B
N:N Network

The parameters Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 cannot be written in computer link operation using the FR-A5NR.

Common Items

FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series

Can be read or written when the parameter Pr. 77 is set to "801".

Can be read or written when the parameter Pr. 29 is set to "3".

*3.

Indicates a parameter whose setting is ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode
is selected.

*4.

Can be set when the parameters Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 are not set to "9999" and the parameter Pr. 60 is
set to "7" or "8".

*5.

Can be read or written when the parameters Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 are not set to "9999" and the parameter
Pr. 77 is set to "801".

*6.

Can be set only in the 200 V/100 V class.

*7.

Cannot be used in inverter communication.

*8.

This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr. 37.

Set Pr. 37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr. 37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency
may not be set or monitored normally (in the 400 V class of the E500 series and S500 series).
(In the 200 V and 100 V classes of the E500 series, the frequency may not be set or monitored
normally if any value other than "0" is set to Pr. 37 without regard to the setting of the instruction code
HFF.)

C
Parallel Link

*2.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-167

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

12.5.2 Parameters in F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series

The following parameters are provided in the F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series inverters. (For details, make
sure to refer to the respective inverter manual.)
FREQROL F700 Series
Function

Basic functions

DC injection
brake

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

Torque boost

Torque boost

Torque boost

Torque boost

Maximum frequency

Maximum frequency

Maximum frequency

Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Minimum frequency

Minimum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency

Base frequency

Multispeed setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed setting
(high speed)

Multi-speed setting
(high speed)

Multispeed setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)

Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)

Multispeed setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed setting
(low speed)

Multi-speed setting
(low speed)

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Deceleration time

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

10

DC injection brake
operation frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation frequency

10

DC injection brake
operation frequency

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

11

DC injection brake
operation time

12

DC injection brake
operation voltage

12

DC injection brake
operation voltage

12

DC injection brake
operation voltage

12

DC injection brake
operation voltage

13 Starting frequency

14 Load pattern selection

14 Load pattern selection

14 Load pattern selection

14 Load pattern selection

15 Jog frequency

15 Jog frequency

15 Jog frequency

15 Jog frequency

Jog operation

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

13 Starting frequency

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

13 Starting frequency

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

13 Starting frequency

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

17 MRS input selection

18

19 Base frequency voltage

19 Base frequency voltage

19 Base frequency voltage

19 Base frequency voltage

Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency

Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency

Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency

Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency

Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments

Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments

Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments
22

Stall prevention
operation level

22

Stall prevention
operation level

Acceleration/
deceleration
times

Multispeed
setting

High speed maximum

frequency

17 MRS input selection

18

High speed maximum

frequency

17 MRS input selection

18

High speed maximum

frequency

17 MRS input selection

18

High speed maximum

frequency

22

Stall prevention
operation level

Stall prevention
22 operation level
(torque limit level )

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed

24

Multi-speed setting
(speed 4)

24

Multi-speed setting
(speed 4)

24

Multi-speed setting
(speed 4)

24

Multi-speed setting
(speed 4)

25

Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)

25

Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)

25

Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)

25

Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)

26

Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)

26

Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)

26

Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)

26

Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)

27

Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)

27

Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)

27

Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)

27

Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)

28

Multi-speed input
compensation selection

28

Multi-speed input
compensation selection

Stall prevention

E-168

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection

30

Regenerative function
selection

Name

Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30

Regenerative function
selection

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30

Regenerative function
selection

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30

Regenerative function
selection

31 Frequency jump 1A

31 Frequency jump 1A

31 Frequency jump 1A

32 Frequency jump 1B

32 Frequency jump 1B

32 Frequency jump 1B

32 Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 33 Frequency jump 2A

33 Frequency jump 2A

33 Frequency jump 2A

33 Frequency jump 2A

34 Frequency jump 2B

34 Frequency jump 2B

34 Frequency jump 2B

34 Frequency jump 2B

35 Frequency jump 3A

35 Frequency jump 3A

35 Frequency jump 3A

35 Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 36 Frequency jump 3B

36 Frequency jump 3B

36 Frequency jump 3B

36 Frequency jump 3B

37 Speed display

37 Speed display*1

37 Speed display*1

40

RUN key rotation

direction selection

40

RUN key rotation

direction selection

41

Uptofrequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

41

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

42

Output frequency
detection

Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation

Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation

Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation

Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation

44

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

44

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

45

Second deceleration
time

45

Second deceleration
time

45

Second deceleration
time

45

Second deceleration
time

46 Second torque boost

46 Second torque boost

46 Second torque boost

46 Second torque boost

Second V/F
47
(base frequency)

Second V/F
47
(base frequency)

Second V/F
47
(base frequency)

47

Second V/F
(base frequency)

Second stall prevention

48
operation current

Second stall prevention

48
operation current

Second stall prevention

48
operation current

Second stall prevention

48
operation current

49

Second stall prevention

operation frequency

49

Second stall prevention

operation frequency

50

Second output
frequency detection

50

Second output
frequency detection

51

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

51

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

51

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

51

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay

52

DU/PU main display

data selection

52

DU/PU main display

data selection

52

DU/PU main display

data selection

52

DU/PU main display

data selection

54

FM terminal function
selection

54

FM terminal function
selection

54

FM terminal function
selection

54

FM terminal function
selection

55

Frequency monitoring
reference

55

Frequency monitoring
reference

55

Frequency monitoring
reference

55

Frequency monitoring
reference

56

Current monitoring
reference

56

Current monitoring
reference

56

Current monitoring
reference

56

Current monitoring
reference

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

57 Restart coasting time

57 Restart coasting time

57 Restart coasting time

57 Restart coasting time

Programming
Communication

Automatic
restart functions

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Monitor
functions

Inverter
Communication

Second
functions

Computer Link

Frequency
detection

37 Speed display

C
Parallel Link

31 Frequency jump 1A

B
N:N Network

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

58 Restart cushion time

58 Restart cushion time

58 Restart cushion time

58 Restart cushion time

59

Remote function
selection

59

Remote function
selection

59

Remote function
selection

59

Remote function
selection

60

Energy saving control

selection

60

Energy saving control

selection

60

Energy saving control

selection

60

Energy saving control

selection

Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-169

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Automatic
acceleration
/deceleration

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

61 Reference current

61 Reference current

Reference value at
62
acceleration

62

Reference value at
acceleration

63

Reference value at
deceleration

63

Reference value at
deceleration

64

Starting frequency for

elevator mode

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

65 Retry selection

65 Retry selection

65 Retry selection

65 Retry selection

Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency

Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency

Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency

Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency

67
Retry

Number of retries at
alarm occurrence

67

Number of retries at
alarm occurrence

67

Number of retries at
fault occurrence

67

Number of retries at
fault occurrence

68 Retry waiting time

68 Retry waiting time

68 Retry waiting time

68 Retry waiting time

Retry count display

69
erase

Retry count display

69
erase

Retry count display

69
erase

69

Retry count display

erase

70

Special regenerative
brake duty

Special regenerative
brake duty

Special regenerative
brake duty

Special regenerative
brake duty

70

71 Applied motor

71 Applied motor

71 Applied motor

71 Applied motor

PWM frequency
72
selection

PWM frequency
72
selection

PWM frequency
72
selection

72

73 Analog input selection

73 Analog input selection

73 Analog input selection

73 Analog input selection

74 Input filter time constant 74 Input filter time constant 74 Input filter time constant

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

75

76

Alarm code output

selection

76

Alarm code output

selection

77

Parameter write
selection

77

Parameter write
selection

77

Parameter write
selection

77

Parameter write
selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention selection

78

Reverse rotation
prevention selection

79

Operation mode
selection

79

Operation mode
selection

79

Operation mode
selection

79

Operation mode
selection

Motor capacity
80 (simple magnetic flux
vector control)
Simple
magnetic
flux vector
control

70

90 Motor constant (R1)

70

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

PWM frequency
selection

74 Input filter time constant

75

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection

80 Motor capacity

80 Motor capacity

81 Number of motor poles

81 Number of motor poles

82 Motor excitation current

82 Motor excitation current

82 Motor excitation current

83 Motor rated voltage

83 Motor rated voltage

83 Motor rated voltage

84 Rated motor frequency

84 Rated motor frequency

84 Rated motor frequency

89

E-170

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Speed control gain

(magnetic flux vector)

Speed control gain

89 (advanced magnetic
flux vector)

90 Motor constant (R1)

90 Motor constant (R1)

91 Motor constant (R2)

91 Motor constant (R2)

92 Motor constant (L1)

92 Motor constant (L1)

93 Motor constant (L2)

93 Motor constant (L2)

94 Motor constant (X)

94 Motor constant (X)

95

Online auto tuning

selection

96

Auto tuning setting/

status

96

80 Motor capacity
-

90 Motor constant (R1)

Auto tuning setting/

status

96

Auto tuning setting/

status

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

100 V/F1 (first frequency)

100 V/F1(first frequency)

V/F1 (first frequency

101
voltage)

101

V/F2 (second
102
frequency)

102 V/F2(second frequency)

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

V/F1(first frequency
voltage)

B
N:N Network

103
Adjustable 5
points V/F

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

V/F2 (second frequency

V/F2(second frequency
103
voltage)
voltage)

104 V/F3 (third frequency)

104 V/F3(third frequency)

V/F3 (third frequency

105
voltage)

105

106 V/F4 (fourth frequency)

106 V/F4(fourth frequency)

V/F4 (fourth frequency

107
voltage)

107

108 V/F5 (fifth frequency)

108 V/F5(fifth frequency)

V/F5 (fifth frequency

109
voltage)

109

V/F5(fifth frequency
voltage)

110

Third acceleration/
deceleration time

C
Parallel Link

V/F3(third frequency
voltage)
V/F4(fourth frequency
voltage)
-

D
Computer Link

111 Third deceleration time

112 Third torque boost
-

113

Third V/F (base

frequency)

114

Third stall prevention

operation current

115

Third stall prevention

operation frequency

116

Third output frequency

detection

PU communication
117
station number

PU communication
speed

119

PU communication stop
PU communication stop
PU communication stop
PU communication stop
119
119
119
bit length.
bit length
bit length
bit length

118

PU communication
speed

120

PU communication
parity check

120

PU communication
parity check

120

PU communication
parity check

Number of PU
communication retries

121

Number of PU
communication retries

121

Number of PU
communication retries

121

Number of PU
communication retries

122

PU communication
check time interval

122

PU communication
check time interval

122

PU communication
check time interval

122

PU communication
check time interval

123

PU communication
waiting time setting

123

PU communication
waiting time setting

123

PU communication
waiting time setting

123

PU communication
waiting time setting

PU communication CR/
PU communication CR/
PU connector
PU communication
124 LF presence/absence
124 LF presence/absence
124
communication
CR/LF selection
selection
selection

124

PU communication
CR/LF selection

125

Terminal 2 frequency
Terminal 2 frequency
125
setting gain frequency
setting gain frequency

125

Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency

125

Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency

126

Terminal 4 frequency
Terminal 4 frequency
126
setting gain frequency
setting gain frequency

126

Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency

126

Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency

I
Remote
Maintenance

Programming
Communication

121

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PU connector
PU communication
120
communication
parity check

118

PU communication
speed

PU communication
117
station number

118

118

PU communication
speed

PU communication
117
station number

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

PU communication
117
station

E
Inverter
Communication

Third
functions

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-171

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.
127

PID operation

Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.
127

Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.
127

Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.
127

Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency

128 PID action selection

128 PID action selection

128 PID action selection

128 PID action selection

129 PID proportional band

129 PID proportional band

129 PID proportional band

129 PID proportional band

130 PID integral time

130 PID integral time

130 PID integral time

130 PID integral time

131 PID maximum

131 PID upper limit

131 PID upper limit

131 PID upper limit

132 PID minimum

132 PID lower limit

132 PID lower limit

132 PID lower limit

133 PID action set point

133 PID action set point

133 PID action set point

133 PID action set point

134 PID differential time

134 PID differential time

134 PID differential time

134 PID differential time

Commercial powersupply switchover

135
sequence output
terminal selection

135

136

Electronic bypass
sequence selection

MC switchover interlock
MC switchover interlock
136
time
time

Commercial
137 Waiting time at a start
power
Commercial powersupply-inverter
supply operation
switch-over
138
switchover selection at
an alarm

137 Start waiting time

138

Bypass selection at an
alarm

139

Automatic switchover
Automatic switchover
frequency between
139 frequency from inverter
inverter and commercial
to bypass operation
power-supply operation

140

Backlash acceleration
stopping frequency

140

Backlash acceleration
stopping frequency

141

Backlash acceleration
stopping time

141

Backlash acceleration
stopping time

142

Backlash deceleration
stopping frequency

142

Backlash deceleration
stopping frequency

143

Backlash deceleration
stopping time

143

Backlash deceleration
stopping time

144

Speed setting
switchover

144

Speed setting
switchover

PU

145

PU display language
selection

145

PU display language
selection

148

Stall prevention level at

0V input.

148

Stall prevention level at

0V input

149

Stall prevention level at

10V input.

149

Stall prevention level at

10V input

150

Output current detection

Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
150
150
150
level
level
level
level

151

Output current detection

Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
151
151
151
signal delay time
signal delay time
signal delay time
signal delay time

152

Zero current detection

level

152

Zero current detection

level

152

Zero current detection

level

152

Zero current detection

level

153

Zero current detection

time

153

Zero current detection

time

153

Zero current detection

time

153

Zero current detection

time

Backlash
measures

Current
detection

E-172

Voltage reduction
154 selection during stall
prevention operation

RT signal function
RT signal reflection time
155
155 validity condition
selection
selection

156

Stall prevention
operation selection

Voltage reduction
154 selection during stall
prevention operation

156

Stall prevention
operation selection

145

PU display language
selection

145

PU display language
selection

146

Built-in potentiometer
switching

146

Built-in potentiometer
switching

156

Stall prevention
operation selection

156

Stall prevention
operation selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

157 OL signal output timer

157 OL signal output timer

AM terminal function
158
selection

AM terminal function
158
selection

Automatic switchover
ON range
159 between commercial
powersupply and
inverter operation

Automatic switchover
frequency range from
159
bypass to inverter
operation

160

Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
161
161
161
161
lock operation selection
lock operation selection
lock operation selection
lock operation selection

163
164

First cushion time for

restart

Automatic restart after

162 instantaneous power
failure selection

Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart

166

Output current detection

Output current detection
166
signal retention time
signal retention time

167

Output current detection

Output current detection
167
operation selection
operation selection

170

Cumulative power
meter clear

170 Watt-hour meter clear

171

Operation hour meter

clear

171

Operation hour meter

clear

171

Operation hour meter

clear

172

User group registered

display/batch clear

172

User group registered

display/batch clear

172

User group registered

display/batch clear

160

170 Watt-hour meter clear

173 User group registration

173 User group registration

174 User group clear

174 User group clear

174 User group clear

Extended function
display selection

Automatic restart after

162 instantaneous power
failure selection

Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
166

Output current detection

signal retention time

167

Output current detection

operation selection

170 Watt-hour meter clear

Operation hour meter
clear

173 User group registration

171

178

STF terminal function

selection

178

STF terminal function

selection

178

STF terminal function

selection

178

STF terminal function

selection

179

STR terminal function

selection

179

STR terminal function

selection

179

STR terminal function

selection

179

STR terminal function

selection

180

RL terminal function
selection

180

RL terminal function
selection

180

RL terminal function
selection

180

RL terminal function
selection

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

181

RM terminal function
selection

181

RM terminal function
selection

181

RM terminal function
selection

181

RM terminal function
selection

RH terminal function
182
selection

RH terminal function
182
selection

RT terminal function
selection

183

RT terminal function
selection

183

MRS terminal function

selection

184

AU terminal function
selection

184

AU terminal function
selection

184

RES terminal function

selection

185

JOG terminal function

selection

185

JOG terminal function

selection

186

CS terminal function
selection

186

CS terminal function
selection

187

MRS terminal function

selection

187

MRS terminal function

selection

188

STOP terminal function

selection

188

STOP terminal function

selection

189

RES terminal function

selection

189

RES terminal function

selection

Remote
Maintenance

183

RH terminal function
182
selection

Programming
Communication

RH terminal function
182
selection
Input terminal
function
assignment

Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart

User group read

selection

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

User group

First cushion time for

restart

160

Inverter
Communication

Cumulative
monitor clear

163

First cushion voltage for

First cushion voltage for
164
restart
restart

Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
Current
detection

Automatic restart after

162 instantaneous power
failure selection

Computer Link

Automatic
restart functions

User group read

selection

Parallel Link

Automatic restart after

162 instantaneous power
failure selection

160

157 OL signal output timer

N:N Network

User group read

selection

157 OL signal output timer

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-173

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.

Name

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

190

RUN terminal function

selection

190

RUN terminal function

selection

190

RUN terminal function

selection

191

SU terminal function
selection

191

SU terminal function
selection

191

FU terminal function
selection

192

IPF terminal function

selection

192

IPF terminal function

selection

192

193

OL terminal function
selection

194

FU terminal function
selection

Output terminal
OL terminal function
function
193
selection
assignment
FU terminal function
194
selection

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.
190

Name
RUN terminal function
selection

A,B,C terminal function

selection

192

A,B,C terminal function

selection

195

ABC1 terminal function

selection

195

ABC1 terminal function

selection

196

ABC2 terminal function

selection

196

ABC2 terminal function

selection

232

Multispeed setting
(speed 8)

232

Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)

232

Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)

232

Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)

233

Multispeed setting
(speed 9)

233

Multi-speed setting
(speed 9)

233

Multi-speed setting
(speed 9)

233

Multi-speed setting
(speed 9)

234

Multispeed setting
(speed 10)

234

Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)

234

Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)

234

Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)

235

Multispeed setting
(speed 11)

235

Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)

235

Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)

235

Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)

236

Multispeed setting
(speed 12)

236

Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)

236

Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)

236

Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)

237

Multispeed setting
(speed 13)

237

Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)

237

Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)

237

Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)

238

Multispeed setting
(speed 14)

238

Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)

238

Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)

238

Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)

239

Multispeed setting
(speed 15)

239

Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)

239

Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)

239

Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)

240

SoftPWM operation
selection

240

Soft-PWM operation
selection

240

Soft-PWM operation
selection

240

Soft-PWM operation
selection

241

Analog input display

unit switchover

241

Analog input display

unit switchover

241

Analog input display

unit switchover

241

Analog input display

unit switchover

Terminal 1 added
242 compensation amount
(terminal 2)

Terminal 1 added
242 compensation amount
(terminal 2)

Terminal 1 added
243 compensation amount
(terminal 4)

Terminal 1 added
243 compensation amount
(terminal 4)

244

Multispeed
setting

Multispeed
setting

Slip
compensation

Cooling fan operation

selection

244

Cooling fan operation

selection

244

Cooling fan operation

selection

244

Cooling fan operation

selection

245 Rated slip

245 Rated slip

245 Rated slip

245 Rated slip

Slip compensation time

246
constant

Slip compensation time

246
constant

Slip compensation time

246
constant

246

Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection

Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection

Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection

Constant-power range
247 slip compensation
selection

250 Stop selection

251

Frequency
compensation
function

E-174

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Output phase failure

protection selection

250 Stop selection

251

Output phase failure

protection selection

252 Override bias

252 Override bias

253 Override gain

253 Override gain

249

Earth (ground) fault

detection at start

250 Stop selection

251

Output phase loss

protection selection

249

Slip compensation time

constant

Earth (ground) fault

detection at start

250 Stop selection

251

Output phase loss

protection selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display
256

256

Inrush current limit

circuit life display

256

Inrush current limit

circuit life display

Control circuit capacitor

Control circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
257
257
257
257
life display
life display
life display
life display
258

Main circuit capacitor

life display

258

Main circuit capacitor

life display

258

Main circuit capacitor

life display

258

Main circuit capacitor

life display

259

Main circuit capacitor

life measuring

259

Main circuit capacitor

life measuring

259

Main circuit capacitor

life measuring

259

Main circuit capacitor

life measuring

260

PWM frequency
automatic switchover

260

PWM frequency
automatic switchover

261

Power failure stop

selection

261

Power failure stop

selection

262

Subtracted frequency at
Subtracted frequency at
262
deceleration start
deceleration start

263

Subtraction starting
frequency

263

Subtraction starting
frequency

264

Powerfailure
deceleration time 1

264

Power-failure
deceleration time 1

261

Power failure stop

selection

Power-failure
265
deceleration time 2

Power failure
266 deceleration time
switchover frequency

Power failure
266 deceleration time
switchover frequency

261

Power failure stop

selection

267

Terminal 4 input
selection

267

Terminal 4 input
selection

267

Terminal 4 input
selection

267

Terminal 4 input
selection

268

Monitor decimal digits

selection

268

Monitor decimal digits

selection

268

Monitor decimal digits

selection

268

Monitor decimal digits

selection

272

Middle-speed setting
minimum current

273

Current averaging
range

274

Current averaging filter

time constant

Stop-on contact
Stop-on contact
excitation current
275 excitation current low
275
low speed multiplying
speed multiplying factor
factor
276

PWM carrier frequency

at stop-on contact

276

H
Programming
Communication

Stop-on contact control

High-speed setting
maximum current

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Load torque
high speed frequency control

271

Stop-on contact control

270
selection

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Stop-on contact/load
torque high speed
270
frequency control
selection

Inverter
Communication

Powerfailure
265
deceleration time 2

Computer Link

Power failure
stop

Inrush current limit

circuit life display

Parallel Link

256

N:N Network

Life check

Inrush current limit

circuit life display

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

PWM carrier frequency

at stop-on contact

Stall prevention
277 operation current
switchover

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-175

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.

Name

Brake
sequence
function

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.
278

Name

Name

Brake opening
frequency

278

Brake opening
frequency

279 Brake opening current

279 Brake opening current

Brake opening current

280
detection time

280

Brake opening current

detection time

281

Brake operation time at

start

281

Brake operation time at

start

282

Brake operation
frequency

282

Brake operation
frequency

283

Brake operation time at

stop

283

Brake operation time at

stop

284

Deceleration detection
function selection
-

Overspeed detection
frequency (Speed
285
deviation excess
detection frequency)
-

Droop control

286 Droop gain

286 Droop gain

Droop filter time

287
constant

287

288

Droop function
activation selection

291 Pulse train I/O selection

292

Acceleration/
293 deceleration separate
selection

294

UV avoidance voltage
gain

Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting

Magnitude of frequency
Magnitude of frequency
295
change setting
change setting

Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting

Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting

302 BIN input bias

302 BIN input bias

Read timing operation

selection

297 Password lock/unlock

298 Frequency search gain

300 BCD input bias

296 Password lock level

298 Frequency search gain

301 BCD input gain

305

E-176

Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting

300 BCD input bias

Digital input and analog

304 input compensation
enable/disable selection

Droop filter time

constant

301 BCD input gain

303 BIN input gain

Name

Acceleration/
293 deceleration separate
selection

295

Password
function

Digital input

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Automatic acceleration/
Automatic acceleration/
292
deceleration
deceleration

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

303 BIN input gain

Digital input and analog
304 input compensation
enable/disable selection
305

Read timing operation

selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

306

Analog output signal

selection

306

Analog output signal

selection

307

Setting for zero analog

output

307

Setting for zero analog

output

308

Setting for maximum

analog output

308

Setting for maximum

analog output

Analog output signal

309 voltage/current
switchover
Analog meter voltage
output selection

310

Analog meter voltage

output selection

311

Setting for zero analog

meter voltage output

311

Setting for zero analog

meter voltage output

Setting for maximum

312 analog meter voltage
output

Setting for maximum

312 analog meter voltage
output

314 DO1 output selection

314 DO1 output selection

315 DO2 output selection

315 DO2 output selection

316 DO3 output selection

316 DO3 output selection

317 DO4 output selection

317 DO4 output selection

318 DO5 output selection

318 DO5 output selection

319 DO6 output selection

319 DO6 output selection

320 RA1 output selection

320 RA1 output selection

321 RA2 output selection

321 RA2 output selection

322 RA3 output selection

322 RA3 output selection

323 AM0 0V adjustment

323 AM0 0V adjustment

324 AM1 0mA adjustment

324 AM1 0mA adjustment

329

Digital input unit

selection

331

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
331
station number
station

332

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
332
speed
speed

313 DO0 output selection

329

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Computer Link

Analog output

Inverter
Communication

Relay output

Name

Analog output signal

309 voltage/current
switchover

310

313 DO0 output selection

Digital output

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Parallel Link

Analog output

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

N:N Network

Analog output

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Digital input unit

selection

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
335
number of retries
retry count

336

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
336
check time interval
check time interval

337

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
337
waiting time setting
waiting time setting

H
Programming
Communication

335

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
333
333
stop bit length
stop bit length
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
RS-485
334
334
parity check selection
parity check selection
communication

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-177

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.

Name

Communication
338 operation command
source

RS-485
communication

Communication
338 operation command
source

Name

Communication
338 operation command
source

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

Communication
338 operation command
source

Communication speed
command source

339

Communication speed
command source

339

Communication speed
command source

339

Communication speed
command source

340

Communication startup
mode selection

340

Communication startup
mode selection

340

Communication startup
mode selection

340

Communication startup
mode selection

341

RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
341
CR/LF selection
CR/LF selection

343

CCLink

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

339

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection

DeviceNet

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Communication error
count

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343

Communication error
count

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343

Communication error
count

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343

Communication error
count

345 DeviceNet address

346 DeviceNet baud rate
Communication reset
349
selection

380 Acceleration S-pattern 1

381

S-pattern
acceleration/
deceleration C

382 Acceleration S-pattern 2

383

Pulse train input

LONWORKS

communication

Deceleration S-pattern
1

387

Initial communication
delay time

388

Send time interval at

heart beat

389

Minimum sending time

at heart beat

390

% setting reference
frequency

391

Receive time interval at

heart beat

392

Event driven detection

width

Deceleration S-pattern
2

Input pulse division

384
scaling factor
385

Frequency for 0 input

pulse

386

Frequency for
maximum input pulse

450 Second applied motor

450 Second applied motor

450 Second applied motor

Second motor control

451
method selection
453 Second motor capacity

Second motor
constants

E-178

454

Number of second
motor poles

455

Second motor excitation

current

456

Rated second motor

voltage

457

Rated second motor

frequency

458

Second motor constant

(R1)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Remote output

Remote output
selection

Second motor constant

(R2)

460

Second motor constant

(L1)

461

Second motor constant

(L2)

462

Second motor constant

(X)

463

Second motor auto

tuning setting/status

495

Remote output
selection

495

Remote output
selection

496 Remote output data 1

497 Remote output data 2

497 Remote output data 2

Stop mode selection at

communication error

Communication error
execution waiting time

Communication error
501 occurrence count
display
502

Stop mode selection at

communication error

495

Remote output
selection

496 Remote output data 1

502

Stop mode selection at

communication error

503 Maintenance timer

503 Maintenance timer

503 Maintenance timer

Maintenance timer
504
alarm output set time

Maintenance timer
504
alarm output set time

Maintenance timer
504
alarm output set time

Maintenance timer
504
alarm output set time

516

S-pattern time at a start

of acceleration

S-pattern time at a
517 completion of
acceleration

541

Frequency command
sign selection (CC-Link)

542

Communication station
number (CCLink)

543

Baud rate selection

(CC-Link)

544

CC-Link extended
setting

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

S-pattern time at a start

518
of deceleration
S-pattern time at a
519 completion of
deceleration

CCLink

Communication station
number (CCLink)

543 Baud rate (CCLink)

544

USB communication
station number

547

USB communication
station number

548

USB communication
check time interval

548

USB communication
check time interval

549 Protocol selection

549 Protocol selection

NET mode operation

550 command source
selection

NET mode operation

550 command source
selection

PU mode operation
551 command source
selection

PU mode operation
551 command source
selection

PU mode operation
551 command source
selection

PU mode operation
551 command source
selection

555 Current average time

555 Current average time

555 Current average time

555 Current average time

556 Data output mask time

556 Data output mask time

556 Data output mask time

556 Data output mask time

Current average value

557 monitor signal output
reference current

Current average value

557 monitor signal output
reference current

Current average value

557 monitor signal output
reference current

Current average value

557 monitor signal output
reference current

E-179

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

549 Protocol selection

Remote
Maintenance

549 Protocol selection

NET mode operation

550 command source
Communication
selection

Current
average
monitor

547

Programming
Communication

USB

CC-Link extended
setting

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

542

E
Inverter
Communication

503 Maintenance timer

Computer Link

502

500

496 Remote output data 1

Communication error
Communication
501 occurrence count
error
display

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D

497 Remote output data 2

Communication error
execution waiting time

Name

496 Remote output data 1

500

Maintenance

459

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Parallel Link

495

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

N:N Network

Second motor
constants

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

FREQROL A700 Series

Function

563

Energization time
carrying-over times

563

Energization time
carrying-over times

563

564

Operating time
carryingover times

564

Operating time
carryingover times

564

569

Second motor
control gain

PID control

Name

Pr
No.

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

571 Holding time at a start

Name

Pr
No.

speed

571 Holding time at a start

Second motor
574
auto tuning

Name

Name

561

PTC thermistor
protection level

Energization time
carrying-over times

563

Energization time
carrying-over times

Operating time
carryingover times

564

Operating time
carryingover times

571 Holding time at a start

online

575

Output interruption
detection time

575

Output
interruption
detection time

576

Output interruption
detection level

576

Output
interruption
detection level

577

Output interruption
release level

577

Output
interruption
cancel level

611

Acceleration time at a
restart

611

Acceleration time at a
restart

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

571 Holding time at a start

575

Output interruption
detection time

576

Output interruption
detection level

577

Output interruption
cancel level

611

Acceleration time at a
restart

611

Acceleration time at a
restart

Speed smoothing
control

653

Speed smoothing
control

653

Regeneration
665 avoidance frequency
gain

684

Tuning data unit

switchover

800

Control method
selection

800

Regeneration
665 avoidance frequency
gain

Control method
selection

Constant power range

803 torque characteristic
selection
Torque
command

Speed limit

Torque limit

804

Torque command
source selection

805

Torque command value

(RAM)

806

Torque command value

(RAM,EEPROM)

807 Speed limit selection

808

Forward rotation speed

limit

809

Reverse rotation speed

limit

810

Torque limit input

method selection

811

Set resolution
switchover

812

Torque limit level

(regeneration)

813

Torque limit level

(3rd quadrant)

814

Torque limit level

(4th quadrant)

815 Torque limit level 2

E-180

816

Torque limit level during

acceleration

817

Torque limit level during

deceleration

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

Easy gain
tuning

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name
Easy gain tuning
response level setting

819

Easy gain tuning

selection

Name

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

B
N:N Network

818

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

820 Speed control P gain 1

821

Speed control integral

time 1

822 Speed setting filter 1

824 Torque control P gain 1

Torque control integral
time 1

Parallel Link

825

826 Torque setting filter 1

827 Torque detection filter 1
Adjustment
function

828

Model speed control

gain

831

Computer Link

830 Speed control P gain 2

Speed control integral
time 2

832 Speed setting filter2

834 Torque control P gain 2

835

Inverter
Communication

Torque control integral

time 2

836 Torque setting filter2

837 Torque detection filter 2
Analog input off set
adjustment

850

Control operation
selection

858

Terminal 4 function
assignment

859 Torque current

Torque bias

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

849

859 Torque current

Second motor torque

860
current

Notch filter time

constant

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

862

863 Notch filter depth

864 Torque detection
865 Low speed detection
Indication
function

Protective
Functions

867 AM output filter

872

Input phase failure

protection selection

Torque monitoring
reference

867 AM output filter

868

Terminal 1 function
assignment

872

Input phase failure

protection selection

874 OLT level setting

Input phase loss

protection selection

872

Input phase loss

protection selection

I
Remote
Maintenance

875 Fault definition

872

Programming
Communication

866

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-181

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

FREQROL D700 Series

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Speed feed forward

877 control/model adaptive
speed control selection
Control system
functions

878

Speed feed forward

filter

879

Speed feed forward

torque limit

880 Load inertia ratio

881

Regeneration
avoidance
function

Speed feed forward

gain

Regeneration
882 avoidance operation
selection

Regeneration
882 avoidance operation
selection

Regeneration
882 avoidance operation
selection

Regeneration
882 avoidance operation
selection

Regeneration
883 avoidance operation
level

Regeneration
883 avoidance operation
level

Regeneration
883 avoidance operation
level

Regeneration
883 avoidance operation
level

Regeneration
avoidance at
884
deceleration detection
sensitivity

Regeneration
avoidance at
884
deceleration detection
sensitivity

Regeneration avoidance
Regeneration avoidance
Regeneration avoidance
Regeneration avoidance
885 compensation
885 compensation
885 compensation
885 compensation
frequency limit value
frequency limit value
frequency limit value
frequency limit value
886
Free parameter

Energy saving
monitor

E-182

Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain

886

Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain

886

Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain

886

Regeneration avoidance
voltage gain

888 Free parameter 1

888 Free parameter 1

888 Free parameter 1

888 Free parameter 1

889 Free parameter 2

889 Free parameter 2

889 Free parameter 2

889 Free parameter 2

Cumulative power
891 monitor digit shifted
times

Cumulative power
891 monitor digit shifted
times

892 Load factor

892 Load factor

Energy saving monitor

893 reference
(motor capacity)

Energy saving monitor

893 reference
(motor capacity)

Control selection during

Control selection during
894 commercial power
894 commercial powersupply operation
supply operation
Power saving rate
895
reference value

Power saving rate

895
reference value

896 Power unit cost

896 Power unit cost

Power saving monitor

897
average time

897

Power saving monitor

average time

898

Power saving
Power saving
898
cumulative monitor clear
cumulative monitor clear

899

Operation time rate

(estimated value)

899

Operation time rate

(estimated value)

Cumulative power
891 monitor digit shifted
times

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

A
Function

Name

C0
FM terminal calibration
(900)

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

C0
FM terminal calibration
(900)

Name

C0
FM terminal calibration
(900)

FREQROL D700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

C0
FM terminal calibration
(900)

C2 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias frequency

C2 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias frequency

C3 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias

C3 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias

C3 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias

C3 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias

125 Terminal 2 frequency

(903) setting gain frequency

125 Terminal 2 frequency

(903) setting gain frequency

125 Terminal 2 frequency

(903) setting gain frequency

125 Terminal 2 frequency

(903) setting gain frequency

C4 Terminal 2 frequency
(903) setting gain

C4 Terminal 2 frequency
(903) setting gain

C4 Terminal 2 frequency
(903) setting gain

C4 Terminal 2 frequency
(903) setting gain

C5 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias frequency

C5 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias frequency

C5 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias frequency

C5 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias frequency

C6 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias

C6 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias

C6 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias

C6 Terminal 4 frequency
(904) setting bias

126 Terminal 4 frequency

(905) setting gain frequency

126 Terminal 4 frequency

(905) setting gain frequency

126 Terminal 4 frequency

(905) setting gain frequency

126 Terminal 4 frequency

(905) setting gain frequency

C7 Terminal 4 frequency
(905) setting gain

C7 Terminal 4 frequency
(905) setting gain

C7 Terminal 4 frequency
(905) setting gain

C7 Terminal 4 frequency
(905) setting gain

C12 Bias frequency (speed)

(917) for terminal No.1

Inverter
Communication

C14 Gain frequency (speed)

(918) for terminal No.1
C15 Gain (speed) for
(918) terminal No.1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

C16 Bias command (torque)

(919) for terminal No.1
C17 Bias (torque) for
(919) terminal No.1

C18 Gain command (torque)

(920) for terminal No.1

G
Frequency setting
C22
voltage bias frequency
(922)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C23
voltage bias
(922)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C23
voltage bias
(922)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C24
voltage gain frequency
(923)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C24
voltage gain frequency
(923)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C25
voltage gain
(923)
(built-in potentiometer)

Frequency setting
C25
voltage gain
(923)
(built-in potentiometer)

H
Programming
Communication

Frequency setting
C22
voltage bias frequency
(922)
(built-in potentiometer)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

C19 Gain (torque) for

(920) terminal No.1

C13 Bias (speed) for

(917) terminal No.1

Calibration
parameters

Computer Link

C2 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias frequency

Parallel Link

C2 Terminal 2 frequency
(902) setting bias frequency

B
N:N Network

C1
C1
AM terminal calibration
AM terminal calibration
(901)
(901)

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

Common Items

FREQROL F700 Series

Pr
No.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-183

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

FREQROL F700 Series

Function

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL A700 Series

Pr
No.

Name

FREQROL E700 Series

Pr
No.

FREQROL D700 Series

Name

Pr
No.

Name

Terminal 4 bias
C38
command
(932)
(torque/magnetic flux)
Calibration
parameters

C39 Terminal 4 bias

(932) (torque/magnetic flux)
Terminal 4 gain
C40
command
(933)
(torque/magnetic flux)
C41 Gain (torque) for
(933) terminal No.4

PU

989

990 PU buzzer control

990 PU buzzer control

990 PU buzzer control

990 PU buzzer control

991 PU contrast adjustment

991 PU contrast adjustment

991 PU contrast adjustment

991 PU contrast adjustment

*1.

E-184

Parameter copy alarm

release

This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr. 37.

Set Pr. 37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may not be
set or monitored normally.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

Pr
No.

Name
Communication
station number

117

PU communication
station number

118

Communication
speed

118

PU communication
speed

119

Stop bit length/Data

length

119

PU communication
stop bit length

Number of
121 communication
retries
Communication
check time interval

123 Waiting time setting

CR, LF presence/
absence selection

PU communication
check time interval

123

PU communication
waiting time setting

Communication
338 operation command
source
Communication
339 frequency command
source
Communication
340 startup mode
selection
PU communication
124 CR/LF presence/
absence selection

RS-485
341 communication CR/
LF selection

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
549 Protocol selection

Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
549 Protocol selection

Pr
No.

Name

331

Communication
station number

n1 Communication
331 station number

332

Communication
speed

n2 Communication
332 speed

333

Stop bit length/

Data length

n3 Stop bit length/

333 Data length

Parity check
334 presence/
absence

Parity check
n4
presence/
334
absence

Number of
335 communication
retries
Communication
336 check time
interval

Number of times
n5
335 of communication
retries
Communication
n6
336 check time
interval

337

Waiting time
setting

n7 Waiting time
337 setting

338

Operation
command right

n8 Operation
338 command right

339

Speed command n9 Speed command

339 right
write

340

Link startup
mode selection

CR, LF
presence/
341
absence
selection
342
-

E2PROM write
selection
-

n10 Link startup mode

340 selection
Absence/
n11
presence of CR
341
and LF
n12 E2PROM write
342 selection
-

I
Remote
Maintenance

122

Name

Programming
Communication

124

Number of PU
121 communication
retries

RS-485
331 communication
station
RS-485
332 communication
speed
RS-485
333 communication stop
bit length
RS-485
communication
334
parity check
selection
RS-485
335 communication
number of retries
RS-485
336 communication
check time interval
RS-485
337 communication
waiting time setting
Communication
338 operation command
source
Communication
339 speed command
source
Communication
340 startup mode
selection

Pr
No.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PU communication
parity check

Name

FREQROL S500
Series (Built-in port
in accordance with
RS-485)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

122

120

Pr
No.

FREQROL V500,
F500 and A500
Series (FR-A5NR
computer link)

Inverter
Communication

Parity check
presence/absence

FREQROL F700 and

A700 Series
(Built-in RS-485
terminal)

Computer Link

117

120

Communication
type

FREQROL D700 and

E700 Series
(PU port)
(FR-E7TR computer
link)
Pr
Name
No.

Parallel Link

FREQROL V500, F500,

A500 and E500 Series
Funct
(PU port)
ion

B
N:N Network

The table below shows the parameters corresponding to each communication port.
- The PU port is common in the V500, F500, A500, and E500 Series.
- In the F700, and A700 Series, communication parameters for the built-in RS-485 terminal are provided.
- In the V500, F500, and A500 Series, communication parameters for the FR-A5NR computer link are
provided.
- In the E500 Series, only the PU port is provided.
- In the S500 Series containing RS-485 communication, the following parameters are applicable.

Common Items

12.5.3 Communication parameters

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

E-185

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Inverter Communication

12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List

MEMO

E-186

12 Related Data

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

F. Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

F-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "non-protocol communication" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

F-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains Non-protocol communication.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System

1) Up to 4096 points of data can be sent, and up to 4096 points of data can be received. In the case of FX2N
and FX2NC PLCs, make sure that the total number of sent and received data is 8000 points or less.
3) The applicable total extension distance is 15m (49' 2") maximum in accordance with RS-232C
communication, and 500m (1640' 5") maximum in accordance with RS-485 communication [50m (164' 0")
when 485BD connection is used].

1. RS instruction
Important points and reference
chapter/section

System
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2")/RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5")
[50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
FX PLC

check applicable PLC

....... To
models, refer to Section 1.3.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Communication
equipment operating ....... For selection, refer to
Chapter 3.
in accordance with
RS-232C or
RS-485

....... For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.

4096 points data

....... The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

In PLCs except for the FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the amount of send data or receive
data can be 256 points maximum.

H
Programming
Communication

Transfer direction

Word devices

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Printer or bar code reader

....... Total extension distance

For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.

Inverter
Communication

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Bar code reader

or printer

D
Computer Link

2) Data transfer is enabled when the connected equipment supports non-protocol serial communication.

C
Parallel Link

Non-protocol communication exchanges non-protocol data using a printer, bar code reader, etc.
In FX Series PLCs, non-protocol communication is available using the RS and RS2 instructions.
The RS2 instruction is dedicated to the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
In FX3G, FX3GC PLCs, the RS2 instruction allows communication using three channels at the same time.
In FX3U, FX3UC PLCs, the RS2 instruction allows communication using two channels at the same time.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.1 Outline of System

2. RS2 instruction
FX3S PLC
Important points and reference
chapter/section

System
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2")/RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5")
[50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
Printer or bar code reader

FX3S PLC

....... Total extension distance

For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
check applicable PLC
....... To
models, refer to Section 1.3.

+
Communication
equipment operating ....... For selection, refer to
Chapter 3.
in accordance with
RS-232C or
RS-485

....... For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.
Transfer direction
Bar code reader
or printer

F-4

Word devices
4096 points data

....... The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.1 Outline of System

A
Important points and reference
chapter/section

System
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2")/RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5")
[50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]

Printer

Total extension distance

For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.

N:N Network

Bar code reader

Common Items

FX3G and FX3GC PLCs

FX3G, FX3GC PLC

To check applicable PLC
models, refer to Section 1.3.

Word devices
4096 points data

For selection, refer to

Chapter 3.
For wiring, refer to
Chapter 4.

The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

Computer Link

Bar code reader

Printer

Transfer
direction

Parallel Link

ch0

RS-422
Standard
built-in port +
RS-232C/RS-422
Converter

Bar code reader

Printer

Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
RS-232C
or RS-485

For selection, refer to

Chapter 3.

Word devices

The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

4096 points data

For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Transfer direction

Inverter
Communication

ch1

Bar code reader

Printer

Word devices
4096 points data

For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.

H
The amount of send data or
receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

Programming
Communication

Transfer direction

Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
RS-232C
or RS-485

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

ch2

For selection, refer to

Chapter 3.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.1 Outline of System

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Important points and reference
chapter/section

System
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2")/RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5")
[50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
Bar code reader

Printer

FX3U/FX3UC PLC

....... Total extension distance

For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
check applicable PLC
....... To
models, refer to Section 1.3.

+
ch1

For selection, refer to

....... Chapter 3.
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C or
RS-485
....... For wiring, refer to
Chapter 4.

Transfer direction
Bar code reader
Printer

Word devices
4096 points data

+
ch2

....... The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.
For selection, refer to

.......
Communication
Chapter 3.
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C or
For wiring, refer to
RS-485
.......
Chapter 4.

Transfer direction
Bar code reader
Printer

F-6

Word devices
4096 points data

....... The amount of send data or

receive data can be 4096
points maximum.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Procedures Before Operation

Common Items

1.2

1.2 Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the Non-Protocol Communication setting procedures up until data link:

Non-Protocol Communication

Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications

N:N Network

Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline of system
Applicable PLC versions
Applicable programming tools

C
Parallel Link

Communication specifications
Communication applicability

Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection

System configuration
Select communication equipment

Perform wiring

Computer Link

Refer to Chapter 4.
Wiring procedure
Wiring example

Programming tool

Inverter
Communication

Connect PLC*1

Perform PLC communication setting

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Refer to Chapter 5.
PLC serial communication setting
Setting using parameters

Refer to Chapter 6 and 8.

Refer to Chapter 10.

Use RS/RS2 instruction and other communication
types together

RS/RS2 instruction program

Detailed explanation of related devices
Operation of control line
Basic program
Communication changeover
Setting using a sequence program

H
Programming
Communication

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 11).

I
Remote
Maintenance

Refer to Chapter 7 and 9.

Practical program examples

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Create programs

Example of connection to a printer

F-7

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions
The communication types are applicable in the following versions.
: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable
PLC

Applicability (applicable version)

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX3U Series

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX3GC Series

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX3G Series

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX3S Series

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX2NC Series

Full-duplex communication/half-duplex communication

FX2N Series

Full-duplex communication (Ver. 2.00 or later)/half-duplex

communication

(Ver. 1.06 or later)

FX1NC Series

Half-duplex communication

FX1N Series

Half-duplex communication

FX1S Series

Half-duplex communication

FX0N Series

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

Half-duplex communication

FX0S Series

Non-protocol communication is not provided

FX0 Series

Non-protocol communication is not provided

FX2C Series
FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

*1.

1.3.2

Remarks

FX3UC Series

Half-duplex communication
(Ver. 3.07 or later)*1

Half-duplex communication
Non-protocol communication is not provided

Applicable in products manufactured in January, 1994 (manufacturers serial No.: 41****) and later.

Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

1.3.3

How to look at the manufacturer's serial number

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.

1.3.4

Products whose production was stopped

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

F-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

Common Items

1.4

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown.

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

N:N Network

1. English versions
Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.72A or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 4.00 or later

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX-30P

I
Remote
Maintenance

GX Works2

H
Programming
Communication

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E

G
-

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX-30P

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

GOT1000 Series display units

Inverter
Communication

GOT1000 Series display units

Computer Link

FX-30P

Parallel Link

FX-30P

F-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Product name

Model name

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Applicable version

Remarks

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3S PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/98

SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)

Ver. 4.00 or later

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/V-3

SW1PC-FXGP/V3

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-A7PHP-KIT

SW1RX-GPPFX

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
GOT1000 Series display units

F-10

Ver. 1.07H or later

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

A
Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

Common Items

Product name

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 5.00 or later

SW5 A or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD

Ver. 5.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 4.00 or later

B
N:N Network

FX-30P

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GOT1000 Series display units

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the ranges provided for the alternative PLC model
such as instructions and program size.
Priority: High Low

Model to be set

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U Series

FX3U, FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3GC Series

FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3G Series

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1

FX3S Series

FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2NC Series

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N Series

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1NC Series

FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1N Series

FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1S Series

FX1S

FX2(FX)

FX0N Series

FX0N

FX2(FX)

FX0S Series

FX0S

FX2(FX)

FX0

FX2(FX)

FX2C Series

FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

*1.

H
Programming
Communication

FX0 Series

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3UC

E
Inverter
Communication

Model to be programmed
FX3UC Series

D
Computer Link

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Parallel Link

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

1.4.2

Ver. 1.07H or later

FX2(FX)
FX1

"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

2.

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

Specifications
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance of non-protocol communication.

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

Non-protocol communication is executed in the communication specifications shown in the table below.
Item
Transmission standard
FX3UC, FX3U, FX3GC,
Maximum FX3G, FX3S, FX2NC,
total
FX2N, FX1NC, FX1N,
extension FX1S, FX0N PLCs
distance
FX2(FX), FX2C PLCs

Specifications
RS-485 or RS-422
standard

Communication method

Non-protocol communication
Half-duplex, bidirectional communication/
full-duplex, bidirectional communication

Start bit

Character Data bit

format
Parity bit

7 or 8-bit
None, odd or even

Stop bit

1 or 2-bit

Header

Method varies
depending on FX Series.

Control line
Sum check

These items are set using

parameters or using
D8120, D8370, D8400 or
D8420.

Provided or not provided

Terminator

F-12

15 m (49' 2") or less

50 m (164' 0") or less

when using 485BD

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400*1 bps

Baud rate

*1.

RS-232C standard

500 m (1640' 5") or less

when using 485ADP

Protocol type
Control procedure

Remarks

Provided or not provided

Provided or not provided

Provided or not provided

Sum check is provided

only with RS2 instruction.

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.41 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLCs is applicable.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Data Communication Specifications

2.2.1

Communication type applicability in PLC

A
Common Items

2.2

2 Specifications
2.2 Data Communication Specifications

1. Full-duplex communication

PLC Series

Applicability of communication in accordance

with RS-485 (applicable version)

FX3UC Series

FX3U Series

FX3S Series

FX2NC Series

FX2N Series

(Ver. 2.00 or later)*1

FX1N Series

FX1S Series

FX0N Series

FX0S Series

FX0 Series

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2C Series
FX2(FX) Series
*1.

(Ver. 2.00 or later)

Computer Link

FX1NC Series

C
Parallel Link

FX3GC Series
FX3G Series

Applicability of communication in accordance

with RS-232C (applicable version)

Only the FX2N-485-BD is applicable.

2. Half-duplex communication

Applicability of communication in accordance

with RS-485 (applicable version)

Applicability of communication in accordance

with RS-232C (applicable version)

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3GC Series
FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

(Ver. 1.06 or later)

(Ver. 1.06 or later)

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

(Ver. 1.20 or later)

FX1NC Series

Programming
Communication

FX1N Series
FX1S Series
FX0N Series

FX2C Series

FX2(FX) Series

(Ver. 3.00 or later)*2

Communication is applicable in products manufactured in November, 1994 (manufacturers serial No.: 4Y****) and later.

Remote
Maintenance

FX0S Series
FX0 Series

*2.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable
PLC Series

N:N Network

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

2.3

Number of Transfer Data

FX Series
FX3UC Series

F-14

2.3 Number of Transfer Data

Number of send/receive data

Remarks

0 to 4096 points

FX3U Series

0 to 4096 points

FX3GC Series

0 to 4096 points

FX3G Series

0 to 4096 points

FX3S Series

0 to 4096 points

FX2NC Series

0 to 4096 points

FX2N Series

0 to 4096 points

FX1NC Series

0 to 256 points

FX1N Series

0 to 256 points

FX1S Series

0 to 256 points

FX0N Series

0 to 256 points

FX0S Series

FX0 Series

FX2C Series

0 to 256 points

FX2(FX) Series

0 to 256 points

The total number of sent and received data should be 8000

points or less.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.1 System Configuration

A
Common Items

3.

System Configuration and Selection

3.1

System Configuration

1 , 2 , 3 , 4 and 5 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.

Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485 or
RS-232C

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

C
Parallel Link

This section outlines the system configuration required to use non-protocol communication.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C to the FX PLC main unit.

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the system configuration and communication equipment selection operating in
accordance with RS-485 or RS-232 required by FX PLCs.

D
Connect the RS-232C/RS-422
converter to the standard port (RS-422)
built in the PLC.

RS-485: 50 m
This is the communication board built
(164' 0")
into the PLC, reducing the installation
RS-232C: 15 m
area.
(49' 2")

RS-232: 15 m
(49' 2")

RS-232C/RS-422
Converter

Communication
board

F
+

Attach the special adapter connection RS-485: 500 m

(1640' 5")
board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to RS-232C: 15 m
the left side of the main unit.
(49' 2")

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

Communication
Connector
adapter
conversion adapter

Communication
adapter

I
Remote
Maintenance

RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")

Programming
Communication

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Communication Special adapter

adapter
connection board

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

E
Inverter
Communication

Computer Link

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.

F-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Select a communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the outside dimensions and D-SUB connector shape are different between units
shown in "FX2NC-232ADP/FX0N-232ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- Non-protocol communication is not provided for the FX1, FX0, FX0S PLCs.

3.2.1

For communication in accordance with RS-232C

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N

FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX1S

+
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX1N

+
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

F-16

+
FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

15 m
(49' 2")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

15 m
(49' 2")

N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX2N

FX2NC-232ADP FX2N-CNV-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Parallel Link

FX2N-CNV-BD

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

D
Computer Link

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-SUB, male)

FX3S-CNV-ADP

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3S

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-SUB, male)

When using channel 0 (ch 0)

15 m
(49' 2")

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3G
Standard built-in
port
RS-422
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

Common Items

FX Series

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

H
Programming
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

I
Remote
Maintenance

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-Pin D-Sub, male)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX Series

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.
ch1

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-
ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

F-18

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
SD

N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

FX3U-CNV-BD

Parallel Link

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Computer Link

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3U

ch2

RD

SD

Inverter
Communication

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

ch1

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

H
Programming
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1NC

FX2NC-232ADP

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Remote
Maintenance

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2NC

FX2NC-232ADP

Apx.A

FX0N-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Discontinued
models

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

F-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX Series

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

When using channel 0 (ch 0)

FX3GC
Standard built-in
port
RS-422
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

FX3GC

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

ch2

+
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

F-20

15 m
(49' 2")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

SD

N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

C
Parallel Link

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch2

RD

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

Computer Link

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

SD

15 m
(49' 2")

Inverter
Communication

FX3U-
-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)
FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

When a
channel.

ch1

port

ch2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")

FX2(FX)

Common Items

FX Series

FX-232ADP

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

I
Remote
Maintenance

15 m
(49' 2")

FX2C

FX-232ADP

Apx.A

(25-pin D-Sub, female)

Discontinued
models

F-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2.2

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

For communication in accordance with RS-485.

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N

FX2NC-485ADP

FX0N-485ADP

(European terminal block)

(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX1S

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD

(European terminal block)

FX1N

FX1N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX1N-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD

FX2N

FX2N-CNV-BD

F-22

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

FX3S

500 m
(1640' 5")

Parallel Link

FX3S-CNV-ADP

N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

Common Items

FX Series

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

D
Computer Link

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

ch1

FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)

ch1

Programming
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

I
Remote
Maintenance

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX Series

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

ch2

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(European terminal block) (RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
ch1

ch2

FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-
ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

FX3U

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

F-24

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

N:N Network

RD

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

ch1

Parallel Link

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication

port channel.
FX3U

ch2

D
Computer Link

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

E
Inverter
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC

FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2NC-485ADP

(European terminal block)

FX0N-485ADP

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2NC

(Terminal block)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

H
Programming
Communication

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

I
ch2

Remote
Maintenance

ch1

FX3GC

500 m
(1640' 5")

Apx.A

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

Discontinued
models

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

Common Items

FX Series

F-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX Series

3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1
RD A
RD

50 m
(164' 0")

RD B

SD A

SD

SD B

SG

FX3U-485-BD

(European terminal block)

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

500 m
(1640' 5")

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

(European terminal block)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
a FX3U-8AV-BD is used,

When
port channel.

500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)

it occupies one communication

ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

ch2

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.

F-26

500 m
(1640' 5")

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.1 Wiring Procedure

A
Common Items

4.

Wiring

This chapter explains the wiring.

N:N Network

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

D
Computer Link

Preparing for wiring

For details, refer to Section 4.2.

Turning OFF the PLC power

Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.

Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)

Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.

Apx.A

Wiring communication equipment

Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.

F-27

Discontinued
models

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Wiring Procedure

E
Inverter
Communication

Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.

4.1

C
Parallel Link

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.2

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Select cables using the procedure described below.

4.2.1

When using ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLC

When using ch0 (standard port (RS-422)) in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC, use the following cables.
RS-232C
external
device

Connector
shape

Cable combination

Cable
length

Standard built-in
port
(RS-422)
Prepared by user
(15m (49'2") maximum)
Screw for securing connector
[M2.6 (metric screw thread)]

9-pin D-Sub
25-pin D-Sub

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB0
(1.5m(4'11))

For the connection diagram of the cable prepared by the user,

refer to Section 4.3.

4.2.2

5
4
2
1

8
7

16.5m
( 541"),
maximum

3 6
8-pin D-Sub,
female

Twisted pair cable

Use twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used for wiring.

1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer

Model name

Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.

Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.

The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.

Fujikura Ltd.

SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

DPEV SB 0.3 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.2 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2

D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P

Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2

Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2

2. Cable structural drawing (reference)

Pair
Shield

Two-pair cable structural

drawing example

F-28

Remarks

Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10BASE-T cable

Common Items

4.2.3

4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.

1. Selection procedure when purchasing

1) Cable type

: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)

3) Connector

N:N Network

2) Connection specifications : Straight type

: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)

2. Cautions on using commercial cables

Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.

C
Parallel Link

Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.2.4

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)

AWG22 to
AWG20

AWG22

Bar terminal with

Insulating sleeve
(cable size)

Tightening
torque

Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
Nm

Tool size
A

0.4 (0.01")

2.5 (0.09")

FX3G-485-BDRJ

AWG20 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD

AWG26 to AWG16

Not applicable

0.5 to 0.6
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

Not applicable

0.4 to 0.5
Nm

0.6 (0.03")

3.5 (0.14")

FX2NC-485ADP

AWG26 to
AWG16

AWG26 to
AWG20

Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
an insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD

Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")

Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")

FX2NC-485ADP

When using a bar terminal with an insulating sleeve

Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending
on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable according to
the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer

Model name

Caulking tool

Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

AI 0.5-8WH

CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)

*1.
*2.

F-30

Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3

Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6

Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")

Insulating sleeve

Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")

2.6 mm
(0.1")

14 mm
(0.55")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Note

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).

For size A and size B,

refer to the table above.

N:N Network

<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name

Parallel Link

Manufacturer

SZS 0.4 2.5

FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP

Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Model name

SZF 1-0.6 3.5

Computer Link

2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 Nm.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

E
Inverter
Communication

When wiring one cable to one terminal

3.2(0.13")

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When wiring two cables to one terminal

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

H
Programming
Communication

3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less

Common Items

Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.

Terminal

6.3mm(0.25")
or more

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.2.5

4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors

Connecting terminal resistors

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor between the RDA-RDB
signal terminals of the communication equipment.
In the case of two-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor between the RDA-RDB
signal terminals and SDA-SDB terminal of in the communication equipment.

1. Terminal resistor type

In the case of one-pair wiring, use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
In the case of two-pair wiring, use four terminal resistors of 330 , 1/4 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied together with the communication
equipment, select ones with the color codes shown to the right.

Precision

1 1 1
=110
(101)
Orange Brown Precision

2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or

FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485-BD

Terminal
resistor
selector
switch

Brown

3 3 1
=330
(101)

330
OPEN
110

Terminal
resistor selector
switch

FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 Nm
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.

Model name
SZS 0.4 2.5
0.4mm
(0.01")

Terminal resistor
selector switch

Terminal block mounting screws

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Terminal resistor
selector switch

F-32

2.5mm
(0.09")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.3 Connection Diagram

Connection Diagram

4.3.1

Connector pin arrangement in communication equipment operating in accordance with

RS-232C

25-pin D-Sub (female)

connector
8
3

13

25

13

RD (RXD) Receive data input

SD (TXD) Send data output

ER (DTR) Data terminal ready

SG (GND) Signal ground

6*2

DR (DSR) Data set ready

20

20*2
7

14

CD (DCD) Receive carrier detection

FG

*1.

The FX2NC-232ADP does not use the CD (DCD) signal.

*2.

Only the FX0N-232ADP uses the ER (DTR) and DR (DSR) signals.

Frame ground

Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-232C

Representative wiring examples are shown in this subsection. When pin numbers in the external equipment
are different, wire the pins as shown below.

1. When connected equipment has the terminal specifications

PLC

Name

FX2NC232ADP

25-pin D-Sub (male) connector

FX0N-232ADP
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-232ADP

FG

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)
*1

20

SG(GND)

DR(DSR)
*1

*2

*2

Name

Name

9-pin
D-Sub

25-pin
D-Sub

9-pin
D-Sub

25-pin
D-Sub

FG

FG

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

SD(TXD)

RS(RTS)

ER(DTR)

20

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

CS(CTS)

DR(DSR)

When the control line is not used, wiring is not required for this signal.
Because the interlink mode [provided only in FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G(except ch0), FX3GC(except
ch0), FX3U and FX3UC PLCs] uses the control line, wiring is required for this signal.

*2.

Only the FX0N-232ADP and FX-232ADP uses the ER (DTR) and DR (DSR) signals.

H
Programming
Communication

*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RD(RXD)

External equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C

DR, ER
CS, RS

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

9-pin D-Sub (female) connector

FX3U-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX1N-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

Inverter
Communication

4.3.2

1*1

Computer Link

14

Function

Signal
name

Parallel Link

25

FX1N-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP, FX3U-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD,
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
9-pin D-Sub (male)
connector

N:N Network

FX-232ADP

FX0N-232ADP,
FX-232AW,
FX-232AWC,
FX-232AWC-H
25-pin D-Sub (female)
connector

Common Items

4.3

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.3 Connection Diagram

2. When connected equipment has the modem specifications

PLC

Name

9-pin D-Sub (female) connector

25-pin D-Sub (male) connector

FX3U-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX1N-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

FX0N-232ADP
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-232ADP

FG
CD(DCD)

*1

Name

9-pin
D-Sub

25-pin
D-Sub

Name

9-pin
D-Sub

25-pin
D-Sub

FG

FG

CD(DCD)

CD(DCD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

SD(TXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

20 *2

RS(RTS)

ER(DTR)

20

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

6 *2

CS(CTS)

DR(DSR)

DR(DSR)

F-34

FX2NC232ADP

External equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C

DR, ER
CS, RS

*1.

The FX0N-232ADP, FX2NC-232ADP, FX-232AW, FX-232AWC and FX-232AWC-H do not use the CD
(DCD) signal.

*2.

Only the FX0N-232ADP and FX-232ADP uses the ER (DTR) and DR (DSR) signals.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-485

One-pair wiring and two-pair wiring (for RS-422) are applicable for communication in accordance with RS485. Perform proper wiring according to the external equipment.

1. One-pair wiring

*3

FX0N-485ADP

FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG*2

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less) *1

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less) *1

Terminal
resistor:
110
*3

D
Computer Link

SDA
(TXD+)

Parallel Link

Terminal
resistor:
110

B
FX3U-485-BD,FX3G-485-BD,FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD,FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

N:N Network

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485

Common Items

4.3.3

4.3 Connection Diagram

SG

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX2N485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

D grounding.

*3.

If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring Class-

*4.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.

The FX3U-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
The FX3G-485-BD, FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied
together with terminal resistors.
When using the FX2N-485-BD, signal loop between the PLC and the external device occurs since the FX2N485-BD has a full-duplex interface.

E
Inverter
Communication

*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.3 Connection Diagram

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance
with RS-485
SDA
(TXD+)
Terminal SDB
resistor (TXD-)
110 RDA
*2
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
LINK
SG

Distributor (BMJ-8)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding

Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

*1.

*1

*1

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

*1

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Distributor (BMJ-8)

Class-D
grounding

*1

5
RDA
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame

Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110)*2

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.

*2.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name

F-36

Model name

Manufacturer

RJ45 connector

TM11AP-88P

HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.3 Connection Diagram

Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485/RS-422

Terminal
resistor:
330
2

FX2NC-485ADP

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDA
(TXD+)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

SDB
(TXD-)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDA
(RXD+)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

RDB
(RXD-)

LINK
SG

LINK
SG

SG

FG*2

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less) *1

Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100 or less) *1

B
*3

*3
Terminal
resistor:
330
2

SG

Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX2N485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).

*2.

Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the

(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring ClassD grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.

E
Inverter
Communication

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.

The FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with
terminal resistors.

Computer Link

*1.

*3.

C
Parallel Link

*3

FX3U-485-BD,FX3G-485-BD,FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD,FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

N:N Network

*3

FX0N-485ADP

Common Items

2. Two-pair wiring

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.3 Connection Diagram

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485/RS-422
Distributor (BMJ-8)
SDA
5
(TXD+)
4
SDB
*2
3
(TXD-)
6
RDA
(RXD+)
1
RDB
*2
2
Terminal (RXD-)
7
resistor LINK
8
SG
330
2
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding

*1

*1

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

*1.

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA

Connector metal frame

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

*1

*1

FX3G-485-BD-RJ

Distributor (BMJ-8)

Class-D
grounding

*1

RDA
5
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
Terminal
2
resistor
7 *2
Terminal
8
resistor
Connector metal frame

Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
330)*2

FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)

Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.

*2.

Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name

F-38

Model name

Manufacturer

RJ45 connector

TM11AP-88P

HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Distributor

BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

4.4 Grounding

A
Common Items

3. Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)

The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.

B
N:N Network

Wiring circuit
switch

C
Parallel Link

4.4

Grounding
Grounding should be performed as stated below.

The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.

PLC

Other
equipment

Other
equipment

Shared grounding
Good condition

PLC

Other
equipment

Inverter
Communication

Independent grounding
Best condition

PLC

Computer Link

Independent grounding should be performed for best results.

When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.

Common grounding
Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

5.

5.1 Communication Setting Method Mechanism

Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

This chapter explains the communication setting types and setting methods for non-protocol communication
using RS/RS2 instruction.

5.1

Communication Setting Method Mechanism

This section explains the communication setting method types and setting procedures in FX PLCs.

1. Setting method types

1) Specifying the setting using parameters:
Set the parameters by adjusting communication settings on the personal computer screen using the
sequence programming software, and transfer them to a PLC.
(This method using parameters is not available in FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs.)
(This method using parameters is not available for ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.)
2) Specifying the settings by writing data to special data registers:
Prepare a sequence program which sets the communication format and time-out time setting, and then
transfer the program to the PLC.
Caution
A PLC operates in the same way without regard to a selected method shown above. If both methods are
selected, priority is given to the method using parameters.

2. Communication setting method applicability in each FX Series

Specification using
parameters

FX Series
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S,
FX3G (ch1, ch2), FX3GC (ch1, ch2), FX3U, FX3UC

Specification by writing settings

data to special data registers

(Recommended)

FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX3G (ch0), FX3GC (ch0)

3. Setting data flow

PLC memory
Setting window
Parameter area
Parameter
method

Program area
[MOV H
[MOV K

D8120]
D8129]

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,

FX3U and FX3UC
Sequence
program for
set values

Program
method

Transferred
when power
is turned ON

Written by
program
Written by
program

[MOV H
[MOV K

D8370]
D8379] Written by

[MOV H
[MOV K

D8400]
D8409]

[MOV H
[MOV K

D8420]
D8429]

program

Written by
program

RS instruction
D8120 Communication format
D8129 Time-out time setting
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC
ch0 RS2 instruction
D8370 Communication format
D8379 Time-out time setting
ch1 RS2 instruction
D8400 Communication format
D8409 Time-out time setting

Ch0 is available only

in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
The setting method
using parameters cannot
be used for ch0.
Only ch1 is available in
the FX3S PLC.

ch2 RS2 instruction

D8420 Communication format
D8429 Time-out time setting
When both methods are selected at the same time, priority is
given to the contents set in the parameter method.

4. Time at which the settings become valid

1) When specifying the settings by parameters
When the PLC power is turned ON, the contents of parameters set on the parameter setting window
using sequence programming software are automatically transferred to D8120, D8129, D8400, D8409,
D8420 and D8429 in the PLC.
As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC, the settings become valid.
After the program parameters are transferred to the PLC, it is necessary to turn OFF the PLC power
once, and then turn it ON again.

F-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that GX Works2 is already
started up.

Opening the parameter setting window

Computer Link

5.2.1

C
Parallel Link

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. It is not possible to set ch0 in FX3G and
FX3GC PLCs using parameters. This section describes how to change parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

B
N:N Network

5.2

A
Common Items

2) When specifying the settings by writing data to special data registers

After writing a sequence program, set the PLC mode from STOP to RUN to write the preset data to
D8120, D8400, D8420 or D8370. After that, set the PLC mode to STOP once, and then set it to RUN
again. Or turn OFF the PLC power once, and then turn it ON again.
As soon as the PLC mode is set to RUN from STOP or the PLC power is turned ON from OFF, the
settings become valid.
If change of the setting becomes necessary while the RS or RS2 instruction is being driven, set the RS or
RS2 instruction to OFF, set D8120, D8400, D8420 and D8370 to "0", and then set a new value to them.

E
Inverter
Communication

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab in the dialog box

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Select a channel and check the "Operate Communication Setting" box, then adjust the parameters
for that channel.
Execute the setting according to the connected communication equipment.
Click [End].

Caution
When setting "H/W Type" to "RS485", check the "Control Line" box.

Writing parameters to the PLC

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].

F-42

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

5.3.1

Operating procedure

Displaying serial setting (parameter)

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of the parameter settings.

C
Parallel Link

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. It is not possible to set ch0 in FX3G and
FX3GC PLCs using parameters. This section describes how to change parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch0, ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Common Items

5.3

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

D
Computer Link

1. When there is no parameter setting

There is no communication setting. Click the [Yes] button.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

2. When there are already parameter settings.

The existing communication setting contents are displayed.

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Execute the settings according to the connected communication equipment.

Caution
When setting "Hardware" to "RS-485", set "Control line" to "H/W mode".

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

F-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

A
Common Items

6.

Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

6.1

Checking Contents of Related Devices

The tables below show devices used in non-protocol communication using the RS instruction.

Name

Description

R/W
R

M8120

Communication setting keep

This device keeps the communication setting status (for FX0N PLC).

M8121

Sending wait flag

This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

M8122

Sending request

When this device is set to ON, the PLC starts to send.

M8123

Receiving complete flag

This device turns ON when receiving is completed.

While this device (receiving complete flag) is ON, the PLC cannot R/W
receive any data.

M8124

Carrier detection flag

This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD signal.

M8129*1

Time-out check flag

This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the

next set of data is not given within the time set by the timeout R/W
settings device (D8129).

M8161

8-bit processing mode

This device sets the send/receive data bit length to 16-bit or 8-bit.
ON: 8-bit mode
OFF: 16-bit mode

R/W

Not provided in FX2N PLC before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs.

Description

R/W

D8120

Communication format setting This device sets the communication format.

D8122

Remaining amount of data to

be sent

This device stores the amount of remaining data to be sent.

D8123

Amount of data already

received

This device stores the amount of received data.

D8124

Header

This device sets the header (initial value: STX (H02)).

R/W

D8125

When the serial communication error flag (M8063) turns ON, this
R/W
device stores the corresponding error code.
R/W

This device sets the terminator (initial value: ETX (H03)).

R/W

This device sets the timeout time.

R/W

D8405*3

Communication parameter
display

This device stores communication parameters set in the PLC.

D8419*3

Operation mode display

This device stores the communication type being used.

D8129

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
Not provided in FX2N PLC before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs.

*3.

Provided only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*2.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Terminator
Time-out time setting

*2

H
Programming
Communication

D8063

Error code number of serial

communication error

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Name

2. Word devices
Device

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

D
Computer Link

Serial communication error

(ch1)

Inverter
Communication

M8063

This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

When this device (serial communication error) turns ON, D8063
stores the corresponding error code.

Parallel Link

1. Bit devices
Device

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains how to create programs for non-protocol communication using RS instruction and how
such programs operate.

F-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

How to Use RS Instruction

This section explains the function, operation and programming method of RS instruction.

1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System/User

Digit Specification

Others
Special
Unit

System/User

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U \G

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

S: Applicable only in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs.

m, n: 0 to 4096 points in FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
(However, "m + n" should not be more than 8000 points in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs.)
0 to 256 points in FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

2. Program example
S
M0

FNC 80
RS

D100

D0

D200

D1
Amount of received data: 0 to 4096 points
(0 to 256 points in FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs)
Head device storing receive data

Head device storing send data

Number of send data: 0 to 4096 points
(0 to 256 points in FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs)

6.2.1

Applicable frames
Message frames used in communication can be selected by setting the communication format.
The table below shows the message frames applicable to the RS instruction.
1

Data

Data

Header

Data

Header

Data

Header: Not provided

Terminator: Not provided
Terminator

Header: Not provided

Terminator: Provided
Header: Provided
Terminator: Not provided

Terminator

Header: Provided
Terminator: Provided

1. Header
When "header provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the lowest-order byte of D8124 is
used.
When data is sent, the lowest-order byte of D8124 is added at the head of the specified send data to be sent.
When data is received, receiving begins when the data on lowest-order byte of D8124 is received.

2. Terminator
When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the lowest-order byte of D8125
is used.
When data is sent, the lowest-order byte of D8125 is added at the end of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving is completed*1 when the data on lowest-order byte of D8125 is received.
*1.

F-46

Receiving is completed also when the amount of received data specified by the RS instruction is
received or when the receiving of data is suspended and the next set of data is not executed within the
timeout time set by D8129.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Function and operation

RS instruction specifies the head device storing the sent data sent from the PLC, amount of data, head device
storing the received data and the maximum allowable amount of received data.
Create a program as shown below.
Command
FNC 80
RS

D100

D0

D200

D1

When the command contact (M0) is set to ON, the PLC waits to send and receive.
For handling of sent and received data, refer to Subsection 6.2.3.

C
Parallel Link

Sending command
(pulse operation type)
M1

Send data is written.

Sending
request
SET

M8122

Receiving complete
Receive data is moved.

RST

M8123

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

After moving the received data, reset the receiving complete flag (M8123).
While M8123 is ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.
For the operation when data is received, refer to Subsection 6.2.5.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When the PLC receives data from the connected equipment, the receiving complete flag
(M8123) turns ON.
When M8123 turns ON, move the received data stored in D200 to another storage area.
Receiving
complete

E
Inverter
Communication

When sending is completed, the sending request device (M8122) is automatically reset.
Do not reset it in a sequence program.
For operation when data is sent, refer to Subsection 6.2.4.

D
Computer Link

When the sending command (M1) is set to ON, write the send data to D100 and so on
(as many devices as specified number).
Give the sending command of the pulse operation type.
After writing the send data, set the sending request device (M8122) to send the data.

M8123

B
N:N Network

M0

Common Items

6.2.2

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2.3

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

Send/receive data and amount of data

RS instruction can handle sent and received data in two modes, 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode.
Data is handled as shown below in each mode. (In the examples shown below, "header provided" and
"terminator provided" are selected in the communication setting.)

1. Handling of 16-bit data (when M8161 is set to OFF)

OFF in RUN mode

16-bit data

OFF
M8000

Highest-order 8-bit Lowest-order 8-bit

S
X010

FNC 80
RS

Send data
(PLC
external
equipment)

16-bit data is divided into lowest-order

8-bit and highest-order 8-bit when it is
sent or received.

16-bit mode

M8161

STX

D200

K 4

D500

K 10

D200 lowest- D200 highest- D201 lowest- D201 highestorder byte

order byte
order byte
order byte

Header

ETX
Terminator

Head address specified by S

Number of bytes to be sent specified by "m"

Receive data
(external
equipment
PLC)

STX
Header

D500 lowest- D500 highest- D501 lowest- D501 highest- D502 lowest- D502 highestorder byte
order byte
order byte
order byte
order byte
order byte

ETX
Terminator

Head address specified by D

They cannot exceed the upper limit number of devices (bytes) to be
received by "n". When the PLC receives the terminator (ETX) or "n" data,
receiving is completed.

Amount of remaining
send data
D8122

ETX

D200
lowest-order byte
D200
highest-order byte
D201
lowest-order byte
D201
highest-order byte

Send data
SD (TXD)

STX

1) Send data and amount of remaining send data

Amount of data
already received
D8123

ETX

D500
lowest-order byte
D500
highest-order byte
D501
lowest-order byte
D501
highest-order byte
D502
lowest-order byte
D502
highest-order byte

Receive data
RD (RXD)

STX

2) Receive data and amount of data already received

When the receiving

complete flag M8123
is reset, the amount of
received data is reset
also.

Caution on other instructions using M8161

M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD, and CRC (provided only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs) instructions.

F-48

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

M8000

16-bit data

8-bit mode

M8161

Ignored

S
X010

Send data
(PLC
external
equipment)

D200

STX

m
K 4

D500

Lowest-order 8-bit

Highest-order 8-bits are ignored,

and only the lowest-order 8-bits are
regarded as valid data.

K 10

D200 lowest- D201 lowest- D202 lowest- D203 lowestorder byte

order byte
order byte
order byte

Header

B
N:N Network

FNC 80
RS

Common Items

2. Handling of 8-bit data (when M8161 is set to ON)

ETX
Terminator

Head address specified by S

Number of bytes to be sent specified by "m"

STX

D500 lowest- D501 lowest- D502 lowest- D503 lowest- D504 lowest- D505 lowestorder byte
order byte
order byte
order byte
order byte
order byte

Parallel Link

Receive data
(external
equipment
PLC)

ETX
Terminator

Header
Head address specified by D

D
Computer Link

They cannot exceed the upper limit number of devices (bytes) to be

received, specified by "n". When the PLC receives the terminator (ETX) or
"n" data, receiving is completed.

ETX

D200
lowest-order byte
D201
lowest-order byte
D202
lowest-order byte
D203
lowest-order byte

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Amount of remaining
data
D8122

E
Inverter
Communication

Send data
SD (TXD)

STX

1) Send data and amount of remaining data

ETX

D500
lowest-order byte
D501
lowest-order byte
D502
lowest-order byte
D503
lowest-order byte
D504
lowest-order byte
D505
lowest-order byte

When the receiving

complete flag M8123
is reset, the amount of
received data is reset
also.

Programming
Communication

Amount of received
data
D8123

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Receive data
RD (RXD)

STX

2) Receive data and amount of received data

Caution on other instructions using M8161

M8161 is shared by RS, ASCI, HEX, CCD, and CRC (provided only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs) instructions.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-49

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2.4

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

Operation when data is sent

When the sending request flag (M8122) is set to ON while RS instruction is driven, the PLC sends the data
stored in the data registers S
to ( S +m-1) specified by the RS instruction.
When sending of the data is complete, the sending request flag (M8122) is automatically set to OFF.

1. Time at which sending is started

When RS instruction is executed after the sending request flag (M8122) is set to ON, the PLC starts to send.
When sending begins, the PLC sends the data stored in the data registers specified by the RS instruction in
interrupt processing regardless of the operation cycle.

2. Time at which sending is completed

When all send data is sent, sending is completed.
(If the terminator is set, the terminator is included in the send data.)

3. Cautions on sending
When sending data, observe the following cautions
1) While the sending request flag (M8122) is ON, do not change the amount of send data or contents of
send data.
2) Do not set the sending request flag (M8122) to OFF in a sequence program.
If the send data is changed while the sending request flag (M8122) is ON or if the sending request flag
(M8122) is set to OFF in a sequence program, correct data will not be sent.

6.2.5

Operation when data is received

When RS instruction is executed, the PLC waits to receive. When the PLC receives data from the connected
equipment and receiving is completed, the receiving complete flag (M8123) is set to ON.
When the PLC receives data, it stores the received data to the data registers D
to ( D +n-1) specified
by the RS instruction.
While the receiving complete flag (M8123) is ON, the PLC cannot receive new data.

1. Time at which receiving is started

When the PLC receives data while it is waiting to receive, it starts receiving data.
When receiving begins, the PLC stores the received data in interrupt processing regardless of the operation
cycle.
When the header (D8124) is specified in the communication format, however, the PLC starts receiving when
it receives the code set in the header. And the PLC stores the received data except the header.

2. Time at which receiving is completed

Receiving is completed in the following three conditions. When either condition is established, receiving is
completed.
1) When the PLC receives as much data as specified by the RS instruction
2) When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format, and the PLC receives the code set
in the terminator (D8125)
3) When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the time set
in the time-out time setting device (D8129)
At this time, the time-out check flag (M8129) turns ON.
(The time-out check flag is not provided in FX2N PLC before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs.)

F-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.2 How to Use RS Instruction

When data receiving is suspended, counting of the timeout time is started immediately. If the PLC does not
receive the next set of data within the time-out time setting set by D8129, the time-out check flag (M8129) is
set to ON. At this time, the receiving complete flag (M8123) is set to ON also.
The time-out time setting (D8129) can be set to a value from 1 to 255 (10 ms to 2550 ms).

Data
D8129
10 ms

Set to OFF in sequence program.

ON

ON

The time-out check flag (M8129) does not turn OFF automatically.
Set it to OFF in the sequence program. (When M8123 is set to OFF, M8129 is also set to OFF.)
Using this function, the PLC can receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without
the terminator.
When interlink mode is selected as the communication format, the following sequence is adopted from the
start of receiving to completion:

2) When the external equipment suspends data sending, the PLC sets the time-out check flag (M8129) and
receiving complete flag (M8123) to ON after the time-out time setting (D8129).
Move the received data in a sequence program, and then set the receiving complete flag (M8123) and
time-out check flag (M8129) to OFF.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

3) When the receiving complete flag (M8123) is set to OFF, the control line ER (DTR) turns ON.
When the control line ER (DTR) turns ON, resume sending data from the external equipment.

E
Inverter
Communication

1) When the amount of data already received becomes "number of bytes to be received -30", the control line
ER (DTR) turns OFF.
When the control line ER (DTR) turns OFF, the external equipment should suspend data sending.
After the control line ER (DTR) turns OFF, the PLC can receive up to 30 characters (bytes).

D
Computer Link

4. When the control line is set to interlink mode

Parallel Link

Timeout determination
M8129
Receiving complete
M8123

B
N:N Network

Receive data is suspended.

Receiving

A
Common Items

3. Operation of the time-out check flag (which is not provided in FX2N PLC before Ver. 2.00,
and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs)

4) Repeat steps 1) to 3) until data receiving is completed.

5. Cautions on receiving
When receiving data, observe the following cautions:

H
Programming
Communication

2) If the RS instruction is driven while the amount of received data "n" is "0", the operation of the receiving
complete flag (M8123) varies depending on the PLC as follows:
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC PLCs
The receiving complete flag (M8123) remains OFF even after the RS instruction is driven, but the PLC
does not wait to receive.
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs
The receiving complete flag (M8123) turns ON after the RS instruction is driven.
To make the PLC wait to receive, set the amount of received data "n" to "1" or more, and set the receiving
complete flag (M8123) to OFF from ON.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1) While the receiving complete flag (M8123) is ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.
When the receiving complete flag is set to OFF, the PLC waits to receive.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.3 Operation of Control Line

6.3

Operation of Control Line

6.3.1

FX2N (before Ver. 2.00), FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
FX2N PLCs before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC PLCs execute half-duplex,
bidirectional communication.
When the sending flag is set to ON during receiving, the sending wait flag M8121 turns ON. When the
receiving complete flag turns ON from OFF, the PLC starts to send.

1. When the control line is not provided

RS
instruction
driving

OFF ON

SD (TXD)
Send data

Message
1

Sending
request
M8122

Message
3

ON

OFF

Sending wait
flag
M8121

OFF

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message
2

Receiving
complete
M8123

*1.

ON

100 s or more*1

OFF

Message
3

ON

ON

Receiving wait status

Reset it in a sequence program.
is started.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

Set it to 2 scan times or more in FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs.

2. When the control line is in the standard mode

Use this mode when only sending or receiving.
1) When only sending is executed
RS
instruction
driving

OFF

ON

SD (TXD)
Send data

Message
1

Sending
request
M8122
ER (DTR)
DR (DSR)

F-52

OFF

ON

OFF
OFF

Message
1

ON
ON

Message
2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.3 Operation of Control Line

RS
instruction
driving

OFF

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Receiving
complete
M8123

Message
1

OFF

Message
2

B
N:N Network

ER (DTR)

Common Items

2) When only receiving is executed [The DR (DSR) signal is not used.]

ON

OFF

ON

ON

C
Parallel Link

Reset it in a sequence program. While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive
the next set of data.

3. When the control line is in the modem mode

RS
instruction
driving

OFF ON

ER (DTR)

OFF

Message
3

ON

E
OFF

OFF

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

OFF

ON
Reset it in a sequence program.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot
receive the next set of data.

*1.

OFF

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

100 s
or
more*1
DR (DSR)

Message
2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Receiving
complete
M8123

ON

Inverter
Communication

Sending
request
M8122
Sending wait
flag
M8121

Message
1

Computer Link

SD (TXD)
Send data

ON

Set it to 2 scan times or more in FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.3.2

6.3 Operation of Control Line

FX2N (Ver. 2.00 or later), FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.00 or later, and FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs execute full-duplex,
bidirectional communication. When executing half-duplex, bidirectional communication, pay attention not to
set the sending request to ON while receiving. If the sending request is set to ON, the PLC starts to send. As
a result, the external equipment may not be able to receive data, and the sent and received data may be
destroyed.
In full-duplex, bidirectional communication, the sending wait flag M8121 does not turn ON.
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, however, the sending wait flag M8121 remains ON while the
DR (DSR) is OFF, the PLC waits to send, and the control line is in the standard mode or interlink mode.

1. Without control line

RS
instruction
driving

OFF ON

SD (TXD)
Send data

Message
1

Sending
request
M8122

OFF

Message
3

Message
5

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message
2

Receiving
complete
M8123

OFF

Message 4

ON

Receiving wait status is

started.

ON
Reset it in a sequence program.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

2. When the control line is in the standard mode

Use this mode when only sending or receiving.
The control line and transfer sequence are equivalent to those in FX2N PLCs (before Ver. 2.00). Refer to
Subsection 6.3.1.

3. When the control line is in the modem mode

RS
instruction
driving

OFF

SD (TXD)
Send data

ON
Message
1

Sending
request
M8122

OFF

ON

ER (DTR)

OFF

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message 2

Receiving
complete
M8123
DR (DSR)

Message 4

OFF
OFF

Message 3

ON

ON

ON
Reset it in a sequence program.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

F-54

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.3 Operation of Control Line

RS
instruction
driving

Common Items

4. When the control line is in the interlink mode

OFF ON
Message
2

Sending
request
M8122

ON

DR (DSR)

OFF

*1

ON

Message
4

Message
4

B
N:N Network

SD (TXD)
Send data

OFF
*1

*1

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message
1

Message 3

Time-out
time setting
D8129 10 ms

Parallel Link

Up to 30 characters can be
received. *2
Message
3

D
Computer Link

Time-out
check flag
M8129

OFF

ON

ER (DTR)

ON

OFF

ON

ON

E
Inverter
Communication

Receiving
complete
M8123

Reset it in a sequence program.

While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

*2.

In the interlink mode, the PLC sets ER (DTR) to OFF when the amount of data already received
becomes "Number of bytes to be received -30", and asks the external equipment to stop sending.
After that, the PLC can only receive up to 30 characters. In this case, temporarily stop sending, and
then send the remaining data after the ER (DTR) signal turns ON again.
When sending is stopped, the PLC finishes receiving after the time-out time setting is reached.
When sending is not stopped, the PLC finishes receiving after it has received the final send data or 30
characters. Accordingly, make sure that the amount of received data is "30 + ".

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

On the external equipment side, set the DR (DSR) signal to ON when the external equipment is ready
to receive.
The FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC sends the send data when both the DR
(DSR) signal and the sending request turn ON.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*1.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

6.4

6 Creating Programs (RS Instruction)

6.4 Important Points in Creating Programs

Important Points in Creating Programs

1) The RS instruction can be used as many times as necessary in a program, but make sure that only one
RS instruction is driven at a time.
For multiple RS instructions to be driven, make sure the OFF time is longer than one scan time.
2) In FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs, make sure to provide an interval of two scan times
or more between completion of sending and the start of receiving or between completion of receiving and
the start of sending.
In FX2N PLCs before Ver. 2.00, provide an interval of 100 s or more.
In FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.00 or later, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, this interval is not
necessary.
3) While a RS instruction is being driven, change of D8120 is prohibited.
To change D8120, set the RS instruction to OFF, set D8120 to "0", and then set a new value to D8120.
4) In the interlink mode, set the amount of received data n to "31" or more.
If it is set to "30" or less, the control line ER (DTR) is set to OFF as soon as the PLC receives data. As a
result, the received data may be partially skipped.
5) Do not use another instruction which uses the same communication port. If such an instruction is used,
communication may not function normally.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs: RS2 instruction, IVDR instruction, etc.
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs: EXTR instruction
6) When RS-485 communication is executed in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, it may take 300 s until the PLC
starts receiving after it has completed sending.
Assure 300 s or more in counterpart equipment as the period from completion of receiving to start of
sending.

6.5

Communication Error
When a communication error occurs, the error flag M8063 turns ON and D8063 stores the error code.
Error code

Description

6301

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6302

Defective communication character

6304

Defective data format

6305

Defective command

6306

Monitoring time out

Confirm the contents in "Chapter 11. Troubleshooting".

F-56

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

7 Practical Program Example (RS Instruction)

7.1 Example of Printing Using RS Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)

Practical Program Example (RS Instruction)

Example of Printing Using RS Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)
In this example, a printer with an RS-232C interface is connected to a PLC, and data sent from the PLC is
printed.

B
N:N Network

7.1

Common Items

7.

1. System configuration

Parallel Link

Sending

+
FX2N-232-BD

FX2N Series

D
Computer Link

Use a communication cable suitable to the pin arrangement of the printer connector.
(For representative wiring, refer to Chapter 4.)

2. Communication format
Align the communication format in the PLC with that in the printer used.
(The table below shows the communication format in the main unit.)
Parity

Even

Stop bit

2-bit

Baud rate

2400 bps

Header

Not provided

Terminator

Not provided

Control line (hardware)

Not provided

Communication method (protocol)

Non-protocol method

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

8-bit

Inverter
Communication

Data length

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-57

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

7 Practical Program Example (RS Instruction)

7.1 Example of Printing Using RS Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)

3. Sequence program
M8000
M8161

8-bit data is handled.

M8120

The communication setting is kept.

(This step is required only in an FX0N PLC.)

D8120

The
communication
format is set.

M8000
M8002
MOV

H006F

X000
RS

D10

K11

D50

K0

RS instruction
is driven.

b15

b0

0000

0000

0110

1111

This step is not required when the

communication parameters are
already set.

X001
PLS

M0

MOV

H0074

D10

MOV

H0065

D11

M0

MOV

H006E

D17

MOV

H0065

D18

MOV

H000D

D19

MOV

H000A

D20

SET

M8122

Send data is written.

Sending request
is given.

END

4. Operation
Power is turned
ON.

Turn ON the power to the PLC and printer, set the PLC to RUN mode,
and set the printer to online mode.
At this time, the communication format is set in the PLC.

RS instruction is
driven.

X000 is set to ON to drive the RS instruction.

At this time, send data is stored in 11 devices from D10 to D20.

X000.ON

X001.ON
Data is sent.

F-58

Every time X001 is set to ON, the data stored in D10 to D20 is sent to
the printer.
ASCII codes are used in this example.
(The sending complete flag is automatically reset.)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

A
Common Items

8.

Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

1) Up to 4 characters (bytes) can be specified as the header and terminator.

2) The sum check can be added automatically.

C
Parallel Link

3) The communication port (channel) can be specified.

8.1

Checking Contents of Related Devices

The tables below show devices used in non-protocol communication using RS2 instruction.
Available channels vary depending on the main unit.
For details, refer to Section 3.2.

Device
ch1

ch2

Name

Description

M8063

M8371

M8401

M8421 Sending wait flag

M8372

M8402

M8422 Sending request

When this device is set to ON, the PLC starts to send.

This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

E
R
R
R/W

M8403

M8423 Receiving complete flag

M8404

M8424 Carrier detection flag

This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD

(DCD) signal.

M8405

This device turns ON in synchronization with the DR (DSR)

M8425 Data set ready (DSR) flag*1
signal.

M8409

M8429 Time-out check flag

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

H
Programming
Communication

*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

M8379

This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended

and the next set of receive data is not given within the time R/W
set by the time-out time setting device.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8373

This device turns ON when receiving is completed.

While this device (receiving complete flag) is ON, the PLC R/W
cannot receive any receive data.

Inverter
Communication

M8062

This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

When this device (serial communication error) turns ON,
M8438 Serial communication error
D8062, D8063 or D8438 stores the corresponding error
code.

R/W

Computer Link

1. Bit devices
ch0

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains how to create programs for non-protocol communication using RS2 instruction and how
such programs operate.
The RS2 instruction is dedicated to the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
RS2 instruction has the following additional functions which are not provided in the RS instruction:

FX3U, FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLCs is applicable.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

2. Word devices
Device
ch0

ch1

ch2

Name

Serial
D8062 D8063 D8438 communication
error code
D8370 D8400 D8420

Communication
format setting

Amount of
D8372 D8402 D8422 remaining send
data
D8373 D8403 D8423

Amount of data
already received

Communication
D8405 D8425 parameter
display

D8379 D8409 D8429

Time-out time
setting

Description

R/W

When the serial communication error flag turns ON, this device
R/W
stores the corresponding error code.
This device sets the communication format.

R/W

This device stores the amount of remaining send data.

This device stores the amount of data already received.

This devices stores communication parameters set in the PLC.

This device sets the timeout time.

R/W

These devices set the headers 1 to 4.

Header

Header 1 and
D8380 D8410 D8430
header 2

1
Header

Header 3 and
D8381 D8411 D8431
header 4

3
ch0

Data
ch1

R/W
ch2

Initial
value

D8380
(lowest-order
byte)

D8410
(lowest-order
byte)

D8430
(lowest-order
byte)

H02
(STX)

D8380
(highest-order
byte)

D8410
(highest-order
byte)

D8430
(highest-order
byte)

H00

D8381
(lowest-order
byte)

D8411
(lowest-order
byte)

D8431
(lowest-order
byte)

H00

D8381
(highest-order
byte)

D8411
(highest-order
byte)

D8431
(highest-order
byte)

H00

When "H00" is set to the header 1, headers are not provided.

The area before H00 (in 1-byte units) is used to set the headers.

F-60

R/W

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices

A
ch1

ch2

Name

Description

R/W

These devices set the terminators 1 to 4.

Terminator
Data
Terminator

Terminator 3 and
terminator 4

2
ch1

4
ch2

R/W
Initial
value

D8382
(lowest-order
byte)

D8412
(lowest-order
byte)

D8432
(lowest-order
byte)

H03
(ETX)

D8382
(highest-order
byte)

D8412
(highest-order
byte)

D8432
(highest-order
byte)

H00

D8383
(lowest-order
byte)

D8413
(lowest-order
byte)

D8433
(lowest-order
byte)

H00

D8383
(highest-order
byte)

D8413
(highest-order
byte)

D8433
(highest-order
byte)

H00

R/W

Receiving sum
D8385 D8415 D8435 (calculation
result)

This device stores the sum check value calculated from the
received data.

D8386 D8416 D8436 Sending sum

This device stores the sum check value added to the send data.

This device stores the current communication being executed.

D8389 D8419 D8439

Operation mode
display

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

This device stores the received sum check value.

Inverter
Communication

Receiving sum
(receive data)

D
Computer Link

When "H00" is set to the terminator 1, terminators are not

provided.
The area before H00 (in 1-byte units) is used to set the
terminators.
D8384 D8414 D8434

Parallel Link

D8383 D8413 D8433

ch0

N:N Network

Terminator 1 and
D8382 D8412 D8432
terminator 2

Common Items

Device
ch0

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-61

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

How to Use RS2 Instruction

This section explains the function, operation and programming method of the RS2 instruction.
Available channels vary depending on the main unit.
For details, refer to Section 3.2.

1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System/User

Digit Specification

System/User

Others
Special
Unit

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U \G

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

n1

S:
Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
m, n: 0 to 4096 points
n1:
K0, K1 or K2

2. Program example
S
M0

FNC 87
RS2

Head device storing send

data
Number of send data: 0 to
4096

D100

n1

D0

D200

D1

K1
Communication channel
K0: ch 0
K1: ch 1
K2: ch 2
Amount of received data: 0 to 4096 points
Head device storing receive data

F-62

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Applicable frames

Common Items

8.2.1

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Message frames used in communication can be selected by setting the communication format.
The table below shows message frames applicable to the RS2 instruction.

Data

Data

CR+LF

Data

Terminator

Data

Terminator

CR+LF

Data

Terminator

Sum check

Data

Terminator

Sum check

N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

CR+LF

Header

Data

Header

Data

CR+LF

Header

Data

Terminator

10

Header

Data

Terminator

CR+LF

11

Header

Data

Terminator

Sum check

12

Header

Data

Terminator

Sum check

Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

CR+LF

1. Header

Header 1

Header 2

Header 3

Header 4

ch0

D8380 (lowest-order byte)

D8380 (highest-order byte)

D8381 (lowest-order byte)

D8381 (highest-order byte)

ch1

D8410 (lowest-order byte)

D8410 (highest-order byte)

D8411 (lowest-order byte)

D8411 (highest-order byte)

ch2

D8430 (lowest-order byte)

D8430 (highest-order byte

D8431 (lowest-order byte)

D8431 (highest-order byte)

When data is sent, the data set in the devices above is added at the head of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving begins when the data set in the devices above is received continuously.

Caution
Set the header before driving the RS2 instruction. Do not change the setting while the RS2 instruction is
being driven.

H
Programming
Communication

Even if "header provided" is selected, headers are not provided if header 1 is set to "00H".
The area before 00H (in 1-byte units) is used to set the headers.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Header

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When "header provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the values of D8380 and D8381
are used for ch0, and the values of D8410 and D8411 are used for ch1, and the values of D8430 and D8431
are used for ch2.
Up to four headers can be set.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-63

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

2. Terminator
When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the values of D8382 and D8383
are used for ch0, and the values of D8412 and D8413 are used for ch1, and the values of D8432 and D8433
are used for ch2.
Up to four terminators can be set.
Terminator

Terminator 1

Terminator 2

Terminator 3

Terminator 4

ch0

D8382 (lowest-order byte)

D8382 (highest-order byte)

D8383 (lowest-order byte)

D8383 (highest-order byte)

ch1

D8412 (lowest-order byte)

D8412 (highest-order byte)

D8413 (lowest-order byte)

D8413 (highest-order byte)

ch2

D8432 (lowest-order byte)

D8432 (highest-order byte)

D8433 (lowest-order byte)

D8433 (highest-order byte)

When data is sent, the data set in the devices above is added at the end of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving is completed*1 when the data set in the devices above is received.
Even if "terminator provided" is selected, terminators are not provided if terminator 1 is set to "00H".
The area before 00H (in 1-byte units) is used to set the terminators.
Caution
Set the terminator before driving the RS2 instruction. Do not change the setting while the RS2 instruction is
being driven.
*1.

Receiving is also completed when the amount of received data specified by the RS2 instruction is
finished receiving or when data receiving is suspended and the next set of data is not received within
the time-out time setting device (D8379, D8409 or D8429).

3. Sum check
When "sum check provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the sum check is executed for
the sent and received data.
When selecting "sum check provided", make sure to select "terminator provided".
When data is sent, the sum of "data" + "terminator" is calculated, and added to the send data.
When data is received, it is checked whether or not the received sum is equivalent to the sum calculated by
the PLC.
For details on sum check, refer to Subsection 8.2.6.

4. CR + LF
When "CR + LF provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the character code of "CR + LF" is
added at the end of the send data.
When data is received, receiving is completed when "CR + LF" is received continuously.
However, receiving is also completed when the specified amount of received data is received or when data
receiving is suspended and the next set of data is not received within the time-out time setting.
Make sure that "CR" is not included in the message.

F-64

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Function and operation

RS2 instruction specifies the head device storing the send data from the PLC, amount of data, head device
storing the received data and maximum allowable amount of received data.
Create a program as shown below.
Command
FNC 87
RS2

D100

D0

D200

K30

K1

When the command contact (M0) is set to ON, the PLC waits for sending and receiving.
For handling of sent and received data, refer to Subsection 8.2.3.
Sending
command
(pulse operation
type)
M1
Send data is written.

When sending is completed, the sending request device (M8402) is automatically reset. Do not reset
it in a sequence program.
For the operation when data is sent, refer to Subsection 8.2.4.

Receive data is moved.

When the PLC receives data from the connected equipment, the receiving complete flag (M8403)
turns ON.
When M8403 turns ON, move the received data stored in D200 to another storage area.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Receiving
complete
RST

E
Inverter
Communication

Receiving
complete
M8403

D
Computer Link

M8402

Parallel Link

When the sending command (M1) is set to ON, write the send data to D100 and later (as many
devices as the specified amount). Give the sending command of the pulse operation type.
After writing the send data, set the sending request device (M8402) to send the data.
Sending
request
SET

B
N:N Network

M0

Common Items

8.2.2

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

M8403

After moving the received data, reset the receiving complete flag (M8403).
While M8403 is ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of receive data.
For the operation when data is received, refer to Subsection 8.2.5.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-65

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2.3

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Send/receive data and amount of data

RS2 instruction can handle send data and receive data while storing two characters in one data register.
M8000

FNC 87
RS2

D100

K4

D200

K20

K1

Communication format setting

Control line not provided
Headers provided
[DLE + STX (D8410: 0210H D8411: 0000H)]
Terminators provided [DLE + ETX (D8412: 0310H D8413: 0000H)]
Sum check provided
CR + LF added

1. Send data and amount of remaining send data

Header

Send data

Terminator Sum data . . . . . The order is different

from the data area

Data area

DLE STX 31H 32H 33H 34H DLE ETX 44H 44H
D8410 D8410 D100 D100 D101 D101 D8412 D8412 Sum Sum CR
lowest highest lowest highest lowest highest lowest highest highest lowest
-order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

LF

M8402
Sending request

Set it in a program.

D8403
Amount of remaining
send data

D8416
Sending sum

F-66

00H

It is automatically reset
when sending is
completed
2

31H 63H 96H CAH DAH DDH

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Header
DLE

STX

Terminator Sum data . . . . . The order is different

from the data area

Data area
35H

36H

37H

Common Items

2. Receive data and amount of data already received

38H

DLE

ETX

45H

44H

LF

N:N Network

D8410D8410 D200 D200 D201 D201 D202 D202 Sum Sum CR

lowest highest lowest highest lowest highest lowest highest highest lowest
-order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order -order
Receive data byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

C
It is set when
receiving is
completed

It is cleared when
header is received.

It is cleared
when the
receiving
complete flag
is cleared

4
3
2
1
0

00H 35H 6BH A2H DAH EAH

The calculation
result is converted
into ASCII codes,
and compared

EDH

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D8415
Receiving sum
(calculation result)

Inverter
Communication

D8403
Amount of data
already received

D
Computer Link

Reset it in a
program

Parallel Link

M8403
Receiving complete

00H

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Caution
The 8-bit mode is not applicable in RS2 instruction.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-67

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2.4

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Operation when data is sent

When the sending request flag is set to ON while RS2 instruction is driven, the PLC sends the data stored in
the specified data registers S
to ( S +m-1).
When using communication port ch0, set M8372.
When using communication port ch1, set M8402.
When using communication port ch2, set M8422.
When sending of the data is completed, the sending request flag is automatically set to OFF.

1. Time at which sending is started

When RS2 instruction is executed after the sending request flag is set to ON, the PLC starts to send.
When sending is started, the PLC sends the data stored in the data registers specified by RS2 instruction in
interrupt processing regardless of the operation cycle.

2. Time at which sending is completed

When all send data*1 is sent, sending is completed.

*1.

The "terminators", "sum check" and "CR + LF" set in the communication format are included also in
the send data.

3. Cautions on sending
When sending data, observe the following cautions
1) While the sending request flag is ON, do not change the amount of send data or the contents of the send
data.
2) Do not set the sending request flag to OFF in a sequence program.
If the send data is changed while the sending request flag is ON or if the sending request flag is set to
OFF in a sequence program, correct data is not sent.

8.2.5

Operation when data is received

When RS2 instruction is executed, the PLC waits to receive. When the PLC receives data from the connected
equipment and receiving is completed, the receiving complete flag is set to ON.
When communication port ch0 is used, M8373 turns ON.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8403 turns ON.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8423 turns ON.
When the PLC receives data, it stores the received data to the data registers D
to ( D +n-1) specified
by the RS2 instruction.
While the receiving complete flag is ON, the PLC cannot receive new data.

1. Time at which receiving is started

When the PLC receives data while it is waiting to receive, it starts receiving data.
When receiving begins, the PLC stores the received data in interrupt processing regardless of the operation
cycle.
When the headers are specified in the communication format, however, the PLC starts receiving when it
continuously receives the codes set in the headers. The PLC stores the received data except the headers.

F-68

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Receiving is completed in the following three conditions. When either condition is established, receiving is
completed.
1) When the PLC receives the amount of receive data specified by the RS2 instruction
2) When the "terminators", "sum check" and "CR + LF" set in the communication format are received normally.
Data

CR+LF

..........

Data

Terminator

..........

Data

Terminator

CR+LF

..........

Data

Terminator

Sum check

..........

Data

Terminator

Sum check

ch0

ch1

ch2

Time-out check flag

M8379

M8409

M8429

Time-out time setting

D8379

D8409

D8429

ON

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Receive data is suspended.

Receiving

ON

Data

Time-out check flag

M8409
Receiving complete
M8403

D8409
10 ms

E
Inverter
Communication

When data receiving is suspended, if the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the preset time-out
time setting, the time-out check flag is set to ON.
At this time, the receiving complete flag is also set to ON.
The time-out judgment time can be set in the following range:
Setting range for ch0 and ch2: 1 to 3,276 (10 to 32,760 ms)
Setting range for ch1: 1 to 255 (10 to 2,550 ms)

D
Computer Link

3. Operation of time-out check flag

Parallel Link

CR+LF

3) When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the time set
within the time-out time setting device (D8379, D8409 or D8429), the time-out check flag (M8379, M8409
or M8429) turns ON.

Name

B
N:N Network

..........

Common Items

2. Time at which receiving is completed

Set to OFF in sequence program.

When the interlink mode is selected in the communication format, the following sequence is adopted from
start of receiving to completion of receiving:

2) When the external equipment suspends data sending, the PLC sets the time-out check flag and receiving
complete flag to ON after the preset time-out time setting.
Move the received data in a sequence program, and then set the receiving complete flag and time-out
check flag to OFF.

I
Remote
Maintenance

1) When the amount of data already received becomes "preset amount of received data -30", the control line
ER (DTR) turns OFF.
When the control line ER (DTR) turns OFF, the external equipment should suspend data sending.
After the control line ER (DTR) turns OFF, the PLC can receive up to 30 characters (bytes).

H
Programming
Communication

4. When the control line is set to the interlink mode

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

The time-out check flag does not turn OFF automatically. Set it to OFF in the sequence program. (When the
receiving complete flag is set to OFF, the time-out check flag is also set to OFF.)
By using this function, the PLC can receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies
without the terminator.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

3) When the receiving complete flag is set to OFF, the control line ER (DTR) turns ON.
When the control line ER (DTR) turns ON, restart data sending from the external equipment.
4) Repeat steps 1) to 3) until data receiving is completed.

F-69

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

5. Cautions on receiving
When receiving data, observe the following cautions
1) While the receiving complete flag is ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of receive data.
When the receiving complete flag is set to OFF, the PLC waits to receive.
2) If the RS2 instruction is driven while the amount of received data "n" is "0", the receiving complete flag
(M8123) turns ON. To make the PLC wait to receive, set the amount of received data "n" to "1" or more,
and set the receiving complete flag (M8123) to OFF from ON.
3) Set the amount of received data to a value including "terminators", "sum check" and "CR+LF".
If the specified amount of received data is small, the serial communication error flag (M8062, M8063 or
M8438) turns ON.

F-70

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Sum check code

The sum check code indicates a two-digit ASCII code converted from the lowest-order byte (8-bit) of the
result (sum) acquired by adding the sum check target data as hexadecimal data.
By setting a parameter, set whether or not the sum check code is added in the message.

When "sum check not provided" is selected, the sum check code is not added, so the received data is not
checked either.
A calculation example of the sum check code is shown below.

In the case of send data

DLE

Send data

Data area

STX

31H

D8410 D8410
lowest highest
-order -order
byte
byte

32H

33H

Terminator
34H

D100 D100 D101 D101

lowest highest lowest highest
-order -order -order -order
byte
byte
byte
byte

DLE

ETX

Sum data
44H

order is
. . . . . The
different from
the data area.

44H

D8412 D8412 Sum

lowest highest highest
-order -order -order
byte
byte
byte

Sum
lowest
-order
byte

CR

LF

E
Inverter
Communication

Sum check code target

D100 lowest-order bits
31H
D100 highest-order byte 32H
D101 lowest-order byte 33H
D101 highest-order byte 34H
D8412 lowest-order byte 10H (DLE)
D8412 highest-order byte 03H (ETX)
DDH

Converted into ASCII codes

Receive data

STX

35H

36H

D8410 D8410 D200 D200

lowest highest lowest highest
-order -order -order -order
byte
byte
byte
byte

37H

Terminator
38H

DLE

ETX

Sum data
45H

44H

Sum

Sum

D201 D201 D202 D202 D8414

lowest highest lowest highest highest
-order -order -order -order -order
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte

D8414
lowest
-order
byte

CR

LF

H
Programming
Communication

Sum check code target

D200 lowest-order bits 35H
D200 highest-order byte 36H
D201 lowest-order byte 37H
D201 highest-order byte 38H
D202 lowest-order byte 10H
D202 highest-order byte 03H
EDH

order is
. . . . . The
different from
the data area.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

DLE

Data area

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

In the case of receive data

Header

D
Computer Link

Header

C
Parallel Link

Example: When the communication format (parameters) is set as follows

- Control line not provided
- Headers provided [DLE+STX (D8410: 0210H, D8411: 0000H)]
- Terminators provided [DLE+ETX (D8412: 0310H, D8413: 0000H)]

B
N:N Network

When "sum check provided" is selected, the sum check code is added in the message during sending.
During receiving, the sum check code is compared with the value calculated from the received data to
check the received data.

Common Items

8.2.6

8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction

Compared

I
Remote
Maintenance

4544H
Converted into ASCII codes

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-71

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.3

8.3 Operation of Control Line

Operation of Control Line

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs execute full-duplex, bidirectional communication. When
executing half-duplex, bidirectional communication, pay attention not to set the sending request to ON while
receiving. If the sending request is set to ON, the PLC starts to send. As a result, the external equipment may
not be able to receive data, and the sent and received data may be destroyed.
In full-duplex, bidirectional communication, the sending wait flag M8371, M8401, and M8421 does not turn
ON.
However, the sending wait flag M8371, M8401, and M8421 remains ON while the DR (DSR) is OFF, the PLC
waits to send, and the control line is in the standard mode or interlink mode.

1. When the control line is not provided

RS2
instruction
driving

OFF ON

SD (TXD)
Send data

Sending
request
M8402
RD (RXD)
Receive data

Receiving
complete
M8403

Message
1

OFF

Message
5

ON

Message
2

OFF
Receiving wait status
is started.

F-72

Message
3

Message 4

ON

ON
Reset it in a sequence program.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next
set of data.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.3 Operation of Control Line

A
Common Items

2. When the control line is in the standard mode

Use this mode when only sending or receiving.
1) When only sending is executed
RS2
instruction
driving

OFF ON

B
Message
1

Sending
request
M8402

OFF

ON

OFF

DR (DSR)

Message
2

Parallel Link

ER (DTR)

Message
1

N:N Network

SD (TXD)
Send data

ON

OFF

ON

2) When only receiving is executed [The DR (DSR) signal is not used.]

OFF

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message
1

OFF

Receiving
complete
M8403

Message
2

E
Inverter
Communication

ER (DTR)

Computer Link

RS2
instruction
driving

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Reset it in a sequence program.

While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

3. When the control line is in the modem mode

RS2
instruction
driving

OFF

ON

G
Message
1

OFF

ON

ER (DTR)

OFF

ON

RD (RXD)
Receive data

H
Message 2

OFF
OFF

Message 3

ON

ON

ON
Reset it in a sequence program.
While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

Remote
Maintenance

Receiving
complete
M8403

Programming
Communication

Sending
request
M8402

Message 4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

SD (TXD)
Send data

DR (DSR)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-73

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

8.3 Operation of Control Line

4. When the control line is in the interlink mode

RS2
instruction
driving

OFF ON

SD (TXD)
Send data

Message
2

Sending
request
M8402

ON

DR (DSR)

OFF

*1

ON

Message
4

Message
4

OFF
*1

*1

Up to 30 characters can be
received. *2
RD (RXD)
Receive data

Message
1

Message 3

Time-out
time setting
D8409 10 ms

Message
3

Time-out
check
flag M8409

Receiving
complete
M8403

OFF

ON

ER (DTR)

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Reset it in a sequence program.

While it remains ON, the PLC cannot receive the next set of data.

F-74

*1.

On the external equipment side, set the DR (DSR) signal to ON when the external equipment is ready
to receive.
The FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs sends the send data when both the DR (DSR) signal
and the sending request turn ON.

*2.

In the interlink mode, the PLC sets ER (DTR) to OFF when the amount of data already received
becomes "Number of bytes to be received -30", and asks the external equipment to stop sending.
After that, the PLC can only receive up to 30 characters. In this case, temporarily stop sending, and
then send the remaining data after the ER (DTR) signal turns ON again.
When sending is stopped, the PLC finishes receiving after the time-out time setting is reached.
When sending is not stopped, the PLC finishes receiving after it has received the final send data or 30
characters. Accordingly, make sure that the number of receive characters are "30 + ".

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Important Points in Creating Programs

1) The RS2 instruction can be used as many times as necessary in a program, but make sure that only one
RS2 instruction is driven in each communication port at a time.
For multiple RS instructions to be driven, make sure the OFF time is longer than one scan time.

3) While a RS2 instruction is being driven, change of D8370, D8400 or D8420 is prohibited.
To change D8370, D8400 or D8420, set the RS2 instruction to OFF, set D8400 or D8420 to "0", and then
set a new value to D8400 or D8420.

5) FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs execute full-duplex, bidirectional communication. When
using half-duplex, bidirectional communication, pay attention not to turn ON the sending request flag
while receiving.
6) When using the header and terminator, set them before driving the RS2 instruction. Do not change the
setting while the RS2 instruction is being driven.

8.5

D
Computer Link

7) When RS-485 communication is executed in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, it may take 300 s until the PLC
starts receiving after it has completed sending.
Assure 300 s or more in counterpart equipment as the period from completion of receiving to start of
sending.

C
Parallel Link

4) In the interlink mode, set the amount of received data "n" to "31" or more.
If it is set to "30" or less, the control line ER (DTR) is set to OFF as soon as the PLC receives data.

B
N:N Network

2) Do not use another instruction (such as a RS instruction or IVDR instruction) which uses the same
communication port. If such an instruction is used, communication may not function normally.

Common Items

8.4

8.4 Important Points in Creating Programs

Communication Error

Error code
D8063 (ch1)

D8438 (ch2)

6201

6301

3801

Description

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D8062 (ch0)

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6302

3802

Defective communication character

6203

6303

3803

Receive data sum mismatch

6204

6304

3804

Defective data format

6205

6305

3805

Defective command

6206

6306

3806

Monitoring timeout

Confirm the contents in "Chapter 11. Troubleshooting".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

6202

Inverter
Communication

When a communication error occurs, the error flag M8062 turns ON during communication using ch0, the
error flag M8063 turns ON during communication using ch1, or the error flag M8438 turns ON during
communication using ch2. D8063 or D8438 stores the error code respectively.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-75

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

9.
9.1

9 Practical Program Example (RS2 Instruction)

9.1 Example of Printing Using RS2 Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)

Practical Program Example (RS2 Instruction)

Example of Printing Using RS2 Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)
In this example, a printer with the RS-232C interface is connected to a PLC, and the data sent from the PLC
is printed.

1. System configuration
ch1
Sending

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

FX3U Series

Use a communication cable suitable to the pin arrangement of the connector of the printer used.
Communication format
Align the communication format in the PLC with that in the printer used.
(The table below shows the communication format in the main unit.)

F-76

Data length

8-bit

Parity

Even

Stop bit

2-bit

Baud rate

2400 bps

Header

Not provided

Terminator

Not provided

Control line (H/W)

Standard/RS-232C, provided

Communication method (protocol)

Non-protocol method

CR, LF

Not provided

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

9 Practical Program Example (RS2 Instruction)

9.1 Example of Printing Using RS2 Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)

M8002
MOV

H006F

D8400

RS2

D10

K11

D50

K0

K1

RS2
instruction
is driven.

b15

b0

0000

0000

0110

1111

This step is not required when the

communication parameters are
already set.

X001
M0

MOV

H6574

D10

MOV

H7473

D11

MOV

H6C20

D12

MOV

H6E69

D13

MOV

H0D65

D14

MOV

H000A

D15

Parallel Link

PLS
M0

Computer Link

Send data is written.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

M8402

Inverter
Communication

SET

Sending request
is given.

END

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3. Operation
Power is turned
ON.

Turn ON the power to the PLC and printer, set the PLC to RUN mode,
and set the printer to the online mode.
At this time, the communication format is set in the PLC.

H
Programming
Communication

X000.ON
RS2 instruction is
driven.

X000 is set to ON to drive RS2 instruction.

At this time, send data is stored in 6 devices from D10 to D15.

X001.ON
Every time X001 is set to ON, data stored in D10 to D20 is sent to the
printer.
ASCII codes are used in this example.
(The sending complete flag is automatically reset.)

Remote
Maintenance

Data is sent.

B
N:N Network

X000

The
communication
format is set.

Common Items

2. Sequence program

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-77

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.1 Other Communication Type Used Together

10. When Combined with Another Communication

This chapter explains how to use non-protocol communication (RS or RS2 instruction) together with another
communication type.

10.1

Other Communication Type Used Together

In FX PLCs, the following communication types can be changed over.
When changing over the communication types above, it is necessary to set the communication using a
sequence program.
Programming
communication

[1]

Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)

[1] Applicable only in FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.01 or later, and FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Computer link
communication

[2]

Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)

[2] Applicable only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

The tables below show devices used in sequence programs.

1) RS instruction
Device

Name

Description

D8120

Communication format setting

D8419

Operation mode display

Allows the communication type being executed to be checked.
(in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)

Sets the communication format.

2) RS2 instruction
Available channels vary depending on the main unit.
For details, refer to Section 3.2.
Device
ch0

ch1

ch2

Name

Description

D8370 D8400 D8420 Communication format setting

Sets the communication format.

D8389 D8419 D8439 Operation mode display

Allows the communication type being executed to be

checked.

For the communication setting method, refer to Section 10.6.

For details on the operation mode display, refer to Subsection 11.4.1.

F-78

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

When Combined with Programming Communication

In FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.01 or later, and FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, non-protocol
communication in accordance with RS-232C using RS instruction can be changed over to the programming
communication for peripheral equipment.

1. When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode

Set the communication format to one of the settings shown below to use non-protocol communication (in
accordance with RS-232C) using the RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming
communication while in STOP mode.
Contents
H0086

H0186

H0286

Data length

7-bit

Parity bit

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

Baud rate (bps)

9600 bps
Not provided

Provided

Control line

Not provided

Not provided

H0386

Provided

Inverter
Communication

Header
Terminator

Provided
Not provided

2. When changing over using the RS instruction while in RUN mode

X0
MOV P H0086 D8120
K1

D2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

D1

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When changing over non-protocol communication using RS instruction to the programming communication
while in RUN mode, set RS instruction to OFF, and then overwrite the communication format (D8120) to
"H0000".
Before starting up RS instruction again, make sure to properly overwrite the communication format (D8120)
used in the RS instruction.

RS

D
Computer Link

Item

C
Parallel Link

In FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.01 or later, and FX2NC PLCs, non-protocol communication using RS instruction by way
of RS-232C port in the FX2N-232-BD (for FX2N PLCs), FX0N-232ADP or FX2NC-232ADP can be changed
over to the communication with a programming tool (programming communication) by the following methods.
If the external equipment executes another type of communication while the programming communication is
selected, the PLC sends back "NAK".

B
N:N Network

10.2.1 For FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

Common Items

10.2

10.2 When Combined with Programming Communication

K1

X0
MOV P H0000 D8120

3. Caution on using the RS instruction and programming communication together

Do not use the communication setting by parameters. Use the communication format device (D8120).

H
Programming
Communication

In this setting also, the communication mode can be changed over using RUN mode and STOP mode if the
condition shown in 1 above is satisfied.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-79

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.2 When Combined with Programming Communication

10.2.2 For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, non-protocol communication using RS instruction can be
changed over to communication with a programming tool (programming communication) by the following
methods.
If the external equipment executes another type of communication while the programming communication is
selected, the PLC sends back "NAK".
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the communication type operating in the communication port
can be checked in the operation mode display device (D8419).

1. When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode

Set the communication format as shown below to use non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS232C) using RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming communication while in STOP
mode.
Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS instruction to D8120, and write it before executing
the RS instruction.
X0
MOV P H0086 D8120
RS

D1

K1

D2

K1

2. When changing over using the RS instruction while in RUN mode

When changing over non-protocol communication using RS instruction to the programming communication
while in RUN mode, set RS instruction to OFF, and then overwrite the communication format (D8120) to
"H0000".
Before starting up RS instruction again, make sure to properly overwrite the communication format (D8120)
used in the RS instruction.
X0
MOV P H0086 D8120
RS

D1

K1

D2

K1

X0
MOV P H0000 D8120

3. Caution on using the RS instruction and programming communication together

Do not use the communication setting by parameters. Use the communication format device (D8120).

F-80

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

When Combined with Computer Link Communication

1. When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode

X0

C
Parallel Link

Set the communication format as shown below to use non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS232C or RS-485) using the RS instruction while in RUN mode and then use computer link while in STOP
mode.
Set computer link using parameters.
Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS instruction to D8120, and write it before executing
the RS instruction.

B
N:N Network

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS-232C or
RS-485) using the RS instruction can be changed over to a protocol dedicated to computer link by the
following methods.
The protocol supported by the communication port can be checked in the operation mode display device
(D8149).

Common Items

10.3

10.3 When Combined with Computer Link Communication

MOV P H0086 D8120

RS

D1

K1

D2

K1

X0
MOV P H0086 D8120
RS

D1

K1

D2

K1

E
Inverter
Communication

When changing over non-protocol communication using the RS instruction to computer link while in RUN
mode, set the RS instruction to OFF, and then overwrite the communication format (D8120) to "H0000".
Set computer link using parameters.
Before starting up the RS instruction again, make sure to properly overwrite the communication format
(D8120) used in the RS instruction.

Computer Link

2. When changing over using the RS instruction while in RUN mode

X0

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

MOV P H0000 D8120

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-81

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.4

10.4 When Combined with Programming Communication

When Combined with Programming Communication

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, non-protocol communication using RS2 instruction can be
changed over to communication with a programming tool (programming communication) by the following
methods.
If the external equipment executes another type of communication while the programming communication is
selected, the PLC sends back "NAK".
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the communication type operating in the communication port
can be checked in the operation mode display devices (D8389, D8419 and D8439).

1. When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode

Set the communication format as shown below to use non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS232C) using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode and then use the programming communication while in
STOP mode.
Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS2 instruction to D8370, D8400 or D8420, and write
it before executing the RS2 instruction.
X0
MOV P H0086 D8400
Command

RS2 D1

K1

D2

K1

K1

2. When changing over using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode
When changing over non-protocol communication using the RS2 instruction to the programming
communication while in RUN mode, set the RS2 instruction to OFF, and then overwrite the communication
format (D8370, D8400 or D8420) to "H0000".
Before starting up the RS2 instruction again, make sure to properly overwrite the communication format
(D8370, D8400 or D8420) used in the RS2 instruction.
X0
MOV P H0086 D8400
RS2 D1

K1

D2

K1

K1

X0
MOV P H0000 D8400

3. Caution on using the RS2 instruction and programming communication together

Do not use the communication setting by parameters. Use the communication format device (D8370, D8400
or D8420).

F-82

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Using RS2 Instruction and Computer Link Communication Together

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS-232C or
RS-485) using RS2 instruction can be changed over to computer link by the following methods.
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the communication type operating in the communication port
can be checked in the operation mode display devices (D8389, D8419 and D8439).
Set the communication format as shown below to use non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS232C) using RS2 instruction while in RUN mode and then use a protocol for computer link while in STOP mode.
Set computer link using parameters.
Make sure to set the communication format used in the RS2 instruction to D8370, D8400 or D8420, and write
it before executing the RS2 instruction.

B
N:N Network

1. When changing over using RUN mode and STOP mode

A
Common Items

10.5

10 When Combined with Another Communication

10.5 Using RS2 Instruction and Computer Link Communication Together

C
Parallel Link

X0
MOV P H0086 D8400
Command

RS2 D1 K1 D2 K1 K1

2. When changing over using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode

X0

E
Inverter
Communication

When changing over non-protocol communication using the RS2 instruction to computer link while in RUN
mode, set the RS2 instruction to OFF, and then overwrite the communication format (D8370, D8400 or
D8420) to "H0000".
Set computer link using parameters.
Before starting up the RS2 instruction again, make sure to properly overwrite the communication format
(D8370, D8400 or D8420) used in the RS2 instruction.

D
Computer Link

Non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS-485) cannot be changed over to computer link using
RUN mode and STOP mode.
When changing over non-protocol communication (in accordance with RS-485) to computer link, refer to
"2. When changing over using the RS2 instruction while in RUN mode" below.

MOV P H0086 D8400

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

RS2 D1 K1 D2 K1 K1
X0
MOV P H0000 D8400

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-83

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.6 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

10.6

Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

In the setting method using a sequence program, transfer values to the communication format device (D8120,
D8400 or D8420).
This section explains related devices and the setting method using a sequence program.

10.6.1 Communication setting for RS instruction

The following device is used in the communication setting.

1. D8120 (communication format)

By setting values to D8120, the data length, parity, baud rate, etc. can be set.
The table below shows the contents of D8120.
Bit No.

Name

b0

Data length

b1
b2

Parity

b3

Stop bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate
(bps)

Contents
1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit

2-bit

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200

(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400*1

b8

Header

Not provided

Provided (D8124)

initial value: STX (02H)

b9

Terminator

Not provided

Provided (D8125)

initial value: ETX (03H)

b10
b11

Control line

b11, b10
(0, 0): Not provided <RS-232C interface>
Non- (0, 1): Standard mode <RS-232C interface>
protocol (1, 0): Interlink mode <RS-232C interface>
(FX2N PLCs Ver. 2.00 or later, and FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
commuFX3U, FX3UC PLCs)
nication
(1, 1): Modem mode
<RS-232C interface, RS-485/RS-422 interface*2>
Computer
link

b12
b13

*3

b14*3
*3

b15

F-84

0 (bit = OFF)

b11, b10
(0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(1, 0): RS-232C interface
Not applicable

Sum check

Not added

Added

Protocol

Not used

Used

Control procedure

Format 1

Format 4

*1.

This setting is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*2.

When using the RS-485/RS-422 interface, only FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs are applicable.

*3.

Make sure to set as "0" when using non-protocol communication.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.6 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

M8002

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse
b15
0000
0

1100
C

1000
8

b0
0110 ]
6

D8120

7-bit

Parity

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

Baud rate

9600 bps

Protocol

Non-protocol

Header

Not provided

Terminator

Not provided

Control line

Modem mode

B
N:N Network

D8120 = [

Data length
H0C86

Common Items

To set the communication type, use the following program.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-85

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

10 When Combined with Another Communication

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

10.6 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program

10.6.2 Communication setting for RS2 instruction

The following devices are used in the communication setting.
When using communication port ch0, set D8370.
When using communication port ch1, set D8400.
When using communication port ch2, set D8420.

1. D8370, D8400 and D8420 (communication format)

By setting values to D8400 or D8420, the data length, parity, baud rate, etc. can be set.
The table below shows the contents of D8400 and D8420.
Bit No.

Name

b0

Data length

b1
b2

Parity

b3

Stop bit

Contents
0 (bit = OFF)

1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

2-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate
(bps)

b8

Header

Not provided

Provided*1

b9

Terminator

Not provided

Provided*1

b10
b11
b12

Nonprotocol
communication

Control line

*2

b12, b11, b10

(0, 0, 0): Not provided <RS-232C interface>
(0, 0, 1): Standard mode <RS-232C interface>
(0, 1, 0): Interlink mode <RS-232C interface>
(0, 1, 1): Modem mode <RS-232C interface>
(1, 1, 1): Communication in accordance with RS-485
<RS-485/RS-422 interface>

Sum check

Not added

Added*4

b14*3

Protocol

Not used

Used

b15

Control procedure (CR, LF)

CR, LF: Not used (Format 1)

CR, LF: Used (Format 4)

b13

*1.

In RS2 instruction, up to four headers and up to four terminators can be set.

*2.

The control line is not available in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs when ch0 is used. Set "(1, 1, 1)".

*3.

Make sure to set as "0" when using non-protocol communication.

*4.

When executing non-protocol communication using RS2 instruction, add the sum check code after the
terminators.
Make sure to set the terminators when adding the sum check code.

To set the communication type, use the following program.

M8002

FNC 12
MOV

Initial pulse
b15
D8120 = [ 0001
1

F-86

1100
C

1000
8

Data length
H1C86

b0
0110 ]
6

D8400

7-bit

Parity

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

Baud rate

9600 bps

Protocol

Non-protocol

Header

Not provided

Terminator

Not provided

Control line

Communication in
accordance with RS-485

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

11 Troubleshooting

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

11.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

A
Common Items

11. Troubleshooting

This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes.

N:N Network

11.1

Checking FX PLC Version Applicability

Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version in non-protocol communication.
For version applicability, refer to Section 1.3.

Parallel Link

11.2

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RD" and "SD" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
Flashing

Flashing

Operation status

Computer Link

SD

Data is being sent or received.

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received

Off

Off

Data is not sent nor received.

E
Inverter
Communication

11.3

RD

Checking Installation
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)

The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is provided correctly.

3. Wiring

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Verify that the wiring to an communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-87

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

11.4

11 Troubleshooting
11.4 Checking Sequence Program

Checking Sequence Program

1. Communication settings in a sequence program
Verify that N:N Network (D8176 to D8180) and parallel link (M8070 and M8071) are not set.
Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8370, D8400 or D8420) is set correctly. If a communication
port is set more than once, communication is not possible.

2. Communication settings using parameters

Verify that the communication settings using parameters are correct. If the contents of the settings do not
agree, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any settings, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in nonprotocol communication (RS/RS2 Instruction). After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

5. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, revise them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.
*1. Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

6. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

7. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

8. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions

Verify that two or more RS/RS2 instructions are not being driven for the same channel.
If two or more RS/RS2 instructions are driven, modify the program so that only one RS/RS2 instruction is
driven.

9. Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

F-88

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

11 Troubleshooting

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

11.5 Checking the Absence/Presence of Errors

1. Checking the operation mode

Description
Programming communication
PP modem mode
Protocol dedicated to computer link
N:N Network
RS instruction
RS2 instruction
Parallel link
Inverter instruction
The variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
MODBUS communication
CF-ADP
ENET-ADP
Input/output expansion board is used.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

If the operation mode is different, check the parameters and sequence programs.

Checking the Absence/Presence of Errors

1. Checking for communication errors

2. Checking the error code

ch2 (D8438)
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3812
3813
3814
3820
3830
3840

Contents of error
Parity error, overrun error or framing error
Defective communication character
Communication data sum mismatch
Defective data format
Defective command
Monitoring timeout
Modem initialization error
N:N Network parameter error
N:N Network setting error
Parallel link parameter error
Parallel link sum error
Parallel link format error
Inverter communication error
Memory access error
Special adapter connection error

I
Remote
Maintenance

Error code
ch1 (D8063)
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6312
6313
6314
6320
6330
6340

Programming
Communication

ch0 (D8062)
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When the serial communication error flag turns ON, a corresponding error code shown below is stored in
D8063 or D8438.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When a communication error occurs, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
When the communication port ch0 is used in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs, M8062 turns ON.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8063 turns ON.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8063 turns ON.
When communication port ch2 is used in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, M8438 turns ON.
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, D8062, D8063 or D8438 stores the corresponding error code.
Available channels vary depending on the main unit.
For details, refer to Section 3.2.

Inverter
Communication

11.5

B
N:N Network

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the communication port operation status can be checked.
D8389 stores the communication type code currently adopted in communication port ch0.
D8419 stores the communication type code currently adopted in communication port ch1.
D8439 stores the communication type code currently adopted in communication port ch2.
The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.

Common Items

11.4.1 Checking communication port settings (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

When an error code above is stored, check the following items:

Wiring
Parameter settings

F-89

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.1 Related Device List (RS Instruction)

12. Related Data

12.1

Related Device List (RS Instruction)

1. Bit devices
Device
M8063

Name

Description

Serial communication error flag This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

R/W
R

M8120

Communication setting keep

This device keeps the communication setting status (for FX0N PLC).

M8121

Sending wait flag

This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

M8122

Sending request

When this device is set to ON by SET instruction, the PLC starts

R/W
to send.

M8123

Receiving complete flag

This device turns ON when receiving is completed.

M8124

Carrier detection flag

This device turns ON and OFF in synchronization with the CD signal.

M8129*1

Time-out check flag

This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the

next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time- R/W
out time setting device (D8129).

M8161

8-bit processing mode

This device sets the send/receive data to 16-bit data or 8-bit data.

R/W
R

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

Not provided in FX2N PLCs before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs.

2. Word devices
Device

Name
Error code number of serial
communication error

D8063

Description

D8120

Communication format setting This device sets the communication format.

D8122

Remaining amount of data to

be sent

This device stores the amount of remaining send data.

D8123

Amount of data already

received

This device stores the amount of data already received.

D8124

Header

This device sets the header (initial value: STX (H02)).

R/W

D8125

Terminator

This device sets the terminator (initial value: ETX (H03)).

R/W

Time-out time setting

This device sets the time-out time.

R/W

D8129*2

R/W

D8405

*3

Communication parameter display This device stores communication parameters set in the PLC.

D8419

*3

Operation mode display

This device stores the communication type being used.

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

F-90

R/W

When the serial communication error flag (M8063) turns ON, this
R/W
device stores the corresponding error code.

*2.

Not provided in FX2N PLCs before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N PLCs.

*3.

Provided only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

Details of related devices (RS instruction)

Common Items

12.2

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction)

This section explains devices used during non-protocol communication.

12.2.1 Serial communication error [M8063]

B
N:N Network

This device turns ON when an error occurs during serial communication.

1. Detailed contents
This device works as the serial communication error flag.
When this device turns ON, a corresponding error code is stored in D8063.

2. Cautions on use

Parallel Link

The serial communication error flag does not turn OFF even after communication recovers its normal status.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

12.2.2 Communication setting keep [M8120]

1. Detailed contents
In FX0N PLCs, set M8120 to ON in a sequence program so that the communication format setting is kept.

E
Inverter
Communication

2. Cautions on use

Computer Link

Set this device to ON in a sequence program so that the communication setting is kept (for FX0N PLCs).

In FX0N PLCs, the communication setting status is kept only when M8120 is set to ON.
In any PLC other than the FX0N PLCs, setting of M8120 is not required.

12.2.3 Sending wait flag [M8121]

This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

In full-duplex communication in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

While the control line is set to the standard or interlink mode in a communication parameter, when the
control line DR (DSR) turns OFF while sending data, the PLC waits to send and M8121 turns ON.

In half-duplex communication
When the sending request device is set to ON while data is being received, the PLC waits to send and
M8121 turns ON.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

In full-duplex communication in all PLCs except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
M8121 does not turn ON.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Detailed contents

When this device is set to ON by the SET instruction, the PLC starts to send.

1. Detailed contents
When this device is set to ON by the SET instruction, the PLC starts to send. When sending is completed, this
device is automatically set to OFF.
When setting this device to ON, set the drive condition in the pulse type.
In FX2N PLCs before Ver. 2.00, and FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC PLCs, note the following
contents:

From when the head data is received until the receiving complete flag turns ON, it is regarded as data is
being received. If a sending request is given while the head data is being received, data is confused.

F-91

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

While the PLC is receiving data, next data is sent after the receiving is finished. During this period, the
sending wait flag remains ON.

I
Remote
Maintenance

2. Cautions on use

Programming
Communication

12.2.4 Sending request [M8122]

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction)

12.2.5 Receiving complete flag [M8123]

This device turns ON when receiving is completed.

1. Detailed contents
This device turns ON when receiving is completed.
Receiving is completed in one of the following three conditions.
When the PLC receives the amount of receive data specified by RS instruction
When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format, and the PLC receives the code set in
the terminator
When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the time set in
the time-out time setting device
When the receiving complete flag turns ON, transfer the received data to another storage destination, and
then set this flag to OFF.
When this flag is set to OFF, the PLC waits to receive.

2. Cautions on use
When RS instruction is driven while the amount of received data is set to "0", the PLC does not wait to
receive. In such a case, set the amount of received data to "1" or more, set the receiving complete flag to ON,
and then set it to OFF.

12.2.6 Carrier detection flag [M8124]

This device turns ON and OFF in synchronization with the CD (DCD) signal.

1. Detailed contents
The CD (DCD) signal (channel receiving carrier detection) turns ON when the modem line is established.
While the carrier detection flag is OFF, the dial number can be sent.
While the carrier detection flag is ON, data can be sent and received.

12.2.7 Time-out check flag [M8129]

This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended, and the next set of receive data is not given within
the time set by the time-out time setting device.

1. Detailed contents
This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within
the time set by the time-out time setting device. The receiving complete flag also turns ON.
The time-out check flag turns OFF when the PLC waits to receive.
Using this function, the PLC can receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without
the terminator.
Receiving

Receive data is
suspended.
Data

Time-out check flag

M8129
Receiving complete
M8123

F-92

D8129
10 ms

Set to OFF in sequence program.

ON
ON

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction)

A
Common Items

12.2.8 Serial communication error code [D8063]

When a serial communication error occurs, this device stores the corresponding error code.

1. Detailed contents
When a serial communication error occurs, this device stores the corresponding error code shown below.
Contents of error

6301

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6302

Defective communication character

6303

Communication data sum mismatch

Defective data format

6305

Defective command

6306

Monitoring timeout

6307

Modem initialization error

N:N Network parameter error

6309

N:N Network setting error

6312

Parallel link character error

6313

Parallel link sum error

6314

Parallel link format error

6320

Inverter communication error

MODBUS communication error

6330

Memory access error

6340

Special adapter connection error

2. Cautions on use

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Serial communication error code are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.

Inverter
Communication

6321

D
Computer Link

6308

C
Parallel Link

6304

B
N:N Network

Error code

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-93

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction)

12.2.9 Communication format setting [D8120]

This device sets the communication format.

1. Detailed contents
This device can set the data length, parity, baud rate, etc.
The table below shows the contents of the communication format setting.
Bit No.

Name

b0

Data length

b1
b2

Parity

b3

Stop bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate
(bps)

Contents
0 (bit = OFF)

1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit

2-bit

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400*1

b8

Header

Not provided

Provided (D8124)

Initial value: STX (02H)

b9

Terminator

Not provided

Provided (D8125)

Initial value: ETX (03H)

b10
b11

Control line

b11, b10
(0, 0): Not provided <RS-232C interface>
Non- (0, 1): Standard mode <RS-232C interface>
protocol (1, 0): Interlink mode <RS-232C interface>
commu(FX2N PLC Ver. 2.00 or later, and FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC PLCs)
nication
(1, 1): Modem mode
<RS-232C interface, RS-485/RS-422 interface*2>
Computer
link

b12

b11, b10
(0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(1, 0): RS-232C interface
Not applicable

b13*3

Sum check

Not added

Added

b14*3

Protocol

Not used

Used

b15*3

Control procedure

Format 1

Format 4

*1.

This setting is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

*2.

When using the RS-485/RS-422 interface, only FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs are applicable.

*3.

Make sure to set as "0" when using non-protocol communication.

2. Cautions on use
In all PLCs except FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, the communication format can be set using
parameters.
Even if the communication format is changed while the RS instruction is being driven, it is not reflected.
When setting the communication format in FX0N PLCs, set the communication setting latched (battery
backed) device (M8120) to ON.

12.2.10 Remaining amount of data to be sent [D8122]

This device stores the amount of remaining send data.

1. Detailed contents
This device stores the amount of remaining send data in 8-bit (1 byte) units.
Only data in communication frames are regarded as targets of counting.

F-94

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12 Related Data
12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction)

A
Common Items

12.2.11 Amount of data already received [D8123]

This device stores the amount of data already received.

1. Detailed contents.

This device stores the amount of data already received in 8-bit (1 byte) units.

N:N Network

12.2.12 Header [D8124]

This device sets the header.

1. Detailed contents

12.2.13 Terminator [D8125]

C
Parallel Link

When "header provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the lowest-order byte of D8124 is
used.
When data is sent, the data in the lowest-order byte of D8124 is added at the head of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving begins when the data in the lowest-order byte of D8124 is received.

1. Detailed contents
When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the lowest-order byte of D8125
is used.
When data is sent, the lowest-order byte of D8125 is added at the end of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving is completed when the data in the lowest-order byte of D8125 is received.

Computer Link

This device sets the terminator.

E
Inverter
Communication

12.2.14 Time-out time setting time [D8129]

This device sets the time-out time setting.

1. Detailed contents

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

This device sets the error evaluation time (in 10-ms units) used when receiving of data is interrupted.
The setting range is from 1 to 255 (10 ms to 2550 ms).
When "0" is set in D8129, the time-out time is set to 100 ms.

2. Cautions on use
In all PLCs except FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, the time-out time setting can be set using a parameter.

When setting the time-out time setting in FX0N PLCs, set the communication setting latched (battery
backed) device (M8120) to ON.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Even if the time-out time setting is changed while the RS instruction is being driven, it is not reflected.
After changing the setting, set the RS instruction to OFF and ON.

12.2.15 Communication parameter display [D8405]

1. Detailed contents
When the PLC power is turned ON, D8405 stores the contents of the communication parameters.
The contents of the parameters are the same as those of the communication format setting device (D8120).

Programming
Communication

This device stores the communication parameters set in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-95

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.3 Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

12.2.16 Operation mode display [D8419]

This device stores the communication type being used.

1. Detailed contents
This device stores the code of the communication type currently being used by the communication port.
The table below shows the contents of the codes.
Code

Description

Programming communication

PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network

RS instruction

RS2 instruction

Parallel link

Inverter instruction

Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication

10

CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

2. Cautions on use
This device stores "4" while RS instruction is driven or when the RS instruction is not changed over to another
mode.

12.3

Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

Available channels vary depending on the main unit.
For details, refer to Section 3.2.

1. Bit devices
Device

Description

R/W

Serial
M8062 M8063 M8438 communication
error

This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.

When this device (serial communication error) turns ON,
D8062, D8063 or D8438 stores the corresponding error
code.

M8371 M8401 M8421 Sending wait flag

This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

M8372 M8402 M8422 Sending request

When this device is set to ON, the PLC starts to send.

ch0

ch1

ch2

M8373 M8403 M8423

M8404 M8424

M8405 M8425

Name

R/W

This device turns ON when receiving is completed.

Receiving complete
While this device (receiving complete flag) is ON, the PLC R/W
flag
cannot receive any receive data.
Carrier detection
flag

This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD (DCD)

signal.

Data set ready

This device turns ON in synchronization with the DR (DSR)

signal.

(DSR) flag*1

This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and

M8379 M8409 M8429 Time-out check flag the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by R/W
the time-out time setting device.

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.

F-96

FX3U, FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLCs is applicable.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

Device
ch0

ch1

ch2

Name

Description

R/W

Serial
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, this device
D8062 D8063 D8438 communication error
R/W
stores the corresponding error code.
code

D8372 D8402 D8422

Amount of
This device stores the amount of remaining send data.
remaining send data

D8373 D8403 D8423

Amount of data
already received

This device stores the amount of data already received.

This device stores communication parameters set in the PLC.

Communication
D8405 D8425
parameter display

D8379 D8409 D8429

Time-out time
setting

D8380 D8410 D8430

Header 1 and
header 2

D8382 D8412 D8432

Terminator 3 and
terminator 4

Receiving sum
D8384 D8414 D8434
(receive data)
D8385 D8415 D8435

Receiving sum
(calculation result)

D8386 D8416 D8436 Sending sum

Operation mode
display

R/W
These devices set the headers 1 to 4.
R/W
R/W
These devices set the terminators 1 to 4.
R/W

This device stores the received sum check value.

This device stores the sum check value calculated from the
received data.

This device stores the sum check value added to the send
data.

This device stores the communication type being used.

R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write

Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

12.4

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

D8389 D8419 D8439

R/W

Inverter
Communication

D8383 D8413 D8433

Terminator 1 and
terminator 2

This device sets the timeout time.

R/W

Computer Link

Header 3 and
D8381 D8411 D8431
header 4

This device sets the communication format.

Parallel Link

Communication
format setting

B
N:N Network

D8370 D8400 D8420

Common Items

2. Word devices

Available channels vary depending on the main unit.

For details, refer to Section 3.2.

12.4.1 Serial communication error [M8062, M8063 and M8438]

Programming
Communication

These devices turn ON when an error occurs during serial communication.

1. Detailed contents
These devices work as serial communication error flags.
M8062 turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using communication port ch0.
M8063 turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using communication port ch1.
M8438 turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using communication port ch2.
When M8063 turns ON, a corresponding error code is stored in D8063.
When M8438 turns ON, a corresponding error code is stored in D8438.

I
Remote
Maintenance

2. Cautions on use
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Cleared when the power is turned off and on.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-97

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

12.4.2 Sending wait flag [M8371, M8401 and M8421]

These devices remain ON while the PLC is waiting to send.

1. Detailed contents
M8371 remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send in communication using communication port ch0.
M8401 remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send in communication using communication port ch1.
M8421 remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send in communication using communication port ch2.
In full-duplex communication
While the control line is set to the standard or interlink mode in the communication parameter, when the
control line DR (DSR) turns OFF while sending data, the PLC waits to send and M8401 or M8421 turns
ON.
In half-duplex communication
When the sending request device is set to ON while data is being received, the PLC waits to send and
M8401 or M8421 turns ON.

12.4.3 Sending request [M8372, M8402 and M8422]

When these devices are set to ON by SET instruction, the PLC starts to send.

1. Detailed contents
When these devices are set to ON by SET instruction, the PLC starts to send. When sending is completed,
these devices are automatically set to OFF.
When communication port ch0 is used, M8372 is set.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8402 is set.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8422 is set.

2. Cautions on use
When setting these devices to ON, set the drive condition in the pulse type.

12.4.4 Receiving complete flag [M8373, M8403 and M8423]

These devices turn ON when receiving is completed.

1. Detailed contents
These devices turn ON when receiving is completed.
When communication port ch0 is used, M8373 is set.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8403 is set.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8423 is set.
Receiving is completed in one of the following three conditions.
When the PLC receives the amount of receive data specified by the RS2 instruction
When the terminators are set, and the PLC receives the code set by the terminator
When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the time set by
the time-out time setting device
When the receiving complete flag turns ON, transfer the received data to another storage destination, and
then set this flag to OFF.
When this flag is set to OFF, the PLC waits to receive.

2. Cautions on use
When the RS2 instruction is driven while the amount of received data is set to "0", the PLC does not wait to
receive. To make the PLC wait to receive it is necessary to set the amount of received data "n" to "1" or more
and set the receiving complete flag to OFF from ON.

F-98

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

A
Common Items

12.4.5 Carrier detection flag [M8404 and M8424]

These devices turn ON/OFF in synchronization with the CD (DCD) signal.

1. Detailed contents

12.4.6 Data set ready (DSR) flag [M8405 and M8425]

C
Parallel Link

These devices turn ON/OFF in synchronization with the DR (DSR) signal.

1. Detailed contents
The state of DR (DSR) signal can be checked when executing RS2 instruction.
When communicating port ch1 is used, M8405 turns ON/OFF.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8425 turns ON/OFF.
The images of M8405 and M8425 are updated during END processing.

These devices turn ON when data receiving is suspended, and the next set of receive data is not given within
the time set by the time-out time setting device.

Receive data is
suspended.

Data
Set to OFF in sequence program.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Time-out check flag

M8409
Receiving complete
M8403

D8409
10 ms

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

These devices turn ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within
the time set by the time-out time setting device. The receiving complete flag also turns ON.
When communication port ch0 is used, M8379 turns ON.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8409 turns ON.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8429 turns ON.
The time-out check flag turns OFF when the PLC waits to receive.
Using this function, the PLC can receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without
the terminators.

E
Inverter
Communication

1. Detailed contents

Computer Link

12.4.7 Time-out check flag [M8379, M8409 and M8429]

Receiving

B
N:N Network

The CD (DCD) signal (channel receiving carrier detection) turns ON when the modem line is established.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8404 turns ON/OFF.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8424 turns ON/OFF.
While the carrier detection flag is OFF, the dial number can be sent.
While the carrier detection flag is ON, data can be sent and received.

ON
ON

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-99

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

12.4.8 Serial communication error code [D8062, D8063 and D8438]

When a serial communication error occurs, these devices store the corresponding error codes.

1. Detailed contents
When a serial communication error occurs, these devices store the corresponding error codes shown below.
When communication port ch0 is used, M8062 turns ON.
When communication port ch1 is used, M8063 turns ON.
When communication port ch2 is used, M8438 turns ON.
Error code
ch0 (D8062)

ch1 (D8063)

ch2 (D8438)

6201

6301

3801

Contents of error
Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6202

6302

3802

Incorrect communication character

6203

6303

3803

Communication data sum mismatch

6204

6304

3804

Incorrect data format

6205

6305

3805

Incorrect command

6206

6306

3806

Monitoring timeout

6307

3807

Modem initialization error

6308

3808

N:N Network parameter error

6309

3809

N:N Network setting error

6312

3812

Parallel link parameter error

6313

3813

Parallel link sum error

6314

3814

Parallel link format error

6320

3820

Inverter communication error

6321

3821

MODBUS communication error

6330

3830

Memory access error

6340

3840

Special adapter connection error

2. Cautions on use
Serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Cleared when the power is turned off and on.

F-100

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

A
Common Items

12.4.9 Communication format setting [D8370, D8400 and D8420]

These devices set the communication format.

1. Detailed contents

Name

b0

Data length
Parity

b3

Stop bit

1 (bit = ON)

7-bit

8-bit

b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400

b7, b6, b5, b4

(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400

b8*1

Header

Not provided

Provided*2

b9*1

Terminator

Not provided

Provided*2

E
Inverter
Communication

Baud rate
(bps)

b12, b11, b10

(0, 0, 0): Not provided <RS-232C interface>
(0, 0, 1): Standard mode <RS-232C interface>
Non-protocol
(0, 1, 0): Interlink mode <RS-232C interface>
communication*3 (0, 1, 1): Modem mode <RS-232C interface>
(1, 1, 1): Communication in accordance with RS-485
<RS-485/RS-422 interface>

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Control line

2-bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

b10
b11
b12

Computer Link

b1
b2

Contents
0 (bit = OFF)

Parallel Link

Bit No.

b12, b11, b10

(0, 0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(0, 1, 0): RS-232C interface

Computer link
Sum check

Not added

Added*4

b14*5

Protocol

Not used

Used

b15

Control
procedure
(CR, LF)

Non-protocol
communication

CR, LF: Not used

(Format 1)

Non-protocol CR, LF: Used

communication (Format 2)

Computer link

CR, LF: Not used

(Format 1)

Computer link

Make sure to set as "0" when using computer link.

*2.

In RS2 instruction, up to four headers and up to four terminators can be set.

CR, LF: Used

(Format 4)

The control line is not available in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs when ch0 is used. Set "(1, 1, 1)".
When executing non-protocol communication using RS2 instruction, add the sum check after the
terminators.
Make sure to set the terminators when adding the sum check.

*5.

Make sure to set as "0" when using non-protocol communication.

2. Cautions on use
In FX3S, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the communication format can be set using parameters.
Even if the communication format is changed while the RS2 instruction is being driven, it is not reflected.

F-101

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

In FX3G and FX3GC PLCs, the communication format can be set only for ch1 and ch2 using parameters.

I
Remote
Maintenance

*3.
*4.

Programming
Communication

*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

b13

B
N:N Network

These devices can set the data length, parity, baud rate, etc.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8370 sets the communication format.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8400 sets the communication format.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8420 sets the communication format.
The table below shows the contents of the communication format settings. Computer link setting is not
applicable for D8370, D8400.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

12.4.10 Amount of remaining send data [D8372, D8402 and D8422]

These devices store the amount of remaining send data.

1. Detailed contents
These devices store the amount of remaining send data in 8-bit (1 byte) units.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8372 stores the value.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8402 stores the value.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8422 stores the value.
Only data in communication frames are regarded as the targets of counting.

12.4.11 Amount of data already received [D8373, D8403 and D8423]

These devices store the amount of data already received.

1. Detailed contents.
These devices stores the amount of data already received in 8-bit (1 byte) units.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8373 stores the value.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8403 stores the value.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8423 stores the value.

12.4.12 Communication parameter display [D8405 and D8425]

These devices store the communication parameters set in the PLC.

1. Detailed contents
When the PLC power is turned ON, these devices store the contents of the communication parameters.
The setting contents are the same as those of the communication format setting device.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8405 stores the contents.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8425 stores the contents.

12.4.13 Time-out time setting [D8379, D8409 and D8429]

These devices set the time-out time setting.

1. Detailed contents
These devices set the error evaluation time (in 10 ms units) used when receiving of data is interrupted.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8379 sets the time.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8409 sets the time.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8429 stores the time.
Setting range for ch0 and ch2: 1 to 3,276 (10 to 32,760 ms)
Setting range for ch1: 1 to 255 (10 to 2,550 ms)
When "0" is set in these devices, the time-out time is set to 100 ms.

2. Cautions on use
Even if the time-out time setting is changed while the RS2 instruction is being driven, it is not reflected.
After changing the setting, set the RS2 instruction to OFF and ON.

F-102

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

A
Common Items

12.4.14 Header [D8380, D8381, D8410, D8411, D8430 and D8431]

These devices set the headers 1, 2, 3 and 4.

1. Detailed contents

Header 1

Header 2

Header 3

Header 4

ch0

D8380 (lowest-order byte)

D8380 (highest-order byte)

D8381 (lowest-order byte)

D8381 (highest-order byte)

ch1

D8410 (lowest-order byte)

D8410 (highest-order byte)

D8411 (lowest-order byte)

D8411 (highest-order byte)

ch2

D8430 (lowest-order byte)

D8430 (highest-order byte

D8431 (lowest-order byte)

D8431 (highest-order byte)

Header
1

Data

Computer Link

When data is sent, the data set in the headers is added at

the head of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving begins when the data set
in the headers is received.

2. Cautions on use
Even if "header provided" is selected, headers are not provided if header 1 is set to "H00".
The area before "H00" (in 1-byte units) is used to set the headers.

E
Inverter
Communication

12.4.15 Terminator [D8382, D8383, D8412, D8413, D8432 and D8433]

These devices set the terminators 1, 2, 3 and 4.

1. Detailed contents

Terminator 1

Terminator 2

Terminator 3

Terminator 4

ch0

D8382 (lowest-order byte)

D8382(highest-order byte)

D8383 (lowest-order byte)

D8383 (highest-order byte)

ch1

D8412 (lowest-order byte)

D8412(highest-order byte)

D8413 (lowest-order byte)

D8413 (highest-order byte)

ch2

D8432 (lowest-order byte)

D8432 (highest-order byte)

D8433 (lowest-order byte)

D8433 (highest-order byte)

Terminator
1

2. Cautions on use
Even if "terminator provided" is selected, terminators are not provided if terminator 1 is set to "H00".
The area before "H00" (in 1-byte units) is used to set the terminators.

Programming
Communication

Data

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Terminator

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When "terminator provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the terminators are set in the
sent and received data.
Up to four terminators can be set in each channel.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8382 and D8383 set the terminators.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8412 and D8413 set the terminators.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8432 and D8433 set the terminators.
The terminators are set in the following order.

When data is sent, the data set in the terminators is added

at the end of the specified send data.
When data is received, receiving is completed when the
data set in the terminators is received.

C
Parallel Link

Header

B
N:N Network

When "header provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the headers are set in the sent and
received data.
Up to four headers can be set in each channel.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8380 and D8381 set the headers.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8410 and D8411 set the headers.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8430 and D8431 set the headers.
The headers are set in the following order.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-103

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

12.4.16 Receiving sum (receive data) [D8384, D8414 and D8434]

These devices store the received sum check value.

1. Detailed contents
When "sum check provided" is selected in the communication format setting, the sum check is executed for
the sent and received data.
These devices store the sum added to the received data sent from the external equipment.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8384 stores the receiving sum.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8414 stores the receiving sum.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8434 stores the receiving sum.

2. Cautions on use
When selecting "sum check provided", make sure to also select "terminator provided".

12.4.17 Receiving sum (calculation result) [D8385, D8415 and D8435]

These devices store the sum check value calculated using the received data.

1. Detailed contents
When "sum check provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the sum check is executed for
the sent and received data.
These devices store the sum calculated by the FX PLC from the data received sent from the external
equipment.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8385 stores the receiving sum.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8415 stores the receiving sum.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8435 stores the receiving sum.

2. Cautions on use
When selecting "sum check provided", make sure to also select "terminator provided".

12.4.18 Sending sum [D8386, D8416 and D8436]

These devices store the sum check value added to the send data.

1. Detailed contents
When "sum check provided" is selected in the communication format settings, the sum check is executed for
the sent and received data.
These devices store the sum calculated from the send data.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8386 stores the sending sum.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8416 stores the sending sum.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8436 stores the sending sum.

2. Cautions on use
When selecting "sum check provided", make sure to select "terminator provided".

F-104

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

12 Related Data

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction)

A
Common Items

12.4.19 Operation mode display [D8389, D8419 and D8439]

These devices store the communication type being used.

1. Detailed contents

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Code

Description

Programming communication

PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network

RS instruction

RS2 instruction
Parallel link

Inverter instruction
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication

10

CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

2. Cautions on use
These devices store "5" while RS2 instruction is being driven or when RS2 instruction is not changed over to
another mode.

Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link

Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch0 is used, D8389 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

F-105

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)

12.5

ASCII Code Table

<ASCII code table (8-bit code expressed in hexadecimal)>
The ASCII codes A1H to DFH indicate Japanese characters.

*1.

F-106

\ (ASCII CODE:5C) symbol is displayed as " " in Japanese.

12 Related Data
12.5 ASCII Code Table

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

G. Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

G-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

I
Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "non protocol communication" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers using the FX2N-232IF and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the
unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

G-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1.1 Features

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

1.1

Features

Parallel Link

1. Two or more 232IF (operating in accordance with RS-232C) blocks can be connected.
Two or more RS-232C interface blocks can be connected to an FX PLC.
1) For FX2N, FX3U and FX3UC*1 PLCs
Up to eight blocks can be connected to one PLC.

D
Computer Link

*1.

B
N:N Network

The communication special function block operating in accordance with RS-232C, FX2N-232IF (hereafter
referred to as "232IF"), is connected to an FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC, or FX3UC PLC to exchange serial data in the
full-duplex method between equipment with RS-232C interfaces such as a personal computer, bar code
reader or printer.
For the contents of the hardware, refer to the "FX2N-232IF Hardware Manual".

Up to seven blocks can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

2) For FX2NC PLCs

Up to four blocks can be connected to one PLC.

2. Non-protocol communication

3. Send/receive data buffer of 512 bytes/256 words

The send data buffer and receive data buffer can store 512 bytes/256 words independently.
In the RS-232C interlink connection mode, the 232IF can receive data beyond 512 bytes/256 words.

By using this built-in conversion function, hexadecimal numeric values (0 to F) inside the send data buffer can
be converted into ASCII code when being sent, and received ASCII code can be converted into hexadecimal
values (0 to F) when being stored in the receive data buffer.

Important points and reference

chapter/section

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX PLC

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

4. Built-in ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion function

System

E
Inverter
Communication

Communication is executed in the full-duplex, asynchronous system, non-protocol method. The communication
format can be specified using the buffer memory (BFM).
The FROM and TO instructions are applicable for the buffer memory.
(In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, other instructions are also applicable.)

FX2N-232IF FX2N-232IF

To check connectable PLC models,

refer to Chapter 1.

H
Programming
Communication

For selection, refer to Chapter 3.

Printer

I
Remote
Maintenance

For wiring, refer to Chapter 4.

Apx.A

Bar code reader

Discontinued
models

G-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1.2

1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the Non-Protocol Communication (operating in accordance with 232IF) setting
procedures up until data link:

Non-Protocol Communication(232IF)
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications

Outline of system
Available PLC versions
Available programming tools
Communication specifications

Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection

System configuration

Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring

Wiring procedure
Wiring example

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

Refer to Chapter 5.
Create programs

FROM/TO instruction
Buffer memory list
Control line operation

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 7).
Refer to Chapter 6.
Practical program examples

ASCII code sending and receiving examples are

described.

*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

G-4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions

Common Items

1.3

The communication types are applicable in the following versions.

PLC

Applicability

Remarks

FX3UC Series

FX3U Series

Parallel Link

FX3GC Series

N:N Network

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
:Not applicable

232IF is not connectable.

FX3G Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX3S Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX2NC Series

FX2N Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX1N Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX1S Series

232IF is not connectable.

232IF is not connectable.

232IF is not connectable.

FX0 Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX2C Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX2(FX) Series

232IF is not connectable.

FX1 Series

232IF is not connectable.

E
Inverter
Communication

FX0N Series
FX0S Series

Computer Link

FX1NC Series

F
Products whose production was stopped
Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1.3.2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown:

1. English versions
Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

Ver. 1.08J or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

Ver. 8.18U or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

GOT1000 Series display units

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN-E

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-10P-E

Ver. 3.00 or later

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units

G-6

Ver. 1.08J or later

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name

Model name

Applicable version

Common Items

2. Japanese versions
Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.07H or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

Ver. 1.00 or later

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GOT1000 Series display units

N:N Network

FX-30P

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 2.00 or later

SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS/98-3

SW1PC-FXGP/98-3

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-PCS-KIT/V-3

SW1PC-FXGP/V3

Ver. 2.00 or later

FX-A7PHP-KIT

SW1RX-GPPFX

Ver. 3.00 or later

FX-30P

Ver. 1.00 or later

FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC

Ver. 4.00 or later

FX-10P(-SET0)

Ver. 3.00 or later

D
Computer Link

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

FX-PCS-KIT/98

Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable

models and versions supporting the list editor function.

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the ranges provided for the alternative PLC model
such as instructions and program size.
Priority: High Low

Model to be set
FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U, FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2NC Series

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N Series

FX2N

FX2(FX)

H
Programming
Communication

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Model to be
programmed

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Inverter
Communication

F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)

GOT1000 Series display units

1.4.2

SW2 A or later

FX-PCS/WIN

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

Ver. 1.07H or later

Parallel Link

GX Works2

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-7

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specification

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

2.

2.1 Communication Specifications

Specification
This chapter explains the communication specifications.

2.1

Communication Specifications
Non-protocol communication type is used in the communication specifications shown in the table below.
Item
Transmission standard
Maximum total extension distance
Protocol type
Communication method
Baud rate
Character
format

G-8

Specifications

Remarks

RS-232C standard
15 m (49' 2")
Non-protocol communication
Full-duplex, asynchronous system
300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps

Start bit

Data bit

7-bit/8-bit

Parity bit

None, odd or even

Stop bit

1-bit/2-bit

Header

Provided or not provided

Terminator

Provided or not provided

Control line

Provided or not provided

Sum check

Provided or not provided

Up to four bytes can be

specified.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

3.1 System Configuration

A
Common Items

3.

System Configuration and Selection

This chapter explains the system configuration and selection of the FX PLC and 232IF.

N:N Network

3.1

System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use the 232IF.
1 and 2 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.

FX2N-232IF

Important point in selection

POW
ER
SD
RD

Attach the 232IF to the right side of

the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the connector conversion

interface to the right side of the main
unit, and then attach the 232IF to the
right side of the connector conversion
interface.

15 m
(49' 2")

SD
RD

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2NC Series
FX3UC Series

POW
ER

D
Computer Link

FX2N Series
FX3U Series

C
Parallel Link

FX PLC

Total extension
distance

Connector
conversion
interface

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

3.2

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

The capacity of the 5V DC power supplied from the PLC is limited. The current consumption at 5V DC of
the 232IF is 40 mA. Make sure that total current consumption at 5V DC including other blocks does not
exceed the specified value.
FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Check

POW
ER
SD
RD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX2N-232IF
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Remote
Maintenance

FX2N

+
FX2NC-CNV-IF

POW
ER
SD
RD

15 m
(49' 2")

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX2NC

H
Programming
Communication

Total extension
distance

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Select a 232IF combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:

FX2N-232IF
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

G-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

FX Series

3.3 Connection to PLC

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

POW
ER
SD
RD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U

FX2N-232IF
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

POW
ER

+
FX2NC-CNV-IF

RD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232IF
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

POW
ER

FX3UC

FX3UC-1PS-5V

3.3

SD

SD
RD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232IF
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Connection to PLC
The 232IF can be directly connected to an FX PLC main unit or to the right side of another function block or
powered extension unit.
The unit number is assigned to each special unit/block in the order "No. 0, No. 1, No. 2 ..." from the unit/block
nearest to the main unit. (for FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, the unit number is assigned in the order "No. 1, No. 2,
No. 3 ...".)
Up to eight 232IF units can be connected to an FX2N/FX3U/FX3UC*1 PLC, up to four 232IF units can be
connected to an FX2NC PLC.
*1.

Up to seven 232IF units can be connected to an FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

1. For FX2N PLC

FX2N-48MR
X000 to X027
Y000 to Y027

G-10

POW
ER

POW
ER

SD

SD

RD

RD

FX2N-232IF FX2N-16EX FX2N-232IF

Special block X030 to
Special block
No.0
X047
No.1

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

3.3 Connection to PLC

POW
ER

SD

SD

RD

RD

B
N:N Network

FX3U-48MR/ES
X000 to X027
Y000 to Y027

POW
ER

Common Items

2. For FX3U PLC

FX2N-232IF FX2N-16EX FX2N-232IF

Special block X030 to
Special block
No.0
X047
No.1

C
Parallel Link

3. For FX2NC PLC

FX2NC-CNV-IF
Connector conversion interface

SD

RD

RD

D
Computer Link

POW
ER

SD

FX2N-232IF FX2N-16EX FX2N-232IF

Special block
X010 to
Special block
No.0
X027
No.1

Inverter
Communication

FX2NC-16MT
X000 to X007
Y000 to Y007

POW
ER

4. For FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) PLC

FX2NC-CNV-IF
Connector conversion interface

F
POW
ER

SD

SD

RD

RD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

POW
ER

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3UC-32MT/D
X000 to X017
Y000 to Y017

FX2N-232IF FX2N-16EX FX2N-232IF

Special block
X020 to
Special block
No.0
X037
No.1

H
Programming
Communication

5. For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC

FX2NC-CNV-IF
Connector conversion interface

POW
ER

POW
ER

SD

SD

RD

RD

I
Remote
Maintenance

FX2N-232IF FX2N-16EX FX2N-232IF

Special block
X020 to
Special block
No.1
X037
No.2

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

FX3UC-32MT-LT
X000 to X017
Y000 to Y017

G-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

4.

4.1 Pin Arrangement

Wiring
This chapter explains the wiring.

4.1

Pin Arrangement
The table below shows the pin arrangement of the 232IF.
Example of applicable connector: 17JE-13090-02 (D8C2) by DDK Ltd.
Signal
name

Function

CD(DCD)

Carrier detection

RD(RXD)

Receive data
(with LED indicator)

SD(TXD)

Send data
(with LED indicator)

ER(DTR)

Data terminal ready

SG(GND)

Signal ground

DR(DSR)

Data set ready

RS(RTS)

Sending request
(receiving enable)*1

CS(CTS)

Sending enable

CI(RI)

Calling indicator

Pin No.
Pin
5
4
3
2

9
8
7
6

#4-40UNC
inch screw

Signal direction 232IF:

External equipment

*1.The signal inside ( ) is adopted in the interlink connection mode.

4.2

Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications

(without Control Line)
BFM # 0 (communication format): b9 = 0, b8 = 0 (control line not provided)
PLC side
Name FX2N-232IF

G-12

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)
SG(GND)

RS-232C external equipment side

Name 9-pin D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

SG(GND)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

4 Wiring

4.3 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications (with Control Line)

Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications

(with Control Line)

4.3.1

Standard RS-232C mode

Common Items

4.3

RS-232C external equipment side

Name FX2N-232IF

Name 9-pin D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

RS(RTS)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

CS(CTS)

CD(DCD)

CD(DCD)

ER(DTR)

ER(DTR)

20

DR(DSR)

DR(DSR)

SG(GND)

SG(GND)

*1

*2

*1

*2

*1. It is not necessary to connect the CD signal if

monitoring the CD signal is not required.
For the CD signal, the 232IF indicates only the
status.
*2. The 232IF indicates only the status.

Interlink connection mode

Interlink serial cross cable, BFM #0 (communication format): b9 = 1, b8 = 1 (RS-232C interlink connection mode)
RS-232C external equipment side

Name FX2N-232IF

Name 9-pin D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

RS(RTS)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

CS(CTS)

ER(DTR)

DR(DSR)

SG(GND)

*1

*1

*2

*2

ER(DTR)

20

DR(DSR)

SG(GND)

In the interlink connection mode, the 232IF can

receive data larger than 512 bytes which is the
upper limit of the received data buffer in the
232IF.
*1. In this mode, the request to send (RS) signal works
as the receiving enable signal for the 232IF.
When the 232IF receives data beyond the
maximum number of receivable bytes, it turns OFF
which works as the receive ready signal (RS signal)
to ask the external equipment to stop sending. At
this time, by withdrawing the data located in the
received data buffer using a sequence program,
the 232IF can receive remaining data.
*2. The 232IF indicates only the status.

Straight cable, BFM #0 (communication format): b9 = 0, b8 = 1 (standard RS-232C mode)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

RD(RXD)

*2. The 232IF indicates only the status.

RS(RTS)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

CS(CTS)

*3. It is not necessary to connect the CI signal if

monitoring of the CI signal is not required. For the
CI signal, the 232IF indicates only the status.

CD(DCD)

ER(DTR)

20

DR(DSR)

SG(GND)

CI(RI)

22

Name FX2N-232IF

ER(DTR)

DR(DSR)

SG(GND)

CI(RI)

*1

*2

*3

*1

*2

*3

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

CD(DCD)

Name 9-pin D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub

Remote
Maintenance

RS-232C external equipment side

Programming
Communication

SD(TXD)

*1. It is not necessary to connect the CD signal if

monitoring the CD signal is not required.
For the CD signal, the 232IF indicates only the
status.

PLC side

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Connection to External Equipment with Modem Specifications

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

SD(TXD)

E
Inverter
Communication

4.4

PLC side

Computer Link

SD(TXD)

When the FX2N-232IF receives the RS (request

to send) signal at its carrier to send (CS) pin, the
FX2N-232IF transfers signals as if the external
equipment exists.

Parallel Link

4.3.2

PLC side

N:N Network

Cross cable, BFM #0 (communication format): b9 = 0, b8 = 1 (standard RS-232C mode)

G-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.

5 Creating Programs
5.1 Outline of Communication between FX PLC and 232IF

Creating Programs
This chapter explains how to create programs for non-protocol communication type using the 232IF.

5.1

Outline of Communication between FX PLC and 232IF

An FX PLC and 232IF transfer data between each other through the buffer memory (BFM).

5.1.1

For FROM and TO instructions

FX2N/FX3U/FX2NC/FX3UC PLC
Device memory

5.1.2

Communication
format

Printer

Sending command
Error reset

Data register
D****

Communication equipment

Buffer memory
TO instruction

Internal relay
M****

FX2N - 232IF

TO instruction

FROM instruction

FROM instruction

Send data

Receiving completed
status

Bar code reader

Receive data

For direct specification of buffer memory (U \G )

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs allow not only FROM and TO instructions but also direct specification of the buffer
memory (U \G ) using the MOV instruction, etc.
FX3U/FX3UC PLC

FX2N - 232IF

Device

Buffer memory
Arbitrary applied
instruction

Direct specification
of buffer memory

format

Printer

Sending command
Error reset
Arbitrary applied
instruction

Send data

\G
Arbitrary applied
instruction

Arbitrary applied
instruction

G-14

Communication

Communication equipment

Receiving completed
status

Receive data

Bar code reader

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

FROM and TO Instructions

Common Items

5.2

5.2 FROM and TO Instructions

This section explains how to use FROM and TO instructions.

5.2.1

FROM instruction

B
N:N Network

FROM instruction reads data of the buffer memory in a special block.

1. Applicable devices
For FX2N /FX2NC PLCs
Bit Devices

Word Devices

System User
X

Digit Specification
C

KnX

KnY

KnM

Others

System User
KnS

Index
V

Constant

Modify

Pointer
P

m1
m2
D

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System User

Digit Specification

System User

Others
Special
Unit

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U \G

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

E
Inverter
Communication

m1

Computer Link

For FX3U/FX3UC PLCs

Operand
Type

C
Parallel Link

Operand
Type

m2
D

2. Function and operation

Command

FNC 78
FROM

m1

m2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Number of transfer points

n = 1 to 32767
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM #
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32766

2) 32-bit operation (DFROM and DFROMP)

Special function block (BFM) PLC (word device)
"n" 32-bit data starting from buffer memory (BFM) No. m2 inside the special function block No. m1 are
transferred (read) to "n" devices starting from [ D +1, D ] inside the PLC.
m1

m2

I
Remote
Maintenance

FNC 78
DFROM

Programming
Communication

Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

Command

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1) 16-bit operation (FROM and FROMP)

Special function block (BFM) PLC (word device)
"n" 16-bit data starting from buffer memory (BFM) No. m2 inside the special function block No. m1 are
transferred (read) to "n" devices starting from D
inside the PLC.

n
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM #
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32765
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.2.2

5.2 FROM and TO Instructions

TO instruction
TO instruction writes data to the buffer memory in a special function block.

1. Applicable devices
For FX2N /FX2NC PLCs
Operand
Type

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System User
X

Digit Specification
C

KnX

KnY

KnM

Others

System User
KnS

Index
V

Constant

Modify

Pointer
P

m1
m2
S

For FX3U/FX3UC PLCs

Operand
Type

Bit Devices

Word Devices

System User

Digit Specification

System User

Others
Special
Unit

X Y M T C S D .b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U \G

Index
V

ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String

Z Modify K H

" "

m1
m2
S

2. Function and operation

1) 16-bit operation (TO and TOP)
PLC (word device) Special function block (BFM)
"n" 16-bit data starting from S
inside the PLC are transferred (written) to "n" buffer memories starting
from buffer memory No. m2 inside the special function block No. m1.
Command

FNC 79
TO

m1

m2

n
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 32767
Transfer source (PLC)
BFM # Transfer destination
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32766
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

2) 32-bit operation (DTO and DTOP)

PLC (word device) Special function block (BFM)
"n" 32-bit data starting from [ S +1, S ] inside the PLC are transferred (written) to "n" buffer
memories starting from the buffer memory No. m2 inside the special function block No. m1.
Command

FNC 79
DTO

m1

m2

n
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer source (PLC)
BFM # Transfer destination
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32765
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

G-16

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U \G )

In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, one is able to directly specify buffer memories and read/write data from/to the
specified buffer memories even with instructions other than the FROM and TO.

1. How to specify a buffer memory directly

\G

Specifies the block number

Specifies the buffer memory number

In the case of FROM instruction

M8000

FNC 78
FROM

K1

K4

FNC 12
MOV

K1

U1\G4

D0

D
Computer Link

In the case of direct

specification
M8000

D0

In the case of TO instruction

FNC 79
TO P

K1000

K1

K1

F
FNC 12
MOV P

K1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

In the case of direct

specification
M1

K1

U1\G1000

When using the FROM and TO instructions

M0
FNC 78
K1
K1000
FROM

K2

K1

D0

K2

D1

K2000

D1

K1

I
Remote
Maintenance

In the case of direct specification

M0
FNC 22 U1\G1000
MUL

Programming
Communication

FNC 22
MUL

D0

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Example 3: When multiplying the value stored in buffer memory No. 1000 in special function block
No. 1 by the numeric value "K2", and writing the multiplication result to buffer memories
Nos. 2000 and 2001 in special function block No. 2

FNC 79
D TO

E
Inverter
Communication

Example 2: When writing the numeric value K1 to buffer memory No. 1000 in special function block
No. 1 (pulse operation type)
M1

C
Parallel Link

Example 1: When reading data from buffer memory No. 4 in special function block No. 1, and
transferring it to D0

B
N:N Network

When directly specifying a buffer memory, put the following setting directly into the source or destination of
the command.

Common Items

5.3

5.3 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U \G )

K2

U2\G2000

Apx.A

The FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC main unit has a built-in CC-Link/LT master. When using special function blocks,
set the block numbers. starting from "1".

G-17

Discontinued
models

Caution

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

Buffer Memory (BFM)

This section explains the contents of the buffer memory (BFM).

5.4.1

Buffer memory list

BFM
No.

Name

#0

Communication format

#1

Command

Setting range

R/W

0087H

#2

Maximum number of receivable bytes

1 to 512
(when data length is 16-bit)
1 to 256
(when data length is 8-bit)
"0" is handled as "512" or
"256"

#3

Receiving timeout time

1 to 32767 ( 10 ms)
"0" is handled as "no timeout
time".

#4
#5

Sending header (lowest-order 2 bytes)

Sending header (highest-order 2 bytes)

4 bytes maximum,
0 suppression

0 (no header)
0

#6
#7

Sending terminator (lowest-order 2 bytes)

Sending terminator (highest-order 2 bytes)

4 bytes maximum,
0 suppression

0 (no terminator)
0

#8
#9

Receiving header (lowest-order 2 bytes)

Receiving header (highest-order 2 bytes)

4 bytes maximum,
0 suppression

0 (no header)
0

#10
#11

Receiving terminator (lowest-order 2 bytes) 4 bytes maximum,

Receiving terminator (highest-order 2 bytes) 0 suppression

0 (no terminator)
0

#12

Receiving suspension waiting time

(in interlink connection mode)

0 to 32767( 10 ms)

#13

Amount of remaining send data

0 to 512
(when data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256
(when data length is 8-bit)

#14

Amount of received data buffers

0 to 256+15*1

#15

Sending sum result

#16

Receiving sum result

#20

Time from CS ON to sending start

0 to 32,767( 10 ms)

#21

Time from actual sending completion to RS

OFF (complete flag ON)

0 to 32,767( 10 ms)

#28

Status

#29

Error code

#30

Model code

K7030

#1000 Number of bytes to be sent

0 to 512
(when data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256
(when data length is 8-bit)

#1001
to
Send data buffer
#1256

#2000 Number of received bytes

#2001
to
Receive data buffer
#2256

G-18

Initial value

0 to 512+30*1
(when data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256+15*1
(when data length is 8-bit)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

A
Name

Setting range

#2257
Preliminary receive data buffer for interlink
to
connection mode
#2271

Initial value

R/W

B
N:N Network

R: Read only
W: Read or Write
*1.

Common Items

BFM
No.

Provided for preliminary buffers for the interlink connection mode.

Caution

C
Parallel Link

Buffer memories specified as "W: For write" can be read also.

Do not use undefined buffer memory numbers in programs.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4.2

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

Communication format <BFM #0>

Bit

Contents

b0

Data length

7-bit

b1
b2

Parity

(00) : Not provided

(01) : Odd
(11) : Even

b3

Stop bit

1-bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate (bps)

(0011) : 300
(0100) : 600
(0101) : 1200
(0110) : 2400
(0111) : 4800
(1000) : 9600
(1001) : 19200

b8
b9

Control line

b10
b11

CR and LF addition

Initial value

8-bit

1 : 8-bit
(11) : Even

2-bit

0 : 1-bit

(1000) : 9600 bps

(00) : Not provided

(01) : Standard RS-232C

(00) : Not provided

(11) : RS-232C interlink mode

(00) : Both CR and LF are not added.
(01) : Only CR is added.
(11) : Both CR and LF are added.

(00) : Not provided

(00) : Both check sum and ASCII-hexadecimal

conversion are not provided.
b12
b13

(01) : Only ASCII-hexadecimal conversion is

Absence/presence of check sum
provided.
and ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion
(10) : Only check sum is provided.

(00) : Not provided

(11) : Both check sum and ASCII-hexadecimal

conversion are provided.
b14

Send/receive data buffer data

length

b15

Undefined (cannot be used)

16-bit

8-bit

0 : 16-bit

0 : Undefined

The communication format setting contents are determined when the sending/receiving enable command
(BFM #1, b0) turns ON.
Accordingly, it is necessary to transfer the communication format setting in advance using TO instruction
before setting the sending/receiving enable command to ON.
However, the sending header and sending terminator are determined when the sending command (BFM #1,
b1) turns ON. And the receiving header and receiving terminator are determined when the sending/receiving
enable command (BFM #1, b0) turns ON and the receiving complete flag reset command (BFM #1, b2) turns
ON. Accordingly, if only the header and terminator are changed in the middle of communication, such change
will become valid at the next sending/receiving operation, (so it is not necessary to turn OFF the sending/
receiving enable command).
Example of communication format setting (specified in hexadecimal constant)
When specifying the communication format as shown in the table below, use the following program.

G-20

Data length

8-bit

Parity

Odd

Stop bit

1-bit

Baud rate

2400 bps

Control line

Not provided

CR and LF

Not added

Check sum

Not provided

ASCII-hexadecimal
conversion

Not provided

Buffer data length

8-bit

M8002

FNC 79
K0
K0
H4063
K1
TO
Initial pulse
Block No. BFM # Set value Number of
transfer
points
b15
BFM #0

b12 b11
1

0
4

b8 b7
0

b4 b3
1

1
6

(4063H)

b0
0

1
3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

Select the communication format to

be used to send and receive data in
the 232IF from the formats shown to
the right.

Data

[2]

Data

Terminator

[3]

Data

Terminator

CR

[4]

Data

Terminator

CR

[5] Header

Data

Terminator

Sum

[6] Header

Data

Terminator

Sum

CR

[7] Header

Data

Terminator

Sum

CR

[8]

Data

CR

[9]

Data

CR

B
LF

C
Parallel Link

LF

D
Computer Link

LF

E
Inverter
Communication

2) In the communication format [1],

hexadecimal (binary) values and
ASCII codes can be sent and
received.
When using the communication
formats [2] to [9], make sure to use
ASCII codes as the sent and
received data.
The received data should not
include the header, terminator or
CR. (In communication formats [4],
[7] and [9], the data area after "CR"
is not received.)
By specifying b13 and b12 of BFM
#0, the ASCII-Hexadecimal
conversion function can be used
for communication.

[1]

N:N Network

1) The header can be specified

before the data in the
communication format.

Common Items

1. Communication format

3) ASCII codes "01H" to "1FH" can be used as the head terminator.

4) In the RS-232C interlink connection mode, the communication formats [2] to [7] are valid.

2. b0 to b7 (data length, parity, stop bit and baud rate)

Align the setting of b0 to b7 with the communication specifications in the connected external equipment.

1) When "control line not provided (b9 = 0, b8 = 0)" is specified, data is transferred using only the SD and
RD signals without using the control line.

4. b11 and b10 (CR and LF addition)

H
Programming
Communication

3) When the "RS-232C interlink connection mode (b9 = 1, b8 = 1)" is specified, the sending request (RS)
signal works as the receiving enable signal for the 232IF. When the 232IF receives data beyond the
maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2), it turns OFF the receiving enable (RS) signal to ask the
external equipment to suspend sending.
At this time, by withdrawing the contents of the received data buffer to data registers in the PLC using a
sequence program, the 232IF can continuously receive the remaining data.
When this mode is specified, make sure to perform the interlink connection for RS-232C.
For the wiring of equipment according to each setting, refer to Chapter 4.
For the operation of the control line, refer to Section 5.5.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2) When the "standard RS-232C mode (b9 = 0, b8 = 1)" is specified, use a cross cable to connect
equipment with the terminal specifications, and use a straight cable to connect equipment with the
modem specifications.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

3. b9 and b8 (control line)

The following specification methods are applicable:

Remote
Maintenance

1) Both CR and LF are not added (b11 = 0, b10 = 0).

2) Only CR is added (b11 = 0, b10 = 1).
3) Both CR and LF are added (b11 = 1, b10 = 1).
For the CR/LF addition format, refer to the communication format list above.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

5. b13 and b12 (absence/presence of check sum and ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion)

The following specification methods are applicable:
1) Neither the check sum nor ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion are provided (b13 = 0, b12 = 0).
2) Only the ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion is provided (b13 = 0, b12 = 1).
3) Only the check sum is provided (b13 = 1, b12 = 0).
4) Both the check sum and ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion are provided (b13 = 1, b12 = 1).
For the check sum addition format, refer to the communication format list above.
<ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion>
When "ASCII-Hexadecimal conversion provided" is specified, the hexadecimal numeric value data (0 to
F) inside the send data buffer (BFM #1001 to 1256) is converted into ASCII data before being sent. And
the received ASCII data is converted into the hexadecimal numeric value data (0 to F) before being
stored in the received data buffer (BFM #2001 to 2256).
The number of sent/received bytes at this time indicates the amount of hexadecimal data.
<Sending format during conversion from hexadecimal data into ASCII data>
Example: When the send data is "10ABH", the header is "STX" and the terminator is "ETX"
(Send data buffer BFM #1001)

b15
0

b0
1

1 byte
1 byte
The number of sent bytes is "2".
Data is converted into ASCII data when
being sent.
S
T
X

A B

E
T
X

02H 41H 42H 31H 30H 03H

<Receiving format in conversion from ASCII data into hexadecimal data>

Example: When the received data is "10ABH", the header is "STX" and the terminator is "ETX"
S
T
X

E
T
X

02H 41H 42H 31H 30H 03H

(Receive data buffer BFM #2001)

b15
0

0
1

0
0

1 byte
1 byte
The number of received bytes is "2".

G-22

b0
0

1
B

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5 Creating Programs
5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

A
Common Items

6. b14 (send/receive data buffer data length)

The data is handled as shown below according to the buffer data length.

1) 16-bit (b14 = 0)
Send/receive data buffer

BFM
#1001

BFM
#1001

BFM
#1002

lowesthighestlowestorder byte order byte order byte

BFM E
#1002 T
highestorder byte X

C
Parallel Link

S
T
X

N:N Network

16-bit data is divided into

Highest-order 8 byte Lowest-order 8 byte lowest-order 8-bit and highestorder 8-bit when being sent or
received.
Example of send data buffer

2) 8-bit (b14 = 1)

Send/receive data buffer

Computer Link

Ignored

Highest-order 8-bit are ignored.

Lowest-order 8 byte Only lowest-order 8-bit are sent
and received as valid data.

Example of send data buffer

BFM
#1001

BFM
#1002

BFM
#1003

lowestlowestlowestorder byte order byte order byte

BFM E
#1004 T
lowestorder byte X

E
Inverter
Communication

S
T
X

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4.3

5 Creating Programs
5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

Command <BFM #1>

BFM #1 gives the command for sending or receiving data or resetting the status information to the 232IF.
Bit

Contents

b0

Sending/receiving enable (ER ON)

b1

Sending command

b2

Receiving complete flag reset command

b3

Error reset

1. b0 (sending/receiving enable)
While b0 is ON, the 232IF can send and receive data.
Because the contents of the following set items are determined at the rising edge of b0, transfer these values
in advance using the TO instruction before setting b0 to ON:
- BFM #0 (communication format)
- BFM #9 and 8 (receiving header)
- BFM #11 and 10 (receiving terminator)
At the rising edge of b0, the error occurrence status (BFM #28, b3) and error code (BFM #29) are cleared.

2. b1 (sending command)
At the rising edge of b1, the contents of the send data buffer (BFM #1001 to 1256) in the amount of bytes
specified (BFM #1000) are sent to the external equipment.
When sending is completed, the sending complete status (BFM #28, b0) is set to ON. When the next sending
command (b1) is given, the sending complete status (BFM #28, b0) is automatically set to OFF.
When the sending command is given, the contents of the following set items are determined:
- BFM #5 and 4 (sending header)
- BFM #7 and 6 (sending terminator)

3. b2 (receiving complete flag reset command)

When b2 is set to ON, the following items are cleared:
- BFM #28, b1 (receiving complete)
- BFM #2000 (number of received bytes)
- BFM #2001 to 2256 (receive data buffer)
After receiving is completed, it is necessary to clear the receiving complete status (BFM #28, b1) because the
232IF cannot receive next data while b1 of the BFM #28 remains ON.
When the receiving complete flag reset command is given, the contents of the following set items are
determined:
- BFM #9 and 8 (receiving header)
- BFM #11 and 10 (receiving terminator)
In the RS-232C interlink connection mode (BFM #0, b9 = 1, b8 =1), the receiving complete flag reset
command works as the receiving continue command for receiving data beyond the maximum number of
receivable bytes (BFM #2), and clears the following items:
- BFM #28, b4 (receiving suspended)
- BFM #2000 (number of received bytes)
- BFM #2001 to 2256 (receive data buffer)
- BFM #2257 to 2271 (preliminary receive data buffer)
The receiving enable (RS) signal is automatically set to ON.

4. b3 (error reset)
When b3 is set to ON, the contents of the error occurrence status (BFM #28, b3) and error code (BFM #29)
are cleared.

G-24

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

Maximum number of receivable bytes <BFM #2>

5.4.5

Receiving timeout time <BFM #3>

BFM #5
(highest-order 2 bytes)

b15

b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fourth
header

0
Third
header

b15

b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0

Second
header

First header
Example:
02H (STX)

The transfer order is "fourth header third header second header first header" when four headers are
set.

Sending terminator <BFM #7 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #6 (lowest-order 2

bytes)

Receiving header <BFM #9 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #8 (lowest-order 2

bytes)>

G-25

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Setting range: 4 bytes maximum, 0 suppression

The initial value is "0" (no sending header).
Up to four headers can be specified for the 232IF received data. When the number of headers is less than 4,
"0"s in upper positions are ignored (0 suppression) and are not transferred.
The register structure and transfer order are the same as those of the sending header described above.

I
Remote
Maintenance

5.4.8

H
Programming
Communication

Setting range: 4 bytes maximum, 0 suppression

The initial value is "0" (no sending terminator).
Up to four terminators can be specified for the 232IF send data. When the number of terminators is less than
4, "0"s in upper positions are ignored (0 suppression) and are not transferred.
For the terminator transferred first, specify ASCII code from "01H" to "1FH". (For other terminators after that,
any ASCII code other than "01H" to "1FH" can be specified.)
The register structure and transfer order are the same as those of the sending header described above.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

5.4.7

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

BFM #4
(lowest-order 2 bytes)

E
Inverter
Communication

Setting range: 4 bytes maximum, 0 suppression

The initial value is "0" (no sending header).
Up to four headers can be specified for the 232IF send data. When the number of headers is less than 4, "0"s
in upper positions are ignored (0 suppression) and are not transferred.

D
Computer Link

Sending header <BFM #5 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #4 (lowest-order 2

bytes)>

Parallel Link

Setting range: 1 to 32767 ( 10 ms)

"0" is regarded as no timeout time. The initial value is "0".
This bit specifies the waiting time limit for receive data.
When the 232IF does not receive the next set of data within the receiving timeout time after the receiving
edge of each data, the receiving timeout flag (BFM #28, b2) turns ON. At this time, the 232IF recognizes that
receiving is completed, and sets the receiving complete flag (BFM #28, b1) to ON.

5.4.6

B
N:N Network

Setting range: 1 to 512 bytes (when the buffer data length is 16-bit)
1 to 256 bytes (when the buffer data length is 8-bit)
"0" is handled as "512" or "256 bytes". The initial value is "0".
This bit specifies the maximum number of bytes which can be received by the 232IF.
When the 232IF receives the maximum number of receivable bytes, it sets the receiving complete flag (BFM
#28, b1) to ON.
If the receiving terminator (BFM #11 and 10) or receiving timeout time (BFM #3) are set, the 232IF recognizes
that receiving is completed even if the already received data does not reach the maximum number of
receivable bytes when either condition is satisfied.

Common Items

5.4.4

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4.9

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

Receiving terminator <BFM #11 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #10 (lowest-order 2
bytes)>
Setting range: 4 bytes maximum, 0 suppression
The initial value is "0" (no sending terminator).
Up to four terminators can be specified for the 232IF received data. When the number of terminators is less
than 4, "0"s in upper positions are ignored (0 suppression) and are not transferred.
For the terminator received first, specify an ASCII code from "01H" to "1FH". (For other terminators after that,
any ASCII code other than "01H" to "1FH" can be specified.)
The register structure and transfer order are the same as those of the sending header described above.

5.4.10 Receiving suspension waiting time <BFM #12>

Setting range: 0 to 32767 ( 10 ms)
The initial value is "0 ms".
When the 232IF receives data beyond the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) in the RS-232C
interlink connection mode (BFM #0, b9 = 1, b8 = 1), it sets the receiving enable (RS) signal to OFF to ask the
external equipment to suspend sending.
BFM #12 sets the time after the receiving enable (RS) signal is set to OFF until the receiving suspended
status bit (BFM #28, b4) is set to ON. Make sure that the time set by BFM #12 is longer than the time between
when the 232IF sets the receiving enable (RS) signal to OFF until the external equipment completely
suspends sending.
If the receiving suspended status bit (BFM #28, b4) is set to ON before the external equipment stops sending,
the 232IF cannot receive the remaining data any more.
542
Number of
received bytes 0
BFM#2000
Receiving enable(RS)

512

513

Preliminary receive
data buffer
(BFM#2257 to #2271)

Maximum number of
receivable bytes
(BFM#2)
Data receiving
is suspended.

Set the time at which sending

from the external equipment
is completely suspended.

Receiving suspended
BFM#28 b4
Suspension waiting
time(BFM#12)
0 to 32767(10 ms)

5.4.11 Amount of remaining send data <BFM #13>

Stored value: 0 to 512 (when the buffer data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256 (when the buffer data length is 8-bit)
This buffer stores the value set in the number of bytes to be sent (BFM #1000) subtracted by the number of
already sent data.

5.4.12 Amount of received data buffers <BFM #14>

Stored value: 0 to 256+15 ("15" is provided for the preliminary receive data buffer.)
This buffer stores the amount of received data buffers which have already received data among the received
data buffers BFM #2001 to 2256 and preliminary receive data buffers for interlink connection mode BFM
#2257 to 2271.

G-26

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5 Creating Programs
5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

A
Common Items

5.4.13 Sending sum result <BFM #15>

Initial value: 0
This buffer stores the value of the check sum added to the send data.
The sum check target range and check sum calculation method are as shown below.

Terminator Check sum

Header
S
T
X

N:N Network

Sum check target range and check sum calculation method

(Example)

E
T
X

Parallel Link

02H 30H 41H 31H 32H 35H 46H 03H 35H 32H

Target range

30H+41H+31H+32H+35H+
46H+03H=152H

5.4.14 Receiving sum result <BFM #16>

Computer Link

The sum of the data including the terminators but not the first header (first one byte only) is calculated, the
least significant byte of the calculation result is converted into ASCII code, and the data is sent and received.
The ASCII data is arranged in the order of "upper digit, lower digit".

5.4.16 Time from actual sending completion to RS OFF <BFM #21>

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Set value: 0 to 32767 ( 10 ms)

Initial value: 0 ms
This buffer sets the time between when the sending enable (CS) signal is set to ON until the 232IF actually
starts to send.
When "control line not provided" is specified, this buffer sets the time after the sending command is given until
sending starts.
Set proper time according to the modem, etc.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

5.4.15 Time from CS ON to sending start <BFM #20>

Inverter
Communication

Initial value: 0
This buffer stores the sum check value of the received data.
If the check sum value added to the received data is different from the receiving sum result, "receiving sum
check error" occurs.
The sum check target range and check sum calculation method are the same as those shown in "5.4.13
Sending sum result" above.

H
Programming
Communication

Set value: 0 to 32767 ( 10 ms)

Initial value: 0 ms
This buffer sets the time between when the 232IF completes sending until RS signal turns OFF and the
sending complete flag (BFM #28, b0) turns ON.
Set proper time according to the modem, etc.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

5.4.17 Status <BFM #28>

Bit

Contents

b0

Sending complete

b1
b2

Bit

Contents

b8

RS(RTS)

Receiving complete

b9

ER(DTR)

Receiving timeout

b10

Undefined

b3

Error occurrence

b11

Undefined

b4

Receiving suspended

b12

DR(DSR)

b5

Undefined

b13

CD(DCD)

b6

Sending

b14

DS(CTS)

b7

Receiving

b15

CI(RI)

This buffer stores the 232IF status and sending/receiving result as the status information. The PLC can read
this buffer using the FROM instruction.

1. b0 (sending complete)
When sending the specified amount of bytes (BFM #1000) is completed, the sending complete flag (b0) is set
to ON.
The sending complete flag (b0) is automatically set to OFF when the next sending command (BFM #1, b1) is
set to ON.

2. b1 (receiving complete)
When the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) are received, the receiving complete flag (b1) is set
to ON.
If the receiving terminator (BFM #11 and 10) or receiving timeout time (BFM #3) is set, the 232IF recognizes
that receiving is completed even if the already received data does not reach the maximum number of
received bytes when either condition is satisfied.
It is necessary to set this receiving complete flag to OFF in a sequence program. The 232IF is not ready to
receive the next set of data while this bit is ON. Use the receiving complete flag reset command (BFM #1, b2)
to set this bit to OFF.

3. b2 (receiving timeout)
When the receiving timeout time (BFM #3) is reached during receiving, the receiving timeout bit (b2) is set to
ON. And the receiving complete flag (b1) is also set to ON.
The receiving timeout status (b2) is set to OFF when the receiving complete flag reset command (BFM #1,
b2) is executed.

4. b3 (error occurrence)
When an error occurs during sending or receiving, the error occurrence status bit (b3) is set to ON and the
contents of the error are stored in the error code (BFM #29).

5. b4 (receiving suspended)
When the 232IF receives data beyond the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) in the RS-232C
interlink connection mode (BFM #0, b9 = 1, b8 = 1), it sets the receiving enable (RS) signal to OFF and asks
the external equipment to suspend sending. After the receiving suspension waiting time (BFM #12), the 232IF
sets the receiving suspended status bit (b4) to ON.
To receive data beyond the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) in the interlink connection mode,
it is necessary to monitor the rising edge of this receiving suspended status bit (b4) in the sequence program,
and withdraw the number of received bytes (BFM #2000) or amount of received data buffers (BFM #14) from
the received data buffer (BFM #2001 to 2271) to data registers inside the PLC.

6. b6 (sending)
This bit remains ON from when the sending command (BFM #1, b1) is given until the sending complete flag
(BFM #28, b0) is set to ON.

7. b7 (receiving)
This bit remains ON from when the head data is received until the receiving complete flag (BFM #28, b1) is
set to ON.

8. b8 (RS), b9 (ER), b12 (DR), b13 (CD), b14 (CS) and b15 (CI)
These bits indicate the operation status by their ON/OFF status.

G-28

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)

A
Common Items

5.4.18 Error code <BFM #29>

For the error codes, refer to Section 7.2.

5.4.19 Model code <BFM #30>

5.4.20 Number of bytes to be sent <BFM #1000>

5.4.21 Send data buffer <BFM #1001 to 1256>

Structure of send/receive data buffer

Example: BFM #1001 (16-bit buffer)
Highest-order byte

Lowest-order byte
0

32H=2

b0

Inverter
Communication

b15

1
41H=A

1 byte

1 byte

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1 word

Values in the send data buffers and receive data buffers are handled as hexadecimal values.

5.4.22 Number of received bytes <BFM #2000>

"30" or "15" bytes are provided for the preliminary buffer in the interlink connection mode.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Stored value: 0 to 512+30*1 bytes (when the buffer data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256+15*1 bytes (when the buffer data length is 8-bit)
This buffer stores the number of bytes received from the external equipment. The value stored in this buffer is
cleared when the receiving complete flag reset command (BFM #1, b2) is given.
*1.

D
Computer Link

The send data buffer is a section of 16-bit buffers for storing the send data. The send data buffers can store
up to 512 bytes/256 words.

C
Parallel Link

Setting range: 0 to 512 bytes (when the buffer data length is 16-bit)
0 to 256 bytes (when the buffer data length is 8-bit)
This buffer specifies how many bytes should be sent among the 512 bytes/256 words in the 16-bit send data
buffer (BFM #1001 to 1256).

B
N:N Network

The model code of the 232IF is "K7030".

The model code is a specific code assigned to each special extension module. By reading the model code in
the PLC, the equipment type can be checked.

The received data buffer is a section of 16-bit buffers for storing the data received from the external equipment.
The received data buffer can store up to 512 bytes/256 words.
The received data buffer structure is same as the send data buffer structure.
The contents of the received data buffer are cleared when the receiving complete flag reset command (BFM
#1, b2) is given.

G-29

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

The preliminary receive data buffer is provided for storing the data beyond 512 bytes in the interlink
connection mode. The preliminary receive data buffers are used to receive the data sent after the receiving
enable (RS) signal is set to OFF until the external equipment suspends sending.
The contents of the preliminary receive data buffer are cleared when the receiving complete flag reset
command (BFM #1, b2) is given.

I
Remote
Maintenance

5.4.24 Preliminary receive data buffer for interlink connection mode <BFM #2257 to 2271>

Programming
Communication

5.4.23 Receive data buffer <BFM #2001 to 2256>

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.5 Operation of Control Line

5.5

Operation of Control Line

5.5.1

When control line is not provided [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 0)]

OFF
Sending/
receiving enable
(BFM#1 b0)
Sending
command
(BFM#1 b1)

ON

Set this bit to OFF in the sequence

program. While it remains ON,
the next data cannot be sent.

ON

OFF

SD(TXD)
Send data

Message 1
Time set by BFM #20

OFF multiplied by 10 ms
Sending
complete
(BFM#28 b0)
RD(RXD)
Receive data

G-30

Time set by BFM #20

multiplied by 10 ms

ON

Message 2

Message 3
ON

OFF
Receiving
complete
(BFM#28 b1)
Receiving
complete flag
reset command
(BFM#1 b2)

Message 4

OFF
The receiving waiting
status is started.

ON

Set this bit to OFF in the

sequence program.
While it remains ON, the
next receiving complete
flag reset command
cannot be given.

After receiving is completed and the received

data is read, set the receiving complete flag
(BFM #28, b1) to OFF using the receiving
complete flag reset command.

Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program

While it remains ON, the next receiving
complete flag reset command cannot be
given.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

When control line is in standard RS-232C mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 1)]

Sending/receiving
enable
OFF
(BFM#1 b0)
OFF

Sending
command
(BFM#1 b1)

OFF

RS(RTS)

OFF

CS(CTS)

OFF

SD(TXD)
Send data
Sending
complete
(BFM#28 b0)

OFF

ON

Set this bit to OFF in the sequence

program. While it remains ON, the
next data cannot be sent.

* Value set by BFM #21

multiplied by 10 ms

ON
*
ON

Message 2
Time set by BFM #20
multiplied by 10 ms
* Value set by BFM #21
multiplied by 10 ms

Message 4
Time set by BFM #20
multiplied by 10 ms

D
*

Computer Link

Message 1

Message 3

ON

OFF

Set this bit to OFF in the

sequence program.
While it remains ON, the next
receiving complete flag reset
command cannot be given.
The receiving waiting
status is started.

After receiving is completed and the received

data is read, set the receiving complete flag
(BFM #28, b1) to OFF using the receiving
complete flag reset command.

Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program.

While it remains ON, the next receiving
complete flag reset command cannot be given.

Inverter
Communication

Receiving
OFF
complete flag
reset command
(BFM#1 b2)

ON

Parallel Link

OFF

RD(RXD)
Receive data
Receiving
complete
(BFM#28 b1)

ON

N:N Network

DR(DSR)

Common Items

5.5.2

5.5 Operation of Control Line

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Creating Programs

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

5.5.3

5.5 Operation of Control Line

When control line is in RS-232C interlink mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (1, 1)]

Sending/receiving
OFF
enable
(BFM#1 b0)

ON

OFF

ON

DR(DSR)
Sending
command
(BFM#1 b1)

OFF

ON

Set this bit to OFF in the

sequence program.
While it remains ON, the
next data cannot be sent.

OFF *1

CS(CTS)

*1
Time set by BFM #20
multiplied by 10 ms

SD(TXD)
Send data
Sending
complete
(BFM#28 b0)
RS(RTS)

Message 4

Message 2
OFF

ON

OFF

Time set by BFM

#21 multiplied by
10 ms

ON

Message 3

RD(RXD)
Receive data
Receiving
suspended
(BFM#28 b4)
Receiving
complete
(BFM#28 b1)
Receiving
complete flag
reset command
(BFM#1 b2)

Message 1
Message 3
OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Time set by BFM #12

multiplied by 10 ms
Set this bit to OFF in the
sequence program. While
it remains ON, the next
receiving complete flag
reset command cannot be
given.

After receiving is completed and the received data is

read, set the receiving complete flag (BFM #28, b1) to
OFF using the receiving complete flag reset
command.

G-32

Set this bit to OFF in the sequence program.

While it remains ON, the next receiving
complete flag reset command cannot be given.

*1.

Make sure that the CS (CTS) signal turns ON in the 232IF while the external equipment is ready to
receive.

*2.

When the amount of data already received exceeds the maximum number of receivable bytes
specified by BFM #2, the RS (RTS) signal turns OFF. Accordingly, sending is suspended from the
external equipment within 30 bytes when the send/receive data buffer data length is 16-bit (BFM #0,
b14= 0), or within 15 bytes when the send/receive data buffer data length is 8-bit (BFM #0, b14= 1).
If sending is not suspended, the 232IF cannot receive all sent data.

*3.

Read the amount of received bytes (BFM #14) from the received data buffer (BFM #2001 to 2271) to
data registers in the PLC, and then set it to ON.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data

Practical Program Examples

Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data

In this example, the 16-bit buffer length data is sent and received between the 232IF and equipment with the
terminal specifications. In this example, ASCII codes stored in the data registers D201 to D205 in the PLC are
sent to the external equipment, and the data received from the external equipment is stored to data registers
D301 to D304 in the PLC.

N:N Network

6.1

Common Items

6.

C
Parallel Link

1. System configuration
POW
ER
SD
RD

Cross cable

Computer Link

Personal computer, etc.

FX2N-232IF

FX3U Series

2. Example of setting buffer memory

Suppose that each buffer memory not described here is set to the initial value.

1) Communication format <BFM #0>

Contents

Setting

b0

Data length

(1) : 8-bit

b1
b2

Parity

(1,1) : Even

b3

Stop bit

(1) : 2-bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate

(1001) : 19200 bps

b8
b9

Control line

(00) : Not provided

b10
b11

CR and LF addition

(00) : Not provided

b12
b13

Absence/presence of check
sum and ASCII-Hexadecimal
conversion

(00) : Not provided

b14

Send/receive data buffer data

length

(0) : 16-bit

b15

Undefined

Item to specify 16-bit data

Programming
Communication

0
0

b0
0

0
9

1
F

1
(009FH)

Remote
Maintenance

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

b8 b7
0

b15
0

Inverter
Communication

Bit

2) Command <BFM #1>

M0 b0: Sending/receiving enable (ER ON)
M1 b1: Sending command
M2 b2: Receiving complete flag reset command
M3 b3: Error reset

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

3) Maximum number of receivable bytes <BFM #2>

8 bytes

G-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6 Practical Program Examples

6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data

4) Header and terminator <BFM #4 to 11>

BFM #4 and 8 (sending header and receiving header): 02H (STX)
BFM #6 and 10 (sending terminator and receiving terminator): 03H (ETX)
5) Status <BFM #28>
b0 M10: Sending complete
b1 M11: Receiving complete
b2 M12: Receiving timeout
b3 M13: Error occurrence
b4 M14: Receiving suspended
b5 M15: Undefined
b6 M16: Sending
b7 M17: Receiving

b8 M18: RS(RTS)
b9 M19: ER(DTR)
b10 M20: Undefined
b11 M21: Undefined
b12 M22: DR(DSR)
b13 M23: CD(DCD)
b14 M24: CS(CTS)
b15 M25: CI(RI)

6) Number of bytes to be sent <BFM #1000>

9 bytes
7) Send data buffer <BFM #1001 and later>
The send data "Test data" in ASCII codes is provided to 9 bytes (as specified in BFM#1000).

(BFM#1001)

2nd byte
1st byte
highest-order lowest-order
e (65H)
T (54H)
4th byte

(BFM#1002)

t (74H)

3rd byte
s (73H)

d (64H)

5th byte
(20H)

6th byte
(BFM#1003)
8th byte
(BFM#1004)
The 10th byte is not sent.
(BFM#1005)

t (74H)
10th byte
* *

7th byte
a (61H)

Space

9th byte
a (61H)

8) Receive data buffer <BFM #2001 and later>

Eight bytes specified by the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) are read to data registers
D301 to D304 in the PLC.

G-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6 Practical Program Examples

6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data

A
Common Items

3. Operation chart
BFM#1 b0
(M0) Sending/receiving
enable

0 1

78
56
34
2
01

STX
#2001 (lowest-order byte)
#2001 (highest-order byte)
#2002 (lowest-order byte)
#2002 (highest-order byte)
#2003 (lowest-order byte)
#2003 (highest-order byte)
#2004 (lowest-order byte)
#2004 (highest-order byte)
ETX

Receiving

When the receiving complete flag is not reset

E
Inverter
Communication

BFM#2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

(M11) BFM#28 b1
Receiving complete

STX

The contents of received data buffer are cleared also.

BFM#2001 to #2256
Received data buffer

ETX

Number of received
bytes

BFM#1000

Computer Link

BFM#14
Amount of received
data buffers
BFM#2000

Number of bytes
to be sent

STX

(M10) BFM#28 b0
Sending complete

The sending complete flag is

set to OFF also by the next
sending command.

Parallel Link

BFM#1001 to #1256
Send data buffer

STX
#1001 (lowest-order byte)
#1001 (highest-order byte)
#1002 (lowest-order byte)
#1002 (highest-order byte)
#1003 (lowest-order byte)
#1003 (highest-order byte)
#1004 (lowest-order byte)
#1004 (highest-order byte)
#1005 (lowest-order byte)
ETX

Sending

Amount of remaining
send data

98 7
65
432
10

N:N Network

(M1) BFM#1 b1
Sending command
BFM#13

Maximum number of
receivable bytes

(M2) BFM#1 b2
Receiving complete flag reset command

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data

4. Sequence program example

M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 79
TO

K0

K0

H009F

The communication format is transferred.

(009FH BFM#0)

K1

Block No. BFM # Transfer Number of

source transfer points

FNC 79
TO

K0

K2

K8

K1

The maximum number of receivable bytes is transferred.

(K 8 BFM#2)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K4

H02
(STX)

K1

Sending header
(02H BFM#4)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K6

H03
(ETX)

K1

Sending terminator
(03H BFM#6)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K8

H02
(STX)

K1

Receiving header
(02H BFM#8)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K 10

H03
(ETX)

K1

Receiving terminator
(03H BFM#10)

PLS

M1

Sending command

K9

D 200

X000
Sending command input
M1

FNC 12
MOV

Number of bytes to be sent

(K9 D200)

FNC 12 H6554 D 201

MOV

( e T)

FNC 12 H7473 D 202

MOV

(t s)

FNC 12 H6420 D 203

MOV

(d

NC 12
MOV

(t a)

H7461 D 204

FNC 12 H0061 D 205

MOV
Blank
FNC 79
TO

M8000
RUN monitor

K0

K1000 D200

M8003

K0

K 28 K4M10

K1

Send data (9 bytes)

"Test data"

a)

The number of bytes to be sent and send data are transferred.

D200(K 9) BFM#1000
D201(e T) BFM#1001
D202(t s) BFM#1002
D203(d ) BFM#1003
D204(t a) BFM#1004
D205( a) BFM#1005

K6

M0

FNC 78
FROM

Sending/receiving is enabled.
The status is read.
(BFM#28 b15 to b0 M25 to M10)

Block No. BFM # Transfer Number of

source

M10

Y0

Sending complete
M13

The status is monitored (if necessary).

Y1

Error occurrence
X001
Error reset input
M11
FNC 78
FROM
Receiving

transfer points

M3
K0

K2001 D301

K4

complete

M8000

G-36

FNC 79
TO

K0

K1

K1M0

The error is reset.

The received data buffers are read.
BFM#2001 D301
BFM#2002 D302
BFM#2003 D303
BFM#2004 D304

M2

Receiving complete
flag reset command

K1

The commands are transferred.

(M3 to M0 BFM#1 b3 to b0)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data

In this example, the 8-bit buffer length data is sent and received between the 232IF and equipment with the
terminal specifications. In this example, ASCII codes stored in the data registers D201 to D209 in the PLC are
sent to the external equipment, and the data received from the external equipment is stored to data registers
D301 to D308 in the PLC.

Common Items

6.2

6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data

B
N:N Network

1. System configuration
POW
ER
SD
RD

Cross cable

C
Parallel Link

Personal computer, etc.

FX2N-232IF

FX3U Series

2. Example of setting buffer memory

Suppose that each buffer memory not described here is set to the initial value.

1) Communication format <BFM #0>

Contents

Setting
(1) : 8-bit

b1
b2

Parity

(1,1) : Even

b3

Stop bit

(1) : 2-bit

b4
b5
b6
b7

Baud rate

(1001) : 19200 bps

b8
b9

Control line

(00) : Not provided

b10
b11

CR and LF addition

(00) : Not provided

b12
b13

Absence/presence of check sum and ASCIIHexadecimal conversion

(00) : Not provided

b14

Send/receive data buffer data length

(1) : 8-bit

b15

Undefined

Item to specify 8-bit data

0
0

b0
0

1
F

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

b8 b7
0

b15
1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Data length

Inverter
Communication

b0

Computer Link

Bit

(409FH)

Programming
Communication

2) Command <BFM #1>

M0 b0: Sending/receiving enable (ER ON)
M1 b1: Sending command
M2 b2: Receiving complete flag reset command
M3 b3: Error reset

I
Remote
Maintenance

3) Maximum number of receivable bytes <BFM #2>

8 bytes
4) Header and terminator <BFM #4 to 11>
BFM #4 and 8 (sending header and receiving header): 02H (STX)
BFM #6 and 10 (sending terminator and receiving terminator): 03H (ETX)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data

5) Status <BFM #28>

b0 M10: Sending complete
b1 M11: Receiving complete
b2 M12: Receiving timeout
b3 M13: Error occurrence
b4 M14: Receiving suspended
b5 M15: Undefined
b6 M16: Sending
b7 M17: Receiving

b8 M18: RS(RTS)
b9 M19: ER(DTR)
b10 M20: Undefined
b11 M21: Undefined
b12 M22: DR(DSR)
b13 M23: CD(DCD)
b14 M24: CS(CTS)
b15 M25: CI(RI)

6) Number of bytes to be sent <BFM #1000>

9 bytes
7) Send data buffer <BFM #1001 and later>
The send data "Test data" in ASCII code is provided to 9 bytes (as specified in BFM #1000).
highest-order

6th byte

lowest-order 1st byte

(BFM#1001)

Ignored

T (54H)

(BFM#1002)

Ignored

e (65H)

(BFM#1003)

Ignored

s (73H)

(BFM#1004)

Ignored

t (74H)

(BFM#1005)

Ignored

(20H)

(BFM#1006)

Ignored

d (64H)

(BFM#1007)

Ignored

a (61H)

(BFM#1008)

Ignored

t (74H)

(BFM#1009)

Ignored

a (61H)

7th byte

2nd byte

8th byte

3rd byte

9th byte

4th byte
5th byte

Space

8) Receive data buffer <BFM #2001 and later>

Eight bytes specified by the maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2) are read to data registers
D301 to D308 in the PLC.

G-38

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data

A
Common Items

3. Operation chart
BFM#1 b0
(M0) Sending/receiving
enable

STX
#2001 (lowest-order byte)
#2002 (lowest-order byte)
#2003 (lowest-order byte)
#2004 (lowest-order byte)
#2005 (lowest-order byte)
#2006 (lowest-order byte)
#2007 (lowest-order byte)
#2008 (lowest-order byte)
ETX

STX

BFM#2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

(M11) BFM#28 b1
Receiving complete

When the receiving complete flag is not reset

Inverter
Communication

Receiving

The contents of received data buffer are cleared also.

BFM#2001 to #2256
Received data buffer

78
56
34
2
01
678
345
2
01

ETX

Number of received
bytes

BFM#1000

Computer Link

BFM#14
Amount of received
data buffers
BFM#2000

Number of bytes
to be sent

STX

(M10) BFM#28 b0
Sending complete

The sending complete flag is

set to OFF also by the next
sending command.

Parallel Link

BFM#1001 to #1256
Send data buffer

98 7
65
432
10
STX
#1001 (lowest-order byte)
#1002 (lowest-order byte)
#1003 (lowest-order byte)
#1004 (lowest-order byte)
#1005 (lowest-order byte)
#1006 (lowest-order byte)
#1007 (lowest-order byte)
#1008 (lowest-order byte)
#1009 (lowest-order byte)
ETX

Sending

Amount of remaining
send data

N:N Network

(M1) BFM#1 b1
Sending command
BFM#13

Maximum number of
receivable bytes

(M2) BFM#1 b2
Receiving complete flag reset command

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Practical Program Examples

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data

4. Program example
M8002
Initial
pulse

FNC 79
TO

K0

K0

H409F

The communication format is transferred.

(409FH BFM#0)

K1

Block No. BFM # Transfer Number of

source transfer points

FNC 79
TO

K0

K2

K8

K1

The maximum number of receivable bytes is transferred.

(K 8 BFM#2)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K4

H02
(STX)

K1

Sending header
(02H BFM#4)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K6

H03
(ETX)

K1

Sending terminator
(03H BFM#6)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K8

H02
(STX)

K1

Receiving header
(02H BFM#8)

FNC 79
TO

K0

K 10

H03
(ETX)

K1

Receiving terminator
(03H BFM#10)

PLS

M1

Sending command

FNC 12
MOV

K9

D 200

FNC 12
MOV

H54

D 201

X000
Sending command input
M1

Number of bytes to be sent

(K9 D200)
(T)

Program the steps for the remaining

data in the same way.
MOV H65 D202 ( e )
MOV H73 D203 ( s )
MOV H74 D204 ( t )
MOV H20 D205 ( )
MOV H64 D206 ( d )
MOV H61 D207 ( a )
MOV H74 D208 ( t )
MOV H61 D209 ( a )
FNC 79
TO

M8000
RUN
monitor

The number of bytes to be sent and send data are transferred.

K0

K1000 D200

M8003

FNC 78
FROM

Send data (9 bytes)

"Test data"

K0
Block No.

M10

K 28

K4M10

K 10

D200(K 9) BFM#1000
D201( t ) BFM#1001
D202( e ) BFM#1002
D203( s ) BFM#1003
D204( t ) BFM#1004

D205( ) BFM#1005
D206( d ) BFM#1006
D207( a ) BFM#1007
D208( t ) BFM#1008
D209( a ) BFM#1009

M0

Sending/receiving is enabled.

K1

The status is read.

(BFM#28 b15 to b0 M25 to M10)

BFM # Transfer Number of

source transfer points

Y0
Sending complete
M13
X001

The status is monitored (if necessary).

Y1

Error occurrence
M3

Error reset input

M11
Receiving
complete

M8000

G-40

FNC 78
FROM

FNC 79
TO

K0

K0

K2001 D301

K1

K1M0

K8

The error is reset.

The received data buffers are read.
BFM#2001 D301 BFM#2005 D305
BFM#2002 D302 BFM#2006 D306
BFM#2003 D303 BFM#2007 D307
BFM#2004 D304 BFM#2008 D308

M2

Receiving complete
flag reset command

K1

The commands are transferred.

(M3 to M0 BFM#1 b3 to b0)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Troubleshooting

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

7.1 Check Items

Troubleshooting

Check Items

N:N Network

7.1

Common Items

7.

1) Check the POWER LED of the 232IF.

- While the POWER LED is ON, the drive power is being supplied normally.
- If the POWER LED is OFF, the drive power is not being supplied normally.

3) Check the SD LED and RD LED of the 232IF.

- If the RD LED does not turn ON when the 232IF receives data or if the SD LED does not turn ON when
the 232IF sends data, check the connection and wiring.
- If the RD LED turns ON when the 232IF receives data or if the SD LED turn ON when the 232IF sends
data, the installation and wiring are normal.

5) Check the timing at which data is sent and received. For example, when sending data, verify that the
external equipment is ready to receive.
6) When the terminator is not used, verify that the quantity of data to be sent matches the receivable data
quantity. If the quantity of send data may vary, use the terminator.

E
Inverter
Communication

7) Verify that the external equipment is operating normally.

8) Verify that the adopted data format is uniform. If the data format is different, modify it.

7.2

D
Computer Link

4) Verify that the communication setting (BFM #0) in the 232IF is aligned correctly with the communication
setting in the external equipment. If the communication setting is not aligned correctly, align it.

Parallel Link

2) Verify that the power supply is correctly wired to terminals of the 232IF.

Error Codes

Code

Contents
No error

Receiving parity error, overrun

error or framing error

Undefined

Cause and countermeasures

The communication format such as the baud rate does not agree.
The control timing does not agree.

Defective received character

The received data is not ASCII code.

Receiving sum check error

The sent sum does not agree with the received sum result (BFM #16).

Receive data buffer overflow

(only in interlink connection
mode)

The number of received bytes exceeds "512+30" bytes. Decrease the

maximum number of receivable bytes (BFM #2), and increase the preliminary receive data buffer area.

Baud rate setting error

Non-existing baud rate is specified.

Receiving CR error

CR is not located in the specified position.

Receiving LF error

LF is not located in the specified position.

Head sending/receiving
terminator setting error

The head terminator is something other than 01H to 1FH.

10

Receiving terminator error

The terminator is not located in the specified position. Or the terminator

does not agree.

11

Undefined

12

Transmission order error

H
Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

When an error occurs while data is being sent or received, the 232IF sets bit 3 of the BFM #28 to ON,
and stores the corresponding error code to the BFM #29.

I
Remote
Maintenance

The transmission order does not agree.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

G-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)

7.2 Error Codes

MEMO

G-42

7 Troubleshooting

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

C
Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

H. Programming Communication

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

H-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "programming communication" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

H-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Programming Communication

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains programming communication.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System
Programming communication transfers programs and monitors devices when a PLC programming tool is
connected.
2) Sequence programs can be transferred and devices can be monitored through the USB port in a personal
computer.
This function is not provided for the FX2(FX) and FX2C Series.

4) It is possible to monitor devices using one programming tool, and change programs using another
programming tool.
This function is not provided for the FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N Series.
5) Two HMIs or one HMI and one programming tool can be connected at the same time.
This function is not provided in the FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N Series.

FX PLC
For communication
equipment and PLC
........ applicability, refer to
Chapter 1.
Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
RS-422

Standard
built-in port
(USB)

Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
USB

Ethernet
adapter

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Standard
built-in port
(RS-422)

For selection, refer to

........ Chapter 2.

RS-232C

USB

USB

USB

Ethernet

I
Remote
Maintenance

Personal computer
........ For software and tools for
sequence programs, refer to
Chapter 1.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Peripheral
equipment

Applicable software
GX Works2
GX Developer
FXGP/WIN

H
Programming
Communication

For cable connection

diagrams, refer to Chapter 4.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

For combinations of cables

and converters, refer to
........ Chapter 3.
Cable selection
RS-232C/RS-422 converter

RS-422

Inverter
Communication

Important points and reference

chapter/section

System

D
Computer Link

3) Sequence programs can be transferred and devices can be monitored through the Ethernet port in a
personal computer.
This function is provided for the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series.

C
Parallel Link

1) A PLC can be directly connected to the RS-232C port in a personal computer with one cable.

H-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Programming Communication

1.2

1.2 Procedures Before Operation

Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the programming communication setting procedures up until data link:

Sequence programming
Refer to Chapter 1
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2
Determine system configuration and selection
Refer to Chapter 3
Connection configuration
Refer to Chapter 4
Connection cable connection

Outline of system
Applicable PLC
Applicable programming tools
System configuration

Standard built-in port (provided)

Selecting communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-422/RS-232C/USB/Ethernet
Cautions on configuration

Selecting connection cables

Selecting cable for each communication
equipment
Connection cable connection diagram

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

Refer to Chapter 5
Perform PLC communication setting
(initialization).
Refer to Chapter 6
Set personal computer connection.

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices,verify that
communication is being executed normally.
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 7).

PLC serial communication setting

Communication setting is not necessary.
(Confirm that setting is provided.)
Setting connection of Windows software
Communication port for connecting
personal computer
Selecting the baud rate
Ethernet port setting
Communication test
Windows software (GX Works2, GX Developer)
Setting is not required in programming
tool.
In added communication extension
equipment, standard built-in port is not
provided.

*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the Programming Communication section in this manual
or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operation methods, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

H-4

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Programming Communication

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable PLC

Common Items

1.3

PLC

FX3UC(D, DS,
DSS) Series

(Ver. 3.10
or later)

(Ver. 3.10
or later)

FX3U Series

(Ver. 3.10
or later)
(Ver. 2.00
or later

FX3G Series

(Ver. 2.00
or later

FX3S Series

FX2N Series
FX1NC Series

FX1N Series

FX1S Series

FX0S Series

FX0 Series

FX2C Series

FX2(FX) Series

FX1 Series

1.3.2

When using USB communication with a model that does not support USB communication equipment
(-BD), use the FX-USB-AW.
However, FX2(FX), FX2C and FX1 PLCs do not support the FX-USB-AW.
Use the built-in USB port in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.
The FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 1.20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC.

I
Remote
Maintenance

*2.

The programming
communication
function is not available
for any optional
communication
equipment.

Programming
Communication

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX0N Series

*1.

*2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

E
Inverter
Communication

FX2NC Series

D
Computer Link

FX3UC-32MTLT(-2)

FX3GC Series

Remarks

Parallel Link

Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard communication communication
Standard communication
built-in
equipment
equipment
equipment
built-in
Ethernet
port in
operating
in
operating in
operating in
port in
accordance accordance
adapter
accordance
accordance accordance
with
with RS-422
with RS-232C with USB
with USB
RS-422
(-BD)
(-BD) (ADP)
(-BD)*1

B
N:N Network

The table below shows communication ports applicable in each PLC.

: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
: Not applicable

Products whose production was stopped

H-5

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Programming Communication

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1.4

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown:

1. English versions
Product name
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Model name

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer
FX-30P

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

GOT1000 Series display units

Applicable version

Remarks

Ver. 1.08J or later

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.73B or later.

Ver. 8.18U or later

Ver. 1.00 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GX Developer
FX-30P

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E

GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.08J or later

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.87R or later.

Ver. 8.72A or later

Ver. 1.00 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3GC PLC
GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-E

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
FX-30P

SW DNC-GXW2-E

GOT1000 Series display units

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
FX-30P
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E
FX-10P-E
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
FX-30P
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E
FX-10P-E

H-6

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.87R or later.
Ver. 1.30 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
Ver. 1.08J or later
SW2 A or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 3.00 or later

Ver. 3.00 or later
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
Ver. 1.08J or later
SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

1 Outline
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

A
Model name

Remarks

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)

F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

2. Japanese versions
Product name
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Model name

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer
FX-30P

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

GOT1000 Series display units

Remarks

Ver. 1.07H or later

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.90U or later.

Ver. 8.13P or later

Ver. 1.00 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

FX3G PLC
SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer
FX-30P

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.07H or later

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.90U or later.

Ver. 8.72A or later

Ver. 1.00 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
SW DNC-GXW2-J

GOT1000 Series display units

H
Programming
Communication

Ver. 4.00 or later

Ver. 3.00 or later
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

I
Remote
Maintenance

GOT1000 Series display units

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW2 A or later
Ver. 2.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 2.00 or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX
FX-30P
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC
FX-10P(-SET0)
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3S PLC
GX Works2
FX-30P

The setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP is

supported in Ver. 1.90U or later.
Ver. 1.30 or later
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
Ver. 1.77F or later

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3GC PLC

D
Computer Link

GX Works2

C
Parallel Link

GX Works2

Applicable version

B
N:N Network

GOT1000 Series display units

Applicable version

Common Items

Product name

GOT-F900 Series display units

F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-7

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Programming Communication

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Product name
Model name
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-30P
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD
FX-10P(-SET0)
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
GOT1000 Series display units

1.4.2

Applicable version

Remarks

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 5.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 5.00 or later

Ver. 4.00 or later
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.

For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the ranges provided for the alternative PLC model
such as instructions and program size.
Model to be programmed

Priority: High Low

Model to be set

FX3UC Series

FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3U Series

FX3U, FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX3GC Series*1

FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N*2

FX2N*2

FX3G Series*1

FX3G

FX1N*2

FX2N*2

FX3S Series*1

FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*2

FX2NC Series

FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX2N Series

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1NC Series

FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1N Series

FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)

FX1S Series

FX1S

FX2(FX)

FX0N Series

FX0N

FX2(FX)

FX0S Series

FX0S

FX2(FX)

FX0 Series

FX0

FX2(FX)

FX2C Series

FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)

FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series

FX1

*1.

When performing communication using the standard built-in USB port, use a programming tool whose
version supports the FX3G PLC.

*2.

"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

H-8

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.1 System Configuration

A
Common Items

2.

System Configuration and Selection

2.1

System Configuration

2.1.1

For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

The standard port built in a PLC is

used.

30 m
(98' 5")

Not
required

D
Computer Link

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-422

C
Parallel Link

This section outlines the system configuration required to use programming communication.
Connect (optional) communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422, RS-232C, USB or
Ethernet adapter to a built-in port of the FX PLC or the FX PLC main unit.

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the system configuration and selection of communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-422, RS-232C or USB and Ethernet adapter required by FX PLCs.

E
+

This is the communication board

built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.

50 m
(164' 0")

Inverter
Communication

Communication
board

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.1.2

2.1 System Configuration

For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C

1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

This is the communication board built

into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the special adapter expansion

board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-232C

FX PLC

Communication
board

+
Communication Special adapter
adapter
expansion board

+
Communication
adapter

Attach the connector conversion adapter

to the main unit, and then attach the
communication adapter to the left side
of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Connector
conversion adapter

+
Communication
adapter

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

2.1.3

For communication equipment operating in accordance with USB

Communication equipment operating
in accordance with USB

FX PLC

Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

Not
required

The standard port built in a PLC is

used.

3m
(9' 10")

This is the communication board built

into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.

5m
(16' 4")

2
RD

SD

Communication
board

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

H-10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

For Ethernet adapter

1 , 2 and 3 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
FX PLC

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Attach the connector conversion

board to the main unit, and then
attach the FX3U-ENET-ADP to
the left side of the main unit.

Maximum
segment length*1

100 m
(380' 1")

FX3U-ENET-ADP Connector
conversion board

100 m
(380' 1")

Attach the FX3U-ENET-ADP to

the left side of the main unit.

100 m
(380' 1")

Connector
conversion adapter

E
Inverter
Communication

FX3U-ENET-ADP

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

*1.

Computer Link

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Attach the connector conversion adapter

to the main unit, and then attach the
FX3U-ENET-ADP to the left side
of the main unit.

Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

Important point in selection

Common Items

2.1.4

2.1 System Configuration

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Select a communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the outside dimensions and D-SUB connector shape are different between units
shown in "FX2NC-232ADP/FX0N-232ADP". Select either one.
- Only one unit of communication equipment can be connected.
- In the FX0, FX0S and FX0N Series, only the standard built-in port (8-pin MINI-DIN) is provided.
- In the FX1, FX2(FX) and FX2C Series, only the standard built-in port (25-pin D-Sub type) is provided.
FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX1S
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

+
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX1N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX1N
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

H-12

+
FX1N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

15 m
(49' 2")

N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

Parallel Link

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

+
FX2N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

Computer Link

FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

Common Items

FX Series

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

E
Inverter
Communication

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-SUB, male)

FX3S

USB Standard
built-in port
(Mini-B)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3S-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-SUB, male)

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

H
Programming
Communication

FX3S-CNV-ADP

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

I
Remote
Maintenance

*1.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

RS-422 Standard
built-in port
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

FX Series

2 System Configuration and Selection

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G
(14-point,24-point
type)

FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-SUB, male)

RS-422 Standard
built-in port
(8-pin MINI-DIN)
USB Standard
built-in port
(Mini-B)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-sub, male)

Maximum
segment

FX3G-CNV-ADP

*1.

H-14

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.

RS-422 Standard
built-in port
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

15 m
(49' 2")

ch1

USB Standard
built-in port
(Mini-B)

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3G-CNV-ADP

Inverter
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

*1.

FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.

Computer Link

FX3G
(40-point,60-point
type)

Parallel Link

ch1

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

FX Series

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
ch2

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3G
(40-point,60-point
type)

FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-sub, male)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
ch1

ch2

RS-422 Standard
built-in port
(8-pin MINI-DIN)
USB Standard
built-in port
(Mini-B)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3U-
ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
(9pin D-SUB, male)
232 and 485).
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
FX3G-CNV-ADP

ch1

+
FX3G-CNV-ADP

ch2

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(When represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.

*1.

H-16

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3U-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

ch1

Parallel Link

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Computer Link

ch1

5m
(16' 4")

RD

FX3U

SD

FX3U-USB-BD
(USB Mini-B connector)

Inverter
Communication

Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

*1.

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

Common Items

FX Series

H
Programming
Communication

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

FX Series

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-
-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

FX3U
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

ch2

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

ch2

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1NC
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2NC
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

*1.

H-18

FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch2

FX3GC
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

+
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch2

FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Inverter
Communication

+
*1.

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

Computer Link

USB Standard
built-in port
(Mini-B)

Parallel Link

ch1

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

FX Series

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)

ch1

ch2

+
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
ch1

ch2

+
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
(RJ45 type modular jack)
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

*1.

H-20

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

B
N:N Network

50 m
(164' 0")
FX3U-422-BD
(8-pin MINI-DIN)

ch1

Parallel Link

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Computer Link

ch1

5m
(16' 4")

RD

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

SD

FX3U-USB-BD
(USB Mini-B connector)

Inverter
Communication

Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

*1.

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

Common Items

FX Series

H
Programming
Communication

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

FX Series

2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U- -BD

(Where represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)
Standard built-in
port (8-pin MINIDIN)

FX3U-ENET-ADP
(RJ45 type modular jack)

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-CNV-BD FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
ch2

ch1

FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-CNV-BD FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
(RJ45 type modular jack)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.

*1.

H-22

Maximum
segment
length*1
100 m
(328' 1")

Indicates the distance between the hub and a node.

The maximum distance varies depending on the Ethernet equipment used.

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

Caution on Selection
Some caution should be observed when using a programming tool with optional FX PLC communication
equipment.
Consider the following contents during selection.

When using 422BD

B
N:N Network

2.3.1

Common Items

2.3

2.3 Caution on Selection

1. Current consumption at 5V DC of the expansion board

When the 422BD is attached to a PLC, it consumes the following current:

C
Parallel Link

1) For FX3U and FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs

The FX3U-422-BD consumes 20 mA at 5V DC from the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
2) For FX2N PLCs
The FX2N-422-BD consumes 60 mA at 5V DC from the FX2N PLC.

2. Current consumption of the special extension equipment and peripheral equipment

Peripheral equipment

Connection cable

Current consumption at
5V DC*1
115 mA*2

FX-30P
FX-10P(-E)

180 mA
120 mA

<F2-232CAB (for 25-pin D-Sub), F2-232CAB-1 (for 9-pin D-Sub)

or F2-232CAB-2 (for 14-pin half-pitch)>
+ FX-232AWC-H + FX-422CAB0

120 mA

USB cable
(for connecting personal computer: A plug)
(for connecting FX-USB-AW: USB Mini-B plug)
+ FX-USB-AW

15 mA

FX-10DU(-E)

FX-20P-CAB0 or FX-20P-CAB + FX-20P-CADP

220 mA

FX-20DU(-E)

FX-20DU-CAB0

180 mA

FX-10DM(-E)

FX-20P-CAB0 or FX-20P-CAB + FX-20P-CADP

220 mA

FX-25DU(-E), FX-30DU(-B)(-E),
FX-40DU(-B)(-ES), FX-40DU-TK(B)(-E),
FX-50DU-TK(S)(-E), and ET-50 Series

FX-50DU-CAB0(-1M, -10M, -20M, -30M)

Personal computer
(for programming)

160 mA

FX-50DU-CAB0(-1M, -10M, -20M, -30M, L)

0 mA

F940 Handy GOT (RH type)

F9GT-H(RH)CAB2-150 + F9GT-H(RH)CAB-3M(-10M) or F9GTHCAB-3M(-10M) + F9GT-HCNB + FX-50DU-CAB0(-1M)

0 mA

F920GOT-BBD5-K

FX-50DU-CAB0(-1M)

F920 Handy GOT RH type

F9GT-HCAB2-150, F9GT-HCAB-3M(-10M)

220 mA
0 mA
0 mA

GOT1000 Series (CPU direct connection type)

GT01-C R4-8P (Where

represents 10, 30, 100, or 300.)

GOT1000 Series
(GT10 5V DC power supply type)

GT10-C R4-8P (Where

represents 10, or 30.)

The power consumption of the FX3U-422-BD and FX2N-422-BD is not included.

*2.

When the intensity of the LCD backlight is set at the initial value 4.
If the LCD backlight is set at the maximum value 8, it is handled as "155mA".

220 mA

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

*1.

0 mA

I
Remote
Maintenance

F940GOT-SWD(LWD)(-E),
F930GOT-BWD(-E), ET-940 Series
F930GOT-BBD-K(-E), and F920GOT-BBD-K

GOT-A900 Series (CPU direct connection type) FX9GT-CAB0(-150,-10M)

Programming
Communication

FX-40DU-CAB(-10M, -20M, -30M) + FX-422AW0

0 mA

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

220 mA

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

<F2-232CAB (for 25-pin D-Sub), F2-232CAB-1 (for 9-pin D-Sub)

or F2-232CAB-2 (for 14-pin half-pitch)>
+ FX-232AW(C) + FX-422CAB0

E
Inverter
Communication

FX-20P-CAB0 or FX-20P-CAB + FX-20P-CADP

FX-20P(-E)

D
Computer Link

Make sure that the current consumption at 5V DC including the 422BD described above, special extension
equipment, and peripheral equipment shown below does not exceed the power capacity at 5V DC in the
FX2N/FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

H-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 System Configuration and Selection

Programming Communication

2.3 Caution on Selection

3. Connection of the FX-2PIF

The FX-2PIF cannot be connected to the 422BD.
Connect it to the standard port.

2.3.2

When using 232BD or 232ADP

When the 232BD or 232ADP is attached to a PLC, it consumes the current shown in the table below. Make
sure that the power capacity of 5V DC in the FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs is not exceeded.
: Applicable
: Not attachable
Power consumption
at 5 VDC

FX1NC

FX2N

FX3U-232-BD

20 mA

FX2N-232-BD

20 mA

30 mA

Model name

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

2.3.3

FX2NC

FX3UC
(D, DS,
DSS)

FX3U

FX3UC
(LT,
LT(-2))

FX2NC-232ADP

100 mA

FX0N-232ADP

200 mA

Other cautions
1. For FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC and FX2N (whose version is before Ver. 2.00) PLCs
1) Verify that the communication format is in the initial status (D8120 = K0).
Check the communication parameters using the peripheral equipment.
If the communication is set so that non-protocol procedure (RS instruction) or a dedicated protocol is
used, clear the setting to "0" using the peripheral equipment.
2) If RS instruction is used in the program, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it ON again.

2. For FX2N (Ver. 2.00 or later) and FX2NC (versions earlier than Ver. 3.00) PLCs
1) Verify that the communication format is in the initial status (D8120 = K0).
Check the communication parameters using the peripheral equipment.
If the communication is set so that non-protocol procedure (RS instruction) or a dedicated protocol is
used, clear the setting to "0" using the peripheral equipment.
2) If RS instruction is used in the program, do not execute it. If it is executed, the PLC operates according to
RS instruction.

3. For FX2N (Ver. 3.00 or later) and FX2NC (Ver. 3.00 or later) PLCs
1) Verify that the communication format is in the initial status (D8120 = K0).
Check the communication parameters using the peripheral equipment.
If the communication is set so that non-protocol procedure (RS instruction) or a dedicated protocol is
used, clear the setting to "0" using the peripheral equipment.
2) If RS instruction is used in the program, do not execute it. If it is executed, the PLC operates according to
RS instruction.
3) If EXTR instruction is used in the program, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it ON again.

4. For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

1) Verify that the communication format for the communication port used in programming communication is
set correctly (D8370, D8120, D8400, D8420 = K0).
Check whether the communication parameters are set correctly using the peripheral equipment.
2) Verify that the RS or RS2 instructions are not executed in the program for the communication port used in
programming communication.
Do not execute RS and RS2 instructions.
3) If an inverter communication instruction is used in the program for the communication port used in
programming communication, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it ON again.

5. Connection of (5V power type) GOT unit

When using the (5V power type) GOT unit together with the FX3S, FX3G PLC, connect only one GOT unit to
either the standard built-in port (RS-422) or the FX3G-422-BD. It is not allowed to connect two GOT units to
the FX3S, FX3G PLC at the same time.

H-24

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

3 Selecting Connection Cables

3.1 Connection Procedure

A
Common Items

3.

Selecting Connection Cables

This chapter explains the connection cable selection method.

N:N Network

3.1

Connection Procedure

Checking the connector shape

Connecting the cable connector to the programming tool

Connecting the cable connector to the PLC

- RJ45 type modular

According to the combination of the connected programming tool and PLC (communication equipment),
select the proper cable.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

1. Selecting a connection cable

E
Inverter
Communication

Check the cable connector for the PLC, and connect the cable correctly. The cable connector has
one of the following shapes:
- 8-pin MINI-DIN, male
- 25-pin D-Sub, male
- 9-pin D-Sub, female
- USB Mini-B plug

Computer Link

Check the shape of the cable connector for the programming tool, and connect the cable correctly.

Parallel Link

Check the shape (male or female, etc.) of the connector of the connected programming tool (such
as personal computer) and the shape of the connector of the PLC, and verify that connection is
possible.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Selecting Connection Cables

Programming Communication

3.2

3.2 Connector Shape in Each Product

Connector Shape in Each Product

Model name (series)

Connector shape

PLC

FX1, FX2(FX) and FX2C

PLCs

Model name (series)

13

25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S,

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs

2
1

5
4 8

FX-10P(-E),
FX-10P-SET0(-E),
FX-20P(-E),
FX-20P-SET0(-E),
FX-30P

USB Mini-B
connector

PC-AT compatible
machine

25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX3U-USB-BD

1
6

9-pin D-Sub,
male

USB Mini-B
connector

FX3U-ENET-ADP
8
1
RJ45 type modular jack

H-26

USB A connector

8
1
RJ45 type modular jack

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

9-pin D-Sub,
male

3 6

5
4 8

13

FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

3 6

Personal computer

PLC (communication equipment)

FX0N-232ADP

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

2
1

5
4 8

2
1

3 6

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLCs

FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD

Connector shape

Handy programming panel

14

14-pin Halfpitch, female

PC-9800 Series (NEC)

13

25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Selecting Connection Cables

Programming Communication

3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables

Combinations of Connection Cables

3.3.1

Handy programming panel

PLC connector
shape

Cable combination

RS-422

RS-422

1.5 m
(4' 11")

3 6

P/I

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

3 6

RS-422

RS-422

FX-20P-CAB [1.5 m (4' 11")]

... supplied with

RS-422

RS-422

3 6

Standard built-in port

13
1

FX-20P-CAB0 [1.5 m (4' 11")]

... supplied with

Standard built-in port

FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

1.5 m
(4' 11")

3 6
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

RS-422

RS-422

FX-20P-CAB [1.5 m (4' 11")]

... sold separately

14

Standard built-in port

13
1
25

1.5 m
(4' 11")

25-pin D-Sub,
female

Programming
Communication

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

1.5 m
(4' 11")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

3 6

14

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX-10P-SET0(-E)
FX-20P-SET0(-E)
FX-30P
5
4 8
2
7
1

25-pin D-Sub,
female

RS-422

RS-422

1.8 m
(5' 10")

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

25
FX-20P-CAB [1.5 m (4' 11")]
... supplied with

Inverter
Communication

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

FX-20P-CADP
[0.3 m (0' 11")] ...
sold separately

Standard built-in port

5
4 8
2
7
1

Computer Link

FX-10P(-E)
FX-20P(-E)
5
4 8
2
7
1

Parallel Link

FX-20P-CAB0 [1.5 m (4' 11")]

... sold separately

Standard built-in port

FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

Cable
length

N:N Network

Programming tool
connector shape

Common Items

3.3

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

3.3.2

3 Selecting Connection Cables

3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables

Personal computer

Programming tool
connector shape

PLC connector
shape

Cable combination

RS-422

RS-232C

F2-232CAB-1 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB0
[1.5 m (4' 11")] ...
sold separately

Standard built-in
port
FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

Cable
length

4.5 m
(14' 9")

3 6
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

PC-AT compatible
machine
- DOS/V personal
computer
- Windows personal
computer
5

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RS-422

RS-232C

F2-232CAB-1 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB
[0.3 m (0' 11")]
... sold separately
FX-422CAB-150
[1.5 m (4' 11")]
... sold separately

RS-232C

RS-232C

FX-232CAB-1 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

Standard built-in
port
13
1
25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)
5
1
9

3.3 m
(10' 9")
4.5 m
(14' 9")

3m
(9' 10")

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RS-232C

RS-232C

F2-232CAB-1 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

H-28

FX0N-232ADP
13
1
25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

3m
(9' 10")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 Selecting Connection Cables

Programming Communication

3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables

A
PLC connector
shape

Cable combination

RS-422

USB

FX-USB-AW

3 6

USB

USB

FX3U-USB-BD

USB Mini-B
connector

USB

USB

Ethernet

Ethernet

Hub

Standard built-in
port

USB Mini-B
connector

3m
(9' 10")

FX3U-ENET-ADP

Straight cable

8
1
RJ45 type
modular jack

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Straight cable

A cross cable can also be used when using direct connection (simple
connection) between the personal computer and the Ethernet adapter.

5m
(16' 4")
Maximum

Inverter
Communication

GT09-C30USB-5P [3 m (9' 10")]... sold separately

To be purchased from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service
MR-3JUSBCBL3M [3m (9' 10")]...sold separately

3m
(9' 10")

Computer Link

USB A connector

8
1
RJ45 type modular jack

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

USB cable [3 m (9' 10")]

... supplied with

PC-AT compatible
machine

3m
(9' 10")

Parallel Link

PC-AT compatible
machine
- Windows personal
computer

B
N:N Network

USB cable [3 m (9' 10")]

... supplied with

Standard built-in
port
FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

Cable
length

Common Items

Programming tool
connector shape

Cross cable

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

Programming tool
connector shape

3 Selecting Connection Cables

3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables

PLC connector
shape

Cable combination

RS-422

RS-232C
F2-232CAB-2 [3 m (9' 10")]
... sold separately

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB0
[1.5 m (4' 11")] ...
sold separately

Standard built-in
port
FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

Cable
length

4.5 m
(14' 9")

3 6
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

RS-422

RS-232C

PC-9800 Series
(NEC)
- Notebook type
personal computer
7

14

F2-232CAB-2 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB
[0.3 m (0' 11")]
... sold separately
FX-422CAB-150
[1.5 m (4' 11")]
... sold separately

14-pin Halfpitch, female

RS-232C

RS-232C
FX-232CAB-2 [3 m (9' 10")]
... sold separately

Standard built-in
port
13
1
25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)
5
1
9

3.3 m
(10' 9")
4.5 m
(14' 9")

3m
(9' 10")

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RS-232C

RS-232C

F2-232CAB-2 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

H-30

FX0N-232ADP
13
1
25

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

3m
(9' 10")

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

3 Selecting Connection Cables

3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables

A
PLC connector
shape

Cable combination

RS-422

RS-232C

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB0
[1.5 m (4' 11")] ...
sold separately

B
4.5 m
(14' 9")

3 6

RS-422

13

25

14

F2-232CAB [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H

FX-422CAB
[0.3 m (0' 11")]
... sold separately
FX-422CAB-150
[1.5 m (4' 11")]
... sold separately

RS-232C

RS-232C

F2-232CAB-1 [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

14

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)
5
1

E
3m
(9' 10")

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

9-pin D-Sub,
male

RS-232C

RS-232C

14

3m
(9' 10")

25-pin D-Sub,
female

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

F2-232CAB [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

FX0N-232ADP
13
1
25

Inverter
Communication

25-pin D-Sub,
female

25

3.3 m
(10' 9")
4.5 m
(14' 9")

Computer Link

PC-9800 Series
(NEC)
- Desktop type
personal computer

Standard built-in
port
13
1

Parallel Link

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

RS-232C

N:N Network

F2-232CAB [3 m (9' 10")]

... sold separately

Standard built-in
port
FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD
5
4 8
2
7
1

Cable
length

Common Items

Programming tool
connector shape

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

4.

4.1 Simplified Tables

Connection Cables and Interfaces

4.1

Simplified Tables

4.1.1

Cable connector shape correspondence table

From the shape of connectors at both ends of a cable, the cable model name can be known.
A Side

B Side
1
2

3
4 6
8

13

13

14

25

25

14

USB Mini-B plug

9-pin D-Sub,
female

25-pin D-Sub,
male

25-pin D-Sub,
female

FX-20P-CAB0

FX-20P-CAB
FX-422CAB0

FX-20P-CADP

FX-USB-AW
(converter)

USB cable
Provided as an
accessory of FXUSB-AW and
FX3U-USB-BD
GT09-C30USB-5P
MR-J3USBCBL3M

FX-232CAB-1

F2-232CAB-1

FX-232CAB-2

F2-232CAB-2

F2-232CAB-1

F2-232CAB

8-pin MINI-DIN,
male

A Side

7
5

1
2

B Side

3
4 6
7
5

8-pin MINI-DIN,
male

USB Mini-B
connector

USB A plug

9-pin D-Sub,
female

14

14-pin Halfpitch, male

13

14

25

25-pin D-Sub,
male

H-32

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

Cable combination simplified table

From the shape of the programming tool connector and PLC connector, combinations of the cable, converter
and communication equipment can be checked.
Interface

FX1,FX2(FX),
FX2C,A,QnA

FX1N-422-BD
FX2N-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
FX3U-422-BD

FX1N-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232-BD FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-232ADP
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)

USB

Ethernet

FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC

C
FX3U-USB-BD FX3U-ENET-ADP

Connector in PLC
13

25

14

13

25

14

Computer Link

2
1

5
4 8
7
3 6

9-pin D-Sub,
male

25-pin D-Sub,
female

USB Mini-B
connector

8
1
RJ45 type
modular jack

E
Inverter
Communication

8-pin MINI-DIN,
female

25-pin D-Sub,
female

Parallel Link

Communication
equipment

RS-232C

N:N Network

Standard port

RS-422
FX0,FX0S,
FX0N,FX1S,
FX1N,FX1NC,
FX2N,FX2NC,
FX3S,FX3G,
FX3GC,FX3U,
FX3UC

Common Items

4.1.2

4.1 Simplified Tables

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

4.1 Simplified Tables

Interface

2
1

RS-422

RS-232C

USB

Ethernet

FX-20P-CAB0

5
4 8
7

or
FX-20P-CAB

FX-20P-CAB
+
8-pin MINI-DIN,
FX-20P-CADP
female
3 6

Connector in programming tool

FX-USB-AW*1
+
USB cable
USB A connector
(included)

9-pin D-Sub,
male

14

14-pin Halfpitch, female

USB cable (included)

H-34

GT09-C30USB-5P*2
or
MR-J3USBCBL3M*2

F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1
+
+
FX-232AW
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H FX-232CAB-1
FX-232AWC-H
+
+
FX-422CAB
FX-422CAB0
or
FX-422CAB-150

F2-232CAB-1

F2-232CAB-2
F2-232CAB-2
+
+
FX-232AW
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H FX-232CAB-2
+
FX-232AWC-H
FX-422CAB
+
or
FX-422CAB0
FX-422CAB-150

F2-232CAB-2

F2-232CAB

Cable
conforming to
Ethernet
standard
practice

F2-232CAB
F2-232CAB
+
+
FX-232AW
13
1
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H F2-232CAB-1
25
14
FX-232AWC-H
+
25-pin D-Sub,
+
FX-422CAB
female
FX-422CAB0
or
FX-422CAB-150

8
1
RJ45 type
modular jack

*1.

FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLC is not applicable.

*2.

For the standard built-in port (USB) in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC PLC, use the GT09-C30USB-5P or MRJ3USBCBL3M.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

Cable Connection Diagrams

Common Items

4.2

4.2 Cable Connection Diagrams

This section explains cable connection diagrams required for connection.

4.2.1

Personal computer connection cable - No. A

No.

Cable model name

RS-232C
connection

: Male type

Application

Connection diagram

Personal computer
connector
1
13

A-1 F2-232CAB
25

25-pin D-Sub, male

RS-232C
connection

RS-232C
connection

Personal computer
connector
1
13

4
5
Communication port
2
connector
3
1
13
6
7
20
14
25
8
25-pin D-Sub, male
1
SHELL

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

RS-232C
connection

A-4 F2-232CAB-2
14

14-pin Half-pitch

RS-232C
connection

9-pin D-Sub, female

RS-232C
connection

2
3
8
4
5
6

1
2
4
9
11

2
20

14
12
13
2
3
6
8
5
4

2
3
6
8
5
4

7
8
3
2
6
5
4
1

2
3
Commercial cable*1
4
Reverse (cross) type
5
9
6
6
9-pin D-Sub, female
7
8
*1 Interlink supporting cables are not applicable.
Frame
Personal computer
connector
1
7

A-7 FX-232CAB-2
8

14

14-pin Half-pitch

1
2
4
9
11
14
12
13

Frame
3
4
2
6
8
5

Communication port
connector
1
13

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

Communication port
connector
5
1

9-pin D-Sub, female

Communication port
connector
5
1

9-pin D-Sub, female

I
Communication port
connector
5
1

Remote
Maintenance

RS-232C
connection

3
5
6
7

9-pin D-Sub, female

Programming
Communication

Personal computer
connector
5
1

2
3
5
6
7
20

Communication port
connector
5
1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

A-5 FX-232CAB-1

Personal computer
connector
5
1

Shield

25

25-pin D-SUB, male

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Personal computer
connector
1
7

14

Inverter
Communication

A-3 F2-232CAB-1

A-6

1
2
3
5
6
7
20

2
3
Commercial
4
Reverse (cross) type
5
9
6
6
9-pin D-Sub, female
7
8
*1 Interlink supporting cables are not applicable.
SHELL

cable*1

Communication port
connector
1
13

1
2
3
5
6
7
20

Computer Link

A-2

Personal computer
connector
5
1

Application

Parallel Link

14

The connector shape indicates the engagement surface.

N:N Network

: Female type

9-pin D-Sub, female

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

4.2 Cable Connection Diagrams

: Female type

No.

Cable model name

RS-232C
connection

A-8

Commercial cable*1
Reverse (cross) type

: Male type

The connector shape indicates the engagement surface.

Application

Connection diagram

Personal computer
connector
1
7

14

14-pin Half-pitch

*1 Interlink supporting cables are not applicable.

RS-422
connection

FX-422CAB0
A-9

Converter
FX-232AW,FX-232AWC,
FX-232AWC-H
1
13

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

RS-422
connection

FX-422CAB [0.3 m (0' 11")]

FX-422CAB-150 [1.5 m (4' 11")]

Converter
FX-232AW,FX-232AWC,
FX-232AWC-H
1
13

14

A-10

H-36

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

1
2
3
4
10
9
11
12
13
14
FG

Application
3
4
7
8
1

Communication port
connector
5
1

2
6
5

9-pin D-Sub, female

FG

2
3
7
12
15
16
20
24
5
8
21
18
25

2
7
3
5
1
4
6
8

1
2
3
4
5
7
8
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
24
25

1
2
3
4
5
7
8
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
24
25

3
4

2
5

8-pin MINI-DIN, male

13

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Connection Cables and Interfaces

Programming Communication

Connector conversion cable (commercial product) - No. B

: Female type

No.

Cable model name

The connector shape indicates the engagement surface.

: Male type

Application

Connection diagram

Connector conversion
B-1 cable (normal type)

9-pin D-Sub, female

RS-232C
connection

14
14

14-pin Half-pitch

3
6
5
11
7
8
SHELL

13

B-3
14

25

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

2
7
3
5
1
4
6
8

3
4

2
5

8-pin MINI-DIN, male

Cable model name

RS-422
connection

Programming tool
3
4
6
1
7
2
8
5
8-pin MINI-DIN, male

C-2

FX-20P-CAB

Programming tool
3
4
6
1
7
2
8
5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

2
3
7
5
1
4
6
8

2
7
3
12
15
16
20
24
4
8
21
13
17

Communication port
connector
3
4
6
1
7
2
8
5
8-pin MINI-DIN, male

I
1

13

14

25

25-pin D-Sub, male

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

8-pin MINI-DIN, male

Application

Remote
Maintenance

RS-422
connection

Connection diagram

Programming
Communication

C-1 FX-20P-CAB0

Application

The connector shape indicates the engagement surface.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

No.

: Male type

FX-10P/FX-20P/FX-30P connection cable - No. C

: Female type

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

25-pin D-Sub, female

13

Inverter
Communication

FX-20P-CADP

1
14
2
3
4
5
6
1
13
7
11
13
14
25
8
25-pin D-Sub, male
15
17
20
22
24
SHELL

2
3
7
12
15
16
20
24
5
8
21
18

RS-422
connection

Computer Link

Connector conversion
B-2 cable (normal type)

8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22
FG

Parallel Link

12
13
9
1
10
4
2

Application

N:N Network

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FG

RS-232C
connection

4.2.3

A
Common Items

4.2.2

4.2 Cable Connection Diagrams

H-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

Programming Communication

5.

5.1 Check Procedure

Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX

Programmable Controller
This chapter explains the communication setting method for executing programming communication using
optional communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422, RS-232C or USB.
For program communication settings in the FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual.
The setting described here is not required when the standard built-in port*1 is used.
When using this communication function in an FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC, check D8120 using
the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch1 in an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8120
and D8400 using the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8420 using
the following procedure.
*1.

5.1

When using the standard built-in port for non-protocol communication (RS2 instruction) in an FX3G or
FX3GC PLC, connect the programming software to the standard built-in USB port.

Check Procedure
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420)
Turn ON the PLC power while it is in STOP mode, and monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is "0"
The communication setting is not provided.

2. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is any value other than "0"
The communication setting is provided.

Checking absence/presence of the parameter setting

Check absence/presence using GX Works2, GX Developer, FXGP/WIN or FX-30P.
1) GX Works2 operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.2.)
2) FXGP/WIN operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.3.)
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

Checking absence/presence of sequence program setting

Check whether or not a write instruction is programmed for D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When such an instruction is programmed
Program example: (for D8120)
Change the program as shown below, and then change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H23F6

D8120

Program example

The value varies depending on

the communication setting.
M8002
Initial pulse

FNC 12
MOV

H0000

D8120

Changed program

2. When such an instruction is not programmed

Proceed to the next step.

4
H-38

Monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420) again, and confirming that its value is "0"

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

Programming Communication

5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)

5.2.1

Operating procedure

Opening the parameter setting window

D
Computer Link

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

C
Parallel Link

This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that GX Works2 is already
started up.

B
N:N Network

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
For details on ethernet adapter setting, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP Users Manual.

Common Items

5.2

E
Inverter
Communication

Setting the serial communication (parameters)

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
Select a channel to be used, and make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" box is
cleared.
If a check mark is there, clear it.
Click [End].

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A

Writing parameters and program to the PLC

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
H-39

Discontinued
models

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller

Programming Communication

5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

5.3

Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)

Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN. FXGP/WIN cannot set ch2.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.

5.3.1

Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.

Adjusting serial setting (parameter)

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
1. When there are no parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are no communication settings.
Click the [No] button.
In this case, the next step is not required.

2. When there are already parameter settings

The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are communication settings.
Click the [Clear] button to delete the communication settings from parameters.
Transfer parameters to the PLC using the following step.

Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC

Select [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.

H-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2)

A
Common Items

6.

Connection Setting for Personal Computer

6.1

Connection Setting (GX Works2)

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains the setting method for connecting a personal computer and a PLC.
GX Works2, GX Developer and FXGP/WIN for Windows, are applicable. The setting method is different in the
software packages.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.

RS-232C, USB, Ethernet

Communication port

Parallel Link

GX Works2, Windows software for personal computers, has the following items to be set. Set each item
according to the connection status.

Transmission speed

Computer Link

This setting is required to use the transparent function in the GOT (described later).
Communication time check
Number of retries

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Connection Destination View] [Connection
destination data name] to display the dialog box shown below.

E
Inverter
Communication

Each set item can be checked and changed on the Transfer Setup dialog box.
This section explains the setting using communication in accordance with RS-232C and USB. For connection
and setting of the FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Point

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

In GX Works2, [Transfer Setup] can be selected even while the monitor function window is open.

H-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

6.1.1

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2)

Setting RS-232C or USB, communication port, and transmission speed

The setting procedures for RS-232C/USB, communication port and transmission speed are described below:
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.

Displaying the "PC side I/F Serial Setting" window.

Double-click the "Serial" icon

on the Transfer Setup dialog box. The window below appears.

Selecting "RS-232C" or "USB"

1. Connection for selecting "RS-232C (include FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD)"
Connect the PLC to the RS-232C port in the personal computer.
Connect the PLC to the USB port in the personal computer using the FX-USB-AW or FX3U-USB-BD.

2. Connection for selecting "USB"

Connect the PLC to the USB port in the personal computer using the transparent function at the USB port
in the GOT1000 Series.
Connect the standard USB port of the PLC to the USB port of the personal computer. (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC)

Caution
For achieving communication using the standard built-in USB port, installation of the USB driver is required.
For the USB driver installation method and procedure, refer to the following manual.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
(Common).
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual
(Startup).

H-42

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

Programming Communication

A
Setting the communication port and transmission speed (when "RS-232C" is
selected in the step 2)
Set these items according to the connection status.
COM port:

Transmission speed:Set the communication speed with the FX PLC.

The applicable transmission speed varies depending on each FX PLC. Refer
to the table below.
FX1

FX2(FX),
FX2C

FX0,
FX0S

FX0N

FX1S

19.2 kbps

38.4 kbps

FX1N,
FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S*1

FX3G,
FX3U,
FX3GC*1 FX3UC*2

9.6 kbps

*1.

For achieving communication at 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps in an FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLC, the
FX-232AWC-H is required.

*2.

For achieving communication at 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps in an FX3U and FX3UC PLC, the
FX-232AWC-H, FX-USB-AW, or FX3U-USB-BD is required.

Computer Link

57.6 kbps
115.2 kbps

C
Parallel Link

Communication
speed

B
N:N Network

Select the communication port in the personal computer to be used (among

COM1 to COM63).

Common Items

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2)

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

6.1.2

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2)

Setting for using GOT transparent function

Arrange the setting in accordance with the connection status of the used equipment. This subsection explains
the setting when the GOT and PLC are directly connected (by serial connection).
For the GX Developer operation procedures, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
[Transparent function of the GOT1000 Series]
The following setting is required when connecting the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC using the
transparent function of the GOT1000 Series.
If the following setting is not provided, a communication error will occur.

Displaying the "PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT" window

Double-click GOT

on the Transfer Setup dialog box to display the window shown below.

Setting the CPU unit

Set "PLC Mode" to "FXCPU", and select "via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode".
[Transparent function of the GOT-F900 Series]
The following setting is required when connecting the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC using the
transparent function of the GOT-F900 Series.

Displaying the "PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT" window

Double-click GOT

on the Transfer Setup dialog box to display the window shown below.

Setting the CPU unit

Set "PLC Mode" to "FXCPU", and select "via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode".
Check "via GOT-F900 transparent mode". However, it cannot be checked if "USB" is selected on the "PC side
I/F Serial Setting" window.

H-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

Programming Communication

Setting communication time check and number of retries

The setting procedure for the communication time check and number of retries is described below:
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.

Displaying the communication time check/number of retries setting window

on the Transfer Setup dialog box. The window

B
N:N Network

Double-click the "No Specification" icon

below appears.

Common Items

6.1.3

6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2)

C
Parallel Link

Setting the communication time check and number of retries

E
Inverter
Communication

Retry times:Set the number of retries to be executed when a communication error has occurred (0
to 5).
Initial value: 0
Set the items above if necessary.

D
Computer Link

Check at communication time: Set the time for evaluating error (1 to 9999 sec). If data from the
PLC is not received within this time, it is regarded as error.
Initial value: 5 sec

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-45

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

Programming Communication

6.2

6.2 Connection Setting (FXGP/WIN)

Connection Setting (FXGP/WIN)

FXGP/WIN, Windows software for personal computers, has the following set items. Set each item according
to the connection status.
Communication port
Transmission speed

6.2.1

Setting communication port and transmission speed

The setting procedure for the communication port and transmission speed is described below:

Displaying the communication port/transmission speed setting window

Select [PLC] [Ports] from the toolbar. The window below appears.

Setting the communication port and transmission speed

Set these items according to the connection status.
Ports: Select the communication port in the personal computer to be used (among COM1 to
COM9).
Transfer speed:Set the communication speed with the FX PLC.
The applicable transmission speed varies depending on the FX Series. Refer to
the table below.
Communication
speed

FX1

FX2(FX),
FX2C

FX0,
FX0S

FX0N

FX1S

19.2 kbps

38.4 kbps

FX1N,
FX1NC

FX2N,
FX2NC

FX3S*1

FX3G,
FX3U,
*1
FX3GC FX3UC*2

9.6 kbps

H-46

57.6 kbps

115.2 kbps

*1.

The FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC Series cannot be selected. Select the FX1N Series, and then create the
program.

*2.

The FX3U and FX3UC Series cannot be selected. Select the FX2N Series, and then create the
program.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 Connection Setting for Personal Computer

Programming Communication

Communication Test (GX Works2)

GX Works2, Windows software for personal computers, has a function to test communication with PLC.
Execute the communication test using the following procedure:
This section explains the method using GX Works2.

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Connection

Destination View] [Connection destination data name].
The window below appears.

B
N:N Network

Common Items

6.3

6.3 Communication Test (GX Works2)

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Caution
In GX Works2, [Transfer Setup] can be selected even while the monitor function window is open.

Executing the communication test

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Click [Connection test] button to execute the communication test.

OK

NG

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

The communication test

finished normally

Verify that the connection method is correct:

- Port (COM) number in the personal computer
- Cable configuration

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Click [OK] button.

H-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

7.

7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Checking PLC Version Applicability

Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.

7.1

Checking PLC Version Applicability

When executing programming communication using an FX PLC and communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-422 or RS-232C, verify that the FX PLC is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.

7.2

Checking Programming Tool Applicability

Verify that the programming tool version is applicable for programming communication.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.4.

7.3

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RXD (RD)" and "TXD (SD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status

7.4

RXD (RD)

TXD (SD)

Flashing

Flashing

Operation status
Data is being sent or received.

Flashing

Off

Data is received, but is not sent.

Off

Flashing

Data is sent, but is not received

Off

Off

Data is not sent nor received.

Checking Installation
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For the mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

7.5

Checking Parameters in PLC

1. Checking the communication setting
Verify that non-protocol communication or computer link communication is not set in the parameters of the FX
PLC. If such communication is already set, programming communication with optional communication
equipment cannot be used.
For the setting of parameters in the PLC, refer to Chapter 5.

7.6

Checking Sequence Program

1. Checking the contents of the communication setting
Verify that no communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420, N:N Network: D8173 to D8180, and Parallel
Link: M8070 and M8071) is being used in the sequence program.
If any communication format is being used in the sequence program, communication will not function
correctly.

H-48

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

7 Troubleshooting
7.6 Checking Sequence Program

Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in
programming communication.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

3. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

4. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

5. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

6. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, revise them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.

Inverter
Communication

Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.

If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, revise them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

7. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

*1.

D
Computer Link

3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

C
Parallel Link

2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

B
N:N Network

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

Common Items

2. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

H
Programming
Communication

8. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

I
Remote
Maintenance

9. Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

H-49

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Troubleshooting

Programming Communication

7.7

7.7 Checking Programming Tool Setting

Checking Programming Tool Setting

Verify that the setting contents in the programming tool are correct.

1. Checking the communication port

Verify that the communication port is set correctly.

2. Checking the transmission speed

Verify that the transmission speed is set correctly.
For the programming tool setting, refer to Chapter 6.

7.8

Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

1. Checking M8062 (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
When a communication error occurs in the standard built-in port, M8062 turns ON and D8062 stores the
corresponding error code.

2. Checking the error code (D8062)

D8062 stores either of the following error codes:
Error code
*1

6201
D8062

Contents of error
Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6202

Defective communication character

6203

Communication data sum mismatch

6204

Defective data format

6205

Defective command

3. Checking M8063 and M8438

When a communication errors occur in optional communication equipment, M8063 turns ON and D8063
stores the corresponding error code during communication using ch1, and M8438 turns ON and D8438 stores
the corresponding error code during communication using ch2.

H-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

7 Troubleshooting

7.9 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

A
Common Items

4. Checking the error code

D8063 and D8438 store either of the following error codes:
Error code
D8063 (ch1) D8438 (ch2)

Defective communication character

Communication data sum mismatch
Defective data format
Defective command
Monitoring timeout
Modem initialization error
N:N Network parameter error
N:N Network setting error
Parallel link parameter error
Parallel link sum error
Parallel link format error
Inverter communication error
MODBUS communication error
Memory access error
Special adapter connection error

Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

These devices store the communication type being used.

These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1. Detailed contents

H
Programming
Communication

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Description
Programming communication
PP modem mode
Protocol dedicated to computer link
N:N Network
RS instruction
RS2 instruction
Parallel link
Inverter instruction
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
MODBUS communication
CF-ADP
ENET-ADP
Input/output expansion board is used.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

In the FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC Series, a communication error may occur during automatic
alignment of the transmission speed when programming communication is executed while the
transmission speed of the peripheral equipment is set to 19.2 kbps because the transmission speed at
power ON is set to 9.6 kbps in the main unit.
Accordingly, when a communication error occurs at start of communication and problems are expected
if the error flag (special auxiliary relay) remains ON, clear the error flag for the corresponding channel.
When problems are expected if the error flag turns ON, execute programming communication after
setting the transmission speed of the peripheral equipment to 9.6 kbps at power ON of the PLC.
In other series, the error flag for the corresponding channel does not turn ON even if the transmission
speed is automatically aligned.
(The error code is stored in the special data register for the corresponding channel.)

Computer Link

3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3812
3813
3814
3820
3821
3830
3840

Inverter
Communication

7.9

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

Parallel Link

*1.

3801

N:N Network

6301*1
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6312
6313
6314
6320
6321
6330
6340

Contents of error

H-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Programming Communication

MEMO

H-52

7 Troubleshooting

7.9 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

A
Common Items

B
N:N Network

FX Series Programmable Controllers

I.

Parallel Link

User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]

Remote Maintenance

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

Foreword

2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

I-1

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Remote
Maintenance

This manual explains "remote maintenance" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

I-2

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

1.1 Outline of System

A
Common Items

1.

Outline

This chapter explains remote maintenance.

N:N Network

1.1

Outline of System
Remote maintenance performs program transfer and device monitoring using Windows programming
software with a PLC connected to the telephone line by way of a modem.

Parallel Link

1.1.1

Maintenance for programs in PLC

1) Sequence programs can be changed by transferring and writing programs during RUN.
2) Maintenance can be performed by device monitoring, PLC diagnosis, forced ON/OFF and changing set
values and current values.

Important points and reference

chapter/section

FX PLC

Inverter
Communication

For the sequence

programming software, refer
to Chapter 3.

For the PLC model

...... applicability, refer to
Chapter 2.

........
Personal
computer

Communication
equipment
For selection, refer to
operating in
...... Chapter 3.
accordance with
RS-232C

Modem

..............

For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.

..............

Setting the modem

For the personal computer
side, refer to Chapter 6.
For the PLC side, refer to
Chapter 5.

Modem

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

General telephone line

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Commercial communication product

D
Computer Link

3) A line can be established from a personal computer to a modem connected to a PLC.

System

H
Cellular
phone

Cellular
phone

Programming
Communication

Modem

Modem

I
..............

For the remote maintenance

software, refer to Chapter 3.
Applicable software
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX-PCS/WIN

Remote
Maintenance

Personal
computer
Remotely accesses the PLC.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-3

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

1.1.2

1.1 Outline of System

File transfer between personal computers (supported only by FXGP/WIN)

This manual does not describe the operating procedure for this function, but the modem setting contents and
setting procedure in personal computers can be used as reference.
For the detailed explanation of this function, refer to the "FX-PCS/WIN SOFTWARE MANUAL".
1) Transferring sequence program files between personal computers
Important points and reference
chapter/section

System

...... For the remote maintenance

software, refer to Chapter 3.
Personal
computer

Applicable software
FX-PCS/WIN

It accesses a personal
computer (FXGP/WIN) in the
remote mode.

Commercial communication product

General telephone line
Modem

Modem

Personal
computer
Remotely accesses the
personal computer
(FXGP/WIN).

I-4

..............

For wiring, refer to

Chapter 4.

..............

Setting in the modem

For the personal computer
side, refer to Chapter 6.

..............

For the remote maintenance

software, refer to Chapter 3.

Modem

Cellular
phone

Cellular
phone

Modem

Applicable software
FX-PCS/WIN

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

Procedures Before Operation

Common Items

1.2

1 Outline
1.2 Procedures Before Operation

The flow chart below shows the remote maintenance setting procedures up until communication:

Remote maintenance

N:N Network

Refer to Chapter 1
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2

C
Parallel Link

Check communication specifications

Outline of system
Applicable PLC versions
Applicable programming tools
Software for remote access
Communication specifications

Refer to Chapter 3
Determine system configuration and selection

Perform wiring

D
Computer Link

Refer to Chapter 4

System configuration
Selecting communication equipment
Applicable modem list
Wiring procedure
Cables supplied with modem

E
Inverter
Communication

Programming tool
Connect PLC*1

F
Set modem on PLC side

Refer to Chapter 6

Turn ON power

Refer to Chapter 7

Connect line

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Set modem on personal computer

(remote access) side

PLC communication setting

Confirming that communication setting is
not provided
Setting modem
Setting modem connected to PLC
(programs and parameters)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Refer to Chapter 5

Setting modem
Setting modem connected to personal
computer

Connection through telephone line

Programming
Communication

Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and

contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.

*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.

Remote
Maintenance

If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting

(Chapter 8).

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-5

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3

Communication Type Applicability in PLC

1.3.1

Applicable versions
The communication types are applicable in the following versions.
: Applicable : Not applicable
PLC

Applicability

Remarks

FX3UC Series
FX3U Series
FX3GC Series
FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series

ME3314 (OMRON) is applicable to Ver. 2.01 and later.

FX1NC Series
FX1N Series
FX1S Series
FX0N Series

1.3.2

This function is not available

FX0S Series

This function is not available

FX0 Series

This function is not available

FX2C Series

This function is not available

FX2(FX) Series

This function is not available

FX1 Series

This function is not available

Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.

1.3.3

Products whose production was stopped

Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.

I-6

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

1 Outline
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

Programming Tool Applicability

1.4.1

Programming tool for setting modem connected to PLC

Common Items

1.4

For applicable versions

The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown:

Applicable version

Parallel Link

1. English versions
Remarks

Ver. 1.08J or later

Ver. 8.13P or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

D
-

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

F
-

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Ver. 1.08J or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Ver. 1.08J or later

SW2 A or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Computer Link

Ver. 1.08J or later

Ver. 8.72A or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Inverter
Communication

Product name
Model name
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-30P
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-30P
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
FX-30P
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
FX-30P

B
N:N Network

The tables below show programming tools applicable for modem setting using parameters and sequence
programs.
For programming software on remote maintenance, refer to Subsection 1.4.2

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-7

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

1 Outline
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model name
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-30P
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-30P
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX
FX-30P
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-30P

I-8

Applicable version

Remarks

Ver. 1.07H or later

Ver. 8.13P or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 1.07H or later

Ver. 8.72A or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 1.77F or later

Ver. 1.30 or later

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.50 or later

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW2 A or later
Ver. 2.10 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 2.00 or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 1.07H or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 5.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

1. English versions
Version allowing
setting of alternative
model

Setting an
alternative
model

Remarks

FX2N

The PP modem mode (ch1) and

PP modem mode (ch2) cannot be
set.

Ver. 1.00 or later

Ver. 1.64S or later

FX3G

FX1N*3
Ver. 1.00 or later

The PP modem mode (ch1) and

PP modem mode (ch2) cannot be
set.

Ver. 1.08J or later

FX3G

Ver. 8.72A or later

SW2 A or later*2

FX1N*3

Ver. 1.00 or later

D
Computer Link

SW2 A or later*2

Parallel Link

SW2 A or later*1

Inverter
Communication

The PP modem mode (ch1)

cannot be set.

SW2 A or later*4
FX2N

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Product name
Model to be
(Model name is shown
programmed
below.)
GX Developer
FX3U, FX3UC SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
Series
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
FX3G, FX3GC GX Developer
Series
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX3S Series
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
GX Developer
FX1N, FX1NC SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
Series
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

B
N:N Network

For FX1S, FX2N and FX2NC PLCs, it is not possible to create programs using programming tools of
inapplicable versions.
For FX1N, FX1NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs of the following versions, it is possible to create
programs by setting an alternative model. In this case, however, created programs are limited to the function
range (such as instructions and program size) supported by the selected alternative model.
Any programming tool not shown below is not applicable.

Common Items

In the case of non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)

Ver. 1.00 or later

An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver. 8.18U.

*2.

An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver. 8.72A.

*3.

Select "FX2N" in model selection when "FX1N" is not supported.

*4.

An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to SW5 A.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

*1.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-9

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model to be
(Model name is shown
programmed
below.)
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS-KIT/98
FX3U, FX3UC SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Series
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX3G, FX3GC FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Series
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX3S Series
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
FX-PCS-KIT/98
FX1N, FX1NC SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Series
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

Version allowing
setting of alternative
model

Setting an
alternative
model

Remarks

FX2N

The PP modem mode (ch1) and

PP modem mode (ch2) cannot be
set.

SW2 A or later*1
Ver. 2.10 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 2.00 or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.64S or later

FX3G

SW2 A or later*2
Ver. 2.10 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX1N*3
Ver. 4.00 or later

The PP modem mode (ch1) and

PP modem mode (ch2) cannot be
set.

Ver. 2.00 or later

Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.07H or later
FX3G
Ver. 8.72A or later
SW2 A or later*2

FX1N*3

Ver. 3.00 or later

The PP modem mode (ch1)

cannot be set.

SW2 A or later*4
Ver. 2.10 or later
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX2N
Ver. 4.00 or later
Ver. 2.00 or later
Ver. 3.00 or later

An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver. 8.13P.

An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to Ver. 8.72A.
Select "FX2N" in model selection when "FX1N" is not supported.
An alternative model can be set in GX Developer SW2 A to SW5 A.

Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.

I-10

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

1 Outline

Remote Maintenance

Programming software for remote maintenance

The table below shows programming software for the personal computer which uses remote access.
For the applicability of programming tools for setting the modem, refer to Subsection 1.4.1.

In the case of applicable versions

N:N Network

The programming software is applicable from the following versions:

1. English versions
Applicable version

Remarks

Ver. 1.64S or later

Ver. 8.18U or later

Ver. 1.64S or later

Ver. 8.72A or later

Parallel Link

Ver. 1.77F or later

Computer Link

Ver. 1.492N or later

Ver. 1.64S or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later

Applicable version

Remarks

2. Japanese versions
Product name

Model name

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

GX Works2

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.13P or later

When connecting the programming

software to a PLC in which the PP
modem mode (ch1) or PP modem
mode (ch2) is set, use Ver. 8.18U or
later.

GX Works2

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.64S or later

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

Ver. 8.72A or later

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.77F or later

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Ver. 1.492N or later

FX3G PLC
-

FX3GC PLC

Programming
Communication

GX Works2
FX3S PLC
GX Works2

FX2N and FX2NC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 1.64S or later

SW2 A or later

Remote
Maintenance

GX Works2

Apx.A

Ver. 2.10 or later

FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs

SW DNC-GXW2-J

GX Developer

SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J

FX-PCS/WIN

SW0PC-FXGP/WIN

Ver. 1.64S or later

SW5 A or later
Ver. 4.00 or later

Discontinued
models

GX Works2

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Ver. 1.64S or later

GX Developer

SW DNC-GXW2-J

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Ver. 1.64S or later

SW2 A or later
Ver. 1.00 or later

Inverter
Communication

Product name
Model name
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SW DNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

Common Items

1.4.2

1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

I-11

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

1 Outline
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability

In the case of non-applicable versions

A non-applicable programming software version cannot offer remote maintenance.
If your programming software is a non-applicable version, upgrade versions.
To upgrade versions, contact your dealer.

1.4.3

Cautions on using FXGP/WIN

1. The remote maintenance function cannot be used when FXGP/WIN is used in the following
versions of Windows:
- Windows NT 4.0
- Windows 2000
- Windows XP

2. For FX3U and FX3UC Series

The models "FX3U" and "FX3UC" cannot be selected.
"FX2N" can be selected and set as the alternative model.
However, FXGP/WIN cannot be connected to a PLC in which the PP modem mode is set.

3. For FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC Series

The models "FX3S", "FX3G" and "FX3GC" cannot be selected.
"FX1N" can be selected and set as the alternative model.
However, FXGP/WIN cannot be connected to a PLC in which the PP modem mode is set.

I-12

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

2 Specifications

Remote Maintenance

2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)

A
Common Items

2.

Specifications

This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.

N:N Network

2.1

Communication Specifications (Reference)

Item

Modem mode

Transmission standard

RS-232C standard

Maximum total extension distance

15 m (49' 2") or less

Protocol type
Communication method

Remarks

Modem mode

Start bit

1-bit
7-bit

8-bit

Parity bit

Even

Not provided

Character
format

Header

1-bit

Fixed

Control line

Not provided

Sum check

Fixed

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Terminator

When PP modem mode

(ch1) or PP modem
mode (ch2) is set, "Data
bit: 8-bit" and "Parity bit:
Not provided" are set
automatically.

Inverter
Communication

Data bit

Computer Link

Modem PLC
Modem Personal
computer

9600 bps

Stop bit

Half-duplex, asynchronous system

Baud rate

C
Parallel Link

Communication is executed according to the (fixed) specifications shown in the table below. Specification
items such as baud rate cannot be changed.
Only modems supporting the communication specifications below can be used.

Applicable PLC

FX3UC Series

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3U Series
FX3GC Series
FX3G Series
FX3S Series

FX2N Series

FX1NC Series

FX1N Series

FX1S Series

H
Programming
Communication

FX2NC Series

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-13

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

3.

3.1 System Configuration

System Configuration and Selection

This chapter explains the configuration of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C
and selection of the system required by FX PLCs.

3.1

System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use remote maintenance.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Important point in selection

Total extension
distance

This is the communication board built

into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the special adapter expansion

board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the connector conversion

adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Attach the communication adapter to

the left side of the main unit.

15 m
(49' 2")

Communication equipment operating

in accordance with RS-232C

FX PLC

Communication
board

Communication Special adapter

expansion board
adapter

+
Communication
adapter

Connector
conversion adapter

Communication
adapter

The total extension distance should

conform to the modem specifications in
both cases in which a cable supplied with
the modem is used and which another
prepared cable is used.

For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.

I-14

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX Series

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

Check

C
Parallel Link

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX1S

+
FX1N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

Computer Link

FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

E
Inverter
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX1N

+
FX1N-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

B
N:N Network

Select a communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the outside dimensions and D-SUB connector shape are different between units
shown in "FX2NC-232ADP/FX0N-232ADP". Select either one.
- Remote maintenance is not provided for the FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0, FX0S and FX0N PLCs.

Common Items

3.2

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub)

H
+

+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX2N-CNV-BD

Programming
Communication

FX2N

15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-15

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

FX Series

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Communication equipment (option)

Total extension
distance

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX3S

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3S-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

FX3G
(14-point,24-point
type)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to

the option connector 1.
FX3G
(40-point,60-point
type)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP

I-16

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9pin D-SUB, male)

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 2 (ch 2)*1

ch2

Common Items

FX Series

B
N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to

the option connector 2.

Parallel Link

ch1

FX3G
(40-point,60-point
type)

ch2

FX3G-CNV-ADP

FX3U-
ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).

Computer Link

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or

FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)

E
Inverter
Communication

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

SD

FX3U-232-BD

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

FX3U

+
*1.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX3U-CNV-BD

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using ch2 in an FX3G PLC, it can be set only in the PP modem mode (ch2).

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-17

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

FX Series

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)*1
ch1

ch2

RD

SD

FX3U-
-BD

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.
ch1

FX3U

ch2

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port

channel.

15 m
(49' 2")
FX1NC

FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

15 m
(49' 2")
FX2NC

FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub)

FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub)

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)*2

ch1

FX3GC

+
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).

*1.
*2.

I-18

ch2

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using ch2 in an FX3U PLC, it can be set only in the PP modem mode (ch2).
When using ch2 in an FX3GC PLC, it can be set only in the PP modem mode (ch2).

Check

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment

A
Total extension
distance

Communication equipment (option)

Check

When using channel 1 (ch 1)

ch1

B
N:N Network

15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)

When using channel 2 (ch 2)*1

ch2

FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)

Parallel Link

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

D
Computer Link

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port channel.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1

SD

Inverter
Communication

15 m
(49' 2")

RD

FX3U-232-BD

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

ch1

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

ch1

FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)

(9-pin D-Sub, male)

2)*1

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When using channel 2 (ch

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

+
FX3U-CNV-BD

ch2

RD

SD

15 m
(49' 2")

H
Programming
Communication

FX3U-
-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB)

(Where
represents
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port channel.

ch1

ch2

I
Remote
Maintenance

Common Items

FX Series

15 m
(49' 2")

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port channel.

Discontinued
models

*1.

Apx.A

When using ch2 in an FX3UC PLC, it can be set only in the PP modem mode (ch2).

I-19

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

3.3

3 System Configuration and Selection

3.3 Selecting Modem

Selecting Modem
In FX PLCs, the modems PV-AF288 (manufactured by AIWA CO., LTD.) and ME3314B (manufactured by
OMRON Corporation) are applicable.
When "user registration mode", "PP modem mode (ch1)", or "PP modem mode (ch2)" is selected in the
modem initialization setting in an FX PLC, other modems are also applicable.
The tables below show the communication specifications in the "user registration mode", "PP modem mode
(ch1)", and "PP modem mode (ch2)". Select a modem supporting the communication specifications shown
below.

1. User registration mode

Item
Communication method

Contents
Half-duplex, asynchronous system

Baud rate

9600 bps

Start bit

1-bit

Data bit

7-bit

Parity bit

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

Control line

Not provided

If the modem used does not support the communication specifications shown above, communication is not
possible.

2. PP modem mode (ch1) and PP modem mode (ch2)

Item

Contents

Communication method

Half-duplex, asynchronous system

Baud rate

9600 bps

Start bit

1-bit

Data bit

8-bit

Parity bit

Not provided

Stop bit

1-bit

Control line

Not provided

If the modem used does not support the communication specifications shown above, communication is not
possible.

I-20

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

List of modems whose operations are confirmed

Common Items

3.3.1

3.3 Selecting Modem

The tables below show already tested modems and their associated AT command.

1. Modem on the PLC side

AT command setting for modem

on PLC side
AT command
GX Works2 GX Developer
Modem
FX-PCS/WIN
(SW DNC
(SW D5C
model name
-GXW2)
-GPPW)
Manufactured by I-O DATA DEVICE, INC.
Input AT command shown
DFML-560ER

ATE0Q1S0=2&D0&K0&W0&Y0%C3
on right

B
N:N Network

The PLC has a command to initialize the PV-AF288 (manufactured by AIWA CO., LTD.) and ME3314B
(manufactured by OMRON Corporation). This command can be used only by setting parameters using the GX
Works2, GX Developer or FXGP/WIN software.
For other modems, input and set the AT command shown below in ASCII code to a data register (D1000 and
later usually, and D200 or later in the FX1S PLC).
For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 5.
Manufacturer

PV-AF288*1

Select AIWA modem (PV-AF288)

ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M5\Q0\J0&W

PV-BF5606*1

Input AT command shown on right

ATE0S0=2&D0Q1&K0&W

D
Computer Link

ATE0Q1S0=2&D0&K0&W0&Y0\Q0%C3

Parallel Link

Input AT command shown on right

DFML-K56F*1
Manufactured by AIWA CO., LTD.

Remarks

Manufactured by OMRON Corporation

ME3314B*1

ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&H0&R1S15=8&W

Input AT command shown on right

ATE0S0=2&D0Q1&K0&W

Input AT command shown on right

ATE0S0=2&D0Q1&K0&W

In FX2N PLC, Ver. 2.01

and later are applicable.
Modem version: F/W
Ver. 2.300

ME5614E2*1
ME5614D*1

Modem version: F/W

Ver. 2.300

E
Inverter
Communication

ME5614E*1

Select OMRON modem (ME3314B)

*1. Production is finished as of August, 2010.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-21

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

3 System Configuration and Selection

Remote Maintenance

3.3 Selecting Modem

2. Modem on the personal computer side for remote access

The table below shows modems whose operations are already confirmed. Input and set the AT command shown
below using a programming tool in the personal computer on the remote access side.
FXGP/WIN has a command to initialize the PV-AF288, PV-AF3360 (manufactured by AIWA CO., LTD.), ME3314B,
ME5614D, ME5614E and ME5614E2*2 (manufactured by OMRON Corporation). This command can be used only
by setting a parameter.
For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 6.
Manufacturer

AT command setting for modem on personal computer side for remote access
GX Works2 GX Developer
Modem
FX-PCS/WIN
(SW DNC
(SW D5C
model name
-GXW2)
-GPPW)
Manufactured by I-O DATA DEVICE, INC.
DFML-560ER AT&C1E0Q0S0=2&K0&D0

Manufactured by AIWA CO., LTD.

Select this model (AT command is shown for reference)

PV-AF288*1
ATE0S0=2Q0V1&M4\J0\Q0
Select this model (AT command is shown for reference)

PV-AF3360*1
ATE0S0=2Q0V1S15=8&H0&R1
Select
this model (AT command is shown for reference)
PV-BF5606*1 ATE0S0=2&K0&D0
ATE0S0=2&K0
Manufactured by OMRON Corporation
Select this model (AT command is shown for reference)

ME3314B*1
ATE0S0=2Q0V1S15=8&H0&R1
ME5614E*1
ME5614E2

ATE0S0=2&K0&D0

Remarks

Modem version: F/W

Select this model (AT command is shown for reference) Ver. 2.300
ATE0S0=2&K0W0

*1*2

ME5614D*1

ATE0S0=2&K0&D0

Select this model (AT command is shown for reference) Modem version: F/W
Ver. 2.300
ATE0S0=2&K0W0

*1. Production is finished as of August, 2010.

*2. When used the FXGP/WIN, select the model "ME5614E".

I-22

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

4 Wiring
4.1 Wiring Procedure

A
Common Items

4.

Wiring

This chapter explains the wiring.

N:N Network

4.1

Wiring Procedure

Turning OFF the PLC power

Parallel Link

Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.

Checking the connector shape

Connecting the RS-232C ports in the modem and the PLC with a cable
Check the shape of the connector (number of pins) in the communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-232C to be connected to the PLC. Each cable has either connector shape:

Connecting the personal computer and the modem with a cable for remote access
Check the shape of the RS-232C connector (number of pins) on the personal computer for remote access.

E
Inverter
Communication

- 9-pin D-Sub, female

- 25-pin D-Sub, male

D
Computer Link

When a cable is included with the modem, check the shape of the RS-232C connector in the
personal computer to be connected, the shape of the connector in the communication equipment
operating in accordance with RS-232C for the PLC, and male or female type.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-23

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

4 Wiring

Remote Maintenance

4.2

4.2 Connection Diagram

Connection Diagram
1. To connect the modem, use a cable included with the modem or cable described in the
modem manual.
Remote access
Line
general telephone
line, etc.

Cable
Modem

Cable
Modem

PLC

Personal computer

2. The table below shows the pin arrangement in the communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-232C for the FX PLC.
FX1N-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD, FX2NC-232ADP,
FX3G-232-BD, FX3U-232-BD,
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
9-pin D-Sub, male

FX0N-232ADP
25-pin D-Sub, female

25

13

*1.

I-24

CD

Receiving carrier detection

1*1

RD (RXD) Receive data input

SD (TXD) Send data output

ER (DTR) Data terminal ready

SG (GND) Signal ground

DR (DSR) Data set ready

20

Function

14

Signal
name

The FX2NC-232ADP does not use the CD signal.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

A
Common Items

5.

How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

5.1

Setting Using GX Works2

Setting communication by way of RS-232C port

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2) Setting parameters using a sequence programming tool

By using the following procedure, verify that another communication type is not set.

E
Inverter
Communication

1) Writing the value "0" to the data register D8120 using a sequence program
If another communication type is already set for another application, delete the sequence program which
writes a value to D8120.
When setting remote maintenance to ch1 in an FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, write the value "0" to
the data register D8120, D8400.
When setting remote maintenance to ch2 in an FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, write the value "0" to the
data register D8420.

Computer Link

It is not necessary to set the serial communication with a modem.

However, it is necessary to verify that another communication type is not used and whether the
communication setting is correct using the following procedure.
In FX PLCs, the communication setting can be executed using either of the following two methods:

Parallel Link

This section explains the modem initialization setting and communication setting methods. Suppose that GX
Works2 is already started up.
Screens for the FX3U PLC are shown as examples.

5.1.1

B
N:N Network

This chapter explains how to set parameters for initialization using the AT command and set the
communication specifications including the transmission speed for a modem connected to the PLC.
The setting method using GX Works2 and the setting method using FXGP/WIN are explained.
For applicable programming tools, refer to Subsection 1.4.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.

Opening the PLC parameter setting window

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-25

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Checking the serial communication (parameter) setting

Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
Make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" box is cleared, and click the [End] button.
If a check mark is there, clear it, and then click the [End] button.

I-26

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Modem initialization setting using parameter method

This subsection explains how to select the AT command for initialization registered in the PLC and how to set
the AT command for an unregistered modem.

Common Items

5.1.2

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Opening the PLC parameter setting window

N:N Network

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation] from
the menu bar.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Selecting the modem initialization method

E
Inverter
Communication

Click the [PLC System(1)] tab on the dialog box.

Select a modem to be connected in "MODEM Initialized", and click the [End] button.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-27

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

Description

Modem model
name

Manufacturer

None

Select this item when remote maintenance is

not used.

User Register Mode

Select this item when the modem to be used

is not registered.

Unregistered
modem

PV-AF288

AIWA CO., LTD.

ME3314B

OMRON
Corporation

Set item

AIWA(PV-AF288)
OMRON(ME3314B)

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Select the corresponding item when either

modem is to be used.

PP Modem Mode (CH1)*1

Select this item when the modem to be used

satisfying the PP modem mode specifications
is not registered.

Unregistered
modem

PP Modem Mode (CH2)*2

Select this item when remote maintenance is

executed in ch2.

Unregistered
modem

*1.

When an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLC is used

*2.

When an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLC is used

Setting the AT command for the unregistered modem

When "User Register Mode", "PP Modem Mode (CH1)", or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected in
"MODEM Initialized", the AT command setting is required. For the AT command setting method for
unregistered modems, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
The AT command setting is not required when "AIWA[PV-AF288]" or "OMRON(ME3314B)" is
selected.

Writing the parameter and program to the PLC

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] from the menu bar.
Click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter/Network Parameter] in the project tree.
When the AT command is set for an unregistered modem, next put a check mark next to "Device
Memory" "MAIN".
After placing the check mark, click the [Execute] button to write the contents to the FX PLC.

I-28

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Setting AT command for unregistered modem

Only when "MODEM Initialized" is set to "User Register Mode", "PP Modem Mode (CH1)", or "PP Modem
Mode (CH2)", execute the following setting.
(The modem initialization setting depends on the setting contents of the [PLC System(1)] tab displayed
when [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] is selected.)

Display a device memory

In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Device Memory] [Device
memory data name].

B
N:N Network

Common Items

5.1.3

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

Caution

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

In GX Developer, select "Device memory" in the project tree, right-click it to display the submenu, and select
"New".
Click the [OK] button on the New dialog box, and click the [Yes] button.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-29

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Displaying the device list

Select "Input Device" on the Edit menu to display the Input Device dialog box.

Set "Device", "Range", "Display Mode" and "Register", and click [OK].

The device (data register) number to be set varies depending on the PLC as shown below:
PLC

Device range

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLC

D1000 to D1059

FX1S and FX3S PLC

I-30

D200 to D255

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

A
Inputting the AT command

B
N:N Network

Input the AT command to D1000 (D200 For FX1S and FX3S PLCs) and later. Input one character to
one word.
Click the data register to be input, and select "Paste Text" on the edit menu to display the Paste
Text dialog box.
Input one (half-width) character, and click the [OK] button.

Common Items

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

1. AT command structure

Command + Parameter Command + Parameter

1

Command + Parameter
......

CR

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

For initializing a modem, use the AT command developed by Hayes.

The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following format:
LF

For details on the AT command, refer to the manual of the modem to be used.

ASCII code

Hexadecimal
value

Data register No.

D1000

41

D1013

&

26

D1001

54

D1014

4D

D1002

45

D1015

34

D1003

30

D1016

5C

D1004

53

D1017

51

D1005

30

D1018

30

ASCII code

Hexadecimal
value

3D

D1019

5C

32

D1020

4A

D1008

51

D1021

30

D1009

31

D1022

&

26

D1010

&

26

D1023

57

D1011

44

D1024

CR

0D

D1012

30

D1025

LF

0A

I
Remote
Maintenance

D1006
D1007

H
Programming
Communication

Data register No.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. Input example of the AT command for initialization, Example: ATE0S0 = 2Q1&D0&M4\Q0\J0&W

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-31

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

5.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Inputting "CR" and "LF"

It is necessary to input "CR" and "LF" at the end of the AT command.
Input "0D" and "0A" (hexadecimal values) to data registers respectively.

If "CR (0DH)" and "LF (0AH)" are not input at the end of the AT command, remote maintenance is
not possible.

I-32

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Common Items

5.2

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

This section explains the modem initialization setting and communication setting methods.

5.2.1

Setting communication by way of RS-232C port

In FX PLCs, the communication setting can be executed using either of the following two methods:

2) Setting parameters using a sequence programming tool

By using the following procedure, verify that the communication setting is not provided.

Checking the serial setting (parameter)

Computer Link

C
Parallel Link

1) Writing the value "0" to the data register D8120 using a sequence program
If another communication type is already set for another application, delete the sequence program which
writes a value to D8120.

N:N Network

It is not necessary to set the serial communication with a modem.

However, it is necessary to verify that another communication type is not used and whether the
communication setting is correct using the following procedure.

Select [Option] [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.

The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter setting.
1. When there is no parameter setting

E
Inverter
Communication

The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there is no communication setting.
Click the [No] button.

F
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that the communication setting is being used.
Click the [Clear] button.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. When there are already parameter settings

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-33

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

5.2.2

5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Modem initialization setting using parameter method

This subsection explains how to select the AT command for initialization registered in advance in the PLC and
how to set the AT command for an unregistered modem.

Setting the PLC mode

Click [Option] [PLCs mode setting] from the toolbar.

Selecting the modem initialization method

Select a modem to be connected in "Modem initialize", and click the [OK] button.

Description

Modem model
name

Manufacturer

None

Select this item when remote maintenance is

not used.

User entry mode

Select this item when the modem to be used

is not registered.

Unregistered
modem

PV-AF288

AIWA CO., LTD.

ME3314B

OMRON
Corporation

Set item

AIWA(PV-AF288)
OMRON(ME3314B)

Select corresponding item when either

modem is to be used.

Setting the AT command for an unregistered modem

When "User entry mode" is selected in "Modem initialize", the AT command setting is required.
For the AT command setting method for unregistered modems, refer to Subsection 5.2.3.
The AT command setting is not required when "AIWA(PV-AF288)" or "OMRON(ME3314B)" is
selected.

Writing the program to the PLC

Click [PLC] [Transfers] [Write] from the toolbar to display the "Program write" dialog box.
Select "All range", and click the [OK] button.

When the AT command is set for an unregistered modem, transfer the register also.
Click [PLC] [Register data transfers] [Write] from the toolbar to display the Write dialog box.
Place a check mark ( ) next to "Data register", and click the [OK] button.

I-34

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

Setting AT command for unregistered modem

Only when "User entry mode" is selected in "Modem initialize", execute the following setting.
(The modem initialization setting depends on the setting contents of the window displayed when [Option]
[PLCs mode setting] is selected from the toolbar.)

Displaying the device list

B
N:N Network

Common Items

5.2.3

5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Select [View] [Register view] from the toolbar.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Executing the display setting

Select the set items as shown in the table below, and click the [OK] button.

Contents of setting

Display form

Line

Data size

16bit

Inverter
Communication

Item

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

The device (data register) number to be set varies depending on the PLC as shown below:
Device range

FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC

D1000 to D1059

FX1S/FX3S PLC

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

PLC

D200 to D255

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-35

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Inputting the AT command

Input the AT command to the "ASCII" column of D1000 and later. Input one (half-width) character to
one word.

Make sure to input "CR (0DH)" and "LF (0AH)" at the end of the AT command. If they are not input,
remote maintenance is not possible.
The "CR" and "LF" input method is explained in the next step.
1. AT command structure
For initializing a modem, use the AT command developed by Hayes.
The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following format:
A

Command + Parameter Command + Parameter

1

Command + Parameter
......

CR

LF

For details on the AT command, refer to the manual of the modem to be used.

2. Input example of the AT command for initialization, Example: ATE0S0 = 2Q1&D0&M4\Q0\J0&W

I-36

Data register No.

ASCII code

D1000
D1001
D1002
D1003
D1004
D1005
D1006
D1007
D1008
D1009
D1010
D1011
D1012

A
T
E
0
S
0
=
2
Q
1
&
D
0

Hexadecimal
value
41
54
45
30
53
30
3D
32
51
31
26
44
30

Data register No.

ASCII code

D1013
D1014
D1015
D1016
D1017
D1018
D1019
D1020
D1021
D1022
D1023
D1024
D1025

&
M
4
\
Q
0
\
J
0
&
W
CR
LF

Hexadecimal
value
26
4D
34
5C
51
30
5C
4A
30
26
57
0D
0A

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

5 How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side

Remote Maintenance

A
Common Items

5.3 Cautions on Use

Inputting "CR" and "LF"

It is necessary to input "CR" and "LF" at the end of the AT command.
Input "000D" and "000A" (hexadecimal values) to data registers respectively.

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

5.3

Inverter
Communication

If "CR (0DH)" and "LF (0AH)" are not input at the end of the AT command, remote maintenance is
disabled.

Cautions on Use
1. Cautions on inputting the AT command for initialization to the PLC

2) When creating a sequence program, make sure that the input area for the modem initialization command
is different from the data register area used by general sequence programs.
3) Make sure to input "CR (0DH)" and "LF (0AH)" at the end of the AT command. If they are not input,
remote maintenance is disabled.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1) The AT command finishes sending when "0" (hexadecimal value) is read.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-37

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

6.

6.1 Setting Using GX Works2

How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote

Access
This chapter explains how to set a modem connected to the personal computer for remote access.
The setting method using GX Works2 and the setting method using FXGP/WIN are explained respectively.
For applicable programming tools, refer to Subsection 1.4.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
Remote access side

PLC side
Line
general telephone
line, etc.

Cable
Modem

Cable
Modem

Personal computer

This chapter explains the setting procedure

for this side.

6.1

PLC

The setting procedure for this side is

explained in Chapter 5.

Setting Using GX Works2

This section explains the line connection setting method using GX Works2.

6.1.1

Registering AT command for connected modem

This subsection explains how to register the AT command for initializing a modem connected to the personal
computer.

Setting the AT command

Select [Tools] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [AT Command Registration] from the menu
bar to display the following dialog box.

I-38

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

A
Registering the AT command for the connected modem
Select "Modem at MELSOFT Application Side" in the project tree, and click the [New AT
Command] button.
Input "Title" and "AT Command", and click the [OK] button.

B
N:N Network

- Input a name easy to understand such as the modem model name to "Title".
- Input "AT Command" while referring to the description below.

Common Items

6.1 Setting Using GX Works2

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

1. In the case of a modem whose operation is confirmed

For such a modem, input the following AT command.
Modem manufacturer name

Modem model
name

AT command set value

DFML-560ER

AT&C1E0Q0S0=2&K0&D0

AIWA CO., LTD.

PV-BF5606

ATE0S0=2&K0&D0

OMRON Corporation
OMRON Corporation

ME5614E
ME5614E2
ME5614D

ATE0S0=2&K0&D0
ATE0S0=2&K0&D0

Modem version: F/W Ver. 2.300

Modem version: F/W Ver. 2.300

Click the [Help of AT Command] button.

Refer to the contents of the help and the manual of the connected modem, create the AT command.
3. Contents of help for the AT command

Description
Set the mode in which the CD signal is set to ON when the carrier from the counterpart is received.

ATQn

Set the AT command so that the result code for the AT command is sent back.

ATVn

Set the AT command so that the response to the AT command is given in a character string.

AT\Nn

The MNP automatic selection mode is recommended.

When the MNP block size is a set item, "128 bytes maximum per block" is general.
When the MNP automatic selection mode cannot be specified, specify the direct mode in the
asynchronous communication mode.

AT&Dn

Set the ER signal to "normally ON".

AT&Kn (AT&Hn&In&Rn) Set "no flow control".

Apx.A

When a converter is used, set "no dial tone".

It is not necessary to set this item when a converter is not used.

Discontinued
models

AT&Xn

I
Remote
Maintenance

AT&Cn

Programming
Communication

The table below shows the contents of description about [Help of AT Command].
Setting example: AT&C1Q0V1\N3&D0&K0
AT command

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

2. In the case of any other modem (whose operation is not confirmed)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

I-O DATA DEVICE, INC.

Remarks

I-39

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

6.1.2

6.1 Setting Using GX Works2

Creating telephone directory (if necessary)

This subsection explains the method to register the telephone number of the counterpart (line connected to
the modem of the desired PLC).

Displaying the telephone directory dialog box

Select [Tools] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Phone Book] from the menu bar to display
the following dialog box.

Creating the group name

Click the [New Group] button to display the Group Setting dialog box.
Input a group name (example: A Corporation) to which the telephone numbers belong, and click
the [OK] button.

I-40

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

A
Selecting a group name to which the counterpart telephone number will be
registered
Click and select an already created group name (example: A Corporation).
Click the [New Phone Number] button.

Common Items

6.1 Setting Using GX Works2

B
N:N Network

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Inputting the name, telephone number, etc.

Inverter
Communication

Input required items, and click [OK] button.

If there is another counterpart to be registered, repeat from step 2 above.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

For details, refer to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common).

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-41

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

6.2

6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Setting Using FXGP/WIN

This section explains the line connection method using FXGP/WIN.

6.2.1

Registering AT command for connected modem

This subsection explains how to register the AT command for initializing a modem connected to the personal
computer for remote access.

Setting the AT command

Select [Remote] [Environment] [Modem] from the toolbar to display the following dialog box.

Registered modems are displayed.

Registering the AT command for the connected modem

1. When the connected modem is shown in the list
Select the modem model name, and click the [OK] button.

Proceed to step 4.

2. When the connected modem is not shown in the list

It is necessary to create the AT command for the modem, and register it.

I-42

Proceed to step 3.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

A
Common Items

6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Newly creating the AT command for the modem

Click the [New Entry] button.
Input "Name" and "Initial Setup String", and then click the [OK] button.

B
N:N Network

- To "Name", input a name easy to understand such as the modem model name.
- To "Initial Setup String", input proper contents while referring to the description below.

C
Parallel Link

Input the AT command while referring to the description below.

1. In the case of a modem whose operation is confirmed

Modem
manufacturer

Modem model
name

AT command set value

PV-AF288

ATE0S0=2Q0V1&M4\J0\Q0

AIWA CO., LTD.

PV-AF3360

ATE0S0=2Q0V1S15=8&H0&R1

AIWA CO., LTD.

PV-BF5606

ATE0S0=2&K

OMRON Corporation

ME3314B

ATE0S0=2Q0V1S15=8&H0&R1

OMRON Corporation

ME5614E
ME5614E2

OMRON Corporation

ME5614D

*1.

E
Inverter
Communication

AIWA CO., LTD.

OMRON Corporation

Computer Link

For a modem whose operation is confirmed, input the following AT command:

ATE0S0=2&K0W0
*1

ATE0S0=2&K0W0
ATE0S0=2&K0W0

When used the FXGP/WIN, select the model "ME5614E".

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

2. AT command structure
For initializing a modem, use the AT command developed by Hayes.
The Hayes AT command is generally expressed in the following format:
A

Command + Parameter Command + Parameter

2

......

CR

LF

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Command + Parameter
n

For details on the AT command, refer to the manual of the modem to be used.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-43

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

3. Setting contents of the AT command

When the PLC power is turned ON, the PLC sends the AT command to the modem to initialize the modem.
For reference, the table below shows the set items and setting contents of the AT commands for modems
which are registered in advance in FXGP/WIN.
The set items and setting contents may vary depending on each modem. For actual setting contents, refer to
the manual of the modem to be used.
Set item

PV-AF288 (AIWA)

PV-AF3360 (AIWA)

ME3314B (OMRON)

ATE0S0=2Q0V1&M4\J0\Q0 ATE0S0=2Q0V1&M4\J0\Q0 ATE0S0=2Q0V1S15=8&H0&R1

E0 (not provided)

E0 (not provided)

E0 (not provided)

Number of times of calling

in automatic receiving

Command echo

S0 = 2 (twice)

S0 = 2 (twice)

S0 = 2 (twice)

Result code display

Q0 (provided)

Q0 (provided)

Q0 (provided)

Result code format

V1 (character, word)

V1 (character, word)

V1 (character, word)

Communication mode

&M4 (MNP automatic)

&M4 (MNP automatic)

S15 = 8 (V. 42 bis)

Terminal speed fixing

mode

\J0 (fixed)

\J0 (fixed)

Send data flow control

&H0 (not provided)

\Q0 (not provided)

\Q0 (not provided)

&R1 (not provided)

Terminal flow control

method
Initialization to values set
in factory before delivery

&F (FXGP/WIN sends "AT&F", and then sends the AT command above.)

Displaying the selected modem

Verify that the desired modem is set, and click the [OK] button.

On this window, a newly registered modem is selected.

I-44

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

6 How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access

Remote Maintenance

Registering line connection destination

This subsection explains how to register the telephone number of the line connection destination (line
connected to the modem of the desired PLC).

Common Items

6.2.2

6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN

Displaying the line connection dialog box

N:N Network

Select [Remote] [Connect] [to PLC] from the toolbar to display the following dialog box.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Inputting the telephone number of the line connection destination

Inverter
Communication

Click the [New Entry] button.

When the following dialog box appears, input the counterpart "Name" and "Phone".

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Registering the line connection destination

After inputting the telephone number, click the [OK] button to register it.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A

I-45

Discontinued
models

For details on set items, refer to the manual of FXGP/WIN.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Connecting Line

Remote Maintenance

7.

7.1 Preparing for Connection of PLC

Connecting Line
This chapter explains the line connection procedure for remote maintenance.

7.1

Preparing for Connection of PLC

For remote maintenance, it is necessary to properly establish the modem-to-PLC connection.
Set the PLC using the following procedure.

Setting initialization for the modem on the PLC side

Set the AT command for the modem to be connected to the PLC.
For details, refer to Chapter 6.

Turning OFF the PLC power

After inputting the AT command to the PLC, turn OFF the PLC power.

Connecting the modem

Connect the communication equipment of the PLC to the modem.
For details, refer to Chapter 4.

Turning ON the modem power

Turn ON the modem power connected to the PLC.

Turning ON the PLC power

After turning ON the power to the modem, turn ON the PLC power.
When the PLC power is turned ON, the TXD (SD) and RXD (RD) LEDs light instantaneously in the
optional communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C, and the AT command
is sent to the modem.
If these LEDs do not light, refer "Chapter 8. Troubleshooting".

I-46

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

7 Connecting Line

Remote Maintenance

Line Connection Procedure

This section explains the procedure to connect a personal computer to a PLC using a telephone line. The
connection procedure varies depending on the software used. Connect a telephone line suitable to the
software used.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.

For GX Works2
This subsection explains the line connection procedure using GX Works2. Prepare for connection of the PLC,
connect a modem to the communication port in the personal computer, and start up GX Works2.

Setting the line connection

Select [Tools] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection] from the menu bar to
display the following dialog box.

C
Parallel Link

B
N:N Network

7.2.1

Common Items

7.2

7.2 Line Connection Procedure

D
Computer Link

The line connection status is displayed.

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Setting the connection method

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Select "Auto".

Setting the line

Set each item as follows:

H
Programming
Communication

1. Line type
Set the type of line connected to the modem.
- In the case of general telephone, select the contracted line type (tone, pulse or ISDN).
- In the case of cellular phone, select "Tone".

2. Outside line

Remote
Maintenance

Set this item if necessary for making phone calls to outside lines.
3. Port
Select the communication port number in the personal computer connected to the modem.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-47

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

Setting the connection destination

Set the telephone number of the counterpart (line number of the modem connected to the desired
PLC).
When a telephone number has been set in advance in the telephone directory, it can be set using
the [Browse] button.
For details on the telephone directory, refer to Subsection 6.1.2.

Setting the AT command

Set the AT command for the modem connected to the personal computer. When the AT command
has been registered in advance, it can be set using the [Browse] button.
For details on the AT command registration, refer to Subsection 6.1.1.

Placing a check mark ( ) next to "Record the logging data"

Put a check mark here when storing the log at the line connection to a file.
The log at the line connection is recorded in the following log file:
1. For GX Works2
Storage destination
- For Windows 2000 and Windows XP
User folder\Application Data\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log
- For Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8
User folder\AppData\Roaming\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log
Log file name: year, month, day.dat (example: 130206.dat)

2. For GX Developer
Storage destination: GX Developer installation destination\log (default: Melsec\Gppw\log)
Log file name: Date.log (example: 130206.log)

Setting others
When "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected in "Init modem", place a
check mark ( ) next to "User mode (8bits NP)".

Connecting the line

Click the [Connect] button to display the following dialog box.
Click the [Yes] button to execute line connection and make a call from the modem connected to the
personal computer.

I-48

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

A
Checking the line connection status
1. When the line is connected
When the line is connected, the connection status shown below is displayed on the Line Connection dialog
box.

Common Items

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

B
N:N Network

When connection is completed, the following dialog box appears to indicate the telephone number of the
connection destination and the communication speed.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

Confirm the contents, and click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

Proceed to step 10.

When the line cannot be connected, the following figure is displayed on the Line Connection dialog box.
(Example: When no response is given by the modem connected to the personal computer)

E
Inverter
Communication

2. When the line cannot be connected

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

And the following dialog box appears.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Click the [OK] button to display the Options dialog box.

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A

I-49

Discontinued
models

Change the waiting time and number of retries, and then click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
Check the telephone number and AT command, and then execute connection again.
If line connection is disabled, refer to "Chapter 8. Troubleshooting".

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

10 Executing remote maintenance

Read and write sequence programs, and monitor devices.

11 Disconnecting the line

To disconnect the line, select [Tools] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Disconnection]
from the menu bar.
When the following dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button to disconnect the line.

When line disconnection is finished, the following dialog box appears to indicate the connection
destination telephone number and line use time.

Click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

I-50

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

For FXGP/WIN
This subsection explains the line connection procedure using FXGP/WIN. Prepare for connection of the PLC,
connect a modem to the communication port in the personal computer, and then start up FXGP/WIN.

Common Items

7.2.2

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

Setting the modem to be used

N:N Network

Select [Remote] [Environment] [Modem] from the toolbar to display the following dialog box.

C
Parallel Link

D
Computer Link

For details on AT command registration, refer to Subsection 6.2.1.

Connecting the connection destination

E
Inverter
Communication

Select the modem to be used, and click the [OK] button.

If the modem to be used is not displayed, click the [New Entry] button, and register the AT
command for the modem.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Select [Remote] [Connect] [to PLC] from the toolbar to display the following dialog box.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

When directly setting a telephone number, click the [Manual] button.

Proceed to the next step.

I
Remote
Maintenance

For details on connection destination registration, refer to Subsection 6.2.2.

Proceed to step 4.

Programming
Communication

Select the connection destination, and click the [OK] button.

If the connection destination is not displayed, click the [New Entry] button, and register the
connection destination.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-51

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

Executing manual connection

Click the [Manual] button to display the following dialog box.

Set "Name" and "Phone", and click the [OK] button.

Checking the line connection status

When the [OK] button is clicked, the following dialog box appears.

Click the [Yes] button to display the message box "Executing!" and make a call from the modem
connected to the personal computer.

Checking the line connection status

1. When the line is connected
When connection is completed, the message box "Executing!" is closed, and the line connection time is
displayed on the title bar as shown below:

Proceed to step 6.

2. When the line cannot be connected

When the line cannot be connected, the message box "Executing!" is closed, and the following dialog box
appears.

Click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

Check the telephone number and AT command, and then execute connection again.
If line connection is disabled, refer to "Chapter 8. Troubleshooting".

I-52

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

A
Common Items

7 Connecting Line
7.2 Line Connection Procedure

Executing remote maintenance

Read and write sequence programs, and monitor devices.

Disconnecting the line

B
N:N Network

To disconnect the line, select [Remote] [Disconnect] from the toolbar.

When the following dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button to disconnect the line.

C
Parallel Link

When the line is disconnected, the line connection time on the title bar disappears.

D
Computer Link

E
Inverter
Communication

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-53

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

8.

8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Checking FX PLC Applicability

Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.

8.1

Checking FX PLC Applicability

Verify that the FX PLC main unit version is applicable to remote maintenance.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.

8.2

Checking Programming Tool Applicability

Verify that the programming tool version is applicable to remote maintenance.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.4.
The remote maintenance function cannot be used when FXGP/WIN is used in the following versions of
Windows:
- Windows NT 4.0
- Windows 2000
- Windows XP

8.3

Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication

Check the status of the "RXD (RD)" and "TXD (SD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment
LED status
RXD (RD)

TXD (SD)

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

Off

Off

Flashing

Off

Off

Operation status
Data is being sent or received.
Data is received, but is not sent.
Data is sent, but is not received
Data is not sent nor received.

When the power is turned ON, the FX PLC transfers the AT command to the connected modem. At this time,
the "RXD (RD)" and "TXD (SD)" indicator LEDs in the communication equipment light instantaneously.
If modem initialization is not set in parameters in the FX PLC, however, these LEDs do not light.
If the wiring and/or modem specifications are different, these LEDs flash several times, but the FX PLC does
not transfer the AT command.

8.4

Checking Installation
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For the mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.

I-54

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

Checking Modem Specifications

In a modem in which the following communication specifications are not applicable, remote maintenance can
be used.
Check the modem specifications.

Item

Contents

Communication method

Half-duplex, asynchronous system

Baud rate

9600 bps
1-bit

Data bit

7-bit

Parity bit

Even

Stop bit

1-bit

Control line

Not provided

C
Parallel Link

Start bit

2. PP modem mode (ch1) and PP modem mode (ch2)

Half-duplex, asynchronous system

Baud rate

9600 bps

Start bit

1-bit

Data bit

8-bit

Parity bit

Not provided

Stop bit

1-bit

Control line

Not provided

E
Inverter
Communication

8.6

Contents

Computer Link

Item
Communication method

Checking Setting in PLC

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

Check the parameters, AT command and sequence programs in the PLC.

After changing any parameters, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it ON again.

8.6.1

B
N:N Network

1. In the case of user registration mode

Common Items

8.5

8 Troubleshooting
8.5 Checking Modem Specifications

Checking parameters in PLC

Verify that non-protocol communication, computer link communication, etc. are not set in the parameters of
the FX PLC. If such communication is already set, remote maintenance cannot be used.

2. Checking the modem initialization setting

H
Programming
Communication

Verify that the modem initialization is selected correctly in parameters in the FX PLC.
If the modem initialization is not set correctly, normal communication is not possible.
For the parameter settings of the PLC, refer to Chapter 5.

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

1. Checking the communication setting

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-55

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Troubleshooting

Remote Maintenance

8.6.2

8.6 Checking Setting in PLC

Checking AT command setting

The AT command is required when "user registration mode", "PP modem mode (ch 1)" or "PP modem mode
(ch 2)" is selected in the modem initialization setting. When such a mode is set, check the following contents.

1. Checking data registers

The head device number and device range of data registers used for setting the AT command vary
depending on the FX Series.
Check the data register numbers in which the AT command is set.
PLC

Device range

FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLC

D1000 to D1059

FX1S and FX3S PLC

D200 to D255

Use consecutive data registers from the head device number. If a numeric value is not set in a data register,
the data registers after it are not transferred.

2. Checking the contents of the AT command

If the contents of the AT command are not correct, remote maintenance cannot be used.
Verify that the setting contents are correct.
As reference, the table below shows the set items and their contents of the AT commands already registered
in PLCs.
Set item
Command echo

PV-AF288 (AIWA)
ATE0S0 = 2Q1&D0&M5\Q0\J0&W

ME3314B (OMRON)
ATE0S0 = 2Q1&D0&H0&R1S15=8&W

E0 (not provided)

E0 (not provided)

S0 = 2 (twice)

S0 = 2 (twice)

Number of times of calling in

automatic receiving
Result code display

Q1 (not provided)

Q1 (not provided)

DTR control

&D (normally ON)

&D (normally ON)

Communication mode
Terminal flow control method

&M5 (V. 42 bis)

S15 = 8 (V. 42 bis)

\Q0 (not provided)

&R1 (not provided)

Send data flow control

Terminal speed fixing mode
Writing to nonvolatile memory

&H0 (not provided)

\J0 (fixed)

&W

&W

3. Checking "CR (H0D)" and "LF (H0A)"

Make sure to input "CR (H0D)" and "LF (H0A)" at the end of the AT command. If they are not input, the AT
command cannot be transferred.
For the AT command setting for the PLC, refer to Chapter 5.

I-56

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

Checking sequence program

1. Checking the contents of the communication setting

2. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in remote
maintenance.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.

1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

4. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

5. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

6. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)

Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, revise them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.

Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, revise them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

Programming
Communication

7. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)

*1.

Computer Link

3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.

Inverter
Communication

2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.

C
Parallel Link

3. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions

B
N:N Network

Verify that no communication format (D8120, D8400, D8420), N:N Network: D8176 to D8180, and Parallel
Link: M8070 and M8071) is being used in the sequence program.
If any communication format is being used in the sequence program, communication will not function
correctly.

Common Items

8.6.3

8 Troubleshooting
8.6 Checking Setting in PLC

8. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLCs power.

Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLCs power.

I-57

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

9. Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

8 Troubleshooting

Remote Maintenance

8.7

8.7 Checking Programming Tool Setting

Checking Programming Tool Setting

Verify that the setting contents in the programming tool are correct.

1. Checking the telephone number

Verify that the telephone number of the connection destination is set correctly.

2. Checking the AT command setting

Verify that the AT command is set correctly for the registered modem.

3. Checking the communication port

Verify that the communication port connected to the modem is set correctly.
For the programming tool setting, refer to Chapter 6.

8.8

Checking Absence/Presence of Errors

In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, an error occurs when modem initialization is not possible.
Verify that an error has not occurred.

1. Checking M8063
When a communication error occurs, M8063 turns ON and D8063 stores the corresponding error code.

2. Checking the error code

D8063 stores one of the following error codes:
Error code

D8063

Contents of error

6301

Parity error, overrun error or framing error

6302

Defective communication character

6303

Communication data sum mismatch

6304

Defective data format

6305

Defective command

6306

Monitoring timeout

6307

Modem initialization error

6308

N:N Network parameter error

6309

N:N Network setting error

6312

Parallel link character error

6313

Parallel link sum error

6314

Parallel link format error

6320

Inverter communication error

6321

MODBUS communication error

6330

Memory access error

6340

Special adapter connection error

When modem initialization is disabled, D8063 stores the error code 6307.
If D8063 stores any error code shown above, check the following items:
Wiring
Modem specifications

I-58

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Remote Maintenance

Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]

(FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

Common Items

8.9

8 Troubleshooting

8.9 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)

These devices store the communication type being used.

1. Detailed contents

The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Code

Description
Programming communication

PP modem mode

Protocol dedicated to computer link

N:N Network
RS instruction

RS2 instruction

Parallel link

Inverter instruction
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.

MODBUS communication

10

CF-ADP

11

ENET-ADP

12

Input/output expansion board is used.

E
Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link

Parallel Link

N:N Network

These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

H
Programming
Communication

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

I-59

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

9 Related Information

Remote Maintenance

9.
9.1

9.1 ASCII Code Table

Related Information
ASCII Code Table

DLE

SP

1. ASCII code table (7-bit code expressed in hexadecimal)

Hexadecimal

SOH DC1

STX DC2

ETX DC3

EOT DC4

ENQ NAK

ACK SYN

&

BEL ETB

BS

CAN

HT

EM

LF

SUB

VT

ESC

FF

FS

<

\*1

CR

GS

SO

RS

>

SI

US

DEL

*1.

\ (ASCII CODE:5C) symbol is displayed as " " in Japanese.

2. Examples of ASCII codes

Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

#
&
=

ASCII
(hexadecimal)
23
26
3D

\*1

5C

Symbol

*1.

I-60

ASCII
(hexadecimal)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Alphabet
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M

ASCII
ASCII
Alphabet
(hexadecimal)
(hexadecimal)
41
N
4E
42
O
4F
43
P
50
44
Q
51
45
R
52
46
S
53
47
T
54
48
U
55
49
V
56
4A
W
57
4B
K
58
4C
Y
59
4D
Z
5A

\ (ASCII CODE:5C) symbol is displayed as " " in Japanese.

Code
STX
ETX
LF
CR

ASCII
(hexadecimal)
02
03
0A
0D

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Appendix A: Discontinued models

Discontinued models

A
Common Items

Appendix A: Discontinued models

Discontinued model

Production stop date

Repair acceptance period

FX1

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

FX2(FX)

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

Until June 30, 2009

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

FX0S

January 31, 2006

Until January 31, 2013

FX0N

January 31, 2006

Until January 31, 2013

FX2N

September 30, 2012

Until September 30, 2019

FX2NC

September 30, 2012

Until September 30, 2019

FX-232ADP

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

FX-485ADP

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

June 30, 2002

Until June 30, 2009

FX0N-485ADP

January 31, 2006

Until January 31, 2013

FX0N-232ADP

January 31, 2006

Until January 31, 2013

FX-232AW

September 30, 2004

Until September 30, 2011

FX-232AWC

June 30, 2004

Until June 30, 2011

FX-232DOPA

April 30, 2006

Until April 30, 2013

FX3U-232ADP

September 30, 2013

Until September 30, 2020

September 30, 2013

Until September 30, 2020

FX2N-16LNK-M

September 30, 2012

Until September 30, 2019

FX2N-16CCL-M

September 30, 2012

Until September 30, 2019

FX-2PIF

June 30, 2008

Until June 30, 2015

March 31, 2013

FX-10P-E

June 30, 2008

Until June 30, 2015

FX-10P-SET0

June 30, 2008

Until June 30, 2015

December 31, 2012

Until December 31, 2019

FX-10DU(-E)

December 31, 2012

Until December 31, 2019

FX-20DU(-E)

June 30, 2008

Until June 30, 2015

FX-20DU-CAB0

June 30, 2008

Until June 30, 2015

FX-25DU

September 30, 2002

Until September 30, 2009

FX-30DU(-B)

September 30, 2002

Until September 30, 2009

FX-40DU(-B)

September 30, 2002

Until September 30, 2009

FX-40DU-TK(B)

September 30, 2002

Until September 30, 2009

FX-50DU-TK(S)

September 30, 2002

Until September 30, 2009

H
Programming
Communication

FX-20P(-E)-SET0

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

FX-PCS/WIN(-E)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

FX3U-485ADP

Inverter
Communication

FX2-40AW
FX2-40AP

Computer Link

June 30, 2002

Parallel Link

FX2C
FX0

B
N:N Network

The table below shows discontinued models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual.

I
Remote
Maintenance

Apx.A
Discontinued
models

Apx.-1

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Warranty

Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be
repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses
to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any
re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.

[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from
Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6)
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after
manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis
warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range]

1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the

usage state, usage methods and usage

environment, etc., which follow the conditions and
precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual,
user's manual and caution labels on the product.
2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be
charged for in the following cases.
a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or
handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software
design.
b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc.,
to the product by the user.
c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a
user's device, Failure that could have been
avoided if functions or structures, judged as
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
d) Failure that could have been avoided if
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.)
designated in the instruction manual had been
correctly serviced or replaced.
e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by
usage beyond the specified Life of contact
(cycles).
f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning,
wind and water damage.
g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by
scientific technology standards at time of shipment
from Mitsubishi.
h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of

production
1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary

loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not
be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss
in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third
person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or
not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or
technical documents are subject to change without prior
notice.

6. Product application
1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic
controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
application will not lead to a major accident even if any
problem or fault should occur in the programmable
logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the
device for any problem or fault.
2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been
designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public
could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power
companies, and applications in which a special quality
assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be
excluded from the programmable logic controller
applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property
that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
medical applications, incineration and fuel devices,
manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
amusement, and safety devices, shall also be
excluded from the programmable logic controller range
of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be
possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
requirements of the project, and providing that all
parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at the users discretion.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

Revised History

Revised History
Date

Revision

Description

7/2005

First Edition

2/2006

The status of the DR (DSR) signal is made checkable when RS2 (serial data
transfer 2) is in operation.
Parameters in A700 Series are added.
Clerical error is modified

11/2007

FX3UC(D,DSS) Series are added.

FX3U-232ADP-MB, FX3U-485ADP-MB are added.
Inverter E700 Series are added. (FX3U, FX3UC Series corresponding)
Discontinued models are added. (Appendix A)
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

11/2008

FX3G Series are added.

Inverter E700 Series option FR-E7TR are added.
Inverter D700 Series are added. (FX3G, FX3U, FX3UC Series corresponding)
Discontinued models are added. (Appendix A)
Clerical error is modified.

6/2009

FX-30P are added.

Caution on using CF card special adapter is added.
Explanation corrections for manufacture's serial number.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

11/2009

The baud rate of the RS instruction/RS2 instruction/inverter communication/

computer link of the FX3U and FX3UC Series corresponds to "38400bps".
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

8/2010

Inverter multi command (FNC275 IVMC) are added.

FX3UC(DS) Series are added.
Caution on using VRRD and VRSC command is added. (FX3U, FX3UC Series
corresponding)
GX Works2 are added.
Explanation corrections for manufacturer's serial number and lot number.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

7/2011

FX3G Series supports the IVMC instruction.

Cautions on setting up the N:N Network added.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

2/2012

FX3GC Series are added.

FX3U-16CCL-M is added to system configurations.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

5/2013

FX3S Series are added.

FX3U-ENET-ADP is added to system configurations.
Description of the programming tool is changed accompanied by change of the
programming tool from GX Developer to GX Works2.
Discontinued models are added.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

ii

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

iii

Date

Revision

9/2013

Revised History

Description

FX3G-485-BD-RJ is added to system configurations.

Discontinued models are added.
The addition and the change of other coverage.
Clerical error is modified.

FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

USER'S MANUAL
Data Communication Edition

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN

MODEL

FX-U-COMMU-E

MODEL CODE

09R715

JY997D16901L
(MEE)

Effective Sep. 2013

Specifications are subject to change without notice.